NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS

• Document Type: CREST
• Collection: General CIA Records
• Document Number (FOIA) /ESDN (CREST): CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
• Release Decision: RIPPUB
• Original Classification: C
• Document Page Count: 401
• Document Creation Date: November 11, 2016
• Document Release Date: July 22, 1998
• Sequence Number: 1
• Publication Date: July 1, 1959
• Content Type: REGULATION

NATIONAL
ao% 11. Tr" r.try 14. lr
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
WARNING
This document contains information affecting the national defense of
the United States, within the meaning of Title 18, Sections 793 and 794,
of the U. S. Code, as amended. Its transmission or revelation of its
contents to or receipt by an unauthorized person is prohibited by law.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
NATURE, PURPOSE, AND SCOPE
OF THE NIS PROGRAM
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence DOCUMENT NO.
NO CHANGE IN CLASS to.
Washington, D. C. LI DECLASSNIIED
CLASS. C1-1A1.1:::: TS S C
NEXT REVIEW
JOB NO,
BOX MO.
FOLDE% ItiOf
Approved For lee -0) Li4
AUTH: ffl 7c .
DATE: It 00_ REV1EWER: 4.ay
RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
.L1 1 .1-0 .11-1 A.
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
2430 E Street, N. W.
Washington 25, D. C.
July 1959
MEMORANDUM FOR: All Holders of NIS Standard Instructions
SUBJECT: NIS Standard Instructions
The July 1959 revisions of the NIS Standard Instructions, approved
by the NIS Committee, are attached. The items listed below are to be
inserted in the Standard Instructions, replacing corresponding material
which should be destroyed.
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
COMPONENT
Introduction (Nature, Purpose and
Scope)
Allocations
NIS Areas
Correlation Guide
Editorial Instructions
Chapter I
Chapter II
Chapter III
Chapter IV
Chapter V
Chapter VII
Chapter VIII
Ocean Areas
This material contains information affect-
ing the national defense of the United
States within the meaning of the espionage
laws, Title 18, USC, Secs. 793 and 794, the
transmission or revelation of which in any
manner to an unauthorized person is pro-
hibited by law.
PAGES AND/OR MAPS
Pages 1 through 3.
Pages 1 through 10.
Pages 1 through 4 and NIS
Areas Index map.
Pages 1, 2, and 7 through
10.
Pages 3, 4, 7 and 8.
Cover, pages 1 through 6.
Pages 1 through 4 and 7
through 10.
Pages 1, 2, and 11 through
16.
Pages 3, 4, 19 and 20.
Cover, pages 1 through 12.
Cover, pages 1 through 11.
Pages 5 and 6.
Cover, pages 1 through 9,
and Ocean Areas Index
map.
25X1A9a
Chairman, NIS Committee
Regraded UNCLASSIFIED when
separated from classified
enclosures.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/210:Al-RD..179,-91055A000300030001-4
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
2430 E Street, N. W.
Washington 25, D. C.
JANUARY 1962
MEMORANDUM FOR: All Holders of NIS Standard Instructions
SUBJECT: NIS Standard Instructions
The January 1962 revisions of the NIS Standard Instructions, ap-
proved by the NIS Committee, are attached. The items listed below are
to be inserted in the Standard Instructions, replacing corresponding
material which should be destroyed.
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
COMPONENT
Allocations
NIS Areas and Index Map
Editorial Instructions
Chapter I
Chapter II
Chapter III
Chapter IV
Chapter VIII
Chapter IX
Supplement I
Key personalities
Ocean Areas
NIS Memos (Appendix A to NIS
Memo No. 4)
This material contains information affect-
ing the national defense of the United
States within the meaning of the espionage
laws, Title 18, USC, Secs. 793 and 794, the
transmission or revelation of which in any
manner to an unauthorized person is pro-
hibited by law.
PAGES
Pages 1 through 10.
Pages 1 through 5.
Pages 1 through 4, and
sample pages 1 and 2.
Pages
Pages
Pages
Pages
Pages
Cover,
Pages
Pages
Pages
1 through 12.
1 through 4.
1 through 15.
1, 2, 21, and 22.
1, 2, 5, and 6.
Pages 1 through 5.
1 through 8.
1 through 3.
1 through 9.
Pages 1 and 2.
25X1A9a
Chairman, NIS Committee
Regraded UNCLASSIFIED when
separated from classified
enclosures.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959
Nature, Purpose, and Scope of the NIS Program
Authority for the NIS Program
The National Intelligence Survey (NIS) Program
was established pursuant to National Security Council
Intelligence Directive No. 3. This directive provides
that:
An outline of all basic intelligence required by the
Government shall be maintained by the Central Intelli-
gence Agency (CIA) in collaboration with the appro-
priate agencies.
This outline shall be broken down into chapters,
sections, and subsections which shall be allocated as
production and maintenance responsibilities to CIA
and those agencies of the Government which are best
qualified by reason of mission, production capability,
and primary interest to assume the production and
maintenance responsibility.
This basic intelligence shall be compiled and con-
tinuously maintained in the National Intelligence
Survey to cover foreign countries, areas, or broad
special subjects as required in the interest of national
security.
The NIS shall be disseminated in such form as may
be determined by the Director of Central Intelligence
(DCI) and the agencies concerned.
The DCI shall be responsible for coordinating pro-
duction and maintenance and for accomplishing the
review, publication, and dissemination of the NIS and
shall make such requests of the agencies as are neces-
sary for proper development and maintenance of the
NIS.
Departments or agencies to be called on for con-
tributions to this undertaking may include agencies
other than those represented permanently on the
U.S. Intelligence Board (USIB).
Basic Concepts of the NIS Program
The NIS is a comprehensive digest of the basic
intelligence required for the U.S. Government. The
NIS is designed to servo fully the basic intelligence
requirements of the Department of Defense in strategic
and high level operational planning, and the Depart-
ment of State in formulating and executing U.S. foreign
policy. The NIS also serves lower planning and opera-
tional levels in the Armed Forces and the Department
of State, and in addition all other Government agencies
which require basic intelligence in the accomplishment
of their missions.
In general, the intelligence contained in the NIS is
concerned with the relatively permanent features and
fundamental characteristics of a country, area, ocean
basin, or broad special subject, and covers such fields
as the geographical, transportation, sociological, polit-
ical, economic, scientific, and military aspects of the
country or area or the fundamental aspects of the
broad special subject.
The NIS Program has developed in two phases:
first, the initial production of NIS on countries or areas
in accordance with Joint Chiefs of Staff priorities and
Intelligence Agency capabilities; and second, the con-
tinuous maintenance of published NIS. The two
phases proceed concurrently.
The objective of the first phase has been to produce
integrated basic intelligence on all countries and areas
within the limits of available information.
The objective of the second phase is to maintain the
continuing validity of the basic intelligence in pub-
lished NIS. Worldwide collection of information for
the NIS is a continuing process. Sections are revised
and issued under the NIS maintenance program when
sufficient information is available to improve their
adequacy as follows: I) presenting fundamentally
changed situations in an area; 2) filling gaps in intelli-
gence sufficient to require new evaluations; or 3) incor-
porating new intelligence requirements which reflect
policy, planning, or high level operational needs. It is
the responsibility of agencies having primary interest
to place each NIS unit actively on a maintenance basis
as soon as the unit has been initially produced and to
revise the unit for publication as required by these
NIS maintenance criteria.
Production for the NIS Program requires an over-all
collection effort covering all foreign countries and 'areas
of the world simultaneously. The intelligence data
resulting from this collection and continuous processing
necessarily are more comprehensive and detailed than
those appearing in the printed NIS and constitute a
reservoir of available basic intelligence to serve the
interest of national security.
Each published NIS unit is an integral component
in the National Intelligence Survey of comprehen-
sive basic intelligence on the relevant area, but may
be published and disseminated separately for flexibility
in production, use, and maintenance.
NIS Standard Instructions
The NIS Standard Instructions are issued in imple-
mentation of National Security Council Intelligence
Directive No. 3. They contain a listing of NIS Areas,
outlines of basic intelligence requirements, allocations
of responsibility for production, and instructions for
the preparation of this intelligence. The Standard
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
Instructions were prepared by a joint committee of
representatives of the Director of Central Intelligence
and the Chiefs of Intelligence Agencies of the Depart-
ments of State, the Army, the Navy, and the Air
Force; were concurred in by the Intelligence Advisory
Committee; and were approved by the National Se-
curity Council. Changes in outline requirements and
other modifications are made when authorized and
approved by the permanent NIS Committee.
The outlines and outline guides are so drafted as to
cover all the basic intelligence aspects of the most com-
plex foreign country or area. However, the appropriate
treatment of any topic included in the outlines and
outline guides is determined by the sense in which and
the extent to which that topic applies to the particular
country or area under consideration. The outlines
and outline guides are thus flexibly adaptable to the
country or area or topic concerned.
The Standard Instructions prescribe the basic pro-
cedures to be followed in producing and maintaining
all NIS. However, when cogent reasons exist, the
instructions may be modified or supplemented to permit
appropriate treatment of any topic.
Content of the NIS
A standard NIS is divided into chapters, each of
which treats a major functional aspect of the country
or area under consideration. These chapters are
divided into sections, each of which treats a major sub--
division of the field covered by the chapter. The
standard NIS chapters are as follows:
Chapter I
Chapter II
Chapter III
Chapter IV
Chapter V
Chapter VI
Chapter VII
Chapter VIII
Chapter IX
Brief
Military Geography
Transportation and Telecommunications
Sociological
Political
Economic
Scientific
Armed Forces
Map and Chart Appraisal
The section is the NIS basic unit of production and
subsequent maintenance. Each section is individually
classified, indicates the Intelligence Agency primarily
responsible for the preparation of the section, and
carries the date on which the responsible agency
approved the material for NIS publication.
When appropriate, chapter discussion is amplified
by more detailed treatment in supplements. There
are six supplements:
Supplement I
Supplement II
Supplement III
Supplement IV
Supplement V
Supplement VI
PAGE 2
Ports and Naval Facilities
Coasts and Landing Beaches
Telecommunications
Urban Areas
Petroleum
Communism
The NIS on Ocean Areas, entitled Marine Climate
and Oceanography, divides the world's four ocean
basins into Parts, which arc units of production and
maintenance. Ocean basins are designated as follows:
NIS 104 ...... Atlantic Basin 11 Parts
NIS 105 Pacific Basin 12 Parts
NIS 106 Indian Basin 4 Parts
NIS 107 &retie Basin 1 Part
Basic intelligence on International Communism is
covered in the NIS in two units. One unit, SUPPLE-
MENT VI (Communism), provides intelligence on the
Communist apparatus and activities in individual
countries. The second unit appears as NIS 108 (Inter-
national Communism) and gives integrated coverage
on world-wide Communist front organizations.
The standard NIS includes a gazetteer of geographic
names approved by the United States Board on Geo-
graphic Names. NIS Gazetteers are issued as sepa-
rate volumes.
A consolidated biographical reference work, Key
Personalities, is prepared for each standard NIS.
An NIS Annual is prepared to provide limited
maintenance of CHAPTER I between formal revisions of
that Chapter.
The scope of each NIS unit is set forth in detail
under the outline guides in this volume. The following
descriptions apply to CHAPTERS II?IX (specifications
for CHAPTER I and the NIS Annual are given in the
Standard Instructions for that chapter):
a) The first section of most chapters is entitled
Introduction. This section is an integrated over-view
of the subject treated in the chapter. It also presents
general aspects which can be more appropriately so
treated than elsewhere in the chapter.
b) The first subsection of most sections is entitled
General. This subsection provides a proper approach
to the treatment of material contained in the remainder
of the section.
c) The last subsection of most sections is uni-
formly entitled Comments on Principal Sources. This
subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source material
used in preparing the section and thereby inform the user
of the general credibility to be accorded the intelligence
contained in the section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about winch infor-
mation is deficient or unavailable and thereby provide
general guidance for collection effort. In this connection,
only the principal sources actually used are indicated.
Separate entities within a larger NIS area, such as
the Vatican within NIS 17 (Italy), may be separately
produced as annexes to the Introduction Section of the
pertinent chapters on the larger area. Scheduling and
production of such -annexes require the prior review
and approval of the NIS Committee.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 NATURE, PURPOSE, AND SCOPE mIliataimamown
Summary of agency functions
1. GENERAL
Where one agency is responsible for a section of a
chapter or a subsection of a section which is being co-
ordinated by another agency, working level liaison is
maintained. All communications of a policy or require-
ments nature to the agency preparing the section or
subsection are passed through intelligence command
channels.
In all instances working level coordination among
agencies concerned includes the following:
Exchange, where applicable, of drafts of completed draft
sections in order to resolve inconsistencies among sec-
tions and detect gaps in over-all coverage.
Informal coordination in compiling specific, subsections
which are assigned as the responsibility of one agency
but impinge upon the field of interest of another.
2. NIS COMMITTEE
The NIS Committee consists of representatives of
the Director of Central Intelligence and the Chiefs of
the Intelligence Agencies of the Departments of State,
the Army, the Navy, and the Air Force. The repre-
sentative of the Director of Central Intelligence is the
chairman of the Committee. It may include an advi-
sory member from the Joint Staff who is familiar with
the basic intelligence requirements of the Joint Chiefs
of Staff (JCS), and who shall keep the JCS informed of
the progress of the NIS Program, and advise the NIS
Committee of changes in JCS requirements.
The NIS Committee performs the following func-
tions:
Considers and approves policies and plans for the
NIS Program.
Determines the scope and treatment of each NIS
to be produced.
Allocates responsibility for production and main-
tenance of NIS in accordance with the mission, pro-
duction capability, and primary interest of the agencies
concerned.
Establishes NIS production and maintenance sched-
ules based upon JCS priorities and agency capabilities.
Promulgates procedures and instructions for the
preparation, review, editing, and submission of NIS
contributions.
Recommends to CIA measures necessary for the
coordination of the NIS Program.
3. CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
The Central Intelligence Agency performs the follow-
ing functions:
Furnishes the chairman, vice chairman, and secre-
tariat of the NIS Committee.
Provides over-all coordination of the NIS Program.
Produces and maintains the NIS units which have
been allocated by the NIS Committee as production
responsibilities.
Furnishes certain common services which can best
be done centrally.
Provides advisory substantive review and over-all
editorial guidance; processes and publishes the NIS..
Disseminates NIS in accordance with Intellig3nce
Agency agreements.
4. OTHER USIB AGENCIES
Other USIB Agencies (State, Army, Navy, and Air
Force) perform the following functions:
Provide members and alternate members of the NIS
Committee. Each member represents, and speaks for,
the Chief of the Intelligence Agency of the department
from which he is accredited.
Produce and maintain the NIS units which have
been allocated by the NIS Committee as production
responsibilities.
Implement collection efforts required for NIS pro-
duction and maintenance.
5. NON-USIB AGENCIES
Contributing non-USIB Agencies perform the follow-
ing functions:
Produce and maintain portions of NIS when ex-
plicitly assigned that responsibility by the NIS Com-
mittee or by an Intelligence Agency with the approval
of that committee.
Furnish Intelligence Agencies with material for inte-
gration into NIS by those agencies.
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
ALLOCATIONS OF RESPONSIBILITY FOR PRODUCTION
AND MAINTENANCE OF THE NIS
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
OrITTT7TI-Vr,wiTit.1)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 miileumemmum
Allocations of Responsibility for Production and Maintenance
of the NIS
Neither the following allocations nor any interpretation thereof
shall negate the basic principle that each department is respon-
sible for the production of that intelligence which is responsive to its
departmental mission.
CHAPTER it-BRIEF
Section 10 Chronology
11?Significance of the Area
12?Military Geography
13?Transportation and Telecommunications
14?Sociological
15?Political
16?Economic
17?Scientific
18?Armed Forces
19?Map and Chart Appraisal
Leading Personalities
CHAPTER II-MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
Section 20?Introduction
21?Military Geographic Regions
22?Coasts and Landing Beaches
23?Weather and Climate
24?Topography
25?Urban Areas
CHAPTER III-TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 30?Introduction
31?Railway
32?Highway
33?Inland Waterway
35?Ports and Naval Facilities
36?Merchant Marine
37?Civil Air
38?Telecommunications
CHAPTER IV-SOCIOLOGICAL
Section 40?Introduction
41?Population
42?Characteristics of the People
43?Religion, Education, and Public Information
44?Manpower
CIA?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
CIA
CIA (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
- Army (with joint assistance)
CIA
CIA
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
ARMY-CHAPTER COORDINATOR
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Navy (with Army assistance)
Air Force (with joint assistance)
Army
Army (with joint assistance)
ARMY-CHAPTER COORDINATOR
Army (with joint assistance)
Army
Army
Army
Joint Army-Navy
Navy
Air Force (with Navy participation)
Army
CIA?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with the assistance of the Bureau of
Census, Department of Commerce)
CIA
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Health, Education, and Welfare)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Labor for areas outside the Sino-Soviet
Bloc)
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
SFIWWWWWWRIPIP NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
CHAPTER IV?SOCIOLOGICAL (Continued)
45?Health and Sanitation
46?Welfare
CHAPTER V?POLITICAL
Section 50?Introduction
51?The Constitutional System
52?Structure of the Government
53?Political Dynamics
54?Public Order and Safety
55?National Policies
56?Intelligence and Security
57?Subversion
58--Propaganda
59?Biographies of Key Personalities (production
continued, see also KP)
CHAPTER VI?ECONOMIC
Section 60--Introduction
61?Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
PAGE 2
62?Fuels and Power
D. Electric Power
63?Minerals and Metals
F. Construction materials
64--Manufacturing and Construction
A. General
B. Industrial machinery and equipment
C. Vehicles
D. Aircraft production
E. Shipbuilding
F. Explosives (industrial and military)
G. Arms and ammunition
H. Other military equipment and supplies
Telecommunications equipment
J. Chemical industries
K. Agricultural processing industries
L. Fibers, fabrics, and rubber
dis-
CIA (with the assistance of the Public Health
Service, Department of Agriculture, and
Army)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Health, Education, and Welfare for
areas outside the Sino-Soviet Bloc)
CIA?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
CIA
C TA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA--CHAPTER COORDINATOR
CIA
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Agriculture and the Department of the
Interior for areas outside the Sino-Sovict
Bloc)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of the Interior for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
Army
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of the Interior for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
Army
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Commerce for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Commerce for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
Army
Air Force (with Navy participation
Navy
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Commerce for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Commerce for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Commerce for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 ALLOCATIONS
CHAPTER VI?Ecot\romic (Continued.)
M. Construction industries
N. Other industries
0. Comments on principal sources
65?Trade and Finance
CHAPTER VII?SCIENTIFIC
Section 70?Introduction
71?Electronics
72?Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
73?Atomic Energy
74?Biological Warfare
75?Chemical Warfare
76?Physical Sciences, Mathematics, and Medicine
CHAPTER VIII?ARMED FORCES
Section 80?Introduction
81?Ground Forces
82?Naval Forces
83?Air Forces
CHAPTER IX?MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
Section 90
Topographic maps and terrain models
Specialized physical maps
Terrain-evaluation maps
Section 91
Aeronautical and air-information charts
Air-target charts
Air-transport maps
Climatic maps
Section 92
Nautical charts
Port maps and plans
Oceanographic charts
Section 93
Railroad maps
Road maps
Inland-waterway maps and charts
Telecommunication maps
Urban-area maps and plans
Section 94
Sociological maps
Political maps
Economic maps
Postal maps
General reference maps and atlases
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Commerce for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Commerce for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with the assistance of the Department
of Commerce for areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc)
CIA?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
CIA (with joint assistance). Coordinated
by the SIC.
Navy (with joint assistance). Coordinated
by the SIC.
Air Force (with joint assistance). Coordi-
nated by the SIC.
CIA (with joint assistance). Coordinated
by the JAEIC.
Army (with joint assistance). Coordinated
by the SIC.
Army (with joint assistance). Coordinated
by the SIC.
CIA (with joint assistance). Coordinated
by the SIC.
ARMY?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
Army (with joint assistance)
Army
Navy
Air Force (with Navy participation)
CIA?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
Army
Air Force
Navy
Army
CIA
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
SUPPLEMENT I--PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES JOINT ARMY-NAVY
SUPPLEMENT II-COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES NAVY (WITH ARMY ASSISTANCE)
SUPPLEMENT II [?TELECOMMUNICATIONS (production discontinued,
see also Section 38)
SUPPLEMENT IV-URBAN AREAS ARMY
SUPPLEMENT V--PETROLEUM (production discontinued, see also
Section 620)
SUPPLEMENT VI-COMMUNISM (production discontinued, see also
Section 57 and NIS 108)
KEY PERSONALITIES
CIA (with joint assistance for selected major
countries)
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY NAVY
INTERNATIONAL COMMUNISM
PAGE 4
Formerly State; new allocation under con-
sideration.
sor.1611"11.11,1"1".
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 ALLOCATIONS
Contributor Statements?NIS Program
Each published N IS contains a contributor statement, approved by the N IS Committee, showing
the principal agency or agencies contributing to and responsible for the preparation of that NIS. The
approved contributor statements are listed below.
CHAPTER I?BRIEF
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS under
the general direction of the NIS Committee in
accordance with allocations of responsibility in
the NIS Standard Instructions. Section co-
ordinators are noted at the top of each page.
CHAPTER II?MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
Section 20?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers, with contributions on sea approaches
from the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office, and on
weather, climate, and air approaches from the
Air Weather Service, USAF.
Section 21?Military Geographic Regions
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers, with contributions on coasts and
landing beaches from the Office of Naval
Intelligence, and on weather and climate from
the Air Weather Service, USAF.
Section 22?Coasts and Landing Beaches
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence, with contributions
on coastal oceanography from the U.S. Navy
Hydrographic Office, and on routes of trans-
portation from the Office of the Chief of Trans-
portation, Department of the Army. The ma-
terial on landing beaches was prepared under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers.
Section 23?Weather and Climate
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff, Intelligence, USAF, by the Air Weather
Service, with contributions on clothing and
temporary shelter from the Office of the Quar-
termaster General, Department of the Army,
and on naval and amphibious operations from
the Naval Weather Service Division.
Section 24?Topography
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers.
Section 25?Urban Areas
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers, with the assistance of the Office of
the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF,
the Offices of the Chief of Ordnance, Quarter-
master General, Chief Signal Officer, and Sur-
geon General, Department of the Army, and
the Bureau of the Census, Department of
Commerce.
CHAPTER III?TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNI-
CATIONS
Section 30?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army,
with contributions from the Office of Naval
Intelligence, the Office of the Assistant Chief of
Staff, Intelligence, USAF, and from the Offices
of the Chief of Transportation and the Chief
Signal Officer, Department of the Army.
Section 31?Railway
This Section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Transportation, with contributions on construc-
tion, maintenance, engineering structures, and
loading and clearance diagrams from the Office
of the Chief of Engineers.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/2
"MiNve
NIS STANDARD
Section 32?Highway
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Transportation, with contributions on construc-
tion, maintenance, and engineering structures
from the Office of the Chief of Engineers.
Section 33?Inland Waterway
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief
of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Offiee of the Chief of
Transportation, with contributions on construc-
tion and maintenance from the Office of the
Chief of Engineers.
Section 35?Ports and Naval Facilities
As appropriate:
a) This Section was prepared for the NTS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence.
b) This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Transportation. Material on naval facilities
and shipyards was prepared by the Office of
Naval Intelligence.
Section 36?Merchant Marine
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence.
Section 37?Civil Air
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, with Navy participation.
Section 38?Telecommunications
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief
Signal Officer.
CHAPTER IV--SOCIOLOGICAL
Section 40?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central :Intelligence Agency.
Section 41?Population
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency by the Bureau of Census, Depart-
ment of Commerce.
PAGE 6
1: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
Section 42 Characteristics of the People
This Section was prepared for the NTS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 43?Religion, Education, and Public Informa-
tion
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency by the Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare.
Section 44?Manpower (outside Sino-Soviet Bloc
Areas)
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central
Intelli-
gency Agency by the Department of Labor.
Section 44?Manpower (Sino-Soviet Bloc Areas)
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 45?Health and Sanitation
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency with the assistance
of the Public Health Service, the Department
of Agriculture, and the Medical Information
and Intelligence Agency, Department of the
Army.
Section 46?Welfare (outside Sino-Soviet Bloc Areas)
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency by the Department of Health,
Education, and Welfare.
Section 46?Welfare (Sino-Soviet Bloc Areas)
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
CHAPTER V?POLITICAL
Section 50?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 51?The Constitutional System
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 52?Structure of the Government
This Section was prepared for
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 53?Political Dynamics
This Section was prepared for
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 54?Public Order and Safety
This Section was prepared for
Central Intelligence Agency.
the NIS by the
the NIS by the
the NIS by the
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 ALLOCATIONS 01.1.111.B.11111M
Section 55?National Policies
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 56?Intelligence and Security
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 57?Subversion
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 58?Propaganda
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
CHAPTER VI-ECONOMIC (outside Sino-Soviet Bloc
Areas)
For Consolidated Chapter:
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Material on agriculture and
forestry was contributed by the Department of
Agriculture; material on fisheries, fuels, min-
erals, and metals by the Department of the
Interior; material on electric power and con-
struction materials by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers, Department of the Army; material
on aircraft by the Office of the Assistant Chief
of Staff, Intelligence, USAF, with Navy partici-
pation; material on shipbuilding by the Office of
Naval Intelligence; material on other military
end items, telecommunications equipment, and
motor vehicles by the Office of the Chief of
Ordnance, Office of the Chief Signal Officer,
and Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for
Intelligence, Headquarters, Department of the
Army; and the balance by the Central Intelli-
gence Agency.
Section 60?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section el?Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency by the Department of Agriculture
and the Fish and Wildlife Service, Department
of the Interior.
Section 62?Fuels and Power
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 62A, 62B, 62C, 62E, Department of the
Interior; 62D, Office of the Chief of Engineers,
Department of the Army.
Section 63?Minerals and Metals
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 63A, 63B, 63C, 63D, 63E, 63G, Depart-
ment of the Interior; 63F, Office of the Chief of
Engineers, Department of the Army.
Section 64?Manufacturing and Construction
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 64A, 64B, 64J, 64K, 64L, 64M, 64N, 640,
Department of Commerce; 64C, 64F, 64G,
64H, 641, Office of the Chief of Ordnance, Office
of the Chief Signal Officer, and Office of the
Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army; 64D, Office
of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence,
USAF, with Navy participation; 64E, Office of
Naval Intelligence.
Section 65?Trade and Finance
This Section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Central Intelligence
Agency by the Department of Commerce.
CHAPTER VI-ECONOMIC (Sino-Soviet Bloc Areas)
For Consolidated Chapter:
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Material on electric power and
construction materials was contributed by the
Office of the Chief of Engineers, Department of
the Army; material on aircraft by the Office of
the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF,
with Navy participation; material on shipbuild-
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JAN UARY 1962
ing by the Office of Naval Intelligence; material
on other military end items, telecommunications
equipment, and motor vehicles, by the Office
of the Chief of Ordnance, Office of the Chief
Signal Officer, and Office of the Assistant Chief
of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army; and the balance by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 60?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 61?Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 62?Fuels and Power
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 62A, 62B, 62C, 62E, Central Intelligence
Agency; 62D, Office of the Chief of Engineers,
Department of the Army.
Section 63?Minerals and Metals
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 63A, 63B, 63C, 63D, 63E, 63G, Central
Intelligence Agency; 63F, Office of the Chief of
Engineers, Department of the Army.
Section 64?Manufacturing and Construction
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 64A, 64B, 64J, 64K, 64L, 64M, 64N,
640, Central Intelligence Agency; 64C, 64F,
64G, 64H, 641, Office of the Chief of Ordnance,
Office of the Chief Signal Officer, and Office of
the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence,
Headquarters, Department of the Army; 64D,
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, with Navy participation; 64E,
Office of Naval Intelligence.
Section 65?Trade and Finance
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
PAGE 8
CHAPTER VII?SCIENTIFIC
Section 70?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency, with assistance or
contributions from the Office of the Assistant
Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters,
Department of the Army; the Office of Naval
Intelligence; and the Office of the Assistant
Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF. It was
coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence Com-
mittee.
Section 71?Electronics
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence, with contributions
from the Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff
for Intelligence, Headquarters, Department of
the Army, and the Office of the Assistant Chief
of Staff, Intelligence, USAF, and with assistance
from the Central Intelligence Agency. It was
coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence Com-
mittee.
Section 72?Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, with contributions from the Office
of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence,
Headquarters, Department of the Army, and
the Office of Naval Intelligence, and with
assistance from the Central Intelligence Agency.
It was coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence
Committee.
Section 73?Atomic Energy
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency, with assistance or
contributions from the Office of the Assistant
Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters,
Department of the Army; the Office of Naval
Intelligence; the Office of the Assistant Chief
of Staff, Intelligence, USAF; and the Atomic
Energy Commission. It was coordinated by
the Joint Atomic Energy Intelligence Com-
mittee.
Section 74?Biological Warfare
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief
of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief
Chemical Officer, with assistance from [other
agencies to be indicated in each instance]. It
was coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence
Committee.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 ALLOCATIONS
Section 75?Chemical Warfare
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief
of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief
Chemical Officer, with assistance from [other
agencies to be indicated in each instance]. It
was coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence
Committee.
Section 76?Physical Sciences, Mathematics, and
Medicine
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency, with assistance or
contributions from ? . . . (assisting or contrib-
uting agencies to be indicated in each instance).
It was coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence
Committee.
CHAPTER VIII?ARMED FORCES
For Consolidated Chapter:
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army,
with contributions from the Office of Naval
Intelligence, the Office of the Assistant Chief of
Staff, Intelligence, USAF, and the Army Tech-
nical Services.
Section 80?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army,
with contributions from the Office of Naval
Intelligence and the Office of the Assistant
Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF.
Section 81?Ground Forces
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army,
with contributions from the Office of Naval
Intelligence and the Army Technical Services.
Section 82?Naval Forces
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence.
Section 83?Air Forces
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, with Navy participation.
CHAPTER IX-MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
Section 90?This Section was prepared for the NIS
under the general supervision of the Assistant
Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters,
Department of the Army, by the Office of the
Chief of Engineers. It was coordinated with
other sections of Chapter IX by the Central
Intelligence Agency.
Section 91?This Section was prepared for the NIS
under the general supervision of the Assistant
Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF, by the Aero-
nautical Chart and Information Center and
the Air Weather Service. It was coordinated
with other sections of Chapter IX by the Cen-
tral Intelligence Agency.
Section 92?This Section was prepared for the NIS
under the general supervision of the Director
of Naval Intelligence by the U.S. Navy Hydro-
graphic Office. It was coordinated with other
sections of Chapter IX by the Central Intelli-
gence Agency.
Section 93?This Section was prepared for the NIS
under the general supervision of the Assistant
Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters,
Department of the Army, by the Offices of the
Chief of Engineers and the Chief Signal Officer.
It was coordinated with other sections of
Chapter IX by the Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 94?This Section was prepared for the NIS
by the Central Intelligence Agency.
SUPPLEMENT I?PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
As appropriate:
a) For Sections 1 through 6?This Section was pre-
pared for the NIS by the Office of Naval Intelli-
gence.
b) Section 1?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Assist-
ant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of the Chief of Transportation. Material
on naval facilities was prepared by the Office of
Naval Intelligence.
Section 2?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
(Ace of the Chief of Transportation.
Section 3?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of the Chief of Transportation.
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
Section 4?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of the Chief of Transportation.
Section 5?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of Naval Intelligence. It was coordinated
by the Office of the Chief of Transportation.
Section 6?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of Naval Intelligence. It was coordinated
by the Office of the Chief of Transportation.
SUPPLEMENT II--COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
For each Section:
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Director of Naval
Intelligence. The material on landing beaches
was prepared for the Assistant Chief of Staff for
Intelligence, Headquarters, Department of the
Army, by the Office of the Chief of Engineers,
with contributions on routes of transportation
from the Office of the Chief of Transportation,
and on surf and tidal data from the U.S. Navy
Hydrographic Office. Maps and material on
coastal description were prepared by the Office
of Naval Intelligence.
PAGE 10
KEY PERSONALITIES
Selected major countries:
This publication was prepared for the NTS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Political, sociological, economic,
and scientific biographies, as well as the preface
and institutional directory, were contributed by
the Central Intelligence Agency; army biog-
raphies by the Office of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army; naval biographies by the
Office of Naval Intelligence; and air force biog-
raphies by the Office of the Assistant Chief of
Staff, Intelligence, USAF.
Other:
This publication was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Political, sociological, economic,
and scientific biographies, as well as the preface
and the institutional directory, were contributed
by the Central Intelligence Agency. (And as
appropriate): Biographies of military leaders
were prepared by the Central Intelligence
Agency in coordination with the military serv-
ices.
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
For each part (or Section) of NIS on Ocean Areas:
This Part [or Section] was prepared for the NIS
under the general supervision of the Director of
Naval Intelligence and (for Section 1) the
Director of the Naval Weather Service Divi-
sion by the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959
Allocations of Responsibility for Production and Maintenance
of the NIS
Neither the following allocations nor any interpretation thereof
shall negate the basic principle that each department is respon-
sible for the production of that intelligence which is responsive to its
departmental mission.
CHAPTER I?BRIEF
Section 10?Chronology
11?Significance of the Area
12?Military Geography
13?Transportation and Telecommunications
14?Sociological
15-1Political
16?Economic (Outside Sino-Soviet Bloc Areas)
16?Economic (Sino-Soviet Bloc Areas)
17?Scientific
18?Armed Forces
19?Map and Chart Appraisal
Leading Personalities
CHAPTER II?MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
Section 20?Introduction
21?Military Geographic Regions
22?Coasts and Landing Beaches
23?Weather and Climate
24?Topography
25?Urban Areas
CHAPTER III?TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 30?Introduction
31?Railway
32?Highway
33?Inland Waterway
34?Petroleum Pipeline (treated in Subsection 62, C and
Supplement V)
35?Ports and Naval Facilities
36?Merchant Marine
37?Civil Air
38?Telecommunications
CHAPTER IV?SOCIOLOGICAL
Section 40?Introduction
41?Population
42?Characteristics of the People
43?Religion, Education, and Public Information
44?Manpower
45?Health and Sanitation
46?Welfare
CIA?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
State (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
State (with CIA assistance)
State (with CIA assistance)
State (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
CIA (with joint assistance)
State (with joint assistance)
ARMY?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Navy (with Army assistance)
Air Force (with joint assistance)
Army
Army (with joint assistance)
ARMY?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
Army (with joint assistance)
Army
Army
Army
Joint Army-Navy
Navy
Air Force (with Navy participation)
Army
STATE?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
State
State (with Army assistance)
State
State
State
CIA (with Army assistance)
State
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
CHAPTER V-POLITICAL
Section 50?Introduction
51?The Constitutional System
52?Structure of the Government
53?Political Dynamics
54?Public Order and Safety
55?National Policies
56?Intelligence and Security
57?Subversion
58?Propaganda
59?Biographies of Key Personalities
CHAPTER VI-ECONOMIC (OUTSIDE SINO-SOVIET BLOC AREAS)
Section 60?Introduction
61?Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
62?Fuels and Power
I). Electric Power
63?Minerals and Metals
F. Construction materials
64?Manufacturing and Construction
A. General
B. Industrial machinery and equipment
C. Vehicles
I). Aircraft production
E. Shipbuilding
F. Explosives (industrial and military)
G. Arms and ammunition (including explosive de-
vices), fire-control equipment, and bomb
sights
H. Other military equipment and supplies
1. Telecommunications equipment
J. Chemical industries
K. Agricultural processing industries
L. Fibers, fabrics, and rubber
M. Construction industries
N. Other industries
0. Comments on principal sources
65?Trade and Finance
CHAPTER VI?EcoNomic (SINO-SOVIET BLOC AREAS)
Section 60?Introduction
61?Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
62?Fuels and Power
1). Electric Power
63?Minerals and Metals
F. Construction materials
PAGE 2
STATE-CHAPTER COORDINATOR
State
State
State
State
State
State
CIA
State
State
State
STATE--CHAPTER COORDINATOR
State (with joint assistance)
State (with the assistance of the Department
of Agriculture and the Fish and Wildlife
Service, Department of the Interior)
State (with assistance of the Department of
the Interior)
Army
State (with the assistance of the Department
of the Interior)
Army
State (with joint assistance)
State
State (primary responsibility)
Army
Air Force (with Navy participation)
Navy
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
State
State
State
State
State
State (with joint assistance)
State
CIA?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
CIA
CIA
CIA
Army
CIA
Army
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 ALLOCATIONS eliglimummo
CHAPTER VI?ECONOMIC (SINO-SOVIET BLOC AREAS) (Continued)
64?Manufacturing and Construction
A. General
B. Industrial machinery and equipment
C. Vehicles
D. Aircraft production
E. Shipbuilding
F. Explosives (industrial and military)
G. Arms and ammunition (including explosive de-
vices), fire-control equipment, and bomb
sights
H. Other military equipment and supplies
I. Telecommunications equipment
J. Chemical industries
K. Agricultural processing industries
L. Fibers, fabrics, and rubber
M. Construction industries
N. Other industries
0. Comments on principal sources
65?Trade and Finance
CHAPTER VII SCIENTIFIC
Section 70?Introduction
71?Electronics
72?Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
73?Atomic Energy
74?Biological Warfare
75?Chemical Warfare
76?Physical Sciences, Mathematics, and Medicine
CIIAPTER VIII?ARMED FORCES
Section 80?Introduction
81?Ground Forces
82?Naval Forces
83?Air Forces
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA
CIA
Army
Air Force (with Navy participation)
Navy
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
Army (with joint assistance)
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA
CIA?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
CIA (with contributions or assistance of
State, Army, Navy, and Air Force). Coor-
dinated by the SIC.
Navy (with contributions from Army and
Air Force, and CIA assistance). Coordi-
nated by the SIC.
Air Force (with contributions from Army and
Navy, and CIA assistance). Coordinated
by the SIC.
CIA (with contributions or assistance of State,
Army, Navy, Air Force, and the Atomic
Energy Commission). Coordinated by the
JAEIC.
Army (with joint assistance).
by the SIC.
Army (with joint assistance).
by the SIC.
CIA (with joint assistance).
by the SIC.
ARMY?CHAPTER COORDINATOR
Coordinated
Coordinated
Coordinated
Army (with joint assistance)
Army
Navy
Air Force (with Navy participation)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
mempunominam NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
CHAPTER IX-MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
Section 90?General
91?Selected Maps, Charts, and Plans
A. General
B. Physical maps, navigation charts, and maps
and plans of urban areas
C. Transportation and communications maps and
charts
D. Sociological, political, and economic maps
E. Special armed forces maps and charts
F. Terrain models
92?Indexes of mapping data and coverage
SUPPLEMENT I---PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
SUPPLEMENT TI-COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
SUPPLEMENT III-TELECOMMUNICATIONS
SUPPLEMENT IV-URBAN AREAS
SUPPLEMENT V-PETROLEUM
SUPPLEMENT V.I?Commumsm
KEY PERSONALITIES
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
INTERNATIONAL COMMUNISM
PAGE 4
CIA-CHAPTER COORDINATOR
CIA, Army, Navy, Air Force
CIA (with joint assistance)
CIA
Army, Navy, Air Force
CIA, Army, Navy, Air Force
CIA
Army, Navy, Air Force
Army, Navy
CIA (as coordinating staff for material re-
ceived from Army, Navy, and Air Force)
JOINT ARMY-NAVY
NAVY (WITH ARMY ASSISTANCE)
ARMY
ARMY
SINO-SOVIET BLOC AREAS: CIA
OUTSIDE SINO-SOVIET BLOC AREAS: STATE
(WITH ASSISTANCE OF THE DEPARTMENT
OF THE INTERIOR)
STATE
JOINT CIA-STATE-ARMY-NAVY-AIR FORCE
NAVY
STATE
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 ALLOCATIONS miiilmemimmor
Contributor Statements?NIS Program
Each published NIS contains a contributor statement, approved by the NIS Committee, showing
the principal agency or agencies contributing to and responsible for the preparation of that NIS. The
approved contributor statements are listed below.
CHAPTER I?BRIEF
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS under
the general direction of the NIS Committee in
accordance with allocations of responsibility in
the NIS Standard Instructions. Section co-
ordinators are noted at the top of each page.
CHAPTER II?MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
Section 20?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers, with contributions on sea approaches
from the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office, and on
weather, climate, and air approaches from the
Air Weather Service, USAF.
Section 21?Military Geographic Regions
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers, with contributions on coasts and
landing beaches from the Office of Naval
Intelligence, and on weather and climate from
the Air Weather Service, USAF.
Section 22?Coasts and Landing Beaches
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence, with contributions
on coastal oceanography from the U.S. Navy
Hydrographic Office, and on routes of trans-
portation from the Office of the Chief of Trans-
portation, Department of the Army. The ma-
terial on landing beaches was prepared under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers.
Section 23?Weather and Climate
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff, Intelligence, USAF, by the Air Weather
Service, with contributions on clothing and
temporary shelter from the Office of the Quar-
termaster General, Department of the Army,
and on naval and amphibious operations from
the Naval Weather Service Division.
Section 24?Topography
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers.
Section 25?Urban Areas
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Engineers, with the assistance of the Bureau of
Intelligence and Research, Department of State,
the Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, and the Offices of the Chief of
Ordnance, Quartermaster General, Chief Signal
Officer, and Surgeon General, Department of
the Army.
CHAPTER III?TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNI-
CATIONS
Section 30?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army,
with contributions from the Office of Naval
Intelligence, the Office of the Assistant Chief of
Staff, Intelligence, USAF, and from the Offices
of the Chief of Transportation and the Chief
Signal Officer, Department of the Army.
Section 31?Railway
This Section was prepared for the NIS under the
general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Transportation, with contributions on construc-
tion, maintenance, engineering structures, and
loading and clearance diagrams from the Office
of the Chief of Engineers.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
mliMIMPLIRRILk NIS STANDARD
Section 32?Highway
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Transportation, with contributions on construc-
tion, maintenance, and engineering structures
from the Office of the Chief of Engineers.
Section 33?Inland Waterway
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief
of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Transportation, with contributions on construc-
tion and maintenance from the Office of the
Chief of Engineers.
Section 35?Ports and Naval Facilities
As appropriate:
a) This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence.
b) This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief of
Transportation. Material on naval facilities
and shipyards was prepared by the Office of
Naval Intelligence.
Section 36?Merchant Marine
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence.
Section 37?Civil Air
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, with Navy participation.
Section 38?Telecommunications
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief of
Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief
Signal Officer.
CHAPTER IV SOCIOLOGICAL
Section 40?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 41?Population
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
PAGE 6
INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
Section 42?Characteristics of the People
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 43?Religion, Education, and Public Infor-
mation
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 44?Manpower
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 45?Health and Sanitation
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency, with contributions
from the Medical Information and Intelligence
Agency, Department of the Army.
Section 46?Welfare
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of. State.
CHAPTER V?POLITICAL
Section 50?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 51?The Constitutional System
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 52?Structure of the Government
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 53?Political Dynamics
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 54?Public Order and Safety
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
ailmommouroui
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 ALLOCATIONS
Section 55?National Policies
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 56?Intelligence and Security
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 57?Subversion
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence etnd Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 58?Propaganda
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 59?Biographies of Key Personalities
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
CHAPTER VI?ECONOMIC (outside Sino-Soviet Bloc
Areas
For Consolidated Chapter:
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Director of Intel-
ligence and Research, Department of State.
Material on agriculture and forestry was con-
tributed by thh Department of Agriculture;
material on fisheries, fuels, minerals, and metals
by the Department of the Interior; material on
electric power and construction materials by the
Office of the Chief of Engineers, Department of
the Army; material on aircraft by the Office of
the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF,
with Navy participation; material on ship-
building by the Office of Naval Intelligence;
material on other military end items, telecom-
munications equipment, and motor vehicles by
the Office of the Chief of Ordnance, Office of the
Chief Signal Officer, and Office of the Assistant
Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters,
Department of the Army; and the balance by
the Bureau of Intelligence and Research,
Department of State.
Section 60?.1 n troduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
Section 61?Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Director of Intelli-
gence and Research, Department of State, by
the Department of Agriculture and the Depart-
ment of the Interior.
Section 62?Fuels and Power
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Director of Intel-
ligence and Research, Department of State.
Contributors of Subsections were: 62A, 62B,
62C, Department of the Interior; 62D, Office of
the Chief of Engineers, Department of the Army.
Section 63?Minerals and Metals
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Director of Intel-
ligence and Research, Department of State.
Contributors of Subsections were: 63A, 63B,
630, 63D, 63E, 63G, Department of the Interior;
63F, Office of the Chief of Engineers, Depart-
ment of the Army.
Section 64?Manufacturing and Construction
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Director of Intel-
ligence and Research, Department of State.
Contributors of Subsections were: 64A, 64B,
64J, 64K, 64L, 64M, 64N, 640, Bureau of
Intelligence and Research, Department of State;
64C, 64F, 64G, 64H, 641, Office of the Chief of
Ordnance, Office of the Chief Signal Officer, and
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army;
64D, Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff,
Intelligence, USAF, with Navy participation;
64E, Office of Naval Intelligence.
Section 65?Trade and Finance
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
CHAPTER VI?EcoNomic (Sino-Soviet Bloc Areas)
For Consolidated Chapter:
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Material on electric power and
construction materials was contributed by the
Office of the Chief of Engineers, Department of
the Army; material on aircraft by the Office of
the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF,
with Navy participation; material on shipbuild-
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
aliaaffigaiaakik NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
ing by the Office of Naval Intelligence; material
on other military end items, telecommunications
equipment, and motor vehicles, by the Office
of the Chief of Ordnance, Office of the Chief
Signal Officer, and Office of the Assistant Chief
of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army; and the balance by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 60?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 61?Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
Section 62?Fuels and Power
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 62A, 62B, 620, 62E, Central Intelligence
Agency; 62D, Office of the Chief of Engineers,
Department of the Army.
Section 63?Minerals and Metals
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 63A, 63B, 630, 63D, 63E, 63G, Central
Intelligence Agency; 63F, Office of the Chief of
Engineers, Department of the Army.
Section 64?Manufacturing and Construction
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Contributors of Subsections
were: 64A, 64B, 64J, 64K, 64L, 64M, 64N,
640, Central Intelligence Agency; 64C, 64F,
64G, 64H, 641, Office of the Chief of Ordnance,
Office of the Chief Signal Officer, and Office of
the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence,
Headquarters, Department of the Army; 64D,
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, with Navy participation; 64E,
Office of Naval Intelligence.
Section 65?Trade and Finance
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
PAGE 8
CHAPTER VII?SCIENTIFIC
Section 70?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency, with assistance or
contributions from the Bureau of Intelligence
and Research, Department of State; the Office
of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence,
Headquarters, Department of the Army; the
Office of Naval Intelligence; and the Office of
the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF.
It was coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence
Committee.
Section 71?Electronics
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence, with contributions
from the Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff
for Intelligence, Headquarters, Department of
the Army, and the Office of the Assistant Chief
of Staff, Intelligence, USAF, and with assistance
from the Central Intelligence Agency. It was
coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence Com-
mittee.
Section 72?Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, with contributions from the Office
of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence,
Headquarters, Department of the Army, and
the Office of Naval Intelligence, and with
assistance from the Central Intelligence Agency.
It was coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence
Committee.
Section 73?Atomic Energy
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency, with assistance or
contributions from the Bureau of Intelligence
and Research, Department of State; the Office
of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence,
Headquarters, Department of the Army; the
Office of Naval Intelligence; the Office of the
Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF;
and the Atomic Energy Commission. It was
coordinated by the Joint Atomic Energy Intelli-
gence Committee.
Section 74?Biological Warfare
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief
of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief
Chemical Officer, with assistance from . . . .
(assisting agencies to be indicated in each
instance). It was coordinated by the Scientific
Intelligence Committee.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 ALLOCATIONS silminnommumi
Section 75?Chemical Warfare
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Assistant Chief
of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army, by the Office of the Chief
Chemical Officer, with assistance from . . . .
(assisting agencies to be indicated in each
instance). It was coordinated by the Scientific
Intelligence Committee.
Section 76?Physical Sciences, Mathematics, and
Medicine
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency, with assistance or
contributions from . . . . (assisting or contrib-
uting agencies to be indicated in each instance).
It was coordinated by the Scientific Intelligence
Committee.
CHAPTER VIII?ARMED FORCES
For Consolidated Chapter:
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army,
with contributions from the Office of Naval
Intelligence, the Office of the Assistant Chief of
Staff, Intelligence, USAF, and the Army Tech-
nical Services.
Section 80?Introduction
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army,
with contributions from the Office of Naval
Intelligence and the Office of the Assistant
Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF.
Section 81?Ground Forces
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelli-
gence, Headquarters, Department of the Army,
with contributions from the Office of Nava
Intelligence and the Army Technical Services.
Section 82?Naval Forces
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of Naval Intelligence.
Section 83?Air Forces
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Office of the Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelli-
gence, USAF, with Navy participation.
V 11J.V.L1N 1 lab
CHAPTER IX?MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
This Chapter was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency, with contributions from the
Office of the Chief of Engineers and the Office
of the Chief Signal Officer, Department of the
Army, the U.S. Navy Hydrographic Office, the
U.S. Navy Photographic Interpretation Center,
the Air Weather Service, USAF; the Aero-
nautical Chart and Information Center, USAF;
and the Central Intelligence Agency.
SUPPLEMENT I?PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
As appropriate:
a) For Sections 1 through 6?This Section was pre-
pared for the NIS by the Office of Naval Intelli-
gence.
b) Section 1?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the Assist-
ant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of the Chief of Transportation. Material
on naval facilities was prepared by the Office of
Naval Intelligence.
Section 2?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of the Chief of Transportation.
Section 3?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of the Chief of Transportation.
Section 4?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of the Chief of Transportation.
Section 5?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of Naval Intelligence. It was coordinated
by the Office of the Chief of Transportation.
Section 6?This Section was prepared for the
NIS under the general supervision of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army, by the
Office of Naval Intelligence. It was coordinated
by the Office of the Chief of Transportation.
SUPPLEMENT II?COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
For each Section:
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Director of Naval
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
elleminnemem NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
Intelligence. The material on landing beaches
was prepared for the Assistant Chief of Staff for
Intelligence, Headquarters, Department of the
Army, by the Office of the Chief of Engineers,
with contributions on routes of transportation
from the Office of the Chief of Transportation,
and on surf and tidal data from the U.S. Navy
Hydrographic Office. Maps and material on
coastal description, were prepared by the Office
of Naval Intelligence.
SUPPLEMENT V?PETROLEUM
a) For each Section on Areas outside the Sino-
Soviet Bloc:
This Section was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Director of Intel-
ligence and Research, Department of State, by
the Department of the Interior.
b) For each Section on Sino-Soviet Bloc Areas:
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Central Intelligence Agency.
SUPPLEMENT VI?COMMUNISM
For each Section:
This Section was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
PAGE 10
JULY 1959
KEY PERSONALITIES
This publication was prepared for the NIS under
the general supervision of the Central Intelli-
gence Agency. Political, cultural, and eco-
nomic biographies, as well as the consolidated
introduction, the institutional directory, and in-
dex, were contributed by the Bureau of Intelli-
gence and Research, Department of State; scien-
tific biographies by the Central Intelligence
Agency; army biographies by the Office of the
Assistant Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Head-
quarters, Department of the Army; naval
biographies by the Office of Naval Intelligence;
aviation biographies by the Office of the As-
sistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF.
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
For each part (or Section, as appropriate) of NIS on
Ocean Areas:
This Part [or Section] was prepared for the NIS
under the general supervision of the Director of
Naval Intelligence and the Director of the Naval
Weather Service Division by the U.S. Navy
Hydrographic Office.
INTERNATIONAL COMMUNISM
For each Part of NIS on International Communism:
This Part was prepared for the NIS by the
Bureau of Intelligence and Research, Depart-
ment of State.
fillommumaiim
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
NIS AREAS
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030ww
JANUARY 1962
NIS Areas
For purposes of ready identification the entire world,
land and sea, except the continental United States, is
divided into numbered NIS Areas. The NIS Area
numbers and titles are given in the list below. The
NIS Area numbers combine with NIS Section, Chapter,
or Supplement numbers to identify each printed NIS
unit by convenient short title.
NIS Areas are numbered consecutively from NIS
1 through NIS 107. Land areas are covered in NIS 1
through 103. Ocean areas are covered in NIS 104
through 107. NIS 108 is titled "International Corn-
munism" and provides integrated worldwide coverage
on Communist front organizations.
Political developments have required from time to
time that some of the originally designated NIS Areas
be divided into two or more new NIS Areas, which are
designated by the addition of capital letters to the
original NIS numbers. Complete NIS are being pro-
duced on these new Areas. However, in the interven-
ing period it may be necessary to refer to the original
NIS Area for coverage on certain topics.
(Offshore island possessions are normally included in the related
NIS Areas; see NIS Base Maps for definitive boundaries.)
NIS TITLE
GENERAL AREA
25X6A
Northern Ireland, Isle of Man, Shetland Islands, Orkney Islands,
and Channel Islands.
2
Ireland
Republic of Ireland.
3
France
France and Monaco.
4
Netherlands
Netherlands.
5
Belgium
Belgium.
6
Luxembourg
Luxembourg.
7
Denmark
Denmark, including the Faeroe Islands.
8
Portugal
Portugal, including the Azores, Madeira, and the Cape Verde Islands.
9
Spain
Spain, including the Canary Islands and Andorra.
10
Norway
Norway, including Svalbard and Jan Mayen.
11
Sweden
Sweden.
Finland.
?5X6A
25X6A
?A
East Germany
ertnan
25X6A
14
Poland
Poland, within present de facto boundaries, including the former Free City of
Danzig and the portions of Germany under Polish administration.
15
Switzerland
Switzerland and Liechtenstein.
16
Austria
Austria.
17
Italy
Italy, San Marino, and Vatican City.
18
Czechoslovakia
Czechoslovakia.
19
Hungary
Hungary.
20
Albania
Albania.
21
Yugoslavia
Yugoslavia.
22
Rumania
Rumania.
23
Bulgaria
Bulgaria.
24
Greece
Greece.
25
Gibraltar, Malta, and Cyprus
Gibraltar, Maltese Islands, and Cyprus.
25A
Gibraltar
Gibraltar.
25B
Malta
Maltese Islands.
25C
Cyprus
Cyprus.
26
U.S.S.R.
U.S.S.R. within present de facto boundaries, including the Baltic States, northern
East Prussia, Tannu Tuva, Kuril Islands, and Sakhalin.
4ailimummiffoim
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
ApJ2ved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
NIS
TITLE
GENERAL AREA
For geographic treatment (Chapter II) the U.S.S.R. is divided into 5 parts as follows:
Part I European U.S.S.R. and the European U.S.S.R. and the Caucasus.
Caucasus
Part II Soviet Central Asia Soviet Central Asia.
Part III Western Siberia Western Siberia.
Part IV Central Siberia Central Siberia.
Part V Eastern Siberia Eastern Siberia.
27 Turkey Turkey.
28 Syria and Lebanon Syria and Lebanon.
28A Syria Syria.
28B Lebanon Lebanon.
29 Jordan Jordan.
ill ....I1...
Iraq.
25X6A
Israel.
32 Arabian Peninsula Arabian Peninsula, including Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, Kuwait-Saudi Arabia Neutral
Zone, Iraq-Saudi Arabia Neutral Zone, Bahrain, Qatar, Trucial States, Muscat
and Oman, Yemen, Colony of Aden, and Aden Protectorate (including Socotra).
33 Iran Iran.
34 Afghanistan Afghanistan.
35 India India, including Andaman, Nicobar and Laccadive Islands, Jammu and Kashmir,
and Bhutan.
35A Nepal Nepal.
36 Pakistan East and West Pakistan.
37 Ceylon Ceylon.
38 Burma Burma.
30 China China, including Tibet and Taiwan; hong Kong and Macao.
39A Communist China Communist China, including Tibet.
For geographic treatment (Chapter II) Communist China is divided into 5 parts as follows:
Part I Sinkiang Sinkiang.
Part II Northeast China Northeast China.
Part III North China North China.
Part IV South China South China, including all Communist-held islands.
Part V Tibetan Highlands Tibetan Highlands.
39B Nationalist China Nationalist China, including all Nationalist-held islands.
39C Hong Kong and Macao Hong Kong and Macao.
40 Mongolia "Mongolian Peoples Republic."
41 Korea Korea.
41A North Korea North Korea.
41B South Korea Republic of Korea.
42 Thailand Thailand.
43 Indochina Former Indochina.
43A Cambodia Cambodia.
43B Laos Laos.
43C North Vietnam North Vietnam.
43D South Vietnam South Vietnam, the Paracel Islands, Spratly Island, and other islands and reefs
to the eastward.
44 British Indonesia Federation of Malaya, Singapore, Sarawak, Brunei, and North Borneo.
44A Malaya and Singapore Federation of Malaya and Singapore.
44B Bri
47 Algeria
48 Morocco
49 Libya
50 West Africa
50A Ghana
50B Nigeria
PAGE 2
25X6A
mum.
Algeria.
Morocco and Ifni.
Libya.
Ghana, Nigeria, Sierra Leone, Guinea, Mauritania, Senegal, Mali, Upper Volta,
Ivory Coast, Niger, Dahomey, Togo, and Spanish Sahara.
Ghana.
Nigeria.
001.1Bionnommiiim,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
25X6A
25X6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 NIS AREAS mmiimmisimemmi
NIS
TITLE
GENERAL AREA
50C French West Africa, Togo, and Mauritania, Senegal, Mali, *Upper Volta, Ivory Coast, Niger, Dahomey, Togo,
Spanish Sahara. and Spanish Sahara.
50D Sierra Leone Sierra Leone, Gambia, and Portuguese Guinea.
50E Guinea Guinea.
5OF Mauritania Mauritania.
50G Senegal Senegal.
50H Mali Mali.
50J Upper Volta Upper Volta.
5OIC Ivory Coast Ivory Coast.
50L Niger Niger.
50M Dahomey Dahomey.
50N Togo Togo.
5013 Spanish Sahara Spanish Sahara.
51 Liberia Liberia.
52 Equatorial Africa Chad, Central African Republic, Cameroon, Gabon, Congo, and Spanish Guinea.
52A Chad Chad.
52B Central African Republic Central African Republic,
52C Cameroon Federal Republic of Cameroon.
52D Gabon Gabon.
52E Congo Republic of Congo (Brazzaville).
52F Spanish Guinea Rio Muni, Annoben, Fernando Po, Corisco, Islas Elobey, and STio Tome e
Principe.
53 Egypt Egypt, including the "Gaza Strip."
54 Sudan Sudan.
55 Ethiopia and the Somalilands Ethiopia (including Eritrea), Somali Republic and French Somaliland.
55A Ethiopia Ethiopia, including Eritrea.
55B Somali Republic Somali Republic, including French Somaliland.
56 British East Africa Kenya, Zanzibar Protectorate, Uganda, and Tanganyika.
56A Kenya and Zanzibar Kenya and Zanzibar Protectorate,
Protectorate.
56B Uganda Uganda.
56C Tanganyika Tanganyika.
57 Rhodesia and Nyasaland Northern Rhodesia, Southern Rhodesia, and Nyasaland.
58 Mozambique Mozambique.
59 Angola Angola, including Cabinda.
60 Republic of the Congo Republic of the Congo and Ruanda-Urundi.
61 South Africa
62 Malagasy Republic
63 Indian Ocean Islands
64 South Atlantic Islands
65
Alaska
67 Greenland
68 Iceland
69 Antarctica
71 Guatemala
72 British Honduras
73 Honduras
74 El Salvador
75 Nicaragua
76 Costa Rica
4millummos
Republic of South Africa, South-West Africa, Bechuanaland, Swaziland, and
Basutoland.
Malagasy Republic (Madagascar), Comoro Islands, and Reunion.
Maldive Islands, Mauritius, Christmas Island, Cocos Islands, Seychelles, Prince
Edward Islands, Crozet Islands, Kerguelen Islands, Heard Island, McDonald
Islands, Amsterdam Island, and St. Paul Island.
Colony of Saint Helena (includes Ascension Island, Saint Helena Island, and the
Tristan da Cunha Group), Falkland Islands, South Georgia, South Sandwich
Islands, and Bouvet Island, limited by 60?S.
Former Territory of Alaska.
reen an*.
Iceland.
Antarctica (including South Orkney Islands and South Shetland Islands),
ua ema a.
British Honduras.
Honduras, including territory north of the Rio Coco.
El Salvador, including small areas claimed by Honduras.
Nicaragua.
Costa Rica, including Cocos Island.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
25X6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
NIS TITLE
GENERAL AREA
77
Panama
Panama, including the Canal Zone.
78
Cuba
Cuba.
79
Haiti
Haiti.
80
Dominican Republic
Dominican Republic.
8!
British Western Atlantic
Possessions
Colonies of the Bahamas, Jamaica (including dependencies of Cayman Islands,
Turks and Caicos Islands, Morant Cays, and Pedro Cays), Leeward Islands,
Barbados, Dominica, Grenada, Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent, Trinidad and
Tobago, and Bermuda.
81A
The West Indies
Jamaica (including dependencies of Cayman Islands, Turks and Caicos Islands,
Morant Cays and Pedro Cays), Leeward Islands, Barbados, Dominica, Grenada,
Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent, and Trinidad and Tobago.
81B
Bermuda, Bahama Islands, and
Colonies of Bermuda, the Bahamas, and the British Virgin Islands.
British Virgin Islands
82
Netherlands Antilles
Aruba, Bonaire, Curacao, Saba, Sint Eustatius, and Dutch part of Saint Martin.
83
French West Indies
Martinique, Guadeloupe and Dependencies (Marie Galante, Iles des Salutes,
Desirade, Saint Barthelemy), and French part of Saint Martin.
84
U.S. Possessions in the
Caribbean
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands, Swan Islands, Corn Islands,
Navassa Island, Serrano. Bank, Serranilla Bank, Roncador Bank, and Quito.
Sueno Bank.
85
Colombia
Colombia, including Isla de Malpelo, Archipielago de San Andres y Providencia.
86
Venezuela
Venezuela.
87
Ecuador
Ecuador, including the Galapagos Islands.
88
Peru
Peru.
89
Chile
Chile, including Easter Island, Isla Sala y Gomez, Islas Fernandez, Isla San
Felix, Isla San Ambrosio, and islands south of Tierra del Fuego disputed with
Argentina.
90
Argentina
Argentina, including Isla Martin Garcia.
91
Uruguay
Uruguay.
92
Paraguay
Paraguay.
93
Bolivia
Bolivia.
94
Brazil
Brazil, including Ilha de Trindade, Fernando de Noronha, Rochedos Sao Pedro
e Siio Paulo.
For geographic treatment (Chapter 1/) Brazil
Part I
Part II
95
95A
95B
95C
Southeast Brazil
Northwest Brazil
The Guianas
British Guiana
Surinam
French Guiana
?
awan
99 Philippines
100 Indonesia
100A Republic of Indonesia
100B Netherlands New Guinea
101 West Pacific Islands
102 Southwest Pacific Islands
103 South Pacific Islands
PAGE 4
s divided into 2 parts as follows:
Southeast Brazil.
Northwest Brazil.
British Guiana, Surinam, and French Guiana.
British Guiana.
Surinam.
Fre
Former territory of Hawaii.
Republic of the Philippines and Pulau Miangas.
Republic of Indonesia, Netherlands New Guinea, and Portuguese Tinior.
Republic of Indonesia and Portuguese Timor.
Netherlands New Guinea.
All islands in the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, Wake Atoll, Guam,
Johnston Island, Sand Island, and the Midway Islands.
Territory of Papua, Territory of New Guinea, British Solomon Islands Pro-
tectorate, New Hebrides Condoininium, New Caledonia and Dependencies,
Colony of Fiji, Kingdom of Tonga, Gilbert Islands, Ellice Islands, Ocean
Island, and Nauru.
Palmyra Island, Kingman Reef, Phoenix Islands, Tokelau Islands, Samoa
Islands, Cook Islands, Line Islands, French Polynesia, Pitcairn Island, and
adjacent British islands.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 NIS AREAS
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
(NIS Areas 104 through 107 cover the world's ocean areas; see Index Map at end of the
Ocean Areas Outline and Outline Guide)
NIS
TITLE
GENERAL AREA
104 Atlantic Basin
Part I Western Sector of North Atlantic
Part II Northern Sector of North Atlantic
Part III East-Central Sector of North Atlantic
Part IV Equatorial Atlantic
Part V Central Sector of South Atlantic
Part VI Southwestern Sector of South Atlantic and Southeastern Sector of South Pacific
Part VII Southeastern Sector of South Atlantic
Part VIII Eastern Sector of South Atlantic
Part IX Mediterranean and Black Seas
Part X Northeastern Sector of North Atlantic and the Baltic Sea
Part XI Norwegian, Greenland, and Barents Seas
105 Pacific Basin
Part I Northeastern Sector of North Pacific
Part II Southeastern Sector of North Pacific
Part III Northeastern Sector of South Pacific
Part IV South-Central Sector of South Pacific
Part V North-Central Sector of South Pacific
Part VI South-Central Sector of North Pacific
Part VII North-Central Sector of North Pacific
Part VIII Bering Sea
Part IX Northwestern Sector of North Pacific, the Sea of Okhotsk, arid the Sea of Japan
Part X Southwestern Sector of North Pacific
Part XI South China Sea and Seas of the Malay Archipelago
Part XII Western Sector of South Pacific
106 Indian Basin
Part I Northeastern Sector of Indian Ocean
Part II Southeastern Sector of Indian Ocean
Part III Southwestern Sector of Indian Ocean
Part IV Northwestern Sector of Indian Ocean
107 Arctic Basin
INTERNATIONAL COMMUNISM
(NIS 108 is a topical survey of worldwide Communist front organi-
zations. Each Part listed below is published as a separate unit)
Atlantic Ocean,
Pacific Ocean.
Indian Ocean.
Arctic Ocean.
I'ART TITLE
Part I Introduction
Part II The World Federation of Democratic Youth
Part III The World Federation of Teachers Unions
Part IV The International Union of Students and International Students Relief
Part V Women's International Democratic Federation
Part VI International Organization of Journalists
Part VII International Association of Democratic Lawyers
Part VIII World Federation of Scientific Workers
Part IX Trade Union International of Transport, Port and Fishery Workers
Part X International Federation of Resistance Fighters
Part XI The World Peace Council
Part XII The World Federation of Trade Unions
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Next 1 Page(s) In Document Exempt
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
25X6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
Editorial Instructions
A. Transmittal of material
1. LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
NIS material delivered to the Office of Basic Intelli-
gence (OBI/CIA) requires a letter of transmittal
(original and 2 copies). The following are itemized in
the letter: number of pages of typed manuscript, in-
cluding title page, Table of Contents, List of Figures,
text, tables, caption list, number of graphic items
submitted, and apron material. The letter contains
specifications regarding control aspects of material
involved. It also specifies security classification and
control for photographs and those insert maps of which
extra copies are to be printed without the NIS ref-
erences, and the number of copies of such maps desired
by the contributor.
2. MANUSCRIPT
NIS manuscript is submitted in 3 complete assembled
copies. Each of the 3 assembled sets of manuscript
includes in sequence 1) title page, 2) Table of Contents,
3) List of Figures, 4) text, 5) tables, 6) caption list,
and 7) apron material.
Pagination begins with the first page of text of each
section and is consecutive throughout the manuscript
(including each page of the tables, which follow the
text in sequence of figure numbers). Pagination is by
other means than a numbering machine, which is re-
served for use in OBI processing.
Manuscript with more than nominal alterations is
not acceptable. Text or tabular material photostated
or similarly reproduced from printed or other material
is submitted in positive print form and legible in ap-
proximately typewriter elite size.
The supporting items, typed double space, are as
follows:
Title page, containing chapter or supplement num-
ber and title, section number and title, and the state-
ment: 'Phis is a preliminary draft of Section --,
NIS . It has not been finally edited or reconciled
with other NIS sections and should not be reproduced,
This section has been approved for use in the NIS by
(agency), (month, year). This is the uniform date for
the entire section and will appear on each page of the
published section."
Table of Contents for each section, including the
headings appearing in the text. Modified tables of
contents are submitted to meet the requirerr ants for
supplements, NIS on Ocean Areas, and consolidated
chapters. Each Table of Contents is followed by a
List of Figures which lists in sequence all figures with
the following details for each: Figure number as de-
termined by sequence in tentative placement, category
identification (Table, Photo, Map, etc.), and the cap-
tion as it appears with the figure or in abbreviated
form. This List of Figures is immediately followed by
a Contributor Statement, as approved by the NIS
Committee, showing the principal agency or agencies
contributing to and responsible for preparation of each
NIS unit.
Caption list (used for typesetting the captions of
all graphic items). Figure numbers for all tables and
graphics are listed in sequence. The exact wording of
the captions for all graphics is included. The titles of
tables are not included in the caption list since this
information is included separately with each table.
3. GRAPHIC MATERIAL
Graphic material, including photographs, is assem-
bled separately from manuscript, in 3 complete sets
with each item in numerical sequence according to fig-
ure number. The 3 sets of each item consist of an
original and 2 copies of all black and white material,
and 3 color proofs for multicolor graphic material. The
original and copies of all graphic items are plainly
marked with the NIS area number and section and fig-
ure number. The original plates of multicolor maps
are retained by contributor until receipt of memoran-
dum from OBI. These originals are then forwarded
as directed by OBI for final reproduction.
B. Text specifications
1. TYPING OF TEXT
Text is submitted in 3 copies, typed on one side only,
with the original on substantial 8 x 12 bond paper.
Duplicating process may be used if submitted copies
are thoroughly legible. Text is typed triple space.
All paragraphs without headings begin with 5-space
indent. Normal capitalization is used throughout (in-
cluding headings), without use of continuous capitali-
zation or of underlining except for foreign or other
terms to be italicized. The last word of a typed line
is always a complete word, avoiding ending any line
with a hyphen. Manuscript conforms to the sample
pages, with margins as shown. Each manuscript
page, as shown, includes in top margin the name of
the agency of primary responsibility, date (manuscript
completion date, for processing control purposes only),
classification, and any applicable security control state-
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
ment, NIS number and section number. The first
page of text includes the section number and title.
Text pages are numbered consecutively within each sec-
tion (not using a numbering machine, which is reserved
for OBI processing).
2. TEXT HEADINGS
Headings used in NIS text material are as follows:
(Grade of head,
not typed in ms.)
II. Military Geography (Chapter title)
22. Coasts and Landing Beaches (Section title)
A. General (No. 1)
1. Coasts (No. 2)
a. Northern peninsula? text follows (No. 3)
(1) Williams Bay ? text follows (No. 4)
(a) Vicinity of Port Smith?text (No. 5)
1) Seaward approaches?text (No. 6)
a) Anchorage areas? text ? (No. 7)
Chapter and section titles are centered. No. 1 heads
are typed flush with left margin of text; inferior heads
are successively indented 5 typewriter spaces. No. 1
and No. 2 heads stand alone; text begins on next line
with indentation of 5 spaces and thereafter flush left.
Remaining heads each end with space, two hyphens,
space; text follows immediately on same line, with suc-
ceeding lines beginning flush with left text margin.
Each standard heading includes a title in addition
to letter or number. Titles are as brief as feasible.
Capitalization of chapter and section titles follows the
NIS outline. In all other headings (except ?for proper
names), only the initial letter of each title is capitalized.
Headings may stand alone when immediately fol-
lowed by the next grade of head. For certain ma-
terial (as in Coasts and Landing Beaches), a heading
may be followed on the next line or lines by coordinates,
hydrographic chart references, etc.
Numbers used to itemize a series of items within
text carry a single parenthesis, e.g., 1).
3. REFERENCES TO FIGURES AND TEXT
Figures (including both tables and graphic material)
are cited in the text by using figure numbers assigned
by the contributor. Reference may be integral in a
sentence, ". ? . as shown in FIGURE 32-16 . . ." or
parenthetical, ". . (FIGURES 42-3 through 42-6). . ."
It is often desirable to use the reference flexibly to dif-
ferentiate typos of figures, e.g., ". . . tabulated in FIG-
URE 42-7 . . ." or ". . . shown on the map, FIGURE
42-8 . . ." Statements such as ". . . in the follow-
ing table . ." or ". . . in the table above . ." are
undesirable because the relationship may not be re-
tained in printing. When related text is not to be
adjacent to reference table details, the text is appro-
priately amplified to incorporate significant details.
Because figure numbering is subject to change in pub-
lication or maintenance, reference to tables or graphic
PAGE 2
JANUARY 1962
material in other sections or chapters is by abbreviated
caption, type of material, and section number in which
it appears, e.g., (see population density map, SEC-
TION 41).
Tentative placement within text of tables and appro-
priate graphic items is indicated by large carets with
figure numbers on the right margin of text pages (see
sample pages). Only one caret is used for each figure.
Figures expected to follow printed text, such as fold-in
maps, are itemized after the last line of manuscript text.
Within sections cross references are made to the
highest order of text topic which will adequately indi-
cate where the referenced material will be found.
Another section of the same or other chapter is
referred to by "... (this Chapter, SECTION 81) .. or
"... (see Section on Ground Forces) ..." Reference to
a section of another chapter is as follows: "... (CHAP-
TER IV, SECTION 41) ... or "... (see Population)... "
4. QUOTATIONS AND EXTRACT MATTER
Quotations not exceeding 3 typewritten lines are
included in text within quotation marks. Longer
quotations, and subordinate material likewise to be
printed as "extract" in smaller type, are without quota-
tion marks, indented 5 spaces for all lines and typed
double space.
5. SAMPLE PAGES
The accompanying two pages are sample pages of
text manuscript for the guidance of typists.
6. FOOTNOTES
When footnotes are considered necessary, up to 3
asterisks per page may be used. Footnote material of
general significance for a segment of text may be printed
as a brief NOTE. In manuscript the footnote is in-
serted on the line following the reference, separated
from the text by solid lines above and below; the foot-
note begins indented 1 space from left margin, and is
typed double space (see sample pages).
7. REFERENCES TO SOURCES
References to sources are confined as much as possible
to the topic Comments on Principal Sources, where the
evaluative discussion may be followed by an alpha-
betical listing of principal sources to which consecutive
numbers are assigned. If sources are grouped by subject
categories, they are numbered consecutively rather
than by successive groups; details of a source are given
only once and thereafter only the identifying number is
listed. In text, and in both text and figure footnotes,
this facilitates brief reference, e. g., ". . . , based on
Source 1 estimates, . ." or ". . . (Source 1) ..."
When only a few principal sources are identified and
are not assigned source numbers in the Comments sub-
section, text or footnote reference thereto is as brief
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
appeimimmoim
JULY 1959
NIS Areas
For purposes of ready identification the entire world,
land and sea, except the continental United States, is
divided into numbered NIS Areas. The NIS Area
numbers and titles are given in the list below. The
NIS Area numbers combine with NIS Section, Chapter,
or Supplement numbers to identify each printed NIS
unit by convenient short title.
NIS Areas are numbered consecutively from NIS
1 through NIS 107. Land areas are covered in NIS 1
through 103. Ocean areas are covered in NIS 104
through 107. NIS 108 is titled "International Corn-
munism" and gives integrated worldwide coverage on
Communist front organizations.
Political developments have required from time to
time that some of the originally designated NIS Areas
be divided into two or more new NIS Areas, which are
designated by the addition of capital letters to the
original NIS numbers. Complete NIS are being pro-
duced on these new Areas. However, in the interven-
ing period it may be necessary to refer to the original
NIS Area for coverage on certain topics.
25X6A
(Offshore island possessions are normally included in the related
NIS Areas; see NIS Base Maps for definitive boundaries.)
NIB TITLE
GENERAL AREA
Northern Ireland, Channel Islands, Isle of Man, Shetland Islands,
and Orkney Islands.
2
Ireland
Republic of Ireland.
3
France
France and Monaco.
4
Netherlands
Netherlands.
5
Belgium
Belgium.
6
Luxembourg
Luxembourg.
7
Denmark
Denmark, including the Faeroe Islands.
8
Portugal
Portugal, including the Azores, Madeira, and the Cape Verde Islands.
9
Spain
Spain, including the Canary Islands and Andorra.
10
Norway
Norway, including Svalbard and Jan Mayen.
11
Sweden
Sweden.
12
Finland
Finland.
25X6A
East German
"German Democratic Republic" and Soviet sector 01 liertin.
14
Poland
Poland, within present de facto boundaries, including the former Free City of
Danzig and the portions of Germany under Polish administration.
15
Switzerland
Switzerland and Liechtenstein.
16
Austria
Austria.
17
Italy
Italy, San Marino, Vatican City, and the part of the Free Territory of Trieste
admtnistered by Italy.
18
Czechoslovakia
Czechoslovakia.
19
Hungary
Hungary.
20
Albania
Albania.
21
Yugoslavia
Yugoslavia, and the part of the Free Territory of Trieste administered by Yugo-
slavia.
22
Rumania
Rumania.
23
Bulgaria
Bulgaria.
24
Greece
Greece.
25
Gibraltar, Malta, and Cyprus
Gibraltar, Maltese Islands, and Cyprus.
25A
Gibraltar
Gibraltar.
25B
Malta
Maltese Islands.
25C
Cyprus
Cyprus.
26
U.S. S. R.
U.S.S.R. within present de facto boundaries, including the Baltic States, northern
East Prussia, Tannu Tuva, Kuril Islands, and Sakhalin.
wiigiatimtwisia?
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
JULY 1959
NIS
TITLE
GENERAL AREA
For geographic treatment (Chapter II) the U.S.S.I?. is divided into 5 parts as follows:
Part I
Part II
Part III
Part IV
Part V
27
28
28A
28B
29
European U.S.S.R.
Soviet Central Asia
Urals and West Siberian Plain
Central and Eastern Siberia
The Caucasus
Turkey
Syria and Lebanon
Syria
Lebanon
Jordan
30 Ira
25X6A
Arabian Peninsula
33 Iran
34 Afghanistan
35 India
36
37
38
39
39A
Pakistan
Ceylon
Burma
China
Communist China
European U.S.S.R. within present de facto boundaries, including the Baltic
States and northern East Prussia.
Soviet Central Asia.
Urals and West Siberian Plain, including Tannu Tuva.
Central and Eastern Siberia, including the Kuril Islands and Sakhalin.
The Caucasus, including Soviet Transcaucasia.
Turkey.
Syria and Lebanon.
Syria.
Lebanon.
Jordan.
Iraq.
Israel.
Arabian Peninsula, including Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, Kuwait-Saudi Arabia Neutral
Zone, Iraq-Saudi Arabia Neutral Zone, Bahrein, Qatar, Trucial Coast, Muscat
and Oman, Yemen, Colony of Aden, and Aden Protectorate (including Socotra).
Iran.
Afghanistan.
India, including Andaman, Nicobar and Laccadive Islands, Jammu and Kashmrr,
Nepal, Bhutan, and Portuguese India.
East and West Pakistan and the Oman settlement of Gwalar.
Ceylon.
Burma.
China, including Tibet and Taiwan; Hong Kong and Macao.
Communist China, including Tibet.
For geographic treatment (Chapter II) Communist China is divided into 4 parts as follows:
Part I
Part II
Part III
Part IV
39B
40
41
41A
41B
42
43
43A
43B
43C
43D
Western China
Manchuria
North China
South China
Nationalist China
Mongolia
Korea
North Korea
South Korea
Thailand
Indochina
Cambodia
Laos
North Vietnam
South Vietnam
44 British Indonesia
44A Malaya and Singapore
44B British Borneo
Western China, including Tibet.
Manchuria.
North China.
South China, including all Communist-held islands.
Nationalist China, including all Nationalist-held islands; Hong Kong and Macao.
"Mongolian Peoples Republic."
Korea.
North Korea.
Republic of Korea.
Thailand.
Former Indochina,
Cambodia.
Laos.
North Vietnam.
South Vietnam, the Paracel Islands, Spratly Island, and other islands and reefs
to the eastward.
Federation of Malaya, Singapore, Sarawak, Brunei, and North Borneo.
Federation of Malaya and Singapore.
25X6A
47
Algeria
Algeria.
48
Morocco
Morocco and Ifni.
49
Libya
Libya.
50
West Africa
Ghana, Nigeria, British Cameroons, Western African Member States of the
French Community, Guinea, Togo, Spanish Sahara, Sierra Leone, Gambia,
and Portuguese Guinea.
50A
Ghana
Ghana.
50B
Nigeria and British Cameroons
Nigeria and British Cameroons.
PAGE 2
mlismou
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
25X6A
25X6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 NIS AREAS
NIS
TITLE
GENERAL AREA
50C French West Africa, Guinea,
Togo, and Spanish Sahara.
50D Sierra Leone, Gambia,
Portuguese Guinea.
51 Liberia
52 Equatorial Africa
53 Egypt
53A United Arab Republic
54 Sudan
55 Ethiopia, Eritrea, and the
Somalilands.
56 British East Africa
56A Kenya and Zanzibar
Protectorate.
56B Uganda
56C Tanganyika
57 Rhodesia and Nyasaland
58 Mozambique
59 Angola
60 Belgian Congo
61 South Africa
62
63
and
Malgache Republic and Reunion
Indian Ocean Islands
64 South Atlantic Islands
Western African Member States of the French Community (includes Dahomey,
Ivory Coast, Mauritania, Niger, Senegal, Soudan, and Volta), Guinea, Togo,
and Spanish Sahara.
Sierra Leone, Gambia, and Portuguese Guinea.
Liberia.
Equatorial African Member States of the French Community (Central African
Republic, Chad, Congo, and Gabon), Cameroun, Spanish Guinea (includes Rio
Muni, Annobon, Fernando Po, Corisco, and Islas Elobey) and Sao Tome e
Principe.
Egypt, including the "Gaza Strip."
Egypt and Syria.
Sudan.
Ethiopia, Eritrea, British Somaliland, French Somaliland, and Somalia.
Kenya, Zanzibar Protectorate, Uganda, and Tanganyika.
Kenya and Zanzibar l'rotectorate.
Uganda.
Tanganyika.
Federation of Rhodesia and Nyasaland.
Mozambique.
Angola, including Cabinda.
Belgian Congo and Ruanda-Urundi.
Union of South Africa, South-West Africa, Bechuanaland, Swaziland, and
Ba sutoland.
Madagascar, Comoro Islands, and Reunion.
Maldive Islands, Mauritius, Christmas Island, Cocos Islands, Seychelles, Prince
Edward Islands, Crozet Islands, Kerguelen Islands, Heard Island, McDonald
Islands, Amsterdam Island, and St. Paul Island.
Colony of Saint Helena (includes Ascension Island, Saint Helena Island, and the
Tristan da Cunha Group), Falkland Islands, South Georgia, South Sandwich
th Shetland Islands, and Bouvet Island,
68
Iceland
Iceland.
69
Antarctica
Antarctica.
71
ua ema a
Guatemala.
72
British Honduras
British Honduras.
73
Honduras
Honduras, including territory north of the Rio Coco.
74
El Salvador
El Salvador, including small areas claimed by Honduras.
75
Nicaragua
Nicaragua.
76
Costa Rica
Costa Rica, including Cocos Island.
77
Panama
Panama, including the Canal Zone.
78
Cuba
Cuba.
79
Haiti
Haiti.
80
Dominican Republic
Dominican Republic.
81
British Western Atlantic
Possessions
Colonies of the Bahamas, Jamaica (including dependencies of Cayman Islands,
Turks and Caicos Islands, Morant Cays, and Pedro Cays), Leeward Islands,
Barbados, Dominica, Grenada, Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent, Trinidad and
Tobago, and Bermuda.
81A
The West Indies
Jamaica (including dependencies of Cayman Islands, Turks and Caicos Islands,
Morant Cays and Pedro Cays), Leeward Islands, Barbados, Dominica, Grenada,
Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent, Trinidad and Tobago.
81B
Bermuda, Bahama Islands, and
Colonies of Bermuda, the Bahamas, and the British Virgin Islands.
British Virgin Islands.
82
Netherlands Antilles
Aruba, Bonaire, Curacao, Saba, Sint Eustatius, and Dutch part of Saint Martin.
83
French West Indies
Martinique, Guadeloupe and Dependencies (Marie Galante, Iles des Saintes,
Desirade, Saint Barthelemy), and French part of Saint Martin.
alogimp
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
NIS -7-TITLE
GENERAL AREA
84
U.S. Possessions in the
Caribbean.
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, Virgin Islands, Swan Islands, Corn Islands,
Navasso Island, Serrana Bank, Serranilla Bank, Roncador Bank, and Quita
Sueno Bank.
85
Colombia
Colombia, including Isla de Malpelo, Archipielago de San Andres y Providencia.
86
Venezuela
Venezuela.
87
Ecuador
Ecuador, including the Galapagos Islands.
88
Peru
Peru.
89
Chile
Chile, including Easter Island, Isla Sala y Gomez, Islas Fernandez, Isla San
Felix, Isla San Ambrosio, and islands south of Tierra del Fuego disputed with
Argentina.
90
Argentina
Argentina, including Isla Martin Garcia.
91
Uruguay
Uruguay.
92
Paraguay
Paraguay.
93
Bolivia
Bolivia.
94
Brazil
Brazil, including Ilha de Trindade, Fernando de Noronha, Rochedos SAO Pedro
e Sao Paulo.
For geographic treatment (Chapter II) Brazil is divided into 2 parts as follows:
Part I
Part II
95
95A
95B
95C
Southeast Brazil
Northwest Brazil
The Guianas
British Guiana
Surinam
French Guiana
Southeast Brazil.
Northwest Brazil.
British Guiana, Surinam, and French Guiana.
British Guiana.
Surinam.
French Guiana.
25X6A
? ,?." ? ? ? a ? ? ? ? ? ?
98
99
100
100A
100B
101
102
103
Hawaii
Philippines
Indonesia
Republic of Indonesia
Netherlands New Guinea
West Pacific Islands
Southwest Pacific Islands
South Pacific Islands
Hawaiian Islands.
Republic of the Philippines and Pulau Miangas.
Republic of Indonesia, Netherlands New Guinea, and Portuguese Timor.
Republic of Indonesia and Portuguese Timor.
Netherlands New Guinea.
All islands in the Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, Wake Atoll, Guam,
Johnston Island, Sand Island, and the Midway Islands.
Territory of Papua, Territory of New Guinea, British Solomon Islands Pro-
tectorate, New Hebrides Condominium, New Caledonia and Dependencies,
Colony of Fiji, Kingdom of Tonga, Gilbert Islands, Ellice Islands, Ocean
Island, and Nauru.
Palmyra Island, Kingman Reef, Phoenix Islands, Tokelau Islands, Samoa
Islands, Cook Islands, Line Islands, the French establishments in Oceania,
Pitcairn Island, and adjacent British islands.
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
(NIS Areas 104 through 107 cover the world's ocean areas; see Index Map at end of the
Ocean Areas Outline and Outline Guide)
NIS
TITLE
GENERAL AREA
104
Part I
Part II
Part III
Part IV
l'art V
Part VI
Part VII
Part VIII
Part IX
Part X
Part XI
PAGE 4
Atlantic Basin
Western Sector of North Atlantic
Northern Sector of North Atlantic
East-Central Sector of North Atlantic
Equatorial Atlantic
Central Sector of South Atlantic
Southwestern Sector of South Atlantic and Southeastern Sector of South Pacific
Southeastern Sector of South Atlantic
Eastern Sector of South Atlantic
Mediterranean and Black Seas
Northeastern Sector of North Atlantic and the Baltic Sea
Norwegian, Greenland, and Barents Seas
Atlantic Ocean.
'"Lonrignimmi
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 NIS AREAS 4Winunswouni
NIS
TITLE
GENERAL AREA
105 Pacific Basin
Part I Northeastern Sector of North Pacific
Part IT Southeastern Sector of North Pacific
Part III Northeastern Sector of South Pacific
Part IV South-Central Sector of South Pacific
Part V North-Central Sector of South Pacific
Part VI South-Central Sector of North Pacific
Part VII North-Central Sector of North Pacific
Part VIII Bering Sea
Part IX Northwestern Sector of North Pacific, the Sea of Okhotsk, and the Sea of Japan
Part X Southwestern Sector of North Pacific
Part XI South China Sea and Seas of the Malay Archipelago
Part XII Western Sector of South Pacific
106 Indian Basin
Part I Northeastern Sector of Indian Ocean
Part II Southeastern Sector of ?Indian Ocean
Part III Southwestern Sector of Indian Ocean
Part IV Northwestern Sector of Indian Ocean
107 Arctic Basin
INTERNATIONAL COMMUNISM
(NIS 108 is a topical survey of worldwide Communist front organi-
zations. Each Part listed below is published as a separate unit)
Pacific Ocean.
Indian Ocean.
Arctic Ocean.
PART
TITLE
Part I Introduction
Part II The World Federation of Democratic Youth
Part III The World Federation of Teachers Unions
Part IV The international Union of Students and International Students Relief
Part V Women's International Democratic Federation
Part VI International Organization of Journalists
Part VII International Association of Democratic Lawyers
Part VIII World Federation of Scientific Workers
Part IX Trade Union International of Transport, Port and Fishery Workers
Part X International Federation of Resistance Fighters
Part XI The World Peace Council
Part XII The World Federation of Trade Unions
PA GE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
120
E A
2
2
70
65
60
UNITED STATES
NIS
o um
INSET A,
78 THROUGH NIS 84
200 300 400 500
BERMUDA
MILES'
81 B
0 100 200 300 400 500 KILOMETERS
v*
--
..4." Great
Grand Abaco
Bahama
-
ATLANTIC OCEAN
HONDU
NICARAGU
COSTA
o tol'"g'
Swan Islands
3
5.0
RICA
CAYMAN
.' ISLANDS
81 B
o
.?
BAHAMAS
ta
Ca
CUBA
78
ISLANDS
01
e .4,
w..281A
Turks
Iolanda
wo -
80
HAITI 79
':::? DOMINICAN
REPUBLI?
'
81A
4111;k1
GREATER
4'
PUERTO RICO
81B
os
?Is1.-0GS nimilla
LEEW
'1 ISLANDS
? o Antigua
torrid()
,i/l. Guadeloupe
0 j
Dornink
1
3
inique
%
Barbaric,.
:???? 0
ANTILLES
Rona r
Bank
4A
82
Acuba
60
,
LESSER
ANTILLES
86
Grena
Mar
81A0
0
o
S WINDWARD
ei ISLANDS
Tobas,5
_
) T inIdad
76
CANAL
ZON
P N
771
. COLOMBIA
85
VENEZUELA
8 6
BRITIS
GUIANA
I 95A,',.
85
80
75
70
65
60
25
2C
to
INSET B, NIS 69
SCALE TRUE ALONG THE MERIDIANS
4,0 130 1200 1600 MILES
400 1100 12'00 1600 KILOMETERS
90
WEST
SOUTH ,? AMERICA
ANTARCTICA
AFRICA
AUSTRALI
GREAT
AUSTRALIAN
BIGHT
MADAGASCA
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A00030003uuu1-4
25X6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Next 1 Page(s) In Document Exempt
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
BAR
12
FINLAND
26, PART I
I /MANIA
22
BLACK SEA
26, PART II
4
?
25C
28
28A
SYRIA
53A
PART I
C H
/ 39A
I N
Ide
JORDAN
5
EG PT
LI.A.R. 53A)
AHREIN
fl TAR
%.0/ 39A,
MUSCAT
AN
43C
Lacc
Iola
ETHIO5P5IA
IAN
GO
Maldive
Island.
!NADA ASCAR
tritius
.ANALAND
[ON
BASUTO.
F
AFR1C
Reunion
oundaries
r cognized
ET B
59
30
45 60
r e ease 999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
25X6A
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
rIrt'kTrTTUTT'TT A
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
NIS CORRELATION GUIDE
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP70-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
NIS Correlation Guide
The NIS Correlation Guide indicates major inter-
relationships of NIS subject matter. The Guide is
designed primarily for use by the NIS analysts but it
should also prove useful in the review, editing, and
coordination of the NIS material as well as in the re-
vision of the NIS under the Maintenance Program.
The Guide lists under each NIS section heading the
principal topics in other sections that contain related
subject matter. The topics listed are not all exact
titles; some are titles of subsections, others merely
descriptive. Because of the complexity of the subject
matter involved, only the principal interrelationships
are listed. Additional relationships can be determined
by reference to the detailed outline of other pertinent
sections.
For the Analyst?the Guide is a means for obtaining
more consistency in subject matter and a better bal-
ance of treatment. It is also an aid in cross-referencing.
For the User?the Guide supplements the topical
outline and facilitates reference to other sections con-
taining related subject matter.
For Maintenance the Guide is an aid in determining
gaps in information and in obtaining consistency and
continuity in subject matter throughout the NTS.
Consistent use of the Correlation Guide in all phases
of the NIS Program is designed to result in the produc-
tion of better integrated basic intelligence.
Chapter I-Brief
Since Chapter I is an overview of the whole N IS
area and the text is brief, some topics covering detailed
aspects are eliminated and many of the normal relation-
ships between Chapters H through IX are not evident.
Sections of Chapter I, in contrast with those of other
NIS chapters, are not designed to be issued separately
but are published in a single, integrated volume. The
sections depend upon Chapters II through IX for back-
ground material. The Master Index for an NIS, pub-
lished as frontis material in each Chapter I, indicates
the appropriate 'NIS section where the more detailed
information may be found.
Chapter II-Military Geography
SECTION 20 INTRODUCTION
In addition to other Chapter II sections and Supple-
ments II and IV:
Sec. 31 Rail facilities
Sec. 32 Road facilities
Sec. 33 Waterway characteristics
Sec. 35 Port and naval facilities
Sec. 37 Air facilities
'Sec. 38 Communication centers
Sec. 41 Population concentrations
Sec. 42 Ethnic concentrations
Sec. 43 Cultural concentrations
Sec. 45 Topographic and climatic environmental
factors affecting health
Sec. 52 Boundaries
elpinummirabh6
Sec. 55
Sec. 63
Sec. 64
Sec. 81
Sec. 82
Sec. 83
Ch. IX
SECTION 21
Sec. 22
Sec. 23
Boundary rectification problems
Mining development and mineral re-
sources
Key industries
Strategic problems and special operations
Naval facilities
Air facilities
Physical maps, navigation charts, plans
of urban areas, transportation and eco-
nomic maps
MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGIONS
Coastal zones and landing beaches
Weather conditions affecting military
operations
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ailmwediamils NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
SECTION 21 MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGIONS (Con.)
Sec. 24 Topographic factors affecting military
operations
Sec. 25 Urban areas
Sec. 31 Rai] facilities
Sec. 32 Road facilities
Sec. 33 Waterway characteristics
Sec. 35 Ports and naval facilities
Sec. 37 Air facilities
Sec. 62 Oil fields, refineries, and pipelines; under-
ground installations
Sec. 81 Strategy and defenses; underground in-
stallations
Sec. 82 Naval facilities
Sec. 83 Air facilities
Ch. IX Physical maps, charts, plans of urban
areas, transportation and economic maps;
aerial photography
SECTION 22 COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
Sec. 23 Effects of coastal weather on amphibious
operations
Sec. 24 Coastal and inland terrain, vegetation,
and cross-country movement
Sec. 25 Coastal towns
Sec. 31 Rail, exits inland and major routes near
coasts
Sec. 32 Road, exits inland and major routes near
coasts
Sec. 33 Waterways, exits inland
Sec. 35 Ports and naval facilities
Sec. 37 Air facilities
Sec. 45 Poisonous plants and animals
Sec. 81 Strategic problems, special operations,
and defenses
Sec. 82 Naval facilities
Sec. 83 Air facilities
Ch. IX Approach and landing charts, coastal
oceanographic charts and maps; aerial
photography
Sup. II Coasts and landing beaches
(For related offshore oceanography and marine
climate refer to the appropriate Part of NIS
104 through 107.)
SECTION 23
Sec. 22
Sec. 24
Sec. 37
Sec. 45
Sec. 61
Sec. 76
Sec. 83
PAGE 2
WEATHER AND CLIMATE
Amphibious operations
Effect of climate on state of ground and
cross-country movement
Air operations
Topographic and climatic factors affect-
ing health
Climatic factors affecting agriculture,
fisheries, and forestry
Meteorology
Air operations
Ch. IX Climatic maps
(For related offshore oceanography and marine
climate refer to the appropriate Part of NIS 104
through 107.)
SECTION 24
Sec. 23
Sec. 31
Sec. 32
Sec. 33
Sec. 37
Sec. 61
Sec. 62
Sec. 63
Sec. 83
Ch. IX
TOPOGRAPHY
State of ground; special phenomena, e.g.,
permafrost
Rail facilities
Road facilities
Rivers, canals, and lakes; dams
Air facilities
Forests and vegetation
Geology of fuels; dams
Minerals and metals; mines and quarries
Air facilities
Physical maps, transportation maps, and
economic maps; aerial photography
SECTION 25 URBAN AREAS
Sec. 23 Effect of climate on urbanization; type
of construction; communications; storage
Sec. 24 Geographical characteristics affecting ur-
banization, and man-made landmarks;
water resources
Sec. 31 Intertown rail communications and ade-
quacy; repair and service facilities
Sec. 32 Intertown highway communications and
adequacy; repair and service facilities
Sec. 33 Intertown waterway communications and
adequacy
Sec. 35 Ports
Sec. 37 Air facilities
Sec. 38 Extent and adequacy of telecommunica-
tions
Sec. 41 Size and trends of population
Sec. 42 Ethnic characteristics
Sec. 43 Educational institutions
Sec. 44 Firefighting manpower
Sec. 45 Sanitation and medical facilities
Sec. 46 Housing
Sec. 54 Civil defense shelters; police force
Sec. 61 Storage facilities
Sec. 62 Petroleum storage; electric generating
capacities; natural gas availability
Sec. 63 Availability of construction materials
Sec. 64 Industrial installations
Sec. 81 Land fortifications; billeting; military
storage facilities
Sec. 83 Air facilities; storage facilities
Ch. IX Maps on urban areas, climate, popula-
tion, transportation, and telecommuni-
cations; aerial photography
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 NIS CORRELATION GUIDE ?11.11Niimmirm
Chapter III-Transportation and Telecommunications
SECTION 30 INTRODUCTION
In addition to other Chapter III sections and Supple-
ments I and III, all Chapter VI sections for economi-
cally significant aspects relating to transportation:
Sec. 20 Strategic routes, approaches and internal
routes
Sec. 25 Urban area concentrations
SECTION 31 RAILWAY
Sec. 20 Strategic routes
Sec. 21 Regional aspects of terrain and climate
Sec. 23 Deterrent and destructive weather and
climate effects on equipment and opera-
tions
Sec. 24 Significant terrain characteristics; con-
struction and maintenance problems re-
lated to topography; strategic routes;
water supply
Sec. 25 Important rail junctions; water supply;
electric power
Sec. 32 Interrelation of rail and highway opera-
tions and structures
Sec. 33 Interrelation of rail and inland water-
way operations; bridges and ferries
Sec. 35 Rail and port connections
Sec. 38 Interrelation of rail and telecommunica-
tions operations
Sec. 44 Manpower analysis; standards and prac-
tices of employment; labor relations and
organization
Sec. 46 Health and retirement provisions
Sec. 52 Government control or supervision
Sec. 61 Timber for construction; traffic
Sec. 62 Fuel resources and traffic; developments
in electrification
Sec. 63 Construction materials; ballast; traffic
Sec. 64 Rolling stock production; motive power;
repair facilities; construction materials
and related industry; traffic
Sec. 65 Budget allocations; importation of rail-
road equipment
Sec. 81 Logistics
Ch. IX Railroad maps
SECTION 32 HiGnwAy
Sec. 20 Strategic routes
Sec. 21 Regional aspects of terrain and climate
Sec 23 Deterrent and destructive weather and
climate effects on roads and traffic
TIONFITYWNITT A T,
Sec. 24 Significant terrain characteristics; con-
struction and maintenance problems re-
lated to topography; strategic routes
Sec. 25 Important highway junctions
Sec. 31 Interrelation of highway and rail opera-
tions; bridges and ferries
Sec. 33 Interrelation of highway and inland
waterway operations; bridges and ferries
Sec. 35 Port-highway connections
Sec. 52 Governmental control or supervision
Sec. 61 Agricultural traffic
Sec. 62 Availability and types of fuel; traffic
Sec. 63 Construction materials; traffic
Sec. 64 Production of motor vehicles; construc-
tion materials and related industry;
traffic
Sec. 65 Budget allocations; importation of high-
way equipment
Ch. IX Highway maps
SECTION 33 INLAND WATERWAY
Sec. 20 Strategic routes
Sec. 21 Regional aspects of terrain and climate
Sec. 22 Nearshore oceanography
Sec. 23 Deterrent weather and climate factors
Sec. 24 Significant terrain characteristics; drain-
age pattern; dams, terrain, etc.
Sec. 31 Interrelation of inland waterway and
rail operations; bridges and ferries
Sec. 32 Interrelation of inland waterway and
highway operations; bridges and ferries
Sec. 35 Interrelation of inland waterways and
ports; traffic; clearance
Sec. 36 Shipping routes and ports of call; traffic;
trade
Sec. 52 Governmental control or supervision
Sec. 61 Agricultural traffic
Sec. 62 Dams (hydroelectric) etc.; traffic
Sec. 64 Production of river craft, tugs, etc.;
traffic
Sec. 65 Budget allocations; trade of ports and
economic significance
Ch. IX Inland waterway maps and maps and
charts of ports and harbors
(For related offshore oceanography and marine
climate refer to the appropriate Part of NIS 104
through 107.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
011immummom NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
SECTION 35 Pons AND NAVAL FACILITIES
Sec. 20 Approaches and internal routes; geog-
raphy of area
Sec. 22 Coasts and landing beaches
Sec. 23 Effects of weather and climate on opera-
tions
Sec. 25 Coastal cities
Sec. 31 Rail facilities and clearance
Sec. 32 Highway facilities and clearance
Sec. 33 Interrelation of ports and inland water-
ways
Sec. 36 Shipyards and ports of call
Sec. 52 Governmental control or supervision
Sec. 61 Agricultural traffic
Sec. 62 Storage facilities, electricity, and traffic
Sec. 63 Traffic
Sec. 64 Shipbuilding and ship repair yards;
traffic
Sec. 65 Trade of ports and economic significance
Sec. 82 Naval facilities
Ch. IX Maps and charts of ports and harbors
Sup. I Ports and naval facilities
SECTION 36 MERCHANT MARINE
Sec. 33
Sec. 35
Sec. 44
Sec. 52
Sec. 55
Sec. 62
Sec. 64
Inland ports, traffic, and equipment
Shipyards and personnel
Manpower analysis, standards and prac-
tices of employment, labor relations and
organization
Governmental control or supervision
Place of merchant marine in national
policy; foreign interests
Transportation and availability of fuels
Shipbuilding and repair
SECTION 40 INTRODUCTION
Sm. 65 Shipping and economic relations; ship-
ping subsidies
Sec. 82 Merchant marine and other auxiliary
forces
SECTION 37 CIVIL AIR
Sec. 23
See. 24
Sec. 52
Sec. 55
Sec. 57
Sec. 62
Sec. 64
Sec. 65
Sec. 83
Ch. IX
Air operations
Constructional aspects of airfields
Governmental control or supervision;
legislation
National policies; international aspects
Communist influences
Availability of fuels
Aircraft production
Foreign aid
Air facilities
Civil air maps
SECTION 38 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Sec. 23 Effects of weather and climate on opera-
tions, construction, and maintenance
Sec. 24 Construction problems related to topog-
raphy
Sec. 43 Radio and television
Sec. 52 Governmental control or supervision
Sec. 55 National policies relating to telecommu-
nications
Sec. 58 Propaganda dissemination and jamming
of incoming propaganda
Sec. 62 Power sources
Sec. 64 Telecommunications signal and lighting
equipment
Sec. 71 Communications equipment
Ch. VIII Military communications
Ch. IX Telecommunications maps
Chapter IV- Sociological
In addition to other Chapter IV sections:
Sec. 21 Environmental factors
Sec. 50 Main political factors affecting social
structure, institutions, and attitudes
Sec. 55 National policies toward social problems
Sec. 60 Main economic factors affecting social
structure, institutions, and attitudes
Ch. IX Sociological maps
PAGE 4
SECTION 41
Sec. 21
Sec. 25
Sec. 42
Sec. 44
POPULATION
Climatic and topographic environment
Urbanization awl patterns of settlement
Population traits affecting density and
general movement; distribution of ethnic
groups, minorities, etc.
Relation of age-sex distribution to labor
force and working-age segment of popula-
tion
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 NIS CORRELATION GUIDE
SECTION 41 POPULATION (Continued)
Sec. 45 Health factors in relation to vital rates
Sec. 46 Welfare practices affecting population
growth and distribution
Sec. 52 Administrative divisions as they affect
population distributions
Sec. 55 Population problems and policies
Sec. 60 Main economic factors affecting popula-
tion growth and distribution
Sec. 80 Military manpower
Ch. IX Sociological maps
SECTION 42 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PEOPLE
Sec. 21 Climatic and topographic environment
Sec. 25 Urban areas
Sec. 41 Population patterns
Sec. 43 Effects of religious, educational, and in-
formational institutions in shaping life
and outlook of the people.
Sec. 44 Manpower utilization and its relation to
the social structure
Sec. 45 Health and vigor of the people
Sec. 46 Attitudes of the society toward the wel-
fare of its members
Sec. 50 Main political-historical factors affecting
social attitudes
Sec. 52 Operation and organization of the gov-
ernment
Sec. 53 National control exercised by political
groups
Sec. 54 Legal controls
Sec. 55 National policies
Sec. 58 Themes of propaganda that mold or
modify popular attitudes
Sec. 60 Economic structure and dynamics
Ch. IX Linguistic, ethnological or cultural maps
SECTION 43 RELIGION, EDUCATION, AND PUBLIC IN-
FORMATION
Sec. 38 Radio and television equipment
Sec. 42 Education in social mobility and attitude
formation; religion as a factor in family
and community practices
Sec. 44 Technical education in relation to levels
of skill in professions; adaptability
Sec. 46 Role of religious organizations in social
welfare; influence of educational and in-
formational institutions on maintenance
of public welfare programs
Sec. 51 Constitutional factors relating to free-
dom of press, religion, and education
Sec. 52
Sec. 53
Sec. 55
Sec. 56
Sec. 57
Sec. 58
Sec. 59
or KP
Ch. VII
SECTION 44
Sec. 41
Sec. 42
Sec. 43
Sec. 45
Sec. 46
Sec. 52
Sec. 53
Sec. 54
Sec. 55
Sec. 57
Sec. 58
Sec. 59
or KP
Ch. VI
Sec. 80
Administrative structure, e.g., depart-
ments of education, communications, and
public information or propaganda
Pressure groups and political parties as
they bear on religious conformance, edu-
cation, and particularly on public infor-
mation
Relation of educational, religious, and in-
formational factors to national policies
Censorship as it relates to subversive
propaganda
Subversive activities in educational, re-
ligious, and informational services
Availability of informational media and
degree of contact
Key personalities
Scientific institutions and research
MANPOWER
Statistics on manpower grouping and
regional distribution
Class lines, social organization and social
values; physical qualifications
Educational level, vocational education
and research
Medical facilities and provision for emer-
gencies; industrial hygiene and the gen-
eral level of health
Relation of levels of living, social secu-
rity, and remedial measures for social
problems, including rehabilitation of the
handicapped, to general effectiveness of
manpower
Organization and operation of ministry
of labor; mediation machinery
Political parties and pressure groups rep-
resenting labor
Police force and attitudes of organized
labor toward law observance
Policies relating to labor force and organi-
zation
Exposure of labor to subversive activity
Exposure of labor to domestic and foreign
propaganda
Key personalities
Economic, stability and productivity as
a reflection of the character of the labor
force; relocation of land; manpower;
skills; growth and development of indus-
trial centers
Military manpower
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 45 HEALTH AND SANITATION
Sec. 23
Sec. 24
Sec. 25
Sec. 41
Sec. 42
Sec. 43
Sec. 44
Sec. 46
Sec. 52
Sec. 55
Sec. 61
Sec.. 64
Sec. 76
Ch. VIII
Ch. IX
Relation of climate to incidence of dis-
ease and to general health
Effect of topography on distribution of
disease, on limitation of vectors, and on
water supply
Urban area utilities and services affect-
ing public health and sanitation
Vital statistics
Attitude toward hygiene, toward coop-
erative effort on behalf of community
health
Relation of religious, educational, and
informational institutions to public health
and sanitation
Manpower capabilities in the medical
field; manpower effectiveness as a re-
flection of medical care
Effect of health insurance and health
legislation on general level of public
health
Organization and administration of pub-
lic health; controls
Policies toward health and sanitation
problems
Availability and kinds of food
Industrial hygiene
Medical research
Military medical services
Sociological maps
SECTION 46 WELFARE
JULY 1957
Sec. 25 City districts; welfare aspects
Sec. 41 Effects of living levels on population
growth; vital statistics
Sec. 42 Attitudes toward welfare problems and
programs; welfare problems and social
attitudes
Sec. 43 Religious agencies and educational pro-
grams related to public welfare
Sec. 44 Dependent and unemployed segments of
population; labor legislation and rehabili-
tation of handicapped
Sec. 45 Medical care facilities and general health
conditions as a factor in the standard of
living; nutrition standards
Sec. 52 Social security administration
Sec. 53 Stand of political parties and pressure
groups on public welfare issues
Sec. 54 Types and incidence of crime relating to
social problems; controls
Sec. 55 National policies with respect to social
welfare
Sec. 57 Vulnerabilities to subversion stemming
from depressed socio-economic conditions
Sec. 61 Food balance sheet; rural living condi-
tions; agricultural welfare programs
Sec. 64 Industrial welfare programs
Sec. 65 Budgetary factors relating to social wel-
fare programs
Chapter V-Political
SECTION 50 INTRODUCTION
In addition to other Chapter V sections, Supplement
VI, and NIS 108:
Sec. 20 Strategic significance of the area
Sec. 40 Sociological factors affecting major politi-
cal institutions, policies, and stability
Sec. 60 Major economic factors affecting political
strength and stability
Sec. 61 Effects of land ownership and land use
systems and of level of food production
on political strength and stability
Sec. 65 Effects on political strength and stability
of domestic and foreign trade and finance
policies of the country (e.g., tariffs, sub-
sidies, and incentives)
PAGE 6
Sec. 80 Effects on political strength and stabil-
ity of position of armed forces in the
country, including their political influ-
ence.
Ch. IX Political maps
SECTION 51 THE CONSTITUTIONAL SYSTEM
Sec. 40 Major sociological factors affecting the
constitution and its application
Sec. 42 Social structure, values, and attitudes
affecting constitutional provisions; posi-
tion of minorities in the society
Sec. 43 Role of religious, educational, and infor-
mational institutions in shaping consti-
tutional provisions
Sec. 80 Legal basis for existence, control and
overall structure of the armed forces
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 NIS CORRELATION GUIDE
SECTION 52 STRUCTURE OF THE GOVERNMENT
Sec. 25 Administrative significance of principal
cities
Sec. 31 Government control of railroads
Sec. 54 Civil defense and penal procedures; civil
police
Sec. 55 Policy-making components
Sec. 56 Intelligence and security agencies
Sec. 57 Subversive affiliations of key personalities
Sec. 58 Propaganda agencies
Sec. 59 Key personalities
or KP
Ch. TX Political maps?administrative subdivi-
sions
SECTION 53 POLITICAL DYNAMICS
Sec. 40 Major sociological factors affecting politi-
cal dynamics
Sec. 42 Minorities, attitudes of the people
Sec. 43 Effect of religious beliefs on political
dynamics
Sec. 44 Labor-management tensions
Sec. 46 Effects of living levels, major social prob-
lems, and social security systems on
political dynamics
Sec. 51 Constitutional aspects; civil rights
Sec. 52 Legal aspects
Sec. 55 Effects of policies of political parties on
national policies
Sec. 57 Subversive elements affecting political
dynamics
Sec. 58 Propaganda agencies and themes
Sec. 59 Key personalities
or KP
Sup. VI Communist role in politics
SECTION 54 PUBLIC ORDER AND SAFETY
Sec. 41 Size of alien, immigrant and other seg-
ments of population which may present
special police problems
Sec. 42 Attitude of the people toward law ob-
servance
Sec. 44 Police manpower; forced labor
Sec. 45 Emergency relief measures
Sec. 46 Delinquency
Sec. 51 Constitutional aspects
Sec. 52 Legal aspects
Sec. 55 Civil defense policies
Sec. 56 Security agencies
Ch. VIII National Guard; paramilitary services;
civil defense aspects
Sup. VI Communist infiltration of police services
SECTION 55 NATIONAL POLICIES
Sec. 36
Sec. 42
Sec. 43
Sec. 44
Sec. 46
Sec. 53
Sec. 60
Sec. 65
Sec. 80
SECTION 56
Sec. 43
Sec. 51
Sec. 52
Sec. 54
Sec. 55
Sec. 57
Sec. 58
Sec. 59
or KP
Sec. 65
Ch. VIII
Sup. VI
SECTION 57
Ch. III
Sec. 40
Sec. 42
Sec. 44
Sec. 46
Sec. 51
Sec. 52
Sec. 53
Merchant marine?subsidies, regulation,
and international relations
Characteristics of the people affecting
content and execution of national policies
Effects of religious, edncational, and in-
formational institutions upon formulation
and execution of national policies
Relationship of working conditions, labor
relations and organizations to national
policies
Welfare policies, including social security;
effects of living levels and major social
problems on other national policies
Effects of political parties and pressure
groups on formation of policies
Role of the state in controlling economic
activity
Foreign investments and foreign aid
Role of the armed forces, in implementa-
tion of national defense policies
INTELLIGENCE AND SECURITY
Censorship
Civil rights
Legal aspects
Civil police forces
International relations
Effects of security operations upon sub-
versive activities
Censorship
Key personalities
Budgetary aspects
Intelligence and security components of
armed forces
Communist activities
SUBVERSION
Subversive influences in transportation
and communications
Major sociological factors influencing sub-
versive activities
Susceptibility of the people to subversive
influence, infiltration in cultural organi-
zations
Identification of subversive activities with
labor organizations
Effects of living levels and major social
problems upon subversive activities
Legislation and governmental practices
pertaining to subversive activities
Identification of subversive activities in
government agencies
Identification of subversive activities with
political parties
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
?gascwwwwww/m. NIS STANDARD INSTRUCT IONS JULY 1959
SECTION 57 SUBVERSION (Continued)
Sec. 54 Subversive influences in police organiza-
tion
Sec. 55 Subversive influences in national policies
Sec. 56 Subversive influences in intelligence and
security organization
Sec. 58 Subversive aspects
Sec. 59 Key personalities
or KP
Ch. VI Subversive influences in commerce and
industry
Ch. VIII Subversive influences in armed forces
Sup. VI Communism
NIS 108 International Communism
SECTION 58 PROPAGANDA
Sec. 38 Telecommunication facilities for dissemi-
nation
Sec. 42 Attitudes of the people and receptivity
Sec. 43 Information media and methods used by
pressure groups
SECTION 60 INTRODUCTION
In addition
ment V:
Sec. 20
Sec. 30
Sec. 44
Sec. 55
SECTION 61
Sec. 23
Sec. 24
Sec. 31
Sec. 32
Sec. 33
Sec. 35
Sec. 36
Sec. 41
Sec. 42
Sec. 43
Sec. 44
Sec. 45
Sec. 64
Sec. 65
Ch. IX
PAGE 8
Sec. 53 Propaganda by political parties and pres-
sure groups
Sec. 55 Basic national policies
Sec. 57 Role of propaganda in subversive activi-
ties
Sup. VI Communist propaganda
SECTION 59 BIOGRAPHIES OF KEY PERSONALITIES
Sec. 42 Social structure, values, and attitudes
affecting character of leadership groups
Sec. 43 Background of key personalities in re-
ligion, education, and public information
Sec. 44 Key personalities in labor organizations
Sec. 52 Political affiliations
Sec. 53 Political affiliations
Sec. 56 Personalities in the intelligence and se-
curity services
Sec. 57 Subversive affiliations of key personali-
ties
Ch. VIII Personalities in the armed forces
Chapter V1-Economic
to other Chapter VI sections and Supple-
Strategic areas
Aspects of transportation
Labor force
State control of economic activity
AGRICULTURE, FISHERIES, AND FORESTRY
Weather and climatic conditions
Descriptive analysis of area and topog-
raphy
Rail transport facilities
Road transport facilities
Waterway transport facilities
Port transport facilities
Fishing fleets
Geographical distribution of population;
growth
Characteristics and attitudes of agricul-
tural population
Level of literacy and education
Labor force; labor organizations
Environmental factors; plant and animal
diseases
Farm machinery; commercial processing;
chemical fertilizers
Foreign trade in monetary units; budget-
ary aspects; farm credit
Terrain-classification maps and economic
maps
SECTION 62
Sec. 25
Sec. 31
Sec. 32
Sec. 33
Sec. 35
Sec. 36
Sec. 44
Sec. 63
Sec. 64
Sec. 65
Ch. IX
Sup. V
SECTION 63
Sec. 31
Sec. 32
Sec. 33
Sec. 35
Sec. 36
Sec.- 44
Sec. 62
Sec. 64
Sec. 65
Ch. IX
FUELS AND POWER
Urban areas
Rail transport facilities
Road transport facilities
Waterway transport facilities
Fuel and power installations; trans-load-
ing facilities; port storage
Colliers and tankers
Labor force
Consumption of coke and pig iron plants
Manufacture of equipment
Foreign trade in monetary units; budget-
ary aspects
Economic maps
Petroleum
MINERALS AND METALS
Rail transport facilities
Road transport facilities
Waterway transport facilities
Port facilities
Cargo ships
Labor force
Solid fuels
Manufacture of equipment; further proc-
essing
Foreign trade in monetary units; budget-
ary aspects
Economic maps
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 NIS CORRELATION GUIDE
SECTION 64
Sec. 25
Sec. 31
Sec. 32
Sec. 33
Sec. 35
Sec. 36
Sec. 37
Sec. 38
Sec. 44
Sec. 61
Sec. 62
Sec. 63
Sec. 65
MANUFACTURING AND CONSTRUCTION
Urban construction and programs
Rolling stock inventory and locomotive
park; transport facilities
Road transport facilities; vehicles
Waterway transport; river craft, tugs,
etc.
Repair facilities; equipment; transport
facilities; shipyards
Merchant ship construction
Civil aircraft inventory
Telecommunications and signal lighting
equipment
Labor force
Raw material production
Type and availability of fuels and power
Type and availability of minerals and
metals for manufacturing and construc-
tion
Foreign trade in monetary units
Sec. 71
Sec. 72
Sec. 75
Sec. 76
Sec. 81
Sec. 82
Sec. 83
Ch. IX
SECTION 65
Sec. 61
Sec. 62
Sec. 63
Sec. 64
Ch. VII
Sec. 80
Chapter VII? Scientific
Electronics
Air, ground and naval weapons
Chemicals
Optical and photographic equipment and
precision instruments
Stocks of military vehicles; explosives
and ammunition
Naval construction
Military aircraft inventory
Economic maps?industrial installations
TRADE AND FINANCE
Trade statistics on agriculture and food
Trade statistics on fuels and power
Trade statistics on minerals and metals
Trade statistics on manufacturing and
construction
Budgetary aspects relating to scientific
development
Budgetary aspects relating to national
defense
SECTION 70 INTRODUCTION
In addition to other Chapter VII sections:
Sec. 43 Scientific educational facilities
Sec. 52 Governmental administration
Sec. 55 National policies
Sec. 64 Existing and potential industrial support
Sec. 65 Budgetary appropriations
SECTION 71 ELECTRONICS
Sec. 38 Electronics
Sec. 64 Radar, radio receivers, and transmitters
Ch. VIII Electronic materiel
KP Key personalities
SECTION 72 AIR, GROUND, AND NAVAL WEAPONS
Sec. 64 Guns, explosive devices, and ammunition
Ch. VIII Armed forces materiel developments
KP Key personalities
SECTION 73 ATOMIC ENERGY
Sec. 52 Governmental administration
Sec. 55 National policies
Sec. 62 Nuclear power
Sec. 63 Uranium mines and potential sources
Sec. 64 Existing and potential industrial support
Sec. 65 Governmental appropriations
Ch. VIII
KP
SECTION. 74
Sec. 23
Sec. 24
Sec. 25
Sec. 41
Sec. 45
Sec. 55
Sec. 61
Sec. 64
Sec. 65
Ch. VIII
KP
SECTION 75
Sec. 23
Sec. 24
Sec. 25
Sec. 41
Sec. 45
Sec. 55
Sec. 61
Sec. 64
Atomic warfare developments
Key personalities
BIOLOGICAL WARFARE
Climatic factors
Vegetation and terrain factors
Urban area characteristics
Population distribution
Health and sanitation
National policies
Food supply
Existing and potential industrial support
Governmental appropriations
Biological warfare equipment and de-
velopments
Key personalities
CHEMICAL WARFARE
Climatic factors
Vegetation and terrain factors
Urban area characteristics
Population distribution
Health and sanitation
National policies
Food supply
Explosives, flame-throwers, incendiaries;
war gases and smoke preparations; chem-
ical industries
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 9
SECTION 75
Sec. 65
Ch. VIII
KP
SECTION 76
Sec. 22
Sec. 23
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
CHEMICAL WARFARE (Continued) Sec. 45 Organizations, installations, personnel rel-
ative to military medicine
Governmental appropriations
Sec. 62 Fuel technology
Chemical warfare equipment and devel-
Sec. 63 Metals, alloys
opments
Sec. 64 Optical and photographic equipment, pre-
Key personalities cision instruments, chemicals, and critical
PHYSICAL SCIENCES, MATHEMATICS, AND and substitute materials
MEDICINE Ch. VIII Armed forces materiel
Oceanography, capabilities, research ac-NIS 104? Marine climate and oceanography
tivities 107
Meteorological services KP Key personalities
SECTION 80
In addition
Sec. 41
Sec. 42
Sec. 44
Sec. M
Sec. 55
Sec. 65
SECTION 81
Sec. 20
Sec. 21
Sec. 22
Sec. 31
Sec. 32
Sec. 33
Sec. 43
Sec. 44
Sec. 45
Sec. 52
Sec. 53
Sec. 54
Sec. 55
Sec. 56
Sec. 57
Sec. 58
Sec. 64
Sec. 71
Sec. 72
PAGE 10
Chapter virit- Armed Forces
INTRODUCTION
to other Chapter VIII sections:
Age-sex distribution of population, etc.
Attitudes toward armed forces; wartime
morale
Quality of manpower
Constitutional provision for armed forces
Position of armed forces in the nation;
traditions
Military budget; fiscal control
GROUND FORCES
Strategic areas
Special operational aspects
Amphibious operational aspects
Railroads?lines of communications
Highways?lines of communications
Inland waterways?lines of communica-
tions
Premilitary training
Available manpower; war casualties
Environmental factors affecting quality
of manpower; disease incidence of mili-
tary importance
Position in governmental structure and
government supply and procurement
agencies
Pressure groups
Police forces
Defense policies
Participation of military in intelligence
ac tivi ties
Inffltration of subversive elements
Utilization of propaganda
Supply potentialities in motor vehicles,
including tanks, self-propelled guns, etc.;
explosives, missiles, telecommunications
equipment, chemicals, etc.
Experimental materiel and weapons
Experimental materiel, weapons and
equipment
Sec. 75
Sec. 82
Ch. IX
KP
SECTION 82
Sec. 22
Sec. 23
Sec. 35
Sec. 36
Sec. 38
Sec. 44
Sec. 52
Sec. 55
Sec. 57
Sec. 64
Sec. 65
Sec. 71
Sec. 72
Sec. 80
Sec. 81
Sec. 83
Ch. IX
KP
SECTION 83
Sec. 20
Sec. 23
Sec. 24
Sec. 31
Chemical warfare equipment
Marine corps
Physical maps, transportation, communi-
cations and special armed forces maps
Key personalities
NAVAL FORCES
Amphibious operations
Effects of weather on amphibious opera-
tions
Ports and naval facilities; bases
Merchant marine and other auxiliary
forces
Naval communications network
Manpower factor in general
Position in governmental structure
Defense policies
Infiltration of subversive elements
Vessel construction and repair
Naval budget
Radio and other communications equip-
ment
Experimental materiel; weapons and
equipment
Structure of armed forces; personnel and
ship strength; budget
Coastal defenses
Naval air arm
Maps and charts of ports and harbors
and telecommunications maps; special
armed forces maps
Key personalities
AIR FORCES
Strategic location
Weather and climate
Suitability for airfield construction
Significance of railroads in organization
for supply
4m61110611111111111
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 NIS CORRELATION GUIDE alliumnmmr
SECTION 83 AIR FORCES (Continued)
Sec. 32
Sec. 33
Sec. 35
Sec. 37
Sec. 44
Sec. 52
Sec. 53
Significance of highways in organization
for supply
Significance of inland waterways in or-
ganization for supply
Significance of ports in organization for
supply
Civil air facilities and available aircraft
and international agreement
Manpower availability
Position in governmental structure
Political stability
Sec. 55
Sec. 57
Sec. 62
Sec. 63
Sec. 64
Sec. 71
Sec. 72
Sec. 81
Sec. 82
Ch. IX
KP
Defense policies
Infiltration of subversive elements
Petroleum availability
Air facilities construction materials
Aircraft manufacture
Electronic equipment
Aircraft weapons; experimental materiel
Antiaircraft weapons, organization, and
strength
Naval air organization
Air and air-facility maps and charts;
special armed forces maps
Key personalities
Chapter IX-Map and Chart Appraisal
SECTION 90 GENERAL SECTION 92 INDEXES OF MAPPING DATA AND COVER-
Sec. 91 Mapping deficiencies AGE
SECTION 91 SELECTED MAPS, CHARTS, AND PLANS
See. 55 Rectification of borders
Sec. 90 Map coverage and programs
Sec. 91 Recommended maps and charts
Supplement I-Ports and Naval Facilities
Produced in conjunction with SECTION 35. See
sections listed under SECTION 35 in Correlation Guide.
Supplement II-Coasts and Landing Beaches
Produced in conjunction with SECTION 22. See
sections listed under SECTION 22 in Correlation Guide.
Supplement III-Telecommunications
Produced in conjunction with SECTION 38. See
sections listed under SECTION 38 in Correlation Guide.
Supplement IV-Urban Areas
Produced in conjunction with SECTION 25. See
sections listed under SECTION 25 in Correlation Guide.
PAGE 11
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Supplement V- Petroleum
Produced in conjunction with SECTION 62. See
.sections listed under SECTION 62 in Correlation Guide.
Supplement VI-Communism
Ch. III
Penetration of telecommunication and
Sec. 55
Effects on national policies
transportation networks
Sec. 56
Infiltration in intelligence and security
Sec. 43
Infiltration of religious, educational, and
organizations
information organizations
Sec. 57
Subversive activities
Sec. 44
Penetration of labor organizations
Sec. 58
Propaganda aspects
Sec. 50
Historical setting
Sec. 59
Subversive affiliations of key personalities
Sec. 52
Parliamentary role and infiltration in
or KP
government
Sec. 64
Penetration of industry
Sec. 53
Party structure and role in elections
Ch. VIII
Infiltration of armed forces
Sec. 54
Infiltration in police organization
NIS 108
International Communism
Marine Climate and Oceanography
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
See Sections 2 and 3 below
, SECTION 2 MARINE CLIMATE
Sec. 23 Weather and climatic factors
Sec. 53
Sec. 55
Sec. 57
Sec. 58
PAGE 12
SECTION 3 OCEANOGRAPHY
Sec. 22 Oceanography relating to coasts and
landing beaches
International Communism
Legalized and front organizations
International relationships
Subversive organizations
Propaganda agencies
Sec. 59 Key personalities
or KP
Sup. VI Communism
Key Personalities
This Publication covers key personalities of all
NIS Chapters from II through VIII.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 allimmmodowd,
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
CONTENTS
Page
A. Transmittal of material
1
1. Letter of transmittal
1
2. Manuscript
1
3. Graphic material
1
B. Text specifications
1
1. Typing of text
1
2. Text headings
2
3. References to figures and text
2
4. Quotations and extract matter
2
5. Sample pages
2
6. Footnotes
2
7. References to sources
2
C. Tabular specifications
3
1. Tabulations
3
2. Tables
3
3. Typing of tables
3
4. Table titles and figure numbers
3
5. Table stubs and column headings
3
6. Table footnotes and source references
3
7. Conventional entries
4
8. Statistical totals
4
9. Table construction
4
D. Graphic specifications
5
1. General
5
2. Photographs
5
3. Maps
5
E. General
6
1. Chapter I and NIS Supplement specifications
6
2. Consolidated chapters
6
3. Classification and control
6
4. Treatment of names
7
5. Technical terminology
7
6. Statistical data
7
7. Editorial style
7
PAGE i
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1958 4=iilmommotwt,
Editorial Instructions
A. Transmittal of material
1. LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
NIS material delivered to the Office of Basic Intelli-
gence (OBI/CIA) requires a letter of transmittal
(original and 2 copies). The following are itemized in
the letter: number of pages of typed manuscript, in-
cluding Table of Contents, List of Figures, text, tables,
caption list, list of insert graphics, number of graphic
items submitted, and apron material. The letter con-
tains specifications regarding control aspects of material
involved. It also specifies security classification and
control for those insert maps of which extra copies are
to be printed without the NIS references, and the num-
ber of copies of such maps desired by the contributor.
2. MANUSCRIPT
NIS manuscript is submitted in 3 complete assembled
copies. Each of the 3 assembled sets of manuscript
includes in sequence 1) title page, 2) Table of Contents,
3) text, 4) tables, 5) caption list), 6) list of insert graph-
ics, and 7) apron material.
Pagination begins with the first page of text of each
section and is consecutive throughout the manuscript
(including each page of the tables, which follow the
text in sequence of figure numbers). Pagination is by
other means than a numbering machine, which is re-
served for use in OBI processing.
Manuscript with more than nominal alterations is
not acceptable. Text or tabular material photostated
or similarly reproduced from printed or other material
is submitted in positive print form and legible in ap-
proximately typewriter elite size.
The supporting items, typed triple space, are as
follows:
Title page, containing chapter or supplement num-
ber and title, section number and title, and the state-
ment "This is a preliminary draft of Section
NIS . It has not been finally edited or reconciled
with other NIS sections and should not be reproduced.
This section has been approved for use in the NIS by
(agency), (month, year). This is the uniform date for
the entire section and will appear on each page of the
published section."
Table of Contents for each section, including to an
appropriate depth the headings appearing in the text.
Modified tables of contents are submitted to meet the
requirements for supplements, NIS on Ocean Areas,
and consolidated chapters. Each Table of Contents
is immediately followed by a List of Figures which
lists in sequence all figures with the following details
for each: Figure number as determined by sequence in
tentative placement, category identification (Table,
Photo, Map, etc.), and the caption as it appears with
the figure or in appropriate short-title form. This List
of Figures is immediately followed by a Contributor
Statement, as approved by the NIS Committee, show-
ing the principal agency or agencies contributing to
and responsible for preparation of each NIS unit.
Caption list (used for typesetting the captions of
all graphic items). Figure numbers for all tables and
graphics are listed in sequence. The exact wording of
the captions for all graphics is included. When appli-
cable, the caption list is followed by a list of insert
graphics. The titles of tables are not included in the
caption list since this information is included sepa-
rately with each table.
3. GRAPHIC MATERIAL
Graphic material, including photographs, is assem-
bled separately from manuscript, in 8 complete sets
with each item in numerical sequence according to fig-
ure number. The 3 sets of each item consist of an
original and 2 copies of all black and white material,
and 3 color proofs for multicolor graphic material. The
original and copies of all graphic items are plainly
marked with the NIS area number and section and fig-
ure number. The original plates of multicolor maps
are retained by contributor until receipt of memoran-
dum from OBI. These originals are then forwarded
as directed by OBI for final reproduction.
B. Text specifications
1. TYPING OF TEXT
Text is submitted in 3 copies, typed on one side only,
with the original on substantial 8 x 121/2" bond paper.
Duplicating process may be used if submitted copies
are thoroughly legible. Text is typed triple space.
All paragraphs without headings begin with 5-space
indent. Normal capitalization is used throughout (in-
cluding headings), without use of continuous capitali-
zation or of underlining except for foreign or other
terms to be italicized. The last word of a typed line
is always a complete word, avoiding ending any line
with a hyphen. Manuscript conforms to the sample
pages, with margins as shown. Each manuscript
page, as shown, includes in top margin the name of
the agency of primary responsibility, date (manuscript
completion date, for processing control purposes only),
classification, and any applicable security control state-
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
ment, NIS number and section number. The first
page of text includes the section number and title.
Text pages are numbered consecutively within each sec-
tion (not using a numbering machine, which is reserved
for OBI processing).
2. TEXT HEADINGS
Headings used in NIS text material are as follows:
(Grade of head,
not typed in ms.)
II. Military Geography (Chapter title)
22. Coasts and Landing Beaches (Section title)
A. General (No. l)
1. Coasts (No. 2)
a. Northern peninsula ? text follows (No. 3)
(1) Williams Bay ? text follows (No. 4)
(a) Vicinity of Port Smith?text (No. 5)
1) Seaward Approaches ? text (No. 6)
a) Anchorage areas?text (No. 7)
Chapter and section titles are centered. No. 1 heads
are typed flush with left margin of text; inferior heads
are successively indented 5 typewriter spaces. No. 1
and No. 2 heads stand alone; text begins on next line
with indentation of 5 spaces and thereafter flush left.
Remaining heads each end with space, two hyphens,
space; text follows immediately on same line, with suc-
ceeding lines beginning flush with left text margin.
Each standard heading includes a title in addition
to letter or number. Titles are as brief as feasible.
Except for proper names, only the initial letter of each
title is capitalized.
Headings may stand alone when immediately fol-
lowed by the next grade of head. For certain ma-
terial (as in Coasts and Landing Beaches), a heading
may be followed on the next line or lines by coordinates,
hydrographic chart references, etc.
Numbers used to itemize a series of items within
text carry a single parenthesis, e.g., 1).
3. REFERENCES TO FIGURES AND TEXT
Figures (including both tables and graphic material)
are cited in the text by using figure numbers assigned
by the contributor. Reference may be integral in a
sentence, ". . . as shown in FIGURE 32-16 . . ." or
parenthetical, ". . (FiGuREs 42-3 through 42-6). . ."
It is often desirable to use the reference flexibly to dif-
ferentiate types of figures, e.g., ". . . tabulated in FIG-
URE 42-7 . . .or ". . . shown on the map, FIGURE
42-8 . . ." Statements such as ". . . in the follow-
ing table . . .or ". . . in the table above . . ." are
undesirable because the relationship may not be re-
tained in printing. When related text is not to be
adjacent to reference table details, the text is appro-
priately amplified to incorporate significant details.
Because figure numbering is subject to change in pub-
lication or maintenance, reference to tables or graphic
material in other sections or chapters is by abbreviated
caption, type of material, and section number in which
PAGE 2
it appears, e.g., (see population density map, SEC-
TION 41).
Tentative placement within text of tables and appro-
priate graphic items is indicated by large carets with
figure numbers on the right margin of text pages (see
sample pages). Only one caret is used for each figure.
Figures expected to follow printed text, such as fold-in
maps, are itemized after the last line of manuscript text.
Because subsection numbering and titles are subject
to change in publication or maintenance, cross
references are made to the highest order of text topic
which will adequately indicate where the referenced
material will be found. Within sections and especially
within lengthy sections, however, references to subsec-
tions may be quite detailed if desirable. Another sec-
tion of the same chapter is referred to by ". . . (SEC-
TION 81, this Chapter) . . .or ". . . (see Section on
Ground Forces) . . ." Reference to a section of
another chapter is as follows: ". . . (CHAPTER IV,
SECTION 41) . . ." or ". . . (see Population) . . ."
4. QUOTATIONS AND EXTRACT MATTER
Quotations up to approximately 3 typewritten lines
are included in text within quotation marks. Longer
quotations, and subordinate material likewise to be
printed as "extract" in smaller type, are without quota-
tion marks, indented 5 spaces for all lines and typed
double space.
5. SAMPLE PAGES
The accompanying two pages are sample pages of
text manuscript for the guidance of typists.
6. FOOTNOTES
When footnotes are considered necessary, up to 3
asterisks per page may be used. Footnote material of
general significance for a segment of text may be printed
as a NOTE. In manuscript the footnote is inserted on
the line following the reference, separated from the
text by solid lines above and below; the footnote
begins indented 1 space from left margin, and is typed
double space (see sample pages).
7. REFERENCES TO SOURCES
References to sources are confined as much as possible
to the topic Comments on Principal Sources, where the
evaluative discussion may be followed by an alpha-
betical listing of principal sources to which consecutive
numbers are assigned. If sources are grouped by subject
categories, they are numbered consecutively rather
than by successive groups; details of a source are given
only once and thereafter only the identifying number is
listed. In text, and in both text and figure footnotes,
this facilitates brief reference, e. g., ". . . , based on
Source 1 estimates, . . ." or ". . . (Source 1) . . ."
When only a few principal sources are identified and
are not assigned source numbers in the Comments sub-
section, text or footnote reference thereto is as brief
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS am610111111im
as feasible. A source cited in text but not included in
Comments on Principal Sources may be described in
necessary detail but as briefly as possible. Author,
title of source, and date normally are sufficient, typed
in capitals and lowercase set off from text by paren-
theses.
In the numbered listing of principal sources, each
item is typed double space and is continuous in the
following order and typewriter style:
Author, authors, editor or agency; last name first,
capital and lowercase, period. Title of book or other
separate publication; capitals and lowercase, under-
lined, followed within parentheses by capitals and
lowercase translation if required, period. Title of
article from periodical in quotes, capitals and lower-
case, comma; followed by name of periodical, under-
lined, comma; edition, series, part, volume, number,
selected pages, year of periodical as necessary, separated
by commas in that order, with capital only at beginning
of series of items, abbreviated as ed., ser., pt., vol.,
no., p., period. Arabic numerals used throughout
except Roman after pt. Place of publication in capitals
and lowercase, followed by colon and publishing agency
if given, otherwise period. Date, period; n. d. if not
dated, period. Total pages if desired.
When several works by the same author or agency
are listed, the name is not repeated but is replaced by
dashes in subsequent listings.
C. Tabular specifications
1. TABULATIONS
Relatively simple tabular presentations, generally
with three vertical columns of data or less and a limited
number of entries, are treated as tabulations. Tabula-
tions are incorporated in text manuscript without figure
number or title (see sample pages). They are typed
double space, with no continuous capitalization or
underlining.
2. TABLES
More complex tabular presentations, generally with
stubs and three or more vertical columns of data, are
treated as tables. Each table has a descriptive title
preceded by a figure number. Each table is constructed
to stand as an entity, because of possible separation
from text in publication or use.
3. TYPING OF TABLES
Each table is typed in three copies, on one side only,
original on substantial bond paper. Duplicating proc-
ess may be used if, submitted copies are thoroughly
checked for legibility. Tables are typed double space,
with no continuous capitals or underlining in caption,
stubs, column headings, or data entries. Tables are
typed on 8 x 123 bond paper whenever practicable.
For more extensive presentations, larger paper may be
used, if possible retaining the 12% inch vertical dimen-
sion. Several separate 8 x 123/i pages may be used to
continue a table. When more than one page is used to
present a table or when there is significant relationship
between columns in separate tables, in typing it is im-
portant to maintain alinement and space relationship
of columns on all pages. Each page includes in the
margin, as in text pages, the name of the agency of
primary responsibility, date, classification, any security
control, NIS number, and section number.
4. TABLE TITLES AND FIGURE NUMBERS
Table titles are as brief as possible consistent with
adequate indication of table content. Date or dates
are included in the title unless table content is general-
ized or in itself provides adequate date information.
The area or political name is incorporated when feasi-
ble, in adjective form ("Value of French Imports, 1950-
1956") or in noun form after substance of caption
("Land Use, France, 1956").
The figure number which precedes each table title is
composed of the section number followed by a hyphen
and the serial number of the table in the sequence of
all figures (including all tables and graphic items)
within a section, according to caretted location in the
submitted manuscript.
5. TABLE STUBS AND COLUMN HEADINGS
Stubs (horizontal descriptive entries normally to the
left of vertical columns of data) and column headings
are carefully worded and coordinated. Proper selec-
tion and description of categories minimizes footnotes
and exceptions which require explanation.
In general, the heading at the top of a column covers
all material presented in the column without insertion
of additional headings farther down the column. The
same applies to side heads and lines of data. Where
intermediate headings seem necessary, the material
generally is presented as separate tables. However,
related categories of items (such as apply to various
weapons) may be usefully combined in a single table
by making column headings more comprehensive and
using subheadings in columns and/or indicating a gen-
eral change in category. Preliminary consultation
with OBI on such matters is advisable.
6. TABLE FOOTNOTES AND SOURCE REFER-
ENCES
Footnotes to tables are indicated by up to 3 asterisks
and thereafter by up to 3 daggers (the typewriter sym-
bol # is used for a, dagger). These symbols are placed
at the left of numerical column data, and at the right
of headings, stubs, mixed or reading column data.
Footnotes are typed double space, under the table,
starting indented 5 spaces from left margin of table.
The number of footnotes to tables is minimized by
incorporation of the material into related text when
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
IL NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
feasible, by careful phrasing of stubs and headings, by
consolidation in a reduced number of footnotes, or by
consolidation in a single NOTE carried as a footnote
without symbol.
When source reference or references are considered
necessary and apply to a table as a whole, they are
indicated by "Data from Source 13 . . ." beginning at,
the left text margin and typed 2 spaces below a line at
the bottom of the table proper. If a NOTE item is
used it precedes the conventional abbreviation n a and
explanation, if used (see conventional entries below),
which in turn precedes any symbol footnotes. An en-
tire table taken verbatim from a source (sometimes as
the only available data, and not necessarily fully ac-
cepted by the contributor) is so indicated in related
text, by explanation within the table, or by footnote ;
in such cases it is generally desirable, so far as feasible,
to follow the detailed format of the original material.
7. CONVENTIONAL ENTRIES
To avoid blank spaces in columns of data, the follow-
ing conventional entries are made as appropriate in
table columns:
ENTRY MEANING
not applicable; no footnote used
n a data not available, inadequate data, etc.; n and a
separated and underlined; explained where necessary
as "Data not available" in footnote
0 indicates zero quantity or reading in columns of
uniform data such as weather statistics; no foot-
note used
none used instead of 0 when data are not uniform, e.g., to
indicate known lack of production of a significant
commodity; underline; no footnote used
insig quantity too insignificant to record; underline; no
footnote used
When some items in a column are estimated they are
preceded by est in underlined lowercase, unless symbol
and footnote are preferable because of an otherwise'
appreciably narrower column or estimated items can
be feasibly covered in other footnotes.
Ditto marks are not used in tables. For this purpose
do in underlined lowercase is used. Generally, identical
entries in figure columns are repeated. It is likewise
desirable to repeat word entries which have significance.
8. STATISTICAL TOTALS
When n a or insig are included with vertical or hori-
zontal data entries for which a total is given that only
moderately exceeds the sum of the specific entries, no
footnote explanation may be required. However,
when the total is exactly the sum of the specific figures
generally it is advisable to indicate that n a or similar
items are not reflected in the total, e. g., "Totals are
of known data" or "approx." Totals which are not
identical with the sum of specific entries, because of
rounding or different sources, are indicated by note,
e. g., "(Tonnage) figures rounded to nearest (thousand)
are not additive."
PAGE 4
9. TABLE CONSTRUCTION
Optimum clarity and usefulness require the careful
construction of all tables in terms of the nature and
purpose of the material and the characteristics of the
NIS format.
Column headings normally are typed and printed
horizontally. They may be vertical when heading
narrow columns of data or generally to facilitate pub-
lishing a table in minimum width. Superior or con-
solidating headings are centered over the appropriate
individual column headings.
To avoid repetition of units of measurement after
items of latitude, longitude, time, distance, weight, etc.,
units of measurement (abbreviated as appropriate) are
put at the head of column, or centered over appropriate
columns. Units common to an entire table (e.g.,
thousands of metric tons, or percentage of population)
are placed in parentheses beneath the table title.
It is desirable, so far as practicable, for a series of
tables dealing with common or closely related topics to
be expressed in a uniform order of magnitude of units
of measurement, e.g., all in thousands of tons or hun-
dreds of tons.
Entries in all columns aline horizontally with top
line of the corresponding stub.
Vertical columns of figures are aimed on the decimal
point, and zeros precede the decimal in numbers of less
than 1. Dissimilar data are centered in the column.
Examples of various figure items are:
1,500.0
0.15
24.4
1.04
16.09
4,200
120-130
insig
30 (daily)
ri a
Generally it is not desirable to carry a column in
which there are no entries. Use of a column for iso-
lated entries may be avoided by carrying the entries
in a "Remarks" column or by consolidation in an ex-
planatory note to the table.
Tables generally are constructed to avoid use of full-
length lines or rules between horizontal entries. Lines
or boxes around column headings preferably are omitted
by contributors unless format is well established.
Although contributors are not required to conform
to printing requirements when constructing tables, gen-
eral consideration of such requirements facilitates pub-
lication of table material. A printed NIS single-column
width accommodates approximately 55 characters or
spaces. A two-column page width takes approximately
115 characters or spaces. A two-page spread takes
approximately 230 characters or spaces. Two-page
spreads tend to present page make-up problems in
publication, including separation of tables from related
text. Tables which must be viewed from the side of
the page, and extended tables on fold-in inserts, are not
desirable and are used only by arrangement with OBI.
In constructing tables for normal column or page-width
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1958 EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS mlimmommmo
publication, space allowance is required for column
headings which may be wider than figure entries in
columns, and for stubs. When it is apparent that the
maximum horizontal lines (allowing for column entries,
column headings, stubs, footnote symbols, and ade-
quate space between columns) will occupy more than
the approximate number of spaces available but will
not utilize more than a nominal additional width,
rearrangement of the table warrants consideration.
Vertical printing of heads is one device. When the
number of columns exceeds the number of stub entries,
the layout often may be reversed to make a longer but
narrower table. When tables present problems not
previously encountered, contributors are requested to
consult OBI before final typing.
D. Graphic specifications
1. GENERAL
All graphic materials, such as photographs, maps,
charts, graphs, and sketches, regardless of size, are (in
addition to numbered tables) designated as figures.
Each graphic item carries a separate figure number
comprising the section number followed by hyphen
and serial number of the figure in the sequence of all
figures within the section. The originals and copies of
all graphic items are clearly marked with the NIS area
number, section and figure number.
The image size of the NIS printed page is 714" H
by 93A" V. The material is printed in two 312" col-
umns spacedIA" apart. Column width figures are
printed 332" wide, and page width figures are VA"
wide. The maximum .height of such figures including
space for caption is 9%".
All graphic items larger than page size are treated as
fold-in inserts. The maximum paper size used for NIS
inserts is 23" V x 3934" II. The horizontal dimen-
sion normally includes a 914" apron.
Figures are prepared to fit NIS indicated dimensions.
Care is required in laying out correct proportions and
in selecting sizes of symbols, patterns, lines, and letter-
ing to allow for reduction commensurate with that per-
mitted by other features of the figure. When a specific
amount of reduction is desired, it is so marked outside
the border. Otherwise, the amount of reduction will
be decided by OBI.
All figures, except insert maps, are accompanied by
captions (in lowercase and normal word capitalization)
which are carefully worded to be briefly but adequately
descriptive. The first line of the caption carries the
figure number followed by identification of the subject
or brief descriptive phrase; succeeding lines add appro-
priate amplification, including direction of view and
indication of the date (where meaningful) of photo-
graphs.
Charts or graphs do not carry titles or caption ma-
terial (as distinct from explanatory legend material)
within the figure image. In the case of a specially con-
structed chart or graph, source and date of information
may be drafted within the figure. All insert maps carry
the title, legend, source and date of source, and other
essential information drafted within the title box or
neatline.
It is not necessary that all maps or photographs be
oriented with north at the top, but the position of north
is clearly indicated by means of a north arrow, coordi-
nates, or caption. Names, symbols, and similar details
of figures are oriented for reading from the bottom of
the page. In exceptions where figures must be viewed
from the side of the page, details of the figure are
oriented for reading from the right-hand side of the
page.
Printed stickup is preferred for symbols and letter-
ing. However, Leroy lettering is permissible. Free-
hand lettering and symbols are avoided except where
it is necessary to include an existent printed map or
sketch.
It is frequently desirable for graphic material, such
as large-scale aerials of airfields, to be accompanied by
small-scale line-cut orientation or location maps.
2. PHOTOGRAPHS
Only clear and distinct photographs are acceptable,
and original prints are supplied insofar as possible.
Except where the original is unwieldy, prints are sup-
plied at the same scale as originals, including suggested
cropping to be undertaken in OBI processing.
High-altitude aerial photographs carry a north arrow
and bar scale drafted on the face of the print. When
a photograph originally has foreign annotations on the
face of the photograph, the annotations are retained
and translated or explained in the caption.
Instructions for selection and preparation of photo-
graphs are set forth in NIS Memo No. 4.
3. MAPS
All NIS maps are carefully selected and constructed
in terms of the purpose and subject material of a map
or plan, content and positional integration with text,
suitability of color or other differentiation, and all
feasible uniformity in layout, lettering, and other
drafted elements. Appropriate modifications are made
for generalized maps designed for one-column width or
otherwise less than page size, which are preferable for
many NIS purposes because they can be printed in
juxtaposition to related text.
All maps have a neatline and border, a legend cen-
tered under the map title, a bar scale, and the classifica-
tion centered beneath the scale. Legends clearly define
all symbols not self-explanatory or generally understood
from common usage. A direction indication, either
coordinates or a north arrow, is included. Maps pre-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
4.1.1.1111 NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1958
pared as a series (e.g., port and town plans) have con-
sistent treatment throughout in type style, zipatone
patterns, title and legend layout. Nonvarying plastic
(e.g., dyrite, vinylite) is preferable for the construction
of color plates, to facilitate accurate registry in printing.
A standard base map for each NIS area is prepared
and distributed by Cartography Division (D/GC/RR),
CIA, in the following forms: black and white; composite
color copies on paper; composite black line and black
line copies of each color separation plate on plastic
(dyrite). Specific instructions concerning reduction,
sizes, etc., are distributed with the base map for each
NIS area.
Contributors are responsible for drafting their own
overlays, which are keyed to the base plates of NIS
standard base maps.
In addition to the standard base map a small-scale
page-size base map is prepared for each NIS area.
Specific instructions concerning the use, reduction,
sizes, etc., are also distributed with each page-size base
map.
Where base maps are not applicable (such as port
plans), contributors are responsible for compiling and
constructing their own maps. Contributors lacking
necessary cartographic facilities should consult OBI.
Maps to be reproduced as obtained (such as foreign
road maps) carry a note within the neatline specifying
that they are being so reproduced and without editing
for BGN conformity.
Where necessary, fold-in maps are printed with a
page-size apron, to permit full view of the map as the
text is read. This apron can be used for printing in-
formation additional to that contained in the legend,
such as lists of installations or regions. Such informa-
tion is submitted on separate typewritten sheet or
sheets for each map, in 3 copies accompanying the 3
sets of manuscript. Printed material is not carried
on the back of a map.
E. General
1. CHAPTER I AND NIS SUPPLEMENT SPEC-
IFICATIONS
Preparation of text and graphic material for CHAPTER
I and NIS Supplements generally conforms to the indi-
cated procedures for other NIS material, with such
modifications as are developed to meet the requirements
of CHAPTER I and the Supplements.
2. CONSOLIDATED CHAPTERS
For certain small NIS areas or those insufficiently
developed in some aspects to warrant standard NIS
section coverage on all topics, consolidated chapters
may be prepared. The chapter, not the section, is the
unit of production for these publications. The format
is simplified and compressed. Section topics appear
as subsections and may be combined into new topics
PAGE 6
as appropriate. One Table of Contents and one "Com-
ments on Principal Sources" support the whole chapter.
The chapter has continuous pagination and figure
numbering, using the chapter Roman numeral desig-
nator. Using a consolidated CHAPTER V as an example,
SECTION 50 becomes Subsection A, General; Subsection
B might combine SECTIONS 51 and 52 as The Govern-
mental System; Public Order and Security could cover
SECTIONS 54, 56, and 57; SECTIONS 53 and 55 could be
combined (especially in coverage of dependent areas)
into a new subsection topic. The final subsection
would be "Comments on Principal Sources."
3. CLASSIFICATION AND CONTROL
NIS textual material is classified independently by
section. All pages of each section uniformly carry the
highest classification of material in the section. All
material, however, carries at least a CONFIDEN-
TIAL classification. Tables of Contents, caption
lists, all tables, and all graphics, except photographs
and insert maps, carry the uniform section classifica-
tion and are so stamped when submitted. Insert
maps and photographs may be of a lower classification
than the NIS section of which they are a part.
The agency of primary responsibility is required to
insure that any control aspects are properly indicated
on submitted material.
All Comments on Principal Sources for all NIS
(except CHAPTERS I) are controlled "Not Releasable
to Foreign Nationals." The control for the Comments
on Principal Sources as such does not govern for related
NIS material and need not be specified in the letter of
transmittal.
All NIS content is controlled "Not Releasable to
Foreign Nationals" for certain NIS areas specified by
the NIS Committee. All NIS material relating to
such areas, regardless of the content of the material,
is correspondingly controlled. The first and last page
of text is appropriately stamped, top and bottom. All
such material delivered to OBI carries a cover sheet
specifying control, and the control requirements are
also indicated in the letter of transmittal.
When any NIS unit or portions of NIS material
(other than Comments on Principal Sources) are con-
trolled for reasons other than the approved control
character of the area, the entire section involved is
controlled. The first and last page of text is appro-
priately stamped, top and bottom. All such material
delivered to OBI carries a cover sheet specifying con-
trol, and the nature and occasion for the control re-
quirements are indicated in the letter of transmittal.
Variations of the "Not Releasable to Foreign Na-
tionals" control which may appear on submitted
material to meet departmental or other requirements
are not used in the printed NIS.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
Ap
? ? ?
EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
? ? ?
Top
Margin
Left
Margin
r-
IARMY-June 1961 (CLASSIFICATION) NIS 21
Sec-38
?31
The offices and agencies that provided telegraph service in the
Right
Margin
1"
12i"
China area in 1956 were:
Telegraph and telephone service
244
Telephone stations
232
Telegraph agencies
403
Wireless agencies
62
Total
941
b. Type of construction -- In general, construction of...
4. Radio
a. Radio communications stations From 1933 to 1945 the
major radio communications stations were operated by.
Itemized information for the period beginning April 1940 to
August 1945 is based on captured Japanese documents, but the
significant totals are confirmed by U.S.official reports.
b. Broadcasting -- There are several of the more powerful
Fig.
broadcasting stations listed in Figure 38-3. 33-3
(1) Number of installations -- The number of these
linstallations is considerably smaller than the total given by the
11956 telegraph offices and agencies' tabulations. It is now believed
Ithat, even with full allowance for the new facilities, only a few have
'shortwave transmitters. There is very little information about...
f- (page number)
Bottom
(CLASSIFICATION)
Margin
1*"
Approved Plor Release 1999/09/21 : CIA RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
SAMPLE PAGE 1
Left
Margin
l itte
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JAINT_TJ, 1962
Approved For Release 1999/ . - 7 01055A000300030001
IARMY-Jone 1961 (CLASSIFICATION)
3d. Telecommunications
A. General
Top
Margin
1 in
14
NIS 21
Sec-38
During the Japanese occupation telecommunication facilities in
Right
1._Margin
it
Manchuria were rapidly expanded. New radio stations were rapidly...
B. Domestic facilities
1. General
Prior to 1953, telecommunication facilities in Manchuria were
under the control of several agencies and companies licensed by the
Chinese, Japanese, and Soviet governments.
2. Telephone
a. Location of routes of lines -- Telephone land lines
form a rather close pattern around Mukden, Chang-chtun (Hsinking),
and Harbin, and radiate to all parts of the country (Figure 38-1)...1
b. Type of construction Construction was completed for
an underground 28-pair nonloaded telephone cable between Mukden and
Antung in 1949 (Figure 38-2). In December 1952 completion of
3. Telegraph and cable
a. Location of routes of lines -- Most of the routes are
parallel to railways and highways; lines are also built along the
valleys. Practically all the major circuits and most of the other..4
1- (page number)
(CLASSIFICATION)
Bottom
Margin
le
SAMPLE PAGE 2
8"
Fig.
38-1
Fig.
38-2
pproved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER I BRIEF
AND
NIS ANNUAL
Section 10 Chronology
Section 11 Significance of the Area
Section 12 Military Geography
Section 13 Transportation and Telecommunications
Section 14 Sociological
Section 15 Political
Section 16 Economic
Section 17 Scientific
Section 18 Armed Forces
Section 19 Map and Chart Appraisal
Leading Personalities
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence -
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
Chapter I - Brief
OUTLINE
SECTION 10.
CHRONOLOGY
D.
National policies and international rela-
SECTION 11.
SIGNIFICANCE OF THE AREA
tions
SECTION 12.
A.
MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
Geographic character
E.
F.
Public order and security
Comments on principal sources
B.
Military geographic regions
SECTION 16.
ECONOMIC
C.
Strategic areas and internal routes
A.
General
D.
Comments on principal sources
B.
Resources and production
SECTION 13.
TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICA-
C.
Finance and trade
TIONS
D.
Government economic policies and pro-
A.
General
grams
B.
Railroads
E.
Comments on principal sources
C.
Highways
SECTION 17.
SCIENTIFIC
D.
Inland waterways
A.
General
E.
Ports, naval facilities, and shipyards
B.
Major research fields
F.
Merchant marine
C.
Organization, planning, and financing of
G.
Civil air
research
H.
Telecommunications
D.
Scientific education, manpower, and fa-
I.
Comments on principal sources
cilities
SECTION 14.
SOCIOLOGICAL
E.
Comments on principal sources
A.
General
SECTION 18.
ARMED FORCES
B.
Population and manpower
A.
General
C.
Welfare
B.
Ground forces
D.
Structure and characteristics of the
C.
Naval forces
society
D.
Naval air arm
E.
Cultural expression
E.
Air force(s)
F.
Comments on principal sources
F.
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 15.
POLITICAL
SECTION 19.
MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL'
A.
General
A.
General
B.
Structure and functioning of govern-
B.
Maps and charts
ment
(2.
Programs underway
C.
Political dynamics
LEADING PERSONALITIES
AREA BRIEF (when required)
SECTION 10 CHRONOLOGY
SECTION 11 MAJOR DEVELOPMENTS
NIS Annual
OUTLINE
SECTIONS 12-19 (as needed to set forth major changes
in the basic intelligence situation
depicted in CHAPTER I)
LEADING PERSONALITIES (when required)
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
Chapter I - Brief
OUTLINE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
CHAPTER I is a succinct analytical summary of the
salient basic intelligence aspects of the NIS Area as a
whole. It presents a clear, concise, over-all view of the
principal factors concerning the NIS Area under con-
sideration and, while stressing succinctness, contains
sufficient detail to render it adequate within itself, and
such NIS Annuals as may supplement it, to serve as
the basis for initial military and political strategic
planning. More specifically, CHAPTER 1 accomplishes
the following:
Presents a clear view of the NIS Area concerned.
Not only presents the salient basic intelligence aspects of
the NIS Area concerned but also evaluates the significance
of these aspects.
Establishes the interrelationship of such salient aspects by
integrating in any one section those aspects of other sec-
tions which serve to enhance the meaningfulness of the
first.
SECTIONS 12-19, inclusive, present coocise analytical
summaries of salient basic intelligence elements of the
area, selected from CHAPTERS respectively.
Significant developments since the publication of the
respective Chapters are incorporated in SECTIONS
12-19, inclusive. While the discussion in each Sec-
tion is extensive enough to insure clear presentation
and explanation of significant aspects, care is taken to
exclude nonessential details. Each Section includes
appropriate evaluative and interpretive conclusions.
Succinct textual discussions are supplemented by
graphic aids wherever practicable. The text does not
repeat intelligence portrayed graphically, but inter-
prets and augments it.
CHAPTER I is prepared under the general direction
of the NIS Committee in accordance with allocations
of responsibility in the NIS Standard Instructions.
CHAPTER I is published as a complete chapter.
CHAPTER I is riot usually produced until after the com-
pletion of the basic research on, and development of,
CHAPTERS II?IX, inclusive. The approval date for
all Sections of CHAPTER 1 coincides with the month in
which the Chapter is scheduled for submission to CIA.
The following outline guides for individual Sections
constitute a check list of essential coverage for the most
complex country. Salient basic intelligence elements
vary, however, from country to country, even among
the most complex. Great latitude, therefore, is
exercised in applying the outline guides to individual
countries in order to insure a presentation appropriate
to each.
Master Index
CHAPTER I contains a Master Index. This Index
lists detailed topics contained in standard NIS Sections
and Supplements and serves as a guide for use in depth
of all components, other than CHAPTER I, of the NTS
PAGE 2
concerned. The Index also indicates any omission or
special treatment of intelligence applicable to the
NIS under consideration.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
CHAPTER I
Summary Map
Each CHAPTER I includes a comprehensive map
presentation which condenses selected intelligence of
the NIS Area. This "Summary Map" normally
consists of one fold-in sheet inserted at the end of the
Chapter, and normally comprises the following ele-
ments:
1. A terrain and transportation map. This map is of
suitable scale and shows for the area the terrain
features; railroads, roads, inland waterways, and air-
fields; ports; amphibious landing areas; cities and
towns; and a suitable map legend.
2. Insets showing the following:
a. Population density and administrative divi-
sions.
b. Economic activity.
c. Land utilization.
d. Strategic areas and approaches.
e. Location and comparative areas.
f. An area brief which succinctly states selected
facts concerning the land, people, govern-
ment, economy, communications, and de-
fense forces of the area.
3. A "Summary map locator" printed on the apron
of the map. This consists of two parts: a) an alpha-
betical listing of places and terrain features, together
with the map coordinates of each; and b) an alpha-
betical listing of airfields, together with the map
coordinates of each.
Section 10. Chronology
This Section consists of a list of dates and events of
major significance, usually since World War II. Only
highlights are given; events of minor significance are
not included merely to provide an entry for each of the
years within the period covered.
Section 11. Significance of the Area
This Section is a synopsis that shows the relative
importance of the area in terms of geographic location,
natural and human resources, and national force.
The importance of the location of the area in relation
to shell factors as international traffic. routes, regional
political groups, and great power centers is shown. Na-
tional force is appraised in-terms of the moral, political,
economic, technical, and military influence the country
exerts on other countries. These characterizations
are in general the content of the first paragraph of
SECTION 11.
The statements in the opening paragraph are sup-
ported by sufficient record of past events, international
influence of the nation, and international interest in the
area to indicate the vitality and direction of the forces
described in these statements. Because the Section
synthesizes conclusions selected mostly from other
Sections, the presentation is flexible. The Section
depends upon the CHAPTER I Summary Map and the
global representation on the inside cover for graphic
support and draws from Sections of CHAPTER I and
other Chapters whatever conclusions are needed to
complete the composite statement of national influence
and the historical perspective of the area.
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
mmiunimmemir NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
Section 12. Military Geography
A. Geographic character
1. LOCATION, SIZE, SHAPE, AND GENERAL
GEOGRAPHIC CONDITIONS
This Subsection consists of a general discussion of
the location, size, shape, and general geographic condi-
tions of the NIS Area. The location of the NIS Area
is discussed in relation to important areas outside the
NIS Area. Specific details are given on size, including
both area and population, and a comparison is made
with an appropriate part of the United States. A
general statement regarding the shape of the NIS
Area and military significance is included if important;
otherwise this information is covered in the discussion
of site. The general geographic conditions are covered
by a brief over-all view of terrain and climate, high-
lighting those elements that have special military
significance.
2. BOUNDARIES
Data are presented on the specific lengths of the
boundaries and coastline of the NIS Area and the
terrain conditions along each are discussed. Details
are given on the status of boundaries, fortifications,
and movement possibilities across the boundary.
Information is also given on offshore territorial limits.
3. APPROACHES
a. AIR This Subsection provides a general dis-
cussion of the surface configuration and climate within
each air approach sector external to the NIS Area.
The number of sectors is determined by significant
differences in the physical conditions in the zones
bounding the NIS Area. The sectors are named by
appropriate major directional terms, such as the
Northern Sector, the Eastern Sector, or the South-
western Sector. The discussion zone seldom exceeds
500 miles beyond the limits of the NIS Area.
b. SEA - This consists of a general analysis of
the hydrography and climate in approach areas,
including offshore and nearshore conditions and stra-
tegic amphibious landing areas in the coastal areas.
PAGE 4
JANUARY 1962
C. LAND - Land approaches are discussed through
a general analysis of avenues of approach, including
consideration of transportation facilities and conditions
for off-road dispersal and cross-country movement
within each approach.
B. Military geographic regions
This Subsection presents a brief summary of the
combined effects environmental factors would have on
military operations within relatively homogeneous parts
of the NIS Area. In most cases, the Subsection is a
precis of the regional presentation in Section 21 but
omits mention of subregions. Emphasis is on general
military evaluations, with descriptive material and
back-up data kept to a minimum.
C. Strategic areas and internal routes
1. STRATEGIC AREAS
This is a discussion of the significant aspects of
strategically important centers or regions within the
NIS Area. The selection of strategic areas is based on
their importance as military, industrial, governmental,
commercial, communication, cultural, or agricultural
centers.
2. INTERNAL ROUTES
Internal routes selected for discussion in this Sub-
section are those which provide the easiest avenues of
movement between land approaches and strategic
areas, between strategic amphibious landing areas and
strategic areas, and between strategic areas. Data are
included on transportation facilities and conditions for
off-road dispersal and cross-country movement within
each internal route.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection evaluates briefly the principal
source material on the subject field covered by the
Section. The comments cover the following elements:
1) citation of major sources of information by general
category only, 2) indication of major gaps in informa-
tion, 3) assessment of the general reliability of infor-
mation available in the field under consideration, and
4) indication of general trends in the collection effort
pertaining to the field under consideration.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 CHAPTER I
Section 13. Transportation and Telecommunications
A. General
Presents an over-all appraisal of the transportation
and telecommunication networks. Discussions include
statement of economic and military significance, a
brief historical sketch, improvements plans, and rela-
tionship to any national development scheme. (Sub-
section may briefly treat modes of transport of minor
national entities or island groups included in the NIS
Area but not treated elsewhere in this Section.) The
various modes of transport are compared, and the
relative importance of each evaluated. Emphasis is
on transportation and telecommunication networks
as a whole.
B. Railroads
Analysis of rail transport, its place in the national
economy, adequacy to meet normal economic and
military requirements, and ability to support military
operations. Subsection includes an appraisal of the
rail pattern; general railroad characteristics; construc-
tion and maintenance problems; development pro-
gram(s), if any; traffic volume; administrative organiza-
tion; major operating problems; and equipment.
C. Highways
Analysis of highway transport, its place in the
national economy, adequacy to meet normal economic
and military requirements, and ability to support
military operations. Subsection includes an appraisal
of highway pattern; general highway characteristics;
construction and maintenance problems; development
program, if any; traffic volume; factors which hamper
highway movement; and equipment.
D. Inland waterways
Analysis of inland waterway transport, its place in
the national economy and its potential military value.
Subsection includes an appraisal of the inland water-
way pattern; physical features; navigability limitations
by craft size; problems of maintenance; development
program, if any; traffic volume; major operating
problems; and equipment. There may also be included
a brief appraisal of individual systems of outstanding
significance to the transport pattern of the country.
E. Ports, naval facilities, and shipyards
1. PORTS
Analysis of ports, their place in the national econ-
omy, adequacy to meet normal economic and mili-
taty requirements, and ability to support military
operations. Subsection includes pattern; general port
characteristics; stage of development; and develop-
ment program, if any. Each principal port is. briefly
described as to location, significance, berthage and
anchorage space in terms of vessel types when prac-
ticable, and estimated military unloading capacity.
Tabulations may be provided for secondary ports and
their capacities.
2. NAVAL FACILITIES
Brief description of naval facilities, operating bases,
construction and repair facilities, and supply and
maintenance support bases?including names, loca-
tions, and main purposes of these installations.
3. SHIPYARDS
Statement of number and location of shipyards.
Characteristics peculiar to NIS Area are discussed
briefly.
F. Merchant marine
Analysis of merchant marine and its importance to
the national economy. Discussion includes a state-
ment of the number and total tonnage (gross and dead-
weight) of merchant ships; composition of merchant
fleet; important characteristics such as age, type of
propulsion and fuel requirements; and source of ac-
quisition. Ships less than 1,000 gross tons and the
fishing fleet are mentioned, if significant. Trends in
merchant marine composition and merchant marine
potential for support of defense requirements are
evaluated briefly.
G. Civil air
General summary of civil aviation activities and
their significance in the national transportation pattern.
Subsection includes a brief assessment of major sched-
uled, nonscheduled, and charter air carriers; administra-
tive and operational organization and control; aircraft
and personnel inventory; training activities; civil air
facilities; and international civil aviation agreements.
H. Telecommunications
Analysis of the telecommunication system, its value
to the economy, adequacy to meet normal economic
and defense requirements and to support military
operations. Subsection includes an appraisal of the
telecommunication pattern, relative importance of each
means of communication, volume of traffic carried on
system, state of development as compared to other
world areas, key centers and routes, vulnerabilities,
construction, maintenance, and operations problems,
telecom manufacturing capability, sources of equip-
ment, plans for development.
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
I. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection evaluates briefly the principal source
material on the subject field covered by the Section.
The comments cover the following elements: 1) citation
of major sources of information by general category
A. General
only, 2) indication of major gaps in information,
3) assessment of the general reliability of information
available in the field under consideration, and 4) indi-
cation of general trends in the collection effort pertain-
ing to the field under consideration.
Section 14. Sociological
This Subsection briefly analyzes the distinctive
features of the society, including cohesive and divisive
social forces, and indicates the degree of social stability.
It notes important sociological problems and points
out political, economic, geographic, educational, and
other factors having a direct impact on the character-
istics of the society.
B. Population and manpower
This Subsection covers the size and density of the
population (including a population density table
broken down by political subdivisions), its composition
in terms of ethnic groups, age groups, and sex, and its
growth trends. Outstanding physical characteristics
are noted. Marriage and divorce rates and notable
population movements and problems are indicated.
The labor force is analyzed in terms of composition
by age and sex, the role of minority groups, occupational
distribution, types and degrees of skills, and extent of
employment, unemployment, and underemployment,
wage scales and working conditions. The size and
sources of the labor reserve are indicated. Significant
labor problems are identified. The type and nature
of labor and management organizations are described
and significant organizations are mentioned. Labor-
management relations and the role of government in
this field are analyzed.
C. Welfare,
The material welfare of the rural and urban popula-
tion is discussed in terms of real wages, housing, cloth-
ing, diet and health. Principal prevalent diseases,
quality and adequacy of medical care, and the number
of doctors and hospital beds per 10,000 population are
indicated. The subsection indicates government and
nongovernment attitudes toward public welfare, in-
cluding social security programs, and describes the
organization and effectiveness of these programs.
PAGE 6
D. Structure and characteristics of the so-
ciety
The social structure is described in terms of its class,
ethnic, religious or other base. The discussion covers
the composition, characteristics, and roles of the
principal classes and social groups and the family,
identifies the factors contributing to social status, and
indicates the degree of social mobility, stability,
adjustability, and cohesiveness. Principal cultural
values are defined and the role of tradition and custom
and the degree to which the society fosters such charac-
teristics as cooperativeness and individualism are as-
sessed. Significant popular attitudes including those
toward foreign peoples and institutions, particularly
the United States and the U.S.S.R., and their principal
causes are noted.
E. Cultural expression
The Subsection notes the principal languages, their
distribution, and their important ethnic, religious, and
international ties. It indicates the extent to which
language serves as a social or communication barrier.
The role of religion in the society is discussed; the
principal religious groups are described in terms of
their importance, organization, and relations with each
other and the government.
It indicates the educational level and popular atti-
tudes toward education; discusses the educational
system and its effectiveness; notes educational trends
and the fields emphasized in secondary and advanced
education; and analyzes the principal educational
problems. The basic languages of instruction are
noted where pertinent.
Principal mediums of public information are de-
scribed so as to indicate their general content, relative
importance, degree of reliability, and extent of political
control.
The principal modes of artistic expression and enter-
tainment are discussed.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER I
JANUARY 1962
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection evaluates briefly the principal
source material on the subject field covere,d by the
Section. The comments cover the following elements:
1) citation of major sources of information by general
category only, 2) indication of major gaps in informa-
tion, 3) assessment of the general reliability of infor-
mation available in the field under consideration, and
4) indication of general trends in the collection effort
pertaining to the field under consideration.
Section 15. Political
A. General
This Subsection characterizes the type of government
and indicates the degree of popular acceptance. It
summarizes significant factors that affect the regime's,
strength and stability, evaluating the relative im-
portance and permanence of the factors considered and
indicating their historical, social, or other origins.
B. Structure and functioning of the gov-
ernment
This Subsection describes the central, regional, and
local governments. The principal provisions of the
constitution and their relation to political practice are
indicated. The administrative structure is analyzed
in terms of the appropriateness of its organization to
its functions, the efficiency of the procedures, and the
caliber of its personnel. Dependent or associated areas
are identified and their relationship to the metropole is
described.
C. Political dynamics
This Subsection succinctly characterizes the political
forces of the area and notes the significant influences
that have shaped them. The Subsection then describes
the major political groupings; it takes up their organiza-
tion, objectives, and methods, mentioning their im-
portance in national life, their major policies and
achievements and significant historical background.
Electoral laws are summarized and actual electoral
practices are described.
A. General
D. National policies and international rela-
tions
This Subsection summarizes national policies in the
domestic, foreign, and defense fields (including the
percentage of the national budget and the proportion of
national product devoted to defense), and indicates
their degree of popular acceptance. The role of
propaganda in relation to these policies is noted.
E. Public order and security
This Subsection describes the role and effectiveness of
the police and security systems and indicates popular
attitudes toward them. Where there exists a significant
actual or potential subversive threat, the group or
groups posing this threat are identified and described
and their principal sources of strength analyzed.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection evaluates briefly the principal
source material on the subject field covered by the
Section. The comments cover the following elements:
1) citation of major sources of information by general
category only, 2) indication of major gaps in informa-
tion, 3) assessment of the general reliability of infor-
mation available in the field under consideration, and
4) indication of general trends in the collection effort
pertaining to the field under consideration.
Section 16. Economic
This Subsection surveys the nature and structure of
the economy and the changes occurring within it and
analyzes the national income or product by origin and
distribution. It analyzes the special problems and
strengths and weaknesses of the economy and empha-
sizes its regional and international significance. Its
strategic supply position is presented in tabular form.
es6111111.111111111111110s
B. Resources and production
This Subsection discusses the availability and utiliza-
tion of human and natural resources. It discusses
land utilization, other major resources and their utiliza-
tion, and the relationship of resource position to eco-
nomic development. It summarizes distribution of
labor by main economic sectors; also labor productivity,
special skills, and adaptability to new methods.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
A proved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
Significant aspects of agriculture, forestry, and
fisheries are discussed, their relationship to the national
economy and to each other is shown.
The Subsection also assesses the role of the industrial
establishment in the national economy, and the relative
importance and adequacy of its sectors?fuels and
power, minerals and metals, manufacturing, and con-
struction.
C. Finance and trade
This Subsection discusses the nature and pattern of
foreign and domestic trade, indicating relative impor-
tance to the economy, and appraises the financial
establishment, including prices, money, credit, and
banking. The national budget is briefly discussed,
with particular reference to the impact of significant
military or other problems. The Subsection assesses
the international importance of finance and trade of
the NIS Area and indicates its major trading partners
and export and import commodities. It summarizes
the international economic relations of the area in-
cluding trade agreements, discusses briefly factors
entering into the balance of payments, such as services
A. General
and foreign aid, and outlines the debtor-creditor posi-
tion of the economy.
D. Government economic policies and pro-
grams
This Subsection describes the extent and nature of
government intervention in the economy and indicates
the attitude of the business community toward such
intervention. It includes a summary of governmental
economic policies and programs and their objectives.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection evaluates briefly the principal source
material on the subject field covered by the Section
The comments cover the following elements: 1) cita-
tion of major sources of information by general cate-
gory only, 2) indication of major gaps in information,
3) assessment of the general reliability of information
available in the field under consideration, and 4) indi-
cation of general trends in the collection effort pertain-
ing to the field under consideration.
Section 17. Scientific
This Subsection sets forth the salient historical facts
(e.g., political, economic, cultural) that have signifi-
cantly favored or hindered scientific advancement. The
Subsection also evaluates the current scientific capabili-
ties of the country; compares its level of advancement
with the levels attained by similar or neighboring
countries; shows the influence of the government,
industry, and educational system on scientific progress;
and indicates significant trends in research.
B. Major research fields
These fields usually include the following: air, ground,
and naval weapons; biological and chemical warfare;
atomic energy; electronics; medical science, including
veterinary medicine; and other sciences (chemistry and
metallurgy; physical and allied sciences; mathematics,
instrumentation, and computers; the earth sciences?
geology, geodesy, and terrestrial geophysics; meteor-
ology, hydrology, and hydraulic engineering; ocea-
nography; and astronomy). For each significant field
in the country being surveyed, this Subsection evaluates
recent achievements and briefly describes current
research projects.
PAGE 8
C. Organization, planning, and financing of
research
This Subsection does the following: 1) briefly de-
scribes the over-all organization, planning, and financing
of research and indicates the level of control by govern-
ment, industry, and private organizations; 2) indicates
any trends toward centralized or decentralized control
by government and states any pertinent reasons
therefore; and 3) succinctly appraises the sources and
adequacy of financial support to research. A chart is
provided showing the organization for scientific re-
search.
D. Scientific education, manpower, and fa-
cilities
This Subsection does the following: 1) briefly dis-
cusses, in terms of quantity and quality, scientific
manpower and training and briefly appraises major
research facilities; 2) briefly describes any significant
measures being taken to improve and increase the
number of personnel and facilities; 3) indicates the
effect of shortages of personnel and facilities on major
research programs; and 4) shows the attitude of the
public toward scientific learning and the status of
scientists in the community.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A00030003
CHAPTER I
JANUARY 1962
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection evaluates briefly the principal source
material on the subject field covered by the Section.
The comments cover the following elements; 1) citation
of major sources of information by general category
A. General
only, 2) indication of major gaps in information,
3) assessment of the general reliability of information
available in the field under consideration, and 4) indi-
cation of general trends in the collection effort pertain-
ing to the field under consideration.
Section 18. Armed Forces
A concise appraisal of the capability of the armed
forces based upon consideration of such factors as total
personnel strength, morale, organization, training,
logistics capacity, and materiel. When appropriate for
clarity or emphasis, comparison with the armed forces
of other countries is furnished.
1. HISTORICAL
A brief account of selected military history of the
armed forces with emphasis on the recent past. This
history provides a very brief record of the services'
military performance and tradition to aid in the ap-
preciation of current military capability; it also pro-
vides, whenever applicable, discussion of foreign control
or influence. The desired stress is on .significant field
experiences, behavior, and military performance of such
recency as to affect personnel of the present military
establishment.
2. DEFENSE ORGANIZATION
The military establishment which is above the in-
dividual services, such as the Department of Defense
of the United States, is discussed, .utilizing a simple
graphic aid to permit ready comprehension of the
relationships between the services and of the organiza-
tion which directs them. This Subsection may include,
where essential, a brief discussion of the political forces
or groups within the country which control the armed
forces. (NOTE: Detailed discussion of political
influences is in SECTION 15.)
3. MILITARY MANPOWER AND MORALE
a. MANPOWER Provides a table of the number of
males and fit males by five-year age groups from 15 to
49. If pertinent, there is a brief discussion of depletion
of fit manpower. There is also a discussion of the size
of the annual class reaching military age, the average
number of men inducted annually, and their physi-
cal and mental adaptability for service in the armed
forces.
b. MORALE Appraisal Or morale factors, to in-
clude: factionalism, favoritism, political intrigue within
the armed forces, and other subversive influences.
Loyalty of the armed forces (officer and enlisted per-
sonnel) to the regime and any measures taken to insure
such loyalty (political commissars, appointment of
trusted commanders).
4. STRENGTH TRENDS
Provides a table of armed forces strength and a discus-
sion of trends in the services during recent years; for
instance, since World War II, or, if more applicable,
since independence.
5. STRATEGY
A pr?s of the national military strategy. It dis-
cusses the strategic 'military problems of the nation
ill light of geographic location and political, economic,
and other pertinent factors; and of the manner in
which national leaders, especially defense planners,
appear to contemplate meeting these problems, i.e.,
of the aims of the national military strategy, including,
where feasible and appropriate, such elements as stra-
tegic dispositions and organization.
This Subsection also includes a brief evaluation of
the military alliance(s) in effect, together with com-
mitments of the country's forces to the alliance(s).
Effect of the alliance upon national strategy, training,
logistics, and equipment. (NOTE: SECTION 15 pro-
vides the details of the political pacts; this Subsection
of SECTION 18 treats only the military pacts there-
under.)
6. ECONOMIC SUPPORT
This Subsection discusses very briefly the ability of
the national economy to support its armed forces, and
provides a concise appraisal of the economic support
available. Discussion of plans for, or existence of,
industrial mobilization, together with a brief mention,
if applicable, of the relative size of the defense indus-
tries complex. (NOTE: Discussion of the financial
aspects of the economy (balance of payments, etc.,)
is provided in SECTION 16.)
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ammlimmommilmm NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
7. TRAINING
8. LOGISTICS
Only over-all or joint aspects of
training and logistics are dis-
cussed in these Subsections; intel-
ligence concerning each service's
training or logistics is provided
as a part of the applicable Sub-
sections below, i.e., ground forces,
naval forces, naval air arm, or
air force(s).
9. MILITARY BUDGET
The procedures whereby funds are allocated to the
Defense Department, and, in turn, to the services, is
discussed quite briefly. The principal item is a table
which covers a selected span of years sufficient to give
the table depth and to reveal trends. Where possible,
the table is broken down into individual services.
The military budget is compared to the national
budget only in broad, general terms. When appro-
priate, a discussion is included of "hidden items"
within the budget which are utilized by the military,
but which are not directly allocated to the defense
department.
B. Ground forces
C. Naval forces
D. Naval air arm
E. Air force(s)
(NOTE: Each service---B. C. D. and briefly
discussed as follows:
1. GENERAL
A brief appraisal of the particular arm as a fighting
organization, giving only the most salient points of
strength and weakness. This Subsection also discusses
other appropriate service topics which are not discussed
elsewhere.
2. ORGANIZATION
The organization of each service is discussed briefly
to show the channel from the army, navy, or air com-
mander to the respective operating forces.
3. STRENGTH, COMPOSITION, AND DIS-
POSITION
Each service is discussed briefly, providing a summary
of the strength, the composition, and the general dis-
position of the forces.
4. TRAINING Coverage is limited to discussion of
the subjects as they affect each
5. LOGISTICS service.
6. MISCELLANEOUS
Intelligence not furnished elsewhere. For example,
materiel for the army and air facilities for the air force.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection evaluates briefly the principal source
material on the subject field covered by the Section.
The comments cover the following elements: 1) cita-
tion of major sources of information by general cate-
gory only, 2) indication of major gaps in information,
3) assessment of the general reliability of information
available in the field under consideration, and 4) indi-
cation of general trends in the collection effort per-
taining to the field under consideration.
Section 19. Map and Chart Appraisal
A. General
This Subsection is an introduction to rather than a
summary of what is included in the following Sub-
sections. General statements as to the amount and
quality of maps and charts are given. Any additional
significant factors pertinent to the NIS Area, such as
security restrictions placed on the release of maps and
emphasis on particular types of mapping and charting,
are indicated.
B. Maps and charts
This Subsection includes summary statements con-
cerning the adequacy of content and extent of areal
coverage for the following: topographic maps and tor-
PAGE 10
rain models; specialized physical and terrain-evalua-
tion maps; aeronautical and air-information charts, air-
target charts, and air-transport maps; climatic maps;
nautical and oceanographic charts and port maps and
plans; railroad, road, and inland-waterway maps and
charts; telecommunication ^ maps; urban-area maps
and plans; sociological, political, and economic maps;
postal maps; and general reference maps and atlases.
Detail is avoided.
C. Programs underway
Only the most significant mapping and charting
programs known to be underway are discussed.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-
JANUARY 1962 CHAPTER I
Leading Personalities
This topic consists of a list of only the most important
governmental, military, and other offices in the country
concerned, together with the full name of the incum-
bent of each. The most outstanding cultural, business,
and other publicly recognized figures in the various
fields of national life are also listed and identified.
NIS Annual
OUTLINE GUIDE
The situations in all areas covered by published
CHAPTERS I are examined on an approximately yearly
basis to determine those areas in which unusually
prominent events have generated developments of
such major importance as to cause fundamental
changes in the basic intelligence situations of the areas.
For those areas in which such developments have oc-
curred and their effects on the basic intelligence situa-
tions are reasonably clear, NIS Annuals are published
to provide limited maintenance for the pertinent
CHAPTERS I pending formal maintenance of the Chap-
ters.
Map and chart graphics and "Comments on principal
sources" are normally not used in the NIS Annual.
Area Brief
This is included in the Annual only when the major
developments have caused significant changes in the
data given in the Area Brief of CHAPTER I. When the
Area Brief of the Annual is included, it consists only
of these significant changes.
Section 10. Chronology
This Section is a chronological listing of only those
significant events which led directly to the major
developments set forth in SECTION 11.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 11
maiummilmejaproved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JA NUARY 1962
Section 11. Major Developments
This Section sets forth the major developments
generated by the events listed in SECTION 10 together
with a very brief indication of their general effects
upon the basic intelligence situation of the area.
Sections 12-19
Of these Sections, only' those appear in the Annual
which are needed to set forth significant changes gen-
erated by the major developments in the basic intelli-
gence situation. Sections of the Annual carry the same
Section headings as those of CHAPTER I. Material in
Sections of the Annual is normally broken down to
the main subsection headings of those Sections of the
Chapter which are carried over to Sections of the An-
nual. Succinctness in presentation of material is
stressed.
Leading Personalities
This is included in the Annual when the major de-
velopments have caused significant changes in the
list of personalities constituting Leading Personalities
in CHAPTER I. The list consists of only the most im-
portant governmental, military, and other offices of
PAGE 12
the country, together with the full name of the incum-
bent of each. The most outstanding cultural, business,
and other publicly recognized figures in the various
fields of national life are also listed and identified.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959
Chapter I - Brief
OUTLINE
SECTION 10.
CHRONOLOGY
SECTION 16.
ECONOMIC
SECTION 11.
SIGNIFICANCE OF THE AREA
A.
General
B.?X.
Summaries of salient features of CHAP-
SECTION 12.
MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
TER VI
A.
General
Y.
Comments on principal sources
B.?X.
Summaries of salient features of CHAP-
TER II
SECTION 17.
SCIENTIFIC
Y.
Comments on principal sources
A.
General
SECTION 13.
TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICA-
B.?X.
Summaries of salient features of CHAP-
TIONS
TER VII
A.
General
Y.
Comments on principal sources
B.?X.
Summaries of salient features of CHAP-
TER III
SECTION 18.
ARMED FORCES
Y.
Comments on principal sources
A.
General
SECTION 14.
SOCIOLOGICAL
B.?X.
Summaries of salient features of CHAP-
A.
General
TER VIII
B.?X.
Summaries of salient features of CHAP-
Y.
Comments on principal sources
TER IV
Y.
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 19.
MAP AND ()HART APPRAISAL
SECTION 15.
POLITICAL
A.
General
A.
General
B.?X.
Summaries of salient features of CHAP-
B.?X.
Summaries of salient features of CHAP-
TER IX
TER V
Y.
Comments on principal sources
LEADING PERSONALITIES
NIS Annual
OUTLINE
AREA BRIEF
SECTION 19, CHRONOLOGY
SECTION 1L SIGNIFICANCE OF NEW DEVELOP-
MENTS
SECTIONS 12-19 (as needed to provide limited
maintenance of the correspond-
ing Sections of CHAPTER I)
LEADING PERSONALITIES
.""e1Millminmaimm,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCT IONS JULY 1959
Chapter I - Brief
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard
Editorial Instructions are followed in detail.
A conventional CHAPTER I is a succinct analytical
summary of the salient basic intelligence aspects of the
NIS Area as a whole. It presents a clear, concise,
over-all view of the principal factors concerning the
NIS Area under consideration and, while stressing
succinctness, contains sufficient detail to render it
adequate within itself to serve as the basis for initial
military and political strategic planning. More spe-
cifically, CHAPTER 1 accomplishes the following:
Presents a clear view of the NIS Area concerned.
Not only presents the salient basic intelligence aspects of
the NIS Area concerned but also evaluates the sig-
nificance of these aspects.
Establishes the interrelationship of such salient aspects by
integrating in any one section those aspects of other
sections which serve to enhance the meaningfulness of
the first.
The presentation is made through the medium of
succinct textual discussions supplemented by compre-
hensive graphic aids wherever practicable. The text
may be used to interpret and augment intelligence por-
trayed graphically but does not repeat such intelligence.
CHAPTER I is prepared under the general direction of
the NIS Committee in accordance with allocations of
responsibility in the NIS Standard Instructions.
CHAPTER I is published as a complete chapter.
CHAPTER I is not produced until after the completion
of the basic research on and development of CHAPTERS
II?IX, inclusive. The approval date for all Sections
of CHAPTER I coincides with the month in which the
Chapter is scheduled for submission to CIA. Intelli-
gence based on information received since the publica-
tion of pertinent elements .of CHAPTERS II?IX is
selectively integrated into CHAPTER I.
Master Index
CHAPTER I contains a Master Index. This Index
lists detailed topics contained in standard NIS sections
and supplements and serves as a guide for use in depth
of all components, other than CHAPTER I, of the NIS
concerned. The Index also indicates any special treat-
ment or omission of intelligence applicable to the NIS
under consideration.
Section 10. Chronology
This Section consists of a list of dates and events of
major significance in the history of the country that
still have a direct impact on the situation in the
PAGE 2
country. Only highlights are given. If no event of
major significance occurred in a given year, that year is
omitted.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER I
Section 11. Significance of the Area
This Section is a synopsis of the area that shows its
relative importance in terms of geographic location,
natural and human resources, and national force. The
area is located in relation to such factors as international
traffic routes, regional political groups, and great power
centers. National force is assessed by means of an
appraisal of the moral, political, economic, technical,
and military influence the country exerts on other
countries. These characterizations are in general the
content of the first paragraph of SECTION 11.
The statements in the opening paragraph are sup-
ported by sufficient record of past events, interna-
tional influence of the nation, and international interest
in the, area to indicate the vitality and direction of
whatever forces are described in these statements.
Because the Section has no further formal outline and
synthesizes conclusions selected mostly from other Sec-
tions, the presentation is flexible and adapts to what-
ever content is dictated by the opening statement.
The Section depends upon the CHAPTER I Summary
Map and the global representation on the inside cover
and draws from sections of CHAPTER I and other Chap-
ters whatever conclusions are needed to complete the
composite statement of national influence and the his-
torical perspective of the area.
Sections 12 - 19
SECTIONS 12-19 are summaries of the corresponding
NIS Chapters, as follows:
SECTION
SECTION
12 . ? Military Geography . CHAPTER II
13.. . Transportation and Telecom- CHAPTER III
munications.
SECTION 14.. . Sociological CliArrEn IV
SECTION 15.. . Political CHAPTER V
SECTION 16.. . Economic CH kPTER VI
SECTION 17.. . Scientific CHAPTER VII
SECTION 18 . Armed Forces CHAPTER VIII
SECTION 19.. . Map and Chart Appraisal CHAPTER IX
SECTIONS 12-19, inclusive, present concise analytical
summaries of salient basic intelligence elements of the
area, selected from CHAPTERS II?IX, respectively.
While the discussion in each Section must be extensive
enough to insure clear presentation .and explanation of
significant aspects, care must be taken to exclude non-
essential details. Each Section includes appropriate
evaluative and interpretive conclusions.
Each Section includes an Introduction Subsection,
called in most Sections "A. General"; and this is fol-
lowed by such other Subsections as may be selected for
orderly presentation and stress of component topics.
There should be a final Subsection, "Comments on
Principal Sources", except in SECTION 19, which does
not require such a Subsection.
A. General
This Subsection is an introduction rather than a
summary of what is included in the following Subsec-
tions. It has the same relationship to other Sub-
section. topics in the CHAPTER I Section as the appro-
priate Introduction Section has to other Sections in the
relevant Chapter. Essential background and identifi-
cation of functional aspects covered by the Section
topic usually includes the following considerations,
stressed or minimized as appropriate to presentation of
the topic for each country:
1. Characterization and classification of the country
in terms of the functional aspect, together with some
evaluation that places the country in an international
setting and relates the functional aspect or system (as
in SECTIONS 13-18) to national needs. This appraisal
may take the form of a summary of strategic considera-
tions, a characterization of development and adequacy,
a statement on stability, or any combination of these
elements. The A. General of SECTION 12 here focuses
on the military aspects of geography; those of SECTIONS
13-18 (concerned with systems and organizations) on
appraisal of the vitality of those aspects and of their
adaptability to ordinary and extraordinary needs; and
that of SECTION 19 on availability and quality of maps,
charts, and aerial photography.
2. Historical background as appropriate, to furnish
perspective for the more important conclusions or
generalizations presented in the basic appraisal of the
country.
3. Coverage of any minor national entities or island
areas included in the NIS Area; or of any larger con-
sideration or national problem that cannot be con-
veniently summarized elsewhere.
B.-X. Summaries of salient basic intelli-
gence elements
In preparation for each of these Subsections, the
contributor consults the NIS Outline of the Chapter
being summarized as a checklist to insure consideration
of all topics. He selects only the most important topi-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
aiiiimmmemem NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
cal aspects and arranges these for efficient and logical
presentation under effective headings. The NIS Out-
line suggests, but does not prescribe, the Table of Con-
tents for CHAPTER I, where a Subsection may summar-
ize a single Section of the related Chapter or several
such Sections, as appropriate. Treatment is concise,
and topical aspects are allotted space in proportion to
their importance. Graphics are used wherever possible
to visualize the presentation and to save textual space.
Y. Comments on principal sources
The purpose of these comments is to evaluate brtelly
the status of the entire field of basic intelligence of the
category treated in the Section. The evaluation, there-
fore, encompasses not only the intelligence contained
in the CHAPTER I Section of which Subsection Y is a
part but also the Chapter of CHAPTERS II?VIII to
which the CHAPTER I Section is related. In view of
the inherent nature of CHAPTER IX and SECTION 19,
the latter has no Subsection Y.
Specifically, Subsection Y, stressing succinctness,
covers the following elements as they relate to the
entire field of basic intelligence under consideration:
1. Major sources of information on which the intelli-
gence is based. No detailed bibliography is desired.
Only general categories are indicated.
2. Major gaps in information. While only gaps of
major significance are indicated, each indication is
specific enough to be reasonably definitive.
3. Assessment of the degree of credence which may,
in general, be accorded the basic intelligence available
in the field under consideration. Here, broad divisions,
determined as appropriate, of the field of basic intelli-
gence under consideration, are characterized as gener-
ally completely reliable, generally reliable, generally
fairly reliable, or generally doubtfully reliable. In
appropriate instances, differences in degree of relia-
bility between the intelligence contained in the CHAP-
TER I Section and previously published related Sec-
tions of CHAPTERS II?VIII are pointed out and reasons
for the differences briefly explained.
4. Indication of general trends in the collection
effort pertaining to the basic intelligence field under
consideration. These trends are determined from the
viewpoint of historical perspective and indicated ac-
cordingly. For instance, it may be appropriate to
state that, at the beginning of the NIS Program, numer-
ous gaps existed in the field of a certain topic but that
these gaps have now been substantially, or completely,
filled; or that, at the beginning of the NIS Program,
important gaps existed in the field of a certain topic
and that many, or most of, these gaps remain. If, for
valid reasons, it is infeasible to make reasonable deter-
mination of these trends, this element of "Comments
on Principal Sources" may be omitted.
Leading Personalities
This topic consists of a list of only the most important
governmental, military, and other offices in the country
concerned, together with the full name of the incumbent
of each. The most outstanding cultural, business,
and other publicly recognized figures in the various
fields of national life are also listed and identified.
Summary Map
Each CHAPTER I includes a comprehensive map
presentation which condenses selected intelligence from
the general map coverage of the NIS Area. This
"Summary Map" normally consists of one fold-in
sheet inserted at the end of the Chapter, and normally
comprises the following elements:
1. A terrain and transportation map. This map is
of suitable scale and shows for the area the terrain
features; principal railroads, roads, inland waterways,
and airfields; ports; landing beaches; principal cities
and towns mentioned in the text; and a suitable map
legend.
2. Insets showing the following:
a. Population density and administrative divi-
sions.
PAGE 4
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
Economic activity.
Land utilization.
Strategic areas and approaches.
Location and comparative areas.
An area brief which succinctly states selected
facts concerning the land, people, government,
economy, communications, and defense forces
of the area.
3. A "Summary map locator" printed on the apron
of the map. This consists of two parts: a) an alpha-
betical listing of the principal places and terrain fea-
tures mentioned in the text, together with the map
coordinates of each; and b) an alphabetical listing of
the principal airfields, together with the map coordi-
nates of each.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAP TER I 411111111011?11101111L
NIS Annual
OUTLINE GUIDE
CHAPTERS I are reviewed on an approximately
yearly basis; and NIS ANNUALS are published, in
accordance with producing agency capabilities, for
those Chapters in which major changes have occurred,
for which information has become available to fill
major gaps, or both. Changes and gaps which might
be significant enough to receive attention in a formal
revision of CHAPTER I may well not be significant
enough to receive attention in the Annual. Thus,
with a minimum of research effort on the part of produc-
ing agencies', the Annual provides limited maintenance
of CHAPTER I between formal revisions of the Chapter.
When more than one Annual is issued between
complete revisions of a CHAPTER I, the later Annual
will supersede the earlier Annual in its entirety and
will incorporate those parts of the superseded Annual
that remain valid.
Map and chart graphics and "Comments on principal
sources" are normally not used in the Annual.
Area Brief
The Area Brief of the Annual sets forth the same
items as does the Area Brief of the CHAPTER I
Summary Map. Significant changes in data included
in the CHAPTER I Area Brief are reflected in that of the
Annual. Data of the CHAPTER I Area Brief which
remain essentially unchanged are carried over to the
Annual Area Brief.
Section 10. Chronology
For those CHAPTERS I that do not include SECTIONS
10, CHRONOLOGY, this Section of the Annual consists
of a list of dates and events of major significance in the
history of the country (normally, since World War II)
which still have a direct impact on the situation in the
country. For those CHAPTERS I that include SECTIONS
10, CHRONOLOGY, only major events that have occurred
during the period covered by the Annual are included.
Explanation of the significance of these events is
reserved for subsequent Sections of the Annual.
If no event of major significance occurred in any given
year, that year is omitted.
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Bproved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
Section 11. Significance of New Developments
This Section is a brief summary of major new
developments that have occurred in the country
since the release date of the related CHAPTER I and
indicates the significance of these developments to the
country and its international relations. If appropriate,
geographic, sociological, economic, scientific, and mili-
tary, as well as political, developments are included.
The major developments are succinctly enumerated
and followed by a broad appreciation of their signifi-
cance to the country and its international relations.
Descriptive, narrative, or expository details elaborating
the enumeration of developments are avoided.
An .integrated treatment is preferable for the
Section. This treatment succinctly enumerates at
the outset the major domestic developments in all fields
and follows the enumeration with a brief explanation of
the significance of the developments. The treatment
then enumerates major foreign relations developments
and follows the enumeration with a brief explanation
of their significance.
If, instead of integrated treatment, Subsections for
the several categories are used, the major develop-
ments treated in each Subsection are succinctly
enumerated; and the enumeration is followed by a
brief explanation of the significance of the develop-
ments to the domestic situation of the country, its
foreign relations, or both.
SECTION 11 never has an "A. General" Subsection.
Sections 12-19
These Sections are directly related to the correspond-
ingly numbered Sections of CHAPTER I. Sections of the
Annual report major changes in the corresponding
Sections of CHAPTER I and fill major gaps in those
Sections for which the necessary information has been
developed. Sections of the Annual avoid repetition of
material appearing elsewhere in the Annual as well as
of CHAPTER I material that remains essentially valid.
Sections and Subsections of the Annual carry the
same captions as the related Sections and Subsections
of CHAPTER I. If there is nothing to report in a Section
or Subsection of the Annual, the unit is omitted; but
the numbering and captioning systems of the related
CHAPTER I are retained. New material in the Annual
which has no exact counterpart in CHAPTER I is placed
under the most nearly appropriate CHAPTER I Subsec-
tion caption.
"A. General" Subsections are omitted from the
Annual except when they are used to report specific
changes in, or new material appropriate to, the corre-
sponding Subsections of CHAPTER I.
Succinctness of presentation in the Annual is es-
sential. Inclusion of nonessential details and over-
lapping and direct repetition among Sections are
carefully avoided. Since the Annual is always used in
direct connection with CHAPTER I, background material
pertinent to events discussed in the Annual but appear-
ing in CHAPTER I is omitted from the Annual.
Highly specialized topics, such as coasts and landing
beaches and weather and climate, seldom need up-
dating in the Annual.
Leading Personalities
This topic consists of a list of only the most important
governmental, military, and other offices in the country
concerned, together with the full name of the incumbent
PAGE 6
of each. The most outstanding cultural, business, and
other publicly recognized figures in the various fields
of national life are also listed and identified.
4?41.1.11.1?1111
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS aille1811,11Migmain
4. TREATMENT OF NAMES
Geographic names used in the NIS are those ap-
proved by the United States Board on Geographic
Names (BGN). Approved names are listed in NIS
Gazetteers and are used by contributors in the prepara-
tion of text and graphic materials. Pending publica-
tion of a pertinent gazetteer, or in the case of names not
covered by a published gazetteer, lists of names are
prepared arid submitted to OBI according to NIS
Memo No. 5.
Conventional names are used insofar as they are
approved by BGN. The approved native name is
added in parentheses the first time the conventional
name is used in a section, and thereafter as desirable
for clarity. It is desirable to use the native name in
parentheses after the conventional name on maps
whenever practicable.
Approved native names are used where conventional
names are not provided. Translation of generic parts
of native names (except when the meaning is apparent)
is given in parentheses where necessary the first time a
generic appears in any segment of text. As a reader
aid, English generics may be interspersed in text.
All terms referring to man-made features, such as
Small Boat Harbor, are in English. Military or other
regions arbitrarily designated for convenience in pres-
entation are in English and are not subject to BGN
approval.
In lists of towns and cities, coordinates are given for
each of two or more places having identical names.
5. TECHNICAL TERMINOLOGY
When scientific names are appropriately used in the
interest of accuracy, if possible they are preceded by a
common name or common name generic; e.g., the colon
bacillus (Escherichia coli), malaria mosquitoes (Anoph-
eles maculipennis, A. hyrcanus). The scientific
names are enclosed in parentheses and marked for
italics in every case. In a paragraph discussing malaria
mosquitoes, however, italicized scientific names may be
used without a preceding common name or generic.
Scientific family names (names ending in -idae, as
Stomatidae) are capitalized but not italicized.
Special-use terms, such as names of military regions,
are capitalized (e.g., the Kazakh Hill Country) to
clearly maintain identity.
6. STATISTICAL DATA
Statistical data normally are expressed either in U.S.
units of measure or in the metric system, and are con-
sistent within a section or larger NIS unit as feasible,
except to conform with common usage, as in discussing
75 mm. and 3" guns. All contributions clearly indicate
what system is used, in tables as well as text. When
different measurement systems unavoidably appear
together in text (e.g., statute and nautical miles) they
are clearly differentiated. In the case of areas where
available maps or charts use varying measurement sys-
tems, the text is expressed in U.S. units with metric
conversion following in parentheses, and accompanying
maps using extensive metric annotations in their origi-
nal form carry a conversion table. Both U.S. and other
measurements may be given, as in the case of a table,
when contributing to utility.
'Measurements are expressed in terms consistent with
the inherent or required degree of accuracy (e.g., 2,340
miles of coast, 16'6 I/1" bridge clearance). Conversions
are exact when appropriate; a rounded original figure
is not converted into an inconsistently exact figure;
rounded conversions may be used with a modifying
"about" or "approximate." Units of measurement
are clearly defined, e.g., statute miles or nautical miles,
short tons or long tons. Both quantity and value may
be given when useful for indicating relative importance.
In financial data, dated exchange rates are included.
7. EDITORIAL STYLE
Development of style for all forms of NIS content is
a continuing and coordinated result of contributor and
OBI processing of the various types of material. For
all matters of style not so developed, and not indicated
by specific OBI instructions, the current Government
Printing Office Style Manual governs.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
PAGE 8
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
(BLANK)
JULY 1959
Gammaiiwimm.m
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER II
MILITARY GEOGRAPHY
Section 20 Introduction
Section 21 Military Geographic Regions
Section 22 Coasts and Landing Beaches
Section 23 Weather and Climate
Section 24 Topography
Section 25 Urban Areas
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL
Chapter
1962
Chapter II - Military Geography
OUTLINE
SECTION 20. INTRODUCTION
A. Location, size, shape, and boundaries
B. Dominant geographic elements
C. Strategic areas
D. Approaches and internal routes
SECTION 21. MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGIONS
A. General
B. Regional analysis: Regions A, B, etc.
SECTION 22. COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
A. General
1. Summary
2. Maps and charts
3. Criteria for beach selection
4. Major beach areas
5. Minor beach areas and landing places
6. Reliability index
7. Glossary
B. Coastal oceanography
1. Introduction
2. Tides and currents
3. Sea and swell, breakers and surf
4. Bottom sediments
5. Marine biology
C. Sector 1
1. Subsector
2. Subsector 1-B, etc.
D. Sector 2
E. Sector 3, etc.
X. Comments on principal sources
CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 23. WEATHER AND CLIMATE
A. General weather and climatic conditions
B. Weather and military operations
1. Air operations
2. Air-ground operations
3. Ground surface operations
4. Amphibious operations
C. Meteorological facilities- and organiza-
tion
D. Climatic data tables
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 24. TOPOGRAPHY
A. General
B. Descriptive analysis
1. Landforms, relief, and drainage pat-
tern
2. Drainage characteristics
3. Water resources
4. Soils
5. Rock types
6. Vegetation
7. State of ground
8. Culture features
9. Special physical phenomena
C. Military evaluation
1. Cross-country movement
2. Constructional aspects
3. Other military aspects
D. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 25. URBAN AREAS
A. General
1. Urbanization
2. Main characteristics of urban areas
B. Principal urban areas
1. Key strategic urban areas
2. Other selected urban areas
C. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE I
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Editorial
Instructions are followed in detail.
The six Sections of CHAPTER II cover the strategic,
regional, and topical aspects of the military geography
of the NIS Area. Clear distinction between these three
aspects of military geography is essential to the orderly
preparation of these Sections and to the efficient use
of the Chapter.
SECTION 20, INTRODUCTION, furnishes a strategic ap-
preciation of the NIS Area as a whole in relation to its
surroundings, including evaluations of external ap-
proaches. Descriptions of dominant geographic ele-
ments, strategic areas, and internal routes highlight
the militarily important factors within the NIS Area.
SECTION 21, MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGIONS, is an
integration and analysis of the key military aspects of
the NIS Area by parts. It presents for each region
and for each subregion into which a region is divided
the significant environmental elements in terms of
their combined effects on ground, airborne, and am-
phibious operations. Emphasis is on military opera-
tions, with descriptive data used to provide a picture
of the area being analyzed and to support military eval-
uations.
SECTIONS 22 through 25 (and SUPPLEMENTS II and
IV) comprise the detailed topical treatments of the
subject matter necessary for NIS purposes. Within
each topic or subtopic the material is organized on a
regional or locality basis, as for individual sectors or
subsectors of coasts, regions characterized by simi-
larities of climate, terrain, soil, or vegetation, and indi-
vidual urban areas.
The outline presented is designed to provide a basis
for appraisal of the military significance of the geog-
raphy of any NIS Area. It is intended to be sufficiently
flexible to be adaptable to any peculiar situation that
the authors of CHAPTER II may encounter.
Each topical heading in the outline must, however,
be considered by the authors. As indicated in the
guidance for each Section, adequate latitude is provided
to permit presentation of each topic in the clearest and
simplest form, where alternative forms of presentation
are practicable.
In the event that modification of the outline, or a
part thereof, is considered desirable for a particular
NIS Area, the proposed modification will not be made
without prior approval of the Chapter Coordinator.
Section 20. Introduction
This Section is designed to provide the reader with
a succinct evaluation of the external geographic rela-
tionships of the NIS Area and its dominantly significant
internal geographic characteristics. The Section is pre-
pared after SECTIONS 21 through 25 have been com-
pleted. It is not, however, an abridgement of these
Sections. Photographs of especially significant aspects
of military geography covered by SECTION 20 are
included as pertinent.
PAGE 2
A. Location, size, shape, and boundaries
The significant aspects of the location, size, shape,
and boundaries of the MS Area as a whole are pre-
sented in integrated paragraphs without topical head-
ings, supported by 1) a map on which the NIS Area is
centered on an azimuthal projection and on which con-
centric circles of air distances are included and 2) a
map demonstrating the comparative areas of the NIS
Area and of the United States or North America.
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
CHAPTER II
B. Dominant geographic elements
All facts of the environment as presented in SECTIONS
21 through 25 are considered by Army in preparing this
discussion. Those environmental elements that are
dominantly significant are treated in integrated state-
ments supported by one or more overall intelligence
maps.
C. Strategic areas
Each strategic area of the NIS Area is defined and
briefly described by Army on the basis of the applica-
bility of one or more of the following factors (or other
pertinent factors) which are of national or international
significance: critical and/or key industries (especially
military end-products plants); critical and other stra-
tegically significant mining developments and mineral
resources; key transportation and communications cen-
ters and facilities; military installations including key
offensive, defensive, and supporting facilities; popula-
tion concentrations (ethnic, religious, social, including
significant minorities); key terrain features (passes,
corridors, beaches, air-drop sites); food resources, in-
cluding production and storage centers; etc. Strategic
areas are delimited on a map with the approaches to
and internal routes of the NIS Area.
CONFIDENTIAL
Strategic, for the purposes of evaluating strategic sig-
nificance in the NIS Area, is defined as pertaining to
the implications of any of the above factors upon a
nation's developing and using political, economic, and
psychological means and/or armed forces during peace
or war to afford the maximum support to national
policies, to increase the probabilities and favorable con-
sequences of victory, and to lessen the chances of defeat.
D. Approaches and internal routes
Evaluations of the air, sea, and ground approaches
to the NIS Area as a whole are prepared by Air Force,
Navy, and Army, respectively, and coordinated by
Army. Air approaches are presented on a sector basis.
Land and air approaches are shown in suitable manner
on a map showing the strategic areas and internal
routes of the NIS Area. Internal routes are evaluated
and selected with respect to the strategic areas within
this and adjacent NIS Areas; first on the basis of
current logistical capabilities and second on the basis of
potentialities for logistical development. Routes lack-
ing existing transportation facilities capable of carry-
ing military traffic are evaluated similarly in relation to
routes having such facilities. All selected routes are
delimited and classified on the strategic areas map
which is supported by concise tabular or textual
evaluation.
Section 21. Military Geographic Regions
This Section analyzes the NIS Area in terms of mili-
tary geographic regions. A military geographic region
as discussed in the NIS is a region in which the com-
bination of environmental conditions would have a
relatively uniform effect on military operations. Where
the environmental conditions differ significantly be-
tween parts of a region, the region may be divided into
subregions, e.g., a mountain region may be divided into
subregions of forested mountains and barren mountains.
The military geographic regions and subregions for
an NIS Area are delimited on a map by the Army
agency responsible for production of SECTION 21.
A. General
Introductory integrated text summarizes the en-
vironmental conditions which comprise the basis for
the regional division. Following paragraphs provide
a brief comparison of the regions. An orientation
map, showing boundaries of the various regions and
subregions, is included.
CONFIDENTIAL
B. Regional analysis: Regions A, B, etc.
A textual analysis of each region and its subregions
is presented. Each region appears as a separate num-
bered heading. An intelligence-type map shows in-
terrelated terrain conditions in the regions and sub-
regions of the NIS Area. Photographs and other
graphics may be used for illustration.
The text for each region starts with an integrated
description of the region as a whole, which is followed
by an overall military evaluation of the region. If
the region is divided into subregions, the description
highlights the elements that are the bases for this divi-
sion; following paragraphs briefly contrast the sub-
regions, much as the regions are contrasted in the A,
General. A description of the first subregion follows
the comparison.
For a region that has no subregions or for each sub-
region, an analysis of operational conditions follows
the description. This analysis includes ground op-
erations, airborne operations, and, where applicable,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
amphibious operations. The order in which these
analyses are presented may vary from region to region
and from subregion to subregion depending upon their
significance. The elements considered for each type
of operation will always encompass the following,
though not necessarily in the same order. Under
ground operations, evaluations will be presented for
on-road movement, off-road dispersal, road construc-
tion, cross-country movement, concealment, cover,
billeting, storage, and the construction of hasty ground
shelters and of underground installations. Included
under airborne operations are evaluations of conditions
for parachute operations, air landings, and the con-
struction of airfields, as well as an evaluation of the
usability of existing airfields. Always treated under
amphibious operations are off-shore approaches, near-
PAGE 4
shore approaches, coastal terrain, exits from the coast,
and amphibious landing areas.
Local factors that might affect the efficiency of troops
are mentioned as they apply to any type of operation.
These include the psychological hazards of long periods
of darkness; the health hazards of disease-bearing in-
sects and rodents; the problems of dangerous wild ani-
mals, including reptiles; and the potentially incapaci-
tating effects of extreme elevations, cold, and heat.
Moreover, the analyses of all types of military opera-
tions are given in historical perspective. The experi-
ences of military forces which have previously operated
in the region or subregion are used to give some insight
into future problems, particularly as to the extent to
which terrain and weather conditions could govern
the conduct of operations.
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
CONFIDENTIAL
Chapter II - Military Geography
SECTION 20. INTRODUCTION
A.
B.
C.
SECTION 21.
A.
B.
A.
OUTLINE
Location, size, shape, and boundaries
Dominant geographic elements
Strategic areas
Approaches and internal routes
MILITARY GEOGRAPIIIC REGIONS
General
Regional analysis: Regions A, B, etc.
SECTION 22. COASTS ANI) LANDING BEACHES
General
1. Summary
2. Maps and charts
3. Criteria for beach selection
4. Major beach areas
5. Minor beach areas and landing places
6. Reliability index
7. Glossary
B. Coastal oceanography
1. Introduction
2. Tides and currents
3. Sea and swell, breakers and surf
4. Bottom sediments
5. Marine biology
C. Sector 1
D.
E.
X.
1. Subsector 1--A
2. Subsector 1-B, etc.
Sector 2
Sector 3, etc.
Comments on principal sources
CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 23. WEATHER AND CLIMATE
A. General weather and climatic conditions
B. Weather and military operations
1. Air operations
2. Air-ground operations
3. Ground surface operations
4. Amphibious operations
C. Meteorological facilities and organiza-
tion
D. Climatic data tables
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 24. TOPOGRAPHY
A. General
B. Descriptive analysis
1. Landforms, relief, and drainage pat-
tern
2. Drainage characteristics
3. Water resources
4. Soils
5. Rock types
6. Vegetation
7. State of the ground
8. Culture features
9. Special physical phenomena
C. Military evaluation
1. Cross-country movement
2. Constructional aspects
3. Other military aspects
D. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 25, URBAN AREAS
A. General
1. Urbanization
2. Main characteristics of urban areas
B. Principal urban areas
1. Key strategic urban areas
2. Other selected urban areas
C. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAG
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Editorial
Instructions are followed in detail.
The six Sections of CHAPTER II cover the strategic,
regional, and topical aspects of the military geography
of the NIS Area. Clear distinction between these three
aspects of military geography i essential to the orderly
preparation of these Sections and to the efficient use
of the Chapter.
SECTION 20, INTRODUCTION, furnishes a strategic
appreciation of the NIS Area as a whole in relation to
its surroundings. The Section is a broad evaluation
and, although based in considerable part on SECTION
21, is much wider in scope, including discussion of
interrelationships between regions, and evaluations of
external approaches, strategic areas, and internal routes.
It should contain one or more overall intelligence maps
depicting such essential elements as strategic areas,
coastal and other approaches, barriers to movement,
and corridors and passes favorable to movement.
SECTION 21, MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGIONS, 15
an integration and analysis of the key military aspects
of SECTIONS 22 through 25. It presents for each region
the significant elements treated in these Sections in
terms of their combined effects on military operations,
avoiding overall strategic considerations on the one
hand and unnecessary repetition of topical information
on the other. Presentation may be by text, tables,
and maps. For each region, the text summarizes and
evaluates in terms of military significance the out-
standing military geographic characteristics of that
region; the text is supported by individual regional
tables, based on more detailed material in SECTIONS 22
JULY 1957
through 25, presenting the environmental charac-
teristics and military evaluation of the region and of
any subregions and/or distinctive areas into which it
is divided. Intelligence maps and other graphics
present military analysis of the environmental factors
of each region, subregion, or group of regions.
SECTIONS 22 through 25 (and SUPPLEMENTS II and
IV) comprise the detailed topical treatments of the
subject matter necessary for NIS purposes. Within
each topic or subtopic the material is organized on a
regional or locality basis, as for individual sectors or
subsectors of coasts, regions characterized by simi-
larities of climate, terrain, soil, or vegetation, and indi-
vidual urban areas.
The outline presented is designed to provide a basis
for appraisal of the military significance of the geog-
raphy of any NIS Area. It is intended to be sufficiently
flexible to be adaptable to any, peculiar situation that
the authors of CHAPTER II may encounter.
Each topical heading in the outline must, however,
be considered by the authors. As indicated in the
guidance for each Section, adequate latitude is provided
to permit presentation of each topic in the clearest and
simplest form, where alternative forms of presentation
are practicable.
In the event that modification of the outline, or a
part thereof, is considered desirable for a particular
NIS Area, the proposed modification will not be made
without prior approval of the Chapter Coordinator.
Section 20. Introduction
This Section is designed to provide the reader with
a succinct evaluation of the external geographic rela-
tionships of the NIS Area and its dominantly significant
internal geographic characteristics. The Section is pre-
pared after SECTIONS 21 through 25 have been com-
pleted. It is not, however, an abridgement of these
Sections. Photographs of especially significant aspects
of military geography covered by SECTION 20 are
included as pertinent.
PAGE 2
A. Location, size, shape, and boundaries
The significant aspects of the location, size, shape,
and boundaries of the NIS Area as a whole are pre-
sented in integrated paragraphs without topical head-
ings, supported by 1) a map on which the NIS Area is
centered on an azimuthal projection and on which con-
centric circles of air distances are included and 2) a
map demonstrating the comparative areas of the NIS
Area and of the United States or North America.
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CONFIDENTIAL
Chapter II - Military Geography
OUTLINE
SECTION 20. INTRODUCTION
A. Location, size, shape, and boundaries
B. Dominant geographic elements
C. Strategic areas
D. Approaches and internal routes
SECTION 21. MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGIONS
A. General
B. Regional analysis: Regions A, B, etc.
SECTION 22. COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
A. General
1. Summary
2. Maps and charts
3. Criteria for beach selection
4. Major beach areas
5. Minor beach areas and landing places
6. Reliability index
7. Glossary
B. Coastal oceanography
1. Introduction
2. Tides and currents
3. Sea and swell, breakers and surf
4. Bottom sediments
5. Marine biology
C. Sector 1
1. Subsector 1-A
2. Subsector 1-B, etc.
D. Sector 2
E. Sector 3, etc.
X. Comments on principal sources
CONFIDENTIAL
SECTION 23. WEATHER AND CLIMATE
A. General weather and climatic conditions
B. Weather and military operations
1. Air operations
2. Air-ground operations
3. Ground surface operations
4. Amphibious operations
C. Meteorological facilities and organiza-
tion
D. Climatic data tables
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 24. TOPOGRAPHY
A. General
B. Descriptive analysis
1. Landforms, relief, and drainage pat-
tern
2. Drainage characteristics
3. Water resources
4. Soils
5. Rock types
6. Vegetation
7. State of ground
8. Culture features
9. Special physical phenomena
C. Military evaluation
1. Cross-country movement
2. Constructional aspects
3. Other military aspects
D. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 25. URBAN AltEAS
A. General
1. Urbanization
2. Main characteristics of urban areas
B. Principal urban areas
1. Key strategic urban areas
2. Other selected urban areas
C. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In, preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Editorial
Instructions are followed in detail.
The six Sections of CHAPTER II cover the strategic,
regional, and topical aspects of the military geography
of the NIS Area. Clear distinction between these three
aspects of military geography is essential to the orderly
preparation of these Sections and to the efficient use
of the Chapter.
SECTION 20, INTRODUCTION, furnishes a Strategic
appreciation of the NIS Area as a whole in relation to
its surroundings. The Section is a broad evaluation
and, although based in considerable part on SECTION
21, is much wider in scope, including discussion of
interrelationships between regions, and evaluations of
external approaches, strategic areas, and internal routes.
It should contain one or more overall intelligence maps
depicting such essential elements as strategic areas,
coastal and other approaches, barriers to movement,
and corridors and passes favorable to movement.
SECTION 21, MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGIONS, is
an integration and analysis of the key military aspects
of SECTIONS 22 through 25. It presents for each region
the significant elements treated in these Sections in
terms of their combined affects on military operations,
avoiding overall strategic considerations on the one
hand and unnecessary repetition of topical information
on the other. Presentation may be by text, tables,
and maps. For each region, the text summarizes and
evaluates in terms of military significance the out-
standing military geographic characteristics of that
region; the text is supported by individual regional
tables, based on more detailed material in SECTIONS 22
JULY 1957
through 25, presenting the environmental charac-
teristics and military evaluation of the region and of
any subregions and/or distinctive areas into which it
is divided. Intelligence maps and other graphics
present military analysis of the environmental factors
of each region, subregion, or group of regions.
SECTIONS 22 through 25 (and SUPPLEMENTS II and
IV) comprise the detailed topical treatments of the
subject matter necessary for NIS purposes. Within
each topic or subtopic the material is organized on a
regional or locality basis, as for individual sectors or
subsectors of coasts, regions characterized by simi-
larities of climate, terrain, soil, or vegetation, and indi-
vidual urban areas.
The outline presented is designed to provide a basis
for appraisal of the military significance of the geog-
raphy of any NIS Area. It is intended to be sufficiently
flexible to be adaptable to any peculiar situation that
the authors of CHAPTER II may encounter.
Each topical heading in the outline must, however,
be considered by the authors. As indicated in the
guidance for each Section, adequate latitude is provided
to permit presentation of each topic in the clearest and
simplest form, where alternative forms of presentation
are practicable.
In the event that modification of the outline, or a
part thereof, is considered desirable for a particular
NIS Area, the proposed modification will not be made
without prior approval of the Chapter Coordinator.
Section 20. Introduction
This Section is designed to provide the reader with
a succinct evaluation of the external geographic rela-
tionships of the NIS Area and its dominantly significant
internal geographic characteristics. The Section is pre-
pared after SECTIONS 21 through 25 have been com-
pleted. It is not, however, an abridgement of these
Sections. Photographs of especially significant aspects
of military geography covered by SECTION 20 are
included as pertinent.
PAGE 2
A. Location, size, shape, and boundaries
The significant aspects of the location, size, shape,
and boundaries of the NIS Area as a whole are pre-
sented in integrated paragraphs without topical head-
ings, supported by 1) a map on which the NIS Area is
centered on an azimuthal projection and on which con-
centric circles of air distances are included and 2) a
map demonstrating the comparative areas of the NIS
Area and of the United States or North America.
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959
CHAP TER I I CONFIDENTIAL
B. Dominant geographic elements
All facts of the environment as presented in SECTIONS
21 through 25 are considered by Army in preparing this
discussion. Those environmental elements that are
dominantly significant are treated in integrated state-
ments supported by one or more overall intelligence
maps.
C. Strategic areas
Each strategic area of the NIS Area is defined and
briefly described by Army on the basis of the applica-
bility of one or more of the following factors (or other
pertinent factors) which are of national or international
significance: critical and/or key industries (especially
military end-products plants); critical and other stra-
tegically significant mining developments and mineral
resources; key transportation and communications cen-
ters and facilities; military installations including key
offensive, defensive, and supporting facilities; popula-
tion concentrations (ethnic, religious, social, including
significant minorities); key terrain features (passes,
corridors, beaches, air-drop sites); food resources, in-
cluding production and storage centers; etc. Strategic
areas are delimited on a map with the approaches to
and internal routes of the NIS Area.
Strategic, for the purposes of evaluating strategic sig-
nificance in the NIS Area, is defined as pertaining to
the implications of any of the above factors upon a
nation's developing and using political, economic, and
psychological means and/or armed forces during peace
or war to afford the maximum support to national
policies, to increase the probabilities and favorable con-
sequences of victory, and to lessen the chances of defeat.
D. Approaches and internal routes
Evaluations of the air, sea, and ground approaches
to the NIS Area as a whole are prepared by Air Force,
Navy, and Army, respectively, and coordinated by
Army. Air approaches are presented on a sector basis.
Land and air approaches are shown in suitable manner
on a map showing the strategic areas and internal
routes of the NIS Area. Internal routes are evaluated
and selected with respect to the strategic areas within
this and adjacent NIS Areas; first on the basis of
current logistical capabilities and second on the basis of
potentialities for logistical development. Routes lack-
ing existing transportation facilities capable of carry-
ing military traffic are evaluated similarly in relation to
mutes having such facilities. All selected routes are
delimited and classified on the strategic areas map
which is supported by concise tabular or textual
evaluation.
Section 21. Military Geographic Regions
This Section analyzes the NIS Area in terms of mili-
tary geographic regions. The military geographic
region as discussed in the NIS is a region in which the
combination of environmental conditions is sufficiently
uniform to permit, or to require, throughout its extent
the use of the same general mode of military opera-
tions or kinds of warfare and the same general types
of equipment and personnel. Minor areas in which con-
ditions significantly affect but do not prevent the basic
mode of military operations may be considered either
as military geographic subregions or as distinctive areas
within the military geographic region, e.g., a hill belt
in a large plain.
The military geographic regions and subregions for
each NIS are delimited on a map by the Army agency
responsible for production of SECTION 21 after topics
treated in SECTIONS 22 through 25 have been analyzed
sufficiently to permit fixing of boundaries. All CHAP-
TER II contributors concerned concur on regional and
subregional boundaries previous to any agency's ini-
tiating final production Of SECTION 21 material.
CONFIDENTIAL
A. General
Introductory integrated text summarizes significant
aspects of each region as is necessary to relate the
regions to the NIS Area as a whole and to analogous
or comparable areas in North America. An orientation
map showing boundaries of the various regions,
subregions, and/or distinctive areas is included. Photo-
graphs and other graphics may be used for illustration.
B. Regional analysis: Regions A, B, etc.
A concise textual analysis and a tabular summary
of each region and its various subregions and/or dis-
tinctive areas are given. Each region appears as a
separate numbered heading. Intelligence-type maps
showing interrelated factors are presented for each
region, group of regions, or important part of a region.
The tabular summary of each military geographic
region, supporting the map presentation of the region
or several subregions, includes the topics shown in the
sample layout. Topics carry Subregion and Distinc-
tive Area headings internally as needed.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD IN JULY 1959
(Example)
FIGURE 21-2. ANALYSIS OF MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGION
A. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
Landforms, relief, and drainage patterns
Drainage characteristics
Weather and climate
Water resources
Soils
Rock types
Vegetation
State of ground
Culture features
Coasts and landing beaches
Special physical phenomena
B. MILITARY EVALUATION
Cross-country movement
Constructional aspects: Airfields
Constructional aspects: Roads
Constructional aspects: Underground installations
Other military aspects
Operational experience
FIGURE 21-2. ANALYSIS OF MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGION (Continued)
INSTRUCTIONS
1) All data in this summary are presented in telegraphic
form. The above headings are used and are reproduced on a
single-page format.
2) Data included directly under each topic concern those attri-
butes which are characteristic of the region as a whole.
3) Arrange subregions and/or distinctive areas in alphabetical
and numerical sequence under the appropriate topic heading
(i.e., Subregion A-1, Subregion A-2, etc.)
4) Treat content of all Environmental Factors and Military
Evaluation topics in definitive terms. Use salient statistics and
facts to categorize the subregional or distinctive area charac-
teristics when pertinent. A high degree of discrimination must
be exercised in the selection of data to be included in each topic.
Include only those essential elements treated in other sections.
PA GE 4
If a particular topic is not applicable for any subregion or dis-
tinctive area, the words "not applicable" are included in the
relevant space in the summary.
5) Under the heading Operational Experience include factual
statements on known types of military operations such as air-
borne, amphibious, arctic, armored, cavalry, desert, infantry,
jungle, and mountain, conducted in the region, or identify the
region with a geographically analogous area for which types of
modern operations are known. Statements should particularly
bear on the extent to which specialized forces were employed in
operations and whether such employment was required by
environmental factors. If the success or lack of success of either
conventional or specialized types of operations in the region can
be definitely attributed to environmental factors, this should be
noted.
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAP TER I I CONFIDENTIAL
B. Dominant geographic elements
All facts of the environment as presented in SECTIONS
21 through 25 are considered by Army in preparing this
discussion, and those enviromnental elements that are
dominantly significant are treated in integrated state-
ments supported by one or more overall intelligence
maps and the minimum number of maps from SECTIONS
21 through 25 that are considered desirable to demon-
strate the significance of the selected factors.
C. Strategic areas
Each strategic area of the NIS Area is defined and
briefly described by Army on the basis of the applica-
bility of one or more of the following factors (or Other
pertinent factors) which are of national or international
significance: critical and/or key industries (especially
military end-products plants) ; critical and other stra-
tegically significant mining developments and mineral
resources; key transportation and communications cen-
ters and facilities; military installations including key
offensive, defensive, and supporting facilities; popula-
tion concentrations (ethnic, religious, social, including
significant minorities) ; key terrain features (passes,
corridors, beaches, air-drop sites) ; food resources, in-
cluding production and storage centers; etc. Strategic
areas are delimited on a map with the approaches to
and internal routes of the NIS Area.
? Strategic, for the purposes of evaluating strategic sig-
nificance in the NIS Area, is defined as pertaining to
the implications of any of the above factors upon a
nation's developing and using political, economic, and
psychological means and/or armed forces during peace
or war ?to afford the maximum support to national
policies, to increase the probabilities and favorable con-
sequences of victory, and to lessen the chances of defeat.
D. Approaches and internal routes
Evaluations of the air, sea, and ground approaches
to the NIS Area as a whole are prepared by Air Force,
Navy, and Army, respectively, and coordinated by
Army. Air approaches are presented on a sector basis.
All approaches are shown in suitable manner on a map
showing the strategic areas and internal routes of the
NIS Area. Internal routes are evaluated and selected
with respect to the strategic areas within this and ad-
jacent NIS Areas; first on the basis of current logistical
capabilities and second on the basis of potentialities
for logistical development. Routes lacking existing
transportation facilities capable of carrying military
traffic are evaluated similarly in relation to routes
having such facilities. All selected routes are delim-
ited and classified on the strategic areas map which is
supported by concise tabular or textual evaluation.
Section 21. Military Geographic Regions
This Section analyzes the NIS Area in terms of mili-
tary geographic regions. The military geographic
region as discussed in the NIS is a region in which the
combination of environmental conditions is sufficiently
uniform to permit, or to require, throughout its extent
the use of the same general mode of military opera-
tions or kinds of warfare and the same general types
of equipment and personnel. Minor areas in which con-
sditions significantly affect but do not prevent the basic
mode of military operations may be considered either
as military geographic subregions or as distinctive areas
within the military geographic region, e.g., a hill belt
in a large plain.
The military geographic regions and subregions for
each NIS are delimited on a map by the Army agency
responsible for production of SECTION 21 after topics
treated in SECTIONS 22 through 25 have been analyzed
sufficiently to permit fixing of boundaries. All CHAP-
TER II contributors concerned concur on regional and
subregional boundaries previous to any agency's ini-
tiating final production of SECTION 21 material.
CONFIDENTIAL
A. General
A military geographic regions map or maps showing
boundaries of the various regions, subregions, and/or
distinctive areas is included. The regional breakdown
is also presented as a list in the text or as a concise tabu-
lar summary. Introductory integrated text summarizes
significant aspects of each region as is necessary to re-
late the regions to the NIS Area as a whole and to anal-
ogous or comparable areas in North America. Pho-
tographs and other graphics may be used for illustra-
tion.
B. Regional analysis: Regions A, B, etc.
A concise textual analysis and a tabular summary
of each region and its various subregions and/or dis-
tinctive areas are given. Each region appears as a
separate numbered heading. Intelligence-type maps
showing interrelated factors are presented for each
region, group of regions, or important part of a region.
The tabular summary of each military geographic
region, supporting the map presentation of the region
or several subregions, includes the topics shown in the
sample layout. Topics carry Subregion and Distinc-
tive Area headings internally as needed.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
(Example)
FIGURE 21-2. ANALYSIS OF MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGION
A. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
Landforms, relief, and drainage patterns
Drainage characteristics
Weather and climate
Water resources
Soils
Rock types
Vegetation
State of ground
Culture features and towns
Coasts and landing beaches
Special physical phenomena
B. MILITARY EVALUATION
Cross-country movement
Constructional aspects: Airfields
Constructional aspects: Roads
Constructional aspects: Underground installations
Other military aspects
Operational experience
FIGURE 21-2. ANALYSIS OF MILITARY GEOGRAPHIC REGION (Continued)
INSTRUCTIONS
1) All data in this summary are presented in telegraphic
form. The above headings are used, and are reproduced on a
single-page format.
2) Data included directly under each topic concern those attri-
butes which are characteristic of the region as a whole.
3) Arrange subregions and/or distinctive areas in alphabetical
and numerical sequence under the appropriate topic heading
(i.e., Subregion A-1, Subregion A-2, etc.)
4) Treat content of all Environmental Factors and Military
Evaluation topics in definitive terms. Use salient statistics and
facts to categorize the subregional or distinctive area charac-
teristics when pertinent. A high degree of discrimination must
be exercised in the selection of data to be included in each topic.
Include only those essential elements treated in other sections.
PAGE 4
If a particular topic is not applicable for any subregion or dis-
tinctive area, the words "not applicable" are included in the
relevant space in the summary.
5) Under the heading Operational Experience include factual
statements on known types of military operations such as air-
borne, amphibious, arctic, armored, cavalry, desert, infantry,
jungle, and mountain, conducted in the region, or identify the
region with a geographically analogous area for which types of
modern operations are known. Statements should particularly
bear on the extent to which specialized forces were employed in
operations and whether such employment was required by
environmental factors. If the success or lack of success of either
conventional or specialized types of operations in the region can
be definitely attributed to environmental factors, this should be
noted.
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER II
Section 22. Coasts and Landing Beaches
CONFIDENTIAL
For NIS Areas with numerous beaches, Section 22 is supported by a Supplement II which contains
beach tables and illustrations
A. General
1. SUMMARY
General description of the entire coastal area of
study, including relations to major geographic regions
,and to adjacent NIS Areas. State length of coast in
statute miles and refer by footnote to use of nautical
and statute miles.* Stress best and poorest sectors
and subsectors from point of view of amphibious opera-
tions; mention specific beaches or coastal stretches
that offer access to important routes inland.
* In text, distances are in? statute miles unless nautical miles
are specifically indicated by "n.," as "14 n. miles."
Generalized statements of sea approaches and hydrog-
raphy. Define anchorage and port categories pertinent
to Area and include general statement on occurrence of
each category. Give brief shore and coastal terrain
description including mention of beaches, also type of
shore and terrain that extends into adjoining NIS
Areas. Give general discussion of transportation (land,
water, and air) with stress on principal means of
transportation and definition of categories, e.g., classes
of highways, etc., pertinent to NIS Area; also, climatic
discussion for Area, including items pertinent to amphib-
ious operations. Conclude with paragraph describing
Area coastal breakdown. Follow by tabular descrip-
tion of major coastal divisions, as in example below.
(Example)
FIGURE 22-1. SUMMARY OF COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
SECTOR OR SUBSECTOR
SEA APPROACHES
BEACHES
COASTAL TERRAIN
(Geographic title of sector or
subsector, followed by lira-
iting coordinates in paren-
theses.)
(Characteristics and dangers
in offshore and nearshore
approaches; bottom slope;
bottom materials; surf;
tides; anchorages.)
(Number and general dimensions
of major beach areas; gradients;
material and firmness; general
statement for minor beach areas
and landing places.)
(Characteristics inland 15-20
miles or to first major bar-
nor; exits and communica-
tions inland.)
(Footnote referring to italicized terms)
2. MAPS AND CHARTS
Refer to .maps, charts, and Sailing Directions used
and discuss any discrepancies involving coastal con-
figuration, coordinates, or distances.
3. CRITERIA FOR BEACH SELECTION
Discuss methods used for selecting beaches and
sources from which selection was made. Define cate-
gories such as Major Beach Area, Minor Beach Area,
Landing Place, Starred Beach.
4. MAJOR BEACH AREAS
Explain beach area numbering. Discuss headings
and terms used in tables, and types of information to
be included therein. Refer to Beach Profile Diagram.
a. BEACH NUMBER AND LOCATION ? flow num-
bered in text, on location maps, on photos; how located;
reference to photos; reliability rating.
b. LENGTH AND USABLE LENGTH ? Definition . of
usable and unusable stretches.
C. 'WIDTHS: AT LW.: AT How measured;
reference to Beach Profile Diagram.
CONFIDENTIAL
d. GRADIENTS: LW. TO II.W.; H.W. ZONE?
How determined; definition of terms to supplement
Beach Profile Diagram.
C. APPROACH ? Limits; bottom slopes; reference
to Beach Profile Diagram and gradient scale. Refer-
ence to Sailing Directions and other publications for
more complete information on nearshore and offshore
areas.
f. SURF AND TIDAL RANGE ? How surf is Computed:
sources of surf and tidal data.
g. MATERIAL AND FIRMNESS ? Discussion of beach
trafficability criteria; definitions of firm, soft, loose.
h. TERRAIN IMMEDIATELY BEHIND BEACH 15 to
20 miles inland, or to first major barrier or significant
change in terrain.
i. EXITS AND COMMUNICATIONS INLAND ? In addi-
tion to routes inland, include those parallel to shore.
Refer to appropriate NIS Sections for detailed data on
transportation facilities.
5. MINOR BEACH AREAS AND LANDING
PLACES
How described in tables and located on maps and
photos.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD INSTIlUCT IONS
6. RELIABILITY INDEX
7. GLOSSARY
List of common terms relating to terrain features
and hydrography.
B. Coastal oceanography
1. INTRODUCTION
Summary discussion of bathymetry and sediments,
tides and currents, sea and swell, surf, and marine
biology.
Include note: Coastal oceanography covers the
marine environment affecting nearshore and amphibious
naval operations. Broadly speaking, this is the zone
in which oceanographic conditions are modified by
bottom and land configuration or surface runoff. The
oceanography and marine climatology for the open
ocean adjacent to this area are contained in NIS
2. TIDES AND CURRENTS
Include charts of cotidal lines, types of tide, tidal
ranges (including station values), typical tidal curves;
also, chart illustrating local currents.
3. SEA AND SWELL, BREAKERS AND SURF
Include histograms and/or roses for sea and swell
and for surf. Include textual discussion of method and
criteria used in computing surf.
4. BOTTOM SEDIMENTS
Include chart.
5. MARINE BIOLOGY
Descriptions and illustrations of dangerous marine
life such as crocodiles, poisonous snakes, poisonous or
aggressive fish; presence or absence of bioluminescence;
presence of algae that can conceal water hazards or
foul screws and rudders of landing craft.
6. SEA ICE
C. Sector 1
Coordinates of sector limits
(Reference to location maps, overall map, and gen-
eral small-scale USHO charts)
Sectors, not exceeding nine in number and preferably
many fewer, are based on clear geographic divisions or
on major differences in coastal terrain. Because sec-
tors are basis for Section division of SUPPLEMENT II,
they !should be as long as physical characteristics of
NIS Area will permit.
Sector general description begins without heading and
covers features common to whole sector in brief general-
ized statements. Include overall description giving
location, coastline length, suitability for amphibious
operations, and reference to starred or best beaches.
PA.GB 6
JULY 1957
In succeeding paragraphs give brief rosumes on follow-
ing topics: Approaches, offshore and nearshore; an-
chorages and ports; shore and coastal terrain (including
number and types of beaches); cross-country move-
ment; urban areas; roads, railroads, inland waterways;
air facilities; weather and climate; subsector break..
down, if used.
1. SUBSECTOR 1?A--STRETCH OF COAST OR
GROUP OF ISLANDS
Coordinates of subsector limits
(Reference to location maps and general medium-.
scale USHO charts)
Subsectors are selected as logical coastal units in
which hydrographic or terrain conditions or both are
sufficiently uniform to permit generalization.
Subsector general description begins without heading
and should include features common to whole subsector.
Give location, length, suitability for amphibious opera-
tions, and reference to best beaches. Summarize ap-
proaches, major anchorages and ports, shore and coastal
terrain (including number and type of beaches), cross-
country movement, urban areas, roads and railroads,
inland waterways, and air facilities.
a. COAST ? Divide coast into segments based on
terrain or hydrographic differences. Segments are de-
scribed in accordance with following sample headings:
Coastal Segment [1], Point A to Point B (140 coast-
line miles, USHO large-scale charts --)
General ?
Approaches --
Anchorages ---
Ports ?
Shore --
Coastal terrain --
Cross-country movement ?
Urban areas ---
Roads ?
Railroads ?
Inland waterways
Air facilities --
b. LANDING BEAUTIES --- Opening paragraph gives
general overall statement evaluating landing possi-
bilities, including number and location of beach areas,
comparison of the area with others, and significance of
stretch of coast.
Succeeding paragraphs cover in very general terms
topics treated in detail in beach tables, including sum-
mary of significant beaches.
Final paragraph gives generalized summary of minor
beaches and landing places. If beach and related hydro-
graphic data are presented entirely in Section 22 (with
no Supplement II), tabular descriptions for major and
minor beaches follow at this point, .using the tabular
formats set forth for Figures 1-1, 1-2, and 1-3 of the
Supplement II Outline Guide. Otherwise, a Supple-
ment II is provided and is .referred to in a statement
such as: Tabular descriptions and illustrative material
for major and? minor beach areas of .this NIS are con-
tained in Supplement IL .
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER II CONFIDENTIAL
JULY 1959
If no beaches are identified for the sector or subsector
under discussion, include heading and statement as
follows:
"b. LANDING BEACHES ? None described."
2. SUBSECTOR 1?B; etc.
D. Sector 2
E. Sector 3; etc.
X. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 23. Weather and Climate
This Section is designed to provide the user with
a detailed description of the weather and climate
of the NIS Area and with an overall explanation of
the effects of weather elements on military opera-
tions. Maps, photos, and other graphic materials,
such as isoline charts, wind roses, line and bar graphs,
etc., are used for illustrative purposes. Subsections A
and B may include brief tabulations, but all climatic
data tables are presented in Subsection D to which
reference should be made.
A. General weather and climatic conditions
Discuss the general weather and climatic conditions
in their broad aspects, emphasizing those elements and
factors having significance in regard to high-level mili-
tary operational planning as specified by the various
agencies of the Department of Defense. Subdivision
of the NIS Area into militarily significant climatic
regions is desirable, depending upon the weather and
climatic conditions in the particular Area.
The Subsection emphasizes the processes which con-
trol climatic regimes and contains the bulk of general
climatic discussion. Illustrate destructive effects of
weather and weather phenomena such as dust storms,
tornadoes, fog banks, etc.
B. Weather and military operations
1. AIR OPERATIONS (above friction layer)
Discuss climatic factors and conditions which affect
all types of aerial operations, e.g., cloudiness, visibility,
icing, turbulence, thunderstorms, winds and tempera-
tures aloft, dust and blowing sand in the upper air,
and special upper-air weather phenomena.
2. AIR-GROUND OPERATIONS (within friction
layer)
Discuss climatic factors which affect radiological,
chemical, and biological warfare, control of atmospheric
contamination, parachute, aircraft landing, glider, and
similar operations which take place within the lower lay-
ers of the atmosphere. These conclusions result from
analyses of vertical temperature, moisture, density, and
wind structure as influenced by topography and large-
CONFIDENTIAL
scale meteorological conditions and their translation
into microclimatic terms; i.e., distributions (local) of
wind, temperature, humidity, stability, fog, haze, etc.,
as functions of location and topography. Give full
consideration to the periodic (diurnal and seasonal)
and nonperiodic variations in stability, visibility, tem-
perature, humidity, etc.
3. GROUND SURFACE OPERATIONS
Discuss climatic factors such as precipitation,
temperature, relative humidity, floods, and dry and wet
periods, which affect movement of equipment, mobility,
clothing, construction, storage, shelter, etc. Make
reference to SECTION 24 for the effect of climate on
state of ground and cross-country movement.
4. AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS
Discuss effects of coastal weather including surface
winds and their relation to swell and surf, cloudiness,
visibility, air and sea-water temperatures, and drift ice.
C. Meteorological facilities and organization
Discuss the meteorological facilities in the area, the
observational network, types of observation, equip-
ment, and personnel.
D. Climatic data tables
Tables to contain average and extreme climatic data
significant to all types of military operations within
the area.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD IN JULY 1959
Section 24. Topography
This Section is a topical treatment for the NIS Area
as a whole of all those environmental factors not
treated in SECTIONS 22, 23, and 25 of CHAPTER II and it
is intended that maps and tables be used to the practica-
ble maximum in presenting the information. Photo-
graphs are used for illustrative purposes within the
topical scope of the Section. A reliability diagram
accompanies each topical map included in the Section.
A. General
Appraise briefly the relative significance of the ele-
ments which comprise the topography of the NIS Area
under discussion.
B. Descriptive analysis
Each of the subordinate topics treats in factual
terms descriptively and definitively those aspects of
the topic which are known to have military significance.
Statements on military interpretations or applications
are confined to Subsection 24, C. Subsection 24, B,
includes only such evaluations as are prescribed in the
following paragraphs. The discussion of each topic is
in proportion to its significance in the NIS Area relative
to the other topics treated in the Section. Seasonal
aspects are considered wherever significant. Tabular
presentation is used to a practicable maximum. A
map is prepared for each topic where appropriate.
1. LANDFORMS, RELIEF, AND DRAINAGE
PATTERN
Cover with an integrated discussion developed
around maps, supported by text and tables, treating
definitively the essential elements of the topic with
emphasis on the larger aspects of the patterns involved.
2. DRAINAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Include the essential following (or other pertinent)
data in their seasonal aspects for significant streams,
lakes, and other water features: depths, widths, banks,
bottom conditions, velocities, gradients, transparency
or turbidity, sedimentation, temperatures, and ice
conditions. Treat in tabular and graphic form sup-
ported by essential text.
3. WATER RESOURCES
Definitive information on quantities, qualities, avail-
ability, accessibility, and distribution of surface- and
ground-water supplies is presented in map(s), table(s),
and text. Data on qualities and quantities are selected
PAGE 8
in relation to all probable military uses of water and
not only with respect to potability.
4. SOILS
The treatment of soils is developed around a simpli-
fied soils map showing dominant soil units and sup-
ported by a table and text describing their physical
characteristics and evaluating their engineering prop-
erties.
5. ROCK TYPES
This topic is developed around a simplified geologic
map showing significant lithologic units and supported
by a table and text describing their physical charac-
teristics and evaluating their potential usefulness as
construction materials.
6. VEGETATION
Existing significant vegetation types are delimited
on a map supported by table(s) and text describing
physical characteristics such as heights, density of
stand, stem diameters, coloration, cultivation practices,
etc., and evaluating their potential usefulness as con-
struction materials and as sources of supplies, and their
susceptibility to conflagration.
7. STATE OF GROUND
This topic is prepared by Army after SECTION 23 and
Subsections 24, B, 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 have been com-
pleted. It is developed around maps supported by
tables and text and is a synthesis showing the seasonal
occurrence and characteristics of the ground when dry,
moist, wet, frozen, and snow covered.
8. CULTURE FEATURES
Cover with an integrated discussion of the location
and distribution of cultural objects which exist in
sufficient concentrations to possess significance in
planning of major military operations. Such features
as urban areas, mines, quarries, tombs, burial mounds,
dikes, ditches, transportation nets, hedge rows, ter-
races, etc., are evaluated and presented in map(s),
table(s), and photographs supporting the text.
9. SPECIAL PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
Such factors as permafrost, seismic disturbances,
and volcanic phenomena which are applicable and of
significance to the NIS Area are presented in map
and table form supported by an integrated textual
discussion. This discussion gives definitive informa-
tion on the phenomena within the Area; it is not
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
CHAPTER II CONFIDENTIAL
If no beaches are identified for the sector or subsector
under discussion, include heading and statement as
follows:
"b. LANDING BEACHES ? None described."
2. SUBSECTOR 1-B; etc.
D. Sector 2
E. Sector 3; etc.
X. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 23. Weather and Climate
A. General weather and climatic conditions
Discuss the general weather and climatic conditions
in their broad aspects, emphasizing those elements and
factors having significance in regard to high-level mili-
tary operational planning as specified by the various
agencies of the Department of Defense. Subdivision
of the NIS Area into militarily significant climatic
regions is desirable, depending upon the weather and
climatic conditions in the particular Area.
The Subsection emphasizes the processes which con-
trol climatic regimes and contains the bulk of general
climatic discussion. Include figures, photos, maps;
and those tables that are necessary to. illustrate espe-
cially significant climatic factors. Illustrate destruc-
tive effects of weather and weather phenomena such
as dust storms, tornadoes, fog banks, etc.
B. Weather and military operations
1. AIR OPERATIONS (above friction layer)
Discuss climatic factors and conditions which affect
all types of aerial operations, e.g., cloudiness, visibility,
icing, turbulence, thunderstorms, winds and tempera-
tures aloft, dust and blowing sand in the upper air,
and special upper-air weather phenomena. Tables to
contain data significant to aerial operation.
2. MR-GROUND OPERATIONS (within friction
layer)
Discuss climatic factors which affect radiological,
chemical, and biological warfare, control of atmospheric
contamination, parachute, aircraft landing, glider, and
similar operations which take place within the lower lay-
ers of the atmosphere. These conclusions result from
analyses of vertical temperature, moisture, density, and
wind structure as influenced by topography and large-
scale meteorological conditions and their translation
into microclimatic terms; i.e., distributions (local) of
wind, temperature, humidity, stability, fog, haze, etc.,
as functions of location and topography. Give full
CONFIDENTIAL
consideration to the periodic (diurnal and seasonal)
and nonperiodic variations in stability, visibility, tem-
perature, humidity, etc.
3. GROUND SURFACE OPERATIONS
Discuss briefly movement of equipment, mobility,
clothing, construction, storage, shelter, etc., in terms
of precipitation, temperature, floods, dry and wet
periods, etc., using illustrative tables when necessary
to emphasize important elements. Make reference to
SECTION 24 for the effect of climate on state of ground
and cross-country movement.
4. AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS
Discuss effects of coastal weather including surface
winds and their relation to swell and surf, cloudiness,
visibility, air and sea-water temperatures, and drift ice.
C. Meteorological facilities and organization
Discuss the meteorological facilities in the area, the
observational network, types of observation, equip-
ment, and personnel.
D. Climatic data tables
Tables to contain average and extreme climatic data
significant to all types of military operations within
the area.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Section 24. Topography
This Section is a topical treatment for the NIS Area
as a whole of those environmental factors not treated in
SEcrioxs 22, 23, and 25 of CHAPTER II and it is in-
tended that maps and tables be used to the practicable
maximum in presenting the information. Photographs
are used for illustrative purposes within the topical
scope of the Section. A reliability diagram accompan-
ies each topical map included in the Section.
A. General
Appraise briefly the relative significance of the ele-
ments which comprise the topography of the NIS Area
under discussion.
B. Descriptive analysis
Each of the subordinate topics treats in factual
terms descriptively and definitively those aspects of
the topic which are known to have military significance.
Statements on military interpretations or applications
are confined to Subsection 24, C. Subsection 24, B,
includes only such evaluations as are prescribed in the
following paragraphs. The discussion of each topic is
in proportion to its significance in the NIS Area relative
to the other topics treated in the Section. Seasonal
aspects are considered wherever significant. Tabular
presentation is used to a practicable maximum. A
map is prepared for each topic where appropriate.
1. LANDFORMS, RELIEF, AND DRAINAGE
PATTERN
Cover with an integrated discussion developed
around maps, supported by text and tables, treating
definitively the essential elements of the topic with
emphasis on the larger aspects of the patterns involved.
2. DRAINAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Include the essential following (or other pertinent)
data in their seasonal aspects for significant streams,
lakes, and other water features: depths, widths, banks,
bottom conditions, velocities, gradients, transparency
or turbidity, sedimentation, temperatures, and ice
conditions. Treat in tabular and graphic form sup-
ported by essential text.
3. WATER RESOURCES
Definitive information on quantities, qualities, avail-
ability, accessibility, and distribution of surface- and
ground-water supplies is presented in map(s), table(s),
and text. Data on qualities and quantities are selected
PAGE 8
in relation to all probable military uses of water and
not only with respect to potability.
4. SOILS
The treatment of soils is developed around a simpli-
fied soils map showing dominant soil units and sup-
ported by a table and text describing their physical
characteristics and evaluating their engineering prop-
erties.
5. ROCK TYPES
This topic is developed around a simplified geologic
map showing significant lithologic units and supported
by a table and text describing their physical charac-
teristics and evaluating their potential usefulness as
construction materials.
6. VEGETATION
Existing significant vegetation types are delimited
on a map supported by table(s) and text describing
physical characteristics such as heights, density of
stand, stem diameters, coloration, cultivation practices,
etc., and evaluating their potential usefulness as con-
struction materials and as sources of supplies, and their
susceptibility to conflagration.
7. STATE OF THE GROUND
This topic is prepared by Army after SECTION 23 and
Subsections 24, B, 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 have been com-
pleted. It is developed around maps supported by
tables and text and is a synthesis showing the seasonal
occurrence and characteristics of the ground when dry,
wet, frozen, and snow covered.
8. CULTURE FEATURES
Cover with an integrated discussion of the location
and distribution of cultural objects which exist in
sufficient concentrations to possess significance in
planning of major military operations. Such features
as urban areas, mines, quarries, tombs, burial mounds,
dikes, ditches, transportation nets, hedge rows, ter-
races, etc., are evaluated and presented in map(s),
table(s), and photographs supporting the text.
9. SPECIAL PHYSICAL PHENOMENA
Such factors as permafrost, seismic disturbances,
and volcanic phenomena which are applicable and of
significance to the NIS Area are presented in map
and table form supported by an integrated textual
discussion. This discussion gives definitive informa-
tion on the phenomena within the Area; it is not
C ONFID EN TIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER II CONFIDENTIAL
concerned with general or theoretical aspects of the
subject.
C. Military evaluation
1. CROSS-COUNTRY MOVEMENT
Evaluate all environmental conditions affecting
cross-country movement of military vehicles, equip-
ment, and personnel throughout the year.
2. CONSTRUCTIONAL ASPECTS
Evaluate the feasibility of constructing airfields,
roads, and underground installations during the
various seasons as affected by the collective environ-
mental factors. Specific military constructional prob-
lems other than those applicable to airfields, roads, and
underground installations are treated under such addi-
tional subordinate headings as are required.
3. OTHER MILITARY ASPECTS
Evaluate military aspects of topography not subject
to discussion under Cross-country Movement or Con-
structional Aspects that are affected by environmental
topics treated in SECTION 24.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 25. Urban Areas
This Section is designed to be a digest of information
on the physical aspects of the urban areas in the NIS
Area supplemented by pertinent generalized comments
concerning their geographic, political, economic, and
military importance. Where the general composition
of the cities and towns in the area lends itself to com-
parison with the cities and towns in a geographic
area of the United States or with those of countries in
the same geographic, political, or economic group, such
comparison is desirable. Data are presented for the
NIS Area as a whole, except when such treatment might
be misleading for an included subarea. When the area
under consideration is divided into distinctive geo-
graphic, political, or economic subareas, the data may
be presented by appropriate subarea.
Tables and charts are utilized to a maximum to
supplement descriptive text. Town plans emphasizing
those natural and manmade features of the urban area
and its environs that are of primary military signifi-
cance are included. They supplement the text and
tabulated data. Each key strategic urban area is illus-
trated by suitable plans, either as functional overlays
on an aerial mosaic, or if no suitable mosaic is avail-
able, on a town plan that emphasizes adequately the
salient urban characteristics having military signifi-
cance. Photographs are used to support the text and
other graphics,
CONFIDENTIAL
A. General
Summarize the significant features affecting urban
areas collectively including a brief generalized treat-
ment of the major collective functions (industrial,
agricultural, mining, etc.).
1. URBANIZATION
PATTERN ? Ratio of urban population to total
populations; distribution of urban areas; effects of
ethnic and religious groupings where pertinent.
b. FACTORS AFFECTING URBANIZATION, AND
TRENDS? With respect to economic development (agri-
cultural, industrial, exploitation of natural resources).
NOTE Generalized statements with regard to population
trends are coordinated with the contributor for
CHAPTER IV (SECTION 41).
2. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS OF URBAN
AREAS
Discuss typical militarily significant characteristics
of cities and towns by area or subareas, covering:
a. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS ? Significant char-
acteristics of town construction as influenced by tradi-
tion, terrain, climate, etc.; of materials used and their
availability; of capacity to resist shock, inundation,
conflagration, etc.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD
b. EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS ? Generalized
statements on principal types of intertown communi-
cations (rail, road, waterway, and air); their adequacy
and effect on the cities and towns of an area.
C. UTILITIES, SERVICES, AND FACILITIES ? Evalu-
ate the cities and towns of an area collectively with
respect to the extent of development generally (includ-
ing lack, prevalence, and adequacy) of those elements
of urban economy commonly classified as utilities,
services or facilities; such as water supply, sewerage,
sanitation (including public health conditions), electric
power, transit, telecommunications, storage, hospitals,
gas, refrigeration, etc.
d. PLANNING ? Programs for reconstruction in
war-devastated or other devastated areas; future plan-
ning and expansion programs.
NOTE Emphasis is given to the items discussed in 25, A,
2, a.
B. Principal urban areas
Principal urban areas include key strategic urban
areas and other selected urban areas (never more than
100) chosen for consideration because of their size and
their military, political, and economic importance.
These two categories of urban areas are discussed
in separate subsections as indicated below. (Army
submits lists of key strategic urban areas and other
selected urban areas through the CHAPTER II Coor-
dinator to the NIS Committee for transmission to
IAC agencies for concurrence and/or comment. In
the event of nonconcurrence(s) only or comment,
CHAPTER II Coordinator arranges a conference of IAC
agencies concerned to resolve differences and to obtain
a generally acceptable selection.)
Introductory text explains the method of treatment
of principal urban areas and highlights the most im-
portant of these areas and their military significance
in the country's political and economic structure.
1. KEY STRATEGIC URBAN AREAS
Key strategic urban areas are those considered to
be of primary military, political, or economic signifi-
cance.
Introductory statement of the number of key stra-
tegic urban areas and their importance generally (rea-
sons for selecting).
The following indicates the preferred order of dis-
cussion in the detail required for individual key stra-
tegic urban areas.
a. URBAN AREA A ? Name to be in the spelling
approved by the Board on Geographic Names, fol-
lowed by variant names and spellings, in parentheses;
PAGE 10
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
below the name, geographic coordinates, followed by
the figure number of the town plan in parentheses.
NOTE Normally, only one paragraph is required for each
of the subheadings, (1) to (5), following. If the
importance justifies, appropriate subparagraphs
may be used for expanded treatment. Appropriate
references are made to the accompanying illustra-
tive material.
(1) Significance ? Brief statements outlining
the significant facts about the urban area, covering:
its location (political and geographic); its population
(as of a stated date) and trend (only if significant); its
importance based upon its political, cultural, military,
and economic functions.
(2) Physical characteristics ? Generalized state-
ments covering: topography of the site (including
underlying earth structure) and natural landmarks;
general layout of urban area, shape, and dimensions
(illustrated by an annotated aerial photograph, by
town plans with suitable overlays showing functional
and structural patterns and features, and by photo-
graphs, if available); ratio of roof coverage to ground
area; street pattern (passability for military traffic,
width of streets, and clearances), crossings of natural
obstacles, and bypassing of town; predominating types
of construction and manmade landmarks, and heights
of buildings (by stories); other pertinent character-
istics.
(3) External communications ? Factual state-
ment of existing rail, road, water and air communica-
tions (including the location of airfields serving the
urban area); the adequacy of such communications
and their importance to the town. Details of road
widths, trackage, length of runways, etc., are not
required.
(4) Utilities, services, and facilities ? General
statements covering: water supply; sewerage system;
sanitation (including public health conditions); electric
power; transit (streetcar, trolley bus, bus, and cab);
telecommunications; billeting capacity (public build-
ings, schools, institutions, barracks, etc.); storage
(open, closed, cold, petroleum, explosives); hospitals
(total bed capacity); and any other utilities, services,
or facilities.
NoTE Specific items are correlated and coordinated with
the producers of counterparts in other chapters or
sections.
(5) Important industrial and other installations ?
Whenever possible the relative national or interna-
tional industrial or other importance generally of the
urban area is indicated. Similarly, the national or
international importance of specific installations in
relation to their respective industries is indicated.
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
CHAPTER II
concerned with general or theoretical aspects of the
subject.
C. Military evaluation
1. CROSS-COUNTRY MOVEMENT
Evaluate all environmental conditions affecting
cross-country movement of military vehicles, equip-
ment, and personnel throughout the year.
2. CONSTRUCTIONAL ASPECTS
Evaluate the feasibility of constructing airfields,
roads, shelters, and underground installations during
the various seasons as affected by the collective environ-
mental factors. Specific military constructional prob-
lems other than those applicable to airfields, roads, and
underground installations are treated under such addi-
tional subordinate headings as are required.
3. OTHER MILITARY ASPECTS
Evaluate military aspects of topography not subject
to discussion under Cross-country Movement or Con-
structional Aspects that are affected by -environmental
topics treated in SECTION 24.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 25. Urban Areas
This Section is designed to be a digest of information
on the physical aspects of the urban areas in the NIS
Area supplemented by pertinent generalized comments
concerning their geographic, political, economic, and
military importance. Where the general composition
of the cities and towns in the area lends itself to com-
parison with the cities and towns in a geographic
area of the United States or with those of countries in
the same geographic, political, or economic group, such
comparison is desirable. Data are presented for the
NIS Area as a whole, except when such treatment might
be misleading for an included subarea. When the area
under consideration is divided into distinctive geo-
graphic, political, or economic subareas, the data may
be presented by appropriate subarea.
Tables and charts are utilized to a maximum to
supplement descriptive text. Town plans emphasizing
those natural and man-made features of the urban area
and its environs that are of primary military signifi-
cance are included. They supplement the text and
tabulated data. Each key strategic urban area is illus-
trated by suitable plans, either as functional overlays
on an aerial mosaic, or if no suitable mosaic is avail-
able, on a town plan that emphasizes adequately the
salient urban characteristics having military signifi-
cance. Photograplis.-are' used to support the text and
other graphics...
A. General
? Summarize the significant features affecting urban
areas collectively including a brief generalized treat-
ment of the major collective functions (industrial,
agricultural, mining, etc.).
1. URBANIZATION
a. PATTERN ? Ratio of urban population to total
populations; distribution of urban areas; effects of
ethnic and religious groupings where pertinent.
b. FACTORS AFFECTING URBANIZATION, AND
TRENDS? With respect to economic development (agri-
cultural, industrial, exploitation of natural resources).
NoTE Generalized statements with regard to population
trends are coordinated with the contributor for
CHAPTER IV (SECTION 41).
2. MAIN CHARACTERISTICS OF URBAN
AREAS
Discuss typical militarily significant characteristics
of cities and towns by area or subareas, covering:
a. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS ? Significant char-
acteristics of town construction as influenced by tradi-
tion, terrain, climate, etc.; of materials used and their
availability; of capacity to resist shock, inundation,
conflagration, etc.
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
'?16.1111.1filialith?
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
b. EXTERNAL COM1VIUNICATIONS ? Generalized
statements on principal types of intertown communi-
cations (rail, road, waterway, and air); their adequacy
and effect on the cities and towns of an area.
C. UTILITIES, SERVICES, AND FACILITIES Evalu-
ate the cities and towns of an area collectively with
respect to the extent of development generally (includ-
ing lack, prevalence, and adequacy) of those elements
of urban economy commonly classified as utilities,
services or facilities; such as water supply, sewerage,
sanitation (including public health conditions), electric
power, transit, telecommunications, storage, hospitals,
gas, refrigeration, etc.
d. PLANNING ? Programs for reconstruction in
war-devastated or other devastated areas; future plan-
ning and expansion programs.
_Num Emphasis is given to the items discussed in 25, A,
2, a.
B. Principal urban areas
Principal urban areas include key strategic urban
areas and other selected urban areas (never more than
100) chosen for consideration because of their size and
their military, political, and economic importance.
These two categories of urban areas are discussed
in separate subsections as indicated below. (Army
submits lists of key strategic urban areas and other
selected urban areas through the CHAPTER II Coor-
dinator to the NIS Committee for transmission to
IAC agencies for concurrence and/or comment. In
the event of nonconcurrence(s) only or comment,
CHAPTER II Coordinator arranges a conference of IAC
agencies concerned to resolve differences and to obtain
a generally acceptable selection.)
Introductory text explains the method of treatment
of principal urban areas and highlights the most im-
portant of these areas and their military significance
in the country's political and economic structure.
1. KEY STRATEGIC URBAN AREAS
Key strategic urban areas are those considered to
be of primary military, political, or economic signifi-
CariCe.
Introductory statement of the number of key stra-
tegic urban areas and their importance generally (rea-
sons for selecting).
The following indicates the preferred order of dis-
cussion in the detail required for individual key stra-
tegic urban areas,
a. URBAN AREA A Name to be in the spelling
approved by the Board on Geographic Names, fol-
lowed by variant names and spellings, in parentheses;
PAGE 10
JULY 1057
below the name, geographic coordinates, followed by
the figure number of the town plan in parentheses.
NOTE Normally, only one paragraph is required for each
of the subheadings, (I) to (5), following. If the
importance justifies, appropriate subparagraphs
may be used for expanded treatment. Appropriate
references are made to the accompanying illustra-
tive material.
(1)74Signifcance ? Brief statements outlining
the significant facts about the urban area, covering:
its location (political and geographic); its population
(as of a stated date) and trend (only if significant); its
importance based upon its political, cultural, military,
and economic functions.
(2) Physical characteristics ? Generalized state-
ments covering: topography of the site (including
underlying earth structure) and natural landmarks;
general layout of urban area, shape, and dimensions
(illustrated by an annotated aerial photograph, by
town plans with suitable overlays showing functional
and structural patterns and features, and by photo-
graphs, if available); ratio of roof coverage to ground
area; street pattern (passability for military traffic,
width of streets, and clearances), crossings of natural
obstacles, and bypassing of town; predominating types
of construction and man-made landmarks, and heights
of buildings (by stories); other pertinent character-
istics.
(3) External communications ? Factual state-
ment of existing rail, road, water and air communica-
tions (including the location of airfields serving the
urban area); the adequacy of such communications
and their importance to the town. Details of road
widths, trackage, length of runways, etc., are not
required.
(4) Utilities, services, and facilities ? General
statements .covering: water supply; sewerage system;
sanitation (including public health conditions); electric
power; transit (streetcar, trolley bus, bus, and cab);
telecommunications; billeting capacity (public build-
ings, schools, institutions, barracks, etc.); storage
(open, closed, cold, petroleum, explosives); hospitals
(total bed capacity); and any other utilities, services,
or facilities.
Nomn Specific items are correlated and coordinated with
the producers of .counterparts in other chapters or
sections,
(5) Important industrial and other installations ?
Whenever possible the relative national or interna-
tional industrial or other importance generally, of the
urban area is indicated. Similarly, the national or
international importance of specific installations in
relation to their respective industries is indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY- 1057
CHAPTER II milmommimmi?
b. URBAN AREA B
C. URBAN AREA C, etc.
2. OTHER SELECTED URBAN AREAS
Present information on other selected urban areas
in tabular form. The text provides an introduction
giving the number and general importance of these
areas. In the tabular presentation, towns are grouped
by subareas, if this is desirable. Appropriate column
headings are used for the following information:
Name, followed by variant names and spellings in pa-
rentheses.
Geographic coordinates,
Population.
Importance --a brief statement of the dominant facts on
which selection is based.
Remarks--other appropriate comment.
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
PAGE .11
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER III
TRANSPORTATION AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 30 Introduction
Section 31 Railway
Section 32 Highway
Section 33 Inland Waterway
Section 34 Petroleum Pipeline
(Treated in Subsection 62, C and Supplement V)
Section 35 Ports and Naval Facilities
Section 36 Merchant Marine
Section 37 Civil Air
Section 38 Telecommunications
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
gorrvrsiniAT,T`T IT
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1=diassiimmmleiliam CONFIDENTIAL
Chapter 111-Transportation and Telecommunications
OUTLINE
SECTION 30. INTRODUCTION
SECTION 31. RAILWAY
A. General
B. Characteristics of the network
1. General
2. Way and structures
3. Fuel and water
4. Construction and maintenance
C. Control, organization, and personnel
1. Control
2. Organization
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
1 Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Equipment
1. General
2. Motive power
3. Rolling stock
4. Work equipment
F. Selected rail lines
G. Tabular and graphic data
H. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 32. HIGHWAY
A. General
B. Highway network
1. General
2. Roadway, structures, and facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Development program
5. Traffic interruption factors
C. Governmental control, organization, and
personnel
1. Governmental control
2. Organization
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Principal carriers
3. Traffic
4. Financial data
Ciliiii10111111111.01
E. Vehicles and equipment
1. General
2. Motor vehicles
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Animal-drawn
F. Principal routes
G. Highway technical data
H. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 33. INLAND WATERWAY
A. General
B. Characteristics of the waterway system
1 General
2. Waterway facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
5. Development program
C. Control and organization
1. Control
2. Principal carriers
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Craft and equipment
F. Individual waterways
G. Inland waterway ports
H. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 35. PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
When there is no Supplement I:
A. General
1. Ports
2. Naval facilities
3. Shipyards
4, Explanatory notes
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE I
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
"IMPIPAniumem. NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Principal ports
Secondary ports
Minor ports
Naval facilities
Shipyards
Comments on principal sources
When there is a Supplement I:
A. General
1. Ports
2. Naval facilities
3. Shipyards
B. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 36. MERCHANT MARINE
A. General
B. Organization
1. Ownership (government or private; if
private, include beneficial owner-
ship)
2. Administration
3. National policy
4. Foreign interests
5. Personnel and training
C. Composition
D. Shipping program
1. Construction program
2. Purchase or sale of vessels
3. Chartering of vessels
E. Normal shipping routes and ports of call
F. Operations and traffic
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 37. CIVIL AIR
PAGE 2
A. General
B. Governmental organization, control and
policy
1. Organization and administration of
civil air
2. Governmental policy and support for
civil aviation
C. International relations
1. Affiliations
2. Air agreements and arrangements
3. Foreign air carrier operations
4. Foreign aid and influence
D. Civil air activities
1. Scheduled air carriers
2. Miscellaneous air services
3. Government and private operators
JANUARY 1962
4. Performance, general characteristics,
and capability of selected transport
aircraft
E. Civil aviation training
1. Aviation schools
2. Aeroclubs
3. Other
F. Services and supplies
1. Maintenance installations
2. Sources of supply
G. Civil air facilities
1. Airfields
2. Operational aids
H. Mobilization potential
1. Mobilization potential and plans
2. Aircraft potential and availability
3. Personnel strength and readiness
I. Personalities
J. Means of identification
K. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 38. TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A. General
B. Administration and control
1. Government organizations
2. Commercial organizations
C. Domestic systems
1. General
2. Public intercity networks
a. Transmission facilities
b. Switching systems and facilities
3. Local facilities
4. Special systems
D. International facilities
1. General
2. Landlines
3. Radio
4. Submarine cables
E. Broadcast and television
1. General
2. AM and FM broadcast
3. Television
4. Wired broadcast
F. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
CHAPTER III
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Section 30. Introduction
This Section is an overall appreciation of the trans-
portation and telecommunication systems of the coun-
try or area under study.
It treats those general aspects which are necessary
to the proper concept of the subject as a whole and
which cannot be treated adequately elsewhere. It is
prepared upon completion of the remaining Sections
of this Chapter so as to be able to present in a single
Section an integrated account of all phases of trans-
portation and telecommunications.
Material is presented in graphic form whenever
practicable.
Section 31. Railway
A. General
An appreciation of rail transportation in the country,
including relationship to other transportation, salient
characteristics, physical environmental factors, and
economic and logistical significance.
B. Characteristics of the network
1. GENERAL
A discussion of such basic factors as total route
mileage by trackage, gage, and ownership; pattern and
geographical distribution of the rail lines; connections
and interchange with adjacent countries, including
any special interchange equipment requirements; gen-
eral status and condition of the railroads, including
repair of war damage and projected development.
2. WAY AND STRUCTURES
Characteristics of the fixed facilities and structures,
including general conditions affecting the right of
way and structures as reflected in grades, curves, and
characteristics of structures; general and detailed
standards for rail, ties, and ballast, and resultant axle-
load limitations; characteristics and comprehensive
statistics on bridges, tunnels, and similar track-support-
ing and track-sheltering structures; characteristics and
statistics on ferries; structural clearance, loading, and
equipment diagrams with supporting discussion of
standards and practices; characteristics of signal and
communications equipment and operations; general
features of yards ana terminals, with detailed data
(including diagrams or plans when available on major
yards and terminals); details of the nature and extent
of electrification, including characteristics of power
supply and installations.
3. FUEL AND WATER
A general survey of fuel and water supply, including
such factors as characteristics and availability, treat-
ment required, and any special factors such as reliance
on foreign source of fuel supply.
4. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Construction and maintenance policy, problems, and
procedures, including standards, organization, and
availability and quality of materials, equipment, and
labor; evaluative discussion of heavy off-track con-
struction and maintenance equipment employed.
C. Control, organization, and personnel
1, CONTROL
The development and present status of control and
ownership, and the nature and extent of governmental
control and regulation.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
V.) 1.U.CLLN 1A-1-1
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
2. ORGANIZATION
Operational organization and administrative struc-
ture, supported as appropriate by selected organiza-
tional charts and diagrams.
3. PERSONNEL
A discussion of the number and allocation of em-
ployees, the general level of competency, training,
labor relations, and such aspects as pay rates and health
and retirement provisions.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Routine operating regulations and practices, in-
cluding train control; significant operating statistics,
with evaluative comment; significant or unusual
operating problems and practices, particularly those
representing traffic interruption factors.
2. TRAFFIC
A discussion of traffic conditions and trends, includ-
ing pattern of traffic and relative importance of freight
and passenger traffic; principal commodities carried
and any significant regional characteristics; selective
statistics for representative years on such factors as
freight tons, freight ton-miles, and other applicable
indicators of traffic volume and handling.
3. FINANCIAL DATA
A discussion of the financial position of the railroad
or railroads, including corporate or governmental
budget data, and significant statistics on incomes, ex-
penses, and general financial characteristics.
E. Equipment
1. GENERAL
An overall quantitative and qualitative survey of
the adequacy of existing equipment, domestic and
foreign sources of equipment, shops and repair facilities,
and interchangeability and other characteristics of
equipment.
2. MOTIVE POWER
Predominant types (including tabulated basic charac-
teristics and inventory of each type of locomotive),
PAGE 4
JANUARY 1962
general condition of locomotives, and nature and source
of supply.
3. ROLLING STOCK
Predominant types, general condition, and sources
of supply of freight and passenger rolling stock, with
tabulation of basic characteristics and inventory of
each type.
4. WORK EQUIPMENT
Types, characteristics, and inventories of all equip-
ment utilized in construction and maintenance.
F. Selected rail lines
A selection and analysis of the selected lines of major
importance for both economic and logistics purposes,
followed by a summary of the characteristics and
significance of each selected line in terms of the follow-
ing factors: Terminals, mileage, gages, and types of
power; economic and strategic importance; nature and
volume of traffic; brief geographic description of route;
important and/or unusual structures; rail, ties, ballast,
etc., as used on the line; axleload limit on line between
all major junctions; ruling grades both directions be-
tween all major junctions; minimum radii of curves
between all major junctions; maximum distance
between passing sidings; minimum length of passing
sidings; number and total length of bridges and tunnels;
tabulation of remaining facilities such as: yards,
enginehouses, fueling and watering facilities, other
G. Tabular and graphic data
This Subsection contains information in tabular and
graphic form in the general order of reference in text.
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030
CHAP7'Ell 111
JANUARY 1962
Section 32. Highway
A. General
An appreciation of highway transportation in the
country, including relationship to other transportation,
salient characteristics, physical environmental factors,
significant historical developments, bottlenecks, and
economic and logistical significance, including a discus-
sion of highway density and vehicle ratio in relation to
population. Compare highway density and vehicle
ratio with that of a neighboring country and with a
state in the United States of similar size or population.
B. Highway network
1. GENERAL
A discussion of such factors as total highway mileage
by classification, indicating correlation between surface
types and administrative classification; pattern and
geographic distribution; connections with adjacent
countries; numbering and marking system; density
and nature of traffic; and present status and general
condition of the network.
2. ROADWAY, STRUCTURES, AND FACIL-
[TIES
Detailed characteristics of surface types, base types,
and shoulder types; drainage characteristics and gen-
eral condition of all the highways by type or adminis-
trative designation; design and specification standards
of highways; characteristics and comprehensive sta-
tistics on bridges and tunnels, including design and
specification standards; characteristics and statistics
on ferries and fords; vehicle repair and fueling facilities,
types of fuels used, and domestic or import origin of
fuels.
3. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Construction and maintenance policy, problems,
and procedures in relation to character of terrain,
weather and climate, characteristics of original design
and construction, and present condition. Official atti-
tude toward highway construction and maintenance.
Frequency or cyclic period of road and structures
inspection, overhauling, repair, replacement, or recon-
struction. Construction and maintenance procedures,
including standards and specifications and such factors
as the sectionalizing of roads for maintenance and the
prevalence of hand as against mechanical methods.
Availability of necessary funds, and availability and
quality of materials, equipment, and labor.
4. DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM
New construction and improvement under way or
planned.
5. TRAFFIC INTERRUPTION FACTORS
A survey of critical points or features of the highway
system, with emphasis on existing or potential factors
which might adversely affect traffic.
C. Governmental control, organization, and
personnel
1. GOVERNMENTAL CONTROL
The present status of control and the nature and
extent of governmental control and regulation.
2. ORGANIZATION
Current organizational structures, preferably in
chart form.
3. PERSONNEL
The number of operating personnel and employees
by department; personnel efficiency and training, labor
relations, and such aspects as pay rates and health and
retirement provisions.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Operating regulations and practices for passenger
and freight traffic, significant operating statistics, and
significant or unusual operating problems and practices.
2. PRINCIPAL CARRIERS
Ownership and organizational structure of representa-
tive principal carriers.
3. TRAFFIC
Traffic conditions and trends, including pattern of
traffic and relative importance of freight and passenger
traffic; principal commodities carried and any signifi-
cant regional characteristics; selective statistics for
representative years on such factors as freight tons,
freight ton-miles, and other applicable indicators of
traffic volume and handling, including flow charts and
flow breakdown by vehicle.
4. FINANCIAL DATA
Operating revenues, expenses, and ratios, including
governmental financial aspects.
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
suomaggred For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCT IONS JANUARY 1962
K Vehicles and equipment
1. GENERAL
An overall quantitative and qualitative survey of
the adequacy of existing vehicles and equipment,
domestic and foreign sources of vehicles and equipment
or principal components, amounts and types imported
and exported, and vehicle standards.
2. MOTOR VEHICLES
A tabulation of the number, capacity, make and
year of vehicles by type.
3. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Construction and maintenance equipment, including
the major construction and maintenance equipment
items used in highway work and the stations where
such equipment is assigned. Domestic availability or
dependence on imports as a source of supply of heavy
and automotive construction equipment.
A tabulation of road construction and maintenance
equipment.
4. ANIMAL-DRAWN
A tabulation of any significant animal-drawn equip-
ment.
F. Principal routes
A selection and analysis of principal routes of major
importance for both economic and logistical purposes
followed by a summary of the characteristics and sig-.
nificance of each principal route in terms of the follow-
ing factors: route number and/or name; starting points,
terminals, and route mileage; principal intersections
and international connections; adequacy of clearance
from ports and principal cities; main thoroughfares
through and bypasses around large population centers
(by map); traffic flow; bottlenecks; fueling facilities;
general pavement data; bridges; tunnels; ferries; fords;
route logs; special weather restrictions; and terrain
features.
G. Highway technical data
An explanation of the special highway numbering
system used in SECTION 32, and tabular and other
presentations of detailed highway data, including
reference to the indigenous map included in the Sec-
tion.
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the-following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 33. Inland Waterway
3. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Construction and maintenance policy, problems, and
procedure in relation to terrain, weather and climate,
characteristics of original design and construction, and
present condition of waterway structures and stream
improvement works. Official attitude toward water-
way construction and maintenance. Discussion of
construction and maintenance procedures includes
standards and specifications, whether work is done by
governmental organization or private contractor, avail-
ability of funds, equipment, materials, and qualified
personnel. New construction and improvements un-
derway or planned.
A. General
An appreciation of inland waterway transportation
in the country, including relationship to other trans-
portation, salient characteristics, physical environ-
mental factors, and economic and logistical significance.
B. Characteristics of the waterway system
1. GENERAL
A discussion of such basic nationwide features as
topography (watersheds, flood plains, banks, etc.), areal
distribution of navigable streams, climate and weather
conditions causing seasonal variations in water level
and freezing, mileage and limits of navigability, con-
nections with adjacent countries, density and nature
of traffic, and present status and general condition of
waterways.
2. WATERWAY FACILITIES
Characteristics of fixed facilities (locks, bridges,
dams, navigational aids), with summarizing statistics;
specification standards for structures; location of major
ports and cargo handled by type and tonnage (with
appropriate reference IO SECTION 35 and SUPPLEMENT I).
PAGE 6
4. TRAFFIC INTERRUPTION FACTORS
A survey of critical points or features of the waterway
system, with emphasis on existing or potential factors
which might adversely affect traffic.
5. DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM
New construction and improvements underway or
planned for waterways and ports.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
JANUARY 1962 CH AP T
C. Control and organization
1. CONTROL
Governmental control and regulations affecting the
waterways and the carriers.
2. PRINCIPAL CARRIERS
Ownership, organization, and administrative struc-
ture of each principal carrier.
3. PERSONNEL
Maintenance, operational, and carrier personnel in
terms of number, competency, labor relations, pay
rates, and health and retirement provisions.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Routine operating regulations and practices, signifi-
cant operating statistics and significant or unusual
operating problems and practices.
2. TRAFFIC
Traffic conditions and trends, including statistics for
passengers carried and cargo by commodities.
3. FINANCIAL DATA
Operating revenue and expenses of carriers, and gov-
ernmental budget data for waterways.
E. Craft and equipment
General survey of adequacy of craft, present con-
dition, fuel used, and facilities for repairing and con-
structing craft. Craft census by number, type (pas-
senger or cargo), propulsion (including horsepower for
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030(262.1.4
E 1? III
tugs), capacity, condition, and other pertinent charac-
teristics. Special equipment used for construction and
maintenance on the waterways and at the ports.
F. Individual waterways
General discussion giving location, tributaries, entire
length and navigable length by craft (capacity or
draft), types of cargo moved with performance sta-
tistics. Physical characteristics such as banks, bottom,
seasonal variations (water level, currents, freezing,
floods, etc.), and navigational hazards will be pre-
sented in tabular format to the maximum practicable
extent. Tabulation of locks (location, dimensions,
type of gates and how operated, locking time), bridges
(location, horizontal and vertical clearance, moveable
span), and other structures such as dams, aqueducts,
safety gates, tunnels, ferry crossings.
G. Inland waterway ports
Description of ports, giving total wharfage with
depths, storage facilities, mechanical-handling facilities,
craft repair facilities, and the type and amount of
cargo handled.
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
4ingoilwaved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
Section 35. Ports and Naval Facilities
(When there is no Supplement I)
A. General
1. PORTS
General discussion covering:
Geography of area as it relates to the establish-
ment of ports.
Brief history of growth and development of
port system.
Areal distribution and grouping of ports as
determined by geographical, historical, eco-
nomic, and strategic factors.
Categories of ports and brief summary of
criteria used in classifying. Cross-reference
to summary table of principal and secondary
ports and index map.
Alphabetical list of principal, secondary, and
minor ports (with coordinates).
Summary table of significant characteristics
and facilities of principal and secondary ports
using standard table with following headings:
NAME (coordinates)
PAGE 8
HARBOR:
Type
Fairway limitations
Largest vessel accommodated
Tides
Ice
BERTHS:
Anchorage
Mooring:
Fixed
Free-swinging
Alongside
MECHANICAL HANDLING FACILITIES:
Shore cranes
Floating cranes
Special handling equipment
STORAGE CAPACITY:
General cargo
Bulk liquid storage
Bulk dry storage
CLEARANCE:
Rail
Road
Other if applicable
ESTIMATED MILITARY PORT CAPACITY
NAVAL ACTIVITY
SHIPYARDS
REMARKS
2. NAVAL FACILITIES
General analysis covering:
Size, condition, and adequacy of naval estab-
lishment.
Brief summary of organization into naval dis-
tricts and commands.
Brief discussion of principal bases and summary
of other activities; basis on which classified.
Alphabetical list of naval facilities (with coordi-
nates).
3. SHIPYARDS
General analysis covering:
Extent and distribution of shipyard facilities.
Capability and size of yards.
Predominance of shipbuilding or ship-repairing
facilities.
Cross-reference to Subsection 64, E for discus-
sion of economic aspects of shipbuilding and
ship-repairing industry.
4. EXPLANATORY NOTES
a. PORT ADMINISTRATION
b. UNITS OF MEASURE
C. RAILROAD GAGE
d. PORT PLANS
e. CROSS-REFERENCES
f. GLOSSARY
B. Principal ports
1. NAME OF PORT
(Coordinates, H.O. Chart No.)
(From this point on, Subsection outline guide is identical with
Sections 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 of Supplement I except that head-
ing designations are dropped one level, e.g., Section 3, Second-
ary Ports becomes C. Secondary Ports.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A0003000300 1-4 ,
JANUARY 1962
Supplement I- Ports and Naval Facilities
OUTLINE
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
A. List of ports and naval facilities
B. Classification of ports and naval facilities
C. Explanatory notes
1. Port administration
2. Units of measure
3. Railroad gage
4. Port plans
5. Cross-references
6. Glossary
D. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 2. PRINCIPAL PORTS
A?X.
Name of port
1. Introduction
2, Harbor
3. Landing facilities
4. Storage facilities
5. Clearance facilities
6. Supplies and utilities
7. Trade of port
8. Port operations
9. Port administration
10. Estimated military port capacity
11. Naval facilities
12. Shipyards
13. Port development
SECTION 3. SECONDARY PORTS
SECTION 4. MINOR PORTS
SECTION 5. NAVAL FACILITIES
A. Coastal naval facilities
B. Inland naval facilities
SECTION 6. SHIPYARDS
A. Coastal shipyards
1. Category I and II shipyards
2. Category III shipyards
B. Inland shipyards
(Category I and II shipyards)
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Section 1. Introduction
A. List of ports and naval facilities
List all ports alphabetically, indicating name, coordi-
nates, and classification; cross-reference index map.
List all naval facilities alphabetically, indicating
name, coordinates, and type. Separate coastal and
inland facilities by means of shoulder heads; cross-
reference index map.
B. Classification of ports and naval facilities
Give criteria used in classifying ports into principal,
secondary, and minor.
State basis on which naval facilities have been
classified.
C. Explanatory notes
1. PORT ADMINISTRATION
Whenever the ports of a country come under the
jurisdiction of a national government department the
administration of ports on the national level is normally
described in SECTION 1, and the description of the
administration of each individual port on the local
level is carried in the study of the port.
2. UNITS OF MEASURE
Statement concerning use.
3. RAILROAD GAGE
Give the standard gage for the country and also any
other gages that serve the various ports.
PAGE 2
4. PORT PLANS
Make statement such as the following: The port plan
provides a graphic representation of the port, showing
the relationship of its component parts and the loca-
tions of the principal port facilities. Although the
port plan carries depth patterns, it is in no sense a
navigational instrument and should not be used as a
chart. The port plans in this Supplement have been
based on the best charts and plans available and have
been amended from the most recent photography and
reports. Dimensions and scales represent close ap-
proximations.
5. CROSS-REFERENCES
Point out topics which receive additional treatment
in other Sections of the NIS. Provide appropriate
cross-references for each subject.
6. GLOSSARY
List with English equivalents of foreign generic
terms used in Supplement.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
1) To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Supplement and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Supplement.
2) To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide general guidance for collection effort.
In this connection, only the principal sources actually
used are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 SUPPLEMENT I
Section 2. Principal ports
A?X. Name of port
(Coordinates, H.O. Chart No.)
1. INTRODUCTION
(General summary to include following items where
pertinent)
Relative location
Importance (strategic and/or economic)
Principal characteristics and activities of port (include
types of cargo handled and annual volume of trade)
Summary of harbor
Position and layout
Largest vessel that can be accommodated in port
Anchorage
Summary of capacity
Estimated military port capacity
Berthage
Summary of port facilities
Wharves and wharf facilities (mechanical handling
facilities, transit sheds, rail and road clearances,
utilities)
Storage and specialized terminal facilities
Clearance facilities
Summary of naval facilities
Type
Function
Significant features
Shipyard facilities
Summary of port development
2. HARBOR
a. GENERAL ? Brief general overall picture of
harbor including:
Location in relation to town and coast
General form and type
Framework and component parts
b. PROTECTION ? SUITIIIIRTy of protective system
as a whole. Analysis of component parts of principal
protective system covering;
Position
Shape and alinement
Dimensions
Construction
Brief analysis of auxiliary or inner protective
works.
c. HARI3OR DIVISIONS Description of each
vision, when appropriate, covering:
Relative position
Use
Dimensions
Defined channels
Turning basins
d. FAIRWAY LIMITATIONS
(1) Approach ? Brief summary indicating char-
acter of approach and limitations, if any.
(2) Entrance Describe briefly (if harbor has
defined entrance); give controlling dimensions.
(3) harbor
C. SILTING AND DREDGING ? Liability to silting
and dredging requirements of all navigable fairways
and berths.
f. ANCHORAGE ? Indicate the location of anchor-
ages (any area, customarily used for anchorage or
specifically reserved for that purpose and in any way
associated with the port) and cover each in terms of:
Depths
Bottom sediments (evaluation of holding qualities)
Protection from sea and weather
Number of free-swinging berths by classes when anchorage
is such that a vessel berthed there would be considered to
have entered the port and the number of berths falls
within the limit set in the anchorage berth cht,ssification
standards.
If in estimating military port capacity the berths used to
serve the lighter wharfage of the port are insufficient or
are entirely lacking, areas that tppear to be suitable for
anchoring may be described as anchorages, but it must
be made clear that they have been determined from ;in
interpretation of the chart and not from evidence that
ships actually anchor there.
g. MOORING BERTHS
(1) Fixed
Location and layout
Number, types, sizes, and capacities of berths
(2) Free-swinging
Location and layout
Number, sizes, and capacities of berths
IL HYDROGRAPHIC AND WEATHER CONDITIONS
Tides.
f)epths and heights
Adverse conditions affecting port operations
Pilotage
i. DEFENSES ? Summary of port defense system
with brief description of operations and significant
di- facilities such as nets and booms, detection devices,
mines, shore and antiaircraft batteries, entrance con-
trol post, and patrol operations.
3. LANDING FACILITIES
a. WHARVES AND LANDINGS
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
(I) Principal wharves ? Brief statement in-
eluding the following items if significant.
Principal wharves
Total wharfage
Wharf distribution
Wharf evaluation
Wharf construction:
Generic types
Construction
Decking and apron
Condition
Wharf ancillary facilities:
Rail facilities on wharf
Clearing roadways
Transit sheds
Mechanical handling facilities
Utilities
Cross-reference to table of wharves
Table of wharves
(2) Offshore-pipeline berths
(3) Supplemental wharves and landings
Summary (1 or 2 sentences)
List of supplemental wharves and landings
b. MECHANICAL HANDLING FACILITIES
(1) Cranes ? Summary of shore cranes; indicate
general types and capacities; divide cranes into cargo,
shipyard, and miscellaneous categories; cross-reference
to table of shore cranes.
Table of shore cranes.
Floating cranes.
(2) Stevedore gear ? Availability of stevedore
gear: carriers, forklifts, jitneys, wharf trucks, portable
conveyors, etc.
(3) Special handling equipment ? Summary
statement of special cargo-handling equipment (coal
and ore loaders, grain unloaders, industrial track, pipe-
lines, etc.) indicating types, numbers, and uses.
C. HARBOR CRAFT ? General statement of extent
and adequacy of service fleet.
Details of craft (arrange by type):
Tugs and launches
Breakdown by classes (seagoing and harbor). Give type
of power, horsepower, and any special equipment such
as salvage and firefighting equipment; indicate operat
ing ranges of seagoing salvage tugs
Lighters
Breakdown by capacity and type (self-propelled or dumb).
Give numbers (in round figures or general terms), con-
struction, capacity, draft loaded, and type of power if
self-propelled
Bunkering and watering craft
Details of each craft:
Type, capacity, equipment, delivery rate, whether pri-
vately or governmentally owned
Dredging equipment
Details of each craft:
Type, capacity in terms of operating depth and cubic
yards per hour (include hopper barges)
PAGE 4
Miscellaneous craft
Details of miscellaneous harbor service craft such as fire-
boats, icebreakers, ferries, piledrivers, etc. Cover sig-
nificant characteristics of each in detail comparable
to above
4. STORAGE FACILITIES
a. GENERAL CARGO STORAGE
(1) Covered ? Summary of all transit sheds,
warehouses, and other general-cargo storage buildings
directly associated with port operations; give general
location of facilities and total capacity (in round
figures) of transit sheds, warehouses, and other general-
cargo storage buildings. Cross-reference to table of
covered general-cargo storage.
Table of covered general-cargo storage
(2) Refrigerated ?Summary of facilities asso-
ciated with port operations; include total capacity (in
round figures) and for each installation cover:
Name
Location
Use
Storage capacity (breakdown by controlling temperatures)
Ice-making capacity
Remarks (include machinery and equipment if significant)
(3) Open stacking space ? Summary sentence
on availability of open space in waterfront area suitable
or reserved for storing general cargo, indicating if
served by rail and/or road. List of specific sites
covering:
Location
Size
b. BULK-CARGO STORAGE
(1) Liquid
(a) PETROLEUM -- Summary of facilities in
port including total capacity and breakdown by
product, and general location of installations. Cross-
reference to table of principal wharves and/or table of
offshore-pipeline berths for details of cargo and bunker-
ing berths. Cross-reference to table of petroleum
storage terminals.
Table of petroleum storage terminals.
(b) (NAME OF COMMODITY OR MISCELLANE-
OUS) ? Scope, detail, and arrangement similar to that
for "Petroleum"; cover such commodities as molasses,
vegetable oils, wine, etc.
(2) Dry Table of dry bulk-cargo terminal
facilities.
(a) GRAIN Summary of facilities directly
associated with port operations; include total capacity
(in round figure) and general location of installations.
Cross-reference to table of bulk terminal facilities.
Cross-reference to details of special handling equipment.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A00030003 -4
SUPPLEMENT I
JANUARY 1962
(b) COAL Summary of facilities directly
associated with port operations; include total capacity
(in round figure), and general location of installations.
Cross-reference to table of bulk terminal facilities.
Cross-reference to table of principal wharves for details
of berths and special handling equipment.
(C) (NAME . OF COMMODITY OR MISCELLANE-
OUS) ? Scope, detail, and arrangement similar to that
for "Coal" and "Grain"; cover such commodities as
ore, lumber, etc.
5. CLEARANCE FACILITIES
a. RAIL
(1) Lines clearing port ? Identification of each
line and brief summary of each:
Number of tracks
Gage
Connecting points
Distances
Direction
(2) Rail facilities in port Summary of port
rail network; include the following:
Connecting line to port area from main terminal point
Bridges and ferries forming integral part of port network
Trackage in port area
Railroad yards
Cross-reference to table of railroad yards
Table of railroad yards
b. ROAD
(1) Roads clearing port ? Identification of prin-
cipal routes and brief summary of each:
Construction
Width
Connecting points
Distances
Direction
Condition
(2) Streets in port General analysis of ade-
quacy in relation to port operation.
C. INLAND WATERWAY ? Identification of each
route clearing port and brief summary of each:
Type
Connecting points
Distances
Direction
Controlling dimensions
d. PIPELINE ? Identification of pipelines clearing
port and brief summary of each:
Commodity carried
Size
Terminus
Distances
Direction
Capacity
6. SUPPLIES AND UTILITIES
a. PETROLEUM BUNKERS ? Brief summary 011
availability of bunkers including type of fuel, methods
of supply, and names of terminals. Cross-reference to
table of principal wharves and table of petroleum
terminals.
b. COAL BUNKERS Summary of availability of
bunkers with cross-reference to table of principal
wharves.
C. WATER ? Summary statement on availability
of water to ships; methods of supply and extent of
facilities; quality of water; type and adequacy of port
supply; if port has no water barges, give dimensions of
largest watering berth.
d. ELECTRICITY ? General summary covering:
Characteristics of service currents distributed in port area
Adequacy of supply for port operations
State if current is produced locally, taken from a grid sys-
tem, or both
e. PROVISIONS AND CHANDLERY ? Brief summary
of availability.
7. TRADE OF PORT
a. SHIPPING ? Summary of volume of shipping
calling at port for most recent 5 years; analysis of trends
and significance; cross-reference to table and graph of
shipping.
b. COMMERCE ? Summary of volume of- cargo
handled through port and analysis of trends and sig-
nificance of passenger traffic for most recent 5 years;
enumerate principal receipts and shipments; table and
graph if appropriate.
8. PORT OPERATIONS
a. CARGO HANDLING ? General analysis of opera-
tional factors related to cargo-handling procedure and
potential. These may include:
Average cargo tonnage handled, daily and monthly
Average cargo-handling rates, hourly and daily
Ratio of receipts to shipments
Ratio of bulk cargoes to general cargoes
Ratio of cargo worked alongside to cargo worked in stream
(lightered from vessels at anchor or moorings)
Average vessel turnaround
Prevailing methods of cargo transfer and regulations affect-
ing
Fish landed from fishing craft
Cargo transferred over wharves from one part of port to
another
Limiting factors (actual or potential)
b. LABOR ? General analysis covering such fac-
tors as:
Size of normal stevedore force
Adequacy of force for normal port operations
Efficiency of stevedore personnel
Availability of labor reserve
Political orientation
9. PORT ADMINISTRATION
General statement on port authority. Discuss
official services such as quarantine, customs, security
organization, and free-port zone where pertinent.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
arahmemmmiummomum NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
10. ESTIMATED MILITARY PORT CAPACITY
11. NAVAL FACILITIES
a. SUMMARY ? General summary covering:
Location
Type
Function
Administration
Facilities
Base development
b. HARBOR
C. BASE FACILITIES
(1) Landing facilities ?Brief summary and
cross-reference to Subsection 3, Landing Facilities, for
principal treatment.
(2) Shipyard facilities ?Brief summary and
cross-reference to SECTION 6, Shipyards, for principal
treatment.
(3) Ordnance facilities
(a) MANUFACTURING FACILITIES Analyze
typo of manufacturing and give details of plant includ-
ing: current activity and capabilities; identification of
buildings and facilities; size, construction, and principal
equipment of each building.
(b) ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE FACILITIES ?
Analyze type of operations performed and give details
of plant including: current activity and capabilities;
identification of buildings and facilities; size, construc-
tion, and principal equipment of each building.
(4) Supply facilities
(a) MATERIAL STORAGE AND SUPPLY ? Analyze
activities and give details of facilities including: use,
construction, capacity, and principal equipment of each
building; indicate in general terms stocks of materiel
normally maintained.
(b) PETROLEUM STORAGE AND SUPPLY -- Brief
summary of facilities and supply. Cross-reference as
appropriate to Subsection 4, b, Bulk-cargo Storage;
6, a, Petroleum Bunkers; and table of principal wharves.
(C) ORDNANCE STORAGE AND SUPPLY ? Iden-
tification of buildings and facilities and details of each:
use, construction, capacity.
Indicate normal stocks of ordnance maintained.
(5) Communications facilities ? General anal-
ysis of organization and function of communications
activities.
For each facility or installation (radio station, relay
station, message center, etc.) cover such details as
type, construction, dimensions, layout, and equipment.
(6) Training facilities ? Identification and de-
scription of facilities including school buildings and
quarters, instruction shops, practice equipment, etc.
PAGE 6
(7) Medical facilities ? General description of
medical facilities including hospitals, dispensaries, etc.
(8) Miscellaneous facilities ? Detailed descrip-
tion of all special activities not included in above.
d. BASE UTILITIES
(I) Housing and messing facilities ? Identifi-
cation and detailed description of barracks, quarters,
and ancillary installations, such as mess halls.
(2) Transportation facilities
(a) CLEARANCE Brief summary of rail and
road facilities clearing base indicating connecting points
with main rail lines and roads.
(b) FACILITIES IN BASE ? SI1111111ary analysis
covering layout and construction of streets; details of
vehicles and vehicle-service facilities; layout of railroad
trackage; details of railroad equipment.
(3) Water ?Summary analysis covering:
source, quantity, and quality of supply; details of
transmission; purification, distillation, storage, and
distribution.
(4) Electricity ? Summary analysis covering:
Sources of supply; type and capacity of base power
plants; details of generating equipment and trans-
formers; characteristics of current as produced and
distributed.
(5) Fire protection ? Summary analysis cover-
ing: equipment and alarm system; fire mains and
pressures; firefighting force.
C. BASE DEFENSES ? Summarize base defenses,
covering such aspects as protective construction and
concealment; chemical-, biological-, and atomic-war-
fare defense; and internal security.
12. SHIPYARDS
a. CATEGORY I AND II SHIPYARDS ? General sum-
mary of shipbuilding and ship-repair facilities and
capabilities; indicate size of largest ship that can be
drydocked by giving capacity of largest drydocking
facility and largest ship that could be built; give num-
ber of yards in each category and names of yards;
cross-reference to SECTION 6 for details.
b. CATEGORY III SHIPYARDS ? Brief summary;
cross-reference to SECTION 6.
C. AUXILIARY REPAIR FACILITIES
d. SALVAGE FACILITIES
C. DETAILS OF DRYDOCKING INSTALLATIONS
Table of graving docks
Table of floating drydocks
Table of marine railways (only when of considerable
significance)
13. PORT DEVELOPMENT
Detailed description of projected harbor works and
port improvements.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
SUPPLEMENT I Silsorammisimiim
JANUARY 1962
Section 3. Secondary Ports
A-X. Name of port
Describe secondary ports in the same manner as
principal ports, the treatment being indicated by the
outline guide in SECTION 2, Principal Ports.
Section 4. Minor Ports
Tabulate pertinent details of minor ports (those not
treated in SECTION 2 or 3 but having some significance
or potential utility) using standard table with follow-
ing headings:
Name (coordinates)
Harbor:
Fairway limitations
Tidal rises
Ice
Currents
Anchorage
Landing facilities:
Wharves
Supplemental landings
Mechanical handling facilities
Harbor craft
Storage and utilities
Clearance:
Rail
Road
Inland waterway
Shipyards
Remarks
Section 5. Naval Facilities
General analysis of naval establishment covering
size, adequacy, and organization into districts or com-
mands and distribution and overall condition of vari-
ous activities.
A. Coastal naval facilities
Tabulate significant characteristics of naval activi-
ties using standard table with following headings:
Location
Type of activity and mission
Facilities
Cross-reference to SECTIONS 2 and 3 for detailed des-
cription of activities.
B. Inland naval facilities
1. NAME OF PLACE (COORDINATES)
NOTE From this point, this outline guide is identical with
items a, b, c, d, and e, of 11. Naval Facilities, SEC-
TION 2. If facilities are small and of relatively little
importance they may be tabulated in the same fashion
as coastal naval facilities in Subsection 5, A.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1.1.41111REMNfthir NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
Section 6. Shipyards
General analysis of shipyards of area covering extent
and distribution of shipyard facilities, capability and
size of yards, and predominance of shipbuilding or
ship-repairing facilities. Cross-reference to Subsection
64, E for discussion of economic aspects of shipbuilding
and ship-repairing industry.
A. Coastal shipyards
1. CATEGORY I AND II SHIPYARDS
Tabulate significant characteristics of each yard
using standard table with the following headings:
Name
Shipbuilding installations:
Shipbuilding ways
Shipbuilding docks
Shipbuilding sites
Drydocking installations:
Graving docks
PAGE 8
Floating drydocks
Marine railways
Fitting-out and repair berths
Shops
Cranes
Utilities
Labor
2. CATEGORY III SHIPYARDS
Tabulate significant characteristics of each yard
using standard table with the following headings:
Port (coordinates)
Name and location in port
Activities and facilities
B. Inland shipyards
Tabulate Category I and II Shipyards in same man-
ner as Category I and II Coastal Shipyards.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER III mIllimummommmm
Section 35. Ports and Naval Facilities
(When there is no Supplement I)
A. General
1. PORTS
Comprehensive evaluative discussion covering:
Geography of area as it relates to the establish-
ment of ports.
Brief history of growth and development of
port system.
Areal distribution and grouping of ports as de-
termined by geographical, historical, eco-
nomic, and strategic factors.
Comparative analysis of ports, either by area
or individually, on basis of commercial activ-
ity, military port capacity, and any other
pertinent factors if appropriate or significant.
Governmental control and administration when
applicable.
Categories of ports and brief summary of
criteria used in classifying. Cross reference
to summary table of principal and secondary
ports.
Alphabetical list of principal, secondary, and
minor ports (with coordinates).
Summary table of significant characteristics
and facilities of principal and secondary ports
using standard table with following headings:
NAME (coordinates)
HARBOR.:
Type
Fairway limitations
Largest vessel accOmmodated
Tides
Ice
BERTIIS:
Anchorage
Mooring:
Fixed
Free-swinging
Alongside
MECHANICAL HANDLING FACILITIES:
Shore cranes
Floating cranes
Special handling equipmen t
STORAGE CAPACITY:
General cargo
Bulk liquid storage
Bulk dry storage
Open stacking space
CLEARANCE:
Rail
Road
Other if applicable
ESTIMATED MILITARY PORT CAPACITY
NAVAL ACTIVITY
SHIPYARDS
REMARKS
2. NAVAL FACILITIES
General analysis covering:
Size, condition, and adequacy of naval estab-
lishment.
Brief summary of organization into naval dis-
tricts and commands.
Alphabetical list of naval facilities (with coordi-
nates).
3. SHIPYARDS
General analysis covering:
Extent and distribution of shipyard facilities.
Capability and size of yards.
Predominance of shipbuilding or ship-repairing
facilities.
Cross reference to Subsection 64, E for discus-
sion of economic aspects of shipbuilding and
ship-repairing industry.
Alphabetical list of category I and IT shipyards
(with coordinates). '
Alphabetical list of locations (with coordinates)
having facilities with capabilities less than
those of category II shipyards but engaged
in or capable of ship construction and/or
ship repair.
4. TECHNICAL NOTES
From this point on, this Subsection outline guide is identical
with Subsections C, D, El, and 17, of Section 1. Intro-
duction of Supplement I. However, heading designations
are dropped two levels, e.g., C. Berth-classifi,cation standards
becomes a. Berth-classification standards.
B. Principal ports
1. NAME OF PORT
(Coordinates, H.O. Chart No.)
From this point on, Subsection outline guide is identical with
Sections 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 of Supplement I except that head-
ing designations are dropped one level, e.g., Section 3, Second-
ary Porte becomes C. Secondary Ports, and the final Subsec-
tion is Comments on Principal Sources.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 0
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
"Migliftionur NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
X. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
A. General
JULY 1957
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 36. Merchant Marine
Give a brief summary of the merchant marine of
the country including: number of ships involved,
ownership, normal trade, place in the economy, general
policy, and adaptability for military use.
B. Organization
1. OWNERSHIP (government or private; if pri-
vate, include beneficial ownership).
2. ADMINISTRATION
3. NATIONAL POLICY
To include subsidies, regulation, and international
relations of the merchant marine.
4. FOREIGN INTERESTS
5. PERSONNEL AND TRAINING
C. Composition
Number of ships by type, (1,000 gross tons and up) .
Name, speed, tonnage (GRT and DWT), size (length,
beam, and draft), type of power, type of fuel used,
daily fuel consumption, origin, year built, passenger
accommodations, crew strength, and special equip-
ment.
Any special modifications or readily adaptable com-
bat features, i.e., gun emplacements.
Detail to include an analysis of the fuel, speed, ton-
nage, and age groupings and any conclusions drawn
therefrom. A discussion of the availability of fuel, and
of the number and tonnage of the vessels from 500 to
1,000 gross tons.
D. Shipping program
1. CONSTRUCTION PROGRAM
a. FUNDS APPROPRIATED
b. SCHEDULE BY TYPES AND NUMBER
PAGE 10
C. SHIPYARD LOCATIONS
d. AVERAGE NUMBER OF SHIPYARD WORKERS
e. CAPACITY OF SHIPBUILDING INDUSTRY
f. KEELS LAID -- Details for approximately one
year together with long time general trends.
g. LAUNCHINGS (same explanation as f).
h. DELIVERIES (same explanation as f).
2. PURCHASE OR SALE OF VESSELS
List number and countries from and to which vessels
were sold, and new and former names for last year.
3. CHARTERING OF VESSELS
List number and countries from and to which vessels
were chartered for past year together with any signifi-
cant trends, either long time or recent.
E. Normal shipping routes and ports of call
F. Operations and traffic
Discuss generally the place of the merchant marine
in the economy of the nation including such items as
invisible income, exchange earned, percentage of
population dependent, and other related matters.
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the information contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER III
Section 37. Civil Air
A. General
A resume of the salient characteristics of the domestic
and international civil aviation operation with reference
to its magnitude and adequacy in serving the air
transportation needs of the nation, and the factors
affecting civil air, such as the geography of the area,
and effectiveness of other transportation media;
number of civil or paramilitary aircraft; number of
major aircraft by types; total persons engaged in civil
or paramilitary aviation; and the number of key
individuals, such as pilots and technicians.
An evaluation of civil air capability for augmenting
military air strength; current trends, such as expansion
programs, reequipment and development programs,
pending changes on a national basis, proposed changes
in subsidy and organization and some statistics or
estimates to depict the relative regional or international
position.
B. Governmental organization, control and
policy
1. ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION
OF CIVIL AIR
a. CONTROLLING AGENCY ? Description of agency
responsible for civil aviation, including the composition
and functions of controlling agencies and their relation-
ship to other government agencies, particularly the
military, supplemented with organizational charts
showing channels of authority, administration, opera-
tions and coordination. Evaluation of the organiza-
tion, citing strengths and weaknesses, noting dissident
or other elements exerting influence or control. Eval-
uation of government policies which may have con-
tributed to the operational capabilities and effective-
ness of civil aviation.
b. LAWS AND REGULATIONS ? Summarization Of
the basic laws governing civil aviation, including laws
providing for governmental control, those establishing
controlling agencies, and the general aviation regula-
tions pertaining to registry of aircraft, airworthiness
certificates, licensing, certification, and other general
subjects, including any data on unusual restrictions
applicable to foreign or other aircraft operating within
the nation.
2. GOVERNMENTAL POLICY AND SUPPORT
FOR CIVIL AVIATION
a. OWNERSHIP ? The pattern of ownership
favored by the government for civil air enterprises.
The extent to which federal and municipal govern-
ments and private companies or individuals participate
.forialiardiam.
in the national enterprise. The degree of foreign
participation in national organizations, and the degree
of investment in foreign civil aviation by national civil
air enterprises.
b. PRIVATE OR OTHER AIR ENTERPRISE ? Dis-
cussion of government policies concerning private and
public ownership, control and operation of domestic
scheduled air carriers, nonscheduled carriers and
charter operators; the government attitude toward
scheduled and nonscheduled air carriers of foreign
nations, private flying, aeroclubs and schools.
c. SUBSIDIES ? Description of financial aid by
the government, covering the nature, extent and
purpose of support given to carriers, aeroclubs, and
schools; the method of application of such aid; the
national civil aviation budgets; governmental aid,
other than direct financial support, for air facilities,
navigational aids, and meteorological services, includ-
ing names of agencies supplying this aid; and the
attitude of the government toward financial support of
civil aviation by foreign governments or individuals.
C. Civil and paramilitary air enterprises
1. SCHEDULED AIR CARRIERS
A discussion of each carrier offering scheduled air
services; the full corporate name and the short or
popular name by which the carrier is known; and its
main bases of operation. Other salient points for
discussion are:
a. OWNERSHIP, CAPITALIZATION, ORGANIZATION
AND CONTROL ? Listing of the persons or organizations
participating in ownership; the total capitalization and
the percentage held by each participant, with comments
on any political or economic significance attached to this
participation. Evaluation of combinations forming
control of the carrier and its operational organization.
Tables of organization. Description of any participa-
tion by the carrier in other enterprises or activities,
financial or otherwise, foreign or domestic. Evaluation
of any contractual arrangements for financial, man-
agerial, operational, or other assistance from other
enterprises or governments, foreign or domestic.
b. OPERATIONS
(1) Air services ? Description of scheduled serv-
ices. Tabulation of terminals and intermediate points
served, and frequencies of each service. Illustration of
domestic and interbloc or international air route
network on a map. Description of the carrier's ad-
herence to published schedules, effectiveness of opera-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 11
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Imililliiiimeimmumnsmum NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
tions and any nonscheduled operations or other flight
activities.
(2) Operational statistics, scheduled air car-
riers ? Listing of the most recent operational statistics
to indicate the scope of operations; utilization rates of
selected aircraft; accident rates; passengers carried;
route-miles flown; serviceability rates; ton-miles of
cargo and mail, and other pertinent data.
(3) Aircraft ? Description of numbers and types
of aircraft owned by air carriers and the number
normally operational; numbers and types of aircraft
on order and estimated dates of delivery; leased or
borrowed aircraft with numbers, types and ownership;
and leasing or lending of the carrier's aircraft.
(4) Maintenance ? Description of maintenance
and overhaul facilities and capabilities, with comment
on availability of its maintenance facilities to others.
If the carrier does not perform its own maintenance,
shows where and by whom the work is done.
(5) Personnel Tabulation of employees in
each major category, showing total number of em-
ployees. Discussion of the efficiency of personnel in
the various categories; training of employees and
nonemployees; pensions, pay and flight hours, and a
listing of foreign national employees by category.
c. HISTORY Narration of the most significant
factors in the founding and development of the carrier
and its relative national and international importance.
2. MISCELLANEOUS DOMESTIC NONSCIIED-
ULED AIR CARRIERS AND SERVICES
A discussion of each air service operator engaged in
irregular or nonscheduled operations; charter, passenger
or cargo services, aerial spraying, aerial advertising,
ambulance services and aerial photographic surveys,
including the following tabular description:
Legal name. Short or popular name.
Headquarters.
Type(s) of service.
Numbers and types of aircraft owned.
Numbers and types of employees, including a listing of
foreign nationals.
3. GOVERNMENT, PARAMILITARY, AND
PRIVATE OPERATORS
A listing of government agencies and other enter-
prises owning civil aircraft; type of agency, business or
organization; numbers and types of aircraft used;
purpose of use; number and types of air and ground
crewmen employed; numbers and types of aircraft
owned by individuals and used for noncommercial
purposes; and names of individuals owning significant
numbers of private aircraft or major transport types.
PAGE 12
4. PERFORMANCE, GENERAL CHARACTER-
ISTICS, AND CAPABILITY OF SELECTED
TRANSPORT AIRCRAFT
Designation by name, manufacturer, and model
number of the transports mentioned in the Section,
including performance and characteristics such as
cruising and maximum speeds, range, gross weight,
passenger seats, cargo loads for basic type missions;
engine types (jet, piston, turboprop); engine models.
5. SELECTED NATIONAL OPERATIONAL
STATISTICS
Inclusion of operational statistics indicating the
scope and effectiveness of civil aviation, with emphasis
on the total of all air carrier operations. Includes total
passengers; tons of cargo and mail; passenger-miles;
cargo-mail-ton miles; representative load factors; ac-
cident rates and safety records; unduplicated route-
miles; budget figures and items from annual reports
and financial statements; examples of typical fare rates;
and other available data.
D. International relations and operations
1. AGREEMENTS AND ARRANGEMENTS
Evaluation of international air transport agreements
and all other arrangements that sanction international
scheduled air sorvices to and from the nation; including
formal, informal, provisional or other arrangements,
with the type, effective date, duration and major
provisions of each. Analysis of the agreements in
terms of their purpose, significance and effect. This
is also applicable to negotiations with other nations
for formal, informal, provisional, or other agreements
or arrangements
2. FOREIGN AIR CARRIER OPERATIONS
A listing of foreign scheduled air carriers conducting
services into or through the nation, including company
names, nationalities, routes, and frequency of services.
Tabulation of such services showing terminal points,
points served in the country and frequency of flights.
A map may be used to depict the international services.
Note important foreign irregular or semischeduled air
carriers that afford frequent or significant service to
the nation.
3. FOREIGN AID AND INFLUENCE
Description of any significant aid furnished to the
nation's civil aviation by foreign states, organizations,
or individuals, including an assessment of the scope,
value, and effectiveness of any foreign aid program.
Evaluation of any significant direct or indirect in-
fluence on any phase of the national civil aviation effort
by foreign countries, organizations, or individuals,
giving source, nature and extent of this influence.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAP TEI? III 6.1111111minglim
Section 37. Civil Air
A. General
Overall discussion of civil aviation within and re-
lated to the subject nation, summarizing detailed
information of all topics, and generally in topical
sequence, appearing in subsequent paragraphs and
including ?
1. DOMESTIC STATUS
Give a resumo of the development and present
characteristics of the national civil aviation effort,
with particular reference to its adequacy and effective-
ness in serving the transportation needs of the nation
and its capability for augmenting the military air
strength. State the total number of aircraft and avia-
tion personnel engaged in civil aviation, showing the
aircraft by types, and the personnel by category of
employment.
2. INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS
Outline briefly the position occupied by the nation
in world air transportation activities, with emphasis
on any important geographic relation to world air
routes, and/or any significant international civil avia-
tion affiliations.
3. OTHER GENERAL TOPICS
Other information which affects or applies to civil
air but which is not appropriate to any of the main
subsections.
B. Government control and policy
11 ADMINISTRATION
a. LAWS AND REGULATIONS ? Summarize the basic
law or laws governing civil aviation and discuss briefly
any significant provisions. Itemize any general regu-
lations which may have been adopted (i.e., those per-
taining to the registry of aircraft, the issuance oCair-.
worthiness certificates, the licensing of aviation per-
sonnel, the certification of airline companies, or other
general subjects). If air corridors have been prescribed
for use by foreign and/or national air carriers, give a
brief discussion and supplement the text with a map on
which the corridors are depicted. Indicate any further
special controls applicable to foreign aircraft operating
inside the nation.
b. CONTROLLING AGENCY ? Designate the govern-
ment agency. (ministry, department or bureau) charged
with civil aviation and outline the functional organiza-
tion of the agency. Discuss briefly the effectiveness of
the organization, citing salient points of strength or
weakness. Supplement the text with an organization
chart reflecting the channels of authority.
2. SUPPORT
a. OWNERSHIP ? Discuss briefly the pattern of
ownership favored by the government for national civil
air enterprises, indicating the extent to which the fed-
eral and municipal governments, and/or private enter-
prises are permitted to participate. The degree of
foreign participation, if foreign investment is author-
ized, is specified. The extent to which national civil
air enterprises are permitted to invest in foreign aviation
enterprises likewise is specified.
b. SUBSIDIES ? Describe any financial aid ren-
dered civil aviation by the government, to include both
direct and indirect subsidies, indicating the method,
extent and purpose of such aid.
3. TRENDS
If applicable, state whether the policies adopted by
the government have fostered the operational capabili-
ties and effectiveness of civil aviation, referring briefly
to any future developments indicated.
C. International relations
1. AFFILIATIONS
Designate the international civil aviation conven-
tions to which the nation is signatory, and the inter-
national civil aviation organizations of which the
nation is a member. Where appropriate, describe
briefly the position taken by the government in regard
to civil air policies of other nations (such as the U.S.-
U.K. air policy).
2. AIR AGREEMENTS
a. FORMAL AIR TRANSPORT AGREEMENTS ? List
all formal air transport agreements and any interim
agreements (or tacit understandings) contracted by
the nation, and outline significant provisions. Discuss
any important departure from the U.S.-sponsored
standard form of agreement.
b. FOREIGN AIR CARRIER OPERATIONS ? Indicate
the foreign scheduled air carriers conducting services
into the subject nation under the agreements, supple-
menting the text where feasible with a map depicting
the services.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE...1i
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
saimuleisiiman NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
3. FOREIGN INFLUENCE
Discuss briefly any significant influence exerted on
the national civil aviation effort by foreign nations,
organizations or individuals. The discussion includes
details of any specific foreign aid programs, such as
the U.S. Economic Cooperation Administration as it
relates to civil aviation. Any Communist influence
is specified.
D. Civil air enterprises
1. SCHEDULED AIR CARRIERS
a. HISTORY Sketch briefly the history of each
national scheduled air .carrier, indicating the relative
importance of the enterprises.
b. OWNERSHIP List the interests having finan-
cial investment in each carrier, showing percentage
participation, and commenting briefly on any foreign
participants. Specify any investment by the na-
tional air carriers in foreign aviation enterprises.
C. ORGANIZATION ? Discuss briefly the organi-
zational setup of the carriers, including management
and operations, and supplement the text with organi-
zation charts where appropriate.
d. OPERATIONAL STRENGTH Tabulate for each
airline company:
Name and headquarters
Capitalization (in U.S. dollar equivalent)
Operating base or bases
Number and type aircraft (operational and non-operational)
by base of operations
Number and nationality of personnel (flight, ground, other)
by base of operations
C. SCHEDULED AIR SERVICES ? Discuss briefly the
scope of the air services conducted by each carrier
(domestic and international). Show the services cur-
rently in operation on a route map, and itemize the
services on a table showing route terminals, ports
of call, and number of flights per week. Note any
significant charter-type services performed by these
carriers.
1. AIR CARRIER PERFORMANCE ? Indicate the gen-
eral effectiveness of the carriers in providing trans-
portation and comment briefly on such factors as ade-
quacy and proficiency of personnel, utilization rate,
accident rate, and adherence to schedules. Summa-
rize any expansion or retrenchment programs.
2. MISCELLANEOUS AIR CARRIERS
Comment briefly on the activities of non-scheduled
air carriers, charter, taxi, ambulance, crop dusting or
other special air services. If the activities are of suf-
ficient importance, present comparable data for the
special carrier as is presented for the scheduled car-
rier companies. Otherwise, show in tabular form:
Name and headquarters
Type of activity
PAGE 12
JULY 1957
Number and type aircraft (operational and non-operational)
Number and nationality of personnel (by category of em-
ployment)
3. GOVERNMENT AND PRIVATE OPERA-
TORS
List the government agencies, individuals and/or
private business enterprises (other than scheduled or
miscellaneous air carriers) owning civil transport
aircraft, showing the number and type of aircraft
owned by each, the number and employment of avia-
tion personnel, and the purpose for which the aircraft
are utilized.
E. Civil aviation training
1. PREPARATORY
Describe the attitude of the government toward fos-
tering civil aviation schools and clubs and/or other pri-
vate flying activities indicating whether sports flying
or premilitary training is the primary objective. Dis-
cuss the extent to which these activities are supplying
the military air arm with trained or partially trained
personnel.
a. AVIATION SCHOOLS Give name and location
of all civil aviation schools, citing whether owned and
operated by the government or by private inter-
ests. Include a brief r?m?f the curriculum, the
instructor staff, the student body, the aircraft or
glider strength, other related school facilities and
equipment, and general effectiveness of the schools.
b. AERO CLUBS -- List all aero clubs, giving lo-
cation and ownership. Indicate membership, aircraft,
or glider strength, related equipment, and general
effectiveness of the clubs.
C. OTHER ? List and cite use of training type
aircraft and related equipment other than in military
use owned by the government or private interests
(other than schools or clubs).
2. AIR CREW AND GROUND PERSONNEL
Describe all training activities carried out by th.e
national scheduled, miscellaneous or other air opera-
tors. Give details of training programs under which
nationals are provided aviation training in foreign
states.
F. Services and supplies
1. MAINTENANCE INSTALLATIONS
Discuss briefly the maintenance installations owned
and operated by the government, the air operators
and/or other activities showing location, type of main-
tenance, standards of performance and adequacy and
proficiency of maintenance personnel. Give an over-
all estimate of maintenance capabilities. If perti-
nent, indicate maintenance arrangements with foreign
nations and/or agencies.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER III
4. AFFILIATIONS
Discussion of all governmental affiliations with civil
aviation and paramilitary organizations.
Listing of the international civil aviation or para-
military organizations of which the nation is a member
and the conventions to which the nation is signatory,
including adherence to, or participation in, any signifi-
cant policies or postures adopted by other nations.
Description of civil air missions to other countries,
their number, countries to which sent, number of mem-
bers, and the organization, functions and purpose of
each mission.
E. Mobilization potential
1. MOBILIZATION POTENTIAL AND PLANS
General assessment of the civil aviation potential to
augment the armed forces in an emergency, and the
methods by which it could be realized, including
proposals or actual systems for mobilization of civil
aviation for military or other emergency use.
Description of the mobilization plan.
2. AIRCRAFT POTENTIAL AND AVAIL-
ABILITY
Recapitulation from other Subsections, including the
total civil aircraft strength, and totals for each general
type of aircraft, number of engines for each type,
identifying jet or turboprop types, and the normal
civil passenger capacity. Indicates any significant
numbers of aircraft that are out of service for reasons
other than normal maintenance and overhaul.
3. PERSONNEL STRENGTH AND READINESS
Recapitulation from other Subsections of the total
of civil or paramilitary pilots and other aircrew; a
breakdown of ground personnel by occupation; and the
percentage of foreign nationals. Estimate of the
percentage of nationals in each category who are
members of the reserve forces of the nation.
F. Civil and paramilitary aviation training
Description of government policy toward sub-
sidizing or fostering civil and paramilitary aviation,
schools, clubs and other aviation training activities,
indicating whether sports flying or premilitary training
is a primary objective. Evaluation of the extent and
effectiveness of programs that supply military aviation
with trained or partially trained men and women.
1. AVIATION SCHOOLS
Tabulation or textual description of civil and
paramilitary aviation schools by name and location,
citing whether owned or sponsored by the government
or by other organizations. Includes curriculum, its
suitability for primary or basic military training;
aircraft owned or operated by each school and related
UONFIDENti
school facilities; size and competence of instructional
staff; size of student body; annual training totals;
general effectiveness of the schools; the governmental
subsidy; and types of aviation licenses awarded to
graduates.
2. AEROCLUBS
A listing of all aeroclubs, locating the significant ones.
Description of membership, club activities; numbers
and types of aircraft owned or used by the clubs, and
related equipment and facilities; and the annual
training totals by category.
Evaluation of the effectiveness of the clubs as a
group. Description of support of clubs by significant
individuals, organizations, or groups; outline of typical
courses; student subsidization; type licenses awarded
members; and the degree of flying performed annually
by the average member.
3. OTHER
Description of any other civil air training provided to
nationals, including foreign aid programs providing
ground, technical or flying training in the country or
abroad, and numbers and categories of persons trained.
4. AIRCREW, GROUND, AND OTHER
LICENSES ISSUED BY THE GOVERNMENT
Discussion of types of aircrew and ground licenses
issued, and requirements for issuance and maintenance.
G. Civil air facilities
1. AIRFIELDS
A listing of the total number of airfields and seaplane
stations, showing those utilized by civil air organiza-
tions. Describes the capability of air facilities to meet
air traffic needs, and the significance of the airfield
distribution pattern. Tabulation of all significant
civil air facilities; principal international airports and
airports of entry, designating agencies that provide and
maintain airfields for civil aviation. Description of
plans for major improvements of the civil airfield
systems and air facilities, and a listing of any civil air-
fields operated by foreign agencies or powers.
Evaluation of each principal airfield in terms of its
capacity for cargo aircraft and its capability for
handling logistics pertinent to ground and paratroop
operations. Depiction of selected civil airfields on a
map.
2. OPERATIONAL AIDS
a. AIDS TO NAVIGATION -- A listing of the agencies
that provide, operate, and maintain the operational
aids to air navigation for civil aircraft, with a descrip-
tion of the types of aids in service, and their adequacy
for air safety and modern flight control.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 13
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
attimititiaiima NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
b. AIRWAYS ? Description of major programs for
improvement of airways, using a map to show important
airways or corridors and selected navigational aids.
C. METEOROLOGICAL SERVICES ? Description of
meteorological services and assessment of their
adequacy, and the name of the agency furnishing air
weather information.
H. Services and supplies
1. MAINTENANCE INSTALLATIONS
Evaluation of overall maintenance and overhaul
facilities available to civil aircraft operators including:
names of enterprises; their location and ownership;
types of maintenance, repair, and overhaul performed;
numbers and types of employees; and any significant
number of foreign nationals employed.
2. SOURCES OF SUPPLY
a. AIRCRAFT AND SPARE PARTS Listing of the
main sources from which aircraft and spare parts are
procured and description of any lack of equipment that
may affect maintenance capabilities.
b. AVIATION PETROLEUM PRODUCTS Extent of
self-sufficiency in production of aviation fuels and
lubricants; indication of the major foreign sources of
supply and evaluation of any special procurement
problems or deficiencies in supply.
A. General
I. Personalities
Listing of prominent personalities connected with
civil aviation, including officials of the government and
airline companies, together with their positions. In-
cludes brief biographical sketches of leading personages
showing their aviation experience and political affilia-
tions.
J. Means of identification
Description of markings, emblems, and insignia used
to identify national civil aircraft and government
systems for marking commercial, private, and experi-
mental aircraft.
Description of uniforms and insignia worn in civil or
paramilitary aviation.
K. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be ac-
corded the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 38. Telecommunications
Brief history of telecommunications including basic
concept and reasons (political, economic, military) for
development of telecommunication facilities
Overall coverage, adequacy, and capability of facili-
ties
Relative importance, geographic coverage, and princi-
pal function (domestic, international, private) of the
main elements of the telecommunication facilities
Relative rates of growth and general plans for
modernization and expansion of installations and
systems
Relationship between economy of the area and the
telecommunication facilities pattern
Domestic potential for production of telecommunica-
tion materials
Support provided by domestic research and develop-
ment
Import and export of telecommunication products
and raw materials necessary to the manufacture of
telecommunication products
PAGE 14
Technical education facilities and availability of
engineers and skilled technicians
B. Administration and control
1. GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATIONS
Government organization administering and/or oper-
ating the national telecommunication facilities, its
functions, relationship to national government struc-
ture, location of major offices, names of key personnel
(include charts necessary to depict the flow of control
and the organizational elements)
Unusual government telecommunication regulations
and policies
Censorship policy and facilities
2. COMMERCIAL TELECOMMUNICATION
ORGANIZATIONS
Names, office locations, and operational areas of
companies owning and operating commercial and
private telecommunication facilities
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
JULY 1957 CHAP?
2. AIRCRAFT AND SPARE PARTS
Discuss briefly the origin of aircraft and spare parts,
indicating the general condition of aircraft and the
adequacy of spare parts stocks.
3. PETROLEUM PRODUCTS
State the supply position of civil air activity with
respect to aviation gasoline and lubricating oil (with
a cross-reference to Subsection 62, C, Petroleum, for
details).
G. Civil air facilities
1. AIRFIELDS
Discuss briefly on a broad rather than a detailed
basis the general adequacy of the airfields assigned for
civil aviation use. Include a reference to the Air fa-
cilities Subsection of SECTION 83, and a general dis-
cussion of ancillary facilities such as ground handling
and servicing equipment and terminal facilities. Cite
joint use of airfields by military and civil aircraft.
2. OPERATIONAL AIDS
a. AIDS To NAVIGATION ? Discuss the aids to
navigation, equipment used, the operating agency, and
reliability of service including a reference to radio fre-
quencies of major airports.
b. AIRWAYS ? Discuss airways, flight traffic con-
trols along airways, and aviation communications fa-
cilities between ground stations. Broadly cover traffic
control in vicinity of airfields. Airways, where exist-
ent, may be schematically shown on a map or chart.
C. METEOROLOGICAL SERVICES ? Briefly summa-
rize meteorological services to aircraft.
d. AVIATION SCHOOLS AND AERO CLUB FACILITIES
AND EQUIPMENT
H. Military potential
1. AIRCRAFT AVAILABILITY
Recapitulate from Subsections D and E above the
total civil aircraft strength of the nation, showing
totals by types. Estimate for each typo the percent-
age normally operational, discussing maintenance, per-
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
'ER III 08.11.111Minim
sonnel or other factors upon which the estimate is
based.
2. PERSONNEL READINESS
Recapitulate from Subsections D and E the total
number of pilots and other aviation personnel engaged
in civil air activities, showing totals by type of em-
ployment. Indicate the air reserve or other personnel
with military aviation training in each category.
3. MOBILIZATION PLANS
Discuss in detail plans for integrating civil air ac-
tivities into the military air arm.
I. Means of identification
Describe the markings, emblems or insignia used to
identify national civil aircraft or to distinguish major
individual owners; and uniforms and insignia worn in
any phase of the civil aviation effort. Black and white
page-sized drawings or photographs with color nota-
tions may be utilized.
J. Personalities
Name the important personalities connected with
civil aviation including officials of the government,
the airline companies and any other important civil
aviation activity, showing the position held by each.
Supply a brief biographical sketch, to include aviation
experience and political affiliations of the leading per-
sonalities.
K. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be ac-
corded the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 13
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
GINNIINIMIMINNO NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Section 38. Telecommunications
A. General
Brief history of telecommunications including basic
concept and reasons (political, economic, military) for
development of telecommunication facilities
Overall coverage, adequacy, and capability of facili-
ties
Relative importance, geographic coverage, and princi-
pal function (domestic, international, private) of the
main elements of the telecommunication facilities
Relative rates of growth and general plans for
modernization and expansion of installations and
systems
Relationship between economy of the area and the
telecommunication facilities pattern
Domestic potential for production of telecommunica-
tion materials
Support provided by domestic research and develop-
ment
Import and export of telecommunication products
and raw materials necessary to the manufacture of
telecommunication products
Technical education facilities and availability of
engineers and skilled technicians
B. Administration and control
I. GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATIONS
Government organization administering and/or oper-
ating the national telecommunication facilities, its
functions, relationship to national government struc-
ture, location of major offices, names of key personnel
(include charts necessary to depict the flow of control
and the organizational elements)
Unusual government telecommunication regulations
and policies
Censorship policy and facilities
2. COMMERCIAL TELECOMMUNICATION
ORGANIZATIONS
Names, office locations, and operational areas of
companies owning and operating commercial and
private telecommunication facilities
Organizational or financial relationship to each other
or to foreign agencies
Names of key personnel, overall number of personnel
by skills (engineers, technicians, administrative, etc.),
relative efficiency, nationality and numerical adequacy
of personnel by company
PAGE ? 14
C. Wire communication facilities
I. GENERAL
Brief synopsis of wire facilities, relationship to each
other (telephone, telegraph, submarine cable)
Adequacy for national and international service
requirements
Efficiency and dependability of service as indicated
by: traffic capacity vs. traffic loading; speed of service
rendered; type, quantity, and condition of equipment
Rate of growth of usage and facilities (number of
calls, number of telephone sets, number of toll circuits,
etc.), presentation to be more graphic than textual
Geographic and meteorological conditions affecting
the construction, distribution, and operation of wire
facilities
2. TELEPHONE
a. DOMESTIC FACILITIES ? Discussion of the serv-
ice rendered by long-haul toll systems shown on
accompanying map:
Significance of the patterns of the various networks
Analysis of the service rendered by systems
Discussion of the local telephone plant facilities
Traffic capacities of circuits and exchanges providing
local and long-distance service
Operating condition of inside and outside plant
equipment
Microwave relay systems used for telephone service
Services offered by special and private networks
(utilities, railroads, pipelines, power companies, etc.)
Location and storage capacities of storage depots and
warehouses
b. INTERNATIONAL FACILITIES
Present and potential traffic capacities
Operating condition of lines and equipment
Significance of international transit routes
Significance of international border crossing points
3. TELEGRAPH
Same typo of coverage as for telephone. If all tele-
phone and telegraph systems use joint facilities, Sub-
sections 2 and 3 may be combined.
4. INTERNATIONAL SUBMARINE CABLES
Discussion of submarine cable network shown on map
Analysis of service rendered by cables
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER III
Organizational or financial relationship to each other
or to foreign agencies
Names of key personnel, overall number of personnel
by skills (engineers, technicians, administrative, etc.),
relative efficiency, nationality and numerical adequacy
of personnel by company
C. Wire communication facilities
1. GENERAL
Brief synopsis of wire facilities, relationship to each
other (telephone, telegraph, submarine cable)
Adequacy for national and international service
requirements
Efficiency and dependability of service as indicated
by: traffic capacity vs. traffic loading; speed of service
rendered; type, quantity, and condition of equipment
Rate of growth of usage and facilities (number of
calls, number of telephone sets, number of toll circuits,
etc.), presentation to be more graphic than textual
Geographic and meteorological conditions affecting
the construction, distribution, and operation of wire
facilities
2. TELEPHONE
a. DOMESTIC FACILITIES ? Discussion of the serv-
ice rendered by long-haul toll systems shown on
accompanying map:
Significance of the patterns of the various networks
Analysis of the service rendered by systems
Discussion of the local telephone plant facilities
Traffic capacities of circuits and exchanges providing
local and long-distance service
Operating condition of inside and outside plant
equipment
Microwave relay systems used for telephone service
Services offered by special and private networks
(utilities, railroads, pipelines, power companies, etc.)
Location and storage capacities of storage depots and
warehouses
b. INTERNATIONAL FACILITIES
Present and potential traffic capacities
Operating condition of lines and equipment
Significance of international transit routes
Significance of international border crossing points
3. TELEGRAPH
Same type of coverage as for telephone. If all tele-
phone and telegraph systems use joint facilities, Sub-
sections 2 and 3 may be combined.
4. INTERNATIONAL SUBMARINE CABLES
Discussion of submarine cable network shown on map
Analysis of service rendered by cables
11.111.1411L.Plikimm
Present and potential traffic capacities, number of
circuits, types and condition of terminal equipment
Cable landing huts and terminals
D. Radio communication facilities
1. GENERAL
Principal networks and stations (include maps)
Type, adequacy, and efficiency of service as indicated
by: traffic capacity vs. traffic loading; speed of service
rendered; type, quantity, and condition of equipment
Call letter blocks, station designations, and codes
used
Spectrum use (frequency block assignments and
usage)
Availability of engineers and skilled technicians
Location, content, and storage capacities of ware-
houses
Significance of amateur operator and station potential
Geographical, meteorological, and propagation fac-
tors affecting the construction or operation of radio
facilities
2. DOMESTIC RADIO
Analysis of service rendered by stations and networks
Capability to accommodate centers of population
and geographic areas
Rate of growth of usage and facilities (number of
messages, number of circuits, etc.), presentation to be
more graphic than textual
Operational condition of equipment
Primary power sources
Safety and special radio services (public safety, land
transportation, industrial, marine, aeronautical ground
facilities)
3. INTERNATIONAL RADIO
Location of control, transmitting, and receiving
facilities
Analysis of service rendered
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of service
Number of international circuits by type of circuit
Present and potential traffic loading and capacity
Operating condition of equipment
Primary power sources
E. Broadcast facilities
1. GENERAL
Types of broadcasting systems in use (indicate on
map)
Relative sizes of networks and rate of growth
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 15
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
11/4,01.1.11-11.A
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
2. DOMESTIC RADIO BROADCAST (IN-
CLUDES AM, FM, TV)
a. PROGRAM DISTRIBUTION FACILITIES - Present
and potential national coverage; approximate service
areas of stations and networks
Rate of growth (number of stations, number hours of
operation, total radiated power, average radiated
power, etc.)
Analysis of service rendered by stations and networks
Spectrum use
Operating condition and quality of equipment
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of service
Primary power sources
b. RECEPTION FACILITIES
Number, type, and distribution of receivers
Spectrum coverage
Rate of growth
Listening habits of population
3. WIRE PROGRAM DISSEMINATION
Size and distribution of wire broadcast networks
Types of transmission and reception equipment
Number of individual receivers and community re-
ceivers
Rate of growth of service
Types of programs and program material
4. INTERNATIONAL RADIO BROADCAST
Program transmission facilities
Present and potential world coverage
Rate of growth
Analysis of service rendered
Spectrum use
Operating condition and quality of equipment
Interconnection and operating agreements with
other nations
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of service
Primary power sources
Major aspects of monitoring, jamming, clandestine
operation, and Voice of America relay stations (when
applicable)
PAGE 16
F. Integration of facilities
Integration of telecommunication facilities within
the nation including wire-to-wire, wire-to-radio, etc.
Integration of major domestic circuits with important
international arterial circuits, both internal and ex-
ternal
Importance of international circuits, gateways, and
interchange points with the nation
G. Military appreciation and vulnerability
1. MILITARY USE OF FACILITIES
National policy concerning use of telecommunication
facilities by the military in peace and war
Reserve capacity available for military use
Capacity available by confiscation; policy on con-
fiscation
Adaptability of systems and facilities to military use
Relation of communication arteries to historic mili-
tary routes
2. VULNERABILITY OF FACILITIES
Physical and electrical features which contribute to
vulnerability or lack of vulnerability including critical
aspects of power and emergency power sources, and
aspects especially susceptible to damage by sabotage
Potential bottlenecks ? points of heavy traffic hav-
ing minimum rerouting potential in event service is
disrupted
Susceptibility of radio facilities to electronic warfare
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
the user of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
JULY 1957 CHAP
Present and potential traffic capacities, number of
circuits,- types and condition of terminal equipment
Cable landing huts and terminals
D. Radio communication facilities
1. GENERAL
Principal networks and stations (include maps)
Type, adequacy, and efficiency of service as indicated
by: traffic capacity vs. traffic loading; speed of service
rendered; type, quantity, and condition of equipment
Call letter blocks, station designations, and codes
used
Spectrum use (frequency block assignments and
usage)
Availability of engineers and skilled technicians
Location, content, and storage capacities of ware-
houses
Significance of amateur operator and station potential
Geographical, meteorological, and propagation fac-
tors affecting the construction or operation of radio
facilities
2. DOMESTIC RADIO
Analysis of service rendered by stations and networks
Capability to accommodate centers of population
and geographic areas
Rate of growth of usage and facilities (number of
messages, number of circuits, etc.), presentation to be
more graphic than textual
Operational condition of equipment
Primary power sources
Safety and special radio services (public safety, land
transportation, industrial, marine, aeronautical ground
facilities)
3. INTERNATIONAL RADIO
Location of control, transmitting, and receiving
facilities
Analysis of service rendered
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of service
Number of international circuits by type of circuit
Present and potential traffic loading and capacity
Operating condition of equipment
Primary power sources
E. Broadcast facilities
1. GENERAL
Types of broadcasting systems in use (indicate on
map)
Relative sizes of networks and rate of growth
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
TER III
2. DOMESTIC RADIO BROADCAST (IN-
CLUDES AM, FM, TV)
.a. PROGRAM DISTRIBUTION FACILITIES ? Present
and potential national coverage; approximate service
areas of stations and networks
Rate of growth (number of stations, number hours of
operation, total radiated power, average radiated
power, etc.)
Analysis of service rendered by stations and networks
Spectrum use
Operating condition and quality of equipment
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of service
Primary power sources
b. RECEPTION FACILITIES
Number, type, and distribution of receivers
Spectrum coverage
Rate of growth
Listening habits of population
3. WIRE PROGRAM DISSEMINATION
Size and distribution of wire broadcast networks
Types of transmission and reception equipment
Number of individual receivers and community re-
ceivers
Rate of growth of service
Types of programs and program material
4. INTERNATIONAL RADIO BROADCAST
Program transmission facilities
Present and potential world coverage
Rate of growth
Analysis of service rendered
Spectrum use
Operating condition and quality of equipment
Interconnection and operating agreements with
other nations
Adequacy, efficiency, and dependability of service
Primary power sources
Major aspects of monitoring, jamming, clandestine
operation, and Voice of America relay stations (when
applicable)
F. Integration of facilities
Integration of telecommunication facilities within
the nation including wire-to-wire, wire-to-radio, etc.
Integration of major domestic circuits with important
international arterial circuits, both internal and ex-
ternal
Importance of international circuits, gateways, and
interchange points with the nation
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE :15
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
milimmoompinimm NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
G. Military appreciation and vulnerability
1. MILITARY USE OF FACILITIES
National policy concerning use of telecommunication
facilities by the military in peace and war
Reserve capacity available for military use
Capacity available by confiscation; policy on con-
fiscation
Adaptability of systems and facilities to military use
Relation of communication arteries to historic mili-
tary routes
2. VULNERABILITY OF FACILITIES
Physical and electrical features which contribute to
vulnerability or lack of vulnerability including critical
aspects of power and emergency power sources, and
aspects especially susceptible to damage by sabotage
PAGE 16
Potential bottlenecks ? points of heavy traffic hav-
ing minimum rerouting potential in event service is
disrupted
Susceptibility of radio facilities to electronic warfare
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
the user of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030
JANUARY 1962 CHAPTER III
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 35. Ports and Naval Facilities
(When there is a Supplement I)
A. General
1. PORTS
General discussion covering:
Geography of area as it relates to the establish-
ment of ports.
Brief history of growth and development of
port system.
Areal distribution and grouping of ports as
determined by geographical, historical, eco-
nomic, and strategic factors.
Categories of ports and brief summary of criteria
used in classifying. Cross-reference to sum-
mary table of principal and secondary ports
and index map.
Enumeration of principal and secondary ports
and brief description of each including rela-
tive location, importance, principal charac-
teristics and activities, size and character of
harbor, port capacity, and port facilities.
Governmental control and administration where
applicable.
Alphabetical list of principal, secondary, and
minor ports (with coordinates).
Summary table of significant characteristics
and facilities of principal and secondary
ports using standard table with following
column heads:
NAME (coordinates)
11ARnoR
Type
Fairway limitations
Largest vessel accommodated
Tides
Ice
BERTHS
Anchorage
Mooring:
Fixed
Free-swinging
Alongside
MECHANICAL HANDLING FACIILITIES
Shore cranes
Floating cranes
Special handling equipment
STORAGE CAPACITY
General cargo
Bulk liquid storage
Bulk dry storage
CLEARANCE
Rail
Road
Other if applicable
ESTIMATED MILITARY PORT CAPACITY
NAVAL ACTIVITY
SHIPYARDS
REMARKS
2. NAVAL FACILITIES
General analysis covering:
Size, condition, and adequacy of naval establish-
ment.
Brief summary of organization into naval dis-
tricts and commands.
Brief description of principal naval bases and
summary of secondary bases and other
activities; basis on which classified.
Alphabetical list of naval facilities (with co-
ordinates). Separate coastal and inland
facilities by means of headings.
3. SHIPYARDS
General analysis covering:
Extent and distribution of shipyard facilities.
Capability and size of yards.
Predominance of shipbuilding or ship-repairing
facilities.
Cross-reference to Subsection 64, E for discus-
sion of economic aspects of shipbuilding and
ship-repairing industry.
List all shipyards (except inland Category III
yards) by place (seaport or inland city), with
coastal and inland places under separate
heads. Arrange place names alphabetically
under each heading and give coordinates of
each place. List shipyards by category
under name of each place.
PA GE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
rimirpikeared For Release 19.9909121 ? CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1V.IN 'STA/ DAIID INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
B. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
A. General
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 36. Merchant Marine
Give a brief summary of the merchant marine of
the country including: number of ships involved,
ownership, normal trade, place in the economy, general
policy, and adaptability for military use.
B. Organization
1. OWNERSHIP (government or private; if pri-
vate, include beneficial ownership).
2. ADMINISTRATION
3. NATIONAL POLICY
To include subsidies, regulation, and international
relations of the merchant marine.
4. FOREIGN INTERESTS
5. PERSONNEL AND TRAINING
C. Composition
Number of ships by type (1,000 gross tons and up).
Name, speed, tonnage (GRT and DWT), size (length,
beam, and 'draft), type of power, type of fuel used,
daily fuel consumption, origin, year built, passenger
accommodations, crew strength, and special equip-
ment.
Any special modifications or readily adaptable com-
bat features, i.e., gun emplacements.
Detail to include an analysis of the fuel, speed, ton-
nage, and age groupings and any conclusions drawn
therefrom. A discussion of the availability of fuel, and
of the number and tonnage of the vessels from 500 to
1,000 gross tons.
D. Shipping program
1. CONSTRUCTION PROGRAM
a. FUNDS APPROPRIATED
b. SCHEDULE BY TYPES AND NUMBER
PAGE 1.0
C. SHIPYARD LOCATIONS
d. AVERAGE NUMBER OF SHIPYARD WORKERS
C. CAPACITY OF SHIPBUILDING INDUSTRY
f. KEELS LAID -- Details for approximately one
year together with long time general trends.
g. LAUNCHINGS (same explanation as f).
h. DELIVERIES (same explanation as f).
2. PURCHASE OR SALE OF VESSELS
List number and countries from and to which vessels
were sold, and new and former.names for last year.
3. CHARTERING OF VESSELS
List number and countries from and to which vessels
were chartered for past year together with any signifi-
cant trends, either long time or recent.
E. Normal shipping routes and ports of call
F. Operations and traffic
Discuss generally the place of the merchant marine
in the economy of the nation including such items as
invisible income, exchange earned, percentage of
population dependent, and other related matters.
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the information contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 CHAPTER III
Section 37. Civil Air
A. General
A resume of the salient characteristics of the domestic
and international civil aviation operation with reference
to its magnitude and adequacy in serving the air
transportation needs of the nation, and the factors
affecting civil air, such as the geography of the area,
and effectiveness of other transportation media;
number of civil or paramilitary aircraft; number of
major aircraft by types; total persons engaged in civil
or paramilitary aviation; and the number of key
individuals, such as pilots and technicians.
An evaluation of civil air capability for augmenting
military air strength; current trends, such as expansion
programs, reequipment and development programs,
pending changes on a national basis, proposed changes
in subsidy and organization and some statistics or
estimates to depict the relative regional or international
position.
B. Governmental organization, control and
policy
1. ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION
OF CIVIL AIR
a. CONTROLLING AGENCY ? Description of agency
responsible for civil aviation, including the composition
and functions of controlling agencies and their relation-
ship to other government agencies, particularly the
military, supplemented with organizational charts
showing channels of authority, administration, opera-
tions and coordination. Evaluation of the organiza-
tion, citing strengths and weaknesses, noting dissident
or other elements exerting influence or control. Evalu-
ation of government policies which may have con-
tributed to the operational capabilities and effective-
ness of civil aviation.
b. LAWS AND REGULATIONS ? Summarization of
the basic laws governing civil aviation, including laws
providing for governmental control, those establishing
controlling agencies, and the general aviation regula-
tions pertaining to registry of aircraft, airworthiness
certificates, licensing, certification, and other general
subjects, including any data on unusual restrictions
applicable to foreign or other aircraft operating within
the nation.
2. GOVERNMENTAL POLICY AND SUPPORT
FOR CIVIL AVIATION
a. OWNERSHIP?The pattern of ownership
favored by the government for civil air enterprises.
The extent to which federal and municipal govern-
ments and private companies or individuals participate
in the national enterprise. The degree of foreign
participation in national organizations, and the degree
of investment in foreign civil aviation by national civil
air enterprises.
b. PRIVATE OR OTHER AIR ENTERPRISE ? Dis-
cussion of government policies concerning private and
public ownership, control and operation of domestic
scheduled air carriers, nonscheduled carriers and
charter operators; the government attitude toward
scheduled and nonscheduled air carriers of foreign
nations, private flying, aeroclubs and schools.
C. SUBSIDIES ? Description of financial aid by
the government, covering the nature, extent and
purpose of support given to carriers, aeroclubs, and
schools; the method of application of such aid; the
national civil aviation budgets; governmental aid,
other than direct financial support, for air facilities,
navigational aids, and meteorological services, includ-
ing names of agencies supplying this aid; and the
attitude of the government toward financial support of
civil aviation by foreign governments or individuals.
C. International relations
1. AFFILIATIONS
Designate the international civil aviation conven-
tions to which the nation is signatory, and the inter-
national civil aviation organizations of which the
nation is a member. Where appropriate, describe
briefly the position taken by the government in regard
to civil air policies of other nations (such as the U.S.-
U.K. air policy).
2. AIR AGREEMENTS AND ARRANGEMENTS
Evaluation of international air transport agreements
and all other arrangements that sanction international
scheduled air services to and from the nation; including
formal, informal, provisional or other arrangements,
with the type, effective date, duration and major pro-
visions of each. Analysis of the agreements in terms
of their purpose, significance and effect. This is also
applicable to negotiations with other nations for
formal, informal, provisional, or other agreements or
arrangements.
3. FOREIGN AIR CARRIER OPERATIONS
A listing of foreign scheduled air carriers conducting
services into or through the nation, including company
names, nationalities, routes, and frequency of services.
Tabulation of such services showing terminal points,
points served in the country and frequency of flights.
PAGE 11
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
A map may be used to depict the international services.
Note important foreign irregular or semischeduled air
carriers that afford frequent or significant service to
the nation.
4. FOREIGN AID AND INFLUENCE
Description of any significant aid furnished to the
nation's civil aviation by foreign states, organizations,
or individuals, including an assessment of the scope,
value, and effectiveness of any foreign aid program.
D. Civil air activities
1. SCHEDULED AIR CARRIERS
A discussion of each carrier offering scheduled air-
services; the full corporate name and the short or
popular name by which the carrier is known; and its
main bases of operation. Other salient points for
discussion are:
a. OWNERSHIP, CAPITALIZATION, ORGANIZATION,
AND CONTROL ? Listing of the persons or organizations
participating in ownership; the total capitalization and
the percentage held by each participant, with comments
on any political or economic significance attached to this
participation. Evaluation of combinations forming
control of the carrier and its operational organization.
Tables of organization. Description of any participa-
tion by the carrier in other enterprises or activities,
financial or otherwise, foreign or domestic. Evaluation
of any contractual arrangements for financial, man-
agerial, operational, or other assistance from other
enterprises or governments, foreign or domestic.
b. OPERATIONS
(1) Air services ? Description of scheduled serv-
ices. Tabulation of terminals and intermediate points
served, and frequencies of each service. Illustration of
domestic and interbloc or international air route
network on a map. Description of the carrier's ad-
herence to published schedules, effectiveness of opera-
tions and any nonscheduled operations or other flight
activities.
(2) Operational statistics, schejuled air car-
riers ? Listing of the most recent operational statistics
to indicate the scope of operations; utilization rates of
selected aircraft; accident rates; passengers carried;
route-miles flown; serviceability rates; ton-miles of
cargo and mail, and other pertinent data.
(3) Aircraft ? Description of numbers and types
of aircraft owned by air carriers and the number
normally operational; numbers and types of aircraft
on order and estimated dates of delivery; leased or
borrowed aircraft with numbers, types and ownership;
and leasing or lending of the carrier's aircraft.
(4) Maintenance ? Description of maintenance
and overhaul facilities and capabilities, with comment
on availability of its maintenance facilities to others.
If the carrier does not perform its own maintenance,
show where and by whom the work is done.
PAGE 12
JANUARY 1962
(5) Personnel ? Tabulation of employees in
each major category, showing total number of em-
ployees. Discussion of the efficiency of personnel in
the various categories; training of employees and
nonemployees; pensions, pay and flight hours; and a
listing of foreign national employees by category.
c. HISTORY ? Narration of the most significant
factors in the founding and development of the carrier
and its relative national and international importance.
2. MISCELLANEOUS AIR SERVICES
A discussion of each air service operator engaged in
irregular or nonscheduled operations; charter, passenger
or cargo services, aerial spraying, aerial advertising,
ambulance services and aerial photographic surveys,
including the following tabular description:
Legal name. Short or popular name.
Headquarters.
Type(s) of service.
Numbers and types of aircraft owned.
Numbers and types of employees, including a listing of
foreign nationals.
3. GOVERNMENT AND PRIVATE OPER-
ATORS
A listing of government agencies and other enter-
prises owning civil aircraft; type of agency, business or
organization; numbers and types of aircraft used;
purpose of use; number and types of air and ground
crewmen employed; numbers and types of aircraft
owned by individuals and used for noncommercial
purposes; and names of individuals owning significant
numbers of private aircraft or major transport types.
4. PERFORMANCE, GENERAL CHARACTER-
ISTICS, AND CAPABILITY OF SELECTED
TRANSPORT AIRCRAFT
Designation by name, manufacturer, and model
number of the transports mentioned in the Section,
including performance and characteristics such as
cruising and maximum speeds, range, gross weight,
passenger seats, cargo loads for basic type missions;
engine types (jet, piston, turboprop); engine models.
E. Civil aviation training
Description of government policy toward sub-
sidizing or fostering civil and paramilitary aviation,
schools, clubs and other aviation training activities,
indicating whether sports flying or premilitary training
is a primary objective. Evaluation of the extent and
effectiveness of programs that supply military aviation
with trained or partially trained men and women.
1. AVIATION SCHOOLS
Tabulation or textual description of civil and
paramilitary aviation schools by name and location,
citing whether owned or sponsored by the government
or by other organizations. Includes curriculum, its
suitability for primary or basic military training;
kO1N11IJEN I 1AL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
CHAPTER III
aircraft owned or operated by each school and related
school facilities; size and competence of instructional
staff; size of student body; annual training totals;
general effectiveness of the school; the governmental
subsidy; and types of aviation licenses awarded to
graduates.
2. AEROCLUBS
A listing of all aeroclubs, locating the significant ones.
Description of membership, club activities; numbers
and types of aircraft owned or used by the clubs, and
related equipment and facilities; and the annual
training totals by category.
Evaluation of the effectiveness of the clubs as a
group. Description of support of clubs by significant
individuals, organizations, or groups; outline of typical
courses; student subsidization; type licenses awarded
members; and the degree of flying performed annually
by the average member.
3. OTHER
Description of any other civil air training provided to
nationals, including foreign aid programs providing
ground, technical or flying training in the country or
abroad, and numbers and categories of persons trained.
F. Services and supplies
1. MAINTENANCE INSTALLATIONS
Evaluation of overall maintenance and overhaul
facilities available to civil aircraft operators including:
names of enterprises; their location and ownership;
types of maintenance, repair, and overhaul performed;
numbers and types of employees; and any significant
number of foreign nationals employed.
2. SOURCES OF SUPPLY
a. AIRCRAFT AND SPARE PARTS ? Listing of the
main sources from which aircraft and spare parts are
procured and description of any lack of equipment that
may affect maintenance capabilities.
b. AVIATION PETROLEUM PRODUCTS ? Extent of
self-sufficiency in production of aviation fuels and
lubricants; indication of the major foreign sources of
supply and evaluation of any special procurement
problems or deficiencies in supply.
G. Civil air facilities
1. AIRFIELDS
A listing of the total number of airfields and sea-
plane stations, showing those open to civil air activities.
Describes the capability of air facilities to meet air
traffic needs, and the significance of the airfield dis-
tribution pattern. Tabulation of all significant civil
air facilities; principal international airports and air-
ports of entry, designating agencies that provide and
maintain airfields for civil aviation. Description of
plans for major improvements of the civil airfield
systems and air facilities, and a listing of any civil air-
fields operated by foreign agencies or powers.
Evaluation of each principal airfield in terms of its
capacity for cargo aircraft and its capability for
handling logistics pertinent to ground and paratroop
operations. Depiction of selected civil airfields on a
map.
2. OPERATIONAL AIDS
a. AIDS TO NAVIGATION ? A listing of the agencies
that provide, operate, and maintain the operational
aids to air navigation for civil aircraft, with a descrip-
tion of the types of aids in service, and their adequacy
for air safety and modern flight control.
b. AIRWAYS ? Description of major programs for
improvement of airways, using a map to show important
airways or corridors and selected navigational aids.
C. METEOROLOGICAL SERVICES ? Description of
meteorological services and assessment of their ade-
quacy, and the name of the agency furnishing air
weather information.
H. Mobilization potential
1. MOBILIZATION POTENTIAL AND PLANS
General assessment of the civil aviation potential to
augment the armed forces in an emergency, and the
methods by which it could be realized, including
proposals or actual systems for mobilization of civil
aviation for military or other emergency use.
Description of the mobilization plan.
2. AIRCRAFT POTENTIAL AND AVAIL-
ABILITY
Recapitulation from other Subsections, including the
total civil aircraft strength, and totals for each general
type of aircraft, number of engines for each type,
identifying jet or turboprop types, and the normal
civil passenger capacity. Indicates any significant
numbers of aircraft that are out of service for reasons
other than normal maintenance and overhaul.
3. PERSONNEL STRENGTH AND READINESS
Recapitulation from other Subsections of the total
of civil or paramilitary pilots and other aircrew; a
breakdown of ground personnel by occupation; and the
percentage of foreign nationals. Estimate of the
percentage of nationals in each category who are
members of the reserve forces of the nation.
PAGE 13
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Como NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
I. Personalities
Listing of prominent personalities connected with
civil aviation, including officials of the government and
airline companies, together with their positions. In-
cludes brief biographical sketches of leading personages
showing their aviation experience and political affilia-
tions.
J. Means of identification
Description of markings, emblems, and insignia used
to identify national civil aircraft and government
systems for marking commercial, private, and experi-
mental aircraft.
A. General
JANUARY 1962
Description of uniforms and insignia worn in civil or
paramilitary aviation.
K. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be ac-
corded the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 38. Telecommunications
Overall summary of present domestic, international,
and special systems with an evaluation of their ade-
quacy and capability for the major classes of users.
Brief history of telecommunications, including basic
reasons (political, economic, military, etc.) for develop-
ment of telecommunication facilities.
Resume of development plans, sources of equipment
and material, and supporting research and develop-
ment.
Brief discussion of unusual meteorological, geograph-
ical, or other factors with a significant effect on tele-
communications installation and operation.
Resume of technical education facilities and avail-
ability of engineers and skilled technicians.
B. Administration and control
1. GOVERNMENT ORGANIZATIONS
A description (with organization chart) of govern-
ment organization(s) administering and/or operating
principal telecommunication systems, their position In
the government structure, location of major offices,
names of key personnel.
Brief discussion of membership and participation in
international telecommunications organizations.
Summary of regulations for special telecommunica-
tion systems and of any unusual policies or procedures
regarding technical operations of censorship.
2. COMMERCIAL ORGANIZATIONS
Brief discussion of any nongovernment or foreign
organizations that own and/or operate telecommunica-
tion terminals or systems within the country.
PAGE 14
C. Domestic systems
1. GENERAL
An overall description of domestic telecommunication
facilities, including means of transmission, types of
service (telephone; regular telegraph; teleprinter; fac-
simile; radio and television netting, including tables to
show station location, name, frequency, range, and
modulation; etc.), special networks, degree of integra-
tion between facilities or systems, and amount of
traffic handled (graphs or tables).
Location and capacity of depots and warehouses.
Resume of factors contributing to vulnerability and
susceptibility to sabotage, with particular attention to
military considerations.
2. PUBLIC INTERCITY NETWORK
a. TRANSMISSION FACILITIES
A description, supported by maps, charts, tables,
and photos, of the facilities and installations (wire
lines, cables, radio, repeaters, carrier, or other) that
constitute the means of moving telecommunication
traffic between cities within the country. Technical
features of radio terminals and relays, carrier facilities,
and repeaters are covered in this subsection, even
though they may be collocated with switching facilities
described in the next subsection.
b. SWITCHING SYSTEMS AND FACILITIES
A description of the system for routing and handling
intercity telecommunication traffic and the major
technical characteristics of the equipment used, sup-
ported by appropriate tabular and graphic material.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 CHAPTER III
3, LOCAL FACILITIES
A general description of the subscribers' equipment
and distribution and switching facilities that consti-
tute the local telecommunication systems of cities,
towns, and urban areas of the country. Major technical
features of equipment and photos of equipment and
typical installations are included.
4. SPECIAL SYSTEMS
A brief description of the coverage and function of
any special purpose telecommunication facilities or
networks in the country. Their degree of dependence
on or integration with the public system is described.
D. International facilities
1. GENERAL
A summary description of the pattern, purpose, arid
relative importance of the landline, submarine cable,
and radio facilities that provide telecommunications
with other countries. Any unusual factors contribut-
ing to vulnerability, with particular attention to mili-
tary considerations, are mentioned.
2. LANDLI NES
A description of the characteristics and traffic han-
dling capability of landlines to adjacent countries. Lo-
cations normally are shown on the maps associated with
paragraph C, 2.
3.- RADIO
A description of the location, uses, and capabilities
of the radio transmitting, receiving, and control in-
stallations for public correspondence with foreign
countries. Special purpose and private use facilities
are covered only if they constitute a very significant
part of the total international telecommunication
capability.
4. SUBMARINE CABLES
A description of the location, use, and capabilities
of submarine cables connecting with other countries.
Locations normally are shown on the maps associated
with paragraph C, 2.
E. Broadcast and television
1. GENERAL
A summary description (with map) of the pattern,
quality, and effectiveness of the radio and television
transmitting and receiving facilities used to entertain,
educate, or propagandize the general public of the
country. Wired broadcast facilities, if in use, are
included.
2. AM AND FM BROADCAST
A qualitative and general technical description of
the AM and FM transmitter and studio installations
in the country. Photos are included when available.
Netting arrangements and facilities, if separate from
the public intercity system, are described. Types and
distribution of receivers are discussed.
3. TELEVISION
Same as for AM and FM broadcast, plus a brief of
standards.
4. WIRED BROADCAST (WHEN PERTINENT)
A general description of the extent and character-
istics of any systems using wire lines to interconnect
the program sources and remote multiple listeners as
for example in entertainment, education, or propa-
ganda.
F. Comments on principal sources
This subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source-
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be ac-
corded intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for the collection effort. In
this connection, only principal sources actually used
are indicated.
PAGE 15
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Chapter HI-Transportation and Telecommunications
OUTLINE
SECTION 30. INTRODUCTION
SECTION 31. RAILWAY
A. General
B. Characteristics of the rail network
1. General
2. Way and structures
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
5. Fuel and water
C. Control, organization, and personnel
1. Control
2. Organization
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Equipment
1. General
2. Motive power
?
3. Rolling stock
4. Special equipment
F. Selected rail lines
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 32. HIGHWAY
A. General
B. Characteristics of the highway network
1. General
2. Roadway, structures, and facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
5. Development program
C. Control and organization
1. Governmental regulation
2. Principal carriers
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Vehicles and equipment
1. General
2. Motor vehicles
3. Special equipment
4. Other
F. Principal routes
G. Highway technical data
H. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 33. INLAND WATERWAY
A. General
B. Characteristics of the waterway system
1. General
2. Waterway facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
5. Development program
C. Control and organization
1. Control
2. Principal carriers
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Craft and equipment
F. Individual waterways
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 34. PETROLEUM PIPELINE
(Treated in Subsection 62, C and Supplement V)
SECTION 35. PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
When there is a Supplement I:
A. General
1. Ports
2. Naval facilities
3. Shipyards
B. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PACE
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
When there
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
is no Supplement I:
General
1. Ports
2. Naval facilities
3. Shipyards
4. Technical notes
Principal ports
Secondary ports
Minor ports
Naval facilities
Shipyards
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 36. MERCHANT MARINE
A. General
B. Organization
1. Ownership (government or private; if
private, include beneficial owner-
ship)
2. Administration
3. National policy
4. Foreign interests
5. Personnel and training
C. Composition
D. Shipping program
1. Construction program
2. Purchase or sale of vessels
3. Chartering of vessels
E. Normal shipping routes and ports of call
F. Operations and traffic
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 37, CIVIL AIR
A. General
PAGE 2
B. Governmental organization, control, and
policy
1. Organization and administration of
civil air
2. Governmental policy and support for
civil aviation
C. Civil and paramilitary air enterprises
1. Scheduled air carriers
2. Miscellaneous domestic nonscheduled
air carriers and services
3. Government, paramilitary, and
private operators
4. Performance, general characteristics,
and capability of selected transport
aircraft
5. Selected national operational sta-
tistics
D. International relations and operations
1. Air agreements and arrangements
2. Foreign air carrier operations
3. Foreign aid and influence
4. Affiliations
E. Mobilization potential
I. Mobilization potential and plans
2. Aircraft potential and availability
3. Personnel strength and readiness
F. Civil and paramilitary aviation training
1. Aviation schools
2. Aeroclubs
3. Other
4. Aircrew, ground, and other licenses
issued by the government
G. Civil air facilities
1. Airfields
2. Operational aids
H. Services and supplies
1, Maintenance installation
2. Sources of supply
I. Personalities
J. Means of identification
K. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 38. TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A. General
B. Administration and control
1. Governmental organizations
2. Commercial telecommunication or-
ganizations
C. Wire communication facilities
1. General
2. Telephone
3. Telegraph
4. International submarine cables
D. Radio communication facilities
1. General
2. Domestic radio
3. International radio
E. Broadcast facilities
1. General
2. Domestic radio broadcast
3. Wire program dissemination
4. International radio broadcast
F. Integration of facilities
G. Military appreciation and vulnerability
1. Military use of facilities
2. Vulnerability of facilities
H. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Chapter 111-Transportation and Telecommunications
OUTLINE
SECTION 30. INTRODUCTION
SECTION 31. RAILWAY
A. General
B. Characteristics of the rail network
1. General
2. Way and structures
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
5. Fuel and water
C. Control, organization, and personnel
1. Control
2. Organization
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Equipment
1. General
2. Motive power
3. Rolling stock
4. Special equipment
F. Selected rail lines
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 32. HIGHWAY
A. General
B. Characteristics of the highway network
1. General
2. Roadway, structures, and facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
5. Development program
C. Control and organization
1. Governmental regulation
2. Principal carriers
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Vehicles and equipment
1. General
2. Motor vehicles
3. Special equipment
4. Other
F. Principal routes
G. Highway technical data
II. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 33. INLAND WATERWAY
A. General
B. Characteristics of the waterway system
1. General
2. Waterway facilities
3. Construction and maintenance
4. Traffic interruption factors
5. Development program
C. Control and organization
1. Control
2. Principal carriers
3. Personnel
D. Operations
1. Operating factors
2. Traffic
3. Financial data
E. Craft and equipment
F. Individual waterways
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 34. PETROLEUM PIPELINE
(Treated in Subsection 62, (7 and Supplement V)
SECTION 35. PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
When there is a Supplement I:
A.
B.
General
1. Ports
2. Naval facilities
3. Shipyards
Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS ;flax 1957
When there is no Supplement I:
N. General
1. Ports
2. Naval facilities
3. Shipyards
4. Technical notes
B. Principal ports
C. Secondary ports
D. Minor ports
E. Naval facilities
F. Shipyards
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 36. MERCHANT MARINE
A. General
B. Organization
1. Ownership (government or private; if
private, include beneficial owner-
ship)
2. Administration
3. National policy
4. Foreign interests
5. Personnel and training
C. Composition
D. Shipping program
1. Construction program
2. Purchase or sale of vessels
3. Chartering of vessels
E. Normal shipping routes and ports of call
F. Operations and traffic
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 37. CIVIL AIR
PAGE 2
A. General
1. Domestic status
2. International aspects
3. Other general topics
B. Government control and policy
1. Administration
2. Support
3. Trends
C. International relations
1. Affiliations
2. Air agreements
3. Foreign influence
D. Civil air enterprises
1. Scheduled air carriers
2. Miscellaneous air carriers
3. Government and private operators
E. Civil aviation training
1. Preparatory
2. Air crew and ground personnel
F. Services and supplies
1. Maintenance installations
2. Aircraft and spare parts
3. Petroleum products
G. Civil air facilities
1. Airfields
2. Operational aids
H. Military potential
1 Aircraft availability
2. Personnel readiness
3. Mobilization plans
I. Means of identification
J. Personalities
K. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 38. TELECOMMUNICATIONS
A. General
B. Administration and control
1. Governmental organizations
2. Commercial telecommunication or-
ganizations
C. Wire communication facilities
1. General
2. Telephone
3. Telegraph
4. International submarine cables
D. Radio communication facilities
1. General
2. Domestic radio
3. International radio
E. Broadcast facilities
1. General
2. Domestic radio broadcast
3. Wire program dissemination
4. International radio broadcast
F. Integration of facilities
G. Military appreciation and vulnerability
1. Military use of facilities
2. Vulnerability of facilities
H. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER .1.11
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Section 30. Introduction
This Section is an overall appreciation of the trans-
portation and telecommunication systems of the coun-
try or area under study.
It treats those general aspects which are necessary
to the proper concept of the subject as a whole and
which cannot be treated adequately elsewhere. It is
prepared upon completion of the remaining Sections
of this Chapter so as to be able to present in a single
Section an integrated account of all phases of trans-
portation and telecommunications.
Material is presented in graphic form vitenever
practicable.
Section 31. Railway
A. General
An appreciation of rail transportation in the country,
including relationship to other transportation, salient
characteristics, physical environmental factors, and
economic and logistical significance.
B. Characteristics of the rail network
1. GENERAL
A discussion of such basic factors as total route
mileage by trackage, gage, and ownership; pattern and
geographical distribution of the rail lines; density and
nature of traffic; connections and interchange with
adjacent countries, including any special interchange
equipment requirements; general status and condition
of the railroads, including repair of war damage and
projected development.
2. WAY AND STRUCTURES
Characteristics of the fixed facilities and structures,
including general conditions affecting the right of
way and structures as reflected in grades, curves, and
characteristics of structures; general and detailed
standards for rail, ties, and ballast, and resultant axle-
load limitations; characteristics and comprehensive
statistics on bridges, tunnels, and similar track-support-
ing and track-sheltering structures; characteristics and
statistics on ferries; structural clearance, loading, and
equipment diagrams with supporting discussion of
standards and practices; characteristics of signal and
communications equipment and operations; general
features of yards and terminals, with detailed data
(including diagrams or plans when available on major
yards and terminals); details of the nature and extent
of electrification, including characteristics of power
supply and installations.
3. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Construction and maintenance policy, problems, and
procedures, including standards, organization, and
availability and quality of materials, equipment, and
labor; evaluative discussion of heavy off-track con-
struction and maintenance equipment employed.
4. TRAFFIC INTERRUPTION FACTORS
A discussion of natural conditions, and of other
factors such as congestion points or operational bottle-
necks, which cause or might cause interruptions in
operations.
5. FUEL AND WATER
A general survey of fuel and water supply, including
such factors as characteristics and availability, treat-
ment required, and any special factors such as reliance
on foreign source of fuel supply.
C. Control, organization, and personnel
1. CONTROL
The development and present status of control and
ownership, and the nature and extent of governmental
control and regulation.
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
2. ORGANIZATION
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Operational organization and administrative struc-
ture, supported as appropriate by selected organiza-
tional charts and diagrams.
3. PERSONNEL
A discussion of the number and allocation of em-
ployees, the general level of competency: training,
labor relations, and such aspects as pay rates and health
and retirement provisions.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Routine operating regulations and practices, in-
cluding train control; significant operating statistics,
with evaluative comment; significant or unusual
operating problems and practices.
2. TRAFFIC
A. discussion of traffic conditions and trends, includ-
ing pattern of traffic and relative importance of freight
and passenger traffic; principal commodities carried
and any significant regional characteristics; selective
statistics for representative years on such factors as
freight tons, freight ton-miles, and other applicable
indicators of traffic volume and handling.
3. FINANCIAL DATA
A discussion of the financial position of the railroad
or railroads, including corporate or governmental
budget data, and significant statistics on incomes, ex-
penses, and general financial characteristics.
E. Equipment
1. GENERAL
An overall quantitative and qualitative survey of
the adequacy of existing equipment, domestic and
foreign sources of equipment, shops and repair facilities,
and interchangeability and other characteristics of
equipment.
2. MOTIVE POWER
Predominant types (including tabulated basic charac-
teristics and inventory of each type of locomotive),
PAGE 4
general condition of locomotives, and nature and source
of supply.
3. ROLLING STOCK
Predominant types, general condition, and sources
of supply of freight and passenger rolling stock, with
tabulation of basic characteristics and inventory of
each type.
4. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
Types, characteristics, and inventories of all special
equipment (including equipment discussed under Con-
struction and Maintenance).
F. Selected rail lines
A selection and analysis of the selected lines of major
importance for both economic and logistics purposes,
followed by a summary of the characteristics and
significance of each selected line in terms of the follow-
ing factors: Terminals, mileage, gages, and types of
power; economic and strategic importance; nature and
volume of traffic; brief geographic description of route;
important and/or unusual structures; rail, ties, ballast,
etc., as used on the line; axleload limit on line between
all major junctions; ruling grades both directions be-
tween all major junctions; minimum radii of curves
between all major junctions; maximum distance
between passing sidings; minimum length of passing
sidings; number and total length of bridges and tunnels;
tabulation of remaining facilities such as: yards,
enginehouses, Fueling and watering facilities, other
facilities.
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER III
Section 32. Highway
A. General
An appreciation of highway transportation in the
country, including relationship to other transportation,
salient characteristics, physical environmental factors,
significant historical developments, bottlenecks, and
economic and logistical significance.
B. Characteristics of the highway network
1. GENERAL
A discussion of such factors as total highway mileage
by classification, indicating correlation between surface
types and administrative classification; pattern and
geographic distribution; connections with adjacent
countries, numbering and marking system; density
and nature of traffic; present status and general condi-
tion of the network, and programs for highway de-
velopment in the country.
2. ROADWAY, STRUCTURES, AND FACIL-
ITIES
Detailed characteristics of surface types, base types,
and shoulder types; drainage characteristics and gen-
eral condition of all the highways by type or adminis-
trative designation; design and specification standards
of highways; characteristics and comprehensive sta-
tistics on bridges and tunnels, including design and
specification standards; characteristics and statistics
on ferries and fords; vehicle repair and fueling facilities,
types of fuels used, and domestic or import origin of
fuels.
3. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Construction and maintenance policy, problems,
and procedures in relation to character of terrain,
weather and climate, characteristics of original design
and construction, and present condition. Official atti-
tude toward highway construction and maintenance.
Frequency or cyclic period of road and structures
inspection, overhauling, repair, replacement, or recon-
struction. Construction and maintenance procedures,
including standards and specifications and such factors
as the sectionalizing of roads for maintenance and the
prevalence of hand as against mechanical methods.
Availability of necessary funds, and availability and
quality of materials, equipment, and labor.
Construction and maintenance equipment, including
the major construction and maintenance equipment
items used in highway work and the stations where
such equipment is assigned. Domestic availability or
"1611111111111161fabliim
dependence on imports as a source of supply of heavy
and automotive construction equipment.
4. TRAFFIC INTERRUPTION FACTORS
A survey of critical points or features of the highway
system, with emphasis on existing or potential factors
which might adversely affect traffic.
5. DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM
New construction and improvement under way or
planned.
C. Control and organization
1. GOVERNMENTAL REGULATION
Major regulatory bodies having jurisdiction over
highways, specific functions of each, and where appli-
cable the relationship between these bodies and other
transportation agencies.
2. PRINCIPAL CARRIERS
Ownership, organization, and administrative struc-
ture of each principal carrier.
3. PERSONNEL
The number of operating personnel and employees
by department; personnel efficiency and training, labor
relations, and such aspects as pay rates and health and
retirement provisions.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Operating regulations and practices for passenger
and freight traffic, significant operating statistics, and
significant or unusual operating problems and practices.
2. TRAFFIC
Traffic conditions and trends, including pattern of
traffic and relative importance of freight and passenger
traffic; principal commodities carried and any signifi-
cant regional characteristics; selective statistics for
representative years on such factors as freight tons,
freight ton-miles, and other applicable indicators of
traffic volume and handling, including flow charts and
flow breakdown by vehicle.
3. FINANCIAL DATA
Operating revenues, expenses, and ratios, including
governmental financial aspects.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
milommimiftimmmm NIS STANDARD
E. Vehicles and equipment
1. GENERAL
An overall quantitative and qualitative survey of
the adequacy of existing vehicles and equipment,
domestic and foreign sources of vehicles and equipment
or principal components, amounts and types imported
and exported, and vehicle standards.
2. MOTOR VEHICLES
A tabulation of the number, capacity, make and
year of vehicles by type.
3. SPECIAL EQUIPMENT
A tabulation of road construction and maintenance
equipment.
4. OTHER
A tabulation of any significant other types of equip-
ment, including animal-drawn vehicles when appro-
priate.
F. Principal routes
A selection and analysis of principal routes of major
importance for both economic and logistical purposes
followed by a summary of the characteristics and sig-
nificance of each principal route in terms of the follow-
INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
ing factors: route number and/or name; starting points,
terminals, and route mileage; principal intersections
and international connections; adequacy of clearance
from ports and principal cities; main thoroughfares
through and bypasses around large population centers
(by map) ; traffic flow; bottlenecks; fueling facilities;
general pavement data; bridges; tunnels; ferries; fords;
route logs; and special weather restrictions.
G. Highway technical data
An explanation of the special highway numbering
system used in SECTION 32, and tabular and other
presentations of detailed highway data.
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 33. Inland Waterway
A. General
An appreciation of inland waterway transportation
in the country, including relationship to other trans-
portation, salient characteristics, physical environ-
mental factors, and economic and logistical significance.
B. Characteristics of the waterway system
1. GENERAL
A discussion of such basic nation-wide features as
topography (watersheds, Hood plains, banks, etc.), areal
distribution of navigable streams, climate and weather
conditions causing seasonal variations in water level
and freezing, mileage and limits of navigability, con-
nections with adjacent countries, density and nature
of traffic, and present status and general condition of
waterways.
2. WATERWAY FACILITIES
Characteristics of fixed facilities (locks, bridges,
dams, navigational aids), with summarizing statistics;
specification standards for structures; location of major
ports and cargo handled by type and tonnage (with
appropriate reference to SECTION 35 and SUPPLEMENT I).
PAGE 6
3. CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
Construction and maintenance policy, problems, and
procedure in relation to terrain, weather and climate,
characteristics of original design and construction, and
present condition of waterway structures and stream
improvement works. Official attitude toward water-
way construction and maintenance. Discussion of
construction and maintenance procedures includes
standards and specifications, whether work is done by
governmental organization or private contractor, avail-
ability of funds, equipment, materials, and qualified
personnel. New construction and improvements un-
derway or planned.
4. TRAFFIC INTERRUPTION FACTORS
A survey of critical points or features of the waterway
system, with emphasis on existing or potential factors
which might adversely affect traffic.
5. DEVELOPMENT PROGRAM
New construction and improvements underway or
planned for waterways and ports.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER III 6111.1.1.1111..1
C. Control and organization
1. CONTROL
Governmental control and regulations affecting the
waterways and the carriers.
2. PRINCIPAL CARRIERS
Ownership, organization, and administrative struc-
ture of each principal carrier.
3. PERSONNEL
Maintenance, operational, and carrier personnel in
terms of number, competency, labor relations, pay
rates, and health and retirement provisions.
D. Operations
1. OPERATING FACTORS
Routine operating regulations and practices, signifi-
cant operating statistics and significant or unusual
operating problems and practices.
2. TRAFFIC
Traffic conditions and trends, including statistics for
passengers carried and cargo by commodities.
3. FINANCIAL DATA
Operating revenue and expenses of carriers, and gov-
ernmental budget data for waterways.
E. Craft and equipment
General survey of adequacy of craft, present con-
dition, fuel used, and facilities ?for repairing and con-
structing craft. Craft census by number, type (pas-
senger or cargo), propulsion (including horsepower for
tugs), capacity, condition, and other pertinent charac-
teristics. Special equipment used for construction and
maintenance on the waterways and at the ports.
F. Individual waterways
General discussion giving location, tributaries, entire
length and navigable length by craft (capacity or
draft), types of cargo moved with performance sta-
tistics. Physical characteristics such as banks, bottom,
seasonal variations (water level, currents, freezing,
floods, etc.), and navigational hazards. Tabulation of
locks (location, ditnensions, type of gates and how
operated, locking time), bridges (location, horizontal
and vertical clearance, moveable span), and other
structures such as dams, aqueducts, safety gates, tun-
nels, ferry crossings. Description of ports, giving total
wharfage with depths, storage facilities, mechanical
handling facilities, and repair facilities for craft, type
and tonnage of cargo.
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 34. Petroleum Pipeline
(Treated in Subsection 62, (7 and Supplement V)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAG E 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
sommilimmob NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Section 35. Ports and Naval Facilities
(When there is a Supplement I)
A. General
1. PORTS
Comprehensive evaluative discussion covering:
Geography of area as it relates to the establish-
ment of ports.
Brief history of growth and development of
port system.
Areal distribution and grouping of ports as de-
termined by geographical, historical, eco-
nomic, and strategic factors.
Comparative analysis of ports, either by area
or individually, on basis of commercial
activity, military port capacity, and any
other pertinent factors if appropriate or
significant.
Enumeration of principal and secondary ports
and brief description of each including rela-
tive location, importance, principal charac-
teristics and activities, size and character of
harbor, port capacity, and port facilities.
Governmental control and administration where
applicable.
Alphabetical list of principal, secondary, and
minor ports (with coordinates).
Summary table of significant characteristics
and facilities of principal and secondary
ports using standard table with following
column heads and column lines:
NAME (Coordinates)
HAI/Boa
Type
Fairway limitations
Largest vessel accommodated
Tides
Ice
BERTHS
Anchorage
Mooring:
Fixed
Free-swinging
Alongside
MECHANICAL IIANDLING FACIILITIES
Shore cranes
Floating cranes
Special handling equipment
STORAGE CAPACITY
General cargo
Bulk liquid storage
Bulk dry storage
Open stacking space
PAGE 8
CLEARANCE
Rail
Road
Other if applicable
? ESTIMATED MILITARY PORT CAPACITY
NAVAL ACTIVITY
SIIIPYARDS
REMARKS
2. NAVAL FACILITIES
General analysis covering:
Size, condition, and adequacy of naval establish-
ment.
Brief summary of organization in to naval dis-
tricts and commands.
Brief description of principal naval bases and
summary of secondary bases and other
activities.
Alphabetical list of naval facilities (with co-
ordinates). Separate coastal and inland
facilities by means of headings.
3. SHIPYARDS
General analysis covering:
Extent and distribution of shipyard facilities.
Capability and size of yards.
Predominance of shipbuilding or ship-repairing
facilities.
Cross reference to Subsection 64, E for discussion
of economic aspects of shipbuilding and ship-
repairing industry.
List all shipyards by place (seaport or inland city),
with coastal and inland places under separate
heads. Arrange place names alphabetically
under each heading and give coordinates of each
place. List shipyards by category under name
of each place.
B. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
mOsigiMPRIPRT
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER IV
SOCIOLOGICAL
Section 40 Introduction
Section 41 Population
Section 42 Characteristics of the People
Section 43 Religion, Education, and
Public Information
Section 44 Manpower
Section 45 Health and Sanitation
Section 46 Welfare
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
amommummum,
JANUARY 1962
Chapter IV - Sociological
OUTLINE
SECTION 40. INTRODUCTION
SECTION 41, POPULATION
A. General
B. Size, composition, and geographic distri-
bution
1. Size and composition
2. Distribution and density
3. Pattern of settlement and urban areas
4. Internal migration
C. Population structure
D. Population change
1. Vital statistics
2. Immigration and emigration
3. Trends and projections
E. Population problems and policies
F. Reference data
G. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 42. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PEOPLE
A. General
B. Physical characteristics
C. Languages
1. Distribution
2. Content and structure
3. Social significance
4. International ties
D. Social organization
1. Social structure
2. The family
3. The community
4. Social organizations and movements
5. The individual in the society
E. Social values, attitudes, and customs
1. Basic value system
2. Basic attitudes
3. Significant customs
F. Artistic and intellectual expression
G. Distinctive culture groups
II. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 43. RELIGION, EDUCATION, AND PUBLIC IN-
FORMATION
A.
B.
General
Religion
1. Significance of religion in the country
2. Principal faiths
C. Education
1. Education in the national life
2. The government and education
3. Educational system
4. General content of instruction
5. Noncurricular student activities
6. Educators
D. Public information
1. Communications development, use,
and control
2. Press and periodicals
3. Book publishing
4. Libraries
5. Motion pictures
6. Radio and television
7. Other means of communication
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 44. MANPOWER
A. General
B. Manpower resources
1. Total manpower resources
2. Labor force
3. Labor reserve
C. Labor legislation and agencies of govern-
ment
1. Basic labor legislation
2. Manpower planning
3. Forced labor
4. Labor agencies of government
D. Standards and practices of employment
1. Utilization of the labor supply
2. Income
3. Working conditions
E. Management
1. 'Characteristics of management per-
sonnel
2. Organization of management person-
nel
3. Management leadership
F. Labor
1. Organization of labor
2. Policies
3. Political ties
4. Leadership
G. Labor-management relations
1. Labor problems
2. Collective bargaining
H. Reference data
I. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
viNV LULA 11AL
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 45. HEALTH AND SANITATION
A. General
B. Factors affecting health
1. Topography and climate
2. Socio-economic pattern
3. Animal and plant life
4. Nutrition
5. Water
6. Waste disposal
C. Diseases
1. Diseases of man
2. Animal diseases
D. Medical organization and administration
1. Civilian
2. Military
SECTION
JANUARY 1962
E. Medical personnel and training
F. Medical care facilities
G. Medical supplies
H. Comments on principal sources
46. WELFARE
A. General
B. Levels of living and social welfare
C. Social security and welfare aid
1. Social security
2. Public welfare service
3. Private welfare services
4. Leadership
D. Comments on principal sources
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. in preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Section 40. Introduction
This Section provides a concise synthesis of the gen-
eral character of the society, its civilization, and social
stability. The dynamic factors in the society and its
cohesiveness and flexibility in relation to social change
are pointed out briefly. This Section serves as a so-
ciological introduction to the country and to CHAPTER
IV, presenting a brief overview of the people and their
society, with such historical factors woven into the
text as necessary to explain or give perspective to pres-
ent-day social institutions, characteristics, and atti-
tudes.
The Section answers succinctly and in broad terms
such questions as the following, emphasizing wherever
possible the interplay of significant forces and factors
in shaping the society:
1) What are the main patterns and trends of social
life and social organization? Are they based primarily
on an agricultural or industrial tradition, on a
mixed or other type of economy, on abundance or
scarcity? Indicate the status of, and the relationships
among, the various classes, races, religions, nation-
ality or language groups.
2) What has been the effect of environmental fac-
tors (including locational, topographical, and climatic
factors as well as availability of natural resources) on
a) population composition, growth, and distribution,
PAGE 2
b) social organization, and c) cultural, including tech-
nological, development?
3) Is the society stable or unstable, is it confused,
disunited, or imbued with a sense of common destiny
and mission?
4) What are the dominant social motives of indi-
viduals? In broad terms what social values motivate
behavior and how do social institutions reflect these
values? Do the people have an individualistic or col-
lectivist bent or tradition?
5) Is there a dominant tradition of learning, philo-
sophical, scientific, or artistic? Are the people pre-
dominantly literate or illiterate? To what extent is
language a unifying factor or a barrier to unity and
strength?
6) What are the most powerful internal and external
forces molding public opinion and group behavior?
What is the pattern of public opinion formation and
of individual thought?
Such an evaluation should take into consideration
the homogeneity of the population, its age or youth,
its manpower resources, the attitude of the people
toward their cultural-political heritage, and the ade-
quacy of social institutions in meeting defined social
needs. The relation of the society to neighboring na-
tions, the U.S.S.R., and the United States, especially
in regard to cultural development, should be noted.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
?T8TRimiwinom.'
SECTION 40. INTRODUCTION
SECTION 41. POPULATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
SECTION 42.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
SECTION 43.
A.
B.
Chapter IV - Sociological
OUTLINE
General
Size, composition, and geographic distri-
bution
1. Size and composition
2. Distribution and density
3. Pattern of settlement and urban areas
4. Internal migration
Population structure
Population change
1. Vital statistics
2. Immigration and emigration
3. Trends and projections
Population problems and policies
Reference data tables
Comments on principal sources
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PEOPLE
General
Physical characteristics
Languages
1. Distribution
2. Content and structure
3. Social significance
4. International ties
Social organization
1. Social structure
2. The family
3. The community
4. Social organizations and movements
5. The individual in the society
Social values, attitudes, and customs
1. Basic value system
2. Basic attitudes
3. Significant customs
Artistic and intellectual expression
Distinctive culture groups
Comments on principal sources
RELIGION, EDUCATION, AND PUBLIC IN-
FORMATION
General
Religion
1. Significance of religion in the country
2. Principal faiths
C. Education
1. Education in the national life
2. The government and education
3. Educational system
4. General content of instruction
5. Noncurricular student activities
6. Educators
D. Public information
1. Communications development, use,
and control
2. Press and periodicals
3. Book publishing
4. Libraries
5. Motion pictures
6. Radio and television
7. Other means of communication
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 44. MANPOWER
A. General
B. Manpower resources
1. Total manpower resources
2. Labor force
3. Labor reserve
C. Labor legislation and agencies of govern-
ment
1. Basic labor legislation
2. Manpower planning
3. Forced labor
4. Labor agencies of government
D. Standards and practices of employment
1. Utilization of the labor supply
2. Income
3. Working conditions
E. Management
1. Characteristics of management per-
sonnel
2. Organization of management person-
nel
3. Management leadership
F. Labor
1. Organization of labor
2. Policies
3. Political ties
4. Leadership
G. Labor-management relations
1. Labor problems
2. Collective bargaining
II. Comments on principal sources
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUOTIONS JULY 1.957
SECTION 45. HEALTH AND SANITATION
A. General
B. Factors affecting health
I. Topography and climate
2. Socio-economic pattern
3. Animal and plant life
4. Nutrition
5. Water
6. Waste disposal
C. Diseases
I. Diseases of man
2. Animal diseases
D. Medical organization and administration
1. Civilian
2. Military
E. Medical manpower
I. Personnel
2. Training
F. Medical care facilities
G. Medical supplies
H. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 46. WELFARE
A. General
B. Levels of living and social welfare
C. Social security and welfare aid
I. Social security
2. Public welfare service
3. Private welfare services
4. Leadership
D. Comments on principal sources
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Section 40. Introduction
This Section provides a concise synthesis of the gen-
eral character of the society, its civilization, and social
stability. The dynamic factors in the society and its
cohesiveness and flexibility in relation to social change
are pointed out briefly. This Section serves as a so-
ciological introduction to the country and to CHAPTER
IV, presenting a brief overview of the people and their
society, with such historical factors woven into the
text as necessary to explain or give perspective to pres-
ent-day social institutions, characteristics, and atti-
tudes.
The Section answers succinctly and in broad terms
such questions as the following, emphasizing wherever
poss.ible the interplay of significant forces and factors
in shaping the society:
I) What are the main patterns and trends of social
life and social organization? Are they based primarily
on an agricultural or industrial tradition, on a
mixed or other type of economy, on abundance or
scarcity? Indicate the status of, and the relationships
among, the various classes, races, religions, nation-
ality or language groups.
2) What has been the effect of environmental fac-
tors (including locational, topographical, and climatic
factors as well as availability of natural resources) on
a) population composition, growth, and distribution,
PAGE 2
b) social organization, and c) cultural, including tech-
nological, development?
3) Is the society stable or unstable, is it confused,
disunited, or imbued with a sense of common destiny
and mission?
4) What are the dominant social motives of indi-
viduals? In broad terms what social values motivate
behavior and how do social institutions reflect these
values? Do the people have an individualistic or col-
lectivist bent or tradition?
5) Is there a dominant tradition of learning, philo-
sophical, scientific, or artistic? Are the people pre-
dominantly literate or illiterate? To what extent is
language a unifying factor or a barrier to unity and
strength?
6) What are the most powerful internal and external
forces molding public opinion and group behavior?
What is the pattern of public opinion formation and
of individual thought?
Such an evaluation should take into consideration
the homogeneity of the population, its age or youth,
its manpower resources, the attitude Pf the people
toward their cultural-political heritage, and the ade-
quacy of social institutions in meeting defined social
needs. The relation of the society to neighboring na-
tions, the U.S.S.R., and the United States, especially
in regard to cultural development, should be noted.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER IV
Section 41. Population
A. General
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach to
the material in the remainder of the Section. It in-
cludes a brief statement of the significant aspects of
population as a whole and its major segments, noting
the most important and distinctive demographic facts
as they relate to economic, political, and other major
problems of the country. It should not be merely a
digest of what follows.
B. Size, composition, and geographic distri-
bution
1. SIZE AND COMPOSITION
Give the total size of the population by the most
recent census or estimate. Compare with neighboring,
rival, or other countries as appropriate. Identify the
major segments, racial and/or ethnic, giving numbers
and regional distribution (with map if possible). Have
realinements of boundaries or migrations due to war or
economic or other disaster affected the composition of
the population? In a mixed population state defini-
tions used by the national census for identifying indi-
viduals with these segments (race, language, religion).
2. DISTRIBUTION AND DENSITY
Give data on the density of the total population of
the area as a whole and present a table of area and
population in the chief administrative subdivisions
(states, provinces, departments, etc.) with number of
persons per square mile, preferably accompanied by a
map of population density.
3. PATTERN OF SETTLEMENT AND URBAN
AREAS
Discuss the general pattern of settlement?orienta-
tion toward the sea, natural resources, river commerce,
industrial activities. Note characteristics of major
ethnic or other segments of the population in the pat-
terns of settlement. Give percentage of population
which is rural and urban as defined by the census of the
country under discussion. Is it concentrated in major
agglomerations or dispersed, and why? Note the ex-
tent to which the rural population is collected in
villages, hamlets, or in isolated households.
Tabulate population of major cities and the chief
metropolitan areas, including the total population of
each with the percentages of the significant ethnic or
other segments of the population. Comment on the
patterns of settlement of these segments in metropolitan
centers. Do population groups tend to be segregated,
live and work apart from other segments, or are they
interspersed in the community pattern?
4. INTERNAL MIGRATION
Discuss the role of internal migration in the distribu-
tion of the population. Indicate the chief origins,
destinations, and causes of internal migratory move-
ments, particularly rural-urban migration. Comment
on seasonal migrations. Note any marked differences
identified with the major segments of the population.
C. Population structure
Tabulate total population (in thousands) classified
by five-year groups (0-4, 5-9, 10-14 . . . 65 and over)
for males, females, and total as of postwar census or
estimate. Illustrate by using an age-sex profile. Is it
a young or old population? Point out any significant
excess or deficit of either sex and state ages. Discuss
age at first marriage and the proportion of unmarried
males and females. Is there a large unmarried or wid-
owed population arising from late marriage, war cas-
ualties, or other factors? Is there polygamy? Give
data on number of families or households by size. Give
similar data for significant segments of the population,
geographical, racial, or ethnic, and show their relation-
ship to the statistics for the nation as a whole.
Indicate the percentages of the total population in
working ages (e.g., 15-64) and in dependent ages (e.g.,
0-14 and 65 and over). Are there marked regional
urban-rural, or ethnic variations from the national
pattern? Do the statistics reflect the actual degree of
dependency on the population of working age, due to
such factors as years required for education, compulsory
retirement, etc.? Point out any significant variations
for major segments of the population. (Cross-refer to
SECTIONS 42 and 44 where pertinent.) Comment also
on the manpower available to the armed forces.
D. Population change
1. VITAL STATISTICS
Tabulate births, deaths, and excess of births over
deaths for postwar years. Show vital rates per 1,000
of the population for postwar years and such earlier
periods (e.g., averages for 1921-25, 1926-30, 1931-35,
and 1936-39) as are necessary to give proper perspec-
tive, preferably illustrated by a graphic. If possible
give infant mortality rates (infant deaths in first year
of life per 1,000) and comment on life expectancy. Are
there significant variations for major geographic or
ethnic segments of the population? Comment on the
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
major social, political, economic, environmental, and
mental and physical health characteristics affecting the
vital statistics.
2. IMMIGRATION AND EMIGRATION
If available, give table showing immigrants by coun-
try of origin and birth, and emigrants by chief country
of destination for postwar years and summary data for
prewar periods. Indicate the residue of migration as
measured by the number of foreign-born and the num-
ber of aliens and naturalized citizens. Discuss war
:migration across national borders and other population
dislocations if any.
3. TRENDS AND PROJECTIONS
Cite the dates and figures for national census-taking
in the area. Compare the rate of growth with those of
neighboring or rival countries. Has the country been
a population vacuum (cf. France) or a source of out-
ward population pressure (cf. Germany and Japan)?
Give best available estimates for casualties of World
War II, or other hostilities since 1945, military and
civilian. What are the factors affecting growth and
the present trends?
Indicate prospective future population trends, during
the next 15 to 25 years, in size and structure of the
population, based on natality, mortality, and migration.
Comment on prospective changes in regional, urban-
rural, and ethnic composition.
E. Population problems and policies
What problems are presented by growth, decline, or
distribution of the population? Have these problems
particular significance for major segments of the popula-
A. General
tion? Note the attitudes of different groups of people
toward these problems if they are significant to national
stability. What policies have been proposed or adopted
by the government that affect the size, distribution, or
rate of growth of the population? Indicate migration
policies and discuss the present and prospective role of
migration and settlement in relieving population pres-
sure or in developing thinly populated areas. Has the
government adopted policies to increase the numbers
of marriages and births, such-as family allowance, or is
encouragement given to practices of family limitation?
Cross-refer to SECTION 46 where appropriate, and to
other NIS areas where these problems and policies have
significant impact.
F. Reference data
This Subsection accommodates lengthy statistical
material which provides data in addition to short
tables interspersed in the text.
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 42. Characteristics of the People
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach to
the material contained in the remainder of the Section.
It describes the crucial historical developments con-
ditioning the society. Those factors in the physical
environment which have contributed to the society's
distinctive cultural development are noted, pointing
out, for example, accessibility to hostile neighbors, or
natural features and resources such as mountain ranges
and oil deposits as in the case of Iran. Describe the
degree of racial and cultural homogeneity and complex-
ity of the society. Indicate briefly the factors in the
society that have led to national strength or weakness,
national solidarity or disunity, as well as susceptibility
to foreign psychological influences and/or desire for
expansion of influence over other areas. The funda-
PAGE 4
mental ideological trends are discussed in relation to
the culture of the people. This Subsection is an ap-
proach to and not a digest of what follows.
B. Physical characteristics
Describe the distinctive physical characteristics of
the population. Include those characteristics which
are the result of climate, diet, health conditions, and
other environmental factors. Note the characteristic
physical differences among groups in the population
where significant. Include photographs of character-
istic physical types, How do these types compare with
native and alien concepts or stereotypes of them? To
the maximum extent use nontechnical language, es-
pecially avoiding extensive use of anthropological
terminology.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAP TER IV
Section 41. Population
A. General
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach to
the material in the remainder of the Section. It in-
cludes a brief statement of the significant aspects of
population as a whole and its major segments, noting
the most important and distinctive demographic facts
as they relate to economic, political, and other major
problems of the country. It should not be merely a
digest of what follows.
B. Size, composition, and geographic distri-
bution
1. SIZE AND COMPOSITION
Give the total size of the population by the most
recent census or estimate. Compare with neighboring,
rival, or other countries as appropriate. Identify the
major segments, racial and/or ethnic, giving numbers
and regional distribution (with map if possible). Have
realinements of boundaries or migrations due to war or
economic or other disaster affected the composition of
the population? In a mixed population state defini-
tions used by the national census for identifying indi-
viduals with these segments (race, language, religion).
2. DISTRIBUTION AND DENSITY
Give data on the density of the total population of
the area as a whole and present a table of area and
population in the chief administrative subdivisions
(states, provinces, departments, etc.) with number of
persons per square mile, preferably accompanied by a
map of population density.
3. PATTERN OF SETTLEMENT AND URBAN
AREAS
Discuss the general pattern of settlement?orienta-
tion toward the sea, natural resources, river commerce,
industrial activities. Note characteristics of major
ethnic or other segments of the population in the pat-
terns of settlement. Give percentage of population
which is rural and urban as defined by the census of the
country under discussion. Is it concentrated in major
agglomerations or dispersed, and why? Note the ex-
tent to which the rural population is collected in
villages, hamlets, or in isolated households.
Tabulate population of major cities and the chief
metropolitan areas, including the total population of
each with the percentages of the significant ethnic or
other segments of the population. Comment on the
patterns of settlement of these segments in metropolitan
centers. Do population groups tend to be segregated,
live and work apart from other segments, or are they
interspersed in the community pattern?
4. INTERNAL MIGRATION
Discuss the role of internal migration in the distribu-
tion of the population. Indicate the chief origins,
destinations, and causes of internal migratory move-
ments, particularly rural-urban migration. Comment
on seasonal migrations. Note any marked differences
identified with the major segments of the population.
C. Population structure
Tabulate total population (in thousands) classified
by five-year groups (0-4, 5-9, 10-14 . . . 65 and over)
for males, females, and total as of postwar census or
estimate. Illustrate by using an age-sex profile. Is it
a young or old population? Point out any significant
excess or deficit of either sex and state ages. Discuss
age at first marriage and the proportion of unmarried
males and females. Is there a large unmarried or wid-
owed population arising from late marriage, war cas-
ualties, or other factors? Is there polygamy? Give
data on number of families or households by size. Give
similar data for significant segments of the population,
geographical, racial, or ethnic, and show their relation-
ship to the statistics for the nation as a whole.
Indicate the percentages of the total population in
working ages (e.g., 15-64) and in dependent ages (e.g.,
0-14 and 65 and over). Are there marked regional
urban-rural, or ethnic variations from the national
pattern? Do the statistics reflect the actual degree of
dependency on the population of working age, due to
such factors as years required for education, compulsory
retirement, etc.? Point out any significant variations
for major segments of the population. (Cross-refer to
SECTIONS 42 and 44 where pertinent.) Comment also
on the manpower available to the armed forces.
D. Population change
1. VITAL STATISTICS
Tabulate births, deaths, and excess of births over
deaths for postwar years. Show vital rates per 1,000
of the population for postwar years and such earlier
periods (e.g., averages for 1921-25, 1926-30, 1931-35,
and 1936-39) as are necessary to give proper perspec-
tive, preferably illustrated by a graphic. If possible
give infant mortality rates (infant deaths in first year
of life per 1,000) and comment on life expectancy. Are
there significant variations for major geographic or
ethnic segments of the population? Comment on the
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
major social, political, economic, environmental, and
mental and physical health characteristics affecting the
vital statistics.
2. IMMIGRATION AND EMIGRATION
If available, give table showing immigrants by coun-
try of origin and birth, and emigrants by chief country
of destination for postwar years and summary data for
prewar periods. Indicate the residue of migration as
measured by the number of foreign-born and the num-
ber of aliens and naturalized citizens. Discuss war
migration across national borders and other population
dislocations if any.
3. TRENDS AND PROJECTIONS
Cite the dates and figures for national census-taking
in the area. Compare the rate of growth with those of
neighboring or rival countries. Has the country been
a population vacuum (cf. France) or a source of out-
ward population pressure (cf. Germany and japan)?
Give best available estimates for casualties of World
War II, or other hostilities since 1945, military and
civilian. What are the factors affecting growth and
the present trends?
Indicate prospective future population trends, during
the next 15 to 25 years, in size and structure of the
population, based on natality, mortality, and migration.
Comment on prospective changes in regional, urban-
rural, and ethnic composition.
E. Population problems and policies
What problems are presented by growth, decline, or
distribution of the population? Have these problems
particular significance for major segments of the popula-
A. General
JULY 1957
tion? Note the attitudes of different groups of people
toward these problems if they are significant to national
stability. What policies have been proposed or adopted
by the government to affect the size, distribution, or
rate of growth of the population? Indicate migration
policies and discuss the present and prospective role of
migration and settlement in relieving population pres-
sure or in developing thinly populated areas. Has the
government adopted policies to increase the numbers
of marriages and births, such as family allowance, or is
encouragement given to practices of family limitation?
Cross-refer to SECTION 46 where appropriate, and to
other NIS areas where these problems and policies have
significant impact.
F. Reference data tables
This Subsection accommodates lengthy statistical
tables which provide data in addition to the shorter
tables interspersed in the text.
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 42. Characteristics of the People
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach to
the material contained in the remainder of the Section.
It describes the crucial historical developments con-
ditioning the society. Those factors in the physical
environment which have contributed to the society's
distinctive cultural development are noted, pointing
out, for example, accessibility to hostile neighbors, or
natural features and resources such as mountain ranges
and oil deposits as in the case of Iran. Describe the
degree of racial and cultural homogeneity and complex-
ity of the society. Indicate briefly the factors in the
society that have led to national strength or weakness,
national solidarity or disunity, as well as susceptibility
to foreign psychological influences and/or desire for
expansion of influence over other areas. The funda-
PAGE 4
mental ideological trends are discussed in relation to
the culture of the people. This Subsection is an ap-
proach to and not a digest of what follows.
B. Physical characteristics
Describe the distinctive physical characteristics of
the population. Include those characteristics which
are the result of climate, diet, health conditions, and
other environmental factors. Note the characteristic
physical differences among groups in the population
where significant. Include photographs of character-
istic physical types. How do these types compare with
native and alien concepts or stereotypes of them? To
the maximum extent use nontechnical language, es-
pecially avoiding extensive use of anthropological
terminology.
(1(m:win DINTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTEI? IV
C. Languages
1. DISTRIBUTION
Designate the major languages and dialects com-
monly spoken in the country, showing the number of
speakers, their percentages of the total population, and
their geographical distribution. Illustrate with map
where possible.
2. CONTENT AND STRUCTURE
Discuss the major languages and dialects, including
vocabulary and structure, and Covering the following
points: 1) mutual intelligibility; 2) adequacy for special
fields of knowledge, especially as compared with
English; 3) the extent to which, and internal and ex-
ternal sources from which, new elements are being
introduced into the language. What do the new
language elements suggest as to the cultural trend of
the society?
3. SOCIAL SIGNIFICANCE
To what extent are languages, dialects, or distinctive
pronunciations identified with social or ethnic groups,
and what iS their prestige value (such as cockney or
Oxford English)? Discuss official policy in regard to
languages (e.g., for use in the schools, in the courts, on
the radio, and in the armed services). Comment on
the attitudes of each of the major linguistic groups
toward each other's language or dialect and their status
in relation to the nationally dominant group.
Discuss briefly characteristic patterns of communica-
tion and word usage. Are imagery and poetic or
formalized expressions characteristic of the conversa-
tion of the people? Are there variations in communi-
cation patterns between youth and their elders, men
and women, rich or poor, etc.? Is conversation a highly
developed technique? Comment on the significance of
gestures as auxiliary to or substitutes for language.
4. INTERNATIONAL TIES
Are the major language groups related to similar
groups across national boundaries? If so, comment
briefly on the relations of these peoples of common
language traits. Indicate the degree to which there is
a local knowledge of English, and other foreign lan-
guages and dialects. Note any significant attitudes
of the people toward these languages and dialects
which reflect a fundamental social sympathy or an-
tagonism.
D. Social organization
Describe briefly the composition of the total society
including major racial, ethnic, religious or other seg-
ments. Note briefly the historical factors which have
given rise to the present social group relations and
present trends. Include charts diagramming these
relationships where possible. Identify those groups
which have sufficient internal cultural differences from
the dominant society to be discussed in Subsection G.
Distinctive Culture Groups, below.
1. SOCIAL STRUCTURE
a. SOCIAL CLASSES ? Describe and analyze the
structure of the dominant society. Note the basis upon
which important social status distinctions are made.
Where there are clearly defined social classes, discuss
their relative size and geographic distribution. To
what extent do the various classes exercise leadership
or control over national life and in what way? (Cross-
refer to SECTION 59 and/or Key Personalities unit.)
What are the effects of social divisions upon national
solidarity? Are social distinctions relaxed in a national
emergency?
Is the society relatively dynamic or static? Note
the direction of change taking place in the organization
and traditional functioning of this society. What
changes are taking place in the size and composition of
the social classes. Point out the significance of changes
in social stratification as they affect political develop-
ment.
What is the importance of the individual's role in the
social structure? Indicate briefly the prestige factors
which determine the individual's relative place in the
society and the important influences of social status
which mold individual behavior. By what means can
the individual gain or lose social status? To what
extent may and do individuals move from one social
class to another? Is there opportunity for change of
social status in the local community or must the indi-
vidual go outside of it to seek higher status? Are
changes taking place in the social structure which tend
to alter or reorient individual attitudes or behavior
such as a new stress on competition, new desires created
by education which the society does not satisfy, strains
of increased mobility on family ties, etc. Present the
main personality characteristics of the people, including
those characteristics which the society considers
especially desirable or undesirable.
Compare the roles of men and of women in the so-
ciety. Indicate the influence of sex differences on
patterns of social mobility, on the total impact of social
mores, on individual behavior, and on the structure of
social taboos and distinctions. Note distinctive be-
havior patterns of each sex toward the other.
b. SOCIAL GROUPS ? Note the relative importance
of major types of activities and groups in the function-
ing of the society. These may be tribal groups, kin
groups, economic groups, religious groups, language
groups, etc. If there are significant racial, ethnic, or
other segments of the society which, even though they
have acquired the major characteristics of the society,
are seen as having separate group identity, note: 1)
their size and distribution in relation to the dominant
group and to the society as a whole (cross-refer to
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
SECTION 41); 2) their distinctive features; 3) their place
in the soeial structure; 4) the degree of isolation main-
tained; 5) any special legal provisions made for them;
and 6) their significance to the national strength or
weakness. Summarize the distinctive social motiva-
tions of each such segment. What effect does member-
ship in these groups have on individual behavior and
personality development? For a discussion of social
organization and values of nationally important groups
of predominantly different culture, such as the Africans
in South Africa, cross-refer to Subsection G, below.
Does the society have a national power elite group or
groups distinct from the social classes? If so, note
whether their power is mainly political, economic, re-
ligious, intellectual, or social. Comment on each group
from the following viewpoints: usual background of the
elite membership, breadth of social base from which
members are recruited, their education, the ease of
admittance to the group, intragroup mores, nature and
type of influence, training and discipline, their custom-
ary means of acquiring information, interest in and
level of understanding of national and international
problems, basic attitudes and predispositions toward
the United States, -U.S.S.R., etc., manner of exercising
influence and molding opinion, flexibility and account-
ability of the leaders and the response to them. Is
leadership considered a group or individual responsibil-
ity and prerogative? What behavior is expected of
followers? To what extent does the public support
them and by what means? Indicate probable future
trends concerning their effectiveness.
What is the typical motivation of individuals of the
elite group, to what extent are they satisfied or frus-
trated, and what are their vulnerabilities both as indi-
viduals and as a group under the impact of domestic or
foreign pressures to which they are or may be subjected?
In particular, does the elite give expression to the ex-
pectations or needs of the society as a whole? What
combinations of power, either through overlapping
leadership or agreement on concerted action, are
apparent or likely to develop?
2. THE FAMILY
Explain the characteristic forms of family and kin-
ship groupings (whether single family, joint family,
clan, etc.). Note important intrafamily relationships
(including the status of the father and the mother in
the family, the relationships of sons and daughters with
their parents and of brothers and sisters to each other).
Discuss the prestige, privileges, and responsibilities of
women in the family. What is the place of old people
in the family? Note any significant prevailing pattern
of attitudes of adults in the family toward young people
and their contacts outside the family. Note the major
differences in the treatment of boys and girls in the
family and their distinctive rights and responsibilities
in such matters as inheritance and family support.
PAGE 6
Comment on the disciplinary training of children and
the processes and symbols of growth. Analyze the role
of the family as a basic unit of the society. To what
extent does the family as a group participate in com-
munity affairs? To what extent does family affiliation
determine social status? Are most marriages within
the community or with persons of other communities?
What is the domicile pattern? Compare the family
pattern and influence with that of the family in the
United States. Do family patterns differ significantly
for different segments of the population?racial, reli-
gious, regional, urban, or economic? Are family patterns
changing; if so, in what direction and why? Special
attention should be given under this subtopic to mar-
riage and those distinctive processes of child-rearing
from birth to maturity which demonstrably form or
affect basic social attitudes. (See below, under Social
Values, Attitudes and Customs.)
3. THE COMMUNITY
Discuss the social structure in relation to the local
community. Do the villages, cities, and regions of the
country display distinctive spatial patterns, such as
the location of dwelling units in relation to areas of
work? Are there distinctive community patterns for
racial and ethnic groups in the society? For agricul-
tural and industrial centers? For rural and urban
areas? Illustrate with photos. At what level of de-
velopment are community facilities and services? Does
the community provide facilities for the customary
leisure-time activities? How do the physical charac-
teristics of these communities affect their social organi-
zation? Note characteristic community-type special
interest groups or organizations (cross-refer to SECTION
52 for local government). To what extent, and how,
are community patterns influenced by the national
government?
4. SOCIAL ORGANIZATIONS AND MOVE-
MENTS
Note extent to which the people seek self-expression
and prestige through organized groups in the society
and are traditionally "joiners." Describe important
social organizations other than those formed on the
basis of social status or family or those political, eco-
nomic, labor, and military groups discussed elsewhere.
This discussion might include such organizations as
significant patriotic societies, veterans' organizations,
civic groups, secret societies, cooperatives (other than
those covered in SECTIONS 44, 46, and 61), lodges, busi-
ness and professional associations (not covered in
SECTIONS 43 and 44), women's organizations, youth
groups, sports and other special interest organizations
not covered elsewhere. Concerning each major organi-
zation indicate the size, geographic distribution, and
character of membership, stated objectives of organiza-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ommeinnummumm?mm?
CHAPTER IV
tion, and financial resources. A table listing these
organizations and giving the essential data on each
would be appropriate and valuable for those organiza-
tions not presented in detail elsewhere.
In some countries, there are social movements which
include several types of organizations; for example, the
labor movement, the missionary movement, or the
youth movement. Where such movements exist, de-
scribe the origin, causal conditions, goals, membership
and participation, directing leaders or agencies, and
activities. Describe the opposition to the movement.
If the movement is subversive in character, cross-refer
to SECTION 57.
What important factors determine status, prestige,
and leadership within each important organization and
movement? What are their professed or real aims?
Estimate the influence of each as a center of group
action and its strength in attitude formation. How
are the attitudes of members molded? Comment on
the composition and distinguishing characteristics of
the leadership. Note attitudes and predispositions of
each group toward the United States, U.S.S.R. and
other bloc countries, neighbors, and other countries with
which the society has ties or influence. Does it exert
leadership in regard to major internal or foreign poli-
cies? What tools are used to influence the public?
Comment on the significant leaders of each group, with
qross reference to SECTION 59 or the NIS Key Per-
sonalities unit as appropriate.
5. THE INDIVIDUAL IN THE SOCIETY
Although the individual takes his values from his
social group, the complete picture of the individual
often does not emerge from such a social focus of
analysis. The individual as lie conceives himself and
the manner in which he interprets his relations to others
are of additional importance. What traits in others
does he prize? Does he see others in antagonistic or
cooperative relation to himself? Are persons helping
him or hindering him in his achievement of aims?
What is his view of the basic nature of things, and how
does he feel he is personally involved? (Cross-refer to
SECTION 43.) What are the chief factors motivating
his behavior, such as religion, ancestry, social position,
wealth, desire for economic security? What are his
personal definitions of purpose? What does he feel
gives his life meaning? What goals does he seek? Does
he think in terms of a career? Of bettering himself?
What are the sources of his anxiety? What are his
primary frustrations? Does he think that social
changes are affecting his life? If so, how does he feel
about them? Does individual behavior in urban areas
differ markedly from that in rural areas? Is there
regional variation? Are there variations according to
social, economic, or occupational status?
E. Social values, attitudes, and customs
1. BASIC VALUE SYSTEM
Every society exhibits certain central themes which
become the basis for understanding behavior in all
areas of social life; for example, the American stress on
competition, the Burmese attitude toward after-life,
and the Chinese notion of filial piety. Describe briefly
the central values of the society, especially those de-
rived from religious and educational systems. (Cross-
refer to SECTION 43.) Are there competing values
which are in conflict? Point out within the framework
of the central value system, what the goals of the society
as a whole are?material property, peace, conquest,
preservation of the culture, racial superiority, propaga-
tion of a religion or ideology, etc.? Do the means of
achieving these accepted individual and collective goals
accord generally with democratic or authoritarian
standards? What are the characteristic fears both of
the individual and of the whole society associated with
the effort to achieve the respective goals? Indicate
briefly any significant similarities and contrasts in basic
values existing between the society concerned and the
United States or other countries with which the society
is intimately concerned.
Is the basic value system undergoing change and, if
so, what is the direction of this change, what are the
chief factors causing it, and how rapidly is it proceed-
ing? Is man's role conceived to be that of opposing,
accepting, or provoking social change; of accepting his
physical environment or changing it, for example,
through adoption of improved methods of production
or new modes of life such as urbanization?
What are the most effective sanctions motivating or
inhibiting behavior, such as prestige, material rewards,
ostracism, legal punishment, the outstanding beliefs,
traditions, myths and taboos, etc.? (Cross-refer to
SECTION 43 under Religion and/or to SECTION 54 under
the Penal System.) To what extent is deviant be-
havior from group norms tolerated?
Describe any significant rural-urban, ethnic, sex,
class, or racial group differences in basic social values
and motivations. Cross-refer to Subsection G. Dis-
tinctive Culture Groups, below. Indicate the extent
to which these differences threaten national solidarity.
2. BASIC ATTITUDES
Discuss under this subheading only the prevailing
and more lasting attitudes of the people, rather than
current public opinion. Identify the specific groups
whose attitudes are presented. Where possible, indi-
cate major group differences from national norms. The
attitudes discussed here are the deep-seated concepts
growing out of the basic value system. Cross-refer to
other Sections such as SECTIONS 53, 55, and 58, for atti-
tudes on specific national, domestic, and foreign con-
ditions or issues.
eigiowinimpir
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
a?itiolummla NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
a. TOWARD OWN SOCIETY Where specific data:
are available, information on such questions as the fol-
lowing would be pertinent: What group attitudes
toward their own society and toward various classes
and/or groups in the society are developed by the cul-
ture and. how are they molded? Note basic attitudes
and awareness of the people toward freedom or the
subordination of the individual and the factors in the
social experience of the various groups which foster
this attitude. What is the attitude of the people
toward the responsibility of the society for the welfare
of its members? (Cross-refer to SECTION 46.) What
attitudes tend to divide the people into antagonistic
groups? Are the unifying attitudes basically strong
enough to prevent divisive attitudes from being a threat
to national solidarity?
Is there a clear and widely held concept of patriotism?
In what national achievements do the people take
special pride? What are the prevailing attitudes in
regard to aggrandizement of the nation? What are the
established national symbols (e.g., caricatures, slogans,
national anthem, flag), and what is their present effec-
tiveness as they operate on individuals or groups?
Comment briefly on the major social rituals such as
national holiday celebrations, and on the texts of
national songs or historical monuments and documents
reflecting important symbols of the nation. Note their
effectiveness in crystallizing thought and attitudes.
What symbols are currently used by the leadership?
On what motivations do they play? What symbols
appeal most to each important social group, such as
intellectuals or labor? In order to illustrate group
attitudes, it is suggested that the following be exam-
ined briefly: The chief stereotypes of leaders and the
behavior such stereotypes evoke, using the great leaders
of the nation's past to illustrate. What emotions are
attached to structured positions in the nation such as
the crown, the governor-generalship, the presidency,
the prime-ministership, party presidency, etc.? Is the
people's attitude toward persons holding political office
characterized by a widespread feeling of cynicism, un-
questioning worship, confidence, or something else?
b. TOWARD OTHER SOCIETIES ? What are the
basic attitudes toward peoples of other societies and
other cultures?curiosity, fear, friendliness, respect,
indifference, hostility? How are these attitudes fos-
tered? Do the people consider their way of life su-
perior to all others, or to certain others, and :if so, to
which others? Do they understand, like, or dislike,
Americans and American culture, and for what reason?
Other countries? Do any classes or segments in the
society identify themselves with foreign groups? In
general, what are their attitudes toward Soviet citizens,
nations, and culture or those of other Communist so-
cieties? What caricatures do they use, to designate
foreigners? (Cross-refer to SECTION 55.)
PAGE 8
JULY 1957
Is there a prevailing attitude in favor of cooperation
with other nations in the achieving of common goals
and, if so, among what segments of the society iS this
attitude most marked? How are these attitudes ex-
pressed? Cross-refer to CHAPTER V where appropriate.
e. TOWARD INTERNATIONAL CONFLICT ? What are
the marked attitudes toward war as an instrument of
foreign policy, toward military activities and traditions,
toward compulsory or volunteer military service, and
toward national defense (including civil defense)? Are
attitudes toward military service affected by the class
origins of the military leaders? Comment on the
morale of the civilian population during World War II
or more recent wartime conditions. Do veterans hold
a position of prestige in the society? Cross-refer to
SECTION 55 for attitudes on national policies.
3. SIGNIFICANT CUSTOMS
Describe briefly any unique or distinguishing customs
that have national significance, such as the tea cere-
mony of Japan, the autumn festival in China, or the
sauna (steam bath) of Finland. What social values
are demonstrated in these customs? Who participates
in them? Have these customs been modified by urbani-
zation, industrialization, ideologieal pressures, war or
other changes?
F. Artistic and intellectual expression
Describe briefly present and past trends in outstandL
ing intellectual, literary, artistic, religious, and other
forms of expression. Is each form of expression
founded on well-developed native traditions or bor-
rowed?
Indicate the degree of popular appreciation of or
participation in the various types of artistic expression,
including a brief discussion of popular or folk music,
folk art, and folk theater (e.g., traditional pageants,
pantomimes, etc.). What are the common attitudes
toward cultural achievements and what is the effect
of these achievements on national traditions? What
symbols are traditionally used in artistic media to
evoke behavior in the characteristic patterns described
in other parts of this Section and is this symbolism
static or in a state of Aux? What are the extent and
pace of present-day changes? Do artists and intel-
lectuals enjoy prestige in the society? To what extent
are artistic forms and "schools of thought" (philo-
sophical, scientific, literary, etc.) important as express-
ing or determining the national outlook? Identify
important individuals and evaluate their work in this
regard. For detailed information on current artistic
and intellectual leaders, cross-refer to SECTION 59
and/or the Key Personalities unit where appropriate.
Intellectual and artistic organizations should be dis-
cussed here, with references to Social Organizations
and Movements (above) for details.
.rrwamiatilmimwip.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAP TEI? IV
? G. Distinctive culture groups
Identify each of the nationally important, divergent
groups?racial, ethnic, or other?which has its own
cultural values and characteristics. Note whether the
group is numerically greater or smaller than the domi-
nant group. Analyze in terms of its power relation-
ships and status in the society. Describe the salient
features of the social organization, social values, atti-
tudes and customs, artistic and intellectual expression
of each, covering the details included under Subsec-
tions D, E, and F above.
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby in-
form the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 43. Religion Education, and Public Information
A. General
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach
to the material contained in the remainder of the Sec-
tion. It includes a brief statement of the role and rela-
tive importance of religious, educational, and informa-
tional institutions in shaping the life and outlook of the
people. Itis not a digest of what follows.
B. Religion
1. SIGNIFICANCE OF RELIGION IN THE
COUNTRY
a. RELIGION AND NATIONAL CULTURE - Note the
most important -religious faiths and their relative
significance. Describe the part religion plays in the
nation's culture and its effect on the value system.
Discuss the influence of religion on the social institu-
tions of the country. Estimate . the importance of
religion to the people as a whole and to various .socio-
economic groups. Indicate the features of religion
which are important in the daily life of the .people and
in their relations with other people. (Cross-refer to
SECTION 42.)
Estimate the influence of religious affinities and dif-
ferences on national unity and stability, including,
briefly, such historical background data as are necessary
to understand the present situation. Are there sym-
pathies or antipathies toward those of other sects or
faiths, or toward those of ito faith? Are there ties
with those of similar faith in other countries? Discuss
the relation of organized religion to the political
? objectives and procedures of the established regime.
.Are the prevailing beliefs compatible with or influenced
by either Communism or Western democracy. When
pertinent, discuss the activities and influence of foreign
missionary work (Christian and other) in the society,
noting the attitude of the government leaders and the
people toward these activities. Discuss any major
antireligiotis movements or organized persecution of
particular religious groups and note the nature of the
leadership in these activities. Do these leaders have
any significant foreign ties?
b. GOVERNMENT AND RELIGION - Indicate the
relationship between the government and organized
religion, including laws that pertain to the status and
activities of religious organizations, e.g., is there an
established church? Is religious liberty guaranteed
and if so, how (by constitution, law, international
treaty, etc.)? Note any divisions of the government
which have administrative or other responsibilities for
the activities of religious organizations, and for foreign
religious groups. Note the general reactions of religious
elements to them.
C. SIZE AND DISTRIBUTION OF RELIGIOUS MEMBER-
SHIP - Give the number, percentage, and distribution
of inhabitants adhering to the principal faiths. Include
important sects. Illustrate with a map if possible.
Indicate whether specific religious faiths are linked
with specific ethnic, linguistic, or racial groups.
2. PRINCIPAL FAITHS
a. [DEsioNATios] ? For each of the principal
faiths (for example, a. Roman Catholicism, b. Islam,
etc.) discuss the following topics:
(1) Organization,? Give a brief account of the
organizational structure of each major group, including
the relationship of all its recognized religious and lay
organizations, and the degree of responsibility assumed
by the parent body over their activities. Describe
any organizational ties with groups outside of the
country, e.g., with the Vatican or the World Council
of Churches.
(2) Activities and .facilities ? Present briefly the
nature and extent of activities carried on by each re-
ligious group. If possible, state the objectives of these
activities. Note briefly the attitudes of the society
toward these activities. Comment briefly on the types
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PA dt 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
moimmummumummi NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
of facilities available for worship and other activities
such as the church buildings, wayside shrines and other
places of worship; schools and other plants and their
equipment; real estate and other material interests;
the finances of each religious group. Are these activi-
ties and facilities tax-supported and/or tax free?
(3) Leadership ?Discuss the spiritual and lay
leadership, including educational qualifications and role
in the religious life of the community, position of re-
ligious leadership in the society, and relationship with
leaders of other, religious groups. Include in the dis-
cussion of each a statement on the role of women.
Discuss also the extent of control exerted by the church
organization over its leaders and their nationally sig-
nificant attitudes or opinions on secular affairs. Coor-
dinate with SECTION 59 or Key Personalities unit.
(4) Tenets and practices ? For each of the prin-
cipal religious groups describe the traditional tenets
and practices which have special importance for the
society. To what extent is there controversy over
religious doctrines and what are the major points at
issue? Do deviations in the faith result in antagonism,
and, if so, what is their significance? Indicate the
extent to which formal church adherence and partici-
pation in other religious activities reflect religious
faith.
(5) Official attitudes -- Discuss significant offi-
cial positions taken by the various religious organiza-
tions on secular matters in general and toward specific
national and international political, social, and eco-
nomic problems. Note the influence such actions have
on national life.
C. Education
1. EDUCATION IN THE NATIONAL LIFE
a. EDUCATION AND NATIONAL CULTURE -- Discuss
the concepts and existing aspirations of the people in
regard to education, noting the general character of
available education, its thoroughness and effectiveness.
Provide a concise introduction to this Subsection by
describing those forces that left a lasting impression
on the educational system, such as government policy,
religious interests, or foreign influences. Indicate the
relative strength and the distinctive purpose and
characteristics of public and private education. Discuss
the extent to which the various segments of the society,
such as industry, philanthropic foundations, wealthy
individuals, etc., support education, noting the trends
and objectives of this support. Point up the role of the
educational system in social, political, and economic
life. Discuss such problems as its adequacy in meeting
the demands of national life, its impact on social
mobility, and its effectiveness in molding attitudes of
influential groups. Estimate the relative extent and
effectiveness of ideological indoctrination by the educa-
tional system (where indicated). Describe in general
terms its relation to informal educational influences
PAGE 10
JULY 1957
in the society (such as family, youth programs, military
training, or information media).
b. LEVEL OF LITERACY AND EDUCATIONAL ACHIEVE-
MENT ? Discuss the level of literacy and educational
achievement in the society as a whole, and with
reference to socio-economic classes and to women.
Discuss the size of enrollment at each educational level
and note the extent of educational opportunities in
relation to the extent of the school age population.
Note trends of educational development, including a
projection of the school population. Explain the extent
and effectiveness of efforts to reduce illiteracy and to
broaden educational opportunity, leaving the details
of an adult education program for discussion under
Educational System and under General Content of
Instruction, below.
2. THE GOVERNMENT AND EDUCATION
Where education is considered an appropriate func-
tion of government discuss the extent to which educa-
tion is the responsibility of central provincial and/or
local government. Comment on the nature, extent,
and purpose of government control over and aid to
public and private education, including such devices as
educational requirements for employment, provision
of educational grants, examinations for government
certification, etc. If there are any devices for controlling
the political loyalty of faculty and students these
should be noted. Are the political purposes of the
regime in power emphasized through public education?
The relation of laws and administrative action in con-
trol over education should be noted. Discuss also the
extent arid nature of public influence over educational
policy at all levels.
a. LEGAL FRAMEWORK ? Note the constitutional
and legal provisions affecting education and the effec-
tiveness of their enforcement, including such factors as
guarantees of academic freedom, free and compulsory
education; language of instruction; control over text
books and content of teaching; and provisions con-
cerning religious education.
b. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION OF EDUCATION ? De-
scribe the position of public education in the govern-
mental structure, illustrating where practical with an
organizational chart (coordinate with SECTION 52).
Note the relation of the central government's division
of education with other levels of governmental respon-
sibility for education.
C. FINANCIAL SUPPORT AND FACILITIES -- Note the
nature, source, and extent of financial support and
expenditure and the adequacy of educational facilities
and equipment in relation to the size and distribution
of enrollment at each educational level.
d. FOREIGN EDUCATIONAL PROGRAMS -- Describe
the government's policy concerning participation in
the exchange of students, professors, and other edu-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAP TER JV
cational personnel with foreign countries. Is the
government a recipient of foreign aid or does it con-
tribute to foreign educational programs? If so, de-
scribe the nature, extent and mechanisms of this educa-
tional activity, noting the other countries participating,
with the extent of exchange with each. If the United
States is a participant, note the amount of U.S. funds
invested in the program over a series of years and the
educational emphases. Note also the nature and ex-
tent of nongovernmental and educational aid to and/or
from abroad, as, for example, exchanges between uni-
versities, foundation aids, etc. Discuss their contri-
bution to the knowledge, educational program, and
attitudes of the people and their leaders. It is sug-
gested that the broad significance of the foreign educa-
tional activities in which the country participates be
discussed here, with reference to specific developments,
past and present, such as the Boxer Indemnity or the
Fulbright programs.
3. EDUCATIONAL SYSTEM
Describe, briefly, the general organization of educa-
tion, both public and private, from elementary schools
through universities, including provisions for adult
education, vocational and industrial training, and
graduate education. What is the role of research
institutions? Point out any notable inadequacies of
the educational system. Illustrate with charts showing
types of education provided at various age levels and
the number of students and teachers for each grade.
4. GENERAL CONTENT OF INSTRUCTION
Discuss the content of formal education at various
levels, its major emphases with past and present trends
(e.g., acquisition of formal knowledge or technical and
practical knowledge), and its effect.
a. GENERAL EDUCATION ? Describe the significant
content of education in the general schools at primary
and secondary levels, including the nature and extent
of preprimary training where pertinent. Discuss the
general methods and objectives of instruction and its
effectiveness. Note where available the percentage of
entrants who complete the course and the percentage
of graduates advancing to higher levels.
b. VOCATIONAL AND TECHNICAL TRAINING ? De-
scribe the apprenticeship system and vocational school-
ing to the extent that they are within the framework of
the educational system, and in particular cover methods
and conditions of instruction. Supply pertinent sta-
tistics, and evaluate technical and general effectiveness
of the system.
C. HIGHER EDUCATION ? Discuss the content of
higher learning, noting the methods and intellectual
level, orientation and degree of isolation from or
accessibility to world developments in scholarship,
degree of general training, role of faculties and students
in national life, and role of research in the educational
process. Discuss the nature of professional training
available and the quality of its discipline, noting the
requirements for legal recognition and practice in a
profession, if any, and the types of internship or
apprenticeship involved. Note the relation between
the professions and this training. Note the relative
prestige of various types of careers as factors in shaping
the development of education.
d. ADULT EDUCATION ? Discuss adult education
in the fields of both specific training and general educa-
tion, whether conducted within the educational system
or by private organizations, such as churches and labor
unions. In particular, describe participation, level of
instruction, credits, etc. Evaluate adult education in
relation to the regular educational system and the
general educational level.
5. NONCURRICULAR STUDENT ACTIVITIES
Discuss the extent to which the school authorities at
the primary, secondary, and university levels encourage
noncurricular activities by providing facilities, pro-
fessional guidance, and controls. Note the agencies
other than schools which provide trained personnel or
other assistance to the schools for specialized non-
curricular activities for students at different levels.
How well developed and important, for example, are
student publications and associations? Are there
student political, civil defense, military, or other
significant activities? Note the extent to which student
activities have social and political significance beyond
the school groups. To what extent have the student
activities been influenced by subversive elements? In
discussing student organizations of national importance
cross-refer to SECTION 42 for their relation to youth
movements; to CHAPTER V, SECTION 53, Political
Dynamics, and SECTION 57, Subversive; and to CHAP-
TER VIII, for military activities, as appropriate. Where
groups are essentially pressure groups or subversive in
nature they should be mentioned but detailed discus-
sion should be reserved for other appropriate Sections.
Are student activities of an international character
encouraged by educators? For example, foreign lan-
guage clubs, organized student vacation visits to
foreign countries and organized entertainment of
foreign students, fraternal association with or support
of foreign "sister institutions," etc., should be discussed,
noting specific programs, the countries preferred in
such activities, and the extent and nature of govern-
mental assistance provided for such noncurricular
activities. Note especially student activities in relation
to the United States and the 'U.S.S.R.
Is student leadership in noncurricular activities
democratically chosen or predominantly determined
by the student's social or political status or by the
school authorities? Is there any fraternal association
among student groups or leaders from different schools
(e.g., student editors, inter-collegiate sports, etc.), and,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE ii
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
4milumeno NIS STANDARD 'INSTRUCTIONS
if so, by whom is it fostered? Is there national interest
in any type of student association and in student lead-
ers? Is student participation in noneurricular activi-
ties a factor in later career development? Are alumni
groups well organized and do alumni ties have social
or political significance?
6. EDUCATORS
Discuss the level of competence of those responsible
for the administration and teaching at the various
levels of education, in both public and private schools.
Include not only the school administrators and teachers
but also national, provincial, and local officials charged
with the administration of education and the members
of boards of education or other policy groups.
Give the number of teachers in relation to the stu-
dent body, their general socio-economic level and other
background factors, their educational level, how they
are selected. How do their rates of pay compare with
those of other professional groups? Discuss their
prestige in the community; the degree to which they
support the regime in power; the habitual means for
acquiring information; awareness, interest, and level
of understanding of national and international prob-
lems; and prevailing attitudes toward the United States
and the U.S.S.R. Note any marked predispositions
and attitudes as a group. To what extent are teaching
appointments politically determined? Do teachers
have permanent job tenure and pension provisions?
Assess their role as molders of opinion within and with-
out the schools. What contribution do they make--
and how?to industry, labor, and government, and to
the formulation of national policy? Is there a marked
difference between characteristics of the teaching force
in rural and urban areas; in different sections of the
country; in different types of schools? Note the num-
ber of women teachers at each level and any special
limitations in their appointment, training, advance-
ment,, or pay.
Discuss the adequacy of teachers at various levels
in relation to the prevailing concepts of pedagogy.
What special qualities are considered essential to a
good teacher and what provisions are made to incul-
cate these qualities? How large a proportion of the
teachers have training and/or experience abroad?
Does the educational system utilize this foreign experi-
ence and does it provide additional prestige and ad-
vancement for the teachers? To what type of foreign
training is greatest prestige attached?
Important teachers' associations or organized groups
should be identified with a description of each major
organization, including its size, geographic distribution,
level of teaching of its members, and other character-
istics of membership, objectives, finances, program
activities, influence over members, national meetings
or conventions, vulnerability to subversion, and char-
acter of leaders. Are these activities used by the
regime or its unofficial agencies for propaganda pur-
PAGE 12
JULY 1957
poses? If so, cross-refer to SECTION 58. Insofar as
they serve as a pressure group, cross-refer to SECTION
53. Note the group's international ties, if any. In
sonic cases tabular presentation of these data may be
desirable.
D. Public information
This Subsection is designed to provide overall
presentation of the level of development of public
information. CHAPTER V, SECTION 58, Propaganda,
presents an integrated analysis of governmental and
nongovernmental action designed to influence behavior
and collective attitudes in support of national policies.
1. COMMUNICATIONS DEVELOPMENT, USE,
AND CONTROL
Describe briefly the level of development of mass
communication of ideas and information. Note the
principal and most popular media of communication
used, noting the extent and characteristics of their use.
What is the relative importance of other media, and the
chief purposes for which they are characteristically
used? For example, to what extent are word-of-
mouth (e.g. rumor, cafe talk, grapevine) and non-
written signals (e.g. drums) used? What are the main
media used for dissemination of news and information
and transmission of messages? How extensively are
postal, telegraph, and telephone systems used? Are
they adequate? How are records kept and information
stored (e.g. archives, legends, etc.)? Are movies, radio,
arid television well-developed means of communication?
Do the uses of different forms of communication
differ among social strata? What are the main barriers
to different types of communication within and be-
tween groups? Is any social significance attached to
different forms of communication? Note briefly the
medium in which people tend to place the most trust
and why. To what extent, and how, does government
use the various media of communication? ?
Is freedom of speech and of the press guaranteed
(see SECTION 51, Subsection D)? Discuss the degree of
responsibility assumed by the government in this field,
noting specific laws and/or administrative machinery
designed to control communication and all types of
public information and to protect guarantees of free-
dom. Note the extent of government financial support
of the various media. Note the overall extent of govern-
ment or other forms of censorship, control, or influence
over media including significant subversive or foreign
influence.
Note the nature and scope of important professional
groups in the communications field, such as editors,
publishers, writers, and producers. Give, in tabular
form, where suitable, location, size, character and
qualifications of members, aims and objectives of
leadership, amount of influence exerted, and orienta-
tion toward the United States and the U.S.S.R.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
WiiiMPPRIPAR
CHAPTER IV
JULY 1957
2. PRESS AND PERIODICALS
Under this subheading should be noted the level of
development of the industry as a whole, the nature
and extent of the audiences reached, languages used,
the nature and source of content, the nature and in-
fluence of ownership and control in the industry,
including interlocking interests; sources of news; rela-
tive influence on public opinion; and the general char-
acteristics of the system of distribution. Note the
extent of use of foreign publications, those that are
most popular, the language in which written, the source
of origin, and agencies of distribution.
a. IMPORTANT INDIVIDUAL NEWSPAPERS ? Describe
important individual newspapers, using the tabular
form if suitable, and covering the following points:
name, location, language, frequency of publication,
circulation, audience reached, source of revenue, owner-
ship and control, political leanings, editorial policy
including general policy toward the United States and
the U.S.S.R., key editorial personalities, relative influ-
ence, physical plant, and estimates of the amount of
space given to national and international news and
other subjects.
b. PRESS SERVICES -- Describe the important do-
mestic and foreign press services available, including
U.S. agencies. Indicate the extent to which each
service is used; the type of news for which each is relied
upon; the accuracy and reputation of the service
(domestic only); the extent of coverage provided; and
any outstanding editorial personalities.
c. PERIODICALS ? Describe and analyze generally
along the same lines as noted for newspapers above.
3. BOOK PUBLISHING
Describe and analyze the overall book publishing
industry in terms of total size of press runs and sales,
location, physical facilities, quality and type of output,
price structure, languages used, exports, markets
reached, ownership and control, political leanings, sub-
sidization, censorship, and influence.
a. PUBLISHING HOUSES ? Identify and describe
the principal book publishing companies, covering the
following points: name and location, ownership and
control, physical facilities, press runs and sales, and
significance. Use tabular form where suitable.
b. DISTRIBUTION ? Describe the distribution sys-
tem, giving the number and location of major whole-
salers or regional distribution points and retailers, and
include some information on the system with regard to
ownership and control, size of various establishments,
and evaluation of the medium.
C. FOREIGN PUBLICATIONS ? C01111-11ent on the ex-
tent of importation of foreign books, the type most
widely circulated, and special government regulations
concerning their importation and distribution.
4. LIBRARIES
Describe the system and general types of libraries,
covering: size and popularity, control, location, method
of operation, character of stock, and groups reached.
5. MOTION PICTURES
Briefly describe the industry and medium as a whole
covering such points as: audiences reached, languages
used, popularity of various types of films, both do-
mestic and foreign, and the audiences they most
appeal to; imports as compared with domestic produc-
tion; sources of foreign films; places and hours of show-
ing; extent of government censorship and control;
leading personalities; and general effectiveness as a
medium.
a. DOMESTIC PRODUCTION ---- D es crib e domestic
production facilities covering: number of companies
and location; volume and type of films produced; owner-
ship and control; sources of financing; physical plant
and facilities; sources of equipment; technical quality;
artistic quality; political orientation; and leading
actors, directors, and producers involved. Note foreign
investment, foreign technical assistance, and foreign
talent used in domestic production.
b. DISTRIBUTION ? Describe the distribution sys-
tem and the methods of exhibition, giving the number,
location, and capacity of theaters, and analyzing owner-
ship and control, technical equipment (size of pro-
jectors, screens, etc.) frequency of showings, and
prices.
C. FOREIGN FILMS ? Discuss the distribution of
foreign films including: the volume used (analyzed by
country of source), the channels of importation, the
major agencies of distribution, and government or
other controls. Note the relative screen time afforded
U.S. and non--U.S. films and estimate the long-term
effect of U.S. pictures on public attitudes and opinions.
6. RADIO AND TELEVISION
The physical plants, equipment, and technical
quality of radio and television stations are discussed
in some detail in CHAPTER III, SECTION 38. Describe
here each overall medium, giving the number of broad-
casting networks and stations and their location with
relation to the potential audience and covering the
following: Languages used, general characteristics
of ownership and control, source of financing, source
of news, number of receivers by wave bands and
distribution, general characteristics and economic
status of listeners, estimated total size of audiences,
type of programs most popular, most favored listen-
ing hours, vulnerability of media to use for subersive
propaganda (cross-reference to SECTION 57), political
leanings, important personalities, and relative influ-
ence and effectiveness of medium. Also describe any
PAGE 13
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
important managerial or professional groups and
organizations connected with the media.
Important individual networks and stations should
be described also with coverage of the following: name,
call letters, wave lengths, frequencies, power, and loca-
tion; ownership and control, source of revenue, program
schedules, types of programs with an indication of their
degree and source of popularity, languages used, hours
of broadcasting, political leanings, program personali-
ties, and relative popularity and influence. Note
which networks and stations are foreign-sponsored and
list the foreign elements involved.
7. OTHER MEANS OF COMMUNICATION
Discuss other mass media of communications such
as public address systems, posters, pamphlets, leaflets,
wall newspapers, mobile theaters, balloons, etc., using
in general the criteria listed in the Subsections above.
Include also, where pertinent, information and anal-
ysis of word-of-mouth, person-to-person communica-
tion (rumors, whispering campaigns, public meetings,
cafe talk, etc.), and indicate (if not already covered in
A. General above) to what extent informal word-of-
mouth communication supplements or contradicts the
regular mass media.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
FIGURE 43-1. PRINCIPAL MEDIA OF (COUNTRY), (DATE)
NAME, PLACE, AND
FREQ UENCY OF
PRODUCTION
LANGUAGE (S)
US E D
CIRCULA-
TION OR
AUDIENCE
KEY PRODUCTION
PERSONNEL
GOVERNMENT OR PRI-
VATE OWNERSHIP
COMMENTS
Section 44. Manpower
A. General
The purpose of this Subsection is to provide an ap-
propriate approach to a full consideration of the prob-
lem of manpower and its capabilities. It is not a
digest of what follows in the remainder of the Section.
How have the basic characteristics of the society
affected manpower utilization? Has it developed a
scientific maturity in the utilization of manpower and
the exploitation of its natural resources? What is the
dominant economic activity? Has the society a primi-
tive or mature economy? Is the society rigidly organ-
ized along economic lines or is there a fluid situation?
Analyze briefly the extent of opportunities for eco-
nomic advancement, utilization of specialized skills
and training, attitudes toward work (especially toward
manual work), the role of the individual in choosing
PAGE 14
his occupation, and the extent to which these factors
influence national attitudes or social unrest.
Describe briefly the extent and nature of the organi-
zation of major business, financial, industrial, and other
management groups and of the cooperative and labor
organizations, indicating the status and prestige of
such groups in the society. Do they work together
harmoniously or do they clash? Does this affect the
national strength and stability? Has the society had
experience in centralized governmental control of its
manpower resources in the past, and what is the situa-
tion today? What in general, is government policy
toward labor and labor-management relations? To
what extent is forced or slave labor utilized and what
is its significance to the economy?
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAP TER IV 4mmilliminumeri
B. Manpower resources
1. TOTAL MANPOWER RESOURCES
Describe briefly the total manpower resources of the
country, including not only the labor force (those cur-
rently engaged in economic activity including workers
who are unemployed, the armed forces, and other
governmental personnel) but also the labor reserve
(those able to work in time of crisis but not now in the
labor force). Of the total manpower resources, what
percentage is in the labor force? Note the size of
the labor force, indicating the number and/or percent-
age under 15 years of age, between 15 and 64, and over
65. Discuss also the size of the labor reserve. Note
the relationship to the nation's manpower of the balance
of the population (the residual population) who are
unemployable, as well as of the labor reserve. Esti-
mate the percentage of the total manpower resources
trained and/or experienced in the techniques of modern
industrialized production and services and of primitive
subsistence economy.
2. LABOR FORCE
What percent of the working-age group in the popu-
lation (conventionally defined as those aged 15 to 64
inclusive) are in the labor force? Comment in regard
to the age-sex distribution. Illustrate, if possible, by
a labor force pyramid superimposed on the population
pyramid (see SECTION 41). Note any significant
deviations from the overall pattern of economic par-
ticipation on the part of racial or ethnic minorities.
Show the trends and prospects for a change in the
size of the labor force (by sex), indicating how the size
of the labor force is affected by such factors as seasonal
changes, business and other:conditions calling for
partial or full mobilization, and social, technological,
and structural changes. Note the significant changes
in definitions and enumerative procedures which may
be reflected in the statistics presented.
a. COMPOSITION AND DISTRIBUTION - Analyze the
characteristics of the labor force, pointing out trends
and factors of special importance to the develop-
ment of a modern industrialized economy such as the
general level of aptitudes and educational background
needed. Insofar as possible, compare with neighboring
or rival countries. Also show significant trends as
indicators of the various types of labor mobility (indus-
trial, occupational, status, and territorial). If appro-
priate, note the occupational specialization of minority
groups.
Show the industrial composition of the labor force
in tabular form, by sex if possible, commenting on the
significance of numbers engaged in the major sectors
of the economy: 1) agriculture, forestry and fishing;
2) mining, construction, manufacturing, and utilities;
and 3) the supply and service industries. Discuss the
role of mechanization and other factors necessary to
an understanding of labor-force trends in the principal
industries of the country.
(1) Types of occupation -- For many countries,
the census data will show the distribution of the labor
force members not only by industries in which they are
engaged but also by occupational groups, i.e., the types
of work they do. Both types of information are de-
sired, with an appraisal of the extent to which certain
occupational groupings are concentrated in specific
industry groups. The data for each occupational group
in the table should show number of males and females,
and percentage of total labor force. Also analyze the
labor force as to the proportion of managerial, technical,
skilled, and unskilled workers, if possible with a break-
down for age and sex. Comment on the manner and
extent to which the mechanization of industries has
affected occupations, and on the established profes-
sions. (Cross-refer to SECTIONS 42 and 43 where perti-
nent.)
(2) Occupational status ? Analyze the distribu-
tion of the labor force in the following groups: 1) em-
ployers and the self-employed; 2) unpaid family
workers; 3) salaried employees; and 4) wage earners.
Analyze by industry groups with age-sex breakdown
where feasible. Note the extent of employment of
women, children under 15, and persons over 65. Note
the extent of family industries and the size of the
entrepreneurial class in relation to wage and salary
workers. Where possible, give data indicating the
trend in the movement of workers from one status to
another.
(3) Geographic distribution Indicate the sig-
nificant aspects of geographic distribution of the
workers, especially as to concentrations of types of
workers and skills in specific localities. If possible,
illustrate with a map showing the locations of major
types of industries including agriculture and the
approximate number of workers employed, indicating
whether these areas offer a variety of occupations (for
men; for women). Are there areas in which there is a
high degree of competition for certain types of skills or
for unskilled labor? Comment on the territorial
mobility of workers, distinguishing long-term tendencies
(cross-refer to SECTION 41 for immigration and emigra-
tion and internal migration) and short-term aspects
(such as commuting, seasonal migrations, or employ-
ment in neighboring countries).
(4) Unemployment and underemployment -- Note
the number and proportion of the unemployed in the
labor force, if possible by regional sectors of the econ-
omy. These would include migrants, refugees, dis-
placed persons, workers laid off through cutbacks,
those in process of changing jobs, unpaid helpers
(usually family dependents), and victims of misfortune
(on relief). Note the extent of underemployment by
industry. Note the -percentage of the personnel in
these categories available and qualified -for work.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 15
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
simimemmism NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
b. GOVERNMENTAL SERVICES PERSONNEL ? The
purpose of this topic is to appraise the importance of
governmental personnel in relation to the total labor
force. For some countries it will be useful to distin-
guish the public and private segments of the labor force,
with a breakdown of the public segment into such
categories as: armed forces, police and other para-
military services, administrative services, and other
public services and industries (such as teaching, com-
munications, mining, construction, manufacturing,
commerce, transport, etc.).
(1) Armed forces in relation to the civilian labor
force?What percentage of the population is in the
armed forces? Are there women in the armed forces
and for what type of work are they recruited? Do the
armed forces provide training in skills which are trans-
ferable to the civilian economy? Show the manpower
used in the armed forces, if possible, by means of an
age-sex pyramid superimposed on the total labor force
pyramid. Indicate what percentage of the population
is enrolled in the military reserve forces and would not
therefore be available to the civilian economy in case
of total mobilization. Indicate also, if possible, the
percentage of the civilian labor force which is composed
of veterans of the armed forces and the percentage of
these veterans which is enrolled in the military reserve
forces. How large a civilian force is employed by the
government to service the military and in what types
of work is it utilized? (Coordinate with CHAPTER
VIII.)
(2) Police and other governmental personnel? In
some countries the support of governmental personnel
(including police) imposes a substantial burden on the
public. Is there a large police, fire-fighting, protective,
custodial, and industrial force maintained by the gov-
ernment? (Coordinate with SECTION 54.) If so, indi-
cate the size of this group and the percentage of the
total labor force it constitutes.
C. EXTENT OF FORCED LABOR ? In those areas
where forced labor exists, present a quantitative anal-
ysis of the forced and/or convict labor population,
noting geographic distributions where possible. Re-
serve detailed discussion of forced labor for Subsection
C, 3 below.
3. LABOR RESERVE
Discuss briefly the characteristics and activities of
the labor reserve, pointing out skills and experience
which would be available in time of emergency. Note
the customs of the society which would condition the
full utilization of this potential; i.e., to what extent
and how are women educated and employed? Is there
a marked difference between men and women in the
training and experience they receive? What is the
attitude and practice of the society in regard to the
employment of children? Are there religious or social
taboos concerning types of employment for special
PAGE 16
classes or groups in the population? Of the reserve,
how many, or what percentage, are now in technical
schools, colleges, or universities? Is the practice of
unpaid apprenticeship widespread? Comment on the
practices and policies concerning the utilization of
those over 65 years of age.
C. Labor legislation and agencies of govern-
ment
1. BASIC LABOR LEGISLATION
Discuss briefly the nature and scope of basic labor
legislation (with dates), such as the following: the
legal right to organize, strike, and bargain collectively;
wages, hours, and conditions of employment; the em-
ployment of women and children; the employment of
veterans; social insurance (cross-refer to SECTIONS 46
and 52). To what extent is labor legislation a political
issue? Comment briefly on the relation of existing
labor legislation to the actual conditions and demands
of labor.
2. MANPOWER PLANNING
Is there government policy-planning, guidance or
control (budgeting, etc.) of manpower utilization; of
turnover; of transfer between industries, etc.? Are
regulations enforced? Are there government manpower
controls over all labor or over important segments such
as those with scarce skills; or is there an entirely free
competitive labor market? Were there wartime man-
power controls? If so, comment on the organization of
manpower resources and the degree of public support.
How and to what extent do management and labor
participate in the formulation of government policy
and practices on employment?
3. FORCED LABOR
In those areas where it is the policy of the govern-
ment to use slave or forced labor, state the significance
of this source of manpower to the economy and its
potentials in case of war. Note the industries and
occupations most affected by the use of this type of
labor. (Reserve for SECTION 54 the discussion of
convict or forced labor under the penal system.) If
forced labor exists outside the penal system, discuss
work and living conditions. What are public attitudes
toward forced labor and what is the attitude of
organized labor?
4. LABOR AGENCIES OF GOVERNMENT
Comment briefly on the agencies of government de-
signed to work on problems of labor. (Cross-refer to
SECTION 52.) How do these agencies serve the interests
of labor and management? How effectively do they
protect the foreign employers (especially U.S. business)
and foreign workers? In this connection, a chart show-
ing the structure of the ministry or department of labor
and its enforcement agencies is desirable.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER IV
Where suitable, also present the government ma-
chinery for the consideration of labor disputes such as
the labor courts and arbitration boards. (Cross-refer
to SECTION 52.)
D. Standards and practices of employment
1. UTILIZATION OF TIIE LABOR SUPPLY
Is there any centralized planning on the utilization
of the labor supply on the part of government, manage-
ment, or labor? Describe the overall pattern of prac-
tices and attitudes of workers and employers in regard
to the method and degree of employment.
a. UTILIZATION OF CAPABILITIES ? IS the labor
supply utilized to its fullest capacity? Are there im-
pediments to the ?free exercise of a worker's ability to
secure suitable employment such as social distinctions
based, for example, on class, family, race, or religion?
Can the worker become a manager or employer? State
whether any trades or other occupations are the special
province of any particular religious, ethnic, or other
groups. If so, indicate any institutional or other
handicaps to efficient development of the manpower
potential.
Discuss the training made available by management,
unions, and government for the worker's fuller develop-
ment of his capacities, including apprenticeship train-
ing, on-the-job training, union training, and vocational
training available in the schools and in adult education
programs, noting the nature and extent of these pro-
grams and the worker's utilization of them. (Cross-
refer to SECTION 43.) Is the economy sufficiently fluid
for the worker to move upward as he develops his
skills through training and experience?
b. PRODUCTIVITY ? Discuss the productivity of
labor in agriculture, industry, and other important
occupations, with special reference to human and
technological factors affecting output, e.g., ability and
willingness of labor to learn new techniques and adjust
to the demands of the work situation, quota system,
interchangeability of manual labor, managerial ability,
government and union restrictions, and incentives such
as high pay, job security, status factors, and other
benefits. How much do turnover, absenteeism, work
slowdowns, and other forms of worker resistance affect
production? Are they an indication of social unrest?
C. MOBILITY OF LABOR AND HIRING PRACTICES ?
Discuss methods of recruiting, systems of apprentice-
ship, labor contracts, conscription, etc. Can labor
move freely between geographic locations, from occupa-
tion to occupation, and from industry to industry?
How much and what kind of labor mobility is there;
e.g., primarily seasonal, or sporadic? Have well-
defined trends developed? Has this movement of labor
resulted in a condition of instability or growth?
d. UNEMPLOYMENT AND UNDEREMPLOYMENT --
What are the causes of unemployment and underem-
ployment and what industries and occupations are most
affected? Identify that part of the labor force which
has the largest number available but not actively em-
ployed. Discuss technological unemployment. Do
technically trained or educated personnel experience
difficulty in securing employment because of the system
of recruitment such as the appointment of family con-
nections, political preference or preference for heads of
families? Discuss the special problems of youth in
competition with older workers; women; and racial or
other minority problems of employment. Discuss the
unemployed and underemployed from the standpoint
of sources of economic and social unrest. What is the
attitude of these groups toward the economic system
of which they are a part? Do they have assistance,
public or private? (Cross-refer to SECTION 46.) Does
their economic status create an element of instability
for the society as a whole?
Discuss underemployment and the industries in
which this is most prevalent. What are its causes?
To what extent and in what types of work are partially
disabled workers and convicts and prisoners employed?
2. INCOME
Describe methods of wage determination. Indicate
briefly trends of wage rates and real earnings and the
effects of these on government wage-price policy.
Where possible, show the range of wage rates paid
skilled, semiskilled, and unskilled labor, and of salaries
paid white-collar and professional workers. Specify
wage rates for both men and women; include also be-
ginners' pay and that for apprentices and young work-
ers. Indicate "low-wage" and "high-wage" industries
and trends in the wage gap between them. In those
economies where compensation is paid wholly or partly
in kind, indicate nature of payment. What additions
to real income are derived from such items as social
services and family allowances, housing and purchasing
discounts, old age pensions, sickness insurance, etc.?
What is the attitude of workers toward the wage scale?
3. WORKING CONDITIONS
Indicate briefly the character of working conditions
in general and in important industries. To what
extent are working conditions controlled by the gov-
ernment? Is there a highly developed understanding
of industrial hygiene and occupational hazards and
are the workers insured against disaster? Are special-
ized clothing and safety devices required? If -possible,
include pictures of typical working conditions in major
industries. To what extent are housing, stores, and
other community facilities and services provided or
controlled by management? Are the working condi-
tions and fringe benefits or lack of them a source of
employee discontent?
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 17
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
E. Management
1. CHARACTERISTICS OF MANAGEMENT
PERSONNEL
Evaluate owners and managers in business, industry,
and agriculture as a group. Does absentee ownership
create any manpower problems? Is corporate owner-
ship a characteristic of the economy? Is there a large
class of salaried top and middle management employed
by private industry and government? To what extent
are they trained in the methods of scientific manage-
ment? Discuss, for the several levels of management,
educational practices and information facilities, inter-
national ties and exchanges, especially with the United
States and the U.S.S.R. In addition to an overall
appraisal and description of the entrepreneurial and
management groups, such questions as the following
should be noted: the part management plays in na-
tional life; regard for the public interest as opposed to
personal interest; and predispositions and attitudes
toward the role of government and toward national
policies.
Include a brief description and analysis of U.S. and
other foreign industrial management activities in the
country in regard to information and training pro-
grams and, when significant, what the attitudes of the
people are toward such activities. (Coordinate with
SECTIONS 43, C and 58, D and cross-refer to avoid
extensive duplication.)
2. ORGANIZATION OF MANAGEMENT PER-
SONNEL
To what extent are employers and managers organ-
ized? List the major organizations with their constit-
uent members, giving the basis of the organization
and their separate and total membership. State the
objectives and structure of each organization and de-
scribe the way in which they operate. If any function
as pressure groups, coordinate with SECTION 53. Note
also professional and technical associations and analyze
the part they play in raising the standards of manage-
ment. Note the part they have played in the develop-
ment of national economic and political policies.
3. MANAGEMENT LEADERSHIP
Indicate the character and quality of the leaders of
business and industry as a group. What is their level
of education and ability? Comment on their standards
and practices from the standpoint of the effective
utilization of labor and of the welfare of the whole
society. (Correlate with SECTION 59 and/or the Key
Personalities unit.) Is there a close tie between mili-
tary, government, and industrial leadership? Note
the international ties of management and the part they
play in public policy.
PAGE 18
F. Labor
JULY 1957
Describe the prevailing patterns of work, exclusive
of management and the armed services, indicating
whether these are in process of change and, if so, what
forces are precipitating such change. Is the work
which is necessary for the maintenance of the economy
done largely by a labor force highly specialized and
highly organized in unions, or by people working in
traditional family, clan, or caste patterns of associa-
tion? Are there any pronounced patterns of work
related to ethnic or political factors in the community
(e.g., as a result of colonialism)? If the economy is in
process of change from nonindustrialized agriculture,
crafts, or herding to modern industry, including mass
production, note the occupation(s), geographic areas,
and segments of the population most affected by the
change. What percentage of the civilian labor force
is working in occupations which are frequently union-
ized in industrial societies? Compare this number
with the actual extent of unionization.
1. ORGANIZATION OF LABOR
List the national federations of labor organizations,
each with its major constituents, showing the basis of
their organization (whether industry or occupation)
and their separate and total membership. Describe
briefly the characteristic structure, tactics, aims,
financial support, and major objectives of labor unions.
Do the unions have any international affiliations?
2. POLICIES
Note, where pertinent, the policies of labor unions
in regard to such questions as:
The wage-price policy of the government
Efforts to increase productivity
Vocational training
The relocation of industry and land redistribution
The use of foreign labor
Foreign enterprise
National defense
3. POLITICAL TIES
Indicate briefly the political affiliations of organized
labor and the political role it plays. To what extent
and how does labor participate in the formulation of
national political and economic policies? Note the
reactions of various elements in the society to this
relationship. Has the government or any nonlabor
group established or sponsored any labor organizations?
If so, why? Note reaction of labor. Correlate this dis-
cussion of the political ties of labor with CHAPTER V,
particularly SECTIONS 53 and 55, to avoid extensive
duplication.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 C'HAPTER IV
4. LEADERSHIP
Are labor leaders well established and highly repre-
sentative of industrial and agricultural workers? Is the
labor movement an indigenous development or in-
spired and/or organized by outside interests? Comment
on the caliber of its leaders and their training for
leadership. What degree of control can or do the
leaders exercise over the rank-and-file? To what extent
does the opinion of the rank-and-file influence the
leaders? What is the attitude of organized labor and
labor leaders toward nonsupport and nonconformity
with union policies within the country? What is the
attitude of the public press and important elements of
the population toward them? Note the international
affiliations of the union leadership and the part they
play in public policy. Comment on specific leaders in
the labor movements. (Correlate with SECTION 59
and/or the Key Personalities unit.)
G. Labor-management relations
1. LABOR PROBLEMS
What is the customary relation between employer
and employee? Is large-scale employment a charac-
teristic of the country's economy or is it a characteristic
of only a special type of work or region? To what
extent do labor-management relations involve foreign
employers and/or foreign workers and what special
significance does this have in interesting the govern-
ment in the problems of labor?
A. General
What are the specific sources of friction? What are
the causes of the problems requiring solution? What
are the prevailing methods for settling these disputes?
2. COLLECTIVE BARGAINING
Indicate the extent and character of collective bar-
gaining, the number and duration of strikes and lock-
outs, and the methods of dealing with industrial dis-
putes. Does the government play an important part
in this field? If so, how? Are there significant de-
velopments in organization for the settlement of indus-
trial disputes, as, for example, industrial councils and
boards, workshop organization and labor courts?
(Cross-refer to SECTION 52.)
H. Reference data
This Subsection accommodates lengthy statistical
material which provides data in addition to short
tables interspersed in the text.
I. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 45. Health and Sanitation
This Subsection provides an appropriate introduc-
tion to a survey of the health conditions of the area
under observation in terms of both indigenous inhabit-
ants and alien personnel entering the area. It is
an evaluative overview of the content of the Section,
including an estimate of the state of health and public
sanitation as reflected in general morbidity and mor-
tality. The level of medical capabilities, both in
knowledge and techniques, as well as the readiness or
otherwise of government and private sources to supply
facilities is stressed. Political, sociological, and eco-
nomic factors bearing on the organization and adminis-
tration of public health and the implementing of
measures pertinent thereto are noted. Recent changes
in government are included but only as they affect
medical standards.
B. Factors affecting health
1. TOPOGRAPHY AND CLIMATE
Include a brief account of the relationship of the
topography and climate of the area to the health of
man and animals.
2. SOCIO-ECONOMIC PATTERN
Give an evaluative summary of the living conditions
of the population, including subsistence problem areas
and group customs which are significant to health.
3. ANIMAL AND PLANT LIFE
Discuss insects and other types of animal life which
affect the health and well-being of man and animals.
This discussion (supplemented by tabular data) should
be related to health and working efficiency; it includes
vectors of disease, mechanical transmitters of disease,
pests, and harmful or injurious types.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 19
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
011.1.111.11.kmi NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Give an evaluative summary of medically important
plant life, cultivated or wild, which has significance for
the well-being of the population at large. When
significant, toxic or noxious vegetation is to be included.
4. NUTRITION
Discuss the general nutritional status and dietary
level, including a brief summary of factors which in-
fluence the supply of food. Appropriate reference can
be made to SECTION 61, Agriculture, Fisheries, and
Forestry under Food Balance Sheet.
Discuss nutrition standards and any features such
as religious customs which create or influence dietary
habits. Discuss storage, distribution, and facilities for
refrigeration of food in relation to health. Discuss
existing conditions relative to the inspection of food,
such as meat, the pasteurization of milk, and the inspec-
tion and control of food stores and eating establish-
ments.
5. WATER
Discuss the adequacy and safety of the water supply
in relation to health, including its vulnerability to
contamination. Summarize the status of water dis-
tribution and purification, and formulate general con-
clusions as to the efficiency. Material will summarize
and not duplicate the detailed subject matter of NIS
CHAPTER II sections.
6. WASTE DISPOSAL
Discuss in general disposal facilities and practices
for human excreta, animal wastes, garbage, and rub-
bish. Material will summarize and not duplicate the
detailed subject matter of NIS SUPPLEMENT IV.
C. Diseases
Precede the discussion of specific diseases by an
evaluative statement as to the prevalence of certain
types of diseases, the recurrence of severe epidemics,
apparent immunities to certain diseases or extreme
susceptibility to others, or similar generalizations, giving
possible reasons for these or for any unusual trends.
Briefly discuss the adequacy of disease reporting in
the area.
1. DISEASES OF MAN
a. DISEASES PREVALENT AMONG THE POPULATION ?
Discuss the prevalence of all those diseases (including
communicable, deficiency, and mental) causing high
morbidity and mortality among the native peoples.
Indicate the control measures currently enforced.
b. DISEASES WHICH MAY AFFECT A MILITARY
FORCE AND OTHER NON-INDIGENOUS PERSONNEL -- Dis-
cuss those diseases which would be of particular concern
to a military force from the viewpoint of loss of man-
PAGE 20
power. Cover logistical and other problems related
to the control or prevention of the disease. Include
discussion of diseases which might be introduced or
might be increased in incidence during war.
2. ANIMAL DISEASES
Discuss prevalence and control of animal diseases
which affect domestic animals. Discuss those animal
diseases which can likewise affect man, including their
prevalence in men.
D. Medical organization and administration
1. CIVILIAN
a. ADMINISTRATION ? Describe the overall medi-
cal, dental, veterinary, and public health organization
and administration. This should begin with a pres-
entation of the control and supervision of all types of
medical practice. Describe the medical organization
in any political subsections of the nation with relation
to the central government. Any national health
service, public or private, compulsory or voluntary,
should be discussed as to its organization, adminis-
tration, practice, and effectiveness.
b. LEGAL CONTROLS ? Discuss legal control and
policy as they concern the practice of medicine, in-
cluding standards, licensing, control of narcotics,
mental diseases, and public health laws and regulations.
C. PROFESSIONAL MEDICAL ORGANIZATIONS ? De-
scribe any national and local professional and social
service organizations and their activities.
d. MEDICAL RESEARCH ? Summarize the status
of medical and related research, formulating conclu-
sions as to its value in contributing to the progress of
the nation in those fields.
e. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ? Discuss organization,
administration, types of service, extent of coverage,
and standards of industrial hygiene.
f. EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES ? Discuss emer-
gency medical services for disaster relief, including the
medical aspects of civil defense. Organization, adminis-
tration, and scope of such services should be included.
2. MILITARY
Describe the general organization and administration
of the medical services of the armed forces. This should
include a discussion of the command and staff struc-
tures within the medical services, the relation to other
staff agencies, and the civilian medical organization.
Cross-reference to NIS CHAPTER VIII sections should
be made.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
4. LEADERSHIP
CHAPTER IV dein
Are labor leaders well established and highly repre-
sentative of industrial and agricultural workers? Is the
labor movement an indigenous development or in-
spired and/or organized by outside interests? Comment
on the caliber of its leaders and their training for
leadership. What degree of control can or do the
leaders exercise over the rank-and-file? To what extent
does the opinion of the rank-and-file influence the
leaders? What is the attitude of organized labor and
labor leaders toward nonsupport and nonconformity
with union policies within the country? What is the
attitude of the public press and important elements of
the population toward them? Note the international
affiliations of the union leadership and the part they
play in public policy. Comment on specific leaders in
the labor movements. (Correlate with SECTION 59
and/or the Key Personalities unit.)
G. Labor-management relations
1. LABOR PROBLEMS
What is the customary relation between employer
and employee? Is large-scale employment a charac-
teristic of the country's economy or is it a characteristic
of only a special type of work or region? To what
extent do labor-management relations involve foreign
employers and/or foreign workers and what special
A. General
significance does this have in interesting the govern-
ment in the problems of labor?
What are the specific sources of friction? What are
the causes of the problems requiring solution? What
are the prevailing methods for settling these disputes?
2. COLLECTIVE BARGAINING
Indicate the extent and character of collective bar-
gaining, the number and duration of strikes and lock-
outs, and the methods of dealing with industrial dis-
putes. Does the government play an important part
in this field? If so, how? Are there significant de-
velopments in organization for the settlement of indus-
trial disputes, as, for example, industrial councils and
boards, workshop organization and labor courts?
(Cross-refer to SECTION 52.)
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 45. Health and Sanitation
This Subsection provides an appropriate introduc-
tion to a survey of the health conditions of the area
under observation in terms of both indigenous inhabit-
ants and alien personnel entering the area. It is
an evaluative overview of the content of the Section,
including an estimate of the state of health and public
sanitation as reflected in general morbidity and mor-
tality. The level of medical capabilities, both in
knowledge and techniques, as well as the readiness or
otherwise of government and private sources to supply
facilities is stressed. Political, sociological, and eco-
nomic factors bearing on the organization and adminis-
tration of public health and the implementing of
measures pertinent thereto are noted. Recent changes
in government are included but only as they affect
medical standards.
B. Factors affecting health
1. TOPOGRAPHY AND CLIMATE
Include a brief account of the relationship of the
topography and climate of the area to the health of
man and animals.
2. SOCIO-ECONOMIC PATTERN
Give an evaluative summary of the living conditions
of the population, including subsistence problem areas
and group customs which are significant to health.
3. ANIMAL AND PLANT LIFE
Discuss insects and other types of animal life which
affect the health and well-being of man and animals.
This discussion (supplemented by tabular data) should
be related to health and working efficiency; it includes
vectors of disease, mechanical transmitters of disease,
pests, and harmful or injurious types.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 19
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Give an evaluative summary of medically important
plant life, cultivated or wild, which has significance for
the well-being of the population at large. When
significant, toxic or noxious vegetation is to be included.
4. NUTRITION
Discuss the general nutritional status and dietary
level, including a brief summary of factors which in-
fluence the supply of food. Appropriate reference can
be made to SECTION 61, Agriculture, Fisheries, and
Forestry under Food Balance Sheet.
Discuss nutrition standards and any features such
as religious customs which create or influence dietary
habits. Discuss storage, distribution, and facilities for
refrigeration of food in relation to health. Discuss
existing conditions relative to the inspection of food,
such as meat, the pasteurization of milk, and the inspec-
tion and control of food stores and eating establish-
ments.
5. WATER
Discuss the adequacy and safety of the water supply
in relation to health, including its vulnerability to
contamination. Summarize the status of water dis-
tribution and purification, and formulate general con-
clusions as to the efficiency. Material will summarize
and not duplicate the detailed subject matter of NIS
CHAPTER II sections.
6. WASTE DISPOSAL
Discuss in general disposal facilities and practices
for human excreta, animal wastes, garbage, and rub-
bish. Material will summarize and not duplicate the
detailed subject matter of NIS SUPPLEMENT IV.
C. Diseases
Precede the discussion of specific diseases by an
evaluative statement as to the prevalence of certain
types of diseases, the recurrence of severe epidemics,
apparent immunities to certain diseases or extreme
susceptibility to others, or similar generalizations, giving
possible reasons for these or for any unusual trends.
Briefly discuss the adequacy of disease reporting in
the area.
1. DISEASES OF MAN
a. DISEASES PREVALENT AMONG THE POPULATION ?
Discuss the prevalence of all those diseases (including
communicable, deficiency, and mental) causing high
morbidity and mortality among the native peoples.
Indicate the control measures currently enforced.
b. DISEASES WHICH MAY AFFECT A MILITARY
FORCE AND OTHER NON-INDIGENOUS PERSONNEL -- Dis-
cuss those diseases which would be of particular concern
to a military force from the viewpoint of loss of man-
PAGE 20
power. Cover logistical and other problems related
to the control or prevention of the disease. Include
discussion of diseases which might be introduced or
might be increased in incidence during war.
2. ANIMAL DISEASES
Discuss prevalence and control of animal diseases
which affect domestic animals. Discuss those animal
diseases which can likewise affect man, including their
prevalence in men.
D. Medical organization and administration
1. CIVILIAN
R. ADMINISTRATION ? Describe the overall medi-
cal, dental, veterinary, and public health organization
and administration. This should begin with a pres-
entation of the control and supervision of all types of
medical practice. Describe the medical organization
in any political subsections of the nation with relation
to the central government. Any national health
service, public or private, compulsory or voluntary,
should be discussed as to its organization, adminis-
tration, practice, and effectiveness.
b. LEGAL CONTROLS ? Discuss legal control and
policy as they concern the practice of medicine, in-
cluding standards, licensing, control of narcotics,
mental diseases, and public health laws and regulations.
C. PROFESSIONAL MEDICAL ORGANIZATIONS ? De-
scribe any national and local professional and social
service organizations and their activities.
d. MEDICAL RESEARCH -- Summarize the status
of medical and related research, formulating conclu-
sions as to its value in contributing to the progress of
the nation in those fields.
O. INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ? Discuss organization,
administration, types of service, 'extent of coverage,
and standards of industrial hygiene.
f. EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES ? Discuss emer-
gency medical services for disaster relief, including the
medical aspects of civil defense. Organization, adminis-
tration, and scope of such services should be included.
2. MILITARY
Describe the general organization and administration
of the medical services of the armed forces. This should
include a discussion of the command and staff struc-
tures within the medical services, the relation to other
staff agencies, and the civilian medical organization.
Cross-reference to NIS CHAPTER VIII sections should
be made.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 CIA-RDP79-01055A00030003044141rT
JANUARY 1962 CHAPTER II"
E. Medical personnel and training
Give a summary description of the medical physi-
cians of the country (inclusive of all specialists) as a
group, their proportional representation among the
professionals of the country, the popular attitude
toward them, and their attitude toward their work.
Add a general appraisal of their competency, their
standards of practice and the ethical level of their
medical activities. In this group include those medical
practitioners (ayurvedic, herb, etc.) who hold a pro-
fessional rating in their own societies and communities.
Similarly describe the veterinarians and dentists.
In detail discuss the physicians and each of the pro-
fessional categories in terms of numbers, together with
doctor/population ratios, distribution (geographic and
urban/rural), their origins (native or foreign), their
training (local or foreign), area of specialization, and
employment (private, government, institutional, busi-
ness and industry?insurance, factory or plant medical
units). Under training, name the indigenous schools
of medicine and discuss the courses of study, the years
spent, the availability of equipment, and the quality
of instruction to which the student is exposed before
being awarded his degree.
Enumerate the numbers of so-called "assistant"
doctors, such as feldshers, as well as nurses (all varie-
ties), midwives, nurses' aides, and technicians (labora-
tory, X-ray, etc.). Besides their numbers give as
much information as possible about their distribution,
employment, and training, particularly the latter,
giving the names of institutions, courses, numbers of
years spent in training, and any other pertinent infor-
mation surrounding their preparation and functioning.
A. General
F. Medical care facilities
Evaluate the various types of civilian and military
medical care facilities which are used for the diagnosis
and treatment of diseases and injuries. Include public
and private hospitals, sanatoriums, clinics, and dispen-
saries. Discuss the availability and adequacy of clinical
diagnostic laboratories used in diseases of man and
animals.
G. Medical supplies
Discuss the availability, quality, and suitability of
supplies used in medicine, dentistry, and veterinary
medicine. Include discussion of self-sufficiency of
pharmaceuticals and biologicals and the extent to
which deficiencies are met by imports. Describe the
manufacturing facilities for medical supplies and equip-
ment, the organization and location of the principal
establishments, and the quantity and quality of pro-
duction.
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 46. Welfare
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach
to the material contained in the remainder of the Sec-
tion and is not a digest thereof. It contains a brief
statement of the level of public welfare and its relation-
ship to national strength or weakness and unity or dis-
unity. The prevailing attitudes of the people toward
governmental or private responsibility for improving
the public welfare and toward various needy and de-
pendent segments of the population are also dealt with
here, along with the dominant ideals of social welfare.
What are the general types of public and private
groups engaged in social welfare work? Note the tradi-
tional concept of the government concerning its re-
sponsibilities in the field of public welfare and indicate
recent trends.
11111101"11116111Imm
B. Levels of living and social welfare
Describe the general material welfare of the popula-
tion as reflected in diet, clothing, housing (including
electrification, plumbing, and heating), health, educa-
tion, and recreation, and compare it with that of the
people of selected other countries including the United
States. (Cross-refer to SECTION 45 for health and sani-
tation and to SECTION 43 for education.) Discuss
major class or regional variations in material welfare
and significant gaps between actual levels of living and
the country's existing standards of living. Are stand-
ards of living well defined for different social classes and
are the differences a source of resentment? Is any
group particularly affected by an adverse wage-price
relationship? Give particular attention to important
related social tensions.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 21
_Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
Comment on the types and incidence of crime as
indicators of social problems. Note the extent of slums,
alcoholism, juvenile delinquency, prostitution, traffic
in women and children, the use of narcotics, begging,
vagabondage, and other adverse conditions recognized
in Western societies as social problems and briefly
examine the causal factors, e.g., are war, cataclysms,
technological innovations, or cultural or social changes
at the root of these problems? Discuss those social
situations which the society itself regards as threats to
its values or as having significant adverse effects upon
public welfare, or as making the society vulnerable to
subversive influences.
C. Social security and welfare aid
This Subsection deals with important public and
private practices, modern as well as traditional, de-
signed to or baying the effect of protecting and assisting
those in need of help.
1. SOCIAL SECURITY
Where pertinent describe the social security laws
and the extent of their operation, including unemploy-
ment and other social insurance, old age and invalidity
pensions and other forms of social security. Describe
briefly the origin and development of these laws and the
effectiveness of their operation. Discuss the financial
support of the program. Cross-refer to SECTION 44 if
necessary. To what extent and in what way do political
leaders interest themselves in social security.
2. PUBLIC WELFARE SERVICE
For those countries having a public welfare service,
its origin, development, and present scope should be
briefly noted, together with description of the govern-
ment agency charged with administrative responsibility
for it, its place in the structure of government, and its
financial support. Include the government program
PAGE 22
for the provision of aid which may not be included
under social security, such as maternity aid, child
welfare services, aid to the aged and physically and
mentally handicapped, and provisions for emergency
relief. What is the public attitude toward these
activities?
3. PRIVATE WELFARE SERVICES
Important private groups engaged in social welfare
work are identified and discussed. Give information
on each group concerning its objectives, its sources
of support, the type of personnel directing its activities,
and the public attitude towards its services. Indicate
briefly the nature of the work carried on and the loca-
tion of each organization's major endeavors.
In a society in which social welfare has not been
organized or is only partly provided through organized
agencies, describe the prevailing ways in which those
in need of help receive care, such as through the joint
family, the tribe, religious practices, etc.
4. LEADERSHIP
Describe the background and training of persons in
positions of leadership in the development of the social
welfare program. Is there a nucleus of professionally
trained personnel? What is the status of the social
worker in the society? Discuss social service training
facilities.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER IV iiimmosismaim
E. Medical manpower
1. PERSONNEL
On a quantitative and qualitative basis describe the
availability of civilian and military personnel, such as
physicians, dentists, veterinarians, and other associated
professional and scientific groups, including nurses,
subprofessional practitioners, and technicians. Discuss
factors which influence the availability of medical man-
power. Discuss the availability of all types of medical
personnel to the military in peace and war.
2. TRAINING
Describe the educational and training facilities,
policies, and programs for all types of medical personnel.
Indicate the degree of effectiveness in carrying out
medical training. Training facilities and procedures
utilized or maintained by the military forces should be
included. (Correlate with CHAPTER IV, SECTION 43.)
F. Medical care facilities
Evaluate the various types of civilian and military
medical care facilities which are used for the diagnosis
and treatment of diseases and injuries. Include public
and private hospitals, sanatoria, clinics, and dispen-
saries. Discuss the availability and adequacy of clinical
A. General
diagnostic laboratories used in diseases of man and
animals.
G. Medical supplies
Discuss the availability, quality, and suitability of
supplies used in medicine, dentistry, and veterinary
medicine. Include discussion of self-sufficiency of
pharmaceuticals and biologicals and the extent to
which deficiencies are met by imports. Describe the
manufacturing facilities for medical supplies and equip-
ment, the organization and location of the principal
establishments, and the quantity and quality of pro-
duction.
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 46. Wel/ are
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach
to the material contained in the remainder of the Sec-
tion and is not a digest thereof. It contains a brief
statement of the level of public welfare and its relation-
ship to national strength or weakness and unity or dis-
unity. The prevailing attitudes of the people toward
governmental or private responsibility for improving
the public welfare and toward various needy and de-
pendent segments of the population, as well as the
dominant ideals of social welfare, are also dealt with
here. What are the general types of public and private
groups engaged in social welfare work? Note the tradi-
tional concept of the government concerning its re-
sponsibilities in the field of public welfare and indicate
recent trends.
B. Levels of living and social welfare
Describe the general material welfare of the popula-
tion as reflected in diet, clothing, housing (including
electrification, plumbing, and heating), health, educa-
tion, and recreation, and compare it with that of the
people of selected other countries including the United
morniiignimumwri
States. (Cross-refer to SECTION 45 for health and sani-
tation and to SECTION 43 for education.) Discuss
major class or regional variations in material welfare
and significant gaps between actual levels of living and
the country's existing standards of living. Are stand-
ards of living well defined for different social classes and
are the differences a source of resentment? Is any
group particularly affected by an adverse wage-price
relationship? Give particular attention to important
related social tensions.
Comment on the types and incidence of crime as
indicators of social problems. Note the extent of slums,
alcoholism, juvenile delinquency, prostitution, traffic
in women and children, the use of narcotics, begging,
vagabondage, and other adverse conditions recognized
in Western societies as social problems and briefly
examine the causal factors, e.g., are war, cataclysms,
technological innovations, or cultural or social changes
at the root of these problems? Discuss those social
situations which the society itself regards as threats to
its values or as having significant adverse effects upon
public welfare, or as making the society vulnerable to
subversive influences.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 21
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
mIllOgiumunimmoi NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
C. Social security and welfare aid
This Subsection deals with important public and
private practices, modern as well as traditional, de-
signed to or having the effect of protecting and assisting
those in need of help.
1. SOCIAL SECURITY
Where pertinent describe the social security laws
and the extent of their operation, including unemploy-
ment and other social insurance, old age and invalidity
pensions and other forms of social security. Describe
briefly the origin and development of these laws and the
effectiveness of their operation. Discuss the financial
support of the program. Cross-refer to SECTION 44 if
necessary. To what extent and in what way do political
leaders interest themselves in social security.
2. PUBLIC WELFARE SERVICE
For those countries having a public welfare service,
its origin, development, and present scope should be
briefly noted, together with description of the govern-
ment agency charged with administrative responsibility
for it, its place in the structure of government, and its
financial support. Include the government program
for the provision of aid which may not be included
under social security, such as maternity aid, child
welfare services, aid to the aged and physically and
mentally handicapped, and provisions for emergency
relief. What is the public attitude toward these
activities?
PAGE 22
3. PRIVATE WELFARE SERVICES
Important private groups engaged in social welfare
work are identified and discussed. Give information
on each group concerning its objectives, its sources
of support, the type of personnel directing its activities,
and the public attitude towards its services. Indicate
briefly the nature of the work carried on and the loca-
tion of each organization's major endeavors.
In a society in which social welfare has not been
organized or is only partly provided through organized
agencies, describe the prevailing ways in which those
in need of help receive care, such as through the joint
family, the tribe, religious practices, etc.
4. LEADERSHIP
Describe the background and training of persons in
positions of leadership in the development of the social
welfare program. Is there a nucleus of professionally
trained personnel? What is the status of the social
worker in the society? Discuss social service training
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER V
POLITICAL
Section 50 Introduction
Section 51 The Constitutional System
Section 52 Structure of the Government
Section 53 Political Dynamics
Section 54 Public Order and Safety
Section 55 National Policies
Section 56 Intelligence and Security
Section 57 Subversion
Section 58 Propaganda
Section 59 Biographies of Key Personalities
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
meitimunimm.
JULY 1959 i
Chapter V - Political
OUTLINE
SECTION 50.
INTRODUCTION
SECTION 55.
NATIONAL POLICIES
A.
General
SECTION 51.
THE CONSTITUTIONAL SYSTEM
B.
Domestic policies
C.
Foreign policies
A.
General
D.
National defense policies
B.
Constitution
E.
Comments on principal sources
1. Origin and development
2. Principal features
C.
Constitutional pattern of government
SECTION 56.
INTELLIGENCE AND SECURITY
D.
Civil and religious rights and privileges
E.
Other important provisions of the con-
stitution
A.
B.
General
Services of intelligence and security
F.
Comments on principal sources
C.
Key officials
D.
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 52.
STRUCTURE OF THE GOVERNMENT
A.
General
SECTION 57.
SUBVERSION
B.
Central government
C.
Regional government
A.
General
D.
Local government
B.
Soviet and Communist subversive activ-
E.
Dependencies and associated states
ities
F.
Comments on principal sources
C.
Other subversive activities
D.
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 53.
POLITICAL DYNAMICS
SECTION 58.
PROPAGANDA
A.
General
B.
C.
Political parties
Electoral procedures
A.
B.
General
Domestic propaganda
D.
Pressure groups
C.
Propaganda directed abroad
E.
Comments on principal sources
D.
Propaganda by foreign countries
E.
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 54.
PUBLIC ORDER AND SAFETY
A.
General
SECTION 59.
BIOGRAPHIES OF KEY PERSONALITIES
B.
Police system
C.
Penal system
A.
General
D.
Civil defense
B.
Individuals
E.
Comments on principal sources
C.
Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE I
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
L1,111 NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general ar-
rangement. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard
Editorial Instructions are followed in detail.
Section 50. Introduction
This Section serves as a political introduction both
to the country and to the other Sections of CHAPTER
V, drawing upon chapter content to present a political
overview but avoiding a summary. It should show the
strategic significance of the political, aspects of the
country and indicate, however briefly, the relative
significance of, and interrelationships among,. those
specific aspects that are the subjects of SECTIONS 51-58.
Include a brief overall evaluation of the political
strength and international influence of the nation in
terms of degree of national unity, will to independence,
strength of purpose, fighting spirit, relative stability
and efficiency of the political system, locus of power,
the nature and significance of the relationships between
A. General
JULY 1957
alb military and political systems, and basic objectives
of the government and the nation at home and abroad.
Where relevant, include brief reference to the develop-
ment and character of nationalism. (Correlate with the
discussion of basic attitudes in SECTION 42.)
Historical factors affecting present day political
attitudes and institutions should be woven into the
above discussion to the extent necessary to explain
these attitudes and institutions. (Political background
material in SECTION 50 should be so correlated with the
discussions in CHAPTER IV, SECTION 40, and CHAPTER
VI, SECTION 60, that together they will give a rounded
picture of significant social, economic, and political
background on the area.)
Section 51. The Constitutional System
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach
to the description of the general nature of the constitu-
tional system contained in the remainder of the Section.
It notes briefly significant developments in the na-
tion's constitutional history, taking into account such
factors as traditional respect for and adherence to con-
stitutional processes and civil rights. The Subsection
also indicates the relationship between the constitu-
tional system and the degree of national political sta-
bility and efficiency. (Correlate all SECTION 51 mate-
rial with the Outline Guide for SECTION 52, which
covers in detail structure, organization, and function-
ing of the various branches and agencies of the govern-
ment at national, regional, and lciesd levels.)
B. Constitution
1. ORIGIN AND DEVELOPMENT
Discuss briefly the origin and development of the
present constitution, including the political, economic,
and social groups dominant when the constitution was
adopted, the foreign influences present, and the extent
PAGE 2
to which it represented public opinion at the time of
adoption. Include an estimate of the current degree
of popular support of the constitution; note briefly
factors contributing to that support and those arous-
ing resentment.
2. PRINCIPAL FEATURES
The type of government for which the constitution
provides is defined and the salient features of the system
described, but only to the extent necessary to give the
reader a general understanding of the character of the
constitutional system. (Reserve detailed discussion of
these salient features for Subsections C, D, and E.)
The relationship between the principal provisions of the
constitution and actual practice is indicated in general
terms. Features which differentiate the constitution
from those of the past may be considered briefly. The
amending process and the interpretation of the consti-
tution by the various branches of government are dis-
cussed, particularly with regard to its flexibility in
terms of responsiveness to the popular will and the
degree to which it is susceptible to manipulation by
government officials.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER V dimmoidaNimiin
C. Constitutional pattern of government
Describe briefly the national pattern of government
established by the constitution, indicating the prin-
cipal powers of each branch of government, the rela-
tionships among the several branches, and the extent
to which pertinent constitutional provisions are ap-
plied in actual practice. Outline the constitutional
provisions determining the pattern of regional and
local government if this aspect is not covered ade-
quately under Principal Features above. (Reserve for
SECTION 52 the discussion of details of the constitution
pertaining to organization and functioning of the vari-
ous branches and agencies of the government at all
levels.)
D. Civil and religious rights and privileges
Give the constitutional and legal provisions and a
statement of the actual situation in respect to civil and
religious rights and privileges, considering especially
freedom of speech, press, radio, assembly, organization,
and religion. The civil and religious rights and privi-
leges of foreigners, particularly Americans, are exam-
ined and compared with those of nationals. With
respect to the suffrage, only law and practice concern-
ing the qualifications of electors such as age, sex, and
property, are considered. (Percentage of the popula-
tion excluded from voting and extent of actual partici-
pation in elections is reserved for SECTION 53.)
A. General
E. Other important provisions of the consti-
tution (optional)
Describe in broad terms other important constitu-
tional provisions such as those relating to economic,
social, and military matters, if separate Subsection
treatment is deemed appropriate. (In some instances
a Subsection entitled "Economic and social provisions"
may be preferred.) Note any important differences
between constitutional provisions and actual practice.
(Avoid extensive duplication of detail on these pro-
visions that might more appropriately appear in other
Sections, e.g., in the Subsection on Labor in SECTION
44, or in SECTION 46, Welfare.)
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
the user of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 52. Structure of the Government
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach to
and framework for tile treatment of material contained
in the remainder of the Section and should be brief.
It takes into consideration conditions, situations, and
practices which alter the structure or operation of gov-
ernment as provided for in the constitution. There is
an analysis of the relationship of the central, regional,
and local governments, indicating factors of strength
and weakness in this relationship. (Include an orienta-
tion map, showing administrative boundaries.) The
analysis might also indicate the oxtent to which the
framework for regional and local government differs
from that established for the nation as a whole. Indi-
cate the nature and degree of popular participation at
all levels of government and the extent to which govern-
ment officials are political leaders. Describe briefly
the general characteristics, qualifications, and perform-
ance of the bureaucracy as a group. Note any signifi-
cant regional or other. variations.
B. Central government
Describe in detail and with the aid of appropriate
charts the legislative, executive, and judicial branches
of the government, including representative subdivi-
sions and agencies of each branch, and civil defense
agencies. This discussion includes basic legal pro-
visions (except those covered in SECTION 51) and
actual procedures of operation to the extent needed
to provide a clear understanding of the structure,
authority, functioning, and effectiveness of the central
government and its major agencies. Include character
of personnel, with specific reference to significant indi-
viduals where helpful (correlate with SECTION 59 or the
Key Personalities unit). The material is presented in
such a way as to give the reader a clear conception of
the actual locus of power in formation and administra-
tion of public policy.
In discussing the judicial organization and court
structure indicate the general character of the body of
law, written or unwritten, upon which the system is
based (reserve detailed discussion of the penal code and
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CONFIDENTIAL NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
criminal procedure for SECTION 54). Mention the
prosecuting agencies and court officials in the judicial
organization, indicating briefly the function of the most
important but reserving discussion of their roles in the
penal system for SECTION 54. Include also such
judicial and quasi-judicial bodies as labor and commer-
cial courts. In this and other Subsections avoid
excessive quotations from laws and regulations.
Any significant demands for change on the part of
influential groups, e.g., the military, are pointed out,
with cross-reference to SECTION 53 for details concerning
the group.
C. Regional government
Delineate the major political subdivisions, e.g., states
in the United States, and describe structural organiza-
tion and procedures of operation. It may be essential
to include some data of the type called for in Subsection
B in cases where an understanding of the nature,
effectiveness, and popular support of the regional gov-
ernments is necessary to an understanding of the
operations of the political system as a whole.
D. Local government
The considerations applicable in Subsections B and
C above are applicable here.
A. General
E. Dependencies and associated states
Discuss types of dependencies (colonies, trust terri-
tories, protectorates), their governmental organization
and relation to the mother country, and the extent of
internal conflict and its domestic and international
implications. (Tabular treatment may be used to sup-
plement discussion.) Illustrate with map if appro-
priate. Describe the structure and internal relation-
ships of associations of states (e.g., British Common-
wealth of Nations, French Union, etc.) which have
grown out of previous colonial relationships. Where a
country has no dependencies, omission of this Subsec-
tion is appropriate and such lack of dependencies would
then be mentioned in Subsection A.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 53. Political Dynamics
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach
to the material contained in the remainder of the
Section. It outlines the salient features of the political
system, indicating the locus of power, the nature of
political leadership and the manner in which it is exer-
cised, the extant to which political power is used within
or outside of the constitutional system, and the degree
of governmental and constitutional stability and in-
stability arising out of the political system. It dis-
cusses the development and extent of political aware-
ness among the people and indicates the degree to which
education and past experience prepare them for political
responsibility. Throughout, the Subsection relates
political surface phenomena to underlying social, eco-
nomic, and cultural forces, with cross-references to the
appropriate Sections in CHAPTER IV and CHAPTER VI.
In this connection indicate the political effects of
social tensions from such factors as class struggles,
labor-management disputes, the aspirations of minority
groups, and religious beliefs. While discussion of sub-
versive activities, whether by legal or illegal groups, is
reserved for this Chapter, SECTION 57, the effects of
PAGE 4
such activities on the country's political dynamics are
briefly described in this Subsection with cross-reference
to SECTION 57. Finally, the Subsection might compare
the system of political dynamics and its leadership with
those of the United States or other appropriate coun-
tries.
B. Political parties
This Subsection sets forth the constitutional and
legal provisions defining a party, regulating member-
ship, governing collection and expenditure of money,
and controlling campaigns. These provisions are com-
pared with actual conditions and significant proposals
for change.
The major existing legal parties are described?in-
cluding economic, social, and religious interests repre-
sented, internal organization, avowed program and
apparent real objectives, position on major issues of
national policy, attitudes toward the United States,
U.S.S.R., and other foreign nations, propaganda and
propaganda methods, finances, recruitment, rank-and-
file control, and intraparty disputes that may affect
party orientation. Mention should be made of out-
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER V ailmommenew
standing national leaders, and their major influence on
party policies. (Correlate with SECTION 59 and/or the
Key Personalities unit.) The influence of the parties
in the formation of public opinion as well as their own
susceptibility to propaganda, both foreign and domestic,
and other vulnerabilities is analyzed. A brief account
of the history of political parties is included where neces-
sary to explain trends in political alignments and
objectives. There also is a comparison of party
strength at the national, regional, and local levels.
Significant concentrations of strength are noted, and
an effort made to estimate the role played by each party
in regional and local government as well as in national
affairs. Include a brief evaluation of the strength of
subversive groups in relation to other political group-
ings if subversive elements significantly affect the
country's political dynamics (reserve details on such
groups for SECTION 57). Legal quasi-political parties
or groups having political influence to an extent greater
than that normally attributed to pressure groups are
discussed here. Portray the distribution of the major
parties. Include the ratio of party strength to the
population, urban and rural, and the extent and loca-
tion, indicating where there has been a significant turn-
over in party membership at any level. As appropriate
use graphics or tabular presentation.
C. Electoral procedures
This Subsection describes in detail the mechanics of
important elections, evaluating them as representative
procedures (coordinate with SECTIONS 51 and 52). It
includes the important constitutional and legal pro-
visions governing the character of the ballot, guaran-
tees of secrecy, accuracy of counting, and a discussion
of actual practices. It also notes any significant resent-
ment toward the electoral system or demands for
change. With respect to the suffrage, the groups ex-
cluded, percentage of population excluded, and the
extent of actual participation are discussed in detail.
D. Pressure groups
This Subsection examines in detail the function of
pressure groups in the political system, the manner in
which political pressure is exercised and its effect upon
the political process. It discusses the constitutional
and legal position with respect to lobbying, propa-
ganda, expenditure of money, and participation in
elections, as well as the extent to which public opinion
sanctions, tolerates, or disapproves the exercise of
political pressure by private groups. It identifies the
groups or organizations of major importance, indicating
for each the race, size, character, and distribution of
its membership, organization, financial resources,
habits, and relation (if any) to foreign governments.
When feasible, this information is presented in tabular
form. Give a brief analysis of the outstanding
national leaders and their major influence on the groups
with which they are associated. (Correlate with SEC-
TION 59 and/or the Key Personalities unit.) Apparent
objectives are briefly analyzed and an effort made to
estimate the influence of each group in national and
local affairs, and its overall ability to affect U.S. inter-
ests. The discussion brings out the position of these
groups on major issues of national policy, their attitudes
toward the United States, the U.S.S.R., and other
foreign nations, their propaganda and propaganda
methods, and the role they play in molding public
opinion, as well as their own susceptibility to propa-
ganda, both foreign and domestic. (Whenever appro-
priate, cross-refer to SECTION 58.)
The treatment of pressure groups differentiates be-
tween groups specifically organized for the purpose of
influencing government policies and activities other
than through elections or subversive action, and those
special-interest groups that are primarily organized for
other purposes but that may act as political pressure
groups when the occasion demands. Only the former
are given primary treatment in this Subsection; the
latter may include labor unions, employers' organiza-
tions, consumer cooperatives, veterans' groups, youth
movements, and similar organized groups whose mem-
bership, organization, finances, etc., have been dis-
cussed at length in other Sections of the NIS (notably
SECTIONS 42, 43, 44, and 46). They should be touched
upon here merely in connection with the issues on which
they become pressure groups, making cross-reference to
the appropriate NIS Sections for the primary treatment.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
Section 54. Public Order and Safety
A. General
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach
to the material contained in the remainder of the Sec-
tion. It includes a brief discussion of the conditions
affeCting the maintenance of public order and safety,
including public attitudes in general toward the admin-
istration of justice. The Subsection indicates any sig-
nificant aspects of the police and penal system as a
whole, such as size, adequacy, extralegal procedure, or
importance as a political, social, or economic force,
which distinguish it from those of other areas. (Treat-
ment of police, intelligence, and defense organizations
insofar as they are concerned primarily with defense
of the regime against political activities at home and
abroad aimed at its overthrow by unlawful means is
reserved for SECTION 56.)
B. Police system
A brief description is given of the organization and
operation of the police system, including a discussion
of the relation to other parts of the government. Also
describe briefly the criminological facilities (such as
fingerprinting and fingerprint files), techniques of riot-
control, organization and jurisdictions of forces for
suppression of crime (including traffic in narcotics), and
the extent of use of police informers. Mention briefly
such devices as police identity cards and registration
systems, if employed primarily for the maintenance of
public order and safety. Discuss fully the nature and
implementation of any civil defense functions that may
be assigned to the police. What are the attitudes of
the public toward the police system? What is the gen-
eral ability of the police to preserve order and safety?
Illustrate, where applicable, with recent incidents that
have left a mark on the minds of the people.
Discuss the police personnel with respect to honesty
and efficiency, the social base from which the person-
nel are recruited, the attributes of leadership, the type
of indoctrination and training received, relations be-
tween officers and men, intraservice rivalries, discipline,
incentives, and in general any factors affecting the
morale of the police, the spirit in which they approach
their task, and their loyalty to the government. The
social standing of the police and the extent to which
police officers can become national leaders are dis-
cussed.
PAGE 6
C. Penal system
Give a brief description of the organization and op-
eration of the penal system including its basic position.
in the legal system, relation to other parts of the gov-
ernment, honesty and efficiency of administration, and
the public attitude toward it. Indicate abuses of the
ethical principles set forth in the system of law, from
the standpoint of the society under discussion. This
Subsection includes a discussion of the criminal codes
and procedure, types of offenses and punishments, legal
or constitutional rights of the individual (with cross-
reference to SECTION 51, Subsection D), and the extent
to which these rights are respected in practice, the
incidence of crime, and the prison and reform system.
In discussing criminal procedure, briefly trace the prin-
cipal steps facing an offender from the time of accusa-
tion to imprisonment or appeal; avoid excessively tech-
nical treatment, stressing marked variations between
legal requirements and practice, and also differences
from U.S. procedures (correlate with SECTIONS 51 and
52). In discussing the rehabilitation of former crimi-
nals include women and juvenile delinquents. Explain
the differences, if any, in the handling of criminals and
others sentenced to forced labor for major or minor
criminal or political offenses.
In discussing the penal institutions, including forced
labor and concentration camps, note the governmental
agency responsible for overall administration and con-
trol, and the component exercising local jurisdiction.
Depict by map, where feasible, the number and loca-
tion of penal institutions and camps. Give the name,
location, and size of each major institution, distribu-
tion of estimated total in such institutions by main
categories of inmates, such as political prisoners, crimi-
nals, ethnic groups, religious sects, foreigners, etc.
Where meaningful data are available note work condi-
tions, food, housing, guard system, physical and medi-
cal care available, life expectancy; also morale, effec-
tiveness of indoctrination system, policy in regard to
length of sentence, term of actual service, and screen-
ing for return to private life. Comment on the posi-
tion, rights, and penalties of families of forced laborers.
What are the restrictions placed on released prisoners?
(Correlate with SECTION 44.)
For countries where the courts serve primarily as in-
struments of the regime for the repression and control
of the population, detailed treatment of the judicial
structure may be presented here, or as a separate
Subsection of SECTION 54, rather than in SECTION 52.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER V .M1111191MMATImm
D. Civil defense
The Subsection presents an integrated survey of civil
defense, its organization, place in the governmental
structure, relationship with other pertinent public ac-
tivities, and other principal characteristics as discussed
elsewhere in CHAPTER V or other appropriate chapters,
to which cross-reference is made as appropriate. The
discussion includes plans or provisions for pertinent
types of emergency actions, and the extent of civil de-
fense instruction and facilities. (For an Area not war-
ranting a separate Subsection, civil defense is referred
to briefly in Subsection A. General of SECTION 54.)
A. General
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In
this connection, only the principal sources actually
used are indicated.
Section 55. National Policies
This Subsection provides an appropriate framework
for and approach to the material presented in the re-
mainder of the Section. It identifies briefly the funda-
mental political, psychological, economic, and social
factors necessary to understand national policies as a
whole? e.g., their origins and the major factors con-
ditioning their formulation and implementation, in-
cluding characteristics of individual policymakers if
helpful (with cross-reference to SECTION 59 and the Key
Personalities unit). In some instances, it may be
necessary to emphasize the impact of history upon the
development of national policies. This Subsection like-
wise notes the important interrelationships among
domestic, foreign, and defense policies, especially as to
cause and effect, disproportionate emphasis, and incon-
sistencies and conflicts. The. popularity of national
policies as a whole and their significance to the political
system are also touched upon. Any significant differ-
ences in the extent of public awareness, interest, and
level of understanding of national, in contrast to inter-
national, problems and policies, are noted. Detailed
discussions of domestic, foreign, and defense policies
are left to the following Subsections.
B. Domestic policies
This Subsection provides a general statement on
domestic policy as a whole and an analysis of major
issues and individual policies that are fundamental to
the stability of government, that preoccupy public
opinion, or that strongly affect foreign and defense
policies. Where meaningful, include policy on domestic
use and control of nuclear power. Important domestic
issues or policies treated in detail elsewhere in the NIS,
especially in CHAPTERS IV and VI and in other Sections
of CHAPTER V, are discussed briefly here with appro-
priate cross-reference. Such discussions emphasize
long-standing and probably continuing trends, and
include a brief consideration of the characteristic
political reactions of the people (such as mistrust of
power), the implementation of policies, and the effects
of domestic policies upon the political system. In
individual instances, it might be advisable to show the
extent to which the domestic policies are patterned
after or integrated with those of another government.
The attitudes of the principal opinion-forming elements
toward important individual issues or policies are dis-
cussed in some detail. Whenever such groups have
been given primary treatment in other Sections of the
NIS (e.g., political parties and pressure groups in SEC-
TION 53, social organizations in SECTION 42, religious
groups in SECTION 43, labor unions in SECTION 44) dis-
cussion here is brief and cross-reference is made to the
appropriate Section.
C. Foreign policies
This Subsection presents as concisely as possible the
important relations of the country to and its alignment
with individual countries and major power blocs, and
the principal objectives and policies of the country in
these relationships (correlate with SECTIONS 55 for the
countries concerned). Mention policy on international
use and control of nuclear power, if significant. Indi-
cate the extent of participation in international organi-
zations, and the extent of popular satisfaction with
foreign policies and their conduct. Discuss the organi-
zation and powers of foreign policymaking components
and their relations to other agencies of the government,
supplementing, as necessary, the treatment given in
SECTION 52. The Subsection treats such factors as
evidence of desire for rectification of borders, measures
for exchange of population, measures for expulsion of
ethnic groups, extent of adoption of immigration quotas,
and efforts to extend control over foreign areas. A dis-
cussion of major treaties and agreements of a strategic
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
nature, particularly those affecting the United States,
is included. Discuss briefly the attitudes of govern-
ment leaders and various groups of the people toward
foreign nations (particularly the U.S.S.R., and the
United States and Americans) and toward international
organizations (especially the United Nations or regional
groupings for defense or other purposes), and toward
foreign investments and foreign aid and the causes
underlying these attitudes. Public attitudes and pop-
ular support for policy in this and the following Subsec-
tion are discussed primarily in relation to specific, cur-
rent issues, leaving the sociological and psychological
analysis of basic and more lasting attitudes to SECTION
42, to which reference is made. While the discussion
indicates whether the attitude of a group or of the pub-
lic at large on a specific issue is deeply rooted or of a
more ephemeral nature and whether it can more or less
easily be influenced by propaganda, it does not attempt
a detailed analysis of the processes of opinion formation
or of prevalent social values of the society.
D. National defense policies
This Subsection discusses the present defense policies
of major political importance, including civil defense,
and the influence of these policies upon domestic and
foreign policies (avoid duplication of discussion of
domestic and foreign policies, above). A discussion of
- World War II policies and postwar changes may be in-
cluded to provide necessary perspective. The Subsec-
tion describes the role of the defense establishment and
of the armed forces in the government as far as it affects
A. General
defense policies. Differences in viewpoint between the
military establishment and the civilian policymaking
bodies which are significant in the formulation of de-
fense policies are pointed out. The Subsection also
discusses the, influence upon defense policies of official
and popular reactions toward war, rearmament, and
compulsory military training. It identifies ithportant
organized groups (such as veterans' organizations) that
seek to influence the government, the legislature, or
public opinion on issues of national defense. It esti-
mates the impact of action by these organizations on
specific policies, but leaves the primary treatment of
these groups to appropriate other Sections of the NIS,
such as SECTION 43, for religious, educational, and public
information organizations; SECTION 44, for management
and labor groups; SECTION 46, for social welfare bodies;
SECTION 53, for political pressure organizations; SEC-
TION 57, for essentially subversive groups; and SECTION
42, for organizations not otherwise classified.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 56. Intelligence and Security
This Subsection is designed to provide the back-
ground information which will serve as a framework for
the details in the remainder of the Section. It de-
scribes, with the aid of charts if appropriate, the
national structure of civilian and military organizations
concerned with internal security and the procurement
of intelligence on other countries, and discusses their
background and development, demarcations of foreign
and domestic responsibility, political aspects, and pro-
fessional standards. By way of background, enough
of the past is presented to convey a clear understanding
of the present services. As part of the explanation of
general intelligence and security structure, the man-
dates, legal powers, and/or de facto responsibilities of
the services are discussed. Discussion of political
PAGE 8
aspects above indicates how the services of intelligence
and security have been shaped or affected by the inter-
national position and subversive situation of the
country (as set forth in SECTION 57 and/or SECTION 50);
the discussion also evaluates the relationship of the
intelligence and security services to the government and
the attitude of the populace toward them. Reference
is made, if appropriate, to responsibility for censorship
of public communications and publications. Profes-
sional standards are discussed in terms of integrity,
efficiency, security, and morale and disciplinary meth-
ods. The discussion of standards includes the extent
to which they are met and the general effectiveness of
the services. A careful coordination with other perti-
nent Sections of CHAPTER V is necessary. Primary
treatment of police organizations mainly concerned
with public order and safety is reserved for SECTION 54.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER V
B. Services of intelligence and security
This Subsection is designed to provide information
about the national services of intelligence and security,
both civilian and military, in appropriate detail. It
includes discussion of their functions, organization,
administrative practices, methods of operation, and
relationships with other services. The specific func-
tions of each service are explained in detail; and, so far
as possible, the relative order of significance of these
functions is indicated. The internal structure of each
service is explained, together with the responsibilities
of its subordinate units. Descriptions of complex
organizations are supplemented by charts. Adminis-
trative practices are explained in terms of the selection
and training of staff personnel, budgets and appropria-
tions, salaries, and records and files. The security
practices of each service are analyzed, both with respect
to physical security (classification, guarding, and con-
trol of classified documents, etc.) and security of per-
sonnel (clearances, indoctrination, security conscious-
ness, etc.). As elements of methods of operation,
practices regarding agents are discussed, as well as
techniques, available technical facilities, and devices
for security control of the population. The relation-
ships of each national service with the other national
services and with foreign (non-U.S.) services are
considered.
C. Key officials
This Subsection presents as concisely as possible the
background of key personalities of the agencies previ-
ously discussed, duly coordinated with SECTIONS 59 and
Key Personalities units of the NIS. The approach is
selective, with emphasis upon those elements of per-
sonal history that have specific bearing upon profes-
sional capabilities and characteristics.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection is designed to aid in the evaluation
of text material. Any portions of the text derived
from covert information not originally produced by the
contributing agency is so indicated. Within the text,
material originally acquired by the contributing agency
and less than generally reliable is appropriately labeled.
This Subsection indicates, accordingly, that the ma-
terial not thus qualified in the text is considered gen-
erally reliable. If overt materials have been used to
any great extent in the Section, this fact is stated.
A bibliography of such sources may be included.
Section 57. Subversion
A. General
This Subsection provides an appropriate approach to
the material presented in the remainder of the Section.
It discusses the fundamental factors affecting subversive
activities and capabilities in the country. Toward this
end it touches briefly on the underlying social, political,
diplomatic, religious, cultural, and economic factors
making for susceptibility or resistance to Communist
or other forms of subversion. Both vulnerabilities and
strengths are to be related to the social structure, cul-
tural values, social and political institutions, and eco-
nomic conditions as discussed in other Sections of
CHAPTERS IV, V, and VI. Give particular attention to
manifestations of social disunity.
The Subsection presents an overall picture of sub-
versive activities (both Communist and other) from
within or without the country directed against the
regime, characterizing the different types of subversion
and identifying the principal subversive groups and
target groups, especially those in the government and
among police, and defense forces. Note the overall
relative strength, discipline, and influence of sub-
versive groups. Review government policy with re-
spect to subversive activities, including constitutional,
legislative, and administrative measures designed to
contain and control subversion, the policies and atti-
tudes of the country's political leadership, and the
effectiveness of police and security forces in dealing
with subversive activities. Whenever possible, the
Subsection concludes with an estimate of overall sub-
versive capabilities and an analysis of subversive
trends, particularly in the government and among
police and defense forces.
B. Soviet and Communist subversive activ-
ities
This Subsection includes a discussion of Soviet and
Communist subversive activities within and directed
against the country, with emphasis upon the activities
of 1) the Communist Party, 2) Communist or Com-
munist-dominated trade unions, and 3) Communist
front organizations, designed to appeal either to the
nation as a whole ("Peace" movement, Soviet Friend-
ship Societies) or to special groups in the population
such as veterans, students, youth, women, racial and
religious minorities, and intellectuals. Each organiza-
tion or group of importance is presented, with informa-
tion as to name, size, character of membership, tech-
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
niques of recruitment, affiliated national and inter-
national organizations, key figures, funds, aims, meth-
ods of operation (both overt and covert), propaganda
policies and techniques, utilization for the purpose of
espionage and sabotage or as a cover for paramilitary
activities, strength or weakness of Communist influence
within the groups, internal differences or rivalries among
the leadership, influence in national or local affairs, and
ability to affect U.S. interests. When feasible, such
information may be presented in tabular form. Dis-
cuss the significant history, covert apparatus, and
relationship of these organizations and groups to Com-
munist and Communist-influenced organizations out-
side the country. (Correlate with SECTION 53.) Note
the extent and manner in which subversive activities
are supported by economic, political, military, and other
action. Plans or potentialities for sabotage under war-
time conditions are considered, including infiltration of
civil defense organizations. The discussion throughout
indicates the extent to which Communism has suc-
ceeded in infiltrating the economic, social, political,
military, and cultural life of the country and has gained
control over key positions in government, the armed
forces, commerce, industry, transportation, and com-
munications. Whenever possible the reasons for failure
or success are explained. (When SECTION 57 applies to a
Communist-controlled country, the Subject Outline
may be adapted as seems appropriate.)
C. Other subversive activities
This Subsection includes a discussion of all non-
Communist groups that threaten to overturn the exist-
ing order by extralegal means, including any under-
Section 58.
For the purposes of this Section, propaganda covers
1) governmental action to influence individual and
collective attitudes and behavior at home and abroad,
and 2) similar action within the area by significant
unofficial agencies formed for the purpose of conducting
propaganda on an international scale and constituting
an important adjunct to official propaganda, e.g.,
Radio Free Europe. Detailed treatment of the propa-
ganda of private groups is normally reserved for the
Sections in CHAPTERS IV and V containing the primary
treatment of these groups: religious and educational
groups in SECTION 43, labor and management groups in
SECTION 44, political and pressure groups in SECTION 53,
subversive groups in SECTION 57. Mass communica-
tion media and the extent of their use are discussed in
detail in SECTION 43, under Public Information.
A. General
This Subsection brings into perspective the categories
of propaganda contained in the remainder of the Sec-
tion. It gives an overview of the relative importance
PAGE 10
ground, guerrilla, or resistance movements. It pro-
vides detailed information on the origin and history,
political doctrine, aims and tactics, character of mem-
bership, organization, leadership, financing, methods of
operation, propaganda policies and techniques, affilia-
tions with other national and international organiza-
tions, and clandestine activities of each group and
attempts to estimate its subversive potential. The re-
lationship of such movements to the Communists is
noted, including Communist cooperation, support, or
opposition. The Subsection also includes the sub-
versive activities of representatives of non-Communist
countries directed against the country, if the country
is not under Communist control, reserving for SECTION
58 primary treatment of their propaganda. Special
attention is given to any organized resistance to
military service, with statistics on evasion cases, if
available.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this con-
nection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Propaganda
of the following elements of the propaganda effort: the
process of conscious manipulation of any or all means
of communication, the ideas and doctrines disseminated
by means of such manipulation, the plans and projects
as well as agents established or used to further such
ideas or doctrines, and the proportion of the national
budget spent on propaganda activities. It indicates
briefly the extent to which government propaganda at
home and abroad is supported or undermined by the
propaganda of domestic political parties or other un-
official groups (reserve discussion of the specific propa-
ganda of each such group for the Section in which it
receives primary treatment). The prevalent attitude
of the people toward propaganda is noted, i.e., resistance
toward or awareness of propaganda as such, both domes-
tic and foreign. Indicate the part played by important
educational, religious, and social groups and traditions
in shaping this attitude. This Subsection also discusses
the extent and aims of the nation's propaganda effort
abroad in relation to its regional and international
political and economic status.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER V
B. Domestic propaganda
Explain overall domestic propaganda activity with a
general analysis of the governmental organization, ob-
jectives, major themes, content, method, effectiveness,
trends, and target groups. Include some general ob-
servations concerning the degree of susceptibility of
the target groups as a whole. Discuss the organization
and functioning of the major domestic propaganda
agencies and efforts in terms of the following criteria:
1) Identification and description of activity; any
international connections; approximate size of effort?
giving number of offices and personnel; source of funds;
level of expenditures; leadership in terms of general
background, connections, and ability of the key per-
sonnel as a group (include names of individual leaders,
if helpful) ; real source of sponsorship or control if other
than government, with an indication as to whether
target groups are aware of such control; and method of
operation, whether overt, clandestine, or both. Civil
defense propaganda is included when appropriate.
(Coordinate with SECTIONS 52, 59, and/or Key Person-
alities unit.)
2) Long- and short-range objectives and principal
themes utilized to achieve them, in relation to specific
target groups. Indicate the significance of these
groups, why they were selected as targets, and the
priorities assigned. (For primary treatment of such
groups correlate with other appropriate Sections such
as SECTION 42.)
3) Content in relation to specific themes. De-
scribe, wherever possible, specific message content used
to put themes across, such as use of slogans, e.g., "Asia
for Asiatics," catchwords, e.g., "Iron Curtain," and
symbols, e.g.., "capitalism," etc.
4) Communication methods used. Describe in
some detail, where possible, the methods and media
used by the agencies concerned, covering the extent,
kind, and effectiveness of use of: press and periodicals,
books and libraries, information centers, exhibits,
posters, radio and TV, motion pictures, and person-to-
person communication, e.g., planted rumors, whispering
campaigns, lectures, paid agitators, etc. (Correlate
with SECTION 43, under Public Information.)
5) Effectiveness. Where possible, analyze the
effectiveness of coverage and the degree of penetration
of specific target groups.
C. Propaganda directed abroad
Deal fully with the domestic organization and func-
tioning of the major governmental agencies involved in
directing propaganda abroad, including headquarters'
organization, source and extent of funds, facilities, con-
trol, leadership, objectives, and nature and extent of
foreign influence on operations. Discuss from the same
standpoint the activities within the area of unofficial
agencies, domestic or foreign, engaged in directing
significant propaganda abroad in support of the official
effort. A discussion and graphic presentation showing
the proportion of the national propaganda effort being
expended toward various countries or general geo-
graphic areas should be included. Target audiences,
organization and methods abroad, and effectiveness
will be dealt with in detail by the NIS on the recipient
country(ies) (see below, under Propaganda by Foreign
Countries) and will be treated here only to the extent
necessary to place in perspective the domestic opera-
tions involved in dissemination of propaganda abroad.
Full information should be given here, however, on
target audiences, organization and methods, and
quality, type, and volume of propaganda directed to
the United States.
D. Propaganda by foreign countries
Deal fully with the major efforts within the area of
both friendly and unfriendly governments, including
targets, audiences, organization, methods (such as
"friendship" campaigns, visits by official or unofficial
delegations, etc.) and facilities within the area for the
dissemination of their propaganda. Treat in the same
way the local activities of unofficial foreign agencies
which serve as an important adjunct to the propaganda
of foreign governments. Assess the effectiveness of
each major propaganda effort in achieving its objec-
tives, except that of the U.S. Government (however,
data on the factually measurable response to U.S. efforts,
such as numbers using USIS libraries, may be included).
In NIS areas not under Communist control, indicate
the extent to which domestic Communist organizations
serve as vehicles for the dissemination of Soviet or
Soviet-bloc propaganda (reserve the primary discussion
of domestic Communist propaganda for SECTION 53 or
57 and, where applicable, SUPPLEMENT VI). Organiza-
tion and functioning in the countries of origin of the
major foreign agencies and groups involved will be
treated here only to the extent necessary to explain
their operations within the recipient country, detailed
treatment being reserved for the NIS on the originating
countries (see above under Propaganda Directed
Abroad).
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
PAGE 11
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Section 59. Biographies of Key Personalities
A. General
Point out briefly the general characteristics of the
group of personalities selected for treatment in this
Section, particularly with reference to political affilia-
tion, education and training, experience, religion, and
social status. Also note the nature and social status
of the groups through which the individuals rose to
power.
Indicate clearly the ba?is on which personalities were
selected for treatment in this Section. If the nation
produces few leaders or if there are few or many leaders
in certain fields such as labor, indicate the major factors
underlying this situation.
B. Individuals
This Section consists of individual studies of key
people who play or are likely to play vital roles in the
fields of politics, government, religion, education, art
and cultural activities, labor, business, or public infor-
mation. Each individual study covers the following
areas: 1) the subject's position, influence, and poten-
tialities in his respective field; 2) his or her personality
as revealed by significant attitudes and behavior, and
PAGE 12
interests and aptitudes; 3) education and occupational
history; 4) group (family, class, racial, ethnic, national,
and other) affiliations; 5) religious -background and
extent of participation in religious activity; 6) personal
accomplishments (publications, knowledge of languages,
etc.); 7) attitudes and predispositions toward the
United States, the U.S.S.R., and other countries and
toward major national and international problems; 8)
any significant personal interests or hobbies which
might have a bearing on accessibility and a determina-
tion of vulnerabilities; and 9) media habits.
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Under Maintenance, SECTION 59 is generally superseded by Key
Personalities, in which all NIS biographical material is consoli-
dated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER VI
ECONOMIC
Section 60 Introduction
Section 61 Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
Section 62 Fuels and Power
Section 63 Minerals and Metals
Section 64 Manufacturing and Construction
Section 65 Trade and Finance
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
SECTION 60. INTRODUCTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Chapter VI
Economic structure
Economic dynamics
Economic planning
Strategic aspects of the economy
Economic
OUTLINE
SECTION 61. AGRICULTURE, FISHERIES, AND FORESTRY
A. General
B. Agriculture
1. General aspects
2. Physical features
3. Land use
4. Size of farm holdings, tenure, and
labor
5. Production practices, equipment, and
supplies
6. Production and trade
7. Agricultural organizations, institu-
tions, and policies
8. Prospects for expanding production
C. Fisheries
1. Catch of fish and other aquatic prod-
ucts
2. Major fishing areas
3. Fishing operations
4. Utilization of catch
5. Foreign trade in fishery products
6. Ownership and control
7. Government and industry policies
D. Food balance sheet
E. Forests and forest products
1. The forest resources
2. Primary forest products industries
3. Supply position
4. Forest policies and programs
F. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 62. FUELS AND POWER
A.
B.
C.
General
Solid fuels
Petroleum
1. General
2. Strategic supply position
3. Exploration and development
4. Refining and processing
5. Transportation
6. Equipment and materials
7. Labor, finance, and government policy
8. Natural gas
D. Electric power
1. Role of electric power in the national
economy
2. Growth of electric power production
and capacity
3. Generating plant
4. Sources of energy
5. Transmission system
6. The coordinated or interconnected
systems
7. Consumption of electric energy
8. Organization of the electric power
industry
9. Future developments
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 63. MINERALS AND METALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
General
Iron ore
Iron, steel, and mill products
Nonferrous ores, metals, and alloys
Nonmetallic minerals
Construction materials
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 64. MANUFACTURING AND CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
General
Industrial machinery and equipment
Vehicles
1. General
2. Civilian-type vehicles
3. Specialized military vehicles
Aircraft production
Shipbuilding
1. General
2. Production and repair activity
3. Economic resources and requirements
4. Shipyard facilities and production
methods
5. Future prospects of the industry
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
F. Explosives (industrial and military)
G. Arms and ammunition (including ex-
plosive devices), fire-control equipment,
and bomb sights
II. Other military equipment and supplies
I. Telecommunications equipment
J. Chemical industries
1. General
2. Industrial chemicals
3. Chemicals used in agriculture
4. Synthetic. rubber and fibers, and
plastics
5. Pharmaceuticals
K. Agricultural processing industries
L. Fibers, fabrics, and rubber
M. Construction industries
N. Other industries
0. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 65. TRADE AND FINANCE
JULY 1957
A. General
B. Business organization
C. Domestic trade and finance
1. Pattern of domestic trade
2. Domestic financial institutions and
their structure
3. Government finance and fiscal policy
D. International trade and finance
1. Balance of payments position
2. Foreign assets and liabilities
3. Government policies, practices and
institutions relative to international
trade and finance
4. Foreign trade organizations
E. Government wartime financing
F. Comments on principal sources
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Editorial
Instructions are followed in detail.
It is essential that analysts and editors be thoroughly
familiar with all of the following -explanatory material,
even though they are concerned with only a portion of
the outline of the Chapter. Analysts should keep in
mind that the outline is meant to serve as a guide and
not as a hard and fast statute of requirements for every
Section. It is to be used flexibly, adapted to suit the
particular economic circumstances of each area, and
the analysis elicits those economic features and develop-
ments which are important to that area.
1) Purpose: The purpose of CHAPTER VI is to pro-
vide a concise but complete survey of the economic
structure, potential, and importance of the Area.
The various Sections of the Chapter provide, in the
aggregate, an integrated view of the economy, the
pattern and direction of its development and the capac-
ity of the economy to adjust itself to change.
2) Treatment: SECTION 60, which is designed to give
an overall evaluation of the economy, is to be treated
in the special manner described under SECTION 60
below. The other Sections deal with basic materials,
energy resources, industries, trade and finance, and
such related subjects as are essential to an evaluation
of the economy of the Area and of the manner in which
it functions.
PAGE 2
Each Section includes all the factual data needed
to support the analysis. Such data are set forth, so
far as possible, in statistical tables, on charts and maps,
and in tabulations. Text is used for the purpose of
singling out the more significant aspects of the statis-
tical and graphic material and of assembling data that
do not readily lend themselves to tabular and graphic
presentation, or where scantiness of data makes tabular
treatment more bulky.
The general or "A" portions of each Section indicate
the significant aspects of the subject under discussion
and consider them as they would affect the nation's
strength as an enemy, neutral, or ally. Special em-
phasis is given to such problems as self-sufficiency,
capacity to expand production and supplies, and direc-
tion and rate of economic development.
It is especially important that full footnotes be
carried in file copies of the final draft, indicating source
of data plus any other notes necessary for full under-
standing of any qualifications of the data. This is
important for the implementation of the maintenance
program and for further research. For the copies to
be submitted to CIA only the principal references and
explanatory notes are carried.
3) Visual presentation: Maps, charts, graphs, and
photographs are provided wherever they will serve in
lieu of text, or to summarize or clarify textual and
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER V1 4.01??????????
statistical matter. Appropriate reference regarding
such visual aids always appears in the text.
4) Use pattern: Major uses of items are shown quan-
titatively. This information is given for all consump-
tion including those items that are imported. In the
case of items that are used for one purpose which is
self-evident, the requirement for this information does
not of course apply.
5) Units of measure and value: See NIS Editorial
Instructions (E, 6, Statistical Data) for detailed rules.
6) Years to be reported: Annual statistical data (by
calendar, crop, or fiscal years) are reported in accord-
ance with the practice in the Area. For the most
recent data, however, if not annual, reporting is in
the largest available fraction of a year. As a general
rule, figures for any significant span of years or an
average of such years will suffice for comparative pur-
poses. If data are taken from two or more sources,
care must be exercised to assure comparability; if data
are not comparable, appropriate footnotes explaining
the noncomparability will be included.
Section 60. Introduction
The purpose of this Section is twofold. Firstly, it
gives an integral view of the structure of the economy,
the pattern and direction of the development, and the
capacity of the economy to adjust itself to external or
internal political, economic, and social changes. Sec-
ondly, it serves as a frame of reference for proper
evaluation of the material, both factual and interpre-
tive, presented in the subsequent Sections of the
Chapter.
Detailed accounts of the component parts of the
economy are presented in the respective Sections of
this and other Chapters and Supplements. Here, the
significant aspects of each sector of the economy are
defined, and the part each sector plays in the total
economic scope and direction of the economic process
is assessed. The Section presents the overall produc-
tion or other figures needed to indicate the position
of any vital industries (such as steel), both in structure
of the economy of the Area and in relation to world
production.
A. Economic structure
This Subsection describes in broad terms the main
structural features of the economy. It examines the
position and importance of the various sectors of
economic activity (including distribution and transpor-
tation) both in terms of their contribution to national
income and in relation to the country's resources and
to their potential development. It also considers em-
ployment patterns as bearing upon the above require-
ments. It notes the relation of the various sectors of
the economy to national stability.
It discusses types and rate of domestic capital
accumulation, recent pattern of utilization, and factors
stimulating or limiting capital formation such as pri-
vate or government investment policies, domestic and
foreign markets, foreign investments, etc. The discus-
sion, moreover, analyzes the nature of the economic
development in terms of 'changes in the composition
of the gross product.
B. Economic dynamics
This Subsection is devoted to a definition and
analysis of the forces, including socioeconomic trends
and attitudes, which at present determine the orienta-
tion of the economy. The discussion examines the
technological advance of economic processes along with
other factors making for development of the various
sectors of the economy, as well as obstacles to develop-
ment, and factors making for recession or disintegra-
tion. It notes the effect, if any, of U.S. and other
foreign activities in the country which have significance
to the economy. It evaluates the competitive strength
of the economy in terms of productivity of labor,
degree of mechanization, etc., and appraises the
ability of the economy to make appropriate adjust-
ments to change, including changing patterns of world
trade. It also examines the role of the state in con-
trolling and influencing economic organization, activity,
and development and evaluates the significance of
entrepreneurial activities of the state.
C. Economic planning
This Subsection describes briefly the orientation of
current national policy and indicates the areas of
economic activity to which it applies, the scope and
orientation of long-range economic planning, and
examines critically the degree of disparity between
plans and economic capabilities of the area. It notes
important factors influencing economic planning and
development such as the ability and attitudes of the
economic elite, its political power and international
ties. It indicates how the government proposes to
finance the realization of its long-range economic plans,
and examines the extent to which such plans are being
realized. It discusses the nature and amount of
assistance, if any, from abroad in furthering plans.
, PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
41.01111.1111111.111.1 NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
D. Strategic aspects of the economy
In this Subsection discussion covers the problem of
the strategic supply position and economic war po-
tential, including the extent to which the country is
or can readily become self-sufficient in its major re-
quirements and what conditions must be fulfilled in
order to increase the degree of self-sufficiency of the
_ area. The problems of self-sufficiency and economic.
capacity for war are considered not only with respect
to available natural resources but also in relation to
existing manpower and its technical capabilities, and
in relation to available installatiens affecting produc-
tion. With respect to manpower, consideration is given
to conclusions reached in CHAPTER IV On problems of
mobility, existing skills, adaptability of labor to new
productive processes, and feasibility of increasing the
labor force through mobilization of overage and under-
A. General
age laborers and women. With respect to the existing
productive plant, attention is given to the degree of
utilization of existing facilities. The analysis indi-
cates the 'causes of significant deficiencies or surpluses.
It also indicates the degree to which the economy is
vulnerable to military attack, in terms of dependence
on a particular sector of the economy or a particular
group of installations. In this connection it considers
conclusions reached in CHAPTER III with respect to
the transportation system and the manner in which it
affects the economic war potential of the area. Special
attention is given to the economy's vulnerability to
manipulation by foreign interests either through infil-
tration of the economy or external economic measures.
The Subsection notes the extent to which the nation is
able to or does carry on similar activity abroad (with
cross-reference to SECTIONS 57 and 58 if appropriate).
Section 61. Agriculture, Fisheries, and Forestry
This Subsection gives a concise appraisal of the
agricultural sector of the economy. It defines the
position of agriculture, including primary processing,
in terms of its contribution to national income, as a
field of capital investment and source of employment.
It discusses briefly recent developments or major
trends in land ownership and land use with particular
reference to production patterns and techniques.
The degree of the country's self-sufficiency in food,
feed, and industrial crops is indicated, and the coun-
try's position as a market for and an international sup-
plier of agricultural commodities, including processed
products, is discussed briefly.
The Subsection summarizes current governmental
policies with respect to ownership and utilization of
land, agricultural production, and prices, as well as in
relation to international controls and agreements that
bear upon production, international prices, and allo-
cation of markets.
It indicates the relative importance of the fishing
industry in the national economy, and briefly describes
the organization of the industry and the manner in
which it is protected and regulated by the government.
It discusses in broad terms the position of the forest
industry in the national economy, with an indication
of the extent and distribution of forest resources.
Recent developments in the exploitation of resources
and government policies relating to the conservation
and national utilization of forest resources and to
primary processing activity are summarized, and the
PAGE 4
country's dependence upon foreign markets and sources
of supply is discussed.
B. Agriculture
1. GENERAL ASPECTS
This subtopic briefly indicates the general extent
and nature of agriculture including the relative im-
portance of the different types of farming such as self-
sufficiency, commercial, state or collective, cooperative,
quasi-feudal, and paternalistic. It mentions any social
and cultural attitudes which have a direct and signifi-
cant effect on agricultural production and practices or
on consumption. It also notes the extent of regional
and crop specialization versus mixed farming.
2. PHYSICAL FEATURES
This subtopic indicates the suitability of the country
for agriculture in terms of terrain, soil fertility, and
climate (temperature and precipitation). (Correlation
with SECTIONS 23 and 24, where weather, climate, and
topography are treated from the standpoint of military
operations.) The principal agricultural regions are
described.
3. LAND USE
The discussion covers the approximate amount and
percentage of the land area that is in agricultural use;
the relation of physical features to the pattern and
possibilities of land use; the uses of arable land (crop,
orchard, and rotation pasture and meadow land) and
its distribution among the major agricultural pursuits.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAP TER VI
4. SIZE OF FARM IIOLDINGS, TENURE, AND
LABOR
This subtopic gives an overall statement in regard to
land ownership and size of operating units and farm
properties. It discusses prevailing systems of tenure
and the distribution of the farm labor force between
owner-operators, tenants, and hired labor. It indi-
cates types of labor contracts and the extent of unem-
ployment or underemployment of farm labor.
5. PRODUCTION PRACTICES, EQUIPMENT,
AND SUPPLIES
The discussion here covers production practices and
techniques with reference to intensity of farming,
multiple cropping and intercropping, -crop rotation,
control of plant diseases and parasites, use of seed,
farm machinery and equipment, draft animals, and
fertilizers. It indicates the nature and need for clear-
ing, irrigation, draining, and terracing. Quantitative
data on principal types of farm machinery used are
included. Use and feasibility of tractors and combines
and other power equipment are indicated. As data
permit, the degree of self-sufficiency and foreign trade
in regard to farm machinery, chemical fertilizers, seed,
insecticides, and fungicides is discussed. Cross-reference
is made to SECTION 64, Subsections B (Industrial
Machinery), C (Motor Vehicles), and J (Chemical
Fertilizers) if these Subsections contain additional
information on sources of agricultural supplies.
6. PRODUCTION AND TRADE
This subtopic summarizes briefly total crop and live-
stock production and supply, indicating the relative
importance of products or product groups to the
economy and dependence on external trade for supply.
It accompanies this summary with a production and
net trade summary for a representative period or year,
showing amount available for domestic consumption.
a. MAJOR CROPS ? The following is discussed for
each of the major food, feed, and industrial crops: coin-
parative importance in the agricultural economy, area
under cultivation and geOgraphical location, total out-
put, yields, imports and/or exports, domestic consump-
tion, planting and harvesting dates, diseases, and
insect pests. Broad indication is given of the manner
in which crops move within the country from land or
storage facilities to processing centers and consump-
tion areas, or to export ports. Rice milling on farms
and other on-farm processing for household use are
discussed in detail here, cross-reference being made to
SECTION 64, Subsection K, for all other agricultural
processing industries, including commercial wheat and
rice milling. Farm and commercial storage and drying
facilities are discussed.
As much of the data as possible are presented in
tabular form or on maps.
b. LIVESTOCK AND LIVESTOCK PRODUCTS ? Num-
bers, products, and, if feasible, breeds, animal diseases,
and parasites are discussed here. If appropriate, the
geographical location and carrying capacity of grazing
areas are indicated; the scale of individual enterprises
and production methods are discussed. The supply
of livestock feed and feeding practices in both moat
and dairy products are discussed briefly.
Production of and trade in livestock products, in-
cluding movements of livestock and products to proc-
essing plants or the consumption markets and export
ports, are noted. As appropriate, cross-reference is
made to SECTION 64, Subsections K and L, for the com-
mercial processing of livestock products. Tables,
charts, and maps are used wherever possible.
C. MARKETING AND TRANSPORTATION ? An evalu-
ation is given here of the adequacy of transportation
and markets for agricultural products and the effect
on agriculture. Marketing and transportation facili-
ties needed for further development of agricultural
resources are indicated.
d. INTERNATIONAL TRADE IN AGRICULTURAL PROD-
UCTS ? The discussion here covers briefly agriculture's
contribution to total export and import trade and the
composition of agricultural trade. The major foreign
markets and sources of imports and the nature of trade
arrangements in agricultural products are indicated.
7. AGRICULTURAL ORGANIZATIONS, INSTI-
TUTIONS, AND POLICIES
a. AGRICULTURAL ORGANIZATIONS ? This subtopic
discusses farm operators' and workers' associations,
specialized producers' organizations, cooperatives, and
the organization and functions of the Ministry of Agri-.
culture and other government agencies assisting
agriculture.
b. GOVERNMENT POLICIES The discussion here
covers such elements of trade and market policy as
price and production controls and guarantees, protec-
tion, and subsidies. Land reform and/or development
programs including foreign aid programs, if any, are
discussed, cross-reference being made to preceding sub-
headings as appropriate.
C. FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS AND SERVICES ? The
discussion here deals with sources and availability of
agricultural credit, the burden of taxation, and crop
and property insurance. The level and pattern, types,
need, and sources of agricultural investment are
indicated.
d. EDUCATION, RESEARCH, AND EXTENSION ? The
general level of literacy and education of the farm
population is indicated here. The extent of agricul-
tural education and of agricultural extension and re-
search activities is discussed briefly (correlation with
SECTION 43, Subsection C, Education). The ade-
quacy of professional and technical services such as
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PA Cr E 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
?????????????? NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
veterinary science, horticulture, agricultural engineer-
ing, and agronomy is indicated briefly.
8. PROSPECTS FOR EXPANDING PRODUC-
TION
This subtopic dismisses the outlook for agricultural
production and productivity in the light of existing
and impending programs. The major factors limiting
expansion and the prospective relationship between
agricultural production and population growth are
indicated.
C. Fisheries
Whaling is included throughout this Subsection,
wherever it is of importance.
1. CATCH OF FISH AND OTHER AQUATIC
PRODUCTS
This discussion covers total annual production, with
tabulated data; seasons of abundance; trends in pro-
duction, and reasons for changes.
2. MAJOR FISHING AREAS
Discussion of significant aspects, such as accessi-
bility, with inclusion of appropriate map material.
3. FISH ENG OPERATIONS
a. METHODS Types of gear used; advances in
introduction of new techniques; brief reference to
availability of materials for manufacturing netting,
rope, and other equipment, and plant facilities for
manufacturing gear and other fishing equipment.
b. FISHING VESSELS ? Types and numbers of
motorized and nonmotorized fishing craft; condition of
fishing fleet; programs for modernization of fleet; pro-
ductive capacity of fleet.
C. PERSONNEL ? Number employed full and part
time.
4. UTILIZATION OF CATCH
a. DISTRIBUTION OF CATCH ? Domestic consump-
tion, amounts marketed fresh, frozen, canned, salted,
dried, smoked, etc., methods of distribution with brief
mention of availability of refrigeration and ice-making
facilities.
b. PROCESSING ? Types of processed products;
location and number of processing installations; pro-
ductive capacity of installations; employment; avail-
ability of processing material (cans, salt, etc.).
C. MANUFACTURE OF BY-PRODUCTS ? Types of by-
products; location and number of plants;. productive
capacity of plants; employment. Cross-reference is
made to SECTION 64, Subsection K to avoid duplication.
PAGE 6
JULY 1957
5. FOREIGN TRADE IN FISHERY PRODUCTS
6. OWNERSHIP AND CONTROL
Brief description of concentration or spread of
ownership including ownership of vessels as well as
ownership or control of related industries and services
such as transport, refrigeration and canning
7. GOVERNMENT AND INDUSTRY POLICIES
Current regulations for fisheries; international agree-
ments; programs for expansion; industry organization,
if any, with its policies and program.
D. Food balance sheet
The food consumption habits of the population are
discussed briefly. A food balance sheet for the area is
included. This Subsection summarizes the data on
production, trade in, and quantities available for con-
sumption, of all significant food products. It presents,
insofar as possible, a concise picture of the type of
products consumed, the proportion supplied from do-
mestic sources, the dependence upon outside sources,
and the surplus supplies of food products normally
available for export.
E. Forests and forest products
1. THE FOREST RESOURCES
The general extent and nature of the forest resources
are described here, indicating the relationship of total
and productive forest areas to total land area and other
classes of land use. A summary is given of the overall
forest situation, with emphasis on productive potential
as compared with actual forest products output and
requirements.
The geographic distribution of forests and their
general condition and accessibility are discussed. A
description is given of the major forest types and their
principal commercial timber species.
An analysis is given of the pattern of forest ownership
and the influence of ownership on forest condition.
The volume and accessibility of standing timber by
broad categories is indicated and the volume distribu-
tion appraised in terms of economic exploitation.
A comparison of the annual growth and cut of timber
is made and any imbalance as affecting present and
future self-sufficiency or deficiency in forest products
is evaluated.
2. PRIMARY FOREST PRODUCTS INDUS-
TRIES
The discussion here treats the establishment, de-
velopment, and potential of these industries in relation
to their raw material base and their present position
in the national economy.
A description is given of the individual industries,
such as timber extraction, lumber, plywood and ve-
neer, railway ties, pulpwood and woodpulp, fuelwood,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
CHAP T
other roundwood products, cork, naval stores, and
other nonwood products such as natural dyes and
tannins. Overall industry structure and location, in-
vestment, output, productive capacity, employment,
factors affecting production, power sources, equipment,
production techniques, and trade associations are
discussed.
Cross-reference is made to SECTION 64 for data on
synthetic dyes and for additional data on paper pulp
and other wood products including cork products.
3. SUPPLY POSITION
An analysis is made of the general position of the
area with respect to self-sufficiency or dependency in
forest products and overall wood balances in terms of
roundwood equivalents. The discussion indicates
trends and patterns as concerns consumption of and
requirements for principal wood and nonwood forest
products.
The foreign trade in forest products, with emphasis
on products of strategic importance, is examined.
A. General
: CIA-R0P79-01055A000300030001-4
6111111111.111,01411MIP
ER VI ,
4. FOREST POLICIES AND PROGRAMS
An outline is given of the basic national policies,
and the principal laws and regulations affecting for-
estry, forest industries, and foreign trade in forest
products are described.
The organization, administration, and efficiency of
the forestry agencies and the status of forestry educa-
tion are discussed.
Current public, private, and cooperative forestry
programs, including research, are examined.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 62. Fuels and Power
Discuss the position of the fuels and power industry
in the national economy.
Discuss the supply and use patterns of various forms
of energy, including the conversion of coal to coke and
related products, manufactured gas, and petroleum
substitutes. Comment upon the interchangeability of
fuels in temis of the area's requirements and economic
activities. Indicate the country's dependence upon
foreign sources of supply. Relate the country's do-
mestic resources and their development to. future
requirements.
Include in this Section: 1) a table showing in calories
equivalents consumption of primary fuels (coal, oil,
natural gas, hydroelectric power); 2) a table showing in
calories equivalents consumption of all fuels by major
consumer classes.
B. Solid fuels
The following outline insofar as applicable is to
be used for each of the fuels to be discussed. The
principal categories of fuels are treated separately:
coal and lignite; peat; fuelwood and charcoal. Discus-
sion of coal is to include the broad aspects of conver-
sion of coal to coke and related products, manufactured
gas, and petroleum substitutes; this discussion is not
to approach the depth of detail and technical aspects
contained in the Subsections on petroleum, iron and
steel, explosives, chemicals, and rubber. Appropriate
cross reference is made to these Subsections.
Discuss production and consumption trends, and
domestic use pattern.
Analyze the competitive position of the industry in
the world market and conditions affecting foreign
trade and indicate the country's dependence upon
foreign sources of supply.
Describe in general terms the nature, extent and
location of deposits and indicate factors affecting
exploitation, such as accessibility, capital requirements,
and manpower.
Discuss government policies with respect to develop-
ment of reserves, exploitation of available deposits,
utilization of foreign capital, and foreign competition.
Discuss production in the more important individual
mines. Indicate factors affecting operation of the
mines, such as degree of mechanization, manpower,
transportation, availability of fuel, by-product opera-
tions, etc.
Present in tabular form: 1) location of mines, grade
and extent of deposits, type of operation, production
capacity, manpower, ownership, remarks on extent of
mechanization; 2) annual production by regions and/or
?Lolimerimme
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
arnammusifform NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
mines; 3) annual consumption by consumer; 4) i
ports and exports by countries; 5) stocks.
C. Petroleum
Throughout this Subsection, cross reference to
tions of SUPPLEMENT V wherever appropriate.
1. GENERAL
a. SUMMARY Overall petroleum supply and
mand situation.
Analysis of principal aspects of the industry in-:
eluding development pattern and reserve position.
b. STRATEGIC SIGNIFICANCE ? Asset Or liability
position petroleum-wise to the United States.
C. INTERNATIONAL SIGNIFICANCE ? Importance as
a world source of, or world market for, crude and re-
fined petroleum products.
Influence of the world petroleum situation, in both
strategic and economic terms, on the area's petroleum
activity and development.
d. DOMESTIC SIGNIFICANCE Degree of self-suffi-
ciency or import dependence for crude and petroleum
products, as well as technical personnel, equipment,
and supplies for the petroleum industry.
Importance of the industry to the overall domestic
economy.
Importance of the industry as a source of govern-
ment revenue and foreign exchange.
Domestic requirements demand on foreign exchange
assets.
JULY 1957
Refined products?production for representative pe-
'.Hods. Discuss trends.
Imports of crude oil and refined products for latest
year available, showing principal products and coun-
tries of origin. Discuss trends. Indicate briefly manner
Sec-
and extent trade is affected by foreign exchange, tariffs,
quotas, and other trade restrictions.
Exports of crude oil and refined products for the
latest year available, showing principal products and
de-
country of destination. Discuss trends. Indicate
briefly the manner and extent trade is affected by
foreign exchange, tariffs, quotas, and other trade
restrictions.
Consumption of refined products for the latest year
available, showing principal refined products and major
consumer interests. Discuss trends. Also discuss
adequacy of supply and indicate, if deficiencies exist,
the probable effect on industrial expansion and the con-
duct of military operations,
0. GEOGRAPHIC AND TRANSPORTATION ASPECTS ?
Indicate the geographic dispersion of producing areas,
refineries, consuming centers, export and import ports,
as well as transportation pattern and facilities, and
discuss their general effect on petroleum industry de-
velopment.
f. GENERAL VULNERABILITY OF PETROLEUM IN-
D USTRY INSTALLATIONS
Producing fields
Refineries and processing plants
Pipelines
Storage
Terminals and docks
g. EXPANSION OR CONTRACTION ? Discuss any
probable expansion or contraction of exploration, pro-
duction, processing and consumption, including the
effect of labor-management relationships, with respect
to crude petroleum, natural gas, natural gas liquids,
and substitute liquid fuels.
2. STRATEGIC SUPPLY POSITION
Crude petroleum and liquid hydrocarbon substi-
tutes?production for representative periods. Discuss
trends.
PAGE 8
3. EXPLORATION AND DEVELOPMENT
Discuss the significant historical and technological
aspects, as well as present pattern, of exploration and
development, giving a succinct appreciation of the
country's petroliferous character. State the amount
of reserves, indicating their relative importance to
world reserves. Indicate the proved reserves by main
fields. With respect to concessions, summarize the
development to date, indicating areas, concessionaires,
and terms of important concessions.
4. REFINING AND PROCESSING
Brief historical background, including war damage
and restoration. General pattern and present relative
significance of crude oil refining, natural gas liquids
processing, and synthetic liquid fuels manufacture.
Present in tabular form names, location, type, capacity,
ownership, and operators of existing and proposed
refineries. Relative adequacy to meet peacetime
domestic requirements. Succinct discussion of future
plans and factors affecting them. Potential importance
in event of a wartime emergency.
5. TRANSPORTATION
General appreciation of overall petroleum trans-
port, storage, and terminal facilities, including extent,
purpose, capacities, relationship to adjacent countries,
and other geographic considerations, as well as to other
means of transport and relative adequacy for peace-
time requirements. Describe the principal pipelines,
indicating the location, length, size, capacity, and date
of construction. A short account of significant his-
torical and geographical aspects, including war damage
and restoration, and a brief discussion of probable
development. Where pertinent, comparisons to United
States facilities are made for general orientation and
appreciation.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
iiiiimmormsm"
CHAPTER VI
JULY 1957
6. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
Summarize the domestic capabilities for the manu-
facture of equipment and supplies required by the
petroleum industry for exploration, production, refining
and processing, and distribution, indicating the degree
of self-sufficiency. Where deficiencies exist, indicate
source of import.
7. LABOR, FINANCE, AND GOVERNMENT
POLICY
Indicate the availability, relative importance, effi-
ciency, political complexion, and political influence of
the petroleum labor force.
Examine the extent of capital investment in, or
control over, the various components of the industry,
by nationality and ownership, indicating overall rela-
tionship of foreign to local capital investment. De-
scribe the organizational pattern and external control
exercised over foreign oil companies. Evaluate briefly
the nature and extent of the domestic capital market
for petroleum industry investment. Discuss factors
affecting foreign capital investment in the industry,
such as the relationship of risk to return and the limi-
tations placed on the transfer abroad of capital and
earnings.
Discuss, analyze, and evaluate government policy
and basic or pertinent laws relating to the petroleum
industry, indicating particularly their relative influence
on the operations of foreign oil companies. Indicate
and evaluate the degree of control over oil industry
operations exercised by government organizations.
8. NATURAL GAS
Discuss the relative importance of the natural gas
industry to the economy of the country, indicating
reserves, production, and describing briefly the distri-
bution system. Discuss the extent of use for industry,
space heating and light, repressuring of oil fields, for
the production of natural gas liquids, as well as the
amount flared.
D. Electric power
1. ROLE OF ELECTRIC POWER IN THE NA-
TIONAL ECONOMY
Discuss extent to which population and industry
are served with electricity, for example, percentage to
total of households having electricity, of population
living in electrically lighted homes, of farms electrified,
and percentage of electric power employed in industry
related to total motive power employed in industry.
Discuss share of electric power industry in the na-
tional income, number of employees in the electric
power industry, and share of total capital assets em-
ployed in the electric power industry.
2. GROWTII OF ELECTRIC POWER PRODUC-
TION AND CAPACITY
Present and discuss summary data showing growth
of electric power production and capacity related to
population; distribution of electric power capacity and
production, by type of generation, for the country as
a whole; and distribution of electric power capacity
and production by major regions or systems.
3. GENERATING PLANT
Present and discuss summary data showing extent
to which plant capacity and production may be con-
centrated in a small number of large plants or dis-
tributed among a large number of small plants.
Describe major or special hydroelectric plants or
developments. Where water power constitutes an im-
portant source of energy for the production of electric
power, either potential or developed, discuss extent
to which these resources have been developed. If
possible, develop summary information of the follow-
ing type:
Location of undeveloped water power:
REGION
NUMBER
ov
SITES
ESTIMATED
AVERAGE
ANNUAL
OTJTPUT
ESTIMATED
INSTALLED
CAPACITY
Discuss accessibility of these resources to load
centers.
Give specific references to important studies which
have been made pertaining to power development of
the country's water resources.
Describe major thermal plants. Discuss extent to
which location may be influenced by supply of fuel,
availability of cooling water, consumption centers,
defense considerations.
Tabulate significant generating station statistics.
4. SOURCES OF ENERGY
Discuss relative importance of various sources of
energy in the production of electric power and extent
to which average annual fuel rates per kwh. production
reflect increases in efficiency of steam generation or
lack of modernization.
Discuss source of fuel, whether imported or indig-
enous, and, if imported, availability of foreign ex-
change for purchase of fuel.
5. TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Describe important transmission networks. Discuss
extent to which system serves to transfer power from
fuel and hydro sources to load centers; to interconnect
isolated communities and large population or industrial
centers; to provide emergency supply for normal facili-
ties out of service; t6 reduce reserve requirements; or
to eliminate inefficient plants.
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
miume NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
Discuss principal connections with other countries
and present summary data showing transfer of power
across international boundaries related to total pro-
duction or consumption.
6. TIIE COORDINATED OR INTERCON-
NECTED SYSTEMS
Describe present organization, arrangements, or
agreements for integrating interconnected facilities.
7. CONSUMPTION OF ELECTRIC ENERGY
Discuss the utilization of electric energy within the
area and tabulate electric energy consumption by class
of use, by number of customers, if available, and by
percent of total consumption and of annual kw.-hr.
consumption by each class. Analyze the relationships
disclosed in these computations.
Discuss present limitations in the use of electricity.
8. ORGANIZATION OF THE ELECTRIC
POWER 'INDUSTRY
Present and discuss summary data showing distri-
bution of electric power production and capacity by
class of ownership such as industrials, private utility
corporations, state-owned monopolies, distribution co-
operatives, etc.
Discuss extent to which industry is government-
owned, regulated, or operated.
Discuss extent to which production, transmission,
and distribution facilities are unified, or extent to
which production, transmission, and distribution facili-
ties are separately owned or operated.
Describe 'any central organizations that may exist
for planning and developing a national power policy or
program.
Discuss extent to which foreign capital may be
employed in this industry and its effect upon the in-
dustry's operating policies and practices.
PAGE
10
JULY 1957
9. FUTURE DEVELOPMENTS
Describe important programs for the expansion of
electric power and show the effect of these programs
upon present capacity and production.
Describe any factors which may encourage or limit
the future of. this industry such as unsatisfied demand,
shortage of capital, lack of resources, legislation, etc.
Attach a system map showing geographic location
of generating stations. In addition, show principal
transmission lines and substations by which these
plants are interconnected and by which energy is trans-
mitted to areas of consumption. Show construction
planned or in progress, as well as present capacity.
Statistical and operating data are to be shown in the
form prescribed in the example tables for FIGURES
62-1 through 62-9 on the following pages. Where
information is not available according to the required
standards, submit the best information available with
explanation of deviations from these standards. Data
in tables, FIGURES 62-7 through 62-9, are to be fur-
nished for the most recent period. Data in tables,
FIGURES 62-1 through 62-6 are to be furnished for
several years so that long-time trend analyses may be
developed.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source?
material used in preparing the -Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
LITARFIRIMmara?
CHAPTER VI
(EXAMPLES)
FIGURE 62-1. INSTALLED CAPACITY OF GENERATING FIGURE 62-2. ELECTRIC POWER PRODUCTION AND
PLANTS AND PRODUCTION CAPACITY
(By type of prime mover) (By major regions and systems)
TYPE OF PRIME MOVER
UTILITIES
Privately
owned
Publicly
owned
Industrials
Ilydro:
No. of plants
Capacity (kw)
Production (kwh)
Steam:
No. of plants
Capacity (kw)
Production (kwh)
Internal combustion:
No. of plants
Capacity (kw)
Production (kwh)
REGION OR SYSTEM
CAPACITY
PRODUCTION
kw
kwh,
FIGURE 62-3, ELECTRIC UTILITY CONSUMPTION OF
MAJOR FUELS
TYPE OF FUEL
PRODUCTION
CONSUMPTION
kwh
tons
FIGURE 62-4. ENERGY TRANSFERRED ACROSS INTERNATIONAL BOUNDARIES
(List receipts and deliveries separately)
ITEM NO.
TRANSFERRED FROM
TRANSFERRED TO
POINT OF TRANSFER
(0)
ANNUAL KWH
TRANSFERRED
(f)
Company or
agency.
(a)
Cbuntry
(b)
Company or
agency
(0)
Country
(d)
FIGURE 62-5. ELECTRIC POWER CONSUMPTION
CLASS OF USE (SUCH
AS RESIDENTIAL,
COMMERCIAL, INDUS-
TRIAL, ETC.)
NO. OF CUB-
TOMERS (IF
READILY
AVAILABLE)
% OF
TOTAL CON-
SUMPTION
ANNUAL
CONSUMP-
TION
kwh
FIGURE 62-6. ELECTRIC ENERGY USED IN
INDUSTRIAL OPERATION
(In kilowatts)
MAJOR CLASS OF IN-
DUSTRY
GENERATED
PURCHASED
CONSUMED
FIGURE 62-7. GENERATING STATION STATISTICS?FOR PLANTS OF .... KILOWATTS OR OVER
(OPERATING, UNDER CONSTRUCTION, OR PLANNED AS OF ? )
(List plants under subheadings for industrial or public utility; privately or publicly owned; steam, hydro, or internal combustion.)
MAP REF.
NO.
NAME AND LOCATIONOPERATOR*
OF PLANT
TYPE
INSTALLED
, CAPACITY
ANNUAL PRO-
DUCTION
REMARKS
(Including condition Of
plant, generator voltage,
phase and frequency, etc.)
* If the operator is not the same as the owner, or if control is held in another corporation, explain.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 11
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD
TRANSMISSION
INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
LINE. FIGURE 62-9. SIGNIFICANT SUBSTATION STATISTICS
FIGURE 62-8. SIGNIFICANT
STATISTICS
CHANGES UNDER
CHANGES UNDER
IN SERVICE
WAY OR
IN SERVICE
WAY OR
PLANNED
PLANNED
Name of operator and owner
Name of operator or owner
Line designation
Name and location of substa-
tion
From
Character of substation
To
Voltage
Voltage
Capacity
Operating
No. of transformers
Designed
Nature of change
Pole length of line
Date of change
Number of circuits
Start
Type of construction
Completion
Nature of change
Date of change
Start
Completion
Section 63. Minerals and Metals
A. General
Discuss briefly the position of the area's mineral
and metal industries in the national and world econ-
omies. Analyze the relative importance of the industry
in terms of its contribution to the national income, as
an employer of labor, and as an investment area.
Discuss the size of the industry in terms of the
country's requirement and in relation to foreign demand
for the industry's output.
Indicate the salient characteristics of the indus-
try such as: extent of reserves, locational and trans-
portation factors; dependence upon foreign sources for
supplies and equipment; productive potential; degree
of integration of the industry; technological aspects of
production; ownership; international agreements; gov-
ernment policies.
B. Iron ore
Discuss production and consumption trends, and
domestic use pattern.
Analyze the competitive position of the industry in
the world market and conditions affecting foreign trade,
and indicate the country's dependence upon foreign
sources of supply.
Describe in general terms the nature, extent, and
location of deposits, and indicate factors affecting
exploitation, such as accessibility, capital require-
ments, and manpower.
Discuss government policies with respect to de-
velopment of reserves, exploitation of available deposits,
utilization of foreign capital, and foreign competition.
PAGE 12
Discuss production in the more important individual
mines. Indicate factors affecting operation of the
mines, such as degree of mechanization, manpower,
transportation, availability of fuel, byproducts, etc.
Tables, maps, and graphics: Give in tables and,
where practicable, in graphic form, the following:
1) location of mines, grade and extent of deposits, type
of operation, production capacity, manpower, owner-
ship, remarks on extent of mechanization; 2) annual
production by regions, fields and/or mines; 3) imports
and exports by countries; 4) stocks.
C. Iron, steel, and mill products
This Subsection includes primary processing, which
is defined as including production of the following:
pig-iron, ingots, castings, finished hot-rolled products
(plates, sheets and strip, strip and sheet for cold re-
duced black plate and tin plate, hoops and cotton ties
and baling bands, bars, structural shapes, rails, splice
bars and tie plate bars, skelp, blanks or pierced billets,
wire rods, rolled forging billets, blooms and billets for
export, car wheels) ; further finished steel mill products
(cold finished and tool steel bars, cold rolled sheets and
strip, tin and terne slate, galvanized terne sheets,
finished black slate, tie plates, wire, woven wire fence,
bale ties, fence posts, nails and staples, pipe and tubes).
Discuss briefly productive capacity of the industry
and indicate current output, including data on lime-
stone and metallurgical coke (with cross-reference to
Subsection 62, B). Examine current production pat-
tern. Discuss the ability of the industry to meet
domestic requirements for particular steel products
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER VI IPPPRIUMPARIPP
and the extent of imports. Examine competitive
position of industry, government policies affecting
operation of industry, efficiency of operations, etc.
Discuss factors affecting production of the industry
as a whole and of major individual plants such as
degree of mechanization and efficiency of operations
with respect to supply of raw materials (including ferro-
alloys), fuel, transportation, manpower, markets, etc.
List in tabular form individual plants giving name,
location, productive capacity, number and typo of
furnaces, number and type of finishing installations,
output by products, operating and beneficial owner-
ship.
List in tabular form annual production, consumption
including use pattern, imports and exports by coun-
tries and principal types of products.
List in tabular form annual consumption and source
.of major raw materials: iron ore, ferroalloys, scrap,
fluxes, and fuels.
D. Nonferrous ores, metals, and alloys
Textual analysis and discussion are by Subsections
similar to those indicated above for Subsection B, Iron
Ore. Only those ores, metals and alloys of economic
or strategic importance are treated. A checklist is pro-
vided below. This Subsection includes the processes
through smelting, refining, and forming metal into
basic shapes.
In treating the processing industries, data are also
given on annual consumption and use pattern, includ-
ing scrap.
Data for ores are given in terms of specified content
or of the metal content of the ore, in accordance with
U.S. Bureau of Mines practice in the "World Review"
section of the Minerals Yearbook.
The following list serves as a guide for selecting the
products of importance in the area. Others not on
the list are treated if their importance warrants.
METALS AND ORES
Aluminum
Copper
Lead
Magnesium
Nickel
Tin
Zinc
Gold
Platinum and allied
metals (iridium,
osmium, palladi-
um, rhodium, ru-
theniurn)
Silver
Radium
Thorium
Uranium
Antimony
Arsenic
(Monazite)
Beryllium
Bismuth
Boron
Cadmium
Chromium
Cobalt
Columbium
Lithium
Manganese
Mercury
Molybdenum
Selenium
Tantalum
Tellurium
Thorium
Titanium
Tungsten
Vanadium
Zirconium
ALLOYS
Brass
Bronze
Bearing metal
Monel metal
Nichrome
Nickel silver
Stellite
Solder
E. Nonmetallic minerals
Textual analysis and discussion are by Subsections
similar to those indicated above for Subsection B,
Iron Ore. Only those materials of economic impor-
tance are treated. A checklist is provided below.
Except for fertilizer minerals, which are covered in
Subsection 64, J, this Subsection includes primary
processing as well as mining.
In treating the processing facilities, data are also
given on annual consumption, including use pattern.
The following list serves as a guide for selecting the
products of importance in the area. Others are treated
if their importance warrants.
Asbestos
Barite
Bentonite
Celestite
Chalk
Clays
Corundum, emery,
and artificial abra-
sives
Cryolite
Diamonds
Feldspar
Fluorspar
Graphite
Helium
Iodine
Kyanite
Limestone
Magnesite
Mica
F. Construction materials
Nitrates
Phosphate rock
Potash
Pyrite
Quartz crystals
Salt
Sapphire and
ruby
Sulfur
Talc
Discuss the position of the country's basic products
which comprise the major materials used in construc-
tion, exclusive of lumber, plywood, structural iron
and steel, and asphalt, which are treated in detail
in other Sections of CHAPTER VI. This Subsection
is devoted mainly to cement and other construction
materials such as sand, aggregate, glass sand, building
stone, brick, cement, structural glass, lime, gypsum
and roofing materials.
Examine the importance in the economy of the in-
dustry producing these materials and indicate its
capacity to meet domestic requirements. Examine
the size of the industry in terms of production, capital
investment and in relation to markets. Discuss pro-
duction trends including technological advances. Indi-
cate problems confronting the industry with respect
to raw materials, location, domestic and foreign com-
petition, and government policies and contracts.
(Tables: Production and consumption including use
patterns where possible, imports and exports by coun-
tries of origin and destination, stocks, etc.)
List in table name, location, output, capacity, equip-
ment, number of employees, ownership of major indi-
vidual plants. Indicate factors affecting production
of individual plants such as efficiency of operation,
availability of fuels, adequacy of transportation, effi-
ciency of labor, plans for expansion, ability to meet
foreign competition, etc.
PAGE 13
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
G. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
A. General
JULY 1957
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 64. Manufacturing and Construction
Review the salient features of the country's manu-
facturing and construction industry, including owner-
ship, degree of integration, government policies, and
international agreements. Discuss the position of the
industry within the country as an employer of man-
power, a sector for investment and a contributor to
national income. Indicate the degree of dependence
of the industry on foreign sources for raw materials and
equipment, components, and finished products. Dis-
cuss the co.mpetitive position of the industry in domestic
and in foreign markets. Describe the general level of
technological progress, including the degree of depend-
ence on foreign technicians. Evaluate the capacity of
the manufacturing industry to meet normal require-
ments and potential increased demands.
B. Industrial machinery and equipment
Under this heading the following manufactures are
to be included: agricultural machinery and equipment
(including tractors); machine tools; electrical ma-
chinery and equipment; general purpose machinery
(e.g., engines, turbines, conveyors, pumps, cranes, etc.) ;
specialized equipment (e.g., coal mining machinery,
metallurgical equipment, construction machinery, etc.);
precision and machine building instruments; railroad
motive power and rolling stock production and repair
facilities.
1) Examine the importance of the industry in the
economy and indicate its capacity to meet domestic
requirements. Examine the size of the industry in
terms of total production, capital investment and in
relation to markets. Discuss production trends in-
cluding technological advances. Indicate problems
confronting the industry with respect to raw materials,
location, domestic and foreign competition, and govern-
ment policies and controls. (Tables: Total production
and consumption including use pattern where possible,
imports and exports by countries of origin and destina-
tion, stocks, etc.)
PAGE 14
2) List name, location, output, capacity, equipment,
number of employees, and ownership of principal plants.
Indicate factors affecting production of individual
plants such as efficiency of labor, ability to meet foreign
competition, plans for expansion, etc.
C. Vehicles
This Subsection discusses all civilian and military
vehicles (with the exception of rail vehicles and agricul-
tural tractors). Nonmotorized vehicles are treated
only in countries where they play an important role.
Manufacture and distribution are discussed as a sub-
sector of the economy, with special consideration for
past, present, and future contributions to military po-
tential. Whenever applicable, production of military
vehicles is separated from that of purely commercial
ones. For countries not producing complete vehicles
or engaging in extensive assembly the discussion is
modified; special attention is given to the volume and
sources of imports of complete vehicles, components,
and spare parts. Civilian types discussed include pas-
senger cars; trucks; highway tractors, trailers, and
semi-trailers; buses, including trolley buses; and motor-
cycles, scooters, and other small motorized vehicles.
Military vehicles include tanks, armored cars, self-pro-
pelled artillery, armored personnel carriers, and other
transportation vehicles designed specially for cross-
country or combat use.
1. GENERAL
An evaluative summary of the production, assem-
bly, import, and export of civilian and military vehi-
cles, including domestic and international significance,
use patterns, sources of raw and finished materials, un-
usual characteristics of products or industrial and mar-
keting practices, industrial organization, government
policies, and factors affecting past and potential war-
time conversion. Attention is given in free countries
to the historical development of the industry, and in
totalitarian countries to the planners' objectives for
the industry.
mriadashomiiimio
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER VI ofimmainamioNi
2. CIVILIAN-TYPE VEHICLES
a. DOMESTIC IMPORTANCE OF THE INDUSTRY A
description of the relative importance of the industry
as 1) a contributor to Gross National Product, 2) an
employer of labor, 3) an absorber of new investment,
and 4) an earner of, or drain on, foreign exchange.
b. ECONOMICS OF TIIE INDUSTRY ? A discussion
of 1) the sources of raw materials, components, and
accessories, 2) significant production methods and capa-
bilities, and 3) the internal and external competitive
situation. The discussion includes an overall evalua-
tion of equipment, the use of specialized machine tools,
degree of automation, research activities, any signifi-
cant geographic characteristics of the industry, and an
explanation of government controls as they affect
competition, costs and earning, and export or import
of automotive products.
C. USE, PRODUCTION, AND SUPPLY PATTERN ? A
survey, with appropriate SECTION 32 coordination and
cross-reference, of the role of civilian-type vehicles in
the country's transportation of passengers and goods,
indicating the adequacy of types and volume produced
or imported in meeting demands under usual?and
significant abnormal?conditions, the average age of
vehicles and fluctuations thereof, the means devised to
mobilize the vehicle fleet for military purposes, and
past experience and plans for conversion to military
production. Detailed statistics on production, im-
ports, exports, scrapping, and the total vehicle regis-
tration are given.
d. PRINCIPAL PRODUCERS ? A survey, with exten-
sive tabulated data, of each of the principal producers
in terms of their plant facilities, categories and volume
produced, and significant past history of the organiza-
tion. Separate tables list 1) producers and assemblers
of motor vehicles, and 2) producers of important com-
ponents and accessories, giving location of head office
and all significant plants, number of employees, rela-
tive importance in the industry, sources of materials
and power, and the volume by type of all vehicles pro-
duced. The tables also include all available informa-
tion on the potential capacity of each producing unit
and any important factors limiting actual or potential
output.
3. SPECIALIZED MILITARY VEIIICLES
A survey, when appropriate for the country and with
SECTION 81 coordination and cross-reference, of the
production of specialized military vehicles in the terms
of Subsection C, 2 above, as appropriately modified for
these specialized end products. This includes, when
available, statistics on any unissued specialized mili-
tary vehicles moth-balled or stockpiled (i.e., vehicles
not included in SECTION 81).
D. Aircraft production
See Subsection C.
Discuss jet and conventional aircraft production
separately. The following classification of aircraft
type is used:
Fighter
Attack
Bomber
Helicopter
Transport
Trainer
Liaison and Light Civilian
Other Types
a) Analyze current status of aircraft industry?
final assembly, airframe, engine, and propeller plants?
and compare present total production with that
achieved in World War II. Indicate dependency on
foreign design and patents. Show military reserves
and present strength, or indicate by cross-reference
that these data may be found in SECTION 83, Air Forces.
b) Describe the dependence of the aircraft indus-
try on foreign and domestic sources of raw materials,
semi-manufactured products, and component parts.
c) List the location and physical characteristics of
major plants producing aircraft and principal com-
ponents, indicating the quantity and nature of products.
The above outline is for those countries which pro-
duce aircraft or do extensive assembly. For countries
not in either of these categories, discuss, if possible, the
prospects of existing repair facilities or other installa-
tions developing into aircraft production or assembly.
If appropriate in this connection, mention in general
terms the country's potential with respect to the quality
of its labor force and managerial class, the investment
climate, attitude or policy of government toward estab-
lishment of an aircraft industry, conditions of auxiliary
services needed by such an industry (transportation,
fuel, and power), and availabilities of raw materials.
For all countries for which data are available, give
imports and exports of aircraft and parts, by unit and
type (also,.if possible, by value). Cross-refer to CHAP-
TER III, SECTION 37, and CHAPTER VIII, SECTION 83,
for number and types of civilian and military planes,
respectively, in the country.
E. Shipbuilding
1. GENERAL
A summary of the development of the industry, its
general ,significance as an element of the economy and
the type of shipbuilding traditionally emphasized.
A somewhat brief discussion of a) background of in-
dustry, b) treaty or other restrictions imposed, c) rank
as a shipbuilding nation, total annual cost of ship re-
pairs, effects of foreign competition, value and number
of units imported or exported, d) location of major
yards, and material supply problems as affected by
geographic factors, e) position in the economy, contri-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 15
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
0.#11WWWWIINIMPAM NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
bution to Gross National Product, importance as an
employer and sector for investment, total capital in-
vestment, 1) pattern of ownership, g) government policy
and control, including subsidies, and h) training and
research.
2. PRODUCTION AND REPAIR ACTIVITY
A summary of production of both naval and mer-
chant ships (oceangoing, coastal, inland waterway) in-
cluding current production, relation between planned
and actual production, average time between keel
laying and launching and between launching and com-
missioning, amount or value of repair work by major
yards and type of ship, evaluated maximum production
capacity. Construction by yard for each type of ship
for the most recent 5-year period and a meaningful pre-
war period are tabulated.
3. ECONOMIC RESOURCES AND REQUIRE-
MENTS
A discussion, supported by statistics as appropriate,
of consumption of materials, raw materials or com-
ponent shortages and alleviation by import, significant
past problems of procurement. Principal suppliers of
major components (steel, marine diesels and turbines,
armament, and navigation equipment) are located by
map, with cross reference to Subsections 63, C, 64, B,
and 64, G, as appropriate.
A discussion of manpower employed in shipyards as
a percent of total labor force and in terms of require-
ments for current operation, the effect of nationality
or racial problems and unionization on labor availability
or productivity, wage structure, with table comparing
wages of shipbuilding industry with other heavy
industries.
4. SHIPYARD FACILITIES AND PRODUC-
TION METHODS
A summary of yards by categories with comments
on production difficulties common to all yards, areal
distribution of construction capacity with reference to
location map, and details of shipyard facilities of major
yards in tabulation or text as appropriate. If tabu-
lated, principal yard features are: name and location,
types of ships and other items produced, building ways
or sites, drydocks, shops, number of employees, and
other pertinent data under Remarks such as tie-in with
component or materials manufacturing plants.
A discussion of production methods, success of lead-
ing producers, seasonal changes in production, and
adaptability of industry and major yards to change to
different types of ship construction. Cross-reference
IO SECTION 35 and/or SUPPLEMENT I.
5. FUTURE PROSPECTS OF THE INDUSTRY
General observations on future of the industry, its
expansion potential, and probable production trends.
PAGE 16
F. Explosives (industrial and military)
This Subsection discusses industrial and military ex- .
plosives, including rocket propellants, conforming as
appropriate to the specifications for Subsection 64, C.
The manufacture of explosives is treated as separate
from the chemical industry only if it is actually so
organized, and in general is considered as beginning at
the point where ordinarily available commercial chem-
icals begin to be differentiated into explosives or
intermediates.
Industrial and military explosives normally are
treated separately, following, as appropriate for the
country, an introductory summary of the development,
characteristics, and economic or strategic significance
of related industry. The discussion of industrial ex-
plosives is largely in terms of normal supply and
demand. In the more comprehensive discussion of
military explosives the emphasis is on the adequacy of
the country's supply of its peacetime armed forces
requirements, and on the capabilities of the entire
chemical industry for meeting the country's own mili-
tary explosives requirements and probable obligations
to others in time of war. The sources of explosives
constituents as received by the explosives plants, and
vulnerability of supply, including reliance on foreign
sources for constituents or more primary raw materials,
are discussed. Chemically related explosives are dis-
cussed as a group as far as is consistent with the overall
objective of providing detailed information on the
wartime supply position of as many finished military
explosives as possible.
OPrincipal producers are listed in a table generally
similar to that for Subsection 64, C, with inclusion
under Remarks of information on the sources of each
plant's principal materials and the destination to which
its explosives are shipped for loading or storage. When
the information will result in little, or no duplication,
the table is separated into producers of industrial and
military explosives.
G. Arms and ammunition (including ex-
plosive devices), fire-control equipment, and
bomb sights
This Subsection conforms as appropriate to the
specifications for Subsection 64, C. Manufacture of
the specialized items listed below is treated as a sepa-
rate industry only if it is so organized .in a normal
commercial sense.
The emphasis is on the country's supply of its peace-
time armed forces requirements, and on the capabilities
of the country's entire industry for meeting the nation's
own munitions requirements and probable obligations
to others in time of war. The sources of principal com-
ponents, and vulnerability of supply, including reliance
on foreign sources for components or more primary raw
materials, are factors considered in the objective of
providing detailed information on the wartime supply
position of munitions.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTEI? VI
Manufacture and supply of civilian arms and ammu-
nition are discussed only if they have special signifi-
cance, but the capabilities of such producers are con-
sidered in assessing the country's overall munitions
potential.
Principal munitions producers are listed in a table
generally similar to that for 64, C.
Following a general introductory summary, the dis-
cussion is in terms of the following categories:
1. Weapons--Revolvers and other pistols; subliaachine
guns, carbines, rifles, and shotguns; ground, AA, and air
machine guns; rocket launchers and recoilless weapons;
mortars; artillery of all types, including field, tank, anti-
tank, AA, coastal, and naval.
2. Aiming and fire-control devices ? Both optical and
electrical aiming and fire-control devices for the weapons
listed above; bomb sights.
3. Ammunition ? Ammunition for the weapons listed
above, including complete rounds and also all com-
ponents.
4. Explosive devices ? Hand grenades; rifle grenades;
land and sea mines; bombs; torpedoes; depth charges.
5. Missiles.
H. Other military equipment and supplies
This Subsection discusses military items in terms of
the five categories below, conforming as appropriate
to the specifications for Subsection 64, C. Manufac-
ture of these items is treated as a separate industry only
if it is so organized in a normal commercial sense.
The emphasis is on the country's supply of its peace-
time armed forces requirements, and on the capabilities
of the country's entire industry for meeting the nation's
own munitions requirements and probable obligations
to others in time of war. The sources of principal com-
ponents, and vulnerability of supply, including reliance
on foreign sources for components or more primary raw
materials, are factors considered in the objective of
providing detailed information on the wartime supply
position.
Principal producers are listed in a table generally
similar to that for 64, C.
Following a general introductory summary, if ap-
propriate, the following are discussed:
1. Chemical-, biological-, and radiological-warfare materiel.
2. Military engineering equipment (bridges, camouflage,
infrared, topographical).
3. Instruments, gauges, and servo-motors of special mili-
tary interest.
4. Quartermaster-type supplies including equipment neces-
sary for POL distribution, personal military equipment
and remount equipment.
5. Optical and photographic equipment of military value.
I. Telecommunications equipment
Telecommunications equipment includes all types
utilizing electric or electronic, acoustic, or visual
means for the transmission of signals, signs, or images
of any kind. The telecommunications-equipment man-
ufacturing industry includes all industrial facilities
producing equipment?such as wire, radio, electronic,
wilmompriitr?
and other signal equipment or components?used for
the transmission of aural, visual, or control signals.
Following a general introductory statement, includ-
ing strategic significance and relative importance in
the economy, a discussion of each of the following four
categories:
1. Wire equipment and related components (includes tele-
phone; telegraph, landline and submarine; wire and cable)
2. Radio equipment and related components (includes com-
municatiow, broadcast, television, tubes, batteries, etc.)
3. Electronics equipment and related components (includes
radar, navigational aids, telemetering, guidance and con-
trol, etc.)
4. Other signal equipment and related components (includes
visual, aural, etc.)
A discussion of each category includes a summary of
its development, government policies and controls,
international relationships and competitive situation,
amount and quality of labor, present and potential
military production, and dependence on imported com-
ponents or materials.
A tabulation of plants, showing location, ownership,
size, and principal types and quantities of equipment
produced.
J. Chemical industries
This Subsection covers heavy chemicals for indus-
trial use, chemical fertilizers, and chemical plastics (Un-
fabricated).
1. GENERAL
2. INDUSTRIAL CHEMICALS
The following list of chemicals, essentially raw mate-
rials and intermediates for the chemical industry, serves
as a guide for selecting those of importance in the area
to be treated in this Subsection. Others not on the list
are treated if their importance warrants.
Sulfuric acid
Alkali group (caustic soda, chlorine, soda ash, salt cake, bleach-
ing powder, hydrochloric acid, fluorine, metallic sodium)
Solvents, such as alcohols, acetone, etc.
Synthetic ammonia and nitric acid
Calcium carbide and industrial gases
Dyes and pigments (coal tar and other organic dyes, chromates,
red lead, lithopone, titanium dioxide)
Other coal tar products (do not treat ammonium sulfate)
Phosphorus and phosphates (except fertilizers)
Bromides and tetraethyl lead
Plastics raw materials (acetic acid, phenol, urea, formaldehyde,
phtlialic and maleic anhydrides, butadiene, styrene, acryloni-
trile, nylon salt, plasticizers and accelerators, purified cellu-
lose, carbon black)
3. CHEMICALS USED IN AGRICULTURE
a. FERTILIZERS
(1) Nitrogenous (including ammonium sulfate
from coke ovens)
(2) Phosphatic
(3) Potassic
b. INSECTICIDES, FUNGICIDES, ETC.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 17
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
4. SYNTHETIC RUBBER AND FIBERS, AND
PLASTICS
a. SYNTHETIC RUBBER
b. PLASTICS (POWDERS AND PELLETS FOR MOLDING,
CASTING, AND LAMINATING; SHEETS, RODS, TUBES, AND
FILM)
C. SYNTHETIC FIBERS (MANUFACTURE OF RAYON,
NYLON, ETC. FILAMENT AND STAPLE FIBER. No WEAV-
ING) ?
5. PHARMACEUTICALS
K. Agricultural processing industries
The following major types of agricultural processing
plants are to be considered: tobacco, meat packing,
beverages, canneries, sugar mills and refineries, and oil
processing plants. In certain areas other categories of
installations are important and are given separate
treatment.
Commercial rice milling (milling for sale) in either
rural or factory-type mills is treated here, where spe-
cific information is given on location of individual
plants, capacity, output, employment, and ownership.
Among the dairy products, only dried and canned
milk are discussed here. Detailed information is given
on output of the industrialized sector of the animal
slaughtering and meatpacking industry, including the
number, location, size, and capacity of the industrial-
ized plants.
Detailed data are given here on oil mills, output of
oils, and trade by country of origin and/or destination.
If fish canning is an important manufacturing activity
in the area, this Subsection includes a brief summary of
the value of output, employment, and capital invest-
ment, with cross-reference to SECTION 61, Subsection C.
See also Subsection B, 1) for additional requirements.
With respect to industries having strategic signifi-
cance (normally fats and offs, meats, sugar, and flour),
this Subsection lists in table form the information on
the principal plants called for in Subsection B, 2. For
principal plants of nonstrategic industries, normally
described in a separate tabulation, only name, location
size (preferably in terms of production or capacity),
and age and/or degree of obsolescence are included;
size and age (or degree of obsolescence) are normally
indicated in a "Remarks" column.
L. Fibers, fabrics, and rubber
The following items are treated here: natural fibers
and textiles (spinning and weaving stage); synthetic
fibers (weaving stage only) ; natural rubber (processing
stage) ; rubber products, both natural and synthetic,
such as tires, shoes, etc.; paper and pulp; and leather.
PAGE 18
JULY 1957
Treatment includes only factory consumption of raw
cotton and wool (import data are briefly summarized,
with cross-reference to SECTION 61). Supplies of raw
fibers are also discussed in general terms here as a
problem in textile production. Tanneries and leather
products plants other than shoe factories are treated
as one subtopic; data on tannery consumption of hides
and skins are included. Shoes of all types are treated
as a separate subtopic here. Production and consump-
tion data for paper pulp are also covered.
See also Subsection B, 1) for additional requirements.
Treatment includes data on principal plants, as
called for in *Subsection K. Mills making pulp usable
for manufacture of explosives or rayon are indicated.
M. Construction industries
This Subsection treats major construction firms or
industries interested and utilized in residential, com-
mercial, industrial, and public works construction.
Construction materials are treated in other Sections of
CHAPTER VI and appropriate reference is made in this
Subsection.
See Subsection C.
Discuss briefly and in general major categories of
construction, number of major firms involved, and
adequacy and availability of skilled and semi-skilled
labor and equipment necessary for the industries con-
cerned. Discuss growth of these industries, adequacy
to meet present requirements and their ability to
expand.
Tabulate major construction firms, their location,
types of construction each firm is interested in, and
amount of skilled and semi-skilled labor employed.
List outstanding and highly qualified personalities
in the construction industry and note their special
interests.
N. Other industries
This Subsection treats two types of industries not
treated elsewhere. First, those industries that are
important in the economy of the area are examined in
detail according to requirements set up in B, 1); re-
quirements for data on principal plants are those called
for in Subsection K. Industries employing less than
5% of the manufacturing labor force are normally
omitted.
The second type of industries are those residual
miscellaneous industries that are treated briefly to
round out the overall analysis of the manufacturing
sector of the economy. Fabricated plastics are covered
here, if appropriate. Also furniture (treating lumber
as part of raw materials consumption of the industry);
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER VI
soap and glycerine; paints, varnish, and lacquer. There
are no special requirements for this discussion.
0. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
A. General
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 65. Trade and Finance
Indicate the principal features of the country's do-
mestic and foreign trade and the part it plays in the
national economy. Discuss the country's currency and
banking systems, and organization of public finances.
Note significant changes in the country's balance of
payments, especially during and since the war. Point
out whether the country normally has an import or
export surplus, and what is its debtor-creditor position
(foreign. assets and liabilities). Discuss the country's
position in international markets. Describe the gov-
ernment's policy in the fields of domestic and foreign
trade and finance.
B. Business organization
Discuss the juridical forms of business ownership.
Indicate degree of interlocking financial relationship
and dispersion of ownership.
C. Domestic trade and finance
1. PATTERN OF DOMESTIC TRADE
1) Describe the place of wholesale and retail trade
in the national economy, showing its contribution to
GNP, number of persons employed as percent of total
labor force, etc.
2) Describe briefly the structure of the trade chan-
nels (wholesale and retail), with special emphasis upon
trade practices, ownership (private, state, cooperative),
nature and degree of specialization.
2. DOMESTIC FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS
AND THEIR STRUCTURE
Under each of the following principal topics include
relevant statistical data as much as possible in tabular
form.
a. BANKING AND CURRENCY SYSTEM ? Describe
the banking system indicating the kinds of banks and
their role in financing private industry and trade, agri-
culture and government. Describe briefly the central
bank institution and discuss its role in the economy and
government operations. Discuss flexibility of currency
system and ability to meet changing economic require-
ments. Describe briefly the currency system of the
country indicating the kinds of currency used, the
amounts outstanding, name of the issuing authority.
Explain the degree to which the currency is tied to gold
or to some other foreign currency, such as sterling or
dollar.
b. INSURANCE COMPANIES AND OTHER FINANCIAL
INSTITUTIONS (CREDIT UNIONS, ETC.) ? Describe briefly
major features and operations.
C. SECURITY MARKETS ? Describe briefly major
features emphasizing role in providing and channeling
investment funds.
d. COMMODITY MARKETS ? List and briefly discuss
the size, operations and government regulations re-
lating to the major commodity markets.
3. GOVERNMENT FINANCE AND FISCAL
POLICY
Under each of the following principal topics include
relevant statistical data as much as possible in tabular
form. In all cases compare with prewar base year and
indicate trends.
a. PUBLIC EXPENDITURES (NATIONAL BUDGET) ?
Analyze budgets to determine, where possible, the
distribution of public expenditures on a functional as
well as organizational basis with special emphasis on
national defense and scientific development, and ade-
quate attention to welfare and economic development.
Indicate the size and function of local budgets.
b. REVENUE ? Describe briefly the tax systems
and other sources of revenue of both national and inter-
mediate governments. Analyze adequacy to meet
revenue requirements and social and political factors
which condition revenue patterns.
C. GOVERNMENT DEBT ? Indicate the Size Of gov-
ernment debt, internal and foreign, and trace the trends
during recent years. Discuss any particular problems
that have arisen in connection with this debt, especially
those involving servicing the foreign debt.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 19
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
"TITImumplio NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
d. GOVERNMENT MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICIES -7
Describe briefly the government's fiscal and monetary
policies. Specifically, consider the effect on monetary
availabilities and purchasing power (and through them
on the levels of national income) of the following
policies:
Government surpluses and/or deficits
Public revenue system
Public expenditure pattern
Management of the public debt
Central bank policies, such as limitations on amount of
issue, regulation of interest rates, reserve requirements,
open market policies, etc.
O. GOVERNMENT POLICIES TOWARD RESTRICTIVE
TRADE PRACTICES ? Examine government policies to-
ward cartels, monopolies, other restrictive trade prac-
tices, and toward cooperatives.
D. International trade and finance
Under each of the following principal topics include
relevant statistical data as much as possible in tabular
form.
1. BALANCE OF PAYMENTS POSITION
a. OVERALL Discuss in overall terms the bal-
ance of payments of the country indicating the net debit
or credit position, the principal debit and credit items
or groups of items and the principal debit and credit
countries or monetary groupings. Indicate the extent
to which commodity trade, other current accounts, and
capital and monetary gold movements affect the bal-
ance of payments. Where significant, analyze the
triangular or multilateral aspects of the balance of pay-
ments. Indicate changes in the pattern of the balance
of payments during and since World War II. Draw up
balance of payments statements for a typical prewar
year and one or more postwar years according to the
presentation adopted by the International Monetary
Fund.
b. CURRENT ACCOUNT
(1) Commodity trade ? Show the relationship
of the country's total foreign commodity trade to world
trade and to its own national income. Describe the
extent to which the country is dependent upon either
imports or exports. Set forth the pattern of the cpun-
try's foreign trade by commodity, by country of origin
or destination, by quantity, value, and percentage
distribution and variation. Indicate the more signifi-
cant changes that have taken place in the preceding
decade. Specify the countries and commodities upon
which the foreign trade of the country is particularly
dependent. Include a table of foreign trade showing
by commodity, where data permit, the following:
1) volume, 2) value, 3) percentage distribution, and
4) country of origin and destination. If possible these
should be given for different years in order to show
fluctuation. These data should also be presented in
graphic form when possible.
PAGE 20
(2) Other current items ? Discuss the pattern of
current accounts, analyzing the significance of the major
invisible items, shipping, insurance, interest, tourism,
noncompensated remittances, etc.
C. CAPITAL AND GOLD MOVEMENTS ? If the move-
ments of capital and monetary gold need analysis in
greater detail than in Subsection D, 1, a, it should be
presented here.
2. FOREIGN ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
Discuss the country's position in recent years as an
international debtor or creditor. Taking into con-
sideration government and private investments, gold
and foreign exchange holdings, etc., list the principal
debtor or creditor countries, and indicate amounts out-
standing. Analyze the nature and magnitude of any
intergovernmental loans or grants. Indicate the
amount of foreign investment within the country by
industry group and by investing country. Indicate
the amount of investment abroad by industry group
and country of investment. Evaluate the role of
foreign assets or debts as they would affect wartime
and other extraordinary foreign expenditures. Describe
changes in holdings of foreign exchange and gold during
recent years and examine their effect upon foreign trade
and international payments.
Draw up a table of estimates of the country's private
and government assets or investments in foreign coun-
tries and of foreign countries' assets or investments in
the subject country, showing gross values outstanding
as of the end of recent fiscal or calendar years. Data
are shown by classes of property, investment, or claim
by foreign countries or areas in which country's assets
or investments or its obligors are located, or which own
or hold assets or investments in the country, or obliga-
tions of the country. The country's estimated total
net creditor or debtor position is given, as well as its
net position with regard to particular classes of assets
or with individual foreign countries or areas.
The type of data and table intended can be judged
by referring to the following:
Debtor and Creditor Countries: 1938, 1944 by Cleona Lewis?
published by the Brookings Institution, Washington,
D. C., 1945. The 1938 estimates cover all countries of
the world for which data were available, but list only
long-term, not short-term, assets.
U.S. Treasury Department, Office of the Secretary, Census
of American Owned Assets in Foreign Countries, 1947,
Table I, p. 9, Table III, p. 17, and Table VI, p. 26.
U.S. Treasury Department, Office of the Secretary, Census
of Foreign Owned Assets in the United States, G.P.O., 1945,
Washington, D. C., Table IV, p. 18, Table V, p. 19,
Table VII, p. 22.
U.S. Department of Commerce, The Balance of Payments
of the United States, 1949-1951, G.P.O., Washington, D. C.,
1952, pp. 162-163, "Table 41?International investment
position by type of investment and area, year ends,
1947-51."
Where data are not available indicate by appropriate
entry in the table.
TT 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER VII
SCIENTIFIC
Section 70 Introduction
Section 71 Electronics
Section 72 Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
Section 73 Atomic Energy
Section 74 Biological Warfare
Section 75 Chemical Warfare
Section 76 Physical Sciences, Mathematics, and
Medicine
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CII AP TEE V I
3. GOVERNMENT POLICIES, PRACTICES
AND INSTITUTIONS RELATIVE TO INTER-
NATIONAL TRADE AND 4INANCE
Discuss the nature, extent, and effectiveness of gov-
ernment controls on foreign exchange and foreign trade
and their relationship to each other. Indicate to what
extent these controls are permanent or of an emergency
character. Discuss the purpose of such controls and
the extent to which they modify the trade pattern.
Discuss governmental policy, practices and institu-
tions in respect to the following matters:
a. COMMERCIAL POLICY AND STATE INTERVENTION
IN INTERNATIONAL TRADING
Tariffs, subsidies and incentives
Quantitative restrictions
State trading, bulk buying, bilateral agreements, etc.
Relations with international trade organizations
b. INTERNATIONAL FINANCE
Foreign exchange rates?Indicate changes that have
occurred in country's exchange rates during recent years;
account for such changes by reference to inflationary
policies, occupation by foreign powers, deliberate eco-
nomic warfare, etc.
Participation in international payments and clearance
arrangements, e.g., IPU--
Relations with international financial institutions, e.g.,
IMF--
Controls and safeguards affecting international invest-
ment-
4. FOREIGN TRADE ORGANIZATIONS
Discuss briefly the nature of foreign trade organiza-
tions, including cartels, which control the movement of
goods. Indicate the extent to which such organiza-
tions influence the volume and character of the foreign
trade.
E. Government wartime financing
Discuss the manner in which the government financed
its expenditures during the recent war, in financing its
domestic and foreign procurement. Indicate major
developments since the outbreak of World War II that
affect its ability in this regard.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 21
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959
Chapter VII
Scientific
OUTLINE
SECTION 70. INTRODUCTION
A. Evaluation and development of the
scientific effort
1. Present status and recent trends
2. Historical background
B. Organization and functioning of the
research program
1. General supervision and guidance
2. Government research organizations
(except educational)
3. Research at educational institutions
4. Private and semiprivate research or-
ganizations
5. Exchange of scientific and technical
information
C. Financing of scientific and technical
activities
D. Scientific and technical manpower
1. Education, training, and quality
2. Total numbers, distribution, and utili-
zation
3. Social and economic position of scien-
tists and engineers
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 71. ELECTRONICS
A. General
1. Capabilities and trends
2. Background and organization
B. Major research and development by
field
C. Significant research and development
facilities
D. Outstanding personalities
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 72. AIR, GROUND, AND NAVAL WEAPONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General
Aircraft and aircraft armament
Guided missiles
Ground weapons and equipment
Naval weapons
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 73. ATOMIC ENERGY
A. General
1. Capabilities and trends
2. Background and organization
3. Financing
4. Manpower and training
B. Major research and development
C. Sources and production of basic materials
D. Production of reactive materials
E. Applications of nuclear energy
F. Significant research, development, and
production facilities
Outstanding personalities
Comments on principal sources
G.
H.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
SECTION 75.
A.
B.
C,
SECTION 74. BIOLOGICAL WARFARE
D.
E.
General
1. Capabilities and trends
2. Policies
3. Background and organization
Research, development, and field testing
1. Offensive
2. Defensive
Significant research and development
facilities
Outstanding personalities
Comments on principal sources
CHEMICAL WARFARE
General
1. Capabilities and trends
2. Policies
3. Background and organization
Research, development, and field testing
1. Offensive
2. Defensive
Significant research and development
facilities and pilot plants
Outstanding personalities
Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
SECTION 76. PHYSICAL SCIENCES, MATHEMATICS, AND
MEDICINE
A. General
B. through X. Subject sciences
1. General
2. Major research and development by
field
3. Significant research and development
facilities
4. Outstanding personalities
Y. Comments on principal sources
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Certain aspects of CHAPTER VII coverage are related
to other NIS Chapters. In general, CHAPTER VII covers
scientific research and development of materiel through
the prototype stage, whereas CHAPTER VI deals with
materiel production, and CHAPTER VIII with military
employment of materiel. CHAPTER IV (SOCIOLOGICAL)
deals with the educational system as a whole and with the
educational level of the population; CHAPTER VII with
scientific education and educational institutions and
societies insofar as they engage in scientific research.
Manufacture of chemical warfare and biological warfare
materiel is treated in CHAPTER VI and the quality,
quantity and characteristics of this materiel, in
CHAPTER VIII.
Section 70. Introduction
A. Evaluation and development of the scien-
tific effort
1. PRESENT STATUS AND RECENT TRENDS
This Subsection is essentially a selective and evalua-
tive summary of SECTION 70 and, in a general sense, of
CHAPTER VII; subjects discussed in detail later are
treated very briefly here. The distinguishing features
of the country's current scientific and technical activi-
ties in terms of goals, scope, peculiar advantages
or disadvantages, general level of attainment, and
recent (not future) trends are pointed out. These
features are appraised in terms of the country's needs,
worldwide progress, and corresponding activities of
comparable countries. Capabilities are indicated as
static, rising, or falling. Any expansion plans are
briefly outlined. The country's capabilities a,nd trends
in the major fields of scientific and technical research
and development are discussed. Fields of endeavor
which are emphasized and those neglected are identified.
The relative stress upon military versus civilian re-
search and upon fundamental (pure) versus applied
research, and any recent changes in emphasis, are
discussed. Scientific and technical capabilities are
PAGE 2
related to the country's military and economic potential.
The attitudes of the government, industry, the general
public, and major political and cultural groups toward
science, are discussed, if significant.
2. HISTORICAL BACKGROUND
The development of the country's scientific and
technical activities, especially 20th century develop-
ments, are briefly outlined. Beginnings and growth of
activity in the physical sciences and crafts, and a few
outstanding persons, organizations, and events which
shaped or altered scientific and technical development
are described in general terms; no detailed scientific
chronology or history of academic scholarship is pro-
vided. Social, political, economic, geographic, and
other factors are discussed only if they had a decisive
effect upon scientific and technical development.
B. Organization and functioning of the re-
search program
1. GENERAL SUPERVISION AND GUIDANCE
The character of scientific and technical organization
and administration in terms of the degree of centralized
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER VII
control and planning and the freedom of individuals
and organizations in choosing and financing research
projects is described. The main organizations (govern-
ment or other) which plan, control, supervise, guide,
coordinate, and/or finance the country's research and
development are identified (by both English and native
names) and their operations described. The relative
importance of these bodies, their subordination, and
the relationships between them are explained and
illustrated with a chart or charts. Explanation is
made of how the national research and development
program is planned and how research projects originate
and are supervised and sustained.
2. GOVERNMENT RESEARCH ORGANIZA-
TIONS (EXCEPT EDUCATIONAL)
The research organizations of the ministries and other
major organizations concerned with various segments
of government research and development are named
and their importance and responsibilities briefly
indicated. The armed forces are included but educa-
tional institutions are not. The subordination of and
relationships between the various research organiza-
tions are explained. However, the personnel, facilities,
or research programs of individual research laboratories
and institutes are not discussed here; other Sections in
CHAPTER VII furnish such information.
3. RESEARCH AT EDUCATIONAL INSTI-
TUTIONS
The type of research and development information
provided above for government bodies is here covered
for government and private educational institutions of
major scientific or technical importance. Education is
not discussed because it is treated below under Scientific
and Technical Manpower.
4. PRIVATE AND SEMIPRIVATE RESEARCH
ORGANIZATIONS
The type of information provided above for govern-
ment bodies is here covered for the most important
research organizations maintained by industry, con-
tract research companies, cooperative associations,
nonprofit foundations, joint government-private enter-
prises, and private individuals. The relationships of
these organizations with one another, the government,
and educational institutions are covered, and foreign
affiliations, if any, are indicated.
5. EXCHANGE OF SCIENTIFIC AND TECH-
NICAL INFORMATION
The ease of and restrictions upon exchanging scien-
tific and technical information within the country and
with other nations, the availability of native and
foreign literature, the adequacy of library and technical
publication facilities, and international relations and
foreign travel are discussed insofar as they concern
science and engineering. The principal general science
societies and academies not previously mentioned are
described and the roles of these and other professional
societies are explained. In general, the discussion does
not cover societies concerned only with specific fields of
science; these societies are covered in other Sections of
CHAPTER VII.,
C. Financing of scientific and technical ac-
tivities
Adequacy and methods of financing are summarized.
Funds available for scientific and technical education,
research, and development from governmental, private,
and foreign sources are discussed in detail. Distribu-
tion of funds among various organizations and fields of
specialization is indicated. Whenever possible, com-
parable statistics for more than one year are presented
to show trends as well as size of effort; if such data are
not obtainable, other indications of the amount of
money available are shown.
D. Scientific and technical manpower
1. EDUCATION, TRAINING, AND QUALITY
The qualitative strengths and weaknesses of scientific
and technical manpower are discussed. The following
are described and evaluated: scientific and technical
education and training, especially at the postgraduate
and specialist level; curricula and degrees, the adequacy
of instructors and teaching facilities, recruitment and
selection of students; entrance requirements for higher
educational institutions and advanced vocational
schools; and scholarships and financial assistance to
students. (Education and manpower in general are
not discussed here; they are covered in CHAPTER IV
which may be referenced.)
2. TOTAL NUMBERS, DISTRIBUTION, AND
UTILIZATION
The discussion covers the total size and adequacy of
scientific and technical manpower resources, their rate
of growth (including graduations from higher educa-
tional institutions), distribution among the various
fields of science and technology, any major shortages
or surpluses, and the efficiency of manpower utilization.
3. SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC POSITION OF
SCIENTISTS AND ENGINEERS
The relative attractiveness of careers in science and
technology as compared with those in other professions
is discussed in terms of salaries and other remunera-
tions (e.g., fellowships), public and professional recogni-
tion (including prizes and awards for outstanding
achievement), degree of independence, ideological
influences, undesirable responsibilities, etc.
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
siimimmionimmo NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the material in the Section.
A. General
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide collectors of information with collection
targets. In this connection, the principal sources
(not necessarily all sources) actually used are ordinarily
listed.
Section 71. Electronics
1. CAPABILITIES AND TRENDS
The country's recent achievements, recent (not
future) trends, strengths, and weaknesses in electronics
research and development are evaluated briefly, and
the phases emphasized and those neglected are
indicated. Comparison is made with other appropriate
countries. The following are discussed: the adequacy
of facilities, personnel, funds, and industrial support;
whether capabilities are static, rising, or falling;
expansion plans, if any; current and potential capabili-
ties related to national military and economic status;
and any exceptional participation in international
electronic organizations and activities. Details are
reserved for later Subsections.
2. BACKGROUND AND ORGANIZATION
A brief history of the country's achievements and
early organizations in electronics research and develop-
ment is given, followed by general evaluative descrip-
tions of the functioning of the current institutions
(government establishments and committees, industrial
associations, universities, professional societies, etc.)
which plan, guide, control, coordinate, and/or finance
research and development in electronics. Organizations
concerned with other technical adds in addition to
electronics are discussed only insofar as they concern
electronics; their other activities are described else-
where in CHAPTER VII.
B. Major research and development by field
The normal headings within this Subsection are:
1. Radio and Television Communications; 2. Other
Communications; 3. Navigation Aids; 4. Radar other
than Navigation Aids; 5. Infrared Devices; 6. Under-
water Acoustics; 7. Miscellaneous Special Devices
(Computers, radiosondes, etc.); 8. Electronic Counter-
measures; 9. Vacuum Tubes and Semiconductors; and
10. Other Electronic Components. (SECTION 76 is refer-
enced for fundamental infrared arid acoustics research.)
These topics are covered to the extent to which they are
applicable to the subject country. If there is little
PAGE 4
activity, any or all of these subheadings are discarded
in favor of an explanatory introduction or a consoli-
dated discussion.
This Subsection provides the main detailed support
for Subsection A, 1, and, therefore, describes and evalu-
ates the amount, quality, and significance of research
and development in each branch of electronics in
terms of recent outstanding achievements, strengths
and weaknesses, current projects and their status, and
recent trends. Projects that have progressed beyond
the prototype stage are omitted, other than citing these
as recent achievements and making reference, where
pertinent, to CHAPTER VIII. Key personnel and
facilities may be mentioned, but details are reserved for
Subsections C and D.
C. Significant research and development
facilities
Each significant government and private (including
industrial) research and/or development facility is
described and evaluated, giving its name in English
and the native language, its location (with geographic
coordinates), the name of the director, the subordina-
tion and variant names (if any) of the facility, and the
names and locations of any major branches. For each
organization, major achievements (if any), current
activities, and the adequacy of personnel and equip-
ment are mentioned, but discussions of specific re-
search and development projects (given above under
Subsection B) are avoided.
D. Outstanding personalities
The country's outstanding (not all known) electronics
personnel are described briefly, giving for each (in the
following order) full name, academic and/or military
titles, field of specialization, an evaluation of pro-
fessional stature, current or last reported professional
position (with dates of employment where significant),
any earlier outstanding positions, significant back-
ground information, recent and current research, and
year of birth.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER VII COPPPRommun
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the material in the Section.
A. General
To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with collection
targets. In this connection, the principal sources (not
necessarily all sources) actually used are ordinarily
listed.
Section 72. Air, Ground, and Naval Weapons
The country's current research and development
capabilities in air, ground, and naval weapons (includ-
ing guided missiles) are summarized. General back-
ground factors (such as weaknesses and strengths,
government policy, popular attitudes, etc.) which
influence capabilities in these fields are mentioned but
details are omitted; the main discussion of these factors
appears in SECTION 70.
B. Aircraft and aircraft armament
C. Guided missiles
D. Ground weapons and equipment
E. Naval weapons
The above four Subsections use the same general
outline (which follows) except for the subheadings
given below under 2. Major Research and Develop-
ment by field.
1. GENERAL
a. CAPABILITIES AND TRENDS ? The country's
recent achievements, recent (not future) trends,
strengths, and weaknesses in research and development
in the subject field are evaluated briefly, and the phases
emphasized and those neglected are indicated. Com-
parison is made with other appropriate countries. The
following are discussed: the adequacy of facilities,
personnel, funds, and industrial support; whether
capabilities are static, rising, or falling; expansion
plans, if any; current and potential capabilities related
to national military and economic status; and any
exceptional participation in international military
research and development organization and activities.
Details are reserved for later Subsections.
b. BACKGROUND AND ORGANIZATION ? A brief
history of the country's achievements and early
organizations in the subject research and development
field is given, followed by general evaluative descrip-
tions of the functioning of the current institutions
(government establishments and committees, industrial
associations, universities, professional societies, etc.)
which plan, guide, control, coordinate, and/or finance
research and development in the subject field. Organi-
zations concerned with other technical fields in addition
to the subject field are discussed only insofar as they
concern air, ground, and naval weapon research and
development; their other activities are described else-
where in CHAPTER VII.
2. MAJOR RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
BY FIELD
Under B. Aircraft and Aircraft Armament, the usual
subheadings are: a. Fundamental Aerodynamics; b.
Airframes; c. Aircraft Propulsion; d. Aircraft Ordnance;
and e. Other Aircraft Equipment. Under C. Guided
Missiles, the subheadings are: a. Guidance and Control;
b. Propulsion; c. Aerodynamics and Structure; and d.
Warheads and Fuzing. Under D. Ground Weapons
and Equipment, the subheadings are: a. Combat
Vehicles; b. General Purpose Vehicles; c. Artillery
(except antiaircraft); d. Antiaircraft Weapons and
Fire Control Equipment; e. Infantry Weapons; f.
Mines and Mine Clearance Equipment; g. Stream
Crossing and Engineer Equipment; h. Special Arctic
Equipment; and i. Other Ground Equipment. Under
E. Naval Weapons, the subheadings are: a. Hull
Design; b. Ship Propulsion; c. Underwater Ordnance
(reference SECTION 71 for Underwater Acoustics);
d. Surface Ordnance; and e. Other Naval Equipment.
These topics are covered to the extent applicable to the
subject country. If there is little activity, any or all of
the subheadings are discarded in favor of an explanatory
introduction or a consolidated discussion.
Subsections B. 2, C. 2, D. 2, and E. 2 provide the
main detailed support for the preceding general
appraisals under Capabilities and Trends and, there-
fore, describe and evaluate the amount, quality, and
significance of research and development in each field
and branch in terms of recent outstanding achieve-
ments, strengths and weaknesses, current projects and
their status, and recent trends. Projects that have
progressed beyond the prototype or pilot plant stage
are omitted, other than citing these as recent achieve-
ments and making reference, where pertinent, to
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
CHAPTER VI and CHAPTER VIII. Key personnel and
facilities are mentioned, but details are reserved for
Subsections 3 and 4.
3. SIGNIFICANT RESEARCH AND DEVELOP-
MENT FACILITIES
Each significant government and private (including
industrial) research and/or development facility is
described and evaluated, giving its name in English
and the native language, its location (with geographic
coordinates), the name of the director, the subordina-
tion and variant names (if any) of the facility, and the
names and locations of any major branches. For each
organization, major achievements (if any), current
activities, and the adequacy of personnel and equip-
ment are mentioned, but discussions of specific re-
search and development projects (given above under
Subsection 2) are avoided.
4. OUTSTANDING PERSONALITIES
The country's outstanding (not all known) personnel
in the subject field are described briefly, giving for each
A. General
(in the following order) full name, academic and/or
military titles, field of specialization, an evaluation of
professional stature, current or last reported professional
position (with dates of employment where significant),
any earlier outstanding positions, significant back-
ground information, recent and current research, and
year of birth.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the material in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide collectors of information with collection.
targets. In this connection, the principal sources (not
necessarily all sources) actually used are ordinarily
listed.
Section 73. Atomic Energy
The use of nuclear energy and materials for generating power beyond
the prototype stage, including the manufacturers and manufacture of
nuclear reactors for power purposes, is covered in Chapter VI.
1. CAPABILITIES AND TRENDS
The country's recent achievements, recent (not
future) trends, strengths, and weaknesses in nuclear
energy are evaluated briefly, and the phases emphasized
and those neglected are indicated. Comparison is
made with other appropriate countries. The following
are discussed: the adequacy of facilities, personnel,
funds, raw materials, and industrial support; whether
capabilities are static, rising, or falling; expansion
plans, if any; current and potential capabilities related
to national military and economic status; and any
exceptional participation in international nuclear energy
organizations and activities. Details are reserved for
later Subsections.
2. BACKGROUND AND ORGANIZATION
A brief history of the .country's achievements and
early organizations in nuclear energy is given, followed
by general evaluative descriptions of the functioning
of the current institutions (government establishments
and committees, industrial associations, universities,
PAGE 6
professional societies, etc.) which plan, guide, control,
and/or coordinate nuclear energy activities. Organiza-
tions concerned with other technical fields in addition to
nuclear energy are discussed only insofar as they con-
cern nuclear energy; their other activities are described
elsewhere in CHAPTER VII.
3. FINANCING
Funds available for the maintenance and expansion
of nuclear energy research, development, production,
and training from governmental, private (including
industrial), and foreign sources are discussed, with the
distribution of funds among various organizations and
branches of specialization indicated. Whenever pos-
sible, comparable statistics for more than one year
are presented to show trends as well as size of effort; if
such data are not obtainable, other indications of the
amount of money available are noted.
4. MANPOWER AND TRAINING
The quality, numbers, and adequacy of nuclear
scientists, engineer, and technicians are appraised.
The number, quality, and general content of govern-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
JULY 1959 CHAP
ment and privately sponsored nuclear training programs
are discussed and evaluated.
B. Major research and development
This Subsection is subdivided according to the major
phases of the nation's research and development
effort, the extent of subdivision being determined by
the size and complexity of the nuclear energy program.
If there is little activity, a consolidated discussion
without subheadings is used.
This Subsection provides main detailed support for
Subsection A, 1, and, therefore, describes and evaluates
the amount, quality, and significance of research and
development in each phase of nuclear energy in terms of
recent outstanding achievements, strengths and weak-
nesses, current projects and their status, and recent
trends. Key personnel and facilities may be mentioned,
but details are reserved for Subsections F and G. The
Physics Subsection of SECTION 76 is cross-referenced
where appropriate.
C. Sources and production of basic materials
Availability of basic materials is discussed. Process-
ing from raw material to end product for such essential
materials as uranium, thorium, heavy water, beryllium,
pure graphite, pure calcium, magnesium, lithium, etc.,
is briefly described and evaluated. Names and loca-
tions of the most important mines and processing plants
(existing or under construction) for producing basic
materials are given. SECTION 63 is cross-referenced
where appropriate. This Subsection provides main
detailed support for Subsection A, 1, following, there-
fore, the general pattern of Subsection B.
D. Production of reactive materials
The processes and equipment used for producing
reactive materials on other than a laboratory scale are
briefly described and evaluated, with estimates given
of the quality and quantities of various materials
produced and stockpiled. The names and locations of
the most important facilities (existing or under con-
struction) for producing such materials are given.
This Subsection provides main detailed support for
Subsection A, 1, following, therefore, the general
pattern of Subsection B.
E. Applications of nuclear energy
A qualitative and quantitative estimate of the
subject country's current capabilities for various nuclear
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
TER VII afilimindivaikun
energy applications (apparent and/or announced) is
provided. Weapons, power, isotopes for research and
other uses, are covered. Names and locations of the
most important facilities (existing or under construc-
tion) concerned with nuclear applications are given.
SECTION 62 is cross-referenced where appropriate. This
Subsection provides main detailed support for Sub-
section A, 1, following, therefore, the general pattern of
Subsection B.
F. Significant research, development, and
production facilities
Each significant government and private (including
industrial) nuclear energy facility is described and
evaluated, giving Its name in English and the native
language, its location (with geographic coordinates),
the name of the director, the subordination and variant
names (if any) of the facility, and the names and loca-
tions of any major branches. For each organization,
major achievements (if any), current activities, and the
adequacy of personnel and equipment are mentioned,
but discussions of specific research, development, and
production projects (given above under Subsections B
through E) are avoided.
G. Outstanding personalities
The country's outstanding (not all known) nuclear
energy personnel are described briefly, giving for each
(in the following order) full name, academic and/or
military titles, field of specialization, and evaluation of
professional stature, current or last reported profes-
sional position (with dates of employment w here
significant), any earlier outstanding positions, signifi-
cant background information, recent and current
research, and year of birth.
H. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the material in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide collectors of information with collection
targets. In this connection, the principal sources (not
necessarily all sources) actually used are ordinarily
listed.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
auftimmisaw.. NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
Section 74. Biological Warfare
Section 74 covers research and development (and pilot plant produc-
tion), but regular production is covered in Section 64.
A. General
1. CAPABILITIES AND TRENDS
The country's recent achievements, recent (not
future) trends, strengths, and weaknesses in BW are
evaluated briefly, and the phases emphasized and those
neglected are indicated. Comparison is made with
other appropriate countries. The following are dis-
cussed: the adequacy of BW research and development
(including pilot plant) facilities and personnel; whether
capabilities are static, rising, or falling; and expansion
plans, if any. Details are reserved for later Sub-
sections.
2. POLICIES
The priority of the BW program and the general
attitude of the government and people toward it is
indicated. Government policy concerning the growth,
promotion, and military application of BW is examined
in terms of national objectives (offensive and/or de-
fensive), and the allocation of funds, personnel, labora-
tories, plants, and equipment. Cooperation with other
countries in BW activities is discussed.
3. BACKGROUND AND ORGANIZATION
A brief history of the country's achievements and
early organizations for BW is given, followed by general
evaluative descriptions of the functioning of the current
institutions (government establishments and com-
mittees, industrial associations, universities, etc.) which
plan, guide, control, coordinate, and/or finance BW
research activities. Organizations concerned with
other technical fields in addition to BW are discussed
only insofar as they concern BW research; their other
activities are described elsewhere in CHAPTER VII.
B. Research, development, and field testing
This Subsection provides the main detailed support
for Subsection A, 1, and, therefore, describes and
evaluates the amount, quality, and significance of
research, development, and field testing activities in
BW. Topics in the following Subsections are covered
to the extent that they are applicable to the subject
country. If there are few such activities, any or all of
the subheadings are discarded in favor of an explanatory
introduction or a consolidated discussion. Key per-
sonnel and facilities are mentioned, but details are
reserved for Subsections C and D.
PAGE 8
1. OFFENSIVE
a. BW AGENT RESEARCH ? Research On new and
improved BW agents is discussed and evaluated;
those which have been or are being studied or tested
are listed. (New agents are those not developed
beyond the pilot plant stage.)
b. BW AGENT DEVELOPMENT ? Pilot plant opera-
tions and field testing of new and improved BW agents
are evaluated. Processing methods, key intermediate
products, and special materials and equipment, if any,
are covered with respect to developmental work includ-
ing pilot plants.
C. DISSEMINATION OF BW AGENTS ? Research,
development, and field testing of equipment and
methods for the dissemination of. BW agents, e.g.,
portable sprayers, spray tanks, aerosol bombs, explosive
devices, and special munitions, are described and evalu-
ated.
2. DEFENSIVE
Descriptions and evaluations are presented covering
research, development, and field testing of materials,
techniques, and equipment for defensive BW, e.g.,
detection materiel and techniques, protective clothing
(impregnated fabrics and impermeable materials),
adsorbents for the gas mask canister (charcoal, paper,
asbestos, special chemicals), gas mask facepieces
(design, materials), decontaminants (ointments, pow-
ders), protective shelters (design, materials), prophy-
lactics (immunization), and treatment of human,
animal, and plant victims (antidotes, drugs, isolation,
killing or destruction). Where appropriate, other
sections of the NIS such as public health, manufactur-
ing, and armed forces, are referenced.
C. Significant research and development
facilities
Each known or suspected significant BW research
and/or development facility, pilot plant, and testing
station is described and evaluated, giving its name in
English and the native language, its location (with
geographic coordinates), the name of the director, the
subordination and variant names (if any) of the facility.
and the names and locations of any major branches,
For each organization, major achievements (if any),
current activities, and the adequacy of personnel and
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER VII imeiggffnlinamo
equipment are mentioned, but discussions of specific
research and development projects (given above under
Subsection B) are avoided.
D. Outstanding personalities
The country's outstanding (not all known) BW
personnel are described briefly, giving for each (in the
following order) full name, academic and/or military
titles, field of specialization, an evaluation of profes-
sional stature, current or last reported professional
position (with dates of employment where significant),
any earlier outstanding positions, significant back-
ground information, recent and current research, and
year of birth.
A. General
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the material in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide collectors of information with collection targets.
In this connection, the principal sources (not neces-
sarily all sources) actually used are ordinarily listed.
Section 75. Chemical Warfare
Section 75 covers research and development (and pilot plant produc-
tion), but regular production is covered in Section 64.
1. CAPABILITIES AND TRENDS
The country's recent achievements, recent (not
future) trends, strengths, and weaknesses in CW
research and development are evaluated briefly, and
the phases emphasized and those neglected are indi-
cated. Comparison is made with other appropriate
countries. The following are discussed: the adequacy
of CW research and development (including pilot plant)
facilities and personnel; whether capabilities are staltic,
rising, or falling; and expansion plans, if any. Details
are reserved for later Subsections.
2. POLICIES
The priority of the CW program and the general
attitude of the government and people toward it are
indicated. Government policy concerning the growth,
promotion, and military application of CW is examined
in terms of national objectives (offensive and/or de-
fensive), and allocations of funds, personnel, laborato-
ries, and equipment. Cooperation with other countries
in CW activities is discussed.
3. BACKGROUND AND ORGANIZATION
A brief history of the country's achievements and
early organizations for CW is given, followed by
general evaluative descriptions of the functioning of the
current institutions (government establishments and
committees, industrial associations, universities, etc.)
which plan, guide, control, coordinate, and/or finance
CW research activities. Organizations concerned
with other technical fields in addition to CW are dis-
cussed only insofar as they concern CW research;
their other activities are described elsewhere in CHAPTER
VII.
B. Research, development, and field testing
This Subsection provides the main detailed support
for Subsection A, 1, and, therefore, describes and evalu-
ates the amount, quality, and significance of research,
development, and field testing in CW. Topics in the
following Subsections are covered to the extent that
they are applicable to the subject country. If there is
little CW activity, any or all of the subheadings may
be discarded in favor of an explanatory introduction or
a consolidated discussion. Key personnel and facilities
may be mentioned, but details are reserved for Sub-
sections C and D.
1. OFFENSIVE
a. CW AGENT RESEARCH ? Research on new and
improved CW agents is discussed and evaluated;
those which have been or are being studied or tested
are listed. (New agents are those not developed beyond
the pilot plant stage.)
b. CW AGENT DEVELOPMENT Pilot plant opera-
tions and field testing of new and improved CW agents
are discussed and evaluated, covering processing
methods, key intermediate chemicals, and special
materials and equipment, if any.
C. DISSEMINATION OF CW AGENTS ? Description
and evaluation is presented covering research, develop-
ment, and field testing of new types of equipment and
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
1.1J.G.1111/1.1.1
methods for the dissemination of CW agents, e.g.,
thermal generators, portable sprayers, spray tanks,
aerosol bombs, explosive devices, and special munitions.
d. FLAME WARFARE ? Research, development, and
field testing of flame warfare materials, incendiaries,
and smokes are described, including fuels and prototype
material used for dissemination.
2. DEFENSIVE
Description and evaluation is presented covering
research, development, and field testing of new and
improved materials, techniques, and equipment for
defensive CW, e.g., detection material and techniques,
protective clothing (impregnated fabrics and imperme-
able materials), adsorbents for the gas mask canister
(charcoal, paper, asbestos, special chemicals), gas mask
facepieces (design, materials), decontaminants (oint-
ments, powders), protective shelters (design, materials),
and therapeutic agents (antidotes).
C. Significant research and development fa-
cilities and pilot plants
Each known or suspected significant CW research
and/or development facility, pilot plant, and testing
station is described and evaluated giving its name in
English and the native language, its location (with
geographic coordinates), the name of the director, the
subordination and variant names (if any) of the facility,
and the names and locations of any major branches.
For each organization, major achievements (if any),
current activities, and the adequacy of personnel and
equipment are mentioned, but discussions of specific
research and development projects (given above under
Subsection B) are a:voided.
D. Outstanding personalities
The country's outstanding (not all known) CW
personnel are described briefly, giving for each (in the
following order) full name, academic and/or military
titles, field of specialization, an evaluation of profes-
sional stature, current or last reported professional
position (with dates of employment where significant),
any earlier outstanding positions, significant back-
ground information, recent and current research, and
year of birth.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the material in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about
which information is deficient or unavailable and
thereby provide collectors of information with collection
targets. In this connection, the principal sources (not
necessarily all sources) actually used are ordinarily
listed.
Section 76. Physical Sciences, Mathematics, and Medicine
A. General
The country's current research and development
capabilities in the physical and life sciences other than
those fields covered in SECTIONS 71 through 75 are
summarized. General background factors (such as
weaknesses and strengths, government policy, popular
attitudes, etc.) which influence capabilities in the
subject sciences are mentioned, but details are omitted;
the main discussion of these factors appears in SECTION
70.
B. through X. Subject sciences
These Subsections are normally entitled: B. Chem-
istry and Metallurgy; C. Meteorology; D. Oceanog-
raphy; E. Geological Sciences and Terrestrial Geo-
physics; F. Physics, Allied Sciences, and Mathematics;
and G. Medical, Veterinary, and Allied Sciences.
These Subsections are, however, altered if some other
breakdown provides a better coverage for a particular
nation. For each subject science, the following outline
is used:
PAGE 10
1. GENERAL
a. CAPABILITIES AND TRENDS ? The country's
recent achievements, recent (not future) trends,
strengths, and weaknesses in the subject science are
evaluated briefly, and the fields emphasized and those
neglected are indicated. Comparison is made with
other appropriate countries. The following are dis-
cussed: adequacy of facilities, personnel, funds, and
industrial support; whether capabilities are static,
rising, or falling; expansion plans, if any; current and
potential capabilities related to national military and
economic status; and any exceptional participation in
international scientific and technical organizations and
activities. Details are reserved for later Subsections.
b. BACKGROUND AND ORGANIZATION ? A brief
history of the country's achievements and early organi-
zations in the subject science is given, followed by
general evaluative descriptions of the functioning of the
current institutions (government establishments and
committees, industrial associations, universities, pro-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 CHAPTER VII
fessional societies, etc.) which plan, guide, control,
coordinate, and/or finance research and development in
the subject science. Organizations concerned with
other sciences in addition to the subject science ? are
discussed only insofar as they concern the subject
science; their other activities are described elsewhere in
CHAPTER VII.
2. MAJOR RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
BY FIELD
Each subject science is covered under appropriate
subheadings, unless there is little activity in the
country, in which case any or all of the subheadings are
discarded in favor of an explanatory introduction or a
consolidated discussion.
Subsections B. 2., C. 2., D. 2., etc., provide the main
detailed support for the preceding general appraisals
under Capabilities and Trends and describe and
evaluate the amount, quality, and significance of
research and development in each field and branch in
terms of recent outstanding achievements, strengths and
weaknesses, current projects and their status, and recent
trends. Projects that have progressed beyond the
prototype or pilot plant stage are omitted, except for
citing them as recent achievements and, if appropriate,
referring to other portions of the NIS. Key personnel
and facilities may be mentioned, but details are re-
served for Subsections 3 and 4.
3. SIGNIFICANT RESEARCH AND DEVELOP-
MENT FACILITIES
Each significant government and private (including
industrial) research and/or development facility is
described, giving its name in English and the native
language, its location (with geographic coordinates),
the name of the director, the subordination and variant
names (if any) of the facility, and the names and
locations of any major branches. For each organiza-
tion, a few major achievements (if any), current
activities, and the adequacy of personnel and equip-
ment are mentioned, but discussions of specific re-
search and development projects (given above under
Subsection 2) are avoided.
4. OUTSTANDING PERSONALITIES
The country's outstanding (not all known) personnel
in the subject science are described briefly, giving for
each (in the following order) full name, academic and/or
military titles, field of specialization, an evaluation of
professional stature, current or last reported profes-
sional position (with dates of employment where
significant), any earlier outstanding positions, signifi-
cant background information, recent and current
research, and year of birth.
Y. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be ac-
corded the material in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient and unavailable and thereby
provide collectors of information with collection targets.
In this connection, the principal sources (not necessarily
all sources) actually used are ordinarily listed.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 11
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER VIII
ARMED FORCES
Section 80 Introduction
Section 81 Ground Forces
Section 82 Naval Forces
Section 83 Air Forces
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
Chapter MI-Armed Forces
OUTLINE
SECTION 80. INTRODUCTION
A. General
B. Structure of armed forces
1. Composition
2. Top control
C. Size of armed forces
D. Position of armed forces in the nation
1. Legal basis
2. Traditions
3. Political influence
4. Fiscal control
E. Manpower
1. Available manpower for armed forces
2. Quality of manpower
3. Conscription
SECTION 81. GROUND FORCES
A. General
B. Administrative organization
1. Army high command
2. Territorial organization
3. Arms and services
C. Tactical organization
1. General
2. Higher headquarters
3. Staff organization
4. Combat and combat support units
5. Service units
D. Strength and disposition
1. Strength
2. Disposition
E. Strategy and defenses
1. Strategic problems and doctrines
2. Permanent fortifications
F. Tactics
1. Basic tactical doctrines
2. Special operations
G. Personnel
1. Ranks
2. Pay
3. Procurement and terms of service
4. Quality factors
H. Reserve and mobilization system
1. Reserve system
2. Mobilization system
3. Mobilization potential
I. Training
1. General
2. Preinduction
3. Individual
4. Unit, combined, and maneuvers
5. Reserve
6. Schools and installations
J. Logistics
1. Classification of materiel
2. Procurement
3. Peacetime storage and issue
4. War supply and movement
5. Maintenance
6. Evacuation
K. Materiel
1. Ordnance
2. Signal
3. Quartermaster
4. Engineer
5. Chemical
6. Medical
L. Personalities
1. Biographical sketches
2. List of personalities
M. Quasi-military and other ground forces
N. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 82. NAVAL FORCES
A. General
B. Organization
1. Naval high command
2. Naval districts (zones or activities)
3. Naval communications network
4. Forces afloat
5. Other naval organizations
C. Strength and disposition
1. Ships
2. Personnel
D. Policy and doctrine
1. Naval strategic concepts
2. Doctrine
3. Naval budget and appropriations
4. Construction and development pro-
grams
5. Naval relationships with other coun-
tries
6. National attitude toward the navy
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
?firmistorMPL0 NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
E. Personnel
1. Corps and services
2. Rank and rates
3. Procurement
4. Conditions of service
5. Uniforms and insignia
F. Reserve and mobilization system
1. Ships
2. Personnel
3. Merchant marine and other auxiliary
forces
4. Adequacy of mobilization system
G. Training
1. General
2. Facilities
3. Officer
4. Enlisted
5. Shipboard
6. Fleet and force
7. Reserve
Fl. Logistics
1. Procurement
2. New construction, repair and mainte-
nance
3. Centers of supply
I. Ship design and characteristics
1. Design of ships
2. Strategic characteristics
J. Materiel
1. General
2. Characteristics
K. Personalities
1. Biographical sketches
2. Flag and ranking officers
L. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 83. AIR FORCES
PAGE 2
A. Strategic significance
1. Air value of the area
2. International position of the air force
3. Role of air force in national politics
B. Historical development
C. Mission and doctrine
1. Mission
JANUARY 1962
2. Development of doctrine
3. Doctrine of employment
D. Organization
1, Position in government and defense
structure
2. Air high command
3. Major commands/components
4. Composition of operational commands
5. Territorial organization
E. Operational systems of major striking
forces
F. Personnel
1. Procurement
2. Conditions of service
3. Characteristics
4. Morale factors
G. Training
1. General
2. Preparatory
3. Preoperational flying
4. Ground personnel
5. Schools for advanced military
6. Operational
7. Reserve
8. Foreign air programs
H. Logistics
1. Supply
2. Maintenance
3. Relationship of requirements to pro-
duction
4. Appraisal of the logistical system
Reserve and mobilization
1. Reserve
2. Mobilization
Air facilities
1. General
2. Historical development
3. Distribution
4. Projected development
K. Means of identification
1. Aircraft markings
2. Unit identification
3. Uniforms and insignia
4. Rank
5. Awards and decorations
L. Comments on principal sources
I.
J.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
milimaimmamm
JULY 1958
Chapter VIII-Armed Forces
OUTLINE
SECTION 80. INTRODUCTION
A. General
B. Structure of armed forces
1. Composition
2. Top control
C. Size of armed forces
D. Position of armed forces in the nation
1. Legal basis
2. Traditions
3. Political influence
4. Fiscal control
E. Manpower
1. Available manpower for armed forces
2. Quality of manpower
3. Conscription
SECTION 81. GROUND FORCES
A. General
B. Administrative organization
1. Army high command
2. Territorial organization
3. Arms and services
C. Tactical organization
1. General
2. Higher headquarters
3. Staff organization
4. Combat units
5. Service units
D. Order of battle
1. Strength
2. Dispositions
E. Strategy and defenses
1. Strategic problems and doctrines
2. Permanent fortifications
F. Tactics
1. Basic tactical doctrines
2. Special operations
G. Personnel
1. Ranks
2. Pay
3. Procurement and terms of service
4. Quality factors
H. Reserve and mobilization system
1. Reserve system
2. Mobilization system
3. Mobilization potential
I. Training
1. General
2. Preinduction
3. Individual
4. Unit, combined, and maneuvers
5. Reserve
6. Schools and installations
J. Logistics
1. Classification of materiel
2. Procurement
3. Peacetime storage and issue
4. War supply and movement
5. Maintenance
6. Evacuation
K. Materiel
1. Ordnance
2. Signal
3. Quartermaster
4. Engineer
5. Chemical
6. Medical
L. Personalities
1. Biographical sketches
2. List of personalities
M. Quasi-military and other ground forces
N. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 82. NAVAL FORCES
A. General
B. Organization
1. Naval high command
2. Naval districts (zones or activities)
3. Naval communications network
4. Forces afloat
5. Other naval organizations
C. Strength and disposition
1. Ships
2. Personnel
D. Policy and doctrine
1. Naval strategic concepts
2. Doctrine
3. Naval budget and appropriations
4. Construction and development pro-
grams
5. Naval relationships with other coun-
tries
6. National attitude toward the navy
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
OilIMPAPPRIMPED NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
E. Personnel
1. Corps and services
2. Rank and rates
3. Procurement
4. Conditions of service
5. Uniforms and insignia
F. Reserve and mobilization system
1. Ships
2. Personnel
3. Merchant marine and other auxiliary
forces
4. Adequacy of mobilization system
G. Training
1. General
2. Facilities
3. Officer
4. Enlisted
5. Shipboard
6. Fleet and force
7. Reserve
H. Logistics
1. Procurement
2. New construction, repair and :mainte-
nance
3. Centers of supply
Ship design and characteristics
1. Design of ships
2. Strategic characteristics
Materiel
1. General
2. Characteristics
Personalities
1. Biographical sketches
2. Flag and ranking officers
Comments on principal sources
J.
K.
L.
SECTION 83.
A.
B.
C.
PAGE 2
AIR FORCES
Strategic significance
1. Air value of the area
2. International position of the air force
3. Role of air force in national politics
Historical development
Mission and doctrine
J. Mission
JULY 1957
2. Development of doctrine
3. Doctrine of employment
D. Organization
1. Position in government and defense
structure
2. Air high command
3. Major commands/components
4. Composition of operational commands
5. Territorial organization
E. Operational systems of major striking
forces
F. Personnel
1. Procurement
2. Conditions of service
3. Characteristics
4. Morale factors
G. Training
1. General
2. Preparatory
3. Preoperational flying
4. Ground personnel
5. Schools for advanced military
6. Operational
7. Reserve
8. Foreign air programs
H. Logistics
1. Supply
2. Maintenance
3. Relationship of requirements to pro-
duction
4. Appraisal of the logistical system
I. Reserve and mobilization
1. Reserve
2. Mobilization
J. Air facilities
1. General
2. Historical development
3. Distribution
4. Projected development
K. Means of identification
1. Aircraft markings
2. Unit identification
3. Uniforms and insignia
4. Rank
5. Awards and decorations
L. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER VIII 000.11?11MITM!
When there is a Naval Air Arm contribution, Section 83 is pre-
sented as Part 1-Air Force; Part 2-Naval Air Arm; Part 3-Com-
ments on Principal Sources (covering the entire Section and replacing
Subsection L above). Following is the outline for Part 2-Naval Air
Arm:
A. Historical development
B. Strategic significance
1. General
2. International position of naval. avia-
tion
3. National stature of naval aviation
C. Doctrine
1. Mission
2. Development
3. Strategic concepts
D. Organization
1. Naval organization
2. Operational commands
E. Operational procedures
F. Personnel
1, Procurement
2. Morale
G. Training
1. General
2. Preoperational flying
3. Ground personnel
4. Schools for advanced military
A. General
5. Operational
6. Reserve
7. Foreign air programs
H. Logistics
1. Supply
2. Maintenance
3. Foreign sources of supply
4. Appraisal of the logistical system
I. Reserve and mobilization
1. Reserve
2. Mobilization
J. Air facilities
1. General
2. Distribution
K. Aircraft carriers
L. Means of identification
1. Aircraft markings
2. Unit identification
3. Uniforms and insignia
4. Rank
5. Awards and decorations
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Editorial
Instructions are followed in detail.
Section 80. Introduction
Assess the armed forces in general terms, including
their relative international position in terms of strength,
and state of materiel and training. Continue with a
discussion of trends, international commitments, gen-
eral strategic plans, etc., making the General Subsec-
tion a balanced synthesis of the General Subsections of
SECTIONS 81, 82, and 83. Where considered significant
in terms of resistance potential, indicate current atti-
tudes toward compulsory military service and mobiliza-
tion in times of national emergency.
B. Structure of armed forces
1. COMPOSITION
Indicate briefly the components of the armed forces
with their correct nomenclature, including pertinent
subordinations and any militarized police forces, etc.
2. TOP CONTROL
Explain the overall political and military control of
the forces, with a simple chart to appear on the bottom
half of the first page. Both chart and text should show
in their proper relationships: (a) the Chief of State,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
with his proper military title (Supreme Commander,
etc.) ; (b) any top policy-making body, such as a. National
Security Council, with its composition and purpose
indicated in the text; (c) the Cabinet members or other
political echelons through whom the chain of command
or administrative control passes; (d) coordinating
bodies such as Joint Chiefs of Staff; (e) the highest
purely military echelon for control of each component;
and (f) on a level at the bottom, the components them-
selves. Broken lines may be used to show administra-
tive, as distinct from operational, control. In a separate
paragraph, if pertinent, state how long the Present
system has been valid and indicate the nature of the
change from any recent previous organization. Indi-
cate any important change in the top control structure
to be effected in time of war. If the chart includes a
Joint General Staff or other important agency which
will not be described in detail under SECTIONS 81, 82,
or 83, its composition and functions should also be
described in a separate paragraph. Explain briefly the
methods of coordinating the armed forces components
and resolving differences among them.
C. Size of armed forces
Discuss the relationship of armed forces strength to
total population, indicating significant trends in total
armed forces strength and in the proportions among the
components. Insert a table showing the total personnel
strength and that of each component, with appropriate
footnotes to account for changes in nomenclature or
subordination, for various dates. As a minimum, the
following should be included: 1913, World War I peak.
(if country was a belligerent), a typical year in the
1920's, the prewar normal (usually 1 July 1937), World
War II peak, 1 January of each postwar year, quarterly
for the past three or four quarters, and the cut-off date.
D. Position of armed forces in the nation
1. LEGAL BASIS
Cite the legal basis (provision of Constitution, basic
military law, etc.) for the existence, character, top
control, and overall structure of the armed forces.
include dates of pertinent legislation and any signifi-
cant historical development of the legal status of the
military establishment or its components.
2. TRADITIONS
Indicate briefly the warlike, pacifist, militarist,
apathetic, or other character of the traditions and
proclivities of the nation. Cite past wars (victories
and defeats) which have contributed to the present
attitude of the people toward war and military or naval
affairs. Indicate the prestige, or lack thereof, of the
armed forces and their components and the existence
of any militarist or warlike section of the population.
Mention past and present foreign influences, if perti-
nent.
PAGE 4
JULY 1957
3. POLITICAL INFLUENCE
Discuss the political forces or groups within the
country which effectively control the armed forces.
Indicate whether the country is ruled by a military
dictator or a dictatorial minority or whether constitu-
tional guarantees prevent the misuse of military power.
Discuss any influence of the military on political
affairs. Indicate any factionalism, favoritism, or polit-
ical intrigue within the military. Indicate the loyalty
of the armed . forces (officers and enlisted personnel)
to the regime and any measures taken to insure such
loyalty (political commissars, appointment of trusted
commanders). Discuss infiltration of subversive in-
fluences.
4. FISCAL CONTROL
Describe in a short paragraph the manner in which
funds are allocated to the armed forces and who con-
trols the pursestrings. Give, in tabular form, actual
or estimated budgetary figures, broken down by main
components, for several recent, wartime, and prewar
fiscal years, indicating the proportion of the total
budget allotted to military purposes and any concealed
items. (Figures should be given in dollars, with foot-
notes or a separate column indicating the rate or rates
of exchange used.) Discuss briefly trends in the budget
and its adequacy.
E. Manpower
1. AVAILABLE MANPOWER FOR ARMED
FORCES
Give statistics on the total number of males by
five-year age groups from 15 to 49 as of the first day
of the year of publication or a more recent date if im-
portant changes have occurred. Indicate how many
of the total in each group are regarded as fit for mili-
tary service. If pertinent, show the depletion of fit
manpower by war casualties. Give the size of the
annual class reaching military age and the average
number of men actually inducted annually.
2. QUALITY OF MANPOWER
Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of the man-
power from the military point of view, including such
factors as physique, intelligence, education, amena-
bility to hardship, aptitude for the use and care of
modern equipment, response to discipline, attitude
toward military service, and general morale and loyalty
factors. If pertinent, indicate the composition of the
military manpower by race, religion, or other cate-
gories and the varying suitability of different elements
in the population to military service. Differentiate
between the manpower as a whole and that section of
it which is drawn upon for the armed forces.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A00030003p0p1-_4___
JANUARY 1.962 CHAPTER VIII _
3. CONSCRIPTION
a. LEGAL BASIS ? State how long compulsory
military service has been on the statute books and to
what extent it has been and is now universally, equi-
tably, and efficiently enforced. Cite the basic military
service law and executory regulations now in effect
and include popular acceptance thereof or resistance
thereto. Give the total period of military liability
and the prescribed period of service for each component
of the armed forces or category of personnel. Indicate
what proportion of each of the main components of
the armed forces is obtained by voluntary recruitment.
If pertinent, mention any prospects of future change
in the system.
b. GENERAL SYSTEM ? State what agency or
agencies administer the conscription system and how it
is organized territorially. Indicate the method of
designating age classes (i.e., by year of birth or by year
of normal induction). Give the age, time of year, and
procedure for each step in the operation of the system
(initial registration for military service, initial medical
A. General
examination and classification, selection of men for
callup, consideration of applications for deferment,
allocation to main components, actual callup, actual
reporting for duty). If appropriate, indicate what
minority groups (political or religious) are discrimi-
nated against during selection for callup.
C. STANDARDS OF FITNESS AND DEFERMENT ? In-
dicate in general terms the standards of physical fitness
applied. List the fitness categories. Cite any actual
figures on fitness or acceptance rates which may be
available. Indicate the rules applied in granting de-
ferments or exemptions for occupational, educational,
or hardship reasons and the number of men affected.
d. PRESENT STATUS ? Indicate what age class Or
classes are at present performing compulsory military
service and the dates or prospective dates or schedules
of callup and discharge of these and adjacent classes.
Give the size of each class affected. Estimate the
current composition of the armed forces by age classes
or age groups.
Section 81. Ground Forces
In the form of a brief, overall appraisal of the ground
forces as a fighting machine, cite several of the most
salient points of strength and weakness as to personnel,
materiel, organization, and efficiency which will be
more fully developed in subsequent Subsections. Give
any indications from past development and perform-
ance which will provide the necessary historical per-
spective, and indicate briefly the long-range and short-
range trends. Mention significant foreign influences,
and relate the whole discussion to the strategic position,
problems, and capacities of the country.
B. Administrative organization
1. ARMY HIGH COMMAND
a. STRUCTURE ? Explain briefly the overall organ-
ization of the army, including the main subdivisions
of the War Ministry and the chain of command to the
territorial headquarters and field forces. Insert one
or more charts showing all known or significant, high
command agencies in their proper relationships; pay
careful attention to exact nomenclature. State what
changes in the high command structure are contem-
plated in case of war.
b. FUNCTIONS ? Describe in some detail the in-
ternal organization and functioning of each main
bureau and staff division shown in the above charts,
using appropriate subheadings.
2. TERRITORIAL ORGANIZATION
Describe the division of the country into military
districts, regions, corps areas, etc. Explain the func-
tions of such subdivisions (recruitment, local defense,
training, replacement, administration, tactical com-
mand). List them, showing their headquarters loca-
tions and any subareas. Include an outline map
showing their boundaries and headquarters (or show
them on the appropriate map under Subsection D
below and refer to it).
3. ARMS AND SERVICES
Explain the concepts and nomenclature used in
dividing army personnel and troop units into branches
of service. Do not include "services" which are purely
high command agencies. List the arms and services
which are represented by actual troop units or by dis-
tinctive insignia, giving in parentheses their designa-
tions in the language of the country.
C. Tactical organization
1. GENERAL
Describe briefly the overall organization of the army
into tactical commands and basic tactical units, indi-
cating any contemplated differences between peace
and war.
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
2. HIGHER HEADQUARTERS
Give the actual organization (peace and war) of the
higher tactical echelons above division. For each
such echelon explain the nomenclature and state the
type of operational mission or administrative function
for which it is designed. Indicate what units are
usually subordinate to it.
3. STAFF ORGANIZATION
Give available data, with a chart if appropriate, on
the organization and functioning of field staffs.
4. COMBAT AND COMBAT SUPPORT UNITS
Describe, under appropriate subheadings and with
accompanying charts, the detailed organization, in-
cluding known or estimated TOE strengths and allot-
ments of weapons and vehicles, of the various types
of divisions and smaller independent combat units.
Describe the organization, equipment, and capabil-
ities of type units that provide support to combat
units such as psychological warfare units. The de-
scription of each unit should be carried down to the
smallest elements (rifle squad, tank platoon, etc.).
Indicate the tactical mission and roles of each unit
described. Explain carefully any differences in nomen-
clature from U.S. usage.
5. SERVICE UNITS
Describe briefly the organization of engineer, signal,
supply, and other service units, including one or more
charts if needed.
D. Strength and disposition
This Subsection provides a generalized appraisal of
the strength and disposition of the major ground
forces units as well as a presentation of strength trends
over a number of years. For countries which are
regularly covered in the ORDER OF BATTLE
SUMMARY, state approximately as follows: "De-
tailed current identifications and locations of units of
the (Subject) ground forces are contained in the latest
issue of the Order of Battle Summary of Foreign Ground
Forces published by the Assistant Chief of Staff for
Intelligence, Headquarters, Department of the Army.
Administrative areas and typical major dispositions of
the (Subject) ground forces are shown on an appro-
priate map.
1. STRENGTH
a. PERSONNEL ? Give an evaluative discussion of
personnel strength by major components, branch of
service, officers and enlisted men, cadres and con-
scripts, age classes, auxiliaries, colonials, racial and
linguistic elements.
b. UNITS ? Provide an evaluative discussion of
current number of armies, corps, divisions (by type),
and individual smaller combat units (by type),
c. ARMAMENT ? Discuss current holdings and
authorized strength in each category of major arma-
ment.
PAGE 6
d. TRENDS ? Discuss trends in ground forces
strength for recent years; support by selected rep-
resentative statistics on personnel strength, units,
and major weapons (with country of origin in paren-
theses) .
2. DISPOSITION
Describe in general terms the disposition of forces at
home and abroad, with strength figures by major area,
and indicate any significant concentrations.
E. Strategy and defenses
1. STRATEGIC PROBLEMS AND DOC-
TRINES
Without going into a detailed strategic analysis,
indicate briefly the strategic military problems of the
nation in the light of position, terrain, economic,
political, and other pertinent factors. Discuss the
manner in which the leaders of the nation, and spe-
cifically the military planners, appear to contemplate
meeting these problems. Show how the present organ-
ization and disposition of forces and the mobilization
plans fit in with these strategic problems and plans.
Summarize the concepts of "Principles of War" and
the established strategic doctrines of the country, in-
cluding any pertinent reference to military literature,
historical background, past campaigns, and foreign
influences.
2. PERMANENT FORTIFICATIONS
a. GENERAL SYSTEM ? Describe the overall plan
of permanent fortifications as it fits into the strategic
concept. Indicate any lessons from the past, current
trends, or future plans.
b. LAND FORTIFICATIONS ? Describe in detail, with
subheadings if necessary, the location, purpose, charac-
teristics, and manning of each frontier or internal forti-
fied area, fortified line, or fortress town. Insert a map
if appropriate, using standard or special symbols.
C. COASTAL DEFENSES ? Describe in detail, with
subheadings if necessary, the location, purpose, charac-
teristics, and manning of coastal fortified areas, harbor
defenses, minefields, warning systems, and static
coastal batteries. Include data on map of land
fortifications on the appropriate map in D., or insert
a separate map if necessary.
F. Tactics
1. BASIC TACTICAL DOCTRINES
Discuss the basic tactical doctrines for the ground
arms, such as attack, defense, reconnaissance, with-
drawal, artillery support, use of cavalry and tanks, use
of field fortifications and obstacles, and close combat.
Point out any differences in concept or emphasis from
U.S. doctrine. Cite the manuals in which such doc-
trines are formulated, with brief quotations if pertinent.
Explain the tactics and techniques down to an appro-
priate level (depending on the size of the army). Dis-
cuss current trends in tactical doctrine and technique.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER VIII miliPMPLIIRT,??
3. CONSCRIPTION
a. LEGAL BASIS ? State how long compulsory
military service has been on the statute books and to
what extent it has been and is now universally, equi-
tably, and efficiently enforced. Cite the basic military
service law and executory regulations now in effect
and include popular acceptance thereof or resistance
thereto. Give the total period of military liability
and the prescribed period of service for each component
of the armed forces or category of personnel. Indicate
what proportion of each of the main components of
the armed forces is obtained by voluntary recruitment.
If pertinent, mention any prospects of future change
in the system.
b. GENERAL SYSTEM ? State what agency or
agencies administer the conscription system and how it
is organized territorially. Indicate the method of
designating age classes (i.e., by year of birth or by year
of normal induction). Give the age, time of year, and
procedure for each step in the operation of the system
(initial registration for military service, initial medical
A. General
examination and classification, selection of men for
callup, consideration of applications for deferment,
allocation to main components, actual callup, actual
reporting for duty). If appropriate, indicate what
minority groups (political or religious) are disci imi-
nated against during selection for callup.
C. STANDARDS OF FITNESS AND DEFERMENT ? In-
dicate in general terms the standards of physical fitness
applied. List the fitness categories. Cite any actual
figures on fitness or acceptance rates which may be
available. Indicate the rules applied in granting de-
ferments or exemptions ?for occupational, educational,
or hardship reasons and the number of men affected.
d. PRESENT STATUS ? Indicate what age class or
classes are at present performing compulsory military
service and the dates or prospective dates or schedules
of callup and discharge of these and adjacent classes.
Give the size of each class affected. Estimate the
current composition of the armed forces by age classes
or age groups.
Section 81. Ground Forces
In the form of a brief, overall appraisal of the ground
forces as a fighting machine, cite several of the most
salient points of strength and weakness as to personnel,
materiel, organization, and efficiency which will be
more fully developed in subsequent Subsections. Give
any indications from past development and perform-
ance which will provide the necessary historical per-
spective, and indicate briefly the long-range and short-
range trends. Mention significant foreign influences,
and relate the whole discussion to the strategic position,
problems, and capacities of the country.
B. Administrative organization
1. ARMY HIGH COMMAND
a. STRUCTURE ? Explain briefly the overall organ-
ization of the army, including the main subdivisions
of the War Ministry and the chain of command to the
territorial headquarters and field forces. Insert one
or more charts showing all known or significant. high
command agencies in their proper relationships; pay
careful attention to exact nomenclature. State what
changes in the high command structure are contem-
plated in case of war.
b. FUNCTIONS ? Describe in some detail the in-
ternal organization and functioning of each main
bureau and staff division shown in the above charts,
using appropriate subheadings.
eliariatimamilearraim
2. TERRITORIAL ORGANIZATION
Describe the division of the country into military
districts, regions, corps areas, etc. Explain the func-
tions of such subdivisions (recruitment, local defense,
training, replacement, administration, tactical com-
mand). List them, showing their headquarters loca-
tions and any subareas. Include an outline map
showing their boundaries and headquarters (or show
them on the Order of Battle map under Subsection D
below and refer to it).
3. ARMS AND SERVICES
Explain the concepts and nomenclature used in
dividing army personnel and troop units into branches
of service. Do not include "services" which are purely
high command agencies. List the arms and services
which are represented by actual troop units or by dis-
tinctive insignia, giving in parentheses their designa-
tions in the language of the country.
C. Tactical organization
1. GENERAL
Describe briefly the overall organization of the army
into tactical commands and basic tactical units, indi-
cating any contemplated differences between peace
and war.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
2. HIGHER HEADQUARTERS
Give the actual organization (peace and war) of the
higher tactical echelons above division. For each
such echelon explain the nomenclature and state the
type of operational mission or administrative function
for which it is designed. Indicate what units are
usually subordinate to it.
3. STAFF ORGANIZATION
Give available data, with a chart if appropriate, on
the organization and functioning of field staffs.
4. COMBAT UNITS
Describe, under appropriate subheadings and with
accompanying charts, the detailed organization, in-
cluding known or estimated T/O strengths and allot-
ments of weapons and vehicles, of the various types of
divisions and smaller independent combat units. The
description of each unit should be carried down to the
smallest elements (rifle squad, tank platoon, etc.).
Indicate the tactical mission and roles of each unit
described. Explain carefully any differences in nomem-
clature from U.S. usage.
5. SERVICE UNITS
Describe briefly the organization of engineer, signal,
supply, and other service units, including one or more
charts if needed.
D. Order of battle
For countries which are regularly covered in the
Order of Battle Summary, state approximately as
follows: "For detailed identifications and locations of
units of the (Subject) ground forces, see the latest
issues of the quarterly Order of Battle Summary,
Foreign Ground Forces, published by the Assistant
Chief of Staff for Intelligence, Headquarters, Depart-
ment of the Army. Current major dispositions as of
(cut-off date) are shown on the map(s) in FIGURE(S)
81?."
1. STRENGTH
a. PERSONNEL ? Give any available statistics or
estimates breaking down the total personnel strength
of the ground forces functionally (major components,
branches of service, officers and enlisted men, cadres
and conscripts, age classes, auxiliaries, colonials, racial
or linguistic elements). Figures should be current as
of the cut-off date.
b. UNITS ? Give in tabular form the current
number of armies, corps, divisions (by type), and inde-
pendent smaller combat units (by type).
C. ARMAMENT ? Give in tabular form estirnates of
the total number of each type of tank, artillery piece,
and mortar prescribed under Tables of Equipment and,
in a parallel column, the total number in possession of
PAGE 6
the country. For each type, indicate in parentheses
the country of origin.
2. DISPOSITIONS
Describe briefly the general disposition of forces at
home and abroad, with strength figures by major area,
and indicate any significant concentrations.
E. Strategy and defenses
1. STRATEGIC PROBLEMS AND DOC-
TRINES
Without going into a detailed strategic analysis,
indicate briefly the strategic military problems of the
nation in the light of position, terrain, economic,
political, and other pertinent factors. Discuss the
manner in which the leaders of the nation, and spe-
cifically the military planners, appear to contemplate
meeting these problems. Show how the present organ-
ization and disposition of forces and the mobilization
plans fit in with these strategic problems and plans.
Summarize the concepts of "Principles of War" and
the established strategic doctrines of the country, in-
cluding any pertinent reference to military literature,
historical background, past campaigns, and foreign
influences.
2. PERMANENT FORTIFICATIONS
a. GENERAL SYSTEM ? Describe the overall plan
of permanent fortifications as it fits into the strategic
concept. Indicate any lessons from the past, current
trends, or future plans.
b. LAND FORTIFICATIONS ? Describe in detail, with
subheadings if necessary, the location, purpose, charac-
teristics, and manning of each frontier or internal forti-
fied area, fortified line, or fortress town. Insert a map
if appropriate, using standard of special symbols.
C. COASTAL DEFENSES Describe in detail, with
subheadings if necessary, the location, purpose, charac-
teristics, and manning of coastal fortified areas, harbor
defenses, minefields, warning systems, and static
coastal batteries. Include data on map of land
fortifications, or insert a separate map if necessary.
F. Tactics
1. BASIC TACTICAL DOCTRINES
Discuss the basic tactical doctrines for the ground
arms, such as attack, defense, reconnaissance, with-
drawal, artillery support, use of cavalry and tanks, use
of field fortifications and obstacles, and close combat.
Point out any differences in concept or emphasis from
U.S. doctrine. Cite the manuals in which such doc-
trines are formulated, with brief quotations if pertinent.
Explain the tactics and technique down to an appro-
priate level (depending on the size of the army). Dis-
cuss current trends in tactical doctrine and technique.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER VIII
3. CONSCRIPTION
a. LEGAL BASIS ? State how long compulsory
military service has been on the statute books and to
what extent it has been and is now universally, equi-
tably, and efficiently enforced. Cite the basic military
service law and executory regulations now in effect
and include popular acceptance thereof or resistance
thereto. Give the total period of military liability
and the prescribed period of service for each component
of the armed forces or category of personnel. Indicate
what proportion of each of the main components of
the armed forces is obtained by voluntary recruitment.
If pertinent, mention any prospects of future change
in the system.
b. GENERAL SYSTEM ? State what agency or
agencies administer the conscription system and how it
is organized territorially. Indicate the method of
designating age classes (i.e., by year of birth or by year
of normal induction). Give the age, time of year, and
procedure for each step in the operation of the system
(initial registration for military service, initial medical
A. General
examination and classification, selection of men for
callup, consideration of applications for deferment,
allocation to main components, actual callup, actual
reporting for duty). If appropriate, indicate what
minority groups (political or religious) are discrimi-
nated against during selection for callup.
C. STANDARDS OF FITNESS AND DEFERMENT ? In-
dicate in general terms the standards of physical fitness
applied. List the fitness categories. Cite any actual
figures on fitness or acceptance rates which may be
available. Indicate the rules applied in granting de-
ferments or exemptions for occupational, educational,
or hardship reasons and the number of men affected.
d. PRESENT STATUS ? Indicate what age class Or
classes are at present performing compulsory military
service and the dates or prospective dates or schedules
of callup and discharge of these and adjacent classes.
Give the size of each class affected. Estimate the
current composition of the armed forces by age classes
or age groups.
Section 81. Ground Forces
In the form of a brief, overall appraisal of the ground
forces as a fighting machine, cite several of the most
salient points of strength and weakness as to personnel,
materiel, organization, and efficiency which will be
more fully developed in subsequent Subsections. Give
any indications from past development and perform-
ance which will provide the necessary historical per-
spective, and indicate briefly the long-range and short-
range trends. Mention significant foreign influences,
and relate the whole discussion to the strategic position,
problems, and capacities of the country.
B. Administrative organization
1. ARMY HIGH COMMAND
a. STRUCTURE ? Explain briefly the overall organ-
ization of the army, including the main subdivisions
of the War Ministry and the chain of command to the
territorial headquarters and field forces. Insert one
or more charts showing all known or significant high
command agencies in their proper relationships; pay
careful attention to exact nomenclature. State what
changes in the high command structure are contem-
plated in case of war.
b. FUNCTIONS ? Describe in some detail the in-
ternal organization and functioning of each main
bureau and staff division shown in the above charts,
using appropriate subheadings.
2. TERRITORIAL ORGANIZATION
Describe the division of the country into military
districts, regions, corps areas, etc. Explain the func-
tions of such subdivisions (recruitment, local defense,
training, replacement, administration, tactical com-
mand). List them, showing their headquarters loca-
tions and any subareas. Include an outline map
showing their boundaries and headquarters (or show
them on the Order of Battle map under Subsection D
below and refer to it).
3. ARMS AND SERVICES
Explain the concepts and nomenclature used in
dividing army personnel and troop units into branches
of service. Do not include "services" which are purely
high command agencies. List the arms and services
which are represented by actual troop units or by dis-
tinctive insignia, giving in parentheses their designa-
tions in the language of the country.
C. Tactical organization
1. GENERAL
Describe briefly the overall organization of the army
into tactical commands and basic tactical units, indi-
cating any contemplated differences between peace
and war.
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
im=iimmomme NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
2. HIGHER HEADQUARTERS
Give the actual organization (peace and war) of the
higher tactical echelons above division. For each
such echelon explain the nomenclature and state the
type of operational mission or administrative function
for which it is designed. Indicate what units are
usually subordinate to it.
3. STAFF ORGANIZATION
Give available data, with a chart if appropriate, on
the organization and functioning of field staffs.
4. COMBAT UNITS
Describe, under appropriate subheadings and with
accompanying charts, the detailed organization, in-
cluding known or estimated T/0 strengths and allot-
ments of weapons and vehicles, of the various types of
divisions and smaller independent combat units. The
description of each unit should be carried down to the
smallest elements (rifle squad, . tank platoon, etc.).
Indicate the tactical mission and roles of each unit
described. Explain carefully any differences in nomem-
clature from U.S. usage.
5. SERVICE UNITS
Describe briefly the organization of engineer, signal,
supply, and other service units, including one or more
charts if needed.
D. Order of battle
1. STRENGTH
a. PERSONNEL ? Give any available statistics or
estimates breaking down the total personnel strength
of the ground forces functionally (major components,
branches of service, officers and enlisted men, cadres
and conscripts, age classes, auxiliaries, colonials, racial
or linguistic elements). Figures .should be current as
of the cut-off date.
b. UNITS ? Give in tabular form the current
number of armies, corps, divisions (by type), and inde-
pendent smaller combat units (by type).
C. ARMAMENT ? Give in tabular form estimates of
the total number of each type of tank, artillery piece,
and mortar prescribed under Tables of Equipment and,
in a parallel column, the total number in possession of
the country. For each type, indicate in parentheses
the country of origin.
2. DISPOSITIONS
a. GENERAL ? Describe briefly the general dis-
position of forces at home and abroad, witb strength
figures by major area, and indicate any significant
concentrations.
b. DETAILED ? For countries which are regularly
covered in the Order of Battle Summary, state approxi-
mately as follows: "For detailed identifications and
PAGE 6
locations of units of the Blank ground forces see the
latest issues of the quarterly Order of Battle Summary
of Foreign Ground Forces, published by the Office of the
Assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, Department of the
Army. Current major dispositions as of (cut-off date)
are shown on the map(s) in FiGunn(s) 81?." For all
? other countries, give a complete Order of Battle.
E. Strategy and defenses
1. STRATEGIC PROBLEMS AND DOC-
TRINES
Without going into a detailed strategic analysis,
indicate briefly the strategic military problems of the
nation in the light of position, terrain, economic,
political, and other pertinent factors. Discuss the
manner in which the leaders of the nation, and spe-
cifically the military planners, appear to contemplate
meeting these problems. Show how the present organ-
ization and disposition of forces and the mobilization
plans fit in with these strategic problems and plans.
Summarize the concepts of "Principles of War" and
the established strategic doctrines of the country, in-
cluding any pertinent reference to military literature,
historical background, past campaigns, and foreign
influences.
2. PERMANENT FORTIFICATIONS
a. GENERAL SYSTEM ? Describe the overall plan
of permanent fortifications as it fits into the strategic
concept. Indicate any lessons from the past, current
trends, or future plans.
b. LAND FORTIFICATIONS ? Describe in detail, with
subheadings if necessary, the location, purpose, charac-
teristics, and manning of each frontier or internal forti-
fied area, fortified line, or fortress town. Insert a map
if appropriate, using standard of special symbols.
C. COASTAL DEFENSES ? Describe in detail, with
subheadings if necessary, the location, purpose, charac-
teristics, and manning of coastal fortified areas, harbor
defenses, minefields, warning systems, and static
coastal batteries. Include data on map of land
fortifications, or insert a separate map if necessary.
F. Tactics
1. BASIC TACTICAL DOCTRINES
Discuss the basic tactical doctrines for the ground
arms, such as attack, defense, reconnaissance, with-
drawal, artillery support, use of cavalry and tanks, use
of field fortifications and obstacles, and close combat.
Point .out any differences in concept or emphasis from
U.S. doctrine. Cite the manuals in which such doc-
trines are formulatedovith brief quotations if pertinent.
Explain the tactics and technique down to an appro-
priate level (depending on the size of the army). Dis-
cuss current trends in tactical doctrine and technique.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER VIII
2. SPECIAL OPERATIONS
Discuss tactical doctrines for special operations such
as night fighting, street fighting, winter and arctic
warfare, mountain warfare, jungle warfare, desert
operations, airborne operations, amphibious operations,
and infiltration and partisan methods. Relate the dis-
cussion to the existing or contemplated special forms
of tactical organization.
G. Personnel
1. RANKS
Describe the rank structure of the army, indicating
any differences from United States practice in the
nomenclature, status, and functions of the various gen-
eral officer, officer, and enlisted ranks. Distinguish
between any noncommissioned ranks held by conscripts
and those held by career or long-service personnel.
Explain any special categories such as warrant officers
or military "officials." Indicate the use, if any, of
alternate designations of rank for personnel in various
branches of service ("gunners" for artillery privates,
etc.). Insert a table showing for each rank, starting
with the highest, the designation in the language of the
country, the literal translation, and the nearest U.S.
equivalent.
2. PAY
Describe briefly the system of pay and allowances
for the different categories of military personnel, point-
ing out the differences from U.S. standards both as to
the general level (in light of living costs) and as to
relative rates for the upper and lower ranks. Insert a
fourth column in the table of ranks (referred to above)
giving the basic annual rate of pay in dollars, with a
footnote to indicate the rate of exchange used.
3. PROCUREMENT AND TERMS OF SERVICE
Describe, under suitable subheadings, the methods
of procurement and the terms of service for officers
(active and reserve), noncommissioned officers, privates,
and any other categories. For privates, refer to the
conscription system described in SECTION 80, E, 3, and
describe the additional procedures for voluntary recruit-
ment and reenlistment in the army. For each category,
indicate the machinery in the high command and
throughout the army for control of personnel (assign-
ment, transfer, efficiency reports, promotion, leave and
furlough, hospitalization, discharge).
4. QUALITY FACTORS
Without unduly duplicating the general discussion of
national manpower as a whole contained in SECTION
80, E, 2, describe the effectiveness of personnel actually
serving in the ground forces, emphasizing points of
strength and weakness. Include a discussion of morale,
discipline, esprit do corps, any traditional rivalries be-
tween units or ethnic groups, etc. Indicate specifically
the quality of military leadership from the highest to
the lowest level.
H. Reserve and mobilization system
1. RESERVE SYSTEM
Give the categories and exact nomenclature of all
reserve organizations and reserve groupings, with the
functions of each. Explain the system of classification
and record-keeping for reserve personnel (officer and
enlisted) and the manner in which they are recalled to
service for refresher training. Estimate the total num-
ber of trained reserves by age groups and other cate-
gories and the total additional number of untrained
reserves.
2. MOBILIZATION SYSTEM
Describe the system for callup of reserves, readying
of existing units for combat, and activation of new units
under general mobilization. Indicate what will be the
limiting factors in mobilization for the foreseeable
future, such as trained personnel, cadres, or reserves of
arms and equipment.
3. MOBILIZATION POTENTIAL
In light of the discussion under Subsections 1 and 2
above, estimate the actual mobilization potential of
the ground forces for M plus 30, M plus 180, and other
appropriate periods, showing in parallel columns the
number of personnel and of divisions and other major
units for each such period.
I. Training
1. GENERAL
Characterize the quality and effectiveness of the
overall training system, emphasizing its strengths and
weaknesses and current trends. Indicate the influence
and effectiveness of any foreign military missions.
2. PREINDUCTION
Describe the system of preinduction training or mili-
tary education, including any government-sponsored
or private organizations for encouraging youths to take
an interest in military affairs and any program of
physical conditioning in the schools under army
sponsorship. Indicate trends.
3. INDIVIDUAL
Describe the schedules and methods for basic, ad-
vanced, and specialized individual training of enlisted
personnel in the principal branches. Describe the
organization and functioning of training units, training
centers, or similar installations. Explain briefly the
replacement training system in time of war. In sepa-
rate paragraphs, describe the training schedules and
methods for NCO and officer candidates and the school-
ing given officers as their careers progress. Indicate
any practice of sending military students abroad.
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 :
NIS STANDAR
CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
D INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
4. UNIT, COMBINED, AND MANEUVERS
Describe the methods of unit training in the various
branches, the methods of combined training (infantry-
artillery or other combat teams), and the schedule,
scope, and character of maneuvers.
5. RESERVE
Indicate the schedule and character of refresher
training for reservists. Describe the training system
for reserve officers (ROTC type, etc.).
6. SCHOOLS AND INSTALLATIONS
a. SYSTEM ? Describe the general plan, control,
and efficiency of the army school system and of any
other training installations.
b. LOCATION LIST ? List all army schools and other
training installations, showing the exact name (English
translation followed by vernacular designation in paren-
theses), location, character, capacity, etc., of each.
The list should be arranged according to level.
J. Logistics
1. CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIEL
Indicate the manner in which equipment and sup-
plies are grouped into classes for logistic purposes.
2. PROCUREMENT
Describe the machinery for the planning and control
of procurement of the various classes of materiel, in-
cluding design, placement of orders, acceptance, and
testing. Show the role played by any other govern-
ment agencies (Ministry of Supply, etc.) and indicate
to what extent equipment is produced domestically by
private industry or government arsenals and to what
extent it is imported.
3. PEACETIME STORAGE AND ISSUE
a. SYSTEM Explain the system of storage and
issue for various classes of materiel in the zone of the
interior.
b. INSTALLATIONS ? List all known depots and
other storage installations for materiel, giving pertinent
facts regarding each. Insert a map if warranted.
4. WAR SUPPLY AND MOVEMENT
Explain the machinery for requisition and supply of
various classes of materiel in time of war, using charts
if necessary. Characterize the efficiency of the supply
system. Give any available data on unit movement
requirements and unit resupply requirements under
varying conditions.
5. MAINTENANCE
Describe the system for maintenance and repair of
equipment in the field in peace and in war. Charac-
terize the efficiency.
PAGE 8
6. EVACUATION
Explain briefly the system for evacuation of equip-
ment and of personnel, including the handling of cap-
tured materiel and of prisoners of war.
K. Materiel
1. ORDNANCE
For each category of ordnance equipment, arranged
under subheadings appropriate to the country, include
both a discussion and a table of characteristics. The
discussion should in each case describe the general
situation of the army with regard to the quality and
quantity of the category of materiel in question; review
the indications of the presence, recent acquisition, or
contemplated development or purchase of various spe-
cific items; evaluate each of the more important items
believed to be on hand; and indicate the probable
future trend. The table of characteristics should be
so designed as to provide, in compact form, the most
pertinent comparative data for judging the effective-
ness of each item listed. (The table of characteristics
may be omitted and any pertinent data incorporated
in the text if the subject or the amount of material
available does not lend itself to tabular presentation.)
2. SIGNAL
a. GENERAL Characterize the general situation
of the army with regard to quality and quantity of
signal equipment.
b. ET CETERA ? For each category of signal equip-
ment, arranged under subheadings appropriate to the.
country, give a discussion and, if appropriate, a table
of characteristics as indicated under Ordnance above.
3. QUARTERMASTER
a. UNIFORMS ? Describe briefly the principal types
of uniforms as to general appearance, color, material,
manner of wearing, headdress, footgear, etc. Include
illustrations.
b. INSIGNIA ? Describe briefly the principal in-
signia of rank, branch of service, and specialty.
Illustrate.
C. DECORATIONS ? List the principal decorations,
indicating the method of awarding them and the man-
ner of wearing. Include illustrations if appropriate.
d. INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT ? Describe briefly the
principal typos of individual equipment other than
uniforms and insignia.
C. ORGANIZATIONAL EQUIPMENT ? Describe briefly
other types of quartermaster equipment, arranged
under appropriate subheadings.
4. ENGINEER
a. GENERAL -- Characterize the general situation
of the army with regard to quality and quantity of
engineer materiel.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
JULY 1957 CHAPT
b. ET CETERA ? For each major category of engi-
neer equipment, arranged under subheadings appro-
priate to the country, give a discussion and, if appro-
priate, a table of characteristics as indicated under
Ordnance above.
5. CHEMICAL
a. GENERAL ? Characterize the general situation
of the army with regard to quality and quantity of
chemical materiel.
b. ET CETERA ? For each major category of chem-
ical materiel, arranged under subheadings appropriate
to the country, give a discussion and, if appropriate, a
table of characteristics as indicated under Ordnance
above.
6. MEDICAL
Characterize the general situation of the army with
regard to quality and quantity of medical equipment,
facilities, and supplies. Using appropriate subhead-
ings, describe the principal specific categories or items.
Emphasize aspects having a bearing on the combat
effectiveness of the army under varying conditions.
L. Personalities
1. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES
Give brief sketches of the outstanding personalities
in the army and other ground force organizations, each
one to include full name, date of birth, rank, present
position, past career, and special aptitudes, attitudes,
or traits of character.
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ER VIII ailmummunummi
2. LIST OF PERSONALITIES
List all important military personalities (including
those covered under 1 above), in alphabetical order, for
each of the higher ranks, giving for each individual the
full name (with surname in capital letters), age, rank,
and present position.
M. Quasi-military and other ground forces
Describe, under suitable subheadings, all ground-
force organizations other than the army which have a
military or quasi-military mission connected with
national, local, internal, frontier, or colonial security.
For each such organization indicate its full name, char-
acter, mission, top control, high command, relationship
with the army in peace and war, administrative or
other subdivisions, source and terms of service of per-
sonnel, and general disposition. Also include a brief
discussion or characterization of its armament, mobility,
training, tactics, and logistics.
N. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 82. Naval Forces
A. General
Briefly present an appraisal of the naval forces and
their combat potential, emphasizing the salient points
of strength and weakness as to organization, personnel,
materiel, and policy which will be more fully detailed
in subsequent Subsections. Include features of past'
development and historical background only as they
relate to, or indicate trends in, policy. Comment
briefly on ship and personnel strength for significant
dates, as appropriate. Mention foreign influence in-
cluding that of foreign navies on organization, strategy,
and other matters as appropriate. Discuss and corre-
late the naval problems of the country with its strategic
Position, economic status, political conditions, etc.
B. Organization
1. NAVAL HIGH COMMAND
a. STRUCTURE ? Indicate the position and rela-
tionship of the navy with the national defense estab-
lishment, making appropriate reference to Subsection
80, A. State briefly the overall command and adminis-
tration of the navy, including the main subdivisions of
the Navy Department, or Admiralty, and the chain of
command to naval shore establishments and forces
afloat. Insert one or more organization chart(s) de-
picting the proper position of the naval bureaus, agen-
cies, and other authorities. Exact nomenclature is
desired on diagrams with proper explanation in terms
of U.S. equivalents (when possible) in the text.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
b. FUNCTIONS ? Describe as necessary and in
detail the more important departmental and staff com-
ponents of the naval establishment.
2. NAVAL DISTRICTS (ZONES OR ACTIVI-
TIES)
Locate the limits, and describe the command and
administration of naval areas, or activities. Empha-
size points of relationship with command, administra-
tive, technical, and financial authorities in the Navy
Department, and, if applicable, with other service or
civilian authorities.
3. NAVAL COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK
Describe the naval communications organization and
show naval communications facilities on map or chart.
Discuss briefly the dependence on, or use by the navy
of, communications facilities not controlled by the navy.
4. FORCES AFLOAT
Describe the tactical and administrative organiza-
tion of the forces afloat to include shipboard organiza-
tion. Discuss relationship with naval headquarters,
other commands, and shore support activities.
5. OTHER NAVAL ORGANIZATIONS
Describe other naval or quasi-naval organizations
not covered elsewhere such as coast artillery, coast
watchers, coast guard, naval infantry, marine corps,
naval defense corps, and amphibious organizations.
Show the relationship with naval authorities or activi-
ties. If such organizations are not under naval juris-
diction, or if they are more properly included in other
NIS Sections, make appropriate reference. Subhead-
ings (5, a, b, c, etc.) may be added according to
requirements.
C. Strength and disposition
1. SHIPS
Describe briefly the current dispositions of ships
citing reasons therefor; indicate the proportion of active
ships to those laid up, or in reserve. Augment the
general remarks by a tabular summary of names, types,
and status of combatant and auxiliary naval vessels.
2. PERSONNEL
Describe the general disposition of naval personnel
showing the proportion ashore and afloat. When
possible augment by tabular summary with a break-
down of strength by rank and rate.
D. Policy and doctrine
1. NAVAL STRATEGIC CONCEPTS
Discuss the basic political, economic, and military
factors which influence naval thinking and strategic
concepts. Examine and present the problems con-
fronting the naval staff and administrative authorities
PAGE 10
in the execution of naval plans and policy. Indicate
the capabilities of the navy to accomplish the mission
and objectives with available forces, and bring out any
other pertinent factors which relate to the subject.
2. DOCTRINE
Summarize the established naval doctrine of the
country with reference as necessary to historical back-
ground, influence of foreign elements, past war ex-
perience, etc.
3. NAVAL BUDGET AND APPROPRIATIONS
Comment on the adequacy of the navy appropria-
tions to maintain, operate, train, and develop the navy.
4. CONSTRUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT
PROGRAMS
Discuss the naval building program and moderniza-
tion of naval ships with pertinent remarks concerning
the estimated dates of completion of such programs.
Cite any economic, fiscal, or political factors which
affect the program, especially those which might cause
abandonment or suspension of construction. Describe
generally developments of naval facilities, and equip-
ment. Research and other activities should be in-
cluded only to the extent that they do not encroach on
CHAPTER VII.
5. NAVAL RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER
COUNTRIES
Discuss naval alliances, agreements, and other fac-
tors affecting international naval relationships, particu-
larly emphasizing the influence of such relationships on
policy and planning. Discuss fear of or hostility to
other national navies with the effect on naval planning.
6. NATIONAL ATTITUDE TOWARD THE
NAVY
Describe the national attitude toward the navy, par-
ticularly by organized political parties or groups, and
indicate, if appropriate, the extent of influence that the
navy has with the current regime.
E. Personnel
1. CORPS AND SERVICES
Explain the concepts and nomenclature used in
dividing naval personnel into branches? with the re-
sponsibilities, duties, and limitations of authority of
each branch.
2. RANK AND RATES
Explain the rank and rate structure, and show the
nearest equivalent in the U.S. Navy, with appropriate
comments of differences that exist. Discuss the com-
mand or administrative authority of each rank, and
describe any limits of rank of various branches (Ex-
ample: In the Dutch navy the highest rank of medical
officers is captain).
0?11.1.11.11.11:
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
JULY 1957 CHAPT
3. PROCUREMENT
Describe in summary form the procurement of officer,
volunteer, and conacript personnel. Give qualifica-
tions required for officer candidates. If specialist per-
sonnel are obtained by special arrangements, so note,
or describe.
4. CONDITIONS OF SERVICE
a. OFFICERS ? Describe the conditions of service
of officers, including promotion and retirement systems.
Generally indicate whether service conditions affect
morale, lower standards, etc.
I). ENLISTED ? Describe the conditions of service
of enlisted personnel (volunteer or career), including
advancement in rate, and pension plans, and indicate
whether the service conditions are conducive to good
morale.
C. CONSCRIPT ? Describe the conditions of service
of enlisted personnel (conscript).
5. UNIFORMS AND INSIGNIA
Present, preferably by illustrations, the uniforms and
insignia of officers and enlisted personnel, with further
descriptions in the text if required.
F. Reserve and mobilization system
1. SHIPS
Discuss the recommissioning of ships, inactive or
reserve for combat or other war duties with appropriate
remarks concerning material condition and other fac-
tors which will affect the rate of activation.
2. PERSONNEL
Discuss the naval reserve organization, and the sys-
tem and schedule of mobilization of reserve and auxil-
iary personnel. Estimate the total number of reserves
by age groups, with appropriate remarks on the effec-
tiveness of the personnel.
3. MERCHANT MARINE AND OTHER AUX-
ILIARY FORCES
Summarize augmentation of the navy in war by the
merchant marine, fishing industry, and other existing
marine activities with reference to other NIS Sections
as appropriate.
4. ADEQUACY OF MOBILIZATION SYSTEM
Comment on the adequacy of effectiveness of the
mobilization system.
G. Training
1. GENERAL
Discuss the quality and effectiveness of the overall
training system of officers and men, emphasizing the
strength or weakness of training procedures in theory
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
and practice. Indicate the influence of foreign naval
missions on training.
2. FACILITIES
. List and locate, preferably in tabular form, all estab-
lishments devoted to training of naval personnel, to-
gether with a brief description of the curriculum.
3. OFFICER
a. BASIC ? Describe the basic training of officers.
b. ADVANCED ? Describe the advanced training
of officers.
e. SPECIALIST Describe the specialist training
of officers.
4. ENLISTED
a. BASIC ? Describe the basic indoctrination of
enlisted men.
b. SPECIALIST ? Describe the specialist training
of enlisted men.
5. SHIPBOARD
Discuss practical and theoretical training on ship-
board (except when a ship is moored school ship utilized
for space accommodation).
6. FLEET AND FORCE
Give the scope and schedule of fleet and force train-
ing, together with pertinent observations on effective-
ness.
7. RESERVE
Discuss the adequacy, extent, and methods employed
in training reserve personnel.
H. Logistics
1. PROCUREMENT
Describe the system of procurement and supply of
naval materiel. Show the role played by joint defense
activities and other government agencies (Ministry of
Supply, etc.) Indicate the dependence on foreign
sources for weapons and other materiel, and mention
the country of origin of such imports.
2. NEW CONSTRUCTION, REPAIR AND
MAINTENANCE
Describe the policy in effect for the construction of
naval vessels, and for their repair and maintenance
noting the dependence on foreign yards, if applicable.
Also show the division of work between naval yards
and private yards with remarks concerning efficiency
and capabilities. Make reference as applicable to other
Sections of the NIS (Shipbuilding, etc.).
PAGE 11
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
3.. CENTERS OF SUPPLY
List all known depots and other storage installations
for materiel, giving pertinent facts regarding each.
Insert a map if warranted.
I. Ship design and characteristics
it. DESIGN OF SHIPS
Discuss naval ship design in relationship to strategic
and tactical requirements. Make appropriate com-
ments regarding adequacy or inadequacy of design and
construction for operations or employment in certain
areas (North Atlantic, Arctic, Tropical, etc.).
2. STRATEGIC CHARACTERISTICS
Present in tabular form the strategic characteristics
of both combat and auxiliary vessels.
J. Materiel
1. GENERAL
Discuss service materiel qualitatively, emphasizing
the important characteristics of ordnance, torpedoes,
electronics, etc., and explain abbreviations and/or sym-
bols that are not self-explanatory in the tabular sum-
maries. Show dependence on foreign sources for
procurement of materiel or components when appli-
cable. Include any aspects which might affect naval
operations. Refer to CHAPTER VII for developmental
programs of materiel.
2. CHARACTERISTICS
a. GUNS AND AMMUNITION ? Tabular summary of
characteristics of guns and ammunition.
b. TORPEDOES ? Tabular summary of character-
istics of torpedoes.
C. MINES Tabular summary of characteristics
of mines.
d. ANTISUBMARINE WEAPONS ? Tabular summary
of characteristics of ASW weapons.
e. ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT ? Tabular summary
of characteristics of electronic equipment.
f. COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ? Tabular Sum-
mary of characteristics of communication equipment.
K. Personalities
1. BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCHES
Biographical data on selected flag officers or senior
officers of importance.
2. FLAG AND RANKING OFFICERS
List of all flag and senior officers of importance with
command at time of preparation.
L.. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used arc
indicated.
Section 83. Air Forces
(When there is a Naval Air Arm contribution, Section 83 is pre-
sented as Part 1?Air Force; Part 2?Naval Air Arm; and Part 3?
Comments on Principal Sources, which covers the entire Section
and replaces Subsection L.)
A. Strategic significance
1. AIR VALUE OF THE AREA
Assess the significance of the area in terms of those
relatively permanent factors that affect its ability to
support air operations. Among such relatively perma-
nent factors, consider the following: strategic location,
air facilities in being, manpower, technological develop-
ment, logistic resources (to include transportation, air-
craft industry, petroleum, ports), and political stability.
Relevant factors should be noted and briefly character-
ized rather than described in detail.
PAGE 12
2. INTERNATIONAL POSITION OF THE AIR
FORCE
a. INFLUENCE OR DEPENDENCE ON OTHER AIR
FORCES ? Note briefly any influence or dependence on
other air forces by the air force of the area; point out
any major foreign influence that has affected the air
force and may still be present.
b. INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS ? Cite those in-
ternational agreements or international organizations
to which the area may be a party that affect its employ-
ment of air power and note briefly its obligations in
each case.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER VIII 610.1111WNTIAL
C. INTERNATIONAL ROLE OF THE AIR FORCE ? Eval-
uate briefly the role played by the air force in its general
geographic region and/or on the world ?scene, noting its
relative position vis-a-vis other air forces as appropriate.
This evaluation should be made from a historical point
of view, pointing up the significance of the air force in
its region and/or in the world during the last five years.
3. ROLE OF AIR FORCE IN NATIONAL POL-
ITICS
Comment briefly on the domestic position of the air
force in the area, particularly on its influence or de-
pendence on domestic political developments. Men-
tion any significant subversive influences.
B. Historical development
Narrate the history of the air force, relating it to the
growth of the national air power. Describe the origin
and development of the air force, giving data on per-
sonnel and aircraft strengths at selected intervals.
Include a discussion of the importance of military air-
craft and weapons development. Describe trends of
governmental appropriations and favor, noting particu-
larly the relationship of the air force to other armed
services. Assess the air force's role in military history
in general and evaluate its actual performance and ac-
complishments in combat (e.g., World War II). Make
reference to important historical events or figures that
shaped the growth of the air force and show, if pertinent,
how original or significant contributions made by the
country to general aeronautics have influenced the
development of its air force. This Section should pre-
sent an integrated historical analysis of the air force
and should stress those factors that are most essential
to an understanding of its contemporary position and
role.
C. Mission and doctrine
1. MISSION
State the mission of the air force as conceived by the
nation.
2. DEVELOPMENT OF DOCTRINE
Discuss the basic political, economic, geographic and
military factors which influenced the development of
concepts for the military strategy involved in the em-
ployment of air forces. Point out the principal sources
of the major ideas reflected in the doctrine of the air
force and note the degree of acceptance of the doctrine
by the other military services and the national govern-
ment, particularly in the last five years.
3. DOCTRINE OF EMPLOYMENT
a. TACTICAL ? Describe the official doctrine per-
taining to the employment of aircraft and equipment
in independent operations in support of ground and
naval forces.
b. STRATEGIC ? Describe the official doctrine per-
taining to the employment of aircraft and equipment in
the accomplishment of the strategic mission.
C. AIR DEFENSE Describe the official doctrine
pertaining to the employment of the elements of the air
defense system (AC&W, aircraft, ground to air weap-
ons) in the accomplishment of the air defense mission.
D. Organization
1. POSITION IN GOVERNMENT AND DE-
FENSE STRUCTURE
Describe the position of the air force within the gov-
ernment, noting its place within the appropriate min-
istry and its relationship to the other military services.
Mention any provisions for top-level interservice
coordination. Outline the top-level command chan-
nel, indicating any differences between wartime and
peacetime command lines; comment on military-
civilian relationships. Include organization charts.
2. AIR HIGH COMMAND
a. GENERAL ? Describe briefly the organizational
concepts underlying the organization of the air force,
such as clear separation between operational and ad-
ministrative functions, and/or utilization of the com-
mand and staff system, explaining carefully the basic
administrative terms employed by the air force (e.g.,
air staff, operational control). Comment on the rela-
tive stability or instability of the air force organization.
b. TOP-LEVEL ORGANIZATION ? Describe, illustrat-
ing with organization charts, the top-level organization
of the air force, distinguishing among commands, serv-
ices, and staff organizations where feasible. Under an
appropriate subheading, describe in detail the functions
and responsibilities of the headquarters staff organiza-
tion or its equivalent. In all cases use exact nomen-
clature; where English equivalents are used, give the
foreign term in parentheses the first time reference is
made.
3. MAJOR COMMANDS/COMPONENTS
Describe the functions, responsibilities, and organiza-
tional structure (both headquarters and field) of each
of the principal commands and services of the air force.
These should include such organizations as the tactical
air command, strategic air command, air defense com-
mand, anti-aircraft command, and air transport com-
mand, training command, and supply services. These
commands and services should be described under sep-
arate subheadings and the text should be supplemented
by organizational charts.
4. COMPOSITION OF OPERATIONAL COM-
MANDS
Describe in detail the structure and composition of
all !operational echelons, such as: air force ? wing ?
group ? squadron. Include summarized tables of
organization in narrative or chart form as appropriate.
PAGE 13
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
4rtimeimignim. NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
5. TERRITORIAL ORGANIZATION
Describe the geographical zones, such as area com-
mands or air regions, into which the country is divided
for air force administrative and operational purposes
and list their headquarters locations. Explain the
functions of these zones (e.g., recruitment, air defense,
training). Provide an outline map unless the bound-
aries coincide with major political subdivisions.
E. Operational systems of major striking
forces
Describe the operational systems of the major strik-
ing forces of the air force, making reference to organiza-
tion charts provided in Subsection D insofar as possible.
Include such forces as the tactical air organization or
their equivalents and describe their operational systems
under separate subheadings. The description should
indicate how they actually function; this can he done
by describing the normal sequence of events affecting
the operation of the organizations and the relation of
the organizations to other command elements. De-
scription of combat tactics may be included if appro-
priate and if the importance of the air force warrants.
F. Personnel
1. PROCUREMENT
Describe the method of recruitment, pointing out
voluntary and/or compulsory features. Describe pro-
cedures for selection of air force personnel, including
candidates for officer or specialized NCO training, from
the national manpower pool.
2. CONDITIONS OF SERVICE
Describe in such detail as necessary policies and pro-
cedures relating to food, clothing, housing, leave,
health and welfare facilities; recreation, sports, and
other non-duty activities; nature of rank and grade
structure, promotion system, terms of service for volun-
teers, conscripts and career officers, and criteria for
retirement; pay rates, allowances, incentive bonuses,
and retirement, disability, and survivor's benefits, other
fringe benefits; incentives for career development, re-
enlistment, awards for outstanding or prolonged effec-
tive service, special accomplishments, or heroism.
3. CHARACTERISTICS
Describe the basic characteristics of personnel that
may affect the stability or possible expansion of the air
force, including such factors as: regionalism and ethnic
groups, literacy and mechanical aptitudes, physical
vigor, class distinctions, and loyalty to the regime.
4. MORALE FACTORS
Assess the morale of air force personnel, explaining
instances where the level of morale varies radically in
different groups on the basis of rank, assignment, loca-
tion of duty or other conditions. Compare standard
PAGE 14
JULY 1957
of air force morale with the morale of members of other
services and with that of the civilian population where
applicable, including effect of civilian morale on air
force personnel in instances where living standards and
political structures may influence the effectiveness of
the air force. Review the morale situation during the
past five years.
G. Training
1. GENERAL
Describe very briefly the training system as a whole,
naming the principal schools or types of schools; use a
flow chart to illustrate their interrelation and to show
the normal progression of students. Assess the general
adequacy of the training system.
2. PREPARATORY
Assess the military significance of the pre-military
aviation training received in public and private schools,
aero clubs, and para-military organizations. (Cross-
reference to SECTION 37.)
3. PREOPERATIONAL FLYING
R. PILOTS ? Describe the schools for pilot train-
ing, including entrance requirements, length of course,
flying arid ground curricula, facilities and equipment.
Point out areas of major emphasis. Note whether the
schools have met operational requirements, giving out-
put data for significant periods.
b. OTHER AIRCREW ? Follow guide under 3? a
above, insofar as applicable.
4. GROUND PERSONNEL
Describe schools for ground personnel, including
entrance requirements, length of course, curricula,
facilities, and equipment. Describe any other train:ing
programs, such as apprenticing or on-the-job training.
Note whether the ground training system has met oper-
ational requirements, giving output data for significant
periods.
5. SCHOOLS FOR ADVANCED MILITARY
Describe the entrance requirements, curricula, dura-
tion, facilities and equipment, and annual output of
the schools which provide advanced military education
for selected personnel.
6. OPERATIONAL
Describe the operational training, the system and
its control, indicating the provisions for particular
types of training as well as participation in maneuvers
and joint exercises.
7. RESERVE
Describe training system for reserve force.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER VIII milinummigimm
8. FOREIGN AIR PROGRAMS
Describe the nature and scope of training given to,
or received from, other countries.
H. Logistics
1. SUPPLY
a. CONTROL AND PLANNING ? Describe the meth-
ods by which the overall supply program is established
and the controls exercised by higher headquarters.
b. SYSTEM IN OPERATION Describe the proced-
ures and channels for procurement, requisition, distri-
bution, and storage of supplies. (Use flow charts to
illustrate.)
C. BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND HIGHER HEADQUAR-
TERS REQUIREMENTS
(1) Tables of equipment ? Present in table form
if possible, in such detail as importance of the air force
warrants, the non-expendable items of supply required
by basic components; include aircraft, motor vehicles,
starter carts, tractors, ordnance, and the like.
(2) Expendable supplies ? Present in table form
if possible, in such detail a's importance Of the air force
warrants, the requirements for such expendable items
of supply as aviation fuel in tons or gallons per aircraft
per mission; motor fuel in gallons per mile per vehicle;
rations in pounds per man per day; munitions in pounds
of ammunition and bombs per aircraft per mission.
2. MAINTENANCE
a. CONTROL AND PLANNING ? Describe the meth-
ods of control and planning for maintenance of aircraft
and associated equipment, including such means of
control as log books, technical orders, publications,
control inspections.
b. SYSTEM IN OPERATION ? Describe the proced-
ures employed at all echelons, including inspection
cycles and types of maintenance performed at each
organizational level. (Illustrate with flow chart.)
C. EFFECTS OF CLIMATE ON MAINTENANCE ? Dis-
cuss effects of extreme ranges of temperatures, humid-
ity, winds, and other natural phenomena as appropriate
on aircraft maintenance.
3. RELATIONSHIP OF REQUIREMENTS TO
PRODUCTION
Discuss the ability of the country to provide for its
aviation needs, particularly in the fields of aircraft and
engines, aviation fuel, and aviation electronics, from its
own resources. Identify the principal foreign sources
of supply and note the degree of dependence upon such
SOUTCes.
4. APPRAISAL OF TIIE LOGISTICAL SYSTEM
ft. EFFECTIVENESS OF THE SUPPLY SYSTEM ? Dis-
cuss the basic strengths and weaknesses of the system,
assessing its general effectiveness, and noting such
factors as its flexibility, expandibility and efficiency.
b. EFFECTIVENESS OF THE MAINTENANCE SYSTEM ?
See Guide for.4, a above.
I. Reserve and mobilization
1. RESERVE
a. RESERVE CATEGORIES ? Note the various cate-
gories and give exact nomenclature of all reserve organ-
izations and reserve groupings with functions of each.
b. CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM ? Outline the system
of classification and record-keeping for reserve per-
sonnel (officer and airmen).
C. RECALL PROCEDURE ? Outline the manner ill
which reserves are recalled to service for refresher
training.
d. SIGNIFICANT PAST TRENDS ? Review briefly the
growth or decline of reserve strengths in the past five
years, noting reasons for any significant changes.
2. MOBILIZATION
a. PERSONNEL ? Outline the mobilization proced-
ures, including the schedule for calling up various cate-
gories of reserves and other personnel. Note whether
reservists and others are called up as individuals or as
members of designated units. Describe plans for
formation of new units and the integration of the re-
serve and mobilized personnel with the regular forces.
Include description of plans for mobilization of civil
air personnel as such. (Finn, long-range plans for
mobilization in terms of total number of units expected
to be activated may also be included.) Describe briefly
procedures followed in World War II or other recent
conflict if appropriate.
b. EQUIPMENT ? Describe existing plans for aug-
menting air force materiel by removing equipment from
storage and commandeering civilian resources, such as
civil aircraft and civil air facilities. Describe briefly
procedures followed in World War II or other recent
conflicts if appropriate.
J. Air facilities
1. GENERAL
Summarize the air facility system for the NIS Area,
in quantitative and qualitative terms. Give an ap-
praisal of the system's capability to support air oper-
ations. Indicate the potential for expansion of the
system. Discuss generally the characteristics, i.e.,
runways, parking and dispersal areas, radio aids, light-
ing, repair and maintenance facilities, fuel, refuelling
equipment and storage facilities, housing accommoda-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 15
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ainownrompto NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
tions and transportation for logistical support. Refer
to the pertinent volume of "Airfields and Seaplane Sta-
tions of the World" published by D/I USAF--ONI for
current status and evaluated data.
2. HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT
Summarize development of the air facility system
up to present time, including consideration of such
factors as temporary foreign military development of
facilities during World War II, peculiar transport as-
pects of area, influences of topography and climatology
on construction, domination of military as contrasted
with civil air considerations, special international air
route significance. Discussion should cover develop-
ment of runways, parking and dispersal areas, radio
aids, lighting, repair and maintenance facilities, etc.,
and should include information on the development of
air facility construction techniques. Characteristics of
typical air facilities may be illustrated by suitable
photographs or diagrams.
3. DISTRIBUTION
Discuss the distribution pattern of the NIS Area,
identifying major airfield complexes and their impor-
tance in the overall airfield picture. Draw attention
to areas where for significant reasons air facilities are
inadequate or do not exist. Include general discussion
of potential airfield development, including considera-
tion of former airfield sites, logistics, and requirements
for such additional facilities. Show the name and loca-
tion of air facilities on a location map, using standard
symbols for all airfields and seaplane stations.
4. PROJECTED DEVELOPMENT
In those NIS Areas where airfield construction has
been definitely programmed, a description of the pro-
jected development program should be furnished. (No
attempt should be made to forecast estimated future
developments in this Subsection.)
K. Means of identification
1. AIRCRAFT MARKINGS
Describe the markings used by the air force to iden-
tify aircraft nationality, such as roundels and fin
flashes, and illustrate them. The illustrative sketch
may consist of the markings only, provided that the
PAGE 16
JULY 1957
text gives their location on the aircraft. Describe other
markings on aircraft (excluding unit insignia) and ex-
plain their significance--e.g., painting of all trainer
types a certain color, or the use of camouflage.
2. UNIT IDENTIFICATION
Describe the system used by the air forces to identify
units and indicate where unit identifications appear on
aircraft and on uniforms. Note any differences be-
tween peacetime and wartime practices--e.g., use of
codes in wartime. If unit insignia other than number
or letter combinations are used, furnish sketches of
those of the principal units.
3. UNIFORMS AND INSIGNIA
Describe and illustrate by sketches the principal
types of officer and airmen uniforms, noting color, gen-
eral styling, and kind of material used. Describe and
illustrate branch or category insignia and their use,
including in particular air crew insignia.
4. RANK
List each rank in the air force, starting with the
highest, giving its exact designation in the language of
the country, the literal translation, and nearest USAF
equivalent. Explain any unusual or special categories.
Illustrate the rank insignia and indicate in the text
where rank insignia appear on the uniform, referencing
as applicable the sketches of uniforms provided for
Subsection K, 3.
5. AWARDS AND DECORATIONS
Illustrate and describe the significance of the princi-
pal air force awards and decorations.
L. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER IX
MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
Section 90 General
Section 91 Selected Maps, Charts, and Plans
Section 92 Indexes of Mapping Data and Coverage
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CHAPTER VIII 461111?11111MAIMID
PART 2-NAVAL AIR ARM
PART 2, SECTION 83, is suggested for use by the
analysts when writing on those countries which have
naval air arms, and is to be included only where ap-
propriate. The development of this Part should in-
clude pertinent treatment of the air force as necessary
to cover any role or capability in support of naval
operations. Reference should be made to the Air
Force (redesignated PART 1, in such cases), and SEC-
TION 82, Naval Forces, wherever practicable to avoid
unnecessary duplication.
A. Historical development
Narrate the history of naval aviation, relating it to
the growth of aviation and sea power in the nation.
Describe the origin and development of naval aviation,
giving data on personnel and aircraft strengths at se-
lected intervals. Include a discussion of the develop-
ment of naval aircraft and related weapons. Assess
naval aviation's role in military history in general and
evaluate its actual performance and accomplishments
in combat. Make reference to important historical
events or personalities that shaped the growth of naval
aviation and show, if pertinent, how original or sig-
nificant contributions made by the country to world
aeronautics have influenced its development. This
Subsection should present an integrated historical
analysis of naval aviation and should stress those fac-
tors that are most essential to an understanding of its
relationship to naval and air warfare.
B. Strategic significance
1. GENERAL
Discuss significant factors of the Area that influenced
the development of naval aviation.
2. INTERNATIONAL POSITION OF NAVAL
AVIATION
a. INFLUENCE OR DEPENDENCE ON OTHER AIR
FORCES ? Note briefly any influence or dependence on
other air forces, and point out any relationship with
other nations that has affected or is affecting naval
aviation.
b. INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS ? Cite those in-
ternational agreements or international organizations
to which the Area may be a party that affect its employ-
ment of naval air power and note briefly its obligations
in each case.
C. INTERNATIONAL ROLE OF NAVAL AVIATION ?
Evaluate briefly the role played by naval aviation in
its general geographic region and/or on the world scene,
noting its relative position vis-a-vis other naval air
forces as appropriate.
3. NATIONAL STATURE OF NAVAL AVIA-
TION
Comment briefly on the relative importance of naval
aviation to the navy, the air force, the army and to the
nation, particularly in relation to budgetary considera-
tions and political influence.
C. Doctrine
1. MISSION
State the mission of naval aviation.
2. DEVELOPMENT
Summarize and analyze the basic factors that in-
fluenced the development of present concepts for the
military strategy involved in the employment of naval
aviation.
3. STRATEGIC CONCEPTS
Discuss the official doctrine pertaining to strategic
and tactical employment of naval aircraft and equip-
ment to support the mission, and relate this doctrine to
the employment of other forms of military power and
the overall strategy of the nation.
D. Organization
(Refer to SECTION 82 for high level organization and
command.)
1. NAVAL ORGANIZATION
a. ORGANIZATIONAL CONCEPTS ? Discuss briefly
the organizational concepts underlying the structure of
naval aviation and its relationship to the naval
organization.
b. NAVAL AVIATION STRUCTURE ? Describe, illus-
trating with charts, the organization of naval aviation,
including such reference to higher organization as
necessary. Set forth the command and administrative
responsibilities and any peculiarities of the organization
that are necessary to provide for cooperation with other
forces.
2. OPERATIONAL COMMANDS
Describe in detail the structure and composition of
all naval aviation operational organizations and their
relationship to higher command ashore and afloat.
Include summarized tables of organization in narrative
or chart form as appropriate.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 17
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
melingiuninumpo NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
E. Operational procedures
Describe briefly the standard operating procedures
and combat tactics of naval air forces in such naval
roles as: fast carrier striking forces; attack of naval
targets; anti-submarine or hunter/killer operations;
aerial minelaying; amphibious operations; escort of
convoy; patrol and reconnaissance; and protection of
surface fleets against air attack.
F. Personnel
I. PROCUREMENT
Refer to SECTION 82 but point out any major differ-
ences of standard for procurement that differ from those
proscribed for naval line personnel.
2. MORALE
Assess the morale of naval aviation personnel, par-
ticularly as compared with other naval personnel and
with air force personnel.
G. Training
1. GENERAL
Describe briefly the training system as a whole, in-
cluding the naval line indoctrination; name the princi-
pal schools or types of schools; use a flow chart to illus-
trate their interrelation and to show the normal pro-
gression. Assess the general adequacy of the training
system.
NOTE Follow the outline for PART 1 for the remainder of
this Subsection but omit Subsection G, 2 (prepara-
tory training).
H. Logistics
1. SUPPLY
Point out wherein the aviation supply system differs
from the naval line system; if applicable, show the de-
pendence or reliance on the air force procurement
system.
PAGE 18
2. MAINTENANCE
JULY 1957
Follow the outline for Part 1 but omit Subsection
H, 1, c, with reference to PART 1,
3. FOREIGN SOURCES OF SUPPLY
Identify the principal foreign sources of supply and
note the degree of dependence upon such sources.
4. APPRAISAL OF THE LOGISTICAL SYSTEM
Follow guide for PART 1.
I. Reserve and mobilization
Same as PART 1.
J. Air facilities
1. GENERAL
Same as PART 1.
2. DISTRIBUTION
Same as PART 1 (Subsection J, 3, Distribution).
Include reference to projected development as con-
tained in PART 1, Subsection J, 4.
K. Aircraft carriers
Describe briefly the existing aircraft carriers by class
(CVA, CVL, CVS); and appraise their suitability for
support of the assigned mission. Include projected
building or modernization programs. If significant,
include information on seaplane tenders.
L. Means of identification
Same as PART 1 except uniforms and insignia; rank
and awards and decorations may be omitted if covered
in SECTION 82.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER VIII miiinwommor
PART 2-NAVAL AIR ARM
PART 2, SECTION 83, is suggested for use by the
analysts when writing on those countries which have
naval air arms, and is to be included only where ap-
propriate. The development of this Part should in-
clude pertinent treatment of the air force as necessary
to cover any role or capability in support of naval
operations. Reference should be made to the Air
Force (redesignated PART 1, in such cases), and SEC-
TION 82, Naval Forces, wherever practicable to avoid
unnecessary duplication.
A. Historical development
Narrate the history of naval aviation, relating it to
the growth of aviation and sea power in the nation.
Describe the origin and development of naval aviation,
giving data on personnel and aircraft strengths at se-
lected intervals. Include a discussion of the develop-.
ment of naval aircraft and related weapons. Assess
naval aviation's role in military history in general and
evaluate its actual performance and accomplishments
in combat. Make reference to important historical
events or personalities that shaped the growth of naval
aviation and show, if pertinent, how original or sig-
nificant contributions made by the country to world
aeronautics have influenced its development. This
Subsection should present an integrated historical
analysis of naval aviation and should stress those fac-
tors that are most essential to an understanding of its
relationship to naval and air warfare.
B. Strategic significance
1. GENERAL
Discuss significant factors of the Area that influenced
the development of naval aviation.
2. INTERNATIONAL POSITION OF NAVAL
AVIATION
a. INFLUENCE OR DEPENDENCE ON OTHER AIR
FORCES ? Note briefly any influence or dependence on
other air forces, and point out any relationship with
other nations that has affected or is affecting naval
aviation.
b. INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS Cite those in-
ternational agreements or international organizations
to which the Area may be a party that affect its employ-
ment of naval air power and note briefly its obligations
in each case.
C. INTERNATIONAL ROLE OF NAVAL AVIATION ?
Evaluate briefly the role played by naval aviation in
its general geographic region and/or on the world scene,
noting its relative position vis-a-vis other naval air
forces as appropriate.
3. NATIONAL STATURE OF NAVAL AVIA-
TION
Comment briefly on the relative importance of naval
aviation to the navy, the air force, the army and to the
nation, particularly in relation to budgetary considera-
tions and political influence.
C. Doctrine
1. MISSION
State the mission of naval aviation.
2. DEVELOPMENT
Summarize and analyze the basic factors that in-
fluenced the development of present concepts for the
military strategy involved in the employment of naval
aviation.
3. STRATEGIC CONCEPTS
Discuss the official doctrine pertaining to strategic
and tactical employment of naval aircraft and equip-
ment to support the mission, and relate this doctrine to
the employment of other forms of military power and
the overall strategy of the nation.
D. Organization
(Refer to SECTION 82 for high level organization and
command.)
1. NAVAL ORGANIZATION
a. ORGANIZATIONAL CONCEPTS ? Discuss briefly
the organizational concepts underlying the structure of
naval aviation and its relationship to the naval
organization.
b. NAVAL AVIATION STRUCTURE ? Describe, illus-
trating with charts, the organization of naval aviation,
including such reference to higher organization as
necessary. Set forth the command and administrative
responsibilities and any peculiarities of the organization
that are necessary to provide for cooperation with other
forces.
2. OPERATIONAL COMMANDS
Describe in detail the structure and composition of
all naval aviation operational organizations and their
relationship to higher command ashore and afloat.
Include summarized tables of organization in narrative
or chart form as appropriate.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 17
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
whionwitgiffP NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
E. Operational procedures
Describe briefly the standard operating procedures
and combat tactics of naval air forces in such naval
roles as: fast carrier striking forces; attack of naval
targets; anti-submarine or hunter/killer operations;
aerial minelaying; amphibious operations; escort of
convoy; patrol and reconnaissance; and protection of
surface fleets against air attack.
F. Personnel
I. PROCUREMENT
Refer to SECTION 82 but point out any major differ-
ences of standard for procurement that differ from those
prescribed for naval line personnel.
2. MORALE
Assess the morale of naval aviation personnel, par-
ticularly as compared with other naval personnel and
with air force personnel.
G. Training
I. GE NERAL
Describe briefly the training system as a whole, in-
cluding the naval line indoctrination; name the princi-
pal schools or types of schools; use a flow chart to illus-
trate their interrelation and to show the normal pro-
gression. Assess the general adequacy of the training
system.
NOTE Follow the outline for PART 1 for the remainder of
this Subsection but omit Subsection G, 2 (prepara-
tory training).
H. Logistics
1. SUPPLY
Point out wherein the aviation supply system differs
from the naval line system; if applicable, show the de-
pendence or reliance on the air force procurement
system.
PAGE 18
2. MAINTENANCE
JULY 1957
Follow the outline for Part 1 but omit Subsection
II, 1, C, with reference to PART 1.
3. FOREIGN SOURCES OF SUPPLY
Identify the principal foreign sources of supply and
note the degree of dependence upon such sources.
4. APPRAISAL OF THE LOGISTICAL SYSTEM
Follow guide for PART 1.
I. Reserve and mobilization
Same as PART 1.
J. Air facilities
1. GENERAL
Same as PART 1.
2. DISTRIBUTION
Same as PART 1 (Subsection J, 3,
Include reference to projected development as con-
tained in PART 1, Subsection J, 4.
Distribution).
K. Aircraft carriers
Describe briefly the existing aircraft carriers by class
(CVA, CVL, CVS); and appraise their suitability for
support of the assigned mission. Include projected
building or modernization programs. If significant,
include information on seaplane tenders.
L. Means of identification
Same as PART 1 except uniforms and insignia; rank
and awards and decorations may be omitted if covered
ill SECTION 82.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
sienp
JULY 1957
Chapter IX - Map and Chart Appraisal
OUTLINE
SECTION 90. GENERAL
A. Development and extent of mapping,
charting, and related activities
1. Mapping and charting
2. Surveys
3. Aerial photography
B. Major deficiencies in mapping and chart-
ing
1. Published maps and charts
2. Mapping and charting data
Programs under way or projected
C.
SECTION
A.
B.
91. SELECTED MAPS, CIIARTS, AND PLANS
General
Physical maps, navigation charts, and
maps and plans of urban areas
1. General
2. Topographic maps
3. Specialized physical maps
4. Terrain-evaluation maps
5. Air and air-facility charts
6. Sailing, general, and coast charts
7. Coastal oceanographic charts
8. Climatic maps
9. Maps and plans of urban areas
C. Transportation and communication maps
and charts
1. General
2. Railroad maps
3. Road maps
4. Inland-waterway maps and charts
5. Port and harbor charts and plans
6. Air-transport maps
7. Telecommunication and postal maps
8. Pipeline maps
D. Sociological, political, and economic maps
1. General
2. Sociological maps
3. Political maps
4. Economic maps
E. Special armed-forces maps and charts
1. General
2. Ground-forces maps
3. Naval-forces maps and charts
4. Air-forces maps and charts
F. Terrain models
SECTION 92. INDEXES OF MAPPING DATA AND COV-
ERAGE
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ouniumminum NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Editorial
Instructions are followed in detail.
11111S outline for NIS CHAPTER IX is designed to
provide a basis for the discussion of mapping, charting,
surveying, and aerial-photography programs and the
appraisal of all types of maps, charts, and terrain
models that are available for any NIS Area. Many
of the NIS Areas have no adequate mapping and
charting programs or are not satisfactorily covered by
maps and charts of various types. For this reason, it
is desirable that the outline be kept flexible enough to
be adapted to any unusual situation that authors of
CHAPTER IX may encounter. Every heading in the
outline, however, must be considered by the authors
and be retained without revision unless changes are
first approved by the Chapter Coordinator. The
examples given below illustrate the type of changes in
the outline that are legitimate: 1) for some areas Sub-
section 91, C, 8, Pipeline Maps, is not applicable, and
JULY 1957
the heading will be omitted; and 2) for areas without
a coastline the heading 91, B, 6, Sailing, General, and
Coast Charts, is not pertinent and will be deleted.
Maps prepared for other NIS Chapters will be in-
cluded in the recommendations and appraisals in
CHAPTER IX, SECTION 91, only if the Sections for which
the maps were prepared have been published.
Historical maps will not be recommended or evalu-
ated unless they contribute in some important manner
to an understanding of the current situation. For
example, a map of 1850 international boundaries will
be discussed only if current territorial claims are based
on 1850 boundaries.
Approved BGN spellings will be used for all place
names in CHAPTER IX except those that appear in the
titles of maps, books, or other publications cited.
Preface to Chapter IX
The preface of CHAPTER IX is a short Guide to Users
prepared by the Chapter Coordinator. In the Guide,
the Coordinator wilL note:
The structure of CHAPTER IX?its division into 1) a general
analysis of the mapping situation of the NIS Area, 2)
recommendations and appraisals of the best maps avail-
able for specific uses, and 3) indexes of mapping data and
map and chart coverage.
PAGE 2
That only the best maps pertaining to each topic have been
included.
That the omission of a topic usually covered by maps indi-
cates that maps on this topic are either unsatisfactory or
not available.
The research cutoff date for each major topic in CHAPTER IX.
Terms having special significance or meaning as used in
Chapter IX.
Other information needed for an understanding of the
specific CHAPTER IX under consideration.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAP TE.1"1 IX
Section 90. General
A. Development and extent of mapping,
charting, and related activities
Describe the development and extent of the mapping
and charting of the NIS Area and the surveys and
aerial photography that supply basic mapping and
charting data.
1. MAPPING AND CHARTING
Give briefly the history and current status of map-
ping and charting within the NIS Area and note the
contributions of other countries to the mapping pro-
gram.
2. SURVEYS
Discuss the geodetic, hydrographic, and oceano-
graphic surveys of the NIS Area that have resulted in
basic mapping and charting data. Since these sur-
veys aro not covered elsewhere in CHAPTER IX, it may
be necessary to consider some of them in greater detail
than other topics in SECTION 90. Geodetic surveys,
in particular, are basic for estimating the reliability of
many maps mentioned in CHA.PTER IX.
3. AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY
Describe the aerial photography for the NIS Area
and indicate the availability of the photography and
the completeness of areal coverage.
B. Major deficiencies in mapping and chart-
ing
Discuss deficiencies in the mapping and charting
situation on the basis of mapping data and of published
maps and charts.
1. PUBLISHED MAPS AND CHARTS
Note inadequacies in published maps and charts for
each category of maps in SECTION 91.
2. MAPPING AND CHARTING DATA
Note especially inadequacies in 1) geodetic, hydro-
graphic, and oceanographic surveys, and 2) aerial
photography.
C. Programs under way or projected
Describe briefly the mapping and charting programs
being undertaken or planned for each category of maps
and charts. Designate the deficiencies noted in Sub-
section 90, B that will be eliminated or reduced.
Section 91. Selected Maps, Charts, and Plans
SECTION 91 will include recommendations of the best
maps, charts, and plans for each subject mentioned in
the outline. Justify all recommendations on the basis
of accuracy, adequacy of detail and presentation,
utility, and availability. When appropriate, include
comparisons of items based on adequacy of subject and
areal coverage, emphasizing major limitations or
deficiencies. Obsolete or other unselected maps may
be mentioned under any topic if the contributing agency
considers it necessary to warn users against specific
widely used or apparently unauthoritative maps.
The recommendations will be followed by citations
and descriptions and appraisals of individual items.
Each contributing agency will number consecutively,
beginning with number 1, all items referred to in its
contribution.
The citation will include: Exact title of map or map
series underlined (with English translation in paren-
theses without underlining if title is in foreign language)
or supplied title in brackets without underlining;
numerical scale (and vertical exaggeration, when appro-
priate); authority, preceded by nationality in brackets
if non-U.S.; date; language, if not English; graticule
(and projection and/or grid); library call number and/or
distribution number of producing agency. Security
classification and control.
The description and appraisal will be in telegraphic
English and will consist of three parts under the
following headings: 1) Coverage, giving areal coverage
and the identification of sheets, if applicable; 2) Charac-
teristics, including data shown, source material, and
method of preparation; and 3) Evaluation, in terms of
accuracy and value for specific purposes.
If a map citation does not fit the standard pattern,
the contributor may consult the Coordinator as to the
form to be used or may follow the pattern set for a
similar citation in a recently completed CHAPTER IX.
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS Jur,v 1957
The Coordinator may also be consulted concerning the
content of the description and appraisal.
Each terrain model (plastic, plaster, or rubber) is
given an item number. Citations will be identical to
those for maps, except for the inclusion of a vertical
exaggeration immediately following the horizontal
scale.
Include a list of foreign-language authorities men-
tioned in S:ECTION 91 and their English translations.
A. General
The Coordinator will prepare a brief introduction to
the Section as a whole.
B. Physical maps, navigation charts, and
maps and plans of urban areas
1. GENERAL
Make a general statement on the adequacy of con-
tent and completeness of areal coverage of physical
maps, navigation charts, and maps and plans of
selected urban areas.
2. TOPOGRAPHIC MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best topographic maps
available in selected scale ranges and the best English-
language map series obtainable in quantity in each
scale range.
3. SPECIALIZED PHYSICAL MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best maps or charts
for geology, landforms, drainage characteristics, water
resources (including water-supply facilities), soil, nat-
ural vegetation, state of the ground, and geophysical
phenomena.
4. TERRAIN-EVALUATION MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best maps for cross-
country movement, suitability for construction (air-
fields, roads, and underground installations), and
other military purposes such as concealment, cover,
airborne, operations, amphibious operations (Including
landing beaches).
5. AIR AND AIR-FACILITY CHARTS
Recommend and appraise the best charts for air
navigation; the most useful charts for plotting and
planning purposes; and the best charts showing air
distances, air targets, and the locations and details of
aerodromes, airports, and seaplane bases and adjacent
facilities.
6. SAILING, GENERAL, AND COAST CHARTS
Recommend and appraise the best hydrographic
charts in the following categories: 1) sailing--for fixing
the mariner's position when approaching the coast
from the open sea or for sailing between distant ports
PAGE 4
on the same coast; 2) general?for coastwise naviga-
tion outside the outlying reefs and shoals; and
3) coast--for inshore navigation, entering bays and
harbors, and navigating large inland waterways.
Appraisals may be in tabular form. Recommend and
appraise also the best interpretive hydrographic charts.
7. COASTAL OCEANOGRAPHIC CHARTS
Recommend and appraise the best available coastal
oceanographic charts that show depth and relief of
ocean floor, currents, sea and swell, temperature, dis-
tribution and movement, of sea ice, salinity, density,
bottom sediment, transparency and color, acoustics,
marine biology, diving and submerged operating con-
ditions for submarines, and tidal characteristics and
ranges. Deep-sea charts, such as those included in the
NIS on Ocean Areas will be recommended and ap-
praised in CHAPTER IX only if they show coastal
oceanographic information.
8. CLIMATIC MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best available maps
showing climatic classifications; distribution of cli-
matic elements; extremes of climatic elements and
their frequency; dates a killing frosts, freezing, and
thawing; paths of storms; growing season; and human
heat stress. Include maps of flying weather; instru-
ment, closed, and contact conditions; and other combi-
nations of elements such as those necessary for low-
level visual bombing, incendiary bombing, and chemi-
cal, biological, and radiological warfare.
9. MAPS AND PLANS OF URBAN AREAS
Make a general statement on the availability of
maps and plans of selected urban areas. Annotated
aerial photomosaics, tourist maps, zoning maps, and
local transport maps will not be discussed unless they
provide the only coverage or supplementary coverage
for one or more of the urban areas. Recommend and
appraise the best maps and plans available for the
"principal urban areas" designated in NIS CHAPTER II
and for other urban areas. The selected urban areas
to be discussed in CHAPTER IX will be agreed upon by
the Chapter Coordinator and the contributor during
the early stages of Chapter preparation. Appraisals
may be presented in tabular form.
C. Transportation and communication maps
and charts
1. GENERAL
Make a general statement on the adequacy of con-
tent and the completeness of areal coverage of maps
and charts for the various aspects of transportation
and communication.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 CHAPTER IX
2. RAILROAD MAPS
Recommend and appraise the maps, including topo-
graphic map series, that show most completely and
accurately the existing railroad lines, and the best
special railroad maps showing gage, number of tracks,
electrification, capacity, traffic (volume and length of
haul), railroad administrative districts and centers,
yards, repair shops, bridges, tunnels, and other instal-
lations.
3. ROAD MAPS
Recommend and appraise the maps, including topo-
graphic map series, that show most completely and
accurately the existing roads, and the best special road
maps showing jurisdictional classification, type of
surface, width, condition, capacity, and amount of
traffic.
4. INLAND-WATERWAY MAPS AND CHARTS
Recommend and appraise the best maps and charts
of rivers, canals, lakes, and inland-waterway harbors.
Place special emphasis on navigability, dockage, clear-
ance, and sedimentation. Also include maps dealing
with channel depths, currents, heads of navigation,
seasons of navigation, and traffic.
5. PORT AND HARBOR CHARTS AND PLANS
Recommend and appraise the best charts and plans
showing details of ports and harbors, and charts and
plans showing ports in terms of importance, physical
situations, types, facilities, and capacities. Include
coverage for principal and secondary ports selected for
CHAPTER III. Appraisals may be presented in tabular
form.
6. AIR-TRANSPORT MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best maps of com-
mercial air routes and air traffic.
7. TELECOMMUNICATION AND POSTAL
MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best special maps and
topographic map series showing telegraph and tele-
phone nets and stations; radio broadcasting stations,
networks,, microwave nets, and distribution of receiving
sets; and postal routes and post offices.
8. PIPELINE MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best maps, including
topographic map series, that show pipelines.
D. Sociological, political, and economic maps
1. GENERAL
Make a general statement on the adequacy of con-
tent and completeness of areal coverage of maps for
the various topics included in Subsection 91, D.
2. SOCIOLOGICAL MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best maps showing
1) the distribution and density of population; 2) the
composition and characteristics of population accord-
ing to race, nationality, language, and religion; and 3)
health, including incidence of disease, birth and death
rates, and health facilities.
3. POLITICAL MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best maps of inter-
national boundaries, territorial waters, major and
minor civil-division boundaries, political problems (in-
cluding disputed areas), relative strength of political
parties, election districts, and results of elections.
4. ECONOMIC MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best maps on the
following subjects: 1) agriculture, fishing, and for-
estry?agricultural regions, land use, production, soil
productivity, distribution of crops and livestock, fish-
eries, and forests and forest products; 2) fuels and
power?solid fuels (nature, extent, and locations of
deposits; ownership, locations, and production of indi-
vidual mines), petroleum (producing areas, refineries,
and consuming centers), natural gas, and electric
power; 3) minerals and metals?iron ore (nature,
extent, and locations of deposits; ownership and loca-
tions of mines; production by regions, fields, and/or
mines); nonferrous ores, metals, and alloys; nonme-
tallic minerals; and construction materials (exclusive
of materials covered elsewhere in this Subsection); 4)
manufacturing and construction?industrial machinery,
vehicles, aircraft production, shipbuilding, explosives,
chemical, agricultural-processing, and other industries;
and 5) commerce and trade?flow of commerce, cen-
ters of trade, and exports and imports.
E. Special armed-forces maps and charts
1. GENERAL
Make a general statement concerning the types of
armed-forces maps available, and compare the various
types as to adequacy. Include only maps pertaining
to the armed forces of the NIS Area.
2. GROUND-FORCES MAPS
Recommend and appraise the best maps showing
size, composition, disposition, and territorial organiza-
tion a ground forces; permanent fortifications (land
and coastal defenses); and depots and other storage
installations for materiel.
3. NAVAL-FORCES MAPS AND CHARTS
Recommend and appraise the best maps and charts
that show naval districts, zones, or activities; strength
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
40.1
and disposition of ships and personnel; and depots and
other storage installations for materiel.
4. AIR FORCES MAPS AND CHARTS
Recommend and appraise the best maps and charts
that show air commands and units; disposition of per-
sonnel units and equipment; and locations of staff and
command schools. Air-facility charts are recom-
mended under Subsection B, 5.
F. Terrain models
Recommend and appraise the best terrain models
(plastic, plaster, or rubber) that cover the NIS Area
or any part of it.
Section 92. Indexes of Mapping Data and Coverage
SECTION 92 should include the graphics prepared to
illustrate SECTIONS 90 and 91, with a short introduction
concerning their use.
Graphics may be prepared to illustrate the following:
1. Extent, density, and type of available and existing
control.
2. Extent and type of aerial-photography coverage.
PAGE 6
3. Projected coverage of significant mapping programs.
4. Topographic map series at selected scales; if practicable,
include sheet lines.
5. Aeronautical chart coverage.
6. Hydrographic chart coverage.
7. Urban area coverage.
8. Area and subject coverage of maps on other topics when
advisable.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
CHAPTER IX
MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
Section 90 Topographic maps and terrain models
Specialized physical maps
Terrain-evaluation maps
Section 91 Aeronautical and air-information charts
Air-target charts
Air-transport maps
Climatic maps
Section 92 Nautical charts
Port maps and plans
Oceanographic charts
Section 93 Railroad maps
Road maps
Inland-waterway maps and charts
Telecommunication maps
Urban-area maps and plans
Section 94 Sociological maps
Political maps
Economic maps
Postal maps
General reference maps and atlases
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
sfirmamaieriNam
JANUARY 1962
SECTION 90
A.
B.
C.
D.
Chapter IX - Map and Chart Appraisal
General
Topographic maps and terrain models
Specialized physical maps
Terrain-evaluation maps
SECTION 91
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
General
Aeronautical and air-information charts
Air-target charts
Air-transport maps
Climatic maps
SECTION 92
A. General
B. Nautical charts
OUTLINE
C. Port maps and plans
D. Oceanographic charts
SECTION 93
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General
Railroad maps
Road maps
Inland-waterway maps and charts
Telecommunication maps
Urban-area maps and plans
SECTION 94
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
General
Sociological maps
Political maps
Economic maps
Postal maps
General reference maps and atlases
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Editorial
Instructions are followed in detail.
The outline for NIS CHAPTER IX is designed to
provide a basis for 1) an analysis of the mapping and
charting situation in an NIS Area, 2) the selection
and appraisal of the best available maps and charts
for that Area, 3) an indication of the deficiencies in
the map and chart coverage, and 4) the discussion of
the principal mapping and charting programs under-
way. Many NIS Areas are not satisfactorily covered
by maps and charts of various types or have no ade-
quate mapping and charting programs. For this
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
_Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
reason, it' is desirable that the CHAPTER IX be kept
flexible enough to be adapted to any unusual situation
that authors may encounter. Every heading in the
outline, however, must be considered by the authors
and retained without revision unless 1) no maps or
charts are selected for that topic or 2) the subject
heading does not pertain to the NIS Area. In the
event that further modification of the outline or change
in presentation of Chapter content is considered advis-
able for a particular NIS Area, the proposed modifi-
cation will not be made without prior approval of the
CHAPTER IX Coordinator.
The distinction between the five Sections of CHAPTER
IX, as indicated in the outline, is in the subject cover-
age of the maps and charts discussed. The presenta-
tion of information in each Section follows a uniform
pattern.
PREFACE?The preface to each Section is a short
"Guide to Users" which includes:
An explanation of the composition of the Section.
Criteria governing the selection of the maps and charts.
A general statement concerning the availability of the
selected maps and charts, including a list of abbreviations
used in the Section for the various map and chart reposi-
tories.
A glossary of terms having special significance or meaning
as used in CHAPTER IX and appearing in the Section.
The research cutoff date for each major topic.
Other information needed for an understanding of the
specific Section under consideration.
GENERAL SUBSECTION?Each Section has a "Gen-
eral" Subsection that contains 1) a brief discussion of
the current mapping and charting situation for the
types of maps and charts included in the Section and
2) identification of the principal agencies responsible
for and producing these types of maps and charts of
the NIS Area.
TOPICAL SUBSECTION s?Each Section includes topical
Subsections, with the following subheadings: selected
maps and charts; deficiencies; and programs.
Selected maps and charts?Include recommendations
of the best maps and charts under each subject heading
given in the outline. Limit the selection of maps or
charts for a specific topic to those originally designed
to depict that topic unless other available coverage
furnishes better information for the subject under con-
sideration. Justify all recommendations on the basis
of accuracy, currency, adequacy of detail and pres-
entation, utility, and availability. If particularly
significant in the evaluation of the maps and charts,
PAGE 2
include brief statements concerning the quality and
adequacy of the geodetic control and survey data on
which the maps and charts are based. When appro-
priate, include comparisons of items based on adequacy
of subject and areal coverage. Obsolete or other un-
selected maps may be mentioned under any topic if
the contributing agency considers it necessary to warn
users against specific widely used or apparently un-
authoritative maps.
Follow the recommendations with individual item
appraisals, each of which includes a citation, coverage
statement, characteristics, and evaluation. The cita-
tion contains the title of the map or chart; scale; author-
ity; date; language; grid, projection, and graticule in-
formation; availability; and security classification and
control. The remainder of the item writeup is in
telegraphic style and consists of three parts under the
following headings: Coverage, giving areal coverage
and the identification of sheets (if applicable); Char-
acteristics, including the physical characteristics of the
map or chart, data shown, source material, and method
of preparation (if pertinent); and Evaluation, in terms
of accuracy, currency, and value for specific purposes.
Deficiencies--Discuss under each major subject head-
ing the deficiencies and limitations in the mapping or
charting for that subject. Note weaknesses in avail-
able materials as well as the lack of areal and subject
coverage for all or parts of the NIS Area.
Programs?Describe briefly under each major sub-
ject heading the significant mapping and charting
programs underway.
LIST OF FOREIGN-LANGUAGE AUTHORITIES?Include
in each Section a list of the foreign-language authori-
ties mentioned and give the English translation for
each.
GRAPHICS?Include graphics to illustrate coverage
of the following types of maps and charts, if appro-
priate:
Topographic map series, within selected scale ranges
Geologic maps
Soil maps
Aeronautical and air-information charts
Air-target charts
Nautical charts
Urban-area maps and plans
PLACE NAMES?Use approved Board on Geographic
Names (BGN) spellings for all place names in CHAPTER
IX except those that appear differently in the titles of
maps, books, or other publications cited.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
iij
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962
A. General
CHAPTER IX
Section 90
B. Topographic maps and terrain models
Recommend and appraise the best topographic map
series in each of three scale ranges?large (1:75,000
and larger), medium (larger than 1:000,000 but smaller
than 1:75,000), and small (1:600,000 and smaller).
Indicate also, within each scale range, the best English-
language topographic series obtainable in quantity and
the best terrain models. Note deficiencies and signifi-
cant programs.
C. Specialized physical maps
Recommend and appraise the best maps showing
landforms and hypsography (including maps of terrain
types, physiographic or terrain regions, slope, relative
relief, etc., but excluding topographic maps and terrain
A. General
models), geology and rock types, natural construction
materials, soils, natural vegetation, drainage character-
istics, surface- and ground-water resources, state of
the ground, and special physical phenomena (such as
earthquakes, volcanoes, and permafrost). Note defi-
ciencies and significant programs.
D. Terrain-evaluation maps
Recommend and appraise the best interpretive
maps that illustrate the suitability of the terrain for
- various military uses. Include maps pertaining to
cross-country movement; suitability for construction
of airfields, roads, and underground installations; con-
cealment and cover; airborne operations; and amphib-
ious operations. Include also maps showing a com-
bination of various aspects of terrain evaluation, such
as military-geology maps or terrain-appreciation maps.
Note deficiencies and significant programs.
Section 91
B. Aeronautical and air-information charts
Recommend and appraise the best charts pertaining
to air navigation; navigational plotting and planning;
and air information (advisory routes, reporting points,
control areas, radio facilities, approach and landing
procedures, details of aerodromes, etc.). Recommend
also the best charts for general planning and reference
purposes. Note deficiencies and significant programs.
C. Air-target charts
Recommend and appraise the best air-target charts
for mission planning, visual and radar approach to
target areas, target analysis, and target recognition.
Note deficiencies and significant programs.
D. Air-transport maps
Recommend and appraise the best maps showing
commercial air routes, distances, and traffic. Note
deficiencies and significant programs.
E. Climatic maps
Recommend and appraise the best maps showing
means and extremes of climatic elements, their fre-
quency and distribution; paths of storms and their
frequencies; dates of killing frost, freezing, and thaw-
ing; human heat stress; and climatic regions, if based
on meaningful climatic classifications. Include also
maps of combinations of climatic elements relating to
problems of military and civil operations. Note de-
ficiencies and significant programs.
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
Section 92
A. General
B. Nautical charts
Recommend and appraise the best standard navi-
gation charts in the following categories: 1) sailing?
for Sailing between distant coastwise ports or for fixing
the mariner's position when the coast is approached
from the open sea; 2) general?for coastwise navigation
outside the offlying reefs and shoals; 3) coast?for
inshore navigation, entering bays and harbors, and
navigating large inland waterways; and 4) port and
harbor?for anchoring. Specify the coverage available
for the ports selected for NIS CHAPTER III. Recom-
mend also the best combat (naval gunfire support)
charts and the best charts for specialized navigation
purposes (such as echo sounding, loran, Dacca, and
consol) and for locating navigational dangers, war-
created, hazards, etc. Note deficiencies and significant
programs.
A. General
JANUARY 1962
C. Port maps and plans
Recommend and appraise the best maps and plans
showing ports in terms of importance, physical situa-
tion, type, facilities, and capacities, Note deficiencies
and significant programs.
D. Oceanographic charts
Recommend and appraise the best charts that show
depth and relief of the ocean floor, tidal characteristics
and ranges, currents, sea and swell, temperature, dis-
tribution and movement of sea ice, salinity, density,
buoyancy, bottom sediments, transparency and color,
acoustics, marine biology, diving and submerged con-
ditions for submarines, human survival in water, and
earthquake epicenters, volcanic activity, and tsunamis.
Note deficiencies and significant programs.
Section 93
B. Railroad maps
Recommend and appraise the transportation maps
that best show the existing railroad lines and give the
most reliable information on gage, number of tracks,
extent of electrification, status (existing, abandoned,
destroyed, or under construction), capacity and amount
of traffic, railroad administrative districts and centers,
and location of stations, bridges, tunnels, yards, round-
houses, and repair shops. Note deficiencies and sig-
nificant programs.
C. Road maps
Recommend and appraise the transportation maps
that provide the best information on road surface,
classification, width, condition, capacity, amount of
traffic, status, jurisdictional classification, route num-
bers, and the location, type, and construction material
of bridges and tunnels. Note deficiencies and sig-
nificant programs.
D. Inland-waterway maps and charts
Recommend and appraise the inland-waterway maps
and charts that best delineate navigable inland water-
ways (rivers, canals, lakes, arid inland harbors) and
PAGE 4
give the most reliable information on channel widths
and depths, currents, heads of navigation, aids and
obstructions to navigation, seasons of navigation, and
traffic. Selection of the navigable inland waterways
is to be correlated with NIS CHAPTER III. Coordina-
tion will also be made with Subsection 92, B, for cona-
nuity of coverage. Note deficiencies and significant
programs.
E. Telecommunication maps
Recommend and appraise the best maps showing
domestic and international telecommunication facili-
ties (landlines and submarine cables, radio-communi-
cation facilities, local and long-distance exchanges,
and related installations) and broadcast facilities (AM,
FM, TV, and wired nets). Note deficiencies and
significant programs.
F. Urban-area maps and plans
Recommend and appraise the best maps and plans
available for the "principal urban areas" designated
in NIS CHAPTER II and for any additional urban
areas agreed upon by the CHAPTER IX Coordinator
and the contributor during the planning phase for
the Section. Note deficiencies and significant pro-
grams.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 CHAPTER IX 6.1!rnituannift
Section 94
A. General
B. Sociological maps
Recommend and appraise the best maps showing
the distribution, density, and rate of growth of popu-
lation; the composition and characteristics of popula-
tion according to race, nationality, language, religion,
occupation, education, age, and sex; and health, in-
cluding incidence of diseases and locations of health
and medical facilities. Note deficiencies and signifi-
cant programs.
C. Political maps
Recommend and appraise the best maps of inter-
national boundaries, limits of territorial waters, major
and minor administrative divisions, political problems
(including dissident groups and disputed areas),
strength of political parties, and election districts.
Note deficiencies and significant programs.
D. Economic maps
Recommend and appraise the best maps on the
following subjects: 1) agriculture, fishing, and for-
estry?agricultural regions, land use, soil productivity,
and production and distribution of crops and livestock;
fisheries and fishing areas; and forestry and forest
products; 2) fuels and power?solid fuels (nature, ex-
tent, and location of deposits; ownership, location,
and production of mines; and production by regions
or fields), petroleum and natural gas (exploration,
producing areas, refineries, pipelines, and consuming
centers), and electric power (generation, transmission,
and consumption); 3) minerals and metals--iron and
nonferrous ores, metals, and nonmetallic minerals (de-
posits; ownership, location, and production of mines;
and production by regions or fields); 4) manufacturing
and construction?industrial machinery, motor ve-
hicles, aircraft, electrical and electronic products,
scientific and precision instruments and parts, ship-
building, explosives, arms and ammunition, missiles
and rockets, chemicals, consumer goods, fabricated or
processed construction materials, and other industries;
and 5) commerce and trade?flow of commerce (by
commodity, volume, and method of transport), centers
of trade, and exports and imports. Note deficiencies
and significant programs.
E. Postal maps
Recommend and appraise the best maps showing
postal routes and post offices. Note deficiencies and
significant programs.
F. General reference maps and atlases
Recommend and appraise the best maps of the NIS
Area for general reference purposes. Limit the selec-
tion to small- or medium-scale maps that include data
on a variety of subjects and that cover the NIS Area
in its entirety, or in major part, on a single sheet;
exclude maps bound in a publication. Recommend
also the best general atlases of the NIS Area (if any)
that contain maps on a variety of subjects. Omit
atlases that pertain to a single topic (climate, oceano-
graphy, etc.); maps from these special-subject atlases
are included elsewhere in the Chapter under the proper
subject heading. Note deficiencies and significant
programs.
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT I
PORTS AND NAVAL FACILITIES
Section 1 Introduction
Section 2 Principal Ports
Section 3 Secondary Ports
Section 4 Minor Ports
Section 5 Naval Facilities
Section 6 Shipyards
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
EA ',E.'s, 1 Ifil,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Supplement I
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
Ports and Naval Facilities
OUTLINE
A. List of ports, naval facilities, and ship-
yards
B. Classification of ports, naval facilities,
and shipyards
C. Berth-classification standards
1. Anchorage berths
2. Fixed berths
a. Commercial wharves and fixed moor-
ings
b. Naval wharves and fixed moorings
D. Estimated military port capacity
E. Port administration
F. Explanatory notes
1. Units of measure
2. Railroad gage
3. Port plans
4. Cross-reference
5. Glossary
SECTION 2. PRINCIPAL PORTS
A?X.
Name of port
1. Introduction
2. Harbor
3. Landing facilities
4. Storage facilities
5. Clearance facilities
6. Supplies and utilities
7. Trade of port
8. Port operations
9. Port administration
10. Estimated military port capacity
11. Naval facilities
12. Shipyards
13. Port development
Y. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 3. SECONDARY PORTS
(Including comments on principal sources)
SECTION 4. MINOR PORTS
(Including comments on principal sources)
SECTION 5. NAVAL FACILITIES
A.
B.
C.
Coastal naval facilities
Inland naval facilities
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 6. SHIPYARDS
Coastal shipyards
1. Category I and II shipyards
2. Category III shipyards
Inland shipyards
1. Category I and II shipyards
2. Category III shipyards
Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
siimmoutamPL NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Section 1. Introduction
A. List of ports, naval facilities, and ship-
yards
List all ports alphabetically, indicating name, coordi-
nates, and classification.
List all naval facilities alphabetically, indicating
name, coordinates, and type. Separate coastal and
inland facilities by means of shoulder heads.
Alphabetical list of category I and II shipyards
(with coordinates).
Separate coastal and inland yards by shoulder heads.
Alphabetical list of locations (with coordinates)
having facilities with capabilities less than those of
category II shipyards but engaged in or capable of
ship construction and/or ship repair. Separate coastal
and inland locations by shoulder head.
B. Classification of ports, naval facilities,
and shipyards
Give criteria used in classifying ports into principal,
secondary, and minor.
State basis on which naval facilities have been
classified.
Give standards used in grouping shipyards, both on
basis of ship-repair and shipbuilding capability, into
category I, II, and III.
C. Berth-classification standards
1. ANCHORAGE BERTHS
Whenever possible or appropriate the capacities of
anchorages at the various ports are estimated in terms
of free-swinging anchorage berths, classified as follows:
Class I: Min. dimensions---diam. 800 yd., depth. 38 It.;
representative vessels acconunodated---type, battleship,
aircraft carrier, heavy cruiser; max. length 1,000 ft.
Class II: Min. dimensions?diam. 500 yd., depth 30 ft.;
representative vessels accommodated?type, ocean-type
cargo vessel, light cruiser; max. length 600 ft.
PAGE 2
JULY 1957
Class III: Min, dimensions?diam. 300 yd., depth 20 ft.;
representative vessels accommodated?type, destroyer,
coaster; max. length 350 ft.
NOTE When berths are laid out in depths of water that
have exceeded the above minimums, with greater
scopes of chain being required, larger berth diam-
eters are used.
2. FIXED BERTHS
a. COMMERCIAL WIIARVES AND FIXED MOORINGS --
Berthing capacities of the principal dry-cargo wharves
and of fixed moorings are given in terms of six standard
general-cargo berths, classified as follows:
CLASS OF
BERTH
BERTH
SIONS
DIMEN-
Depths
REPRESENTATIVE VESSELS ACCOM-
MODATED
Length
ft.
ft.
565
31-30
Large ocean-type cargo vessel (C4,
C3)
460
29-23
Standard ocean-type cargo vessel
(VC2, EC2, C2, Cl-B)
350
22-18
Small ocean-type cargo vessel
(C1-M)
250
17
Standard coaster-type cargo vessel
(N3-S)
200
13
Small coaster-type cargo vessel
F
100
7
Lighter
Berthing capacities Of petroleum wharves and off-
shore-pipeline berths are given in terms of five standard
tanker berths, classified as follows:
CLASS OF
BERTH
T-A
T-B
T-C
T-D
T-E
BERTH DIMEN-
SIONS
Length
ft.
600
525
450
250
175
Depth
ft.
34
31
26
14
9
REPRESENTATIVE VESSELS ACCOM-
MODATED
, Large ocean-type tanker
Standard ocean-type tanker (T2)
, Small ocean-type tanker
, Standard coaster-type tanker
Representative sound-and-river-
type tank barge
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT Iamiliii1111110111milio
b. NAVAL WHARVES AND FIXED MOORINGS ? Berth-
ing capacities of the wharves and fixed moorings used
primarily by naval vessels are given in terms of U.S.
naval vessel berths, classified as follows:
CLASS OF BERTH
BB (1g.)
BB (med.)
DIMEN-
SIONS
TYPE VESSEL ACCOMMODATED
Length
Depth
ft.
890
680
ft.
38
38
Battleship (Iowa class)
Battleship (South Dakota
class)
CVA (lg.)
970
37
Large aircraft carrier (Mid-
way class)
CVA (med.) ..
900
32
Medium aircraft carrier
(Essex class)
CVL
685
29
Light aircraft carrier (Saipan
class)
CVE
560
32
Escort aircraft carrier (Com-
mencement Bay class)
CA
675
27
Heavy cruiser (Baltimore
class)
CL
610
26
Light cruiser (Cleveland
class)
DD
395
20
Destroyer (Gearing class)
DE
310
15
Destroyer escort (Buckley
class)
SS
315
18
Submarine (Balao class)
AM
225
12
Minesweeper (Raven class)
AMS
145
10
Motor minesweeper
PT
105
7
Motor torpedo boat
AO (1g.)
555
33
Oiler (Cimarron class)
AO (med.)
525
32
Oiler (Pecos-Suainico class)
AOG
315
17
Gasoline tanker (Patapsco
class)
D. Estimated military port capacity
The estimated military port capacity is the maximum
amount of general cargo?expressed in long tons?that
can be unloaded onto the wharves and cleared from
the wharf aprons during a period of one 24-hour day
(20 effective cargo-working hours). The estimate is
based on the static cargo-transfer facilities of the port
existing at a particular time and is designed for com-
parison rather than for operational purposes. Factors
and conditions controlling the estimation of port capac-
ity are as follows:
1) A factor of 1.2 ton per linear foot is applied to all
wharfage suitable for the discharge of general cargo,
either directly or by means of lighters, that has along-
side depths of 7 feet or more. In the case of wharfage
suitable for general-cargo transfer but with alongside
depths of less than 7 feet the factor of 1.2 ton per linear
foot is appropriately reduced. In determining the
amount by which the factor is reduced, the datum to
which the depths are referred and the heights of the
various tidal rises are given due consideration.
2) For the purposes of the port-capacity estimate
all such wharfage with alongside depths of less than 18
feet is treated as lighter wharfage. To be fully utilized,
such wharfage must be within a practicable distance
of and be served by a sufficient number of the following:
Anchorage berths?Suitable anchorage areas are meas-
ured in terms of Class II berths only, and a factor of 600
tons is assigned to each berth.
Free-swinging mooring berths?Only berths capable of
accommodating ocean-type vessels (comparable to a Class
II anchorage berth) are used, and a factor of 600 tons is
assigned to each berth.
Fixed-mooring and alongside offshore-discharge berths?
Only Class A, B, and C berths (capable of accommodating
ocean-type vessels) are used. A factor of 600 tons per
berth is assigned to Class A and B berths, and a factor of
400 tons per berth is assigned to Class C berths.
If there are not enough such berths, the value given
the lighter wharfage is reduced to correspond to the
discharge capacity of the available berths.
3) The estimate assumes the utilization of all wharf-
age that is suitable for the transfer of general cargo
regardless of its normal use; e.g., this includes naval
wharves and any wharves normally used for a special
purpose but suitable for the discharge of general cargo.
4) Wharf aprons must have sufficient width for
cargo to be landed and cleared without unnecessary
delay. In computing the discharge capacity of any
wharf with an apron not meeting this requirement, the
factor of 1.2 ton per linear foot is reduced to a value
representing the effective discharge capability of the
wharf. An open pier must have sufficient width to
permit sustained discharge and clearance at the normal
rate from both sides of the pier if the factor of 1.2 ton
per linear foot is to apply to both sides; if this require-
ment is not met, the factor applied to one side is ap-
propriately reduced or alongside offshore-discharge
berths (fixed berths A, B, and C) are assigned to that
side.
5) Allowances and adjustments in the estimate com-
pensate for certain static conditions that would seri-
ously retard unloading operations, including such im-
pediments as faulty wharf layout, poor condition of
wharf, and inadequate clearance potential from a
particular wharf.
6) The estimate assumes that the unloading of ships
is by ship's gear only (both alongside and in the stream),
but that lighters are discharged by mobile or other
light cranes.
7) The estimate assumes that adequate labor, steve-
dore gear, harbor craft (lighters and the means of
moving them), and cranage for the discharge of lighters
are available.
8) The estimate makes no allowance for such vari-
ables as adverse sea and weather conditions, enemy
interference, or civil requirements.
9) The estimate is given in terms of maximum
capacity, with a supplementary statement indicating
the amount of cargo that would be discharged directly
alongside and the amount that would have to be light-
cred. If naval wharfage is used in obtaining the
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
NIS STANDARD
maximum capacity, a supplementary statement is
made indicating the amount of cargo that would be
discharged at such wharfage.
10) Because the estimate is for a period of one day
only, clearance from the port as a whole is not incor-
porated as a factor.
11) The estimate cannot be projected beyond a
single day by straight multiplication.
E. Port administration
Whenever the ports of a country come under the
jurisdiction of a national government department the
administration of ports on the national level is nor-
mally described in SECTION 1, and the description of the
administration of each individual port on the local
level is carried in the study of the port.
F. Explanatory notes
1. UNITS OF MEASURE
Statement concerning use.
: CIA-R0P79-01055A000300030001-4
INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
2. RAILROAD GAGE
Give the standard gage for the country and also
any other gages that serve the various ports.
3. PORT PLANS
Make statement such as the following: The port
plan provides a graphic representation of the port,
showing the relationship of its component parts and
the locations of the principal port facilities. Although
the port plan carries depth patterns, it is in no sense a
navigational instrument and should not be used as a
chart. The port plans in this Supplement have been
based on the best charts and plans available and have
been amended from the most recent photography and
reports. Dimensions and scales represent close ap-
proximations.
4. CROSS-REFERENCES
Point out topics which receive additional treatment
in other Sections of the NIS. Provide appropriate
cross-references for each subject.
5. GLOSSARY
List with English equivalents of foreign generic
terms used in Supplement.
Section 2. Principal ports
A-X. Name of port
(Coordinates, H.O. Chart No.)
1. INTRODUCTION
General summary
Relative location
Importance (strategic and/or economic)
Historical background
Principal characteristics and activities of port (include
types of cargo handled and annual volume of trade)
Summary of harbor
Position and layout
Largest vessel that can be accommodated in port
Anchorage
Summary of capacity
Estimated military port capacity
Berthage
Summary of port facilities
Wharves and wharf facilities (mechanical handling facili-
ties, transit sheds, rail and road clearances, utilities)
Storage and specialized terminal facilities
Clearance facilities
Shipyard facilities
Summary of naval facilities
Type
Function
Components
Summary of port development
PAGE 4
2. HARBOR
a. SUMMARY ? Brief general overall picture of
harbor including:
Location in relation to town and coast
General form and type
Framework and component parts
Aids to navigation
Pilotage
Shores adjoining harbor
b. PROTECTION ?. Summary of protective system
as a whole. Analysis of component parts of principal
protective system covering:
Position
Shape and alinement
Dimensions
Construction
Brief analysis of auxiliary or inner protective
works
C. HARBOR DIVISIONS ? Description of each di-
vision covering:
Relative position
Use
Dimensions
Defined channels
Turning basins
Berths
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT I
d. FAIRWAY LIMITATIONS
(1) Approach ? Brief summary indicating char-
acter of approach and limitations, if any.
(2) Entrance ?Describe briefly (if harbor has
defined entrance); give controlling dimensions.
(3)Harbor
C. SILTING AND DREDGING ? Liability to silting
and dredging requirements of all navigable fairways
and berths.
f. ANcnoRAGE ? Indicate the location of anchor-
ages (any area customarily used for anchorage or
specifically reserved for that purpose and in any way
associated with the port) and cover each in terms of:
Depths
Bottom sediments (evaluation of holding qualities)
Evaluation of each anchorage area in terms of protection
from sea and weather
Number and location of free-swinging berths by classes
when anchorage is such that a vessel berthed there would
be considered to have entered the port and the number of
berths falls within the limit set in the anchorage berth
classification standards.
If in estimating military port capacity the berths used to
serve the lighter wharfage of the port are insufficient or
are entirely lacking, areas that appear to be suitable for
anchoring may be described as anchorages, but it must
be made clear that they have been determined from an
interpretation of the chart and not from evidence that
ships actually anchor there.
g. MOORING DERTIIS
(1) Fixed
Location and layout
Number, types, sizes, and capacities of berths
Functional summary of berths
(2) Free-swinging
Location and layout
Capacity
HYDROGRAPHIC AND WEATHER CONDITIONS
Tides
Depths and heights
Adverse conditions affecting port operations
i. DEFENSES
(1) Summary -- Brief general comprehensive
picture of port defense system showing pattern of
organization, authority, and operation.
(2) Entrance control post? Details of command
post for coordination and operation of military elements
of the harbor defense system.
(3) Detection units ? Details of magnetic loops,
sonic listening devices, and 'other detection devices.
(4) Nets and booms ?Location, types, layout
and construction of nets, booms, and other barrier
devices.
(5) Mines ?Location and details of defensive
mines in harbor approaches and entrance.
(6) Patrol operations ?Details of patrol ac-
tivity in harbor and its approaches; identification and
functions of vessels assigned to harbor defense and
patrol duties.
(7) Shore batteries ?Brief summary of shore
batteries in vicinity of port intended for use against
surface craft.
(8) Antiaircraft defense ?Brief summary of
antiaircraft defense organization and facilities.
3. LANDING FACILITIES
a. WHARVES AND LANDINGS
(1) Principal wharves and offshore-pipeline berths
Principal wharves
Total wharfage
Total berthage
Largest vessel that can be accommodated alongside
Wharf distribution
Wharf evaluation
Wharf construction:
Generic types
Construction
Decking and apron
Condition
Wharf ancillary facilities:
Rail facilities on wharf
Clearing roadways
Transit sheds
Mechanical handling facilities
Utilities
Cross reference to table of wharves
Table of wharves
Offshore-pipeline berths
(2) Supplemental wharves and landings
Summary (1 or 2 sentences)
List of supplemental wharves and landings
b. MECHANICAL HANDLING FACILITIES
(1) Cranes ? Summary of shore cranes; indicate
general types and capacities; divide cranes into cargo,
shipyard, and miscellaneous categories; cross reference
to table of shore cranes.
Table of offshore cranes.
Floating cranes.
(2) Stevedore gear ? Availability of stevedore
gear: carriers, forklifts, jitneys, wharf trucks, portable
conveyors, etc.
(3) Special handling equipment ?Summary
statement of special cargo-handling equipment (coal
and ore loaders, grain unloaders, industrial track, pipe-
lines, etc.) indicating types, numbers, and uses.
c. HARBOR CRAFT ? General statement of extent
and adequacy of service fleet.
Details of craft (arrange by type):
Tugs and launches
Breakdown by classes (seagoing and harbor). Give type
of power, horsepower, and any special equipment such
as salvage and firefighting equipment; indicate operat ?
ing ranges of seagoing salvage tygs
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Lighters
Breakdown by capacity and type (self-propelled or dumb).
Give numbers (in round figures or general terms), con-
struction, capacity, draft loaded, and type of power if
self-propelled
Bunkering and watering craft
Details of each craft:
Name, type, capacity, equipment, delivery rate, whether
privately or governmentally owned
Dredging equipment
Details of each craft:
Name, type, capacity in terms of operating depth and
cubic yards per hour (include hopper barges)
Miscellaneous craft
Details of miscellaneous harbor service craft such as fire-
boats, icebreakers, ferries, piledrivers, etc. Cover sig-
nificant characteristics of each in detail comparable
to above
4. STORAGE FACILITIES
a. GENERAL CARGO STORAGE
(1) General Summary of all transit sheds,
warehouses, and covered storage buildings directly
associated with port operations; give general location
of facilities and total capacities (in round figures) of
transit sheds, warehouses, and covered storage build-
ings. Cross-reference to table of covered storage.
Table of covered storage.
(2) Refrigerated ?Summary of facilities asso-
ciated with port operations; include total capacity (in
round figures). Cross-reference to table of refrigerated
storage installations.
Table of refrigerated-storage installations. For each
installation show:
Name
Location
Use
Machinery and equipment
Daily ice-making capacity
Storage capacity (breakdown by controlling temperatures)
Remarks
b. BULK CARGO STORAGE
(1) Liquid
(a) PETROLEUM ? Summary of facilities in
port including total capacity and breakdown by prod-
uct, and general location of installations. Cross-ref-
erence to table of petroleum storage terminals.
Table of petroleum storage terminals.
(b) (NAME OF COMMODITY OR MISCELLANE-
OUS) ? Scope, detail, and arrangement similar to that
for "Petroleum"; cover such commodities as molasses,
vegetable oils, wine, etc.
(2) Dry -- Table of bulk terminal facilities.
(a) GRAIN -- Summary Of facilities directly
associated with port operations; include total capacity
(in round figure) and general location of installations.
Cross reference to table of bulk terminal facilities.
Cross reference to details of special handling equipment.
PAGE 6
(b) COAL ? Summary of facilities directly
associated with port operations; include total capacity
(in round figure), and general location of installations.
Cross-reference to table of bulk terminal facilities.
Cross-reference to details of special handling equipment.
(C) (NAME OF COMMODITY OR MISCELLANE-
OUS) ? Scope, detail, and arrangement similar to that
for "Coal" and "Grain"; cover such commodities as
ore, lumber, etc.
C. OPEN STACKING SPACE ? Summary sentence on
availability of open space in waterfront area suitable
or reserved for storing general cargo, indicating if
served by rail and/or road. List of specific sites
covering:
Location
Size
5. CLEARANCE FACILITIES
a. RAIL
(1) Lines clearing port ? Identification of each
line and brief summary of each:
Number of tracks
Gage
Connecting points
Distances
(2) Rail facilities in port ? Summary of port
rail network; include the following:
Connecting line to port area from main terminal point
Bridges and ferries forming integral part of port network
Trackage in port area
Railroad yards
Cross reference to table of railroad yards
Table of railroad yards
b. ROAD
(1) Roads clearing port ? Identification of prin-
cipal routes and brief summary of each:
Construction
Width
Connecting points
Distances
Condition
(2) Streets in port General analysis of ade-
quacy in relation to port operation.
C. INLAND WATERWAY ? Identification of each
route clearing port and brief summary of each:
Type
Connecting points
Distances
Controlling dimensions
Craft in service
d. PIPELINE Identification of pipelines clearing
port and brief summary of each:
Commodity carried
Size
Connecting points
Distances
Capacity
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT I minftwie
6. SUPPLIES AND UTILITIES
a. PETROLEUM ? Summary statement on avail-
ability of bunkers including types of fuel and stocks
maintained, methods of supply and extent of facilities;
if port has no petroleum barges and capacity of largest
bunkering berth is less than capacity of largest along-
side berth in port, give dimensions of largest bunkering
berth.
b. COAL ? Summary statement of availability of
bunkers including quality of fuel and stocks main-
tained; methods and rates of supply; and extent of
facilities.
C. WATER ? Summary statement On availability
of water to ships; methods of supply and extent of
facilities; quality of water; type and adequacy of port
supply; if port has no water barges and capacity of
largest watering berth is less than capacity of largest
alongside berth in port, give dimensions of largest
watering berth.
d. ELECTRICITY ? General summary covering:
Characteristics of service currents distributed in port area
Adequacy of supply for port operations
State if current is produced locally, taken from a grid sys-
tem, or both
Wharf outlets
e. PROVISIONS AND CHANDLERY Brief summary
of availability.
7. TRADE OF PORT
a. SHIPPING ? Summary of volume of shipping
calling at port; analysis of trends and significance; cross
reference to table and graph of shipping.
Table and graph of shipping.
b. COMMERCE ? Summary of volume of cargo
handled through port and analysis of trends and sig-
nificance of passenger traffic; enumerate principal
receipts and shipments; table and graph if appropriate.
S. PORT OPERATIONS
a. CARGO HANDLING ? General analysis of opera-
tional factors related to cargo-handling procedure and
potential. These may include:
Average cargo tonnage handled, daily and monthly
Average cargo-handling rates, hourly and daily
Ratio of receipts to shipments
Ratio of bulk cargoes to general cargoes
Ratio of cargo worked alongside to cargo worked in stream
(fightered from vessels at anchor or moorings)
Average vessel turn-around
Prevailing methods of cargo transfer and regulations affect-
ing.
Fish landed from fishing craft
Cargo transferred over wharves from one part of port to
another
Limiting factors (actual or potential)
b. LABOR ? General analysis covering
tors as:
Size of normal stevedore force
Adequacy of force for normal port operations
Efficiency of stevedore personnel
Availability of labor reserve
Political orientation
such fac-
9. PORT ADMINISTRATION
Analyze pattern of ownership, authority, and opera-
tion of port.
Discuss official services such as quarantine, customs,
security organization, and free-port zone.
10. ESTIMATED MILITARY PORT CAPACITY
Include cross-reference to standard formula for com-
puting port capacity, SEcTioN 1 of Supplement or
Explanatory Notes.
11. NAVAL FACILITIES
a. SUMMARY ? General summary covering:
Location
Type
Function
Components
Base development
b. HARBOR
C. BASE COMPONENTS
(1) Landing facilities ?Brief summary and
cross reference to Subsection 3, Landing Facilities, for
principal treatment.
(2) Shipyard component ?Brief summary and
cross reference to Subsection 12, Shipyards, for princi-
pal treatment.
(3) Ordnance component
(a) MANUFACTURING FACILITIES ? Analyze
type of manufacturing and give details of plant includ-
ing: current activity and capabilities; identification of
buildings and facilities; size, construction, and principal
equipment of each building.
(b) ASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE FACILITIES ?
Analyze type of operations performed and give details
of plant including: current activity and capabilities;
identification of buildings and facilities; size, construc-
tion, and principal equipment of each building.
(4) Supply component
(a) MATERIAL STORAGE AND SUPPLY ? Analyze
activities and give details of facilities including: use,
construction, capacity, and principal equipment of each
building; indicate in general terms stocks of materiel
normally maintained.
(b) PETROLEUM STORAGE AND SUPPLY ? Brief
summary of facilities and supply. Cross reference as
appropriate to Subsection 4, b, Petroleum Storage; 6, a,
Petroleum Supplies; and table of principal wharves.
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
(C) ORDNANCE STORAGE AND SUPPLY Iden-
tification of buildings and facilities and details of each:
use, construction, capacity.
Indicate normal stocks of ordnance maintained.
(5) Communications component ? General an-
alysis of organization and function of communications
activities.
For each facility or installation (radio station, relay
station, message center, etc.) cover such details as
type, construction, dimensions, layout, and equipment.
(6) Training component -- General analysis of
mission, organization, and functions of each training
activity.
Identification and description of facilities including
school buildings and quarters, instruction shops, prac-
tice equipment, etc.
(7) Medical component ? General description of
medical facilities including hospitals, dispensaries, etc.
(8) Administrative component -- General analy-
sis covering tables of organization of base as a whole
and of each component activity.
(9) Miscellaneous. component? Detailed descrip-
tion of all special miscellaneous activities not included
in above components.
d. BASE UTILITIES
(1) Housing facilities ? Identification and de-
tailed description of barracks, quarters, and ancillary
installations.
(2) Transportation facilities
(a) CLEARANCE? Brief summary of rail and
road facilities clearing base indicating connecting points
with main rail lines and roads.
(b) FACILITIES IN BASE Summary analysis
covering layout and construction of streets; details of
vehicles and vehicle-service facilities; layout. of railroad
trackage; details of railroad equipment.
(3) Base communications Summary analysis
of internal communications facilities.
(4) Water ? Summary analysis covering: source,
quantity, and quality of supply; details of transmission;
purification, storage, and distribution.
(5) Electricity ? Summary analysis covering:
sources of supply; type and capacity of base power
plants; details of generating equipment and transform-
ers; characteristics of current as produced and dis-
tributed.
(6) Fire protection ? Summary analysis cover-
ing: equipment and alarm system; fire mains and
pressures.
(7) Recreation facilities ? Brief summary.
(8) Disciplinary facilities ? Brief summary.
PAGE 8
e. BASE DEFENSES
(1) Protective construction and concealment ?
General analysis covering: dispersal of base units;
sandbagging, bombproof . eongtruction; subterranean
shelters, depots, and communication centers; camou-
flage, natural shelter, decoys, and smoke screens.
(2) Chemical warfare defense Brief summary
of procedures and equipment for individual and collec-
tive protection and decontamination.
(3) Internal security ? Brief summary covering:
sentry and guard organization and associated installa-
tions such as guardhouses, walls or fences, lookout
towers, etc.; measures governing entry and exit of per-
sonnel and control within base.
12. SHIPYARDS
ft. SUMMARY ? General summary of available ship-
building and ship-repair facilities and capabilities of
port. Indicate size of largest vessel that can be re-
paired as limited by largest underwater repair facility,
and the largest dry-cargo ship that could be built.
b. CATEGORY I AND II SHIPYARDS
(1) Name of yard ? Brief summary covering:
Location
Ownership
Layout
Activities
Capabilities
(a) FACILITIES
1) Shipbuilding Installations
a) Shipbuilding ways Brief summary
of direct-launching shipbuilding ways; cross reference
to table of shipbuilding ways.
Table of shipbuilding ways.
b) Shipbuilding docks ? Brief summary
of shipbuilding docks; cross reference to table of ship-
building docks.
Table of shipbuilding docks.
c) Shipbuilding sites
2) Drydocking Installations -- Brief sum-
mary of drydocks and marine railways; indicate capac-
ity of each significant facility; cross reference to Sub-
section f. Details of Drydocking Installations.
3) Fitting-Out and Repair Berths ? Brief
evaluative summary of fitting-out and repair berths;
list standard berths provided; when applicable cross
reference to table of principal wharves.
4) Shops ? Evaluative summary of shop
facilities.
Table of shops.
5) Cranes ? Brief evaluative summary of
cranage; cross reference to table of shore cranes.
Table of shore cranes.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT I
(b) SERVICES
1) Utilities Brief summary of availabil-
ity, sources, adequacy, characteristics, and distribution
of the following:
Electric power
Steam
Compressed air and industrial gases
Water
2) Fire Protection ? Summary analysis
covering: equipment and alarm system; fire mains,
hydrants, and pressures; automatic extinguishing sys-
tems; fire-fighting force.
3) Security ? Brief summary covering:
sentry and guard organization and associated installa-
tions such as guardhouses, walls or fences, lookout
towers, etc.; measures governing entry and exit of
personnel and control within yard.
(C) PERSONNEL
1) Management Analysis of pattern of
management, including historical background if neces-
sary for clarity, and estimate of professional com-
petence.
2) Labor ? Brief summary of number,
categories, and quality of employees.
(d) OPERATIONS
1) Ship construction
2) Ship repair
3) Materials
a) Procurement
b) Storage facilities
(0) PRODUCTION
C. CATEGORY III SHIPYARDS ? Treat in Same man-
ner as category I and II shipyards when appropriate,
scope of treatment depending on size of yard and extent
of information.
d. AUXILIARY REPAIR FACILITIES
C. SALVAGE FACILITIES
f. DETAILS OF DRYDOCKING INSTALLATIONS
(1) Graving docks ? Summary of graving docks
in port giving number and distribution.
Cross reference to table of graving docks.
Table of graving docks.
(2) Floating drydocks ? Summary of floating
drydocks in port giving number and distribution.
Cross reference to table of floating drydocks.
Table of floating drydocks.
(3) Marine railways ? Summary of marine rail-
ways in port giving number and distribution.
Cross reference to table of marine railways.
Table of marine railways.
13. PORT DEVELOPMENT
Detailed description of projected harbor works and
port improvements.
Y. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby in-
form the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 3. Secondary Ports
AX. Name of port
Describe secondary ports in the same manner as
principal ports, the treatment being indicated by the
outline guide in SECTION 2, Principal Ports.
Y. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
arluenummor NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
Section 4. Minor Ports
Tabulate pertinent details of minor ports (those not
treated in SECTION 2 or 3 but having some significance
or potential utility) using standard table with follow-
ing headings:
Name (coordinates)
Harbor:
Fairway limitations
Tidal rises
Ice
Currents
Anchorage
Landing facilities
Wharves
Supplemental landings
Mechanical handling facilities
Harbor craft
Storage and utilities
Clearance
Ra,11
Road
Inland waterway
Shipyards
Remarks
JULY 1957
Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be ac-
corded the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 5. Naval Facilities
General analysis of naval establishment covering
size, adequacy, and organization into districts or com-
mands and distribution and overall condition of vari-
ous activities.
A. Coastal naval facilities
Tabulate significant characteristics of naval activi-
ties using standard table with following headings:
Location
Type of facility and mission
Components
Capabilities and functions
Cross-reference to SECTIONS 2 and 3 for detailed des-
cription of activities.
PAGE 10
B. Inland naval facilities
1. NAME OF PLACE (COORDINATES)
NOTE From this point, this outline guide is identical with
items a, b, c, d, and e, of 11. Naval Facilities, SEC-
TION 2. If, facilities are small and of relatively little
importance they may be tabulated in the same fashion
as coastal naval facilities in Subsection 5, A.
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby in-
form the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this con-
nection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT I alimmummomp
Section 6. Shipyards
General analysis of shipyards of area covering extent
and distribution of shipyard facilities, capability and
size of yards, and predominance of shipbuilding or
ship-repairing facilities. Cross-reference to Subsection
64, E for discussion of economic aspects of shipbuilding
and ship-repairing industry.
A. Coastal shipyards
Cross-reference to SECTIONS 2 and 3 for detailed de-
scription of yards.
1. CATEGORY I AND II SHIPYARDS
Tabulate significant characteristics of each yard
using standard table with the following headings:
Name
Shipbuilding installations:
Shipbuilding ways
Shipbuilding docks
Shipbuilding sites
Drydocking installations:
Graving docks
Floating drydocks
Marine railways
Fitting-out and repair berths
Shops
Cranes
Utilities
Labor
2. CATEGORY III SHIPYARDS
Tabulate significant characteristics of each yard
using standard table with the following headings:
Port (coordinates)
Name and location in port
Activities
Facilities:
Shipbuilding ways
Drydocking facilities
Shops
Cranes
Wharves
Utilities (water, electricity, compressed air, etc.)
Employees (number and categories)
B. Inland shipyards
1. CATEGORY 1 AND II SHIPYARDS
The remainder of this topic is identical with 12, b of
Section 2, Supplement I, except that heading desig-
nations are raised one level.
2. CATEGORY III SHIPYARDS
Tabulate significant characteristics of each yard
using standard table with the following headings:
Port (coordinates)
Name and location in port
Activities
Facilities:
Shipbuilding ways
Drydocking facilities
Shops
Cranes
Wharves
Utilities (water, electricity, compressed air, etc.)
Employees (number and categories)
Nom If importance of yard and scope of information war-
rant, individual yards may be treated in the same
fashion as category I and II inland yards.
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
PAGE ii?
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT II
COASTS AND LANDING BEACHES
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
_JiNi J.1-1 J-./ 11 1 J. .1-I
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Supplement II- Coasts and Landing Beaches
OUTLINE
(Each Section, covers a single sector)
SECTION 1.
SECTOR 1
SECTION 2.
SECTOR 2
SECTION 3.
SECTOR 3 (NO SUBSECTORS)
A.
Subsector 1-A
A.
Subsector 2-A
A.
Coast
1. Coast
1. Coast
B.
Landing beaches
2. Landing beaches
2. Landing beaches
B.
Subsector 1-B
X.
Subsector 2-X.
1. Coast
1. Coast
2. Landing beaches
2. Landing beaches
X.
Subsector 1-X,
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation, and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Note for publication: Information in this Supplement is pre-
sented as a detailed treatment of individual beach areas which
aro referred to in SECTION 22. The beach information in the
Supplement is intimately related to the coastal and oceanographic
information in SECTION 22 and should be used in conjunction
with that Section.
Section 1. Sector 1
Coordinates of sector limits.
(Reference to location map, overall map, and general small-
scale USHO charts.)
Text of Sector 1 and Subsectors 1-A, 1-B, etc., is
identical with that of SECTION 22 except for necessary
changes in headings and in figure numbering to fit
SUPPLEMENT II Outline and designations.
As in SECTION 22, if no beaches are identified for the
sector or subsector under discussion, include heading
and statement as follows:
"b. LANDING BEACHES ? None described."
If tables of major beaches and/or minor beaches are
used, the sequence is as follows:
"b. LANDING BEACHES ?" (Text from SECTION
22, followed by table of Major Beach Areas and table
of Minor Beach Areas, as figures, in that sequence.
See examples.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
.L.P111 NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
(Example)
FfGlum 1-1. MAjOR BEACH AREAS OF COASTAL SUBSECTOR 1-A
Beaches physically most suitable for landing are marked with a star (*)
(Left-hand page) .
JULY 1957
BEACH NUMBER AND
LOCATION
LENGTH AND -USABLE
LENGTH
WIDTHS: AT LW.;
AT }.W.
GRADIENTS: LW. TO
H.W. ; II.W. ZONE
APPROACHES
(Number, geographic boa-
tion, coordinates, refer-
mice to photos, reliabil-
ity)
(Length in statute miles or
yards; shape; termina-
tions; separations; inter-
ruptions; usable length)
(Widths in yards)
(Approx. values, for
example 1 on 10
to 1 on 25)
(Offshore and nearshore dan-
gers, depths, nearshore
bottom slopes, anchorages,
bottom material, currents)
NOTE Beach lengths and distances along the coast and inland are expressed in statute miles; distances across water are expressed
in nautical miles except when referring to beach locations.
(Right-hand page)
SURF AND TIDAL RANGE
MATERIAI, AND FIRMNESS
TERRAIN IMMEDIATELY
BEHIND BEACH
EXITS AND COMMUNICATIONS
INLAND
(Average seasonal values of surf;
average maximum tidal ranges)
(Kind of material; firm,* soft,
etc.)
(Characteristics to 15 to 20
miles inland or to first
major barrier)
(Exits to coastal routes and
routes leading inland)
* For definition of terms see Subsection A, General of SECTION 22.
(Example)
:FIGURE 1-2. MINOR BEACH AREAS OF COASTAL SUBSECTOI
N TIMBER AND LOCATION
1-A
REMARKS
(Number, geographic location, coordinates,
reference to photos, reliability)
(Length; Shape and material; width; offshore and nearshore approach; terrain back-
ing beach; exits)
If unusually full description of one or several selected
beaches is given because available information, is ex-
ceptionally complete and beach areas are of importance
warranting such amplified treatment, this detailed
presentation appears in SUPPLEMENT II as a third type
of table following whatever other beach tables may be
present. Entry for such beach in the table of major
beach areas includes only beach number, location, and
reference to table of Significant Beach Areas. See
example.
(Example)
FIGURE 1-3, SIGNIFICANT BEACH AREAS OF COASTAL SUBSECTOB, 1-A
A. Beach area (number).
Location and character ? Geographic location and coordinate; proximity to developed areas; shape, usable length, unusable stretches;
interruptions and/or separations; L.W. to H.W. widths and gradients; material and firmness;- surface features and obstructions;
local use made of beach, and best areas for landing.
A pproaches Brief mention of navigation restrictions and dangers in seaward approach, such as islands, shoals, narrow or shallow
channels through bay entrances, etc.?describe as far seaward as considered critical for supplying and sustaining amphibious opera-
tion; availability and description of anchorages; nearshore approach including bottom slopes, bottom composition, natural or
manmade obstructions, tides, currents, surf, local weather phenomena..
Adjacent terrain and exits Topography on flanks, immediately back of beach, and inland 15 to 20 miles or to first major terrain
barrier; nearest cover and concealment; trafficability; roads, trails, railroad, waterways, natural corridors, and cross-country exits
from beach; nearest fresh water?potable or nonpotable; nearest drop zones and emergency landing places for aircraft; nearest
communication facilities, power lines, power plants, and habitations.
B, C, etc. Beach area (number).
(Subheadings as for A.)
A. Subsector 2?A
? 1. COAST
2. LANDING BEACHES
PAGE 2
Section 2. Sector 2
X. Subsector 2?X
1. COAST
2, LANDING BEACHES
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT III
TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Section 1 Telephone
Section 2 Telegraph
Section 3 Radio
Section 4 Submarine Cables
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
minminurimir?
JULY 1957
Supplement III Telecommunications
OUTLINE
SECTION 1. TELEPHONE
A. Outside plant
1. Networks and systems
2. Line and construction
3. Cables and wire
4. Accessibility of routes
B. Inside plant
C. Repair facilities
D. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 2. TELEGRAPH
SECTION 3. RADIO
A. Communications
1. Facilities
2. Repair facilities
B. Broadcasting (including FM and tele-
vision)
1. Facilities
2. Repair facilities
C. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 4. SUBMARINE CABLES
A. Facilities
B. Repair facilities
C. Comments on principal sources
SUPPLEMENT III contains technical reference data
on telecommunications equipment and systems. An
analysis and interpretation of strategic economic, ad-
ministrative aspects and service potentialities of tele-
communications will be found in SECTION 38, CHAP-
TER III.
Other specialized phases of telecommunications are
treated elsewhere in the NIS:
Effect upon telecommunications, CHAPTER II
Manufactures, SECTION 64, CHAPTER VI
Electronics, SECTION 71, CHAPTER VII
Military, SECTION 81, CHAPTER VIII
Telecom map appraisal, CHAPTER IX
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparttion and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Note for publication: This Supplement contains technical ref-
erence data on facilities discussed in SECTION 38.
Section 1. Telephone
A. Outside plant
1. NETWORKS AND SYSTEMS
Length of sections between toll centers or central
offices
Number of circuits between toll centers or central
offices
Repeater (voice frequency and carrier) locations
Location of test stations
Location of exchanges and offices
Type of construction (open wire, aerial cable, under-
ground cable, radio relay, etc.)
Transfer points to other systems
Use of power lines for transmission of telecom
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
imilmmummum NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Any other information suitable for diagrammatic
presentation.
2. LINE CONSTRUCTION
a. GENERAL ? Type and size of pole generally
used, usual pole spacing, cross-arm length and pin
spacing, method of conductor suspension, type of hard-
ware and insulators used, date of installation or repair,
etc. (Use sketches and photographs.)
b. UNDERGROUND AND UNDERWATER CABLES ?
Depth of laying, marking methods, protection methods
(gas under pressure, conduit, etc.)
3. CABLES AND WIRE
a. CABLE ? Kind or type of cable, date of installa-
tion or repair, code identification of insulation (pref-
erably from manufacturer or local administration),
cable layup, circuit assignment (segregation of 4-wire
circuits, power and control circuits, etc.), capacitance,
inductance and resistance per unit length, inductance
of leading coils, cut-off frequency, physical character-
istics of loading apparatus, terminal box circuit assign-
ment, etc.
b. WIRE ? Size and material of conductors, wire
spacing, scheme of transposition, etc.
4. ACCESSIBILITY OF ROUTES
Usual routes followed by lines?along roads or rail-
roads, cross-country, etc.?and degree of accessibility.
Use of route markers.
B. Inside plant
Exact location of all exchanges and offices?give
street address and locate on town plan
Type of service (magneto, common battery, attended
or unattended dial, etc.) (For Telegraph?manual,
automatic Morse, Creed, Baudot, etc.)
Normal and emergency power supplies
Equipped capacity ,of switchboard or switching
equipment and number of subscribers served. Make
and model of switchboard of switching equipment
Type and description of main distributing frame and
central office exchange protective equipment
Kind (magneto, common battery, dial) and type
(wall, desk, hand set) of telephone substation equip-
ment in general use
Toll and exchange wire and cable entrance facilities
Carrier
a) Frequencies used and nomenclature for types
b) Circuit arrangements (2-wire, 4-wire)
c) Description of terminal and repeater equipment
d) Repeater spacing
Description of any services other than telephone
(radio program transmission, facsimile, TWX, or
other) provided by telephone system.
C. Repair facilities
Extent and location of repair shops
Number, distribution and efficiency of skilled me-
chanics
Location of warehouses or depots?give descriptions
and quantities of each type of material normally stored
in each
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 2. Telegraph
Same topics as for Telephone. If all telephone and telegraph
systems use joint facilities, Sections 1 and 2 may be combined.
Section 3. Radio
A. Communications
1. FACILITIES
a. LOCATION ? By city, state, or subdivision; by
geographical coordinates in degrees, minutes and sec-
onds; and, when available, by street and number, of
transmitting, receiving or control stations.
PAGE 2
b. STATION CALL SIGNAL
C. TYPE OF EMISSION Telegraphy on pure con-
tinuous wave, modulated telegraphy, telephony, pulse
position modulation, frequency modulation, facsimile,
etc.
d. POWER OF EACH TRANSMITTER ? Antenna
power.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
JULY 1957 SUPPLE
C. TYPES OF SERVICE FURNISHED ? Fixed, ama-
teur, military, coast, aeronautical, time signals, mete-
orological, notices to navigators, press, medical advice,
calibrated waves, portable, mobile, etc.
f. NUMBER OF TRANSMITTING SETS With name
of manufacturer and manufacturer's type designation
or other description, of each.
g. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATING EQUIPMENT ? Key-
ing apparatus, teleprinters, facsimile, carrier, etc.
h. FREQUENCY LIMITS WITHIN WIIICII THE STATION
CAN OPERATE ON REQUEST ? 1) Frequency Or frequen-
cies employed for: Normal operation and emergency
operation; and 2) Note any differences between primary
and secondary frequencies and/or day or night fre-
quencies.
i. POWER SOURCE ? Both regular and emergency.
j. ANY OTHER EMERGENCY OR STAND-BY EQUIP-
MENT OR ARRANGEMENTS
k. TYPE OF ANTENNA ? Rhombic, dipole, curtain,
etc.; area normally covered; and direction of propaga-
tion in degrees from north; method of feeding and
matching.
1. ROUTE AND TYPE OF REMOTE CONTROL ? Cable,
open wire, micro-wave link between transmitter or
receiver station and control station.
m. RADIO NETWORKS ? Such as: police, forestry,
public utilities, pipeline, intelligence, automotive asso-
ciations, or other (both public and private).
n. INTERCONNECTION WITH OTHER TELECOMMUNI-
CATIONS FACILITIES
0. CONTOUR OR PROFILE CHARTS OF THE AREA ?
Showing location of high points suitable for location of
microwave line or relay stations.
2. REPAIR FACILITIES
a. EXTENT AND LOCATION OF REPAIR SHOPS
b. NUMBER, DISTRIBUTION AND EFFICIENCY OF
SKILLED MECHANICS
C. LOCATION OF WAREHOUSES OR DEPOTS ? Give
descriptions and quantities for each type of material
normally stored in each.
B. Broadcasting (including FM and tele-
vision)
1. FACILITIES
Exact location of each transmitter, studio and con-
trol room
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
MENT III
Station call letters and frequency
Power of each transmitter (antenna power
Description of transmitter equipment
Frequency limits within which the station can oper-
ate on request
Description of power source?both regular and
emergency
Any other emergency or stand-by equipment or
arrangements
Type of antenna and area normally served, if direc-
tional include beam direction in degrees from north
Route and type of remote control (cable, open wire,
etc.) between transmitter and control room
Methods of netting or relaying (leased line, coaxial
cable, radio relay, modulated light beam, or other)
Television
a) Types of cameras used
b) Lines per picture and method of interlacing
c) Frames per second
d) Allocated and transmitted bandwidth
e) Method of audio transmission
f) Use of color television and type used?
Any other methods of entertainment or propaganda
dissemination (wires sound, wired wireless, etc.)
Receivers
a) Number in use and distribution
b) Most popular types (number of tubes, frequency
coverage, power source)
c) Repair facilities, and spares held locally, for
broadcast receivers
2. REPAIR FACILITIES
Extent and location of repair facilities
Number, distribution and efficiency of skilled me-
chanics
Station spares and source of supply
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ipiewiminew NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
Section 4. Submarine Cables
A. Facilities
Cable routes, showing both terminals for each cable
(cable designations)
Exact landing point of each cable
Exact location and description of cable huts (photo-
graphs including from seaward)
Method and location of landline connections between
cable huts and operating offices
Physical and electrical characteristics of cables
a) Length and date of laying or repair of each
section
b) Manufacturer's type or designation of each
cable
c) Number of conductors; conductor and insulat-
ing material
d) Speed of transmission
Operating Offices
a) Amount and types of equipment
PAGE 4
JULY 1957
b) Exact location
c) Methods of interconnection with other telecom-
munication facilities
B. Repair facilities
Description and location of repair shops or cable
shops
Location and description of repair supplies
Source of supply
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the use of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
-provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
vx-rrsTrIrm-r-r AT
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT IV
URBAN AREAS
Section 1 Introduction
Section 2 Principal Urban Areas
Section 3 Urban Areas of Secondary Importance
Section 4 Urban Areas of Minor Importance
Section 5 Gazetteer of Urban Areas
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 tILm
Supplement IV-Urban Areas
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2, PRINCIPAL URBAN AREAS
A. Name (of principal urban area)
1. Location and importance
2. Population
3. Means of access
4. Internal transportation
5. Physical characteristics
6. Important industry
7. Warehouses and storage
8. Billeting facilities
9. Principal buildings
OUTLINE
B?X.
SECTION 3.
SECTION 4.
SECTION 5.
OUTLINE GUIDE
10. Health and sanitation facilities
11. Water supply
12. Other public utilities
13. Repair and service facilities
14. War damage and planning
Name (the second most important area,
etc.)
URBAN AREAS OF SECONDARY IMPOR-
TANCE
URBAN AREAS OF MINOR .IMPORTANCE
GAZETTEER OF URBAN AREAS
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Editorial
Instructions are followed in detail.
Note for publication: Information in this Supplement is pre-
sented as a detailed treatment of individual urban areas which
are covered in a general manner in SECTION 25. The NIS areal
summary of urban areas in SECTION 25 will not be duplicated in
this Supplement.
1. Introduction
Short statement outlining basis of selection of urban
areas, size, importance, etc., and their arrangement.
(NIS urban areas map?locates all urban areas or
towns selected for study in SUPPLEMENT IV. Each
urban area is given an identifying map index number to
assist in ready identification; where these areas are
located in a dense pattern, map insets at a larger scale
are added. This map includes the main drainage pat-
tern, navigable waterways, main railroad, and highway
networks, important terrain features, and symbols de-
picting town functions. Depending upon extent of an
NIS Area, the selected scale is from 1:500,000 to
1:5,000,000; insets at practical desirable scales.)
Section 2. Principal Urban Areas
Army submits lists of key strategic urban areas and
other selected urban areas to the NIS Committee kir
transmission to IAC agencies for comment and con-
currence: Army makes the final selection. Discuss
or introduce the arrangement of the principal urban
areas selected for CHAPTER II, SlIbSOCIi0I1 25, B, 1, with
reasons for the order followed, their relative importance
to the areas .of the NIS as a whole, to the subareas as
determined by the discussion in CHAPTER II, Subsection
25, A, and to each other. (Paragraph headings for each
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE. ?1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
aiumwmonsim. NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
urban area are alphabetical and each area is discussed
in sequence according to the importance of the area,
i.e., A. the principal urban area, B. the second most
important, etc. A small reference map of the NIS Area
with locations of the principal urban areas is included.
Urban area maps may be located with aprons at the end
Of SECTION 2.)
A. Name (of principal urban area)
Alternate names in parentheses, urban areas map
index number, and population (large-scale map with
apron at end of SECTION 2).
1. LOCATION AND IMPORTANCE
Coordinates; basic importance?political, industrial
center, communications, etc., outlined in a short intro-
ductory statement. (Urban areas environs map and
location map at small scale positioning urban area in
relationship to neighboring areas, etc., with key rail-
road, highway and waterway communications accom-
panies the large-scale urban area map.)
2. POPULATION
Statistics over a period of years, if available, with
an evaluation of trends, growth or recession, and a
statement as to reliability; ethnic and religious sta-
tistics and problems, if pertinent or significant, and
subdivided by subareas or sections of the town if
there is significant segregation. (Include a population
or density map adjacent to text, This might be com-
bined with a building density map; small scale.)
3. MEANS OF ACCESS
Short statement as to importance of urban area in
the internal and external transportation of the NIS.
(Refer to environs map.)
a. RAIL ? Short statement, supplemented by tab-
ulated data, of the rail facilities entering and serving
the area. (Where there is an important suburban
and internal rail system, only main line information is
included in this topic with appropriate cross-references.
Lines, distances to next adjacent major rail centers,
numbers of tracks, locations of bridges in area and
their basic statistics, facilities, shops, stations, etc.,
are compiled on urban area map.)
b. ROAD ? Short statement, supplemented by
tabulated data or annotated map, of the highways
entering and serving the town with official highway
route numbers. (These highways, their distance to
next adjacent highway center, traffic-lane capacities,
locations of bridges and their basic statistics, condition
and type of paving, etc., are compiled on urban area
map.)
C. WATER ? Short statement, supplemented by
tabulated data, of navigable waterways serving area
and facilities within area. (Rivers, canals, locks,
PAGE 2
docks and wharves, etc., are compiled on urban area
map.)
d. AIR ? Short statement discussing air facilities
serving area. (Airfields, with their important facili-
ties within town area are compiled on urban area map.
All airfields within vicinity of area are located on en-
virons map.)
C. CROSS COUNTRY --- Statement discussing cross-
country means of approach to or exit from the area,
with appropriate notes or other means of identification
on the urban area map. (The most important routes
Or avenues of cross-country approach indicated on
environs map.)
4. INTERNAL TRANSPORTATION
Short statement introducing internal transportation
communications with references to urban area map.
(Illustrated by photographs and diagrams of equip-
ment and facilities.)
a. SUBWAY OR RAIL? Statement ' Of routes, dis-
tances, depths of tunnels, types of construction, bridges,
etc. May be amplified by tabulated data where con-
sidered desirable. (Data compiled on urban areas
map and/or transportation map.)
(Example)
FIGURE 2-1. TOWN SUBWAY SYSTEM
STATIONS
DISTANCE
.BETWEEN
STATIONS
DE rims
CO NSTRUC-
TION OF
TUNNELS
REMARKS
ROUTE 1:
miles
BLACK TO VIOLET
ft.
LINE
Black
1.25
55
Twin cast
iron tubes
2 escalators
White
0.83
15
Cut and
cover
Transfer point
to Pink Line
Blue
10
. etc.
b. STREETCAR ? Statement, with reference to
urban areas map and/or to transportation map, of
routes, equipment, source and distribution of power,
etc., and locations of carbarns.
C. STREET Statement on public automotive
transportation, buses, trolley buses, taxis, trucking,
with information as? to capacities of garages, parking
areas and buildings, trucking terminals, etc., which are
also compiled on urban area map. (Trolley buses may
warrant treatment as a separate subsection.)
d. CANAL AND RIVER FERRY -- Statement cover-
ing internal waterways transportation, illustrated by
photographs and diagrams, with information on routes,
slips, wharves, boats, ferries; barges, tugs, etc. (Ap-
propriate information compiled on urban areas map
and/or transportation map.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT IV Guisemeimio,
5. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Consider physical conditions affecting an urban area
and its immediate environs. Short statement, or in-
troduction, outlining salient factors, with reference to
urban areas map, and/or environs map.
a. TOPOGRAPHY ? Discuss topographic features
in principal urban areas using following subdivisions:
(1) Terrain ? Statement discussing terrain un-
derlying urban area, with special references to promi-
nent landmarks, important topographic features, such
as gullies, high points, cliffs, etc., with accompanying
compilations on urban area map and illustrated by
photographs, ground and/or aerial, stereographs, etc.
(2) Shape and dimensions ? Short statement,
amplified by statistics and reference to urban area map,
describing predominant shape of area, and its impor-
tant dimensions, length, width, area, elevations (to
determined datum); comparison with other urban
areas.
b. GEOLOGY ? Statement on types and depths of
soil, nature of rock both outcrops and subbase, caves,
etc., illustrated by geology map (where sufficient in-
formation is available) and/or reference to urban area
map and/or environs map.
C. PLAN ? Discuss plan of area as implanted on
the physical terrain. In principal urban areas, use
following subdivisions:
(1) Functional pattern ? Short statement dis-
cussing subdivision of the urban area into its constit-
uent parts such as residential, commercial, industrial,
mixed, etc., with references to urban area map, and/or
function map. This also includes open and recrea-
tional areas especially in immediate outskirts of the
area.
(2) Street pattern Statement describing basic
street pattern, or patterns in specific subsections with
references to urban area map, widths of through routes,
main and minor streets, types of pavement (illustrated
by a street paving map where feasible and photographs
of typical conditions, etc.). Widths of streets to be
determined as follows:
CAPACITY WIDTH BETWEEN CURBS
feet
12 minimum
? 21 minimum
1-lane
2-lane
3-lane
4-lane
40 to 45
(3) Firebreaks ? Statement describing actual
or possible firebreaks such as wide streets, parks,
canals, railroad alinements, etc., with reference to
urban area map and/or firebreak map, which could be
combined with the function map.
d. STRUCTURAL ? Consider predominant typos
and construction of buildings, densities of buildings
within building lines and to total area. In principal
urban areas use following subdivisions (references to
urban area map):
(1) Density ? Short statement describing pre-
dominant patterns possibly supplemented by illus-
trated table and accompanying urban area density
map. (Illustrations such as aerial photographs, aerial
stereographs, typical town block building layouts with
equivalent ground photography.)
(2) Construction ? Statement on predominant
types of construction amplified by table with references
to density map and/or urban area map. (Illustrated
by photographs, drawings, and/or diagrams.)
(3) Shelters ? Statements SS to adequacy of
underground shelter facilities; constructed and natural.
(Locations indicated by appropriate symbols on urban
area map.)
6. IMPORTANT INDUSTRY
The most important or strategic industrial plants,
such as ballbearing plants, are discussed in short state-
ments and, if sufficient information is available, perti-
nent data concerning each plant, such as ground area,
number of buildings, their construction, and floor
areas, workers, power consumption, capacities, etc., is
compiled into a table, with references to urban area
map and to function map.
On the urban area map, building layouts of plants
discussed in this paragraph will be drawn in detail if
information is available; illustrated by supplemental
aerial photographs of most important and strategic
plants. Other industries, and industrial areas are
identified by an overall area or site symbol, with, in
most important industrial centers, distinctive industry
picture symbolization.
(Example)
FIGURE 2-2. INDUSTRY IN (NAME OF TOWN)
NAME OF
PLANT
PRODUCT
AND
CAPACITY
AREA (sq. ft.),!
CONSTRUCTION
OF
BUILDINGS
Gross
Build-
ings
13all bearing
plant; 400
employees
plant,
etc.
Ball bearings
all sizes
10,000 tons
per year
50,000
25,000
1-story brick
walls saw-
tooth glass
roofs
7. WAREHOUSES AND STORAGE
Introductory statement on availability of storage in
urban area, with references to urban area map and/or
function map with information on construction of
buildings.
a. Bum( ? Most important facilities, capacities,
with locations identified on urban area map.
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
4MOMPAPARIMilim NIS STANDA1?D INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
b. COLD STORAGE ? Most important facilities for
refrigeration storage, capacities, type of refrigerator,
power consumption, etc. (Locations identified on
urban area map.)
C. PETROLEUM PRODUCTS ? Most important facili-
ties, types and capacities of tanks, etc., with locations
identified on urban area map and aerial photographs
of most important areas.
d. OPEN STORAGE ? Short statement of availa-
bility of actual or possible areas suitable for open bulk
storage, areas, capacities, etc. (Locations identified
on urban area map.)
e. EXPLOSIVES ? Short statement of available
facilities, types and construction of magazines, and
types of explosives stored, dynamites or high explo-
sives, etc. (Locations identified on urban area map.)
8. BILLETING FACILITIES
Statement outlining availability of billeting both for
personnel and for automotive transportation, with ap-
propriate references to identified points on urban area
map. Where sufficient information is available, use
the following subdivisions:
a. MILITARY BARRACKS ? Locations and capaci-
ties. On urban area map, an appropriate overall
pattern symbol is used for identification.
b. SCHOOLS ? The most important institutions
are discussed in a short statement, with reference to
identified locations on urban area map. Smaller insti-
tutions are located on urban area map by an appro-
priate symbol, and/or identified point index number.
C. HOTELS AND OTHER SUITABLE BUILDINGS ?
Statement outlining locations and capacities of most
important hotels and structures such as theaters, opera
houses, etc. (Locations identified on urban area map.)
d. OPEN AREAS Statement discussing availa-
bility of open areas, such as campgrounds, recreational
parks, vacant land, suitable both for encampments
and for automotive transport parks. (Locations iden-
tified on urban area map and/or environs map.)
9. PRINCIPAL BUILDINGS
Statement discussing the most important buildings
and institutions, especially those which are landmarks,
with locations identified on urban area map. When
information is available it is tabulated as follows:
(Example)
FIGURE 2-3. PRINCIPAL BUILDINGS
BUILD-
ING
DESCRIPTION
AREA
STORIES
TOWN
MAP
INDEX
Town Hall.
Medieval building
masonry with floors
and roof construc-
tion, slate roofing
sq. fl.
15,700 ?
3
1 d
10. HEALTH AND SANITATION FACILITIES
Short introductory statement outlining any im-
portant factors or conditions affecting health of the
urban area, its immediate vicinity and any subsection
thereof.
a. HOSPITALS AND MEDICAL FACILITIES ? Short in-
troductory statement with accompanying table.
(Example)
FIGURE 2-4. HOSPITAL FACILITIES
HOSPITAL
NO.
OF
BEDS
SPECIAL FACILITIES
TOWN
MAP
INDEX
Red Cross Hospital...
etc.
235
3 operating rooms
X-ray laboratory
7 e
b. SEWAGE DISPOSAL ? Includes any and all meth-
ods of waste disposal and storm water runoff, including
statements as to nonexistence of facilities. This item
may be, subdivided as follows:
Sanitary sewage system
Combination system
Storm sewers
Raw sewage
Uncollected (cesspools and privies)
Garbage collection and disposal
Industrial wastes disposal
NOTE Appropriate references are made to Urban area map
and/or sewerage system map (which may be a com-
bined utility map) .where sufficient data are available.
ii. WATER SUPPLY
Information discussed in this paragraph pertains in
general to developed municipal systems. However, it
is also important to discuss all available sources such
as wells, springs, rivers, etc., especially where a de-
veloped system is lacking or inadequate to serve the
total needs of the area. (Important facilities are
located on urban area map, or, if at a distance, upon
the environs map, including reservoirs, aqueducts,
Main purification or other treatment plants, etc.)
Where sufficient information is available, this para-
graph may be subdivided as follows (appropriate cross
references to Subsection 12, e, following, regarding
water supply for firefighting are also included):
it. EVALUATION OF AVAILABLE SUPPLY ? Quanti-
tative and qualitative statements, including discussion
of possible untapped sources.
b. SOURCES Short statement as to available
quantities. (Locations may be shown on either urban
area map or environs map.)
C. COLLECTION AND STORAGE
d. PURIFICATION ---- This includes statements as
potability after treatment of various sources of
(Illustrated by photographs of most outstanding structures.) supply and methods of treatment.
PA(1E 4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT IV
e. DISTRIBUTION ? Where information is avail-
able, it is compiled into a water supply map which
might be part of a combined utility map.
12. OTHER PUBLIC UTILITIES
Short statement evaluating available public utilities,
such as restoration after war damage, which is common
to all or some of the following subheadings. Refer-
ences are made to appropriate chapters and sections
in the NIS where pertinent. (Most important instal-
lations are located on urban area map.)
ar. POWER AND HEAT ? The present practice of
combining electric power production with central heat-
ing as a byproduct in many countries indicates that
these utilities be considered together. Statements as
to capacities, condition, sources of power, etc., are
supplemented by tabulated data pertinent to the par-
ticular urban area. Where available, high tension
power lines are indicated by an appropriate symbol
on the urban area map and/or utility map. Where
necessary, this paragraph is divided into the following
subparagraphs:
(1) Power lines Information on incoming or
outgoing high-voltage power lines.
(2) Power plants ? Include Hydroelectric, Ther-
mal and combined Thermal heating plants.
(3) Distribution
(Example)
FIGURE 2-5. POWER PLANTS
NAME OF PLANT
FUEL
ELEC-
TRIO
POWER
OUT-
PUT
IIEAT
TOWN
MAP
INDEX
Central power
plant
etc.
Peat, 100,000
tons per year
kw.
10,500
cu. ft.
550,000
9F
b. ICE ? Short statement regarding available fa-
cilities and buildings. (Locations identified on urban
area map.) Where necessary, data are subdivided
as follows:
(1) Natural ? Statement giving information as
to sources, methods of collection, storage, and reliability
of normal average supply with reference to climatic
variations.
(2) Manufactured Statement as to plants,
capacities, power consumption, average ice consump-
tion per person per day, etc. (Locations of plants
identified on urban area map.)
C. GAS ? (Reference to urban area map.)
(1) Natural gas ? (Reference to CHAPTER VI and
SUPPLEMENT V.) Sources, pipelines sizes and capaci-
ties in cubic feet per day.
(2) Manufactured gas ? Locations of plants,
fuel used, quantity required, maximum production
per day, capacities of storage facilities, and types of
storage.
(3) Distribution Sizes of mains, normal dis-
tribution pressure, and so on.
(4) Use ? Industrial, commercial, residential.
(5) Canned gas ? Production facilities, distribu-
tion,etc.
d. TELECOMMUNICATIONS ? (Reference to CHAP-
TER III.) Locations of principal facilities and relation
to national and international networks. (Reference to
urban area map.)
(1) Telephone
(2) Telegraph
(3) Cable ? Also across inland waterways.
(4) Radio (wireless)
o. FIREFIGHTING ? Statements of facilities for fire
fighting, equipment, buildings, and evaluation of effi-
ciency of personnel, with data as to hydrants, couplings
(especially thread sizes, right or left), hose. Also,
statement as to civilian defense organizations, if any.
13. REPAIR AND SERVICE FACILITIES
a. RAILROAD, STREETCAR, RAPID TRANSIT
b. AUTOMOTIVE, GARAGES, TRACTOR STATIONS, ETC.
C. MACHINE SHOPS AND FOUNDRIES
d. OTHER
O. MECHANICAL STANDARDS AND GAGES OTHER
THAN U.S. STANDARDS
14. WAR DAMAGE AND PLANNING
Statements as to amount and extent of war damage,
with reference to urban area map where such areas are
identified by a suitable overall pattern symbol; plans
for/and program of reconstruction of war damage;
proposals for replanning and planned expansion; zoning
(with accompanying zoning map), which may be com-
bined with density map, etc.
B-X. Name (the second most important area, etc.)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
nTNTIAL NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
Section 3. Urban Areas of Secondary Importance
(About 50 maximum?reference to SECTION 25 of
CHAPTER II and to urban area master map.)
Each secondary town illustrated by a one page, or
less, condensed tabulation, accompanied by, either
JULY 1957
on the facing page or same, page, a plan with a small-
scale location map, and/or photographs.
(Examples)
FIGURE 3-1. ANALYSIS OF (TOWN NAME)
1. VARIANT NAMES:
2. TERRAIN:
3. GEOLOGY:
4. LANDMARKS:
COORDINATES:
5. STATISTICS: Total Built-up
Population: Area (sq, miles) Elevations:
Density (per- Max:
sons per sq. Aver:
mile) Min:
Population
change:
6. FUNCTIONS:
Industrial:
Agricultural:
Military:
Raw materials:
7. MEANS OF ACCESS:
Rail:
Road:
Water:
Air:
Cross country:
8. INTERNAL TRANSPORTATION:
Streets:
Transit:
Bottlenecks:
9. HEALTH:
10. HOSPITALS:
11. BILLETING:
12. STORAGE:
13. UTILITIES:
Water Supply:
Sewerage and garbage:
Electric power:
Heat:
Gas:
Ice:
14. TELECOMMUNICATIONS:
Telephone:
Telegraph:
Radio:
15. TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION:
16. REMARKS:
Section 4. Urban Areas of Minor Importance
Consider approximately 100 to 150 towns, depending
upon area of survey. Introductory statement giving
reasons for selection of urban areas, and explanation
of following table. Illustrate by table giving urban
area map index numbers, names (with alternates),
populations (with dates), map coordinates and loca-
tions, major functions and importance, and general
remarks of important features.
PAGE 6
(Example)
FIGURE 4-1. TOWNS 10F MINOR IMPORTANCE
TOWN (Name): (Coordinates); population; size, etc.
Transportation:
Functions and Importance:
Utilities:
Remarks:
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT IV
Section 5. Gazetteer of Urban Areas
Consists of an alphabetical list of the principal, secondary, and minor urban areas as follows:
(Example)
GAZETTEER OF TOWNS
NAME
(ALTERNATE
NAMES)
COORDI-
NATES
TOWN MAP
IMPORTANCE
Index
No.
Grid
coordi-
nates
ALPHA (Alfor)...
.... BETA, etc.
0 I
89 50
100 50
40
A 7
Transportation
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT V
PETROLEUM
Section 1 Exploration and Development
Section 2 Production
Section 3 Refining and Processing
Section 4 Transportation
Section 5 Equipment and Materials
Section 6 Requirements and Supply
Section 7 Economic and Political
Section 8 Natural Gas
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Supplement V- Petroleum
OUTLINE
SECTION 1. EXPLORATION AND DEVELOPMENT
A General
B. Geology
C. Exploration
1. Summary
2. Geological and geophysical exploratory
activities
3. Exploratory drilling accomplishments
4. Exploratory results to date
5. Evaluation of exploratory develop-
ment and research methods
6. Significant factors affecting past, pres-
ent, and future exploration
7. Concessions data
D. Reserves
1. Summary
2. Crude
3. Natural gas liquids
4. Ownership of reserves
5. Evaluation of methods used in esti-
mating reserves
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 2. PRODUCTION
A. General
B. Historical background
C. Location of fields and wells
D. Crude production
1. Output and disposition by fields and
by companies
2. Present and estimated productive ca-
pacity
3. Production activity required to obtain
reported forward production esti-
mates
4. Data on individual fields
5. Maintenance and repair problems
6. Vulnerability of producing facilities
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 3. REFINING AND PROCESSING
A.
B.
General
Crude refineries
1. Brief historical sketch
2. Crude or charge stock
3. General descriptive processing pattern
C.
D.
E.
4. Refinery storage for crude and refined
products
5. Sources, quantities, and supplies of
power, fuel, water, chemicals
6. Refinery statistics
7. Future plans for expansion, conversion
or reduction of capacity
8. Vulnerability of facilities
Natural gas liquids processing plants
Substitute liquid fuels plants
Comments on principal sources
SECTION 4. TRANSPORTATION
A. General
B. Transport facilities
1. Pipeline systems
2. Railroad
3. Inland waterways
4. Ocean tankers
C. Terminal facilities, land and marine
1. Storage of crude and products
2. Loading and handling facilities for
crude and products
3. Materials handling facilities
4. Administration and operation, indi-
cating ownership, government con-
trol and regulation
D. Vulnerability of facilities relating to trans-
portation
Comments on principal sources
E.

SECTION 5.
A.
B.
C.
D.
SECTION 6.
A.
B.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
General
Requirements
1. Exploration
2. Production
3. Refining and processing
4. Transportation, storage, and terminals
Availability
1. Local
2. Imported
Comments on principal sources
REQUIREMENTS AND SUPPLY
General
Overall petroleum supply and demand
balance
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
C. Crude requirements, by quantity and
type
1. For refineries
2. Exported
D. Products requirements, by quantity and
type
1. Civilian
2. Military
3. Export
Supply, by quantity and type
1. Crude
2. Products
Stockpiles of crude and products in rela-
tion to requirements
Factors affecting requirements and supply
1. Geographic ?
2. Economic and political
Degree of self-sufficiency or import de-
pendence for requirements, analyzing
specialized types of crude or products
required
Probable future demand and supply situ-
ation
Comments on principal sources
E.
F.
G.
I.
J.
SECTION 7.
A.
B.
C.
PAGE 2
ECONOMIC AND POLITICAL
General
Economic
1. Labor force
2. Ownership and finance
Laws and regulations
1. Basic laws
2. Other pertinent legislation
JULY 1957
D. Evaluation of programs, policies, attitudes
1. Governmental
2. Corporate
E. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 8. NATURAL GAS
A. General
B. Importance to domestic economy
C. Sources
D. Resources
1. Location
2. Reserves
E. Characteristics
F. Production
1. By fields and companies
2. Drilling and production problems
3. Gathering, field storage, and power
facilities
4. Geographic factors affecting production
5. Evaluation of field development, tech-
nology and research
6. Productive capacity of the fields
G. Gas utilization and quantities consumed
1. Industrial and commercial
2. Residential
3. Repressuring of oil fields
4. As fuel in oil and gas fields
5. For production of natural gas liquids
6. Flared
H. Transportation
I. Comments on principal sources
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT V
OUTLINE GUIDE
The :following outline guide indicates substance an,d general arrange-
ment. In preparation, and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
'Vote for publication: This Supplement contains more compre-
hensive and detailed treatment of material discussed in SECTION 62,
Section 1. Exploration and Development
A. General
B. Geology
1) General geology of the area
2) Geological classification of the area as to prospects
a) Proven
b) Favorable
e) Possible
d) Unfavorable
3) Evaluation of the adequacy of geological coverage
and of technology and research
C. Exploration
1. SUMMARY
2. GEOLOGICAL AND GEOPHYSICAL EX-
PLORATORY ACTIVITIES
3. EXPLORATORY DRILLING ACCOMPLISH-
MENTS
a. DATA ON EXPLORATORY WELLS
b. METHODS OF SELECTING DRILL SITES
4. EXPLORATORY RESULTS TO DATE
a. NEW FIELDS
b. FIELD EXTENSIONS
C. NECESSITY FOR ADDITIONAL EXPLORATION
5. EVALUATION OF EXPLORATORY DE-
VELOPMENT AND RESEARCH METHODS
6. SIGNIFICANT FACTORS AFFECTING
PAST, PRESENT, AND FUTURE EXPLORA-
TION
7. CONCESSIONS DATA
a. EXPLOITATION CONCESSIONS IN FORCE
b. EXPLORATION CONCESSIONS IN FORCE
C. CONCESSIONAIRES OPERATING IN THE AREA
d. BRIEF HISTORY AND EVALUATION OF OVERALL
CONCESSIONS DEVELOPMENT TO DATE
D. Reserves
1. SUMMARY
2. CRUDE
ft. PROVEN, BY FIELD
b. PROBABLE
C. CHARACTERISTICS OF PROVEN RESERVES
3. NATURAL GAS LIQUIDS
a. PROVEN, BY FIELDS
b. PROBABLE
C. CHARACTERISTICS OF PROVEN RESERVES
4. OWNERSHIP OF RESERVES
a. NATIONALIZED
b. PRIVATELY OWNED
5. EVALUATION OF METHODS USED IN
ESTIMATING RESERVES
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD IN
Section 2. Production
A. General
B. Historical background
C. Location of fields and wells
D. Crude production
1. OUTPUT AND DISPOSITION BY FIELDS
AND BY COMPANIES
2. PRESENT AND ESTIMATED PRODUCTIVE
CAPACITY (By fields, within MER and maximum)
3. PRODUCTION ACTIVITY REQUIRED TO
OBTAIN REPORTED FORWARD PRODUCTION
ESTIMATES
4. DATA ON INDIVIDUAL FIELDS
a. GEOLOGICAL FEATURES
b. FIELD CHARACTERISTICS
(1) Productive acreage
(2) Producing zones
(3) Reservoir characteristics
(4) Spacing pattern
C. CRUDE CHARACTERISTICS
d. DRILLING ACTIVITY AND WELL PERFORMANCE
JULY 1957
C. EVALUATION OF DEVELOPMENT PRACTICES
(1) Drilling and production, problems
(2) Conservation and secondary recovery
(3) Treating and stabilization
f. GATHERING, FIE LD STORAGE; AND POWER FA-
CILITIES
g. GEOGRAPHIC FACTORS AFFECTING PRODUCTION
h. EVALUATION OF FIELD DEVELOPMENT, TECH-
NOLOGY, RESEARCH
REPORTED FORWARD PRODUCTION ESTIMATE AND
PRODUCTIVE ACTIVITY REQUIRED
5. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR PROBLEMS
6. VULNERABILITY OF PRODUCING FACILI-
TIES
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 3. Refining and Processing
A. General
B. Crude refineries
1. BRIEF HISTORICAL SKETCH
Including name, location, type, capacity, owner-
ship, operator, and evaluation of operating efifi.Oiency.
2. CRUDE OR CHARGE STOCK
Including sources, means of transport, and char-
acteristics.
3. GENERAL DESCRIPTIVE PROCESSING
PATTERN
Including, where feasible or available, plant layout
and flow diagrams, aerial and ground photographs.
a. FLEXIBILITY TO VARY YIELDS OR PRODUCE
OTHER PRODUCTS
PAGE 4
b. COMPLEMENTARY TO OR INTERDEPENDENCE
UPON OTHER REFINERIES
C. EVALUATION OP MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
PROBLEMS
d. EVALUATION OF EFFICIENCY WITH RESPECT TO
COMPETENCE OF MANAGEMENT, TECHNICAL DIRECTION
AND SKILLED LAB OR
C. STATUS AND EVALUATION OF TECHNOLOGY AND
RESEARCH
4. REFINERY STORAGE FOR CRUDE AND
REFINED PRODUCTS
Indicate number, bype, capacity and location of the
tanks.
5. SOURCES, QUANTITIES, AND SUPPLIES
OF POWER, FUEL, WATER, CHEMICALS
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT V
6. REFINERY STATISTICS
a. THROUGHPUT AND PRODUCT YIELDS ? Includ-
ing a description of petrochemical and other specialty
products manufacture.
b. PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS AND QUALITY
C. DISPOSITION OF PRODUCTS BY TYPE AND QUAN-
TITY
7. FUTURE PLANS FOR EXPANSION, CON-
VERSION OR REDUCTION OF CAPACITY
8. VULNERABILITY OF FACILITIES
C. Natural gas liquids processing plants
Where natural gas liquids plants are a present or
potential factor in an area, a detailed description is
given similar in scope and treatment to that given to
refineries under B, above.
D. Substitute liquid fuels plants
In those few countries where production of substi-
tute liquid fuels is of potential or major significance,
detailed treatment is given, similar in scope to that
given to refineries under B, above, including an analy-
sis of resources and availability of the raw materials.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 4. Transportation
A. General
B. Transport facilities
1. PIPELINE SYSTEMS
a. LOCATION OF PIPELINES AND PUMP STATIONS ?
With reference to producing fields, refineries, and
terminals.
b. GEOGRAPHIC
CONSIDERATIONS
C. DESCRIPTION
(1) Pipelines
(2) Pump stations
d. CAPACITIES ? Types of crude and products
transported. Evaluation of adequacy of present fa-
cilities.
0. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR PROBLEMS
f. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
g. ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATION, INDICATING
OWNERSHIP, GOVERNMENT CONTROL AND REGULATION
2. RAILROAD
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER III, Trans-
portation and Telecommunications, where rail trans-
port is an important factor in crude and product move-
ments, indicate generally:
ft. LOCATION AND BRIEF DESCRIPTION
b. NUMBER AND CAPACITY OF TANK CARS
? C. ADEQUACY OF RAILROAD FACILITIES TO HANDLE
PRESENT AND ANTICIPATED CRUDE AND PRODUCTS
MOVEMENT
d. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
0. ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATION, INDICATING
OWNERSHIP, GOVERNMENT CONTROL AND REGULATION
3. INLAND WATERWAYS
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER III, Trans-
portation and Telecommunications, where inland water-
way transport is an important factor in crude and
products movements, indicate generally:
a. LO CATION AND GENERAL DESCRIPTION
b. NUMBER AND CAPACITY OF MARINE TRANSPORT
FACILITIES EMPLOYED (TANKERS AND BARGES)
C. ADEQUACY OF MARINE FACILITIES TO HANDLE
PRESENT OR ANTICIPATED MOVEMENT OF CRUDE AND
PRODUCTS
d. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
e. ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATION, INCLUDING
OWNERSHIP, GOVERNMENT CONTROL AND REGULATION
4. OCEAN TANKERS
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER III, Trans-
portation and Telecommunications, where ocean trans-
port is an important factor in crude and products
movement, indicate: Number, type, and quantity of
tanker movements by terminals.
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 :
NIS STANDARD
C. Terminal facilities, land and marine
With appropriate reference to CIIAPTER III, Trans-
portation and Telecommunications, indicate:
I. STORAGE OF CRUDE AND PRODUCTS
a. LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
b. ADEQUACY OF PRESENT FACILITIES
C. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
2. LOADING AND HANDLING FACILITIES
FOR CRUDE AND PRODUCTS
a. LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
b. THROUGHPUT CAPACITY AND LOADING RATES
C. ADEQUACY OF PRESENT FACILITIES
d. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
3. MATERIALS HANDLING FACILITIES
a. LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION
A. General
CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
b. ADEQUACY OF PRESENT FACILITIES
C. PROBABLE DEVELOPMENTS
4. ADMINISTRATION AND OPERATION, IN-
DICATING OWNERSHIP, GOVERNMENT CON-
TROL AND REGULATION
D. Vulnerability of facilities relating to
transportation
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 5. Equipment and Materials
Degree of self-sufficiency or import dependence for
equipment and supplies for the petroleum industry.
B. Requirements
1. EXPLORATION
2. PRODUCTION
3. REFINING AND PROCESSING
4. TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE, AND TER-
MINALS
PAGE
C. Availability
1. LOCAL
2. IMPORTED
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT V
Section 6. Requirements and Supply
A. General
B. Overall petroleum supply and demand
balance
C. Crude requirements, by quantity and type
1. FOR REFINERIES
2. EXPORTED
a. BY PORT OF EXIT
b. BY COUNTRY OF DESTINATION
C. MEANS OF TRANSPORT
D. Products requirements, by quantity and
type
1. CIVILIAN
a. ONSHORE
b. BUNKER LIFTINGS
C. REFINERY FUEL CONSUMPTION AND LOSSES
2. MILITARY
. FOR CONSUMPTION IN THE AREA
b. FOR SHIPMENT OVERSEAS
3. EXPORT
a. BY PORT OF EXIT
b. BY COUNTRY OF DESTINATION
C. MEANS OF TRANSPORT
E. Supply, by quantity and type
1. CRUDE
a. DOMESTIC
b. I MP ORT
(1) By port of entry
(2) By country of source
(3) Means of transport
2. PRODUCTS
R. DOMESTIC
b. IMPORT
(1) By port of entry
(2) By country of source
(3) Means of transport
rinwr,r11.1,NT,PT T
F. Stockpiles of crude and products in rela-
tion to requirements
G. Factors affecting requirements and
supply
1. GEOGRAPHIC
2. ECONOMIC AND POLITICAL
a. DOMESTIC
? b. INTERNATIONAL
H. Degree of self-sufficiency or import de-
pendence for requirements, analyzing special-
ized types of crude or products required
I. Probable future demand and supply sit-
uation
J. Comments on principal sources -
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Section 7. Economic and Political
A. General
B. Economic
1. LABOR FORCE
a. AVAILABILITY, RELATIVE IMPORTANCE, AND REL-
ATIVE EFFICIENCY OF THE PETROLEUM LABOR FORCE
b. LABOR RELATIONS AND ORGANIZATION
l) General development and present status of
labor organizations
(2) General pattern of wages, working conditions,
and special agreements
2. OWNERSHIP AND FINANCE
a. OWNERSHIP CHARACTERISTICS
(1) Nationality, financial control, and corporate
organization
(2) Factors influencing local participation, in the
industry
(3) Local management
b. FINANCIAL
(1) Pattern of earnings and return on capital
(2) Significant factors such as depletion policies,
reinvestment of earnings
(3) Effects of governmental regulations on dispo-
sition of earnings and capital
PAGE 8
C. Laws and regulations
With appropriate reference to CHAPTER V, Political.
1. BASIC LAWS
R. OWNERSHIP OF SUBSOIL
b. RIGIITS OR REST RICTIONS ON OPERATORS, NA-
TIONAL AND FOREIGN
C. GRANTING OF MONOPOLIES
d. ORGANIZATION OF COMPANIES
O. PARTICIPATION OF NATIONALS IN EMPLOYMENT,
MANAGEMENT AND FINANCIAL CONTROL
2. OTHER PERTINENT LEGISLATION
D. Evaluation of programs, policies, attitudes
1. GOVERNMENTAL
2. CORPORATE
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide all evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficien 1 or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
'JOiNr IJJflAlN 11,-1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT V ?TM,"Minna
Section 8. Natural Gas
A. General
B. Importance to domestic economy
C. Sources
D. Resources
1. LOCATION
2. RESERVES
E. Characteristics
F. Production
1. BY FIELDS AND BY COMPANIES
2. DRILLING AND PRODUCTION PROBLEMS
3. GATHERING, FIELD STORAGE, AND
POWER FACILITIES
4. GEOGRAPHIC FACTORS AFFECTING PRO-
DUCTION
5. EVALUATION OF FIELD DEVELOPMENT,
TECHNOLOGY AND RESEARCH
6. PRODUCTIVE CAPACITY OF THE FIELDS
G. Gas utilization and quantities consumed
1. INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL
R. FUEL
b. CHEMICALS MANUFACTURE
2. RESIDENTIAL
3. REPRESSURING OF OIL FIELDS
4. AS FUEL IN OIL AND GAS FIELDS
5. FOR PRODUCTION OF NATURAL GAS
LIQUIDS
6. FLARED
H. Transportation
I. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLEMENT VI
COMMUNISM
Section 1 General
Section 2 Historical Setting
Section 3 Party Organization
Section 4 Role in National Political Life
Section 5 Infiltration of Government, Police, and
Armed Forces
Section 6 Penetration of Labor and Agrarian Movements
Section 7 Infiltration and Exploitation of
Miscellaneous Groups
Section 8 Espionage, Sabotage, and Related Activities
Section 9 Personalities
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Supplement VI - Communism
OUTLINE
SECTION 1.
SECTION 2.
GENERAL
HISTORICAL SETTING
D.
E.
SECTION 6.
Armed forces
Comments on principal sources
PENETRATION OF LABOR AND AGRARIAN
SECTION 3.
PARTY ORGANIZATION (OR, AS APPLICABLE,
THE DIRECTING AGENCY WITHIN THE
MOVEMENTS
COUNTRY)
A.
Strategy of penetration
B.
Penetration of industrial labor
A.
Structure
C.
Mobilization of agrarian elements
B.
Leadership
D.
Comments on principal sources
C.
Membership
1. Composition
2. Discipline and training
SECTION 7.
INFILTRATION AND EXPLOITATION OF MIS-
D.
Finances
CELLANEOUS GROUPS
E.
Propaganda media
A.
Target groups
F.
Comments on principal sources
B.
Techniques
C.
Front organizations
SECTION 4.
ROLE IN NATIONAL POLITICAL LIFE
D.
Comments on principal sources
A.
Extent of role
B.
Strategy
SECTION 8.
ESPIONAGE, SABOTAGE, AND RELATED Ac-
C.
Relations with non-Communist parties
TIVITIES
D.
Role in elections
A.
Nature and importance
E.
Parliamentary role
B.
Techniques
F.
Comments on principal sources
C.
Operations
D.
Comments on principal sources
SECTION
INFILTRATION OF GOVERNMENT, POLICE,
AND ARMED FORCES
SECTION 9.
PERSONALITIES
A.
Central government
B.
Regional and local administrations
A.
General
C.
Police and counterintelligence organiza-
B.
Biographies in alphabetical order
tions
C.
Comments on principal sources
PAGE
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
This Outline Guide has been designed for a country
outside the Communist bloc where 1) there is a func-
tioning Communist Party, and 2) there is an elected
legislature with Communist Party representation either
direct or indirect (through a captive party organiza-
tion).
Considerable deviation from and modification of this
outline structure will be necessary where the country
concerned, 1) has no effective national Communist
Party and the Soviet or satellite diplomatic representa-
tives direct Communist activities, or 2) has no popu-
larly-elected legislative bodies, or 3) offers little or no
opportunity for Communist or Communist-controlled
political parties to operate within a parliamentary
framework. Such modification should be made in
agreement with CIA/OBI in the early stages of pro-
duction.
Section 1. General
This Section provides an appropriate approach to
the material presented in the remainder of the Supple-
ment. This Section summarizes only the outstanding
impacts of communism within the country. The
details are reserved for discussion in subsequent Sec-
tions.
It discusses the role of the Communist Party in terms
of the country's place in Soviet strategy in various
periods and in terms of indigenous historical, social,
political, and economic forces, trends, institutions, and
attitudes that facilitate or obstruct Communist opera-
tions. It defines long- and short-range Communist ob-
jectives in the area and summarizes the strategy and
tactics employed for the achievement of these objec-
tives, analyzing the principal propaganda themes and
tactics employed. The Section includes an examina-
PAGE 2
tion of the evidence bearing on the Party's vulnerabili-
ties and evidence of its ability to achieve its long- and
short-range aims in the area?differentiating between
its capacity for exploiting legitimate political channels
and its capacity ?for subversive activity?in terms of:
human, physical, and organizational resources; solidar-
ity; flexibility; ability to identify and exploit important
grievances and muster indigenous support on specific
issues and for its general program; and the degree and
nature of present and potential support from Com-
munist bloc countries and international Communist
organizations. In the analysis of the Party's vulnera-
bilities, consideration is given to the Party's own views
of its principal weaknesses, and the nature of its efforts
to correct them.
"11111.101draiii.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT VI
Section 2. Historical Setting
This Section provides an historical treatment of the
origins and development of the Communist Party but
only to the extent necessary for analyzing the strength
and cohesion of the Party, its ability to resist suppres-
sion and capitalize on favorable circumstances, its
doctrinal and operational flexibility, its principal in-
digenous sources of strength and weakness, and the
degree to which it has been dependent upon Soviet or
other forms of foreign or international support. It
describes the circumstances under which the Party was
founded, including an account of: its antecedents; the
persons and groups, domestic and foreign, principally
A. Structure
responsible for its organizations; and the effects of its
establishment on other left-wing groups. The princi-
pal events in the history of the Party and its principal
shifts in strategy are analyzed in terms of international
and domestic setting in which they occurred, the intra-
Party controversies evoked, trends revealed, difficulties
encountered, and successes achieved. Particular stress
is laid on the speed and degree of willingness with which
the Party has responded to changes in policy laid down
by the U.S.S.R. or Communist China or in the inter-
national line and the degree to which it has been able
to adapt the international line to its local requirements.
Section 3. Party Organization
(Or, as applicable, The Directing Agency within the Country)
This Subsection presents a schematic treatment of
Party structure at all levels, describing channels of
authority, principal area and functional divisions, in-
cluding those dealing with propaganda and front group
activities, important changes that have occurred during
the Party's recent history, and significant departures
from normal Communist patterns. In this and the
following Subsections for countries where more than
one Communist Party exists because of factional differ-
ences (e.g., Egypt, Burma), or because an important
national minority has its own Party (e.g., Thailand),
the information called for is provided separately for
each party.
B. Leadership
This Subsection discusses Party leadership in general
in terms of its national and social origins, cohesion, ex-
perience, flexibility, types of leaders who have had
greatest success within the Party, and acceptability to
the general public.
C. Membership
1. COMPOSITION
This Subsection describes methods of recruiting and
selecting members, past and present: estimate the size
of Party membership, differentiating where possible
between overt and covert membership and between
fringe and hard-core elements; indicate national dis-
tribution; and discuss principal periods of membership
growth or decline. Characteristics of the Party mem-
bership are discussed in terms of national or racial and
social origin, age, sex, occupational distribution, level
of education and party training, cohesion, militancy,
and loyalty. Graphic illustration may be employed
for this purpose.
2. DISCIPLINE AND TRAINING
this Subsection describes and evaluates Party tech-
niques for disciplining and training members, covering
important special campaigns as well as routine meas-
ures. Training of local Party members in foreign
schools and use of foreign instructors and materials in
local schools are also described where appropriate. All
known Party schools are listed, with data as to location,
size, facilities, principal personnel, curriculum, and
special purposes.
D. Finances
This Subsection discusses Party finances in terms of
sources of funds (including dues, local and foreign con-
tributions, and legal and illegal Party enterprises) and
nature and extent of principal expenditure. Banking
and disbursing arrangements of the Party are described,
as well as any known types of financial investment.
E. Propaganda media
This Subsection discusses the Party publication
program?national and local?describing its general
size, scope, nature, and distribution channels, and esti-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
410111MMRiiiii NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
mating extent of circulation and influence within and
outside the Party. Publishing facilities utilized by the
Party are described in terms of ownership, personnel,
location, capacity, state of finances, and equipment.
All known Party daily and periodical publications are
listed, preferably in tabular form, with data as to place
of publication, principal personnel, frequency of publica-
tion, size, circulation, specialized purpose, and empha-
sized propaganda themes. Nonperiodical publications,
e.g., books, pamphlets, leaflets, also are discussed
in terms of agencies of issuance, principal types, and
impact. Other principal media utilized by the Party
in the area receive similar treatment. Foreign Com-
munist media in the area are described in terms of
types, countries of origin, methods of importation and
A. Extent of role
distribution, and estimated extent of audience reader-
ship and influence.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 4. Role in National Political Life
This Subsection describes the nature, extent, and
effectiveness of efforts to utilize the political machinery
and the major political forces and drives of the country
concerned to serve Communist ends. It provides a
general estimate of the role of the local Communist
Party in national politics, leaving details as to Party
strategy, relations with other parties, etc., to be cov-
ered in the Subsections below. It describes the role
and evaluates the effectiveness of Soviet bloc diplo-
matic, economic, military or other pressure in influenc-
ing national political leadership and policies, in affecting
popular political attitudes, and in protecting or rein-
forcing the local Communist Party.
B. Strategy
This Subsection describes the Communist Party's
concept of its role as a political party in the conven-
tional sense including: the weight that the Party has
given to parliamentary activity within its total strategy;
the concepts that have governed the Party's relations
with other political parties; the disputes that have
arisen within the Party over the importance to be
assigned to and the strategy to be employed in parlia-
mentary activities; and an evaluation of the effective-
ness of the Party's strategy. In countries where the
Communist Party is illegal but functions in the parlia-
mentary sphere through a front or captive party, the
special strategic problems involved are discussed.
C. Relations with non-Communist parties
This Subsection describes the tactics employed by
the Communists in relation to other political parties;
indicate the extent to which they have been able to
PAGE 4
penetrate, capture, influence, or make formal or in-
formal alliances with other parties, identifying those
parties that have been particularly susceptible to Com-
munist overtures; describe the organizational forms
assumed by Communist Party alliances with other
parties; and evaluate the factors that have led non-
Communist parties to ally themselves with the Com-
munists, distinguishing between temporary and long-
term factors.
D. Role in elections
This Subsection describes the participation of the
Communist Party in national and, if significant, local
election campaigns. It describes the methods by which
the Party organizes itself to conduct election campaigns;
provisions of the election laws that operate to the par-
ticular advantage or disadvantage of the Communist
Party; techniques employed by the Communists to
circumvent election regulations; and electioneering
practices peculiar to the Communist Party. It dis-
cusses the trends in and distribution of voting strength
of the Party in significant elections, where possible
using maps to show the distribution of Party strength
and tables to compare the Party's voting strength with
that of major parties and with that of other left-wing
parties.
E. Parliamentary role
This Subsection describes the organizations estab-
lished by the Party for purposes of parliamentary
participation, the principal devices employed by the
Party to exploit its parliamentary position, and the
degree to which the Party has been able to influence
national policy by virtue of its parliamentary position.
Members of the Party who have played a conspicuous
role in the parliamentary sphere are identified and
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 SUPPLEMENT VI
described. Where significant, the Party's role in local
bodies is similarly considered.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source. ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
UON1r1v.uiN 1.1?Lu
the user of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 5. Infiltration of Government, Police, and Armed Forces
A. Central government
This Subsection describes and evaluates the methods
and extent of Communist infiltration of the executive
agencies of the national government, including the
civil service and the various ministries or departments,
particularly those entrusted with foreign affairs, na-
tional defense, internal security, and intelligence.
B. Regional and local administrations
This Subsection describes and evaluates the extent
of Communist infiltration and influence in regional and
local administrations.
C. Police and counterintelligence organiza-
tions
This Subsection describes and evaluates the extent
of Communist infiltration and influence in the police
and counterintelligence services of the nation.
D. Armed forces
This Subsection describes and evaluates the extent
of Communist infiltration and influence in the armed
forces as a whole and for each military service sepa-
rately, including reserves.
E. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
the user of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 6. Penetration of Labor and Agrarian Movements
A. Strategy of penetration
This Subsection traces the development of Com-
munist influence 1) in the industrial labor movement
and 2) among the rural working class, in terms of the
adjustments in Marxist-Leninist doctrine employed to
suit the prevailing economic, social, and political pat-
tern in the area. The extent to which traditional prac-
tices or prevailing conditions have favored or obstructed
the propagation of Communist ideology among these
elements of the population is indicated.
B. Penetration of industrial labor
This Subsection describes and evaluates the methods
used to attract members and establish mass support
for the Communist Party, or for its general objectives,
among industrial workers. It discusses the tactics
employed to infiltrate and control trade unions and
other associations or institutions?exclusive of political
parties?representing the interests of labor (factory
councils, mutual benefit societies, and the like), and
evaluates the extent, of the Communist propaganda
effort directed specifically at organized labor, indicating
the types of resources employed (e.g., factory news-
papers), and emphasizing the tactics employed to
weaken or destroy anti-Communist influence among
industrial workers. The role of propaganda directed
against the United States and its allies in these opera-
tions is evaluated. The degree to which the Com-
munists have been able to utilize their position in the
labor movement to promote or manipulate strikes and
slowdowns is analyzed, and the principal occasions on
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
which Communist-inspired labor disturbances have
occurred are described in terms of background, osten-
sible causes, Communist motives, methods employed,
and effects. The Subsection indicates the extent of
Communist penetration of labor organizations, listing
trade unions and auxiliary bodies known to be Com-
munist-dominated and indicating their relative im-
portance, not only within organized labor but the labor
force generally; wherever feasible, data on membership,
leadership, and sources of support will be presented in
tabular form. Communist organizational channels in-
cluding those of international organizations such as
WFTU and key personnel concerned with the infiltra-
tion or propagandizing of labor elements will be
identified.
C. Mobilization of agrarian elements
This Subsection describes the mechanics of Com-
munist penetration and indoctrination of rural workers
in the area. It discusses the tactics employed to infil-
trate and control associations or institutions, other than
political parties, representing the interests of rural
workers, identifying the prevalent forms of Communist
organizational pressure (including information re-
sources) and the dominant propaganda themes and
appeals employed to mobilize mass support. An
evaluation is made of the role of anti-U.S. and anti-
Western propaganda in these operations. The tech-
niques used to recruit and train Communist cadres
among the rural populatibn are discussed and rural
labor unions and their auxiliaries known to be Com-
munist-dominated are listed; wherever feasible, data
on membership, leadership, and sources of support are
presented in tabular form. The extent of Communist
influence among the various strata of the agrarian
society is indicated, with identification of the Com-
munist organizational channels and key personnel con-
cerned. Wherever feasible, data are presented in
tabular or graphic form (e.g., geographic distribution
patterns).
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
the user of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 7. Infiltration and Exploitation of Miscellaneous Groups
A. Target groups
This Subsection describes and evaluates the extent
of Communist infiltration of miscellaneous target
groups among the population?e.g., youth; teachers
and educators; intellectuals; journalists and others
engaged in the mass media field; war veterans (coordi-
nate with SECTION 5, Subsection D, under military
reserves); scientists; members of other professions; inde-
pendent artisans and entrepreneurs; racial and religious
minorities. The degree of direct and indirect Com-
munist influence within each of the target groups dis-
cussed is indicated together with the factors which
have made them susceptible to Communist infiltration
and indoctrination. Where feasible, these factors are
covered in a single discussion. The role of anti-U.S.
and anti-Western sentiment is evaluated as a factor of
susceptibility. Communist organizational channels and
key personnel concerned are identified and the principal
objectives of infiltration involved in the case of each
group are analyzed.
PAGE 6
B. Techniques
This Subsection summarizes the methods employed
by the Communist Party in the area to infiltrate, organ-
ize, and manipulate target elements. The effectiveness
of these methods is evaluated in terms of the social,
political, and psychological climate of the area; any
significant adaptations of Communist dogma or stand-
ard propaganda themes to local conditions are de-
scribed; and the relative importance of anti-U.S. and
anti-Western propaganda in the context of these opera-
tions is indicated.
C. Front organizations
This Subsection identifies important organizations
infiltrated and exploited as vehicles or amplifiers of
Communist propaganda?e.g., civic reform groups;
pacifist societies; veterans organizations; professional
and cultural associations; youth and women's organi-
zations. For each group discussed, the factors of sus-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 :
JULY 1957 SUPPLEM
ceptibility to Communist manipulation will be analyzed,
including the role of anti-U.S. and anti-Western senti-
ment; where feasible, these are covered in a single dis-
cussion. The degree of Communist success in con-
cealing the mechanics of front group operations from
the public is evaluated. In addition all organizations
known to be Communist-dominated are listed in tabular
form, describing designated purpose, leadership, mem-
bership, information and publicity resources, sources
of financial support, international front affiliations, and
Communist organizational channels concerned. Front
organizations established and staffed by the Com-
munist Party apparatus in the area are listed sepa-
rately, in tabular form, describing the assigned mission
and information resources in each case and identifying
CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ENT VI
the organizational channels, international front affilia-
tions, and key personnel concerned.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
the user of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
Section 8. Espionage, Sabotage, and Related Activities
A. Nature and importance
This Subsection confines itself to a general discussion
of the extent and scope of Communist espionage,
sabotage, incitation to violence, and paramilitary and
insurrectionary activities, and spotting, recruiting, in-
vestigating, or other functions in support of such
activities. The Party's potential for carrying on these
activities is assessed in terms of the degree to which it
has been able to penetrate the armed forces, the ma-
chinery of government, essential industries, the means
of transportation and communication, etc.; this assess-
ment draws upon, but does not repeat in detail, ma-
terial presented in SECTIONS 4, 5, 6, and 7. The
Party's ability to utilize the groups under its influence
or control to create major threats to public order is
similarly assessed on the basis of material presented in
preceding Sections. Indicate the extent to which the
above-mentioned types of Communist activities are
directed at the armed forces and/or civilian officials
representing the United States or its allies in the area.
B. Techniques
This Subsection describes the techniques employed
by the Communists in connection with the activities
listed above, including the Communist organizational
channels concerned; methods of recruiting, training,
and utilizing agents?Communist and non-Communist;
utilization of foreign Communist agents; connections
with foreign networks.
C. Operations
This Subsection describes in detail Communist oper-
ations in the fields of espionage, sabotage, incitation to
violence, and paramilitary and insurrectionary activi-
ties, evaluating the effectiveness of each type of ac-
tivity. In discussing each type of operation, identify
the leaders and describe the organization, methods,
relationship to the Communist Party structure, and
sources of support, supplementing as needed the
information presented in Subsection B.
D. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
the user of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby pro-
vide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Section 9. Personalities
A. General
Common characteristics of the personalities selected
for treatment are briefly pointed out, particularly with
reference to political affiliation, origin, education and
training, experience, religion, and economic and social
status. The nature and social status of the groups or
institutions through which these personalities rose to
positions of influence in the Communist Party or other
organization treated in this Supplement are considered
to the minimum extent required for understanding the
influence of the individuals covered. It is anticipated
that only in rare cases will a biography appear in this
Supplement as well as in Key Personalities or SECTION 7
of the studies on International Communism. How-
ever, if a member of the Communist movement is of
sufficient significance on the national scene to be cov-
ered in Key Personalities his biography, for ease of
reference, also appears in SUPPLEMENT VI. Further-
more, if a member of the Communist movement is also
a key figure in an international organization, his biog-
raphy appears in the appropriate international organi-
zation study as well as in SUPPLEMENT VI.
B. Biographies in alphabetical order
Biographies are concise presentations of career data,
attitudes, and personality traits of leaders or otherwise
influential individuals. Repetition of identical back-
ground information in several biographies is avoided by
cross referencing. Sketches open with a brief state-
ment of the subject's position in his field, and then cover
the following points (not necessarily in the order given) :
1) evaluation of subject's official or professional status
and his influence and .capabilities; 2) important steps
PAG L 8
in occupational history or career, travels abroad, and
attendance at international conferences, with dates;
3) important family, professional, or social connections;
4) attitudes toward other countries, especially the
United States and the U.S.S.R., and toward inter-
national organizations and important national and
international problems, including communism and
Western principles of democracy; 5) actual or potential
threats to career.
Biographic information also briefly refers to the fol-
lowing: 1) place and date of birth; 2) family background,
national origin, and present family; 3) group affiliation
(class, ethnic, or other); 4) education; 5) religious back-
ground and extent of participation in religious activity;
6) general statement of any reading and listening habits
or personal interests that might have a bearing on
accessibility; 7) physical or mental characteristics; and
8) publications, languages, honors, or other accomplish-
ments. Subject's character and personality are de-
scribed, as revealed by significant attitudes, behavior,
social activities and bearing toward equals and others.
C. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source ma-
terial used in preparing the Section and thereby inform
the User of the general credibility to be accorded the
intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used
are indicated.
silmmimmet,
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
KEY PERSONALITIES
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARYARF2roved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
wwwwwwww#
Key Personalities
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general ar-
rangement. Key Personalities is not divided into Sections and
uses no number or letter designations for the headings; otherwise,
manuscripts are prepared and typed as shown in the NIS Editorial
Instructions.
Key Personalities is designed to provide background
information on the most influential people in the given
NIS Area and some understanding of the personality
of each that can aid in making an effective approach
to him or in anticipating his reactions in a given situa-
tion. Each Key Personalities publication is intended
to be used as a companion volume to various other
elements of the NIS, but it may serve also as an inde-
pendent reference work. Biographies are grouped
alphabetically and cover leaders in the following fields:
political, cultural, economic, armed forces, scientific
and technical. The biographies are pi.eceded by a
Preface, Introduction, and a brief Institutional Direc-
tory, accompanied by certain graphic aids, as appro-
priate, and followed by an alphabetical Index of Names
(optional).
Key Personalities publications are issued in two forms:
1) publications on selected major countries, looseleaf
format maintained annually; and 2) publications on
other countries, bound volumes normally containing
25-50 biographies and reissued every three or four
years. In this manner both forms are kept reasonably
up to date.
Preface
The preface indicates the basis for selecting as key
personalities those on whom biographies appear, ex-
plains the organization of the volume and the reference
aids (such as the directory and the index), and com-
ments in general terms on the reliability of data and
important gaps in information and the reasons for
such deficiencies. Cross references to pertinent pub-
lished NIS elements which would provide the reader
with useful background information are cited. A
glossary of terms used in the publication and any
other information helpful to an understanding of the
Key Personalities volume, such as transliteration
system, may also be included.
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
alasmimmisamo
Introduction
Any common characteristics of the personalities se-
lected for treatment are briefly reviewed, particularly
with reference to origin, political affiliation, educa-
tion and training, age, experience, religion, and eco-
nomic and social status. The nature and social status
of the groups or institutions through which these per-
sonalities rose to positions of influence are generalized
and relationships to any traditional leadership groups
in the NIS Area are noted, limiting such treatment to
the minimum required for understanding the influence
of the individuals covered. If the nation has produced
few or no leaders in any particular field, the reasons
4 for this are indicated.
Institutional Directory
The directory is designed to assist the reader in
locating persons by position rather than name and in
identifying leaders in any given field. It presents
alphabetically the important activities of the country
by position and gives the names of selected leading
personalities connected with these. It may include
the names of persons on whom no biographic reports
are presented but who are nonetheless significant at the
national level in their own fields of endeavor.
Biographies
Biographies are concise presentations of career data,
attitudes, and personality traits of leaders or other-
wise influential individuals. Repetition of identical
background information in several biographies may be
avoided by cross-reference. Sketches open with a
brief statement of the subject's position in his field and
then, as available information permits, cover the fol-
lowing points (not necessarily in the order given):
1) evaluation of subject's official or professional status
and his influence and capabilities; 2) important steps
in occupational history or career, travels abroad, and
attendance at international conferences, with dates;
3) important family, professional, or social connec-
tions; 4) attitudes toward other countries, especially
the United States and the U.S.S.R., toward Commu-
nism and Western principles of democracy, and toward
PAGE 2
international organizations and important national and
international problems; and 5) actual or potential
threats to career.
Each biography also briefly refers to the following:
1) place and date of birth; 2) family background,
national origin, and present family; 3) group affilia-
tions (class, ethnic, or other); 4) education; 5) religious
background and extent of participation in religious
activity; 6) general statement of any reading and
listening habits or personal interests that might have
a bearing on accessibility; 7) physical and mental
characteristics; and 8) publications, languages, honors,
or other accomplishments. Subject's character and
personality are revealed by noting significant atti-
tudes, behavior, social activities, and bearing toward
equals and others.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 KEY PERSONALITIES
Index of Names
Names of persons covered by biographies and all
those in the directory may appear in a consolidated
alphabetical index if individuals are known or reported
under aliases or variant names or if the normal system
or sequence of name formation in the country is so com-
plex as to make identification difficult.
Organizational Chart
The structure and relationship of important govern-
mental or other institutions may be shown graphically
in a chart that accompanies the text.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Key Personalities
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general ar-
rangement. Key Personalities is not divided into Sections and
uses no number or letter designations for the headings; otherwise,
manuscripts are prepared and typed as shown in the Standard Edi-
torial Instructions.
Key Personalities is designed to provide back-
ground information on the most influential people, as
individuals and as a group, in the given NIS Area to:
1) help anticipate developments and trends in specific
fields of activity by describing the prevalent leader-
ship pattern and power complexes; and 2) provide some
understanding of the personality of each subject
treated that can aid in making an effective approach
to him or in anticipating his reactions in a given situa-
tion.
Jij .1.11.1.4
Each Key Personalities publication is intended to
be used as a companion volume to various other ele-
ments of the NIS, but it may also serve as an independ-
ent reference work. Biographies are grouped accord-
ing to the following five fields: 1) political, cultural,
economic; 2) army; 3) navy; 4) air force; and 5) scien-
tific and technical. These are preceded by a Guide to
Users and by an integrated Introduction covering all
five fields, are followed by an Institutional Directory
(optional) and a consolidated alphabetical Index of
Names, and accompanied by certain graphic aids, as
appropriate.
Guide to Users
This guide indicates the basis for selecting as key
personalities those on whom biographies appear, ex-
plains the organization of the volume and the refer-
ence aids (such as the directory and the index), and
comments in general terms on the reliability of data
and important gaps in information and the reasons for
such deficiencies. Cross references to pertinent pub-
lished NIS elements which would provide the reader
with useful background information are cited. A
glossary of terms used in the publication and any
other information helpful to an understanding of the
Key Personalities volume, such as transliteration
system, are also included.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
11,1-1.1,1
Introduction
Any common characteristics of the personalities se-
lected for treatment are briefly reviewed, particularly
with reference to origin, political affiliation, educa-
tion and training, age, experience, religion, and -eco-
nomic and social status. The nature and social status
of the groups or institutions through which these per-
sonalities rose to positions of influence are generalized
and relationships to any traditional leadership groups
in the NIS Area are noted, limiting such treatment to
the minimum required for understanding the influence
of the individuals covered. If the nation has produced
few or no leaders in any particular field, the reasons
for this are indicated.
Biographies
Biographies are concise presentations of career data,
attitudes, and personality traits of leaders or other-
wise influential individuals. Repetition of identical
background information in several biographies may be
avoided by cross-reference. The biography of a per-
son active in more than one field (such as political and
military) appears in the field most closely related to
his background and the influence of his present posi-
tion. Sketches open with a brief statement of the sub-
ject's position in his field and then cover the following
points (not necessarily in the order given): 1) evalua-
tion of subject's official or professional status and his
influence and capabilities; 2) important steps in occu-
pational history or career, travels abroad, and attend-
ance at international conferences, with dates; 3) im-
portant family, professional, or social connections;
4) attitudes toward other countries, especially the
United States and the U.S.S.R., and toward interna-
tional organizations and important national and inter-
national problems, including Communism and Western
principles of democrady; and 5) actual or potential
threats to career.
Biographic information also briefly refers to the fol-
lowing: 1) place and date of birth; 2) family back-
ground, national origin, and present family; 3) group
affiliations (class, ethnic, or other); 4) education; 5)
religious background and extent of participation in
religious activity; 6) general statement of any reading
and listening habits OE personal interests that? might
have a bearing on accessibility; 7) physical or mental
characteristics; and 8) publications, languages, honors
or other accomplishments. Subject's character and
personality are revealed by significant attitudes, be-
havior, social activities, and bearing toward equals
and others.
Institutional Directory
When included in a Key Personalities publication,
the directory is designed to assist the reader in locating
persons by position rather than name and in identify-
ing leaders in any given field, presents alphabetically
the important activities of the country and gives the
names and positions of leading personalities connected
PACE, 2
with these. All persons on whom biographies have
been written and who can be grouped according to
affiliation are included, as well as those who were not
selected as key personalities but who are nonetheless
significant at the national level in their own fields of
endeavor.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 EDITORIAL INSTRUCTIONS
as feasible. A source cited in text but not included in
Comments on Principal Sources may be described in
necessary detail but as briefly as possible. Author,
title of source, and date normally are sufficient, typed
in capitals and lowercase set off from text by paren-
theses.
In the numbered listing of principal sources, each
item is typed double space and is continuous in the
following order and typewriter style:
Author, authors, editor or agency; last name first,
capital and lowercase, period. Title of book or other
separate publication; capitals and lowercase, under-
lined, followed within parentheses by capitals and
lowercase translation if required, period. Title of
article from periodical in quotes, capitals and lower-
case, comma; followed by name of periodical, under-
lined, comma; edition, series, part, volume, number,
selected pages, year of periodical as necessary, separated
by commas in that order, with capital only at beginning
of series of items, abbreviated as ed., ser., pt., vol.,
no., p., period. Arabic numerals used throughout
except Roman after pt. Place of publication in capitals
and lowercase, followed by colon and publishing agency
if given, otherwise period. Date, period; n, d. if not
dated, period. Total pages if desired.
When several works by the same author or agency
are listed, the name is not repeated but is replaced by
dashes in subsequent listings.
C. Tabular specifications
1. TABULATIONS
Relatively simple tabular presentations, generally
with three vertical columns of data or less and a limited
number of entries, are treated as tabulations. Tabula-
tions are incorporated in text manuscript without figure
number or title (see sample pages). They are typed
double space, with no continuous capitalization or
underlining.
2. TABLES
More complex tabular presentations, generally with
stubs and three or more vertical columns of data, are
treated as tables. Each table has a descriptive title
preceded by a figure number. Each table is constructed
to stand as an entity, because of possible separation
from text in publication or use.
3. TYPING OF TABLES
Each table is typed in three copies, on one side only,
original on substantial bond paper. Duplicating proc-
ess may be used if submitted copies are thoroughly
checked for legibility. Tables are typed double space,
with DO continuous capitals or underlining in cap-
tion, stubs, or column headings. Tables are typed
on 8 x 12 bond paper whenever practicable. For
more extensive presentations, larger paper may be
used, if possible retaining the 121/6 inch vertical dimen-
sion. Several separate 8 x 123 pages may be used to
continue a table. When more than one page is used to
present a table or when there is significant relationship
between columns in separate tables, in typing it is im-
portant to maintain alinement and space relationship
of columns on all pages. Each page includes in the
margin, as in text pages, the name of the agency of
primary responsibility, date, classification, any security
control, NIS number, and section number.
4. TABLE TITLES AND FIGURE NUMBERS
Table titles are as brief as possible consistent with
adequate indication of table content. Date or dates
are included in the title unless table content is general-
ized or in itself provides adequate date information.
The area or political name is incorporated when feasi-
ble, in adjective form ("Value of French Imports, 1950-
1956") or in noun form after substance of caption
("Land Use, France, 1956").
The figure number which precedes each table title is
composed of the section number followed by a hyphen
and the serial number of the table in the sequence of
all figures (including all tables and graphic items)
within a section, according to caretted location in the
submitted manuscript.
5. TABLE STUBS AND COLUMN HEADINGS
Stubs (horizontal descriptive entries normally to the
left of vertical columns of data) and column headings
are carefully worded and coordinated. Proper selec-
tion and description of categories minimizes footnotes
and exceptions which require explanation.
In general, the heading at the top of a column covers
all material presented in the column without insertion
of additional headings farther down the column. The
same applies to side heads and lines of data. Where
intermediate headings seem necessary, the material
generally is presented as separate tables. However,
related categories of items (such as apply to various
weapons) may be usefully combined in a single table
by making column headings more comprehensive and
using subheadings in columns and/or indicating a gen-
eral change in category. Preliminary consultation
with OBI on such matters is advisable.
6. TABLE FOOTNOTES AND SOURCE REFER-
ENCES
Footnotes to tables are indicated by up to 3 asterisks
and thereafter by up to 3 daggers (the typewriter sym-
bol # is used for a, dagger). These symbols are placed
at the left of numerical column data, and at the right
of headings, stubs, mixed or reading column data.
Footnotes are typed double space, under the table,
starting indented 5 spaces from left margin of table.
The number of footnotes to tables is minimized by
incorporation of the material into related text when
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
feasible, by careful phrasing of stubs and headings, by
consolidation in a reduced number of footnotes, or by
consolidation in a single NOTE carried as a footnote
without symbol.
When source reference or references are considered
necessary and apply to a table as a whole, they are
indicated by "Data from Source 13 . ." beginning at
the left text margin and typed 2 spaces below a line at
the bottom of the table proper. If a NOTE item is
used it precedes the conventional abbreviation n a and
explanation, if used (see conventional entries below),
which in turn precedes any symbol footnotes. An en-
tire table taken verbatim froth a source (sometimes as
the only available data, and not necessarily fully ac-
cepted by the contributor) is so indicated in related
text, by explanation within the table, or by footnote.
7. CONVENTIONAL ENTRIES
To avoid blank spaces in columns of data, the follow-
ing conventional entries are made as appropriate in
table columns:
ENTRY MEANING
not applicable; no footnote used
n a data not available, inadequate data, etc.; n and a
separated and underlined; explained where necessary
as "Data not available" in footnote
0 indicates zero quantity or reading in columns of
uniform data such as weather statistics; no foot-
note used
none Used instead of 0 when data are not uniform, e.g., to
indicate known lack of production of a significant
commodity; underline; no footnote used
insig quantity too insignificant to record; underline; no
footnote used
When some items in a column are estimated they are
preceded by est in underlined lowercase, unless symbol
and footnote are preferable because of an otherwise
appreciably narrower column or estimated items can
be feasibly covered in other footnotes.
Ditto marks are not used in tables. For this purpose
do in underlined lowercase is used. Generally, identical
entries in figure columns are repeated. It is likewise
desirable to repeat word entries which have significance.
8. STATISTICAL TOTALS
When n a or insig are included with vertical or hori-
zontal data entries for which a total is given that only
moderately exceeds the sum of the specific entries, no
footnote explanation may be required. However,
when the total is exactly the sum of the specific figures
generally it is advisable to indicate that n a or similar
items are not reflected in the total, e. g., "Totals are
of known data" or "approx." Totals which are not
identical with the sum of specific entries, because of
rounding or different sources, are indicated by note,
e. g., "(Tonnage) figures rounded to nearest (thousand)
are not additive."
PAGE 4
JANUARY 1962
9. TABLE CONSTRUCTION
Optimum clarity and usefulness require the careful
construction of all tables in terms of the nature and
purpose of the material and the characteristics of the
NIS format.
Column headings normally are typed and printed
horizontally. They may be vertical when heading
narrow columns of data or generally to facilitate pub-
lishing a table in minimum width. Superior or con-
solidating headings are centered over the appropriate
individual column headings.
To avoid repetition of units of measurement after
items of latitude, longitude, time, distance, weight, etc.,
units of measurement (abbreviated as appropriate) are
put at the head of column, or centered over appropriate
columns. Units common to an entire table (e.g.,
thousands of metric tons, or percentage of population)
are placed in parentheses beneath the table title.
It is desirable, so far as practicable, for a series of
tables dealing with common or closely related topics to
be expressed in a uniform order of magnitude of units
of measurement, e.g., all in thousands of tons or hun-
dreds of tons.
Entries in all columns aline horizontally with top
line of the corresponding stub.
Vertical columns of figures are alined on the decimal
point, and zeros precede the decimal in numbers of less
than 1. Dissimilar data are centered in the column.
Examples of various figure items are:
1,500.0
0.15
24.4
1.94
16.09
4,200
120-130
insig
30 (daily)
n a
Generally it is not desirable to carry a column hi
which there are no entries. Use of a column for iso-
lated entries may be avoided by carrying the entries
in a "Remarks" column or by consolidation in' an ex-
planatory note to the table.
Tables generally are constructed to avoid use of full-
length lines or rules between horizontal entries. Lines
or boxes around column headings preferably are omitted
by contributors unless format is well established.
Although contributors are not required to conform
to printing requirements when constructing tables, gen-
eral consideration of such requirements facilitates pub-
lication of table material. A printed NIS single-column
width accommodates approximately 55 characters or
spaces. A two-column page width takes approximately
115 characters or spaces. A two-page spread takes
approximately 230 characters or spaces. Two-page
spreads tend to present page make-up problems in
publication, including separation of tables from related
text. Tables which must be viewed from the side of
the page, and extended tables on fold-in inserts, are not
desirable and are used only by arrangement with OBI.
In constructing tables for normal column or page-width
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
KEY PERSONALITIES miilminimommomp
Index of Names
Names of persons covered by biographies and all
those in the directory appear in a consolidated alpha-
betical index.
Organizational Chart
The structure and relationship of important govern-
mental or other institutions may be shown graphically
in a chart that accompanies the text.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
NIS ON OCEAN AREAS
MARINE CLIMATE AND OCEANOGRAPHY
Section 1 Marine Climate
Section 2 Oceanography
Section 3 Effects on Military
Operations
Section 4 Selected Straits
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 ailEmemmaimi
NIS on Ocean Areas
Marine Climate and Oceanography
OUTLINE
SECTION 1. MARINE CLIMATE
A. General
B. Climatic controls
1. General circulation and pressure distri-
bution
2. Air masses and zones of interaction
C. Climatic elements
1. Winds
a. Surface
b. Upper air
2. Air temperature
a. Surface
b. Upper air
3. Relative humidity
4. Precipitation
5. Cloudiness
6. Visibility
7. Special weather phenomena
D. Upper mesosphere and thermosphere
E. Map and chart appraisal
F. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 2. OCEANOGRAPHY
A. General
B. Marine geology and geophysics
1. General
2. Submarine physiography
3. Geology of maritime landmasses
4. Tectonics
5. Bottom characteristics
6. Seismicity
7. Volcanism
8. Gravity
9. Geomagnetism
10. Lithosphere
C. Currents
1. General circulation
2. Subsurface circulation
3. Other
D. Ice
1. General
2. Distribution
E. Sea and swell
1. General
2. Distribution
3. Wave characteristics
4. Other
F. Sea water characteristics
1. General
2. Description of the NIS Area
a. Temperature
b. Salinity
c. Density
d. Color
e. Transparency
G. Water level fluctuations
1. Astronomical
2. Other
H. Marine biology
1. Fouling
2. Boring
3. Vegetation
4. Bioluminescence
5. Dangerous animals
6. Sound producing and scattering organ-
isms
I. Map and chart appraisal
J. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 3. EFFECTS ON MILITARY OPERATIONS
A. General
B. Air
1. Aircraft
2. Missile
3. Atomic defense
4. Electromagnetic propagation
a. Radar
b. Radio
C. Surface
1. Ship operations
2. Amphibious and logistics operations
3. Mining operations
4. Air-sea rescue and survival at sea
5. Personnel, clothing, and equipment
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
D. Subsurface
1. Submarine and antisubmarine opera-
tions
2. Underwater sound
a. General
b. Sonar
c. Solar and rafos
3. Other subsurface operations
E.
F.
SECTION 4.
A.
B.
Map and chart appraisal
Comments on principal sources
SELECTED STRAITS
General
Selected strait (Repeat for each.)
1. Climate
a. Summary
b. Depressions
c. Surface winds
d. Visibility
e. Precipitation
f. Cloudiness
g. Air temperature
h. Relative humidity
i. Special weather phenomena
2. Marine geology and geophysics
a. Bathymetry
b. Bottom sediments
c. Seismicity
d. Volcanism
e. Gravity
f. Geomagnetism
A. General
3. Water level fluctuations
4. Currents
5. Ice
6. Sea and swell
a. General
b. Distribution
c. Bottom pressure fluctuation
7. Sea water characteristics
a. General
b. Water temperature
c. Salinity
d. Density
e. Electrical conductivity
f. Water color and transparency
8. Underwater sound
a. Sound speed
b. Sonar
c. Passive listening
d. Biological sound
9. Marine biology
a. Bioluminescence
b. Vegetation
c. Fouling
10. Other physical characteristics
a. Duration of sunlight and twilight
b. Coastal geography
c. Other
C. Selected strait
D. Selected strait, etc.
Y. Map and chart appraisal
Z. Comments on principal sources
OUTLINE GUIDE
Section 1. Marine Climate
The major climatic controls of the ocean basin and/or
the hemisphere and their interrelationships with the
climate of the specific Area are discussed. A brief
synopsis is also presented concerning climatic condi-
tions of the NIS Area.
B. Climatic controls
The discussion* of climatic controls of the NIS Area
includes:
1. GENERAL CIRCULATION AND PRESSURE
DISTRIBUTION
General information is presented comparing the
pressure distribution both areally and with time at the
surface, in the troposphere, and in the stratosphere.
These pressure relationships and the characteristics of
the tropopause are illustrated by schematic charts.,
atmospheric cross sections, and plan-view charts for
standard altitudes of average pressure-height contours
with inserts for specific locations showing frequency
distribution of pressure-height fluctuation. General
climatic zones are delineated according to wind,
pressure, and air-mass regimes.
2. AIR MASSES AND ZONES OF INTER-
ACTION
Air-mass characteristics are discussed in detail,
emphasizing their climatic influence and seasonal
areal extent. Zones of interaction include, when
pertinent, both textual and graphical treatment of the
* Throughout the NIS on Ocean Areas, liberal use is made of pertinent charts, graphs, and other illustrative material.
PAGE 2
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Appypved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 NIS ON OCEAN AREAS
areal extent and frequency of extratropical and tropical
cyclonic systems, fronts, and the intertropic conver-
gence zone.
C. Climatic elements
The following elements are covered by months or
seasons as appropriate and are discussed by seasons or
by climatic regimes:
1. WINDS
a. SURFACE ? Wind speed frequencies for specified
wind speed groups and directions are presented, as well
as frequencies of light winds and gales. The discussion
includes a treatment of winds peculiar to specified
regions and winds of local significance. Persistence is
discussed when applicable.
b. UPPER AIR ? Discussion includes persistence of
wind speed and wind direction for standard levels and
the distribution of heights at which the maximum wind
speed aloft is found. Information on the jet stream is
also included.
2. AIR TEMPERATURE
a. SURFACE ? Surface air temperatures and air-
sea temperature differences are discussed according to
seasons or by climatic regimes, whichever is more
appropriate. The discussion emphasizes variations and
upper and lower limits.
b. UPPER AIR ? Information on temperature
ranges, means, and variations therefrom for standard
levels up to the 10-mb. level including the tropopause
is presented. Discussion includes information on
atmospheric stability.
3. RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Relative humidity is discussed by seasons or climatic
regimes for levels between 850 and 500 mbs. Informa-
tion on simultaneous occurrence of relative humidity
and temperature combinations is included.
4. PRECIPITATION
Types and characteristics of precipitation are
discussed according to seasons or by climatic regimes.
Persistence of precipitation, when significant, is pre-
sented for specified coastal and ship stations.
5. CLOUDINESS
Cloud amount, types of clouds, and ceiling heights
are discussed according to seasons or by climatic
regimes. Discussion includes total cloud and low cloud
cover.
6. VISIBILITY
Visibility conditions are discussed according to
seasons or by climatic regimes. Persistence of specified
visibility restrictions is also included where pertinent.
7. SPECIAL WEATHER PHENOMENA
Phenomena peculiar to the NIS Area, e.g., squalls,
waterspouts, and thunderstorms, are discussed.
D. Upper mesosphere and thermosphere
General discussion of the occurrence, variation, and
significance of the meteorological elements found in the
upper mesosphere and thermosphere.
General treatment of the numerous concepts concern-
ing the thickness of the atmosphere.
E. Map and chart appraisal
An itemized discussion of the principal
climatic charts of the Area.
marine
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
40111111111.11M1PAIm
Section 2. Oceanography
A. General
The major oceanographic controls of the ocean basin
and/or the hemisphere and their interrelationships with
the oceanography of the specific Area are discussed. A
bijef synopsis of oceanographic conditions is presented.
B. Marine geology and geophysics
1. GENERAL
Outlines briefly the significance of marine geology
and geophysics in the Area.
2. SUBMARINE PHYSIOGRAPHY
Discusses the physiographic provinces and provides
a detailed description of bathymetric features in the
Area.
3. GEOLOGY OF MARITIME LANDMASSES
Discusses the rocks and sediments and the formation
and significance of islands as related to submarine
geology.
4. TECTONICS
Discusses the broad marine structural features and
their causes; includes structural trends and their inter-
pretation.
5. BOTTOM CHARACTERISTICS
Discusses qualitatively and quantitatively bottom
sediments and rocks. In addition, sediment source,
transportation, and methods and rates of deposition,
and areas of nondeposition are discussed.
6. SEISMICITY
Discusses the areal and temporal distribution of
earthquakes and their relation to the marine environ-
ment. Also includes an historical account of tsunamis.
7. VOLCANISM
Discusses the location and history of past volcanic
activity, changes in bottom sediments resulting from
such activity, and resultant changes in magnetic
potential.
8. GRAVITY
Discusses gravity anomalies of the Area, including
observed, free-air, and isostatic gravity anomalies.
PAGE 4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
9. GEOMAGNETISM
The geomagnetic characteristics of the NIS Area are
discussed both in general and in detail; includes the
spatial and temporal variations of the magnetic field
and its relation to other environmental elements.
Auroras are also discussed if pertinent.
10. LITHOSPHERE
Provides qualitative and quantitative information on
the crust of the earth above the Mohorovicic discon-
tinuity.
C. Currents
1. GENERAL CIRCULATION
Discusses the general surface circulation of water in
the Area with emphasis on the variations from the
mean circulation and the effects of winds and of tidal
currents.
2. SUBSURFACE CIRCULATION
Supplies information available from direct current
observations or from physical properties and will be
presented as water mass movement, i.e., surface,
intermediate, deep, bottom or whatever similar break-
down is feasible. (If information of this nature is not
available, the discussion will be limited to those depths
which are of significance in SECTION 3. Effects on
Military Operations.)
3. OTHER
The following topics will not always appear in every
NIS, but are treated as follows when they do:
MAJOR CURRENTS ? If major currents are present
and when the amount of data is sufficient to warrant
this presentation, it includes variation with depth,
variation along the axis, width, variation with season,
etc., of the major current streams. (Gulf Stream,
Brazil Current, etc., are examples.)
SPECIAL CURRENT FEATURES OR PECULIARITIES.
D. Ice
1. GENERAL
Discusses in general the controls affecting sea ice
conditions and sources of icebergs in the Area.
2. DISTRIBUTION
Discusses means and variations therefrom of cover-
age, concentration, dates of appearance and disap-
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21
JANUARY 1962 NIS ON 0
: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CEAN AREAS
pearance, drifts, and physical characteristics of sea
ice within the NIS Area. In Polar Areas the discussion
is more detailed and may be by sectors. Information is
supplied on the distribution, drifts, and limits of ice-
bergs.
E. Sea and swell
1. GENERAL
Terminology is defined and general information on
sea and swell is provided.
2. DISTRIBUTION
Discusses on a seasonal basis the frequency of oc-
currence of sea and swell heights and directions through-
out the NIS Area and the climatic factors which con-
trol sea and swell.
3. WAVE CHARACTERISTICS
Wave information based on simultaneous observa-
tions of wave height, period, and direction is provided.
Discusses on a seasonal basis the frequency distribution
of each of these variables along with information on the
simultaneous occurrence and persistence of certain
threshold values.
4. OTHER
The following items will be discussed if the situation
warrants: Extreme wave conditions associated with
squalls, tropical cyclones, and other severe weather
situations; typical synoptic wave situations; and
seismically produced water waves.
F. Sea water characteristics
1. GENERAL
Provides background information on the physical
properties of sea water, defines terminology, and ex-
plains factors controlling temperature, salinity, density,
color, and transparency.
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE NIS AREA
a. TEMPERATURE ? Discusses surface temperature
by sectors, Discussion includes distribution, vari-
ability, ranges, anomalies, and special features of
thermal structure. Vertical and subsurface temperature
distributions are discussed by sectors including depth
and strength of the thermocline and seasonal variation,
general vertical thermal structure, and general hori-
zontal subsurface distribution of temperature.
b. SALINITY ? Discusses surface, vertical, and
subsurface salinity distributions by sectors.
c. DENSITY ? Discusses the surface density by
sectors, covering distribution, seasonal ranges, and
special features. Vertical and subsurface density
distributions by sectors will include depth and strength
wilegimidaima
of density layers and variations thereof (seasonal
changes and internal waves).
d. COLOR ? Describes water color in the NIS
Area.
e. TRANSPARENCY ? Discusses visual trans-
parency and/or extinction coefficients of the water in
the NIS Area.
G. Water level fluctuations
1. ASTRONOMICAL
Provides information on the types of tides, tide
ranges, and manner of progression of the tide through-
out the Area.
2. OTHER
The occurrence and magnitude of, meteorological
tides, storm surges, and tsunamis within the Area are
discussed. Secular variations in mean sea level are
discussed.
H. Marine biology
1. FOULING
Discusses the basic aspects and characteristics of
fouling in the Area with emphasis on geographic
variation of environmental factors, temporal and
seasonal sequences, and qualitative and quantitative
aspects of the fouling complex.
2. BORING
Discusses marine boring organisms of the Area
including their geographic distribution and the severity,
methods, and seasonal variations of attack.
3. VEGETATION
Describes species of algae and seagrasses in the Area,
with a discussion of pertinent environmental factors,
growth and seasonal characteristics, and vertical and
geographic distribution.
4. BIOLUMINESCENCE
Discusses the causative organisms, their seasonal and
geographic distribution, and the types of recorded
displays.
5. DANGEROUS ANIMALS
Enumerates and describes important dangerous ma-
rine animals, including injurious, venomous, and poi-
sonous (inedible) forms with information on their dis-
tribution, habitats, abundance, method of attack, and
effects on victims.
6. SOUND PRODUCING AND SCATTERING
ORGANISMS
Describes the various animal sound producers,
reflectors, and scatterers with information on their
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JANUARY 1962
distribution and migration. Describes deep and
shallow scattering layers, including information on the
causative organisms, experimental results, and varia-
tions in concentrations of the organisms.
I. Map and chart appraisal
An itemized discussion of the principal oceano-
graphic charts of the Area.
A. General
J. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 3. Effects on Military Operations
Brief synopsis of the most significant aspects of
location, size, shape, strategic implications, and general
climatic and oceanographic conditions are presented as
they affect military operations in the Area.
B. Air
Discusses the environmental effects of the NIS Area
on the following types of air operations:
1. AIRCRAFT
Information is presented on the expectancy of
operationally important weather elements and environ-
mental phenomena such as contrails, clear air turbu-
lence, upper level winds, cloudiness, visibility, and icing
as they affect flight planning, air navigation, aerial
reconnaissance, and other air operations. Weather
forecasting facilities are described.
2. MISSILE
Discusses environmental effects on operation, guid-
ance, and detection of missiles.
3. ATOMIC DEFENSE
Discusses the effect of environment on the dispersal
of radioactive fallout particles and other results of
atomic bomb bursts.
4. ELECTROMAGNETIC PROPAGATION
a. RADAR ? Discusses the probability of extended
radar ranges with particular emphasis on earty defense
warning systems and anomalous propagation such as
radar holes and ducting conditions.
b. RADIO ? Discusses radio reception in terms of
space and time with respect to the auroral zone. The
11-year periodicity of sunspots and position in the
cycle are also discussed.
PAGE 6
C. Surface
Discusses the environmental effects of the NIS Area
on the following:
1. SHIP OPERATIONS
Discusses superstructure icing, effects of currents,
winds, sea surface roughness (slamming, water intake,
excessive accelerations), ship degaussing, magnetic
compass variation and reliability, biological factors
(fouling, boring, clogging, bioluminescence, biological
sound), and minimum-time sea routes.
2. AMPHIBIOUS AND LOGISTICS OPERA-
TIONS
Discusses in a general manner surf, longshore cur-
rents, beach trafficability and stability, bottom condi-
tions, biological factors, local problems in navigation,
and flushing, which are important in amphibious, off-
loading, and port operations. (More detailed data on
amphibious operations are contained in SECTION 22,
CHAPTER II.)
3. MINING OPERATIONS
Discusses water transparency, wave conditions, role
of the sea floor on the behavior of mines subsequent to
laying, current effects on mines, biological factors, and
spurious firing caused by seismic, magnetic, and bottom
pressure variations. (Effect of the environment on
minehunting with underwater ordnance locator gear is
discussed under D, 3, below.)
4. AIR-SEA RESCUE AND SURVIVAL AT SEA
Discusses sea and swell conditions (in respect to
takeoff, landing, refueling, and boarding of seaplanes,
and ditching of aircraft), human survival of immersion
hypothermia, and dangerous marine animals.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 NIS ON OCEAN AREAS
5. PERSONNEL, CLOTHING, AND EQUIP-
MENT
Discusses windchill, deterioration of equipment
(corrosion, fouling, boring) and storage of materials.
a Subsurface
Discussion of the environmental effects of the NIS
Area on the following types of subsurface operations:
1. SUBMARINE AND ANTISUBMARINE
OPERATIONS
Discusses vertical changes in density and seasonal
variations therein, depth and strength of the balancing
layer and seasonal variations, navigation under ice,
water transparency, electrical conductivity, surface and
subsurface currents, wave conditions (depth of wave
action), snorkel problems (icing), and bottom charac-
teristics.
2. UNDERWATER SOUND
a. GENERAL - Terminology is defined and general
information on sound propagation is provided.
b. SONAR - Discusses effects of physical proper-
ties of the water, sea state, sea bottom, and ambient
noise on sonar performance. Describes by seasons
sonar conditions throughout the NIS Area. This
presentation describes probable performance of sonars
(surface ship, airborne, and submarine) of all fre-
quencies as well as variable depth sonar and explosive
echo ranging; information is presented on the best
depth to escape detection, assured ranges and likely
ranges with listening gear. Convergence zone trans-
mission is described.
A. General
C. SOFAR AND RAFOS - The principles and factors
controlling long range sound transmission are explained.
Depths and variations of sound channels in the Area
are discussed. Horizontal variations in axial sound
speeds are portrayed.
3. OTHER SUBSURFACE OPERATIONS
Discusses those environmental factors which affect
such operations as underwater construction and demoli-
tion, salvage, disposal of atomic and other wastes, and
cable laying, viz., bottom topography and type, wave
conditions, subsurface currents and temperatures,
biological factors and water transparency.
E. Map and chart appraisal
An itemized discussion of the principal marine
climatic and oceanographic charts of the Area.
F. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
in formation is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 4, Selected Straits
A brief discussion of the strait or straits covering
size, strategic importance, and major geographic and
oceanographic features.
B. Selected strait (Repeat for each. Emphasis is
on graphic presentation.)
1. CLIMATE
a. SUMMARY - Briefly summarizes the major cli-
matic features of the strait.
b. DEPRESSIONS - Describes the seasonal distri-
bution, tracks, and typical weather associated with
low pressure systems and/or tropical depressions
affecting the strait.
samminionim
C. SURFACE WINDS - Describes speed and direc-
tion distribution of winds over the strait, frequency of
gales, and land and sea breezes.
d. VISIBILITY - Describes frequency and duration
of fog and other restrictions to visibility.
C. PRECIPITATION - Describes types, amount, fre-
quency, and persistence of precipitation in the strait.
f. CLOUDINESS - Describes cloud coverage, ceil-
ings, frequency, diurnal and seasonal variation thereof.
Presents frequency distribution of low clouds.
g. AIR TEMPERATURE - Describes air temperature
means, extremes, ranges, and variations on an annual,
monthly, and diurnal basis.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
61LITIMPIIMIONIO NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
h. RELATIVE HUMIDITY Describes the variation
of relative humidity and its controls.
i. SPECIAL WEATHER PHENOMENA -- Presents in-
formation on frequency of thunderstorms, waterspouts,
and other severe weather phenomena on a seasonal or
appropriate time basis.
2. MARINE GEOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICS
a. BATHYMETRY Illustrates and describes the
general bathymetric characteristics of the strait.
b. BOTTOM SEDIMENTS ? Illustrates and describes
the type and distribution of bottom sediments of the
strait and its approaches.
c. SEISMICITY ? Illustrates and describes the type
of seismic activity in the strait and its approaches.
d. VOLCANISM ? illustrates and describes the type
of volcanic activity in the strait and its approaches.
e. GRAVITY ? Observed, free air, and isostatic
anomalies of gravity.
f. GEOMAGNETISM ? Geomagnetic variations, in-
clination or dip, horizontal intensity, vertical intensity,
and anomalies.
3. WATER LEVEL FLUCTUATIONS
Describes the periodic vertical rise and fall of the
water level in the strait from astronomical influences,
meteorological tides, storm surges, and tsunamis.
Illustrations include cotidal and corange charts, and
tide curves.
4. CURRENTS
Describes surface and subsurface currents within the
strait. Illustrations include prevailing surface currents,
secondary surface currents, tidal currents, subsurface
currents, and current effects on mines.
5. ICE
Information is provided on dates of ice formation and
clearing, ice coverage and concentration, movement,
and physical characteristics.
6. SEA AND SWELL
a. GENERAL ? Summarizes the major features of
sea and swell conditions in the strait and their controls.
b. DISTRIBUTION ? Describes sea and swell condi-
tions by seasons or other appropriate time scale
throughout the strait. Illustrations include sea and
swell roses showing the distribution of heights and
directions, frequency of waves exceeding 5 feet, and
persistence of specified wave conditions.
C. BOTTOM PRESSURE FLUCTUATION ? Illustrates
the occurrence of bottom pressure fluctuations (for
various depths) resulting from surface waves.
PAGE 8
JANUARY 1962
7. SEA WATER CHARACTERISTICS
a. GENERAL ? DiSCUSSeS major features of the
physical properties of the strait and their controls.
b. WATER TEMPERATURE ? Describes and il-
lustrates mean sea surface and subsurface temperatures
and variations therefrom on an appropriate time scale.
Presents information on the depth and strength of the
thermocline. Variations with depth are shown by
means of typical bathythermograms, vertical profiles,
and subsurface plan views.
C. SALINITY Similar treatment to that of 7, b,
Water temperature.
d. DENSITY ? Similar treatment to that of 7, b,
Water temperature.
e. ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY ? Presents informa-
tion on seasonal changes of electrical conductivity with
depth
f. WATER COLOR AND TRANSPARENCY ? Describes
prevailing water color and transparency of water in the
strait and variations therefrom.
8. UNDERWATER SOUND
a. SOUND SPEED ? Describes and illustrates mean
surface and subsurface sound speeds in the strait and
variations therefrom on an appropriate time scale.
b. SONAR ? Probable ranges by seasons or other
appropriate time scale are presented for sonars (surface
ship, airborne, and submarine sonar) of all frequencies,
including minehunting types. The effects of trans-
ducer tilt and varying the depth of the transducer
are discussed. Ambient noise and bottom effects,
including reverberation, are described.
c. PASSIVE LISTENING -- Probable ranges obtained
by heralds and submarine listening are presented.
Background noise is described.
d. BIOLOGICAL SOUND ? Discusses sound reflec-
tion, production, and scattering by animals which may
interfere with acoustic operations in the strait.
9. MARINE BIOLOGY
a. BIOLUMINESCENCE ? Describes types of organ-
isms, distribution, intensity, and seasonality of bio-
luminescence.
b. VEGETATION ? Describes types and distribu-
tion of marine algae and seagrasses in the strait.
c. FouirNa ? Describes types, intensity, and sea-
sons of attachment of biological fouling.
10. OTHER PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Graphic material is presented showing:
a. DURATION OF SUNLIGHT AND TWILIGHT
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JANUARY 1962 NIS ON OCEAN AREAS
b. COASTAL GEOGRAPHY ? Prominent geographical
features to aid in navigation.
c. OTHER ? Discuss auroras when appropriate.
C. Selected strait
D. Selected strait, etc.
Y. Map and chart appraisal
An itemized discussion of the principal marine cli-
matic and oceanographic charts of the straits area.
Z. Comments on principal sources
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 iiiihishbakiewskipa
NIS on Ocean Areas
Marine Climate and Oceanography
OUTLINE
SECTION 1. MARINE CLIMATE
A. General
B. Climatic controls
1. General circulation and pressure distri-
bution
2. Air masses and zones of interaction
C. Climatic elements
1. Winds
a. Surface
b. Upper air
2. Air temperature
a. Surface
b. Upper air
3. Relative humidity
4. Precipitation
5. Cloudiness
6. Visibility
7. Special weather phenomena
D. Ionosphere and exosphere
E. Map and chart appraisal and comments on
principal sources
1. Map and chart appraisal
2. comments on principal sources
SECTION 2. OCEANOGRAPHY
A. General
B. Marine geology and geophysics
1. General
2. Submarine physiography
3. Geology of maritime landmasses
4. Tectonics
5. Bottom characteristics
6. Seismicity
7. Volcanism
8. Gravity
9. Geomagnetism
10. Lithosphere
C. Currents
1. General circulation
2. Subsurface circulation
3. Other
D. Ice
1. General
2. Distribution
4?11,11111ROmmaion
E. Sea and swell
1. General
2. Distribution
3. Wave characteristics
4. Other
F. Sea water characteristics
1. General
2. Description of the NIS Area
a. Temperature
b. Salinity
c. Density
d. Color
e. Transparency
G. Water level fluctuations
1. Astronomical
2. Other
H. Marine biology
1. Fouling
2. Boring
3. Vegetation
4. Bioluminescence
5. Dangerous animals
6. Sound producing and scattering organ-
isms
I. Map and chart appraisal and comments on
principal sources
1. Map and chart appraisal
2. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 3. EFFECTS ON MILITARY OPERATIONS
A. General
B. Air
1. Aircraft
2. Missile
3. Atomic defense
4. Electromagnetic propagation
a. Radar
b. Radio
C. Surface
1. Ship operations
2. Amphibious and logistics operations
3. Mining operations
4. Air-sea rescue and survival at sea
5. Personnel, clothing, and equipment
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 1
Approved For Release 1999 09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
TRIMIMONInign. NIS STA
DARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
D. Subsurface
1. Submarine and antisubmari ei opera-
tions
2. Underwater sound
a. General
b. Sonar
c. Sofar and rafos
3. Other subsurface operations
E. Map and chart appraisal and ornments
on principal sources
1. Map and chart appraisal
2. Comments on principal sources
SECTION 4. SELECTED STRAITS
A.
B.
General
Selected strait (Repeat for each.
1. Climate
a. Summary
b. Depressions
c. Surface winds
d. Visibility
e. Precipitation
f. Cloudiness
g. Air temperature
h. Relative humidity
i. Special weather phenome
2. Marine geology and geophy
a. Bathymetry
b. Bottom sediments
c. Seismicity
d. Volcanism
e. Gravity
f. Geomagnetism
A. General
a
ics
OUTLINE
Sectir 1. Ma
The major climatic controls of the ocean b sin and/or
the hemisphere and their interrelationship with the
climate of the specific Area are discussed A brief
synopsis is also presented concerning dim tic condi-
tions of the NIS Area.
B. Climatic controls
The discussion* of climatic controls of th NIS Area
includes:
1. GENERAL CIRCULATION AND P ESSURE
DISTRIBUTION
General information is presented com axing the
pressure distribution both areally and with 1irne at the
3. Water level fluctuations
4. Currents
5. Ice
6. Sea and swell
a. General
b. Distribution
c. Bottom pressure fluctuation
7. Sea water characteristics
a. General
b. Water temperature
c. Salinity
d. Density
e. Electrical conductivity
f. Water color and transparency
8. Underwater sound
a. Sound speed
b. Sonar
c. Passive listening
d. Biological sound
9. Marine biology
a. Bioluminescence
b. Vegetation
c. Fouling
10. Other physical characteristics
a. Duration of sunlight and twilight
b. Coastal geography
c. Other
11. Map and chart appraisal and com-
ments on principal sources
a. Map and chart appraisal
b. Comments on principal sources
C, D, etc. (other selected straits)
GUIDE
rine Climate
surface, in the troposphere, and in the stratosphere.
These pressure relationships and the characteristics of
the tropopause are illustrated by schematic charts,
atmospheric cross sections, and plan-view charts for
standard altitudes of average pressure-height contours
with inserts for specific locations showing frequency
distribution of pressure-height fluctuation. General
climatic zones are delineated according to wind,
pressure, and air-mass regimes.
2. AIR MASSES AND ZONES OF INTER-
ACTION
Air-mass characteristics are discussed in detail,
emphasizing their climatic influence and seasonal,
aerial extent. Zones of interaction include, when
pertinent, both textual and graphical treatment of the
* Throughout the NIS on Ocean Areas, liberal se is made of pertinent charts, graphs, and other illustrative material.
PAGE 2
Approved For Release 1999 09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 NIS ON OCEAN AREAS ?rnitilfflimemermi
areal extent and frequency of extratropical and tropical
cyclonic systems, fronts, and the intertropic conver-
gence zone.
C. Climatic elements
The following elements are covered by months or
seasons as appropriate and are discussed by seirsons or
by climatic regimes:
1. WINDS
a. SURFACE ? Wind speed frequencies for specified
wind speed groups and directions are presented, as well
as frequencies of light winds and gales. The discussion
includes a treatment of winds peculiar to specified
regions and winds of local significance. Persistence is
discussed when applicable.
b. UPPER AIR ? Discussion includes persistence of
wind speed and wind direction for standard levels and
the distribution of heights at which the maximum wind
speed aloft is found. Information on the jet stream is
also included.
2. AIR TEMPERATURE
a. SURFACE Surface air temperatures and air-
sea temperature differences are discussed according to
seasons or by climatic regimes, whichever is more
appropriate. The discussion emphasizes variations and
upper and lower limits.
b. UPPER AIR ? Information on temperature
ranges, means, and variations therefrom for standard
levels up to the 10-mb. level including the tropopause
is presented. Discussion includes information on
atmospheric stability.
3. RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Relative humidity is discussed by seasons or climatic
regimes for levels between 850 and 500 mbs. Informa-
tion on simultaneous occurrence of relative humidity
and temperature combinations is included.
4. PRECIPITATION
Types and characteristics of precipitation are
discussed according to seasons or by climatic regimes.
griarkmakvaiiiiiek.
Persistence of precipitation, when significant, is pre-
sented for specified coastal and ship stations.
5. CLOUDINESS
Cloud amount, types of clouds, and ceiling heights
are discussed according to seasons or by climatic
regimes. Discussion includes total cloud and low cloud
cover.
6. VISIBILITY
Visibility conditions are discussed according to
seasons or by climatic regimes. Persistence of specified
visibility restrictions is also included where pertinent.
7. SPECIAL WEATHER PHENOMENA
Phenomena peculiar to the NIS Area, e.g., squalls,
waterspouts, and thunderstorms, are discussed.
D. Ionosphere and exosphere
General discussion of the occurrence, variation, and
significance of the meteorological elements found in the
ionosphere.
General treatment of the numerous concepts concern-
ing the thickness of the atmosphere.
E. Map and chart appraisal and comments
on principal sources
1. MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
An itemized discussion of the principal marine
climatic charts of the Area.
2. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
millionommoniimm NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
Section 2. Oceanography
A. General
The major oceanographic controls of the ocean basin
and/or the hemisphere and their interrelationships with
the oceanography of the specific Area are discussed. A
brief synopsis of oceanographic conditions is presented.
B. Marine geology and geophysics
1. GENERAL
Outlines briefly the significance of marine geology
and geophysics in the Area.
2. SUBMARINE PHYSIOGRAPHY
Discusses the physiographic provinces and provides
a detailed description of bathymetric feat res in the
Area.
3. GEOLOGY OF MARITIME LAN
II
MASSES
Discusses the rocks and sediments and th formation
and significance of islands as related to submarine
geology.
4. TECTONICS
Discusses the broad marine structural fe
their causes; includes structural trends and
pretation.
tures and
heir inter-
5. BOTTOM CHARACTERISTICS
Discusses qualitatively and quantitativ ely bottom
sediments and rocks. In addition, sediment source,
transportation, and methods and rates of deposition,
and areas of nondeposition are discussed.
6. SEISMICITY
Discusses the areal and temporal distr
earthquakes and their relation to the mari
merit. Also includes an historical account o
7. VOLCANISM
Discusses the location and history of pa
activity, changes in bottom sediments resi
such activity, and resultant changes in
potential.
ibution of
e environ-
tsunamis.
t volcanic
lting from
magnetic
8. GRAVITY
Discusses gravity anomalies of the Area, including
observed, free-air, and isostatic gravity anomalies.
PAGE 4
9. GEOMAGNETISM
The geomagnetic characteristics of the NIS Area are
discussed both in general and in detail; includes the
spatial and temporal variations of the magnetic field
and its relation to other environmental elements.
Auroras also discussed if pertinent.
10. LITHOSPHERE
Provides qualitative and quantitative information on
the crust of the earth above the Mohorovicic discon-
tinuity.
C. Currents
1. GENERAL CIRCULATION
Discusses the general surface circulation of water in
the Area with emphasis on the variations from the
mean circulation and the effects of winds and of tidal
currents.
2. SUBSURFACE CIRCULATION
Supplies information available from direct current
observations or from physical properties and will be
presented as water mass movement, i.e., surface,
intermediate, deep, bottom or whatever similar break-
down is feasible. (If information of this nature is not
available, the discussion will be limited to those depths
which are of significance in SECTION 3. Effects on
Military Operations.)
3. OTHER
The following topics will not always appear in every
NIS, but are treated as follows when they do:
MAJOR CURRENTS -- If major currents are present
and when the amount of data is sufficient to warrant
this presentation, it includes variation with depth,
variation along the axis, width, variation with season,
etc., of the major current streams. (Gulf Stream,
Brazil Current, etc., are examples.)
SPECIAL CURRENT FEATURES OR PECULIARITIES.
D. Ice
1. GENERAL
Discusses in general the controls affecting sea ice
conditions and sources of icebergs in the Area.
2. DISTRIBUTION
Discusses means arid variations therefrom of cover-
age, concentration, dates of appearance and disap-
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 NIS ON OCEAN AREAS 6,811Miummini
pearance, drifts, and physical characteristics of sea
ice within the NIS Area. In Polar Areas the discussion
is more detailed and may be by sectors. Information is
supplied on the distribution, drifts, and limits of ice-
bergs.
E. Sea and swell
1. GENERAL
Terminology is defined and general information on
sea and swell is provided.
2. DISTRIBUTION
Discusses on a seasonal basis the frequency of oc-
currence of sea and swell heights and directions through
the NIS Area and the climatic factors which control
sea and swell.
3. WAVE CHARACTERISTICS
Wave information based on simultaneous observa-
tions of wave height, period, and direction is provided.
Discusses on a seasonal basis the frequency distribution
of each of these variables along with information on the
simultaneous occurrence and persistence of certain
threshold values.
4. OTHER
The following items will be discussed if the situation
warrants: Extreme wave conditions associated with
squalls, tropical cyclones, and other severe weather
situations; typical synoptic wave situations; and
seismically produced water waves.
F. Sea water characteristics
1. GENERAL
Provides background information on the physical
properties of sea water, defines terminology, and ex-
plains factors controlling temperature, salinity, density,
color, and transparency.
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE NIS AREA
a. TEMPERATURE ? Discusses surface temperature
by sectors. Discussion includes distribution, vari-
ability, ranges, anomalies, and special features of
thermal structure. Vertical and subsurface temperature
distributions are discussed by sectors including depth
and strength of the thermocline and seasonal variation,
general vertical thermal structure, and general hori-
zontal subsurface distribution of temperature.
b. SALINITY ? Discusses surface, vertical, and
subsurface salinity distributions by sectors.
c. DENSITY ? Discusses the surface density by
sectors, covering distribution, seasonal ranges, and
special features. Vertical and subsurface density
distributions by sectors will include depth and strength
miilinnommoso
of density layers and variations thereof (seasonal
changes and internal waves).
d. COLOR ? Describes water color in the NIS
Area.
e. TRANSPARENCY ? Discusses visual trans-
parency and/or extinction coefficients of the water in
the NIS Area.
G. Water level fluctuations
1. ASTRONOMICAL
Provides information on the types of tides, tide
ranges, and manner of progression of the tide through-
out the Area.
2. OTHER
The occurrence and magnitude of, meteorological
tides, storm surges, and tsunamis within the Area are
discussed. Secular variations in mean sea level are
discussed.
H. Marine biology
1. FOULING
Discusses the basic aspects and characteristics of
fouling in the Area with emphasis on geographic
variation of environmental factors, temporal and
seasonal sequences, and qualitative and quantitative
aspects of the fouling complex.
2. BORING
Discusses marine boring organisms of the Area
including their geographic distribution and the severity,
methods, and seasonal variations of attack.
3. VEGETATION
Describes species of algae and seagrasses in the Area,
with a discussion of pertinent environmental factors,
growth and seasonal characteristics, and vertical and
geographic distribution.
4. BIOLUMINESCENCE
Discusses the causative organisms, their seasonal and
geographic distribution, and the types of recorded
displays.
5. DANGEROUS ANIMALS
Enumerates and describes important dangerous ma-
rine animals, including injurious, venomous, and poi-
sonous (inedible) forms with information on their dis-
tribution, habitats, abundance, method of attack, and
effects on victims.
6. SOUND PRODUCING AND SCATTERING
ORGANISMS
Describes the various animal sound producers,
reflectors, and scatterers with information on their
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : C
NIS STANDARD
distribution and migration. Describes deep and
shallow scattering layers, including information on the
causative organisms, experimental results, and varia-
tions in concentrations of the organisms.
I. Map and chart appraisal and cOmments
on principal sources
1. MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
An itemized discussion of the principal oceano-
graphic charts of the Area.
A. General
IA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1959
2. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 3. Effects on Military Operations
Brief synopsis of the most significant 'aspects of
location, size, shape, strategic implications, and general
climatic and oceanographic conditions are pi esented as
they affect military operations in the Area.
B. Air
Discusses the environmental effects of the
on the following types of air operations:
1. AIRCRAFT
NIS Area
Information is presented on the expectancy of
operationally important weather elements and environ-
mental phenomena such as contrails, clear air turbu-
lence, upper level winds, cloudiness, visibility, and icing
as they affect flight planning, air navigation, aerial
reconnaissance, and other air operations. I Weather
forecasting facilities are described.
2. MISSILE
Discusses environmental effects on operation, guid-
ance, and detection of missiles.
3. ATOMIC DEFENSE
Discusses the effect of environment on the dispersal
of radioactive fallout particles and other results of
atomic bomb bursts.
4. ELECTROMAGNETIC PROPAGAl'ION
tt
a. RADAR ? Discusses the probability f extended
radar ranges with particular emphasis on e rly defense
warning systems and anomalous propagati n such as
radar holes and ducting conditions.
b. RADIO ? Discusses radio reception 4n terms of
space and time with respect to the auroral hone. The
11-year periodicity of sunspots and posit on in the
cycle are also discussed.
PAGE 6
C. Surface
Discusses the environmental effects of the NIS Area
on the following:
1. SHIP OPERATIONS
Discusses superstructure icing, effects of currents,
winds, sea surface roughness (slamming, water intake,
excessive accelerations), ship degaussing, magnetic
compass variation and reliability, biological factors
(fouling, boring, clogging, bioluminescence, biological
sound), and minimum-time sea routes.
2. AMPHIBIOUS AND LOGISTICS OPERA-
TIONS
Discusses in a general manner surf, longshore cur-
rents, beach trafficability and stability, bottom condi-
tions, biological factors, local problems in navigation,
and flushing, which are important in amphibious, off-
loading, and port operations. (More detailed data on
amphibious operations are contained in SECTION 22,
CHAPTER II.)
3. MINING OPERATIONS
Discusses water transparency, wave conditions, role
of the sea floor on the behavior of mines subsequent to
laying, current effects on mines, biological factors, and
spurious firing caused by seismic, magnetic, and bottom
pressure variations. (Effect of the environment on
minehunting with underwater ordnance locator gear is
discussed under D, 3, below.)
4. AIR-SEA RESCUE AND SURVIVAL AT SEA
Discusses sea and swell conditions (in respect to
takeoff, landing, refueling, and boarding of seaplanes,
and ditching of aircraft), human survival of immersion
hypothermia, and dangerous marine animals.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 NIS ON OCEAN AREAS
5. PERSONNEL, CLOTHING, AND EQUIP-
MENT
Discusses windchill, deterioration of equipment
(corrosion, fouling, boring) and storage of materials.
D. Subsurface
Discussion of the environmental effects of the NIS
Area on the following types of subsurface operations:
1. SUBMARINE AND ANTISUBMARINE
OPERATIONS
Discusses vertical changes in density and seasonal
variations therein, depth and strength of the balancing
layer and seasonal variations, navigation under ice,
water transparency, electrical conductivity, surface and
subsurface currents, wave conditions (depth of wave
action), snorkel problems (icing), and bottom charac-
teristics.
2. UNDERWATER SOUND
a. GENERAL ? Terminology is defined and general
information on sound propagation is provided.
b. SONAR? Discusses effects of physical proper-
ties of the water, sea state, sea bottom, and ambient
noise on sonar performance. Describes by seasons
sonar conditions throughout the NIS Area. This
presentation describes probable performance of sonars
(surface ship, airborne, and submarine) of all fre-
quencies as well as variable depth sonar and explosive
echo ranging; information is presented on the best
depth to escape detection, assured ranges and likely
ranges with listening gear. Convergence zone trans-
mission is described.
A. General
C. SOFAR AND RAFOS ? The principles and factors
controlling long range sound transmission are explained.
Depths and variations of sound channels in the Area
are discussed. Horizontal variations in axial sound
speeds are portrayed.
3. OTHER SUBSURFACE OPERATIONS
Discusses those environmental factors which affect
such operations as underwater construction and demoli-
tion, salvage, disposal of atomic and other wastes, and
cable laying, viz., bottom topography and type, wave
conditions, subsurface currents and temperatures,
biological factors and water transparency.
E. Map and chart appraisal and comments
on principal sources
1. MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL
An itemized discussion of the principal marine
climatic and oceanographic charts of the Area.
2. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
This Subsection serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
Section 4. Selected Straits
A brief discussion of the strait or straits covering
size, strategic importance, and major geographic and
oceanographic features.
B. Selected strait (Repeat for each. Emphasis is
on graphic presentation.)
1. CLIMATE
a. SUMMARY ? Briefly summarizes the major cli-
matic features of the strait.
b. DEPRESSIONS ? Describes the seasonal distri-
bution, tracks, and typical weather associated with
low pressure systems and/or tropical depressions
affecting the strait.
C. SURFACE WINDS ? Describes speed and direc-
tion distribution of winds over the strait, frequency of
gales, and land and sea breezes.
d. VISIBILITY ? Describes frequency and duration
of fog and other restrictions to visibility.
e. PRECIPITATION ? Describes types, amount, fre-
quency, and persistence of precipitation in the strait.
f. CLOUDINESS ? Describes cloud coverage, ceil-
ings, frequency, diurnal and seasonal variation thereof.
Presents frequency distribution of low clouds.
g. AIR TEMPERATURE ? Describes air temperature
means, extremes, ranges, and variations on an annual,
monthly, and diurnal basis.
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
h. RELATIVE HUMIDITY ? Describes the variation
of relative humidity and its controls.
i. SPECIAL WEATHER PHENOMENA ? Presents in-
formation on frequency of thunderstorms, waterspouts,
and other severe weather phenomena on a seasonal or
appropriate time basis.
2. MARINE GEOLOGY AND GEOPHYSICS
a. BATHYMETRY ? Illustrates and d scribes the
general bathymetric characteristics of the strait.
b. BOTTOM SEDIMENTS ? Illustrates and describes
the type and distribution of bottom sedirnents of the
strait and its approaches.
c. SEISMICITY ? Illustrates and describes the type
of seismic activity in the strait and its approaches.
d. VOLCANISM ? Illustrates and descries the type
of volcanic activity in the strait and its lapproaches.
e. GRAVITY ? Observed, free air, and isostatic
anomalies of gravity.
f. GEOMAGNETISM ? Geomagnetic variations, in-
clination or dip, horizontal intensity, vertical intensity,
and anomalies.
3. WATER LEVEL FLUCTUATIONS
Describes the periodic vertical rise and fall of the
water level in the strait from astronomical influences,
meteorological tides, storm surges, and tsunamis.
Illustrations include cotidal and corange charts, and
tide curves.
4. CURRENTS
Describes surface and subsurface currents within the
strait. Illustrations include prevailing surf4ce currents,
secondary surface currents, tidal currents, subsurface
currents, and current effects on mines.
5. ICE
Information is provided on dates of ice formation and
clearing, ice coverage and concentration, movement,
and physical characteristics.
6. SEA AND SWELL
a. GENERAL ? Summarizes the major features of
sea and swell conditions in the strait and their controls.
b. DISTRIBUTION ? Describes sea and swell condi-
tions by seasons or other appropriate time scale
throughout the strait. Illustrations include sea and
swell roses showing the distribution of heights and
directions, frequency of waves exceeding 5 feet, and
persistence of specified wave conditions.
C. BOTTOM PRESSURE FLTJCTUATION Illustrates
the occurrence of bottom pressure fluctuations (for
various depths) resulting from surface waves.
PAGE 8
JULY 1959
7. SEA WATER CHARACTERISTICS
a. GENERAL ? Discusses major features of the
physical properties of the strait and their controls.
b. WATER TEMPERATURE ? Describes and il-
lustrates mean sea surface and subsurface temperatures
and variations therefrom on an appropriate time scale.
Presents information on the depth and strength of the
thermocline. Variations with depth are shown by
means of typical bathythermograms, vertical profiles,
and subsurface plan views.
C. SALINITY ? Similar treatment to that of 7, b,
Water temperature.
d. DENSITY ? Similar treatment to that of 7, b,
Water temperature.
e. ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY ? Presents informa-
tion on seasonal changes of electrical conductivity with
depth.
f. WATER COLOR AND TRANSPARENCY ? Describes
prevailing water color and transparency of water in the
strait and variations therefrom.
8. UNDERWATER SOUND
a. SOUND SPEED -- Describes and illustrates mean
surface and subsurface sound speeds in the strait and
variations therefrom on an appropriate time scale.
b. SONAR Probable ranges by seasons or other
appropriate time scale are presented for sonars (surface
ship, airborne, and submarine sonar) of all frequencies,
including minehunting types. The effects of trans-
ducer tilt and varying the depth of the transducer
are discussed. Ambient noise and bottom effects,
including reverberation, are described.
C. PASSIVE LISTENING ? Probable ranges obtained
by heralds and submarine listening are presented.
Background noise is described.
d. BIOLOGICAL SOUND ? Discusses sound reflec-
tion, production, and scattering by animals which may
interfere with acoustic operations in the strait.
9. MARINE BIOLOGY
a. BIOLUMINESCENE ? Describes types of organ-
isms, distribution, intensity, and seasonality of bio-
luminescence.
b. VEGETATION -- Describes types and distribu-
tion of marine algae and seagrasses in the strait.
C. FOULING ? Describes types, intensity, and sea-
sons of attachment of biological fouling.
10. OTHER PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Graphic material is presented showing:
a. DURATION OF SUNLIGHT AND TWILIGHT
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959 NIS ON OCEAN AREAS Sit/IffihbakjaiikL
b. COASTAL GEOGRAPHY ? Prominent geographical
features to aid in navigation.
C. OTHER ? Discuss auroras when appropriate.
11. MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL AND COM-
MENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
a. MAP AND CHART APPRAISAL ? An itemized
discussion of the principal marine climatic and oceano-
graphic charts of the Area.
b. COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES ? This Sub-
section serves the following purposes:
To provide an evaluation of the principal source
material used in preparing the Section and thereby
inform the user of the general credibility to be accorded
the intelligence contained in the Section.
To indicate those aspects of the subject about which
information is deficient or unavailable and thereby
provide general guidance for collection effort. In this
connection, only the principal sources actually used are
indicated.
C, D, etc. (other selected straits)
PAGE 9
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1959
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1 1 I
I 1 1 I 1 I I 1
107
KARA
75
90
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
105
1 I I
120 135
ARCTIC
1 1 1
150
ION
OF SO
V IET
45
45
JkatIU__
' AND, .
KASHMiV
(1,,D..1)
V
).x.'\-\ z.,?-?-.,....?
*-NNEPAL ,
? *..--.16ElsfltAN ' '
.....?..., ? , r- 1
(' i
.(PAKliaN ?? L?,
NDI A , (A. r?
? :
BURMA\i'l.e.??
r,....?-i. LAOS.
C 1,..-/-..
Y
SO
CIALIS
?r
MONO
REP
BLICS
OLIA
CHIN A
106-
III
6' A
F
RENG
ANDAMA
CEYLON
A ,L
IS.
NICOBAR IS.
106-I 106-1
ND
THAILAN
4-MBODI
EAST
MACAO,' --
tv% HONO
KONO
CHainan
IETNAM
5 0IJIH
CHINA
?S E A
,...?
BRUNEI ,f BORNEO
M )...AYA ,
1 SAIAWYA:1-75-
.',?\,.,? ---,.._;-SINGAPOI(c\?"..."-.. Cs' r'--
CHINA
SEA
Okinawa; sc:3
AIWAN
? f
BONIN IS.
. VOLCANO IS arcus I.
MARIANA IS.
105-X
PHILIPPINES
14'
A
Sureatre\.
-
S IS.
PALAU IS.
.Halmahera
.*1 Borneo
. I N D
_ ,
1 Jay's ??.,-7,---c5In?
Christmas 1.
105-XI
I GgPes
0? E S I A.
)
r;
0
CEA
106-11
N
Yap
'Guam
CAROLINE IS.
Truk Is.
NETH? ERR. OF
W ,
E OUINEA4 NE culNEA
(In 1:2,15P.to)
PAPUA
RAFURA S A
AUSTR
ALIA
TASMANIk
10
!A
MACQUARIE
90 105
120
115 150
19386 (FioarmigNrE9Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
f
107
Approved ForReLease 1_999/09/21 ? CIA-RIIP7A-ifin5sAnnftinnannnni4
1ST SIBERIAN SEA
100
I I I I-pi I I I I
WPAAMF1
7
St Le?w'rence: I.
165
A
150
1 I ill
R C T
C
E A Li 1- 0 R T
155
120
Illi1111111111-
1 C
E A N
SEA
Il I I ji I 17=1
107
5-IX
T
aarcus I.
, IS.
NE 1 S.
Truk Is.
)1'0.
t: I N u
A
,
?
Al TIAN! l`inc"
Wake
MARSHALL
IS.
Sun.
Atoll
10
VII
PAC
Ocean I.
rLOMOt,; ISLANDS
GILBERT
I F
MIDWAY ISLANDS
105-VI
HAWAIIAN IS.. Hawaii
;?
Palmyra I.
Christmas I.
QUEEN CHARLOTTE IS
Vancodker
I
.67 T
A
UNIT
C
Clipperton I.
C 0 0 4 L
tie Fu
ELLICE IS
Walks Is.
no
NEW HEBRIDES
504
New Caledonia -
a
Norfolk I.
4L-1'
FIJI IS.
Lord Howe
105-XII
TASMAN
E
11)
NEW
ZEALAND'
f
'1L-
SAMOA IS.
?7?KERMADEC 15
' Tongareva
COOK IS.
SOCIETY I
MARQUESAS IS.
105-V
Tahiti
AUSTRAL ISLANDS
TUAMOTU
ARCHIPELAG
Pitcairn I:
Ducie I.
CH' THAN IS
BOUNTY IS
ANTIPODES IS
AUCKLAND IS
105-IV
OCEAN AREAS
NIS 104 ATLANTIC BASIN
NIS 105 PACIFIC BASIN
NIS 106 INDIAN BASIN
NIS 107 ARCTIC BASIN
1(
165
ISO
165
150 135
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
120
105
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
90 75
60 45 30 15
SVERDRU
LI
D D 5 0
R A Y
104-11
OF
NEWFOUNDLAND
-
,M E X IC OF'
STA
TES
AZOR ES
10'
BERMUDAIS.
RTN
104.111
MADEIRA IS.
)
'F.S6
COA
BRITISH - Jamaica
ONDURAS
.r? 'ONDURAS
GUATEUALAVL..
EL SALVADOR)-/
A
8AHAmA1,644
ANT
IC
CANARY IS a
,
SPNISHf
SAHARA.
j.
DOMINICAN
HATTIFREPUBLIC
LEEWARD IS.
?Ar 1BEEAN Rico dUadei0Upe
NI6?RAGUA
Martinique. i WINDWARD I
S E A
? I Barbados
e
OA I _.1."f-) ?
irnoidbaacigo
. rs
TAM\i?;.S
4t- ?"AVENEZUEL
104-1
i?.? COLOMBIA
Easter I.
GALAPAGOS IS
105-111
EIJADOR
A N
GAMBi'
F F
1
MARIANA
lTISH GUI A
1SURLN
NCH GUIANA
104.IV
\p E
tBOLIV 11?L.
tB.R. OF
Ascerw,9..u1NEA
4A.
ISLAS JUAN FERNANDEZ
104-VI
1 1111tIttltitollitt
90
III
Is-
7
UGUAY1/
FALKLAND IS.
104-V
sot
1 1 1 1 1 1 .1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AT LA
- South Georgi I
SOUTH
SANDWICH IS.
11111111111111111111141
75
60 45
30
Approved For Rel, PP79-01055A000300030001-4
19386 (FIRST REVISION, 715 )
15
E
TASMAW
1 1 1
11 I 1 1111
momprimmmar.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1111
I III
I III
15 30
I 1 1 1 1 1 1
' I
I1II
107
45 60
NORWEGIAN
SEA
FAEROE IS,
SHETLAND IS.
OAR
104.X1
ENTS
1111
PC E A. N
tzp
1 1 1 1 1 1 I I
FA
JOSEF LA
S.11(/' EDEN
;-NORWAY
FINLAND .>
ZEMLYA
ORKNEY IS,w'
a - ?' NORTI-1 BALTIC
SEA
DEMI,
_.,4 I E. 1,. 104?X 1. citl -
,r- : -fr--'-'
IRILAND ,)
"?!,. ,,-- ' C.._, _ N -C-c
14. Zone .,
.., Soviet/
POLAND ,..f''
r" GERMANY 1
...,-,
/ j,L....r---- . Eil,
7)
?. ' '."-'''''-'"T?.
. liniS, ,LUX
ii
...,-1. Federal iss CZECH.,-6.. CHANNEL IS, .7-
''').
SEA
?
SO
UNION
CIALIST
011?111MMI
ORTUGA?
TANGIER
SPAIN
-nnoLocco
/awl
C-oricafj ITAL
Sardinia
E D
> MaltS
T6N,ISIA
ALGERIA )
\..
\
LENCH WEST AFRICA
k s. BERIA .
051 N
RUMANIA )
YUGOSLA)1/_,
BULGARIA
LBA I
OF SOVIET
REPUBLICS-
OR C
I
Crete. ,
NEA N
LIBYA
FRENCH AI
i NIGERIA ?EQUATORIAk
AFRICA000 ' \
. 471LBoRO s
..,-4i FR. .
Fernando Po,)-
?zaf...r-----? '
) l
, ? ..._?-??
\
F
RI ACK SEA
TURKEY kr".
SYRIA
c-' LEER
rus
1SRAE IRAQ
') ii.DA
MEW
EGYPT
SU
IRAN
DA Nit
SAU
ARA
Dl
BIA
YEMEN
13.9.N4
MAL
BR!S-61:44--
ETHIOPIA
??
/ ???
o42'
KENYA I
ihELGIAN
1 CONGO
RUANDA.
URUNDI
CABIND
BAH BIN--
,
AT/0k
^n-
ANGOLA
i NORTHERN
1 RHODESIA (ei
, RHOI5ES1/ 49/
SOUTH- \-t. I
WEST plECHIJANALAN-fr?3-(
AFRICA!
N0_ AZILAND
Helena
T
NT
liTristan da Cunt
MACQUAl
GoughA
104-VIII
WALVISBAAI
al of S. Afrl
TANGANYIKA ?.
ZANZIBAR.
MUSCA
AND
OMAN
Socotra
SEYCH ELL
AFGHANISTAN rs?
GWAD-A-g , ?
( Oman)
ARABIAN
SE
LACCADIVE IS
106-IV
00
(Port
MALDIVE IS
CHAGOS -
ARCHIPELAGO
L NYASA ../1
: NYASALPIND
j UNION
.6,SL/IT
OF
SOUTH AFRICc
104-VII
LAND
COMORO IS
MADAGASCAR
5 Maur ilius
c'Rdunio
75
60
45
5
5
30
45
Boundaries are not necessarily those
recognized by the U.S. Government.
I 1I I I I l I I I I I I 1 I il I 1 I I I I 1 1 I 1 I
15
PRINCE EDNARD IS
CROZET IS
011-11C1T1/.1
111111 I II 11111111111111 11111111111111
0 45
KERGUELEN IS. -
-
IIIIIIIIIIIII1
0 SSG - 516 - 5/57
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
INTERNATIONAL COMMUNISM
Part I Introduction
Part II The World Federation of Democratic Youth
Part III The World Federation of Teachers Unions
Part IV The International Union of Students and
International Students Relief
Part V Women's International Democratic Federation
Part VI International Organization of Journalists
Part VII International Association of Democratic Lawyers
Part VIII World Federation of Scientific Workers
Part IX Trade Union International of Transport, Port
and Fishery Workers
Part X International Federation of Resistance Fighters
Part XI The World Peace Council
Part XII The World Federation of Trade Unions
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY. 1957
NIS 108 - International Communism
OUTLINE
Part I. Introduction
SECTION 1. OVERVIEW OF COMMUNIST MOVEMENT
SECTION 2. COMMUNIST DOCTRINE
SECTION 3. COMMUNIST ORGANIZATION AND STRATEGY
Parts II through XII
(The titles of Parts II through XII are given in the list of NIS
Areas.)
SECTION 1.
ORIGIN AND PURPOSE
SECTION 4.
OPERATIONAL STRATEGY AND TACTICS
A.
Communist theory and practice affecting
A.
Major conferences and meetings
front organizations
B.
Major propaganda campaigns and other
B.
Pre-World War II counterparts
activities
C.
Specific factors governing the establish-
ment of the international organization
D.
Establishment of the international organi-
zation
SECTION 5.
NATIONAL AFFILIATES
1. Preparatory work
2. The founding conference
A.
B.
Number and membership
Relations between the international or-
ganization and its affiliates
C.
Role of affiliates by area
SECTION 2.
STRUCTURE AND CONTROL
A.
Framework of the international organiza-
tion
SECTION 6.
RELATIONS WITH OTHER INTERNATIONAL
B.
Major changes in composition and char-
acter
ORGANIZATIONS
C.
Problems of leadership and techniques of
A.
Other front organizations
control
B.
Non-Communist organizations
C.
United Nations and specialized agencies
SECTION 3.
HEADQUARTERS ORGANIZATION AND OPER-
ATIONS
SECTION 7.
PERSONALITIES
A.
Central organization
A.
Directory
B.
c.
Regional liaison bureaus
Functional and other subsidiary bodies
B.
Biographies
D.
Finances
E.
Propaganda media
F.
Training schools
SECTION 8.
COMMENTS ON PRINCIPAL SOURCES
seitomommumms
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
emminminammeft NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
OUTLINE GUIDE
The following outline guide indicates substance and general arrange-
ment. In preparation and typing of manuscript, Standard Edi-
torial Instructions are followed in detail.
Part I. Introduction
Part I is an introduction both to the individual sur-
veys of selected international front organizations to be
published as PARTS II through XII of NIS 108, and to
individual surveys of the Communist movement in
selected NIS Areas to be published as SUPPLEMENT VI
of the appropriate NIS. PART I also serves, in a On-
JULY 1957
eral way, as background for the discussions of Com-
munism in various Sections of the standard CHAPTER V
of the NIS. In scope PART I is concerned with "World
Communism," as a world movement led and directed
by the U.S.S.R., and with any significant other Com-
munist movements.
Section 1. Overview of the Communist Movement
This Section is a broad and evaluative summary Of
the nature, purpose, and scope of the Communist move-
ment and its significance in the current world situation.
The objective is an overview of the movement as a
whole, presenting an integrated survey of its basic
objectives, ideology, strategy, tactics, and methods of
PAGE 2
operation. The discussion indicates the relationships
between organized Communism in other countries and
the national policies of the U.S.S.R. and/or Communist
China, including the role of the international front
organizations and other components dominated by
Moscow.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS 108
JULY 1957
Section 2. Communist Doctrine
This Section is an analytical survey of the basic con-
cepts and tenets of Communism, highlighting those
aspects of Marxist-Leninist theory and of subsequent
doctrinal developments or interpretations which are
significant for an appreciation of present-day Com-
munist policies and tactics. Marx's philosophy of
history, his analysis of capitalism, and his proposals for
the transformation of capitalistic society are described
in pointing out those elements in present-day Com-
munist ideology which originated with Marx. This is
followed by a description of Lenin's principal extensions
and modifications of Marxist theory, his concept of the
Communist Party as the vanguard of the revolution,
and his doctrines regarding strategy and tactics in the
trade unions, parliaments, and other institutions. Sub-
sequent developments in doctrinal aspects and adapta-
tions to circumstances in China and other areas are
evaluated.
Section 3. Communist Organization and Strategy
This Section is an evaluative survey of the historical
development and present characteristics of the organi-
zational structure, strategy and tactics, and supporting
activities of the Communist movement.
A. The Comintern period, 1919-43
The background and development of the Third
International (Comintern) are summarized, including
the relationship between the Comintern and Soviet
foreign policy, between the Comintern and its sub-
sidiaries, and between the Comintern and any signifi-
cant other Communist and Socialist movement, and
the evolution of Communist world strategy up to the
dissolution of the Comintern.
B. The World War II period
The survey continues with the development of Com-
munist organization, strategy, and tactics during the
period from the dissolution of the Comintern to the
establishment of the Cominform in 1947 and the
transition to the "cold war."
C. The Cominform period
The evaluative survey continues with the organiza-
tional, strategic, and tactical shifts during the Comin-
form period, assessing the nature and implications of
the developments in China and Yugoslavia, the death
of Stalin, the organization of NATO and similar sig-
nificant aspects.
D. The post-Cominform period
The dissolution of the Cominform and the meeting
of the 20th Congress of the Communist Party of the
U.S.S.R. are analyzed in terms of the impact of those
events upon the organization and tactics of the Com-
munist movement.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
PAGE 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
aNigiummumwas NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
Parts II through XII
Section I. Origin and Purpose
A. Communist theory and practice affecting
front organizations
This Subsection is introduced by a brief staternent
of the purpose and role of the front organization in the
strategy of the international Communist movement.
(This statement refers to the more detailed treatMent
in the general introduction to this NIS series, Partl of
NIS 108.) In relating general theory to the particular
organization under study, an explanation is to be made
as to why the given target group is considered appro-
priate or useful for exploitation. This Subsection also
presents the factors (political, social, psychological,
economic, historical) which facilitate the work of the
international organization and make the given group
susceptible to Communist influence.
B. Pre-World War II counterparts
This Subsection provides a brief account of pre-
cursors of the subject organization. It discusses the
circumstances of establishment, professed aims, princi-
pal personalities, and main activities and targets. The
accomplishments and failures and the events leading to
and reasons for dissolution of the predecessor organiza-
tion are also discussed. Emphasis is placed through-
out on those aspects of its history which facilitate
analysis and evaluation of the present organization.
C. Specific factors governing the establish-
ment of the international organization
This Subsection is concerned with the international
setting at the time of the establishment of the subject
PAGE 4
JULY 1957
organization, with special reference to particular cir-
cumstances, if any, involved in its creation. The re-
quirements of Soviet policy (and the policy of any other
Communist country, if pertinent) and the immediate
objectives to be attained are treated in this connection.
D. Establishment of the international or-
ganization
1. PREPARATORY WORK
This Subsection deals with the mechanics of estab-
lishing the organization. It explains what groups or
individuals originated the plan, how the first steps were
taken to convoke the founding conference, how poten-
tial participants were approached, and what role the
Soviet Union and national Communist Parties played
at this time. Information is provided on preparatory
work on the local level, with a survey of where meetings
were held.
2. THE FOUNDING CONFERENCE
This Subsection provides information on the date,
place, and participation in the founding conference, the
groups or individuals playing a dominant role, and the
methods used to control or influence the proceedings.
The mood of the conference as reflected in speeches is
to be examined, as well as any evidence of disagreement
and efforts to accommodate conflicting points of view.
The constitution, resolutions, and speeches are con-
sidered, both to determine the professed objectives of
the organization and to uncover any evidence of under-
lying motives.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
N IS 108 4milmimminiaiwa
JULY 1957
Section 2. Structure and Control
A. Framework of the international organi-
zation
This Subsection is concerned with the framework of
the organization and contrasts the formal organization,
as provided for in the constitution, with the actual dis-
tribution of power. The names and memberships of
the constituent bodies are given. Mention important
organizational changes and explain their significance.
Attach chart of principal officeholders.
B. Major changes in composition and char-
acter
This Subsection details any changes in the political
composition of the organization brought about by the
disaffiliation of non-Communist groups or the addition
of orbit or other Communist organizations, by neutral-
izations of non-Communist groups, the exclusion of
dissenters, or, in the case of those organizations which
were not under full Communist control at the time of
establishment, the present degree of control of the
organization by the Communists. Analyze the cir-
cumstances surrounding these changes, the events lead-
ing up to the alteration, the specific factors precipitating
the change, and the international setting, where it is a
factor. Analyze also the effects of such changes on the
policies and tactics of the organization and on other
organizations.
C. Problems of leadership and techniques
of control
This Subsection discusses the various leaders of the
organization in terms of their relative importance, i.e.,
their position and power within the organization and
their role in national organizations in their respective
countries. Evidence of disagreement or tensions
among the leaders and the issues which give rise to fric-
tion are examined, as well as any indications of control
over the leadership by Communist governments. De-
scribe the methods used by the leadership to establish
its control over the various components of the organi-
zation. The allocation of voting strength, manipula-
tion of parliamentary procedures, disciplinary controls
and sanctions (such as the device of expelling deviants)
are examined Methods of coordinating the activities
of the national affiliates or subsidiary bodies (such as
the despatch of central headquarters personnel, con-
ferences, letters of instruction, financial subsidies),
which are treated more completely in SECTION 5, are
mentioned here as part of the control technique. Assess
the strength and vulnerabilities of the organization as
affected by such factors as control and coordination,
flexibility, and cohesion of leadership.
Section 3. Headquarters Organization and Operations
A. Central organization
This Subsection first indicates the successive loca-
tions of the headquarters since the organization's
establishment, with an assessment, if possible, of the
?reasons for the choice of a particular country, and a
discussion of the factors that compelled a relocation.
To facilitate an understanding of the headquarters, a
schematic treatment is offered, supplemented by an
organizational chart, of the secretariat and other units
attached to the central organization, indicating primary
functions and key personnel. The physical plant,
equipment, and facilities available to the headquarters
are described if pertinent to an understanding of its
operations. The adequacy of the headquarters control
in promoting the organization's objectives is evaluated,
and consideration given to elements of weakness arising
out of organizational defects, bureaucratic inefficiency,
etc.
B. Regional liaison bureaus
This Subsection gives information on the regional
offices of the organization which are under the direct
supervision of the central headquarters and which pro-
vide liaison with affiliates or coordinate policy in a
given area. Date of establishment, key personnel,
scope of activities, and effectiveness of operations and
relations with central headquarters are developed.
C. Functional and other subsidiary bodies
This Subsection presents in concise form information
on the important permanent auxiliary international
organizations. Each such organization will be treated
in terms of purpose of formation, date and circum-
stances of establishment, organizational structure, im-
portant personnel, and major functions and activities.
PAGE 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999109/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
mIliminumemem NIS STAND RD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
D. Finances
This Subsection presents information on sources of
revenue, such as contributions from affiliates, subsidies
from Communist countries, support from other organi-
zations, and proceeds of special fund raising campaigns
or methods. It will list available data on expenditures
(operating the secretariat, travel expenses, conference
costs, and the handling of funds if feasible, and analysis
will be made of the use of money to promote tactical
objectives, e.g., subsidies to newly formed affiliates.
E. Propaganda media
This Subsection discusses the propaganda outlets of
the organization. This discussion includes the types
of periodicals issued, frequency of publication, methods
of compilation and editorial supervision, publilhing
facilities used, and scope of distribution. A summary
analysis of content to provide a picture and purpo6.e of
the main periodical would be helpful. Nonperiodical
or special publications (pamphlets, leaflets) will also be
treated briefly in the same general terms. Information
on radio facilities operated by or available to the organi-
zation will provide data on where the station is located,
when operations were begun, frequency of broadcasts,
type of program, and key personnel associated with the
radio. Any information on films made or distributed
under the auspices of the international organization is
also presented.
F. Training schools
This Subsection discusses the training programs
offered by the organization. Where feasible, data are
presented on the purpose of the programs, location of
the schools, teaching personnel, curricula, duration of
courses, selection and average number of trainees, and
methods of financing attendance. Evaluate effective-
ness of the program if possible, by tracing the subse-
quent activities of its graduates as organizers and
propagandists for Communist or Communist-front
organizations.
Section 4. Operational Strategy and Tactics
A. Major conferences and meetings
This Subsection deals chronologically with the most
important gatherings convened by the organization,
both regular organizational meetings as well as special
regional or functional convocations. Participation,
occasion, principal propaganda themes, and signifieant
developments emerging from such meetings in policy,
tactics, or activity are discussed. Discuss programs
for sponsored travel. An evaluation of the propaganda
or other success of these events is made where possible.
Where appropriate a chronological list of major eon-
gresses and meetings is attached.
PAGE 6
B. Major propaganda campaigns and other
activities
This Subsection is concerned with an analysis of the
most important activities and propaganda events (other
than conferences) which the organization has sponsored
or supported. The discussion centers on the purpose
of its campaigns, showing how they may be tied in with
Soviet or other Communist country policy objectives,
the scope of the appeal, and the techniques used.
Assess the net results and particularly the response
elicited from target groups. The Subsection terminates
with a general evaluation of the effectiveness of the
organization as an instrumentality of Soviet or other
Communist policy. Emphasis is placed on its effec-
tiveness in fulfilling its "front" function or securing
non-Communist sympathy and support, and on the
contribution made by its propaganda to the indoctrina-
tion of the population of orbit countries.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
JULY 1957 NIS 108
Section 5. National Affiliates
This Section deals with the national affiliates only
in terms of their relationship to and role within the
international organization; country by country treat-
ment is given in the respective country supplements.
A. Number and membership
This Subsection provides information on the number
of affiliates, numerical strength and countries repre-
sented (in tabular form), and membership totals. An
analysis by area of membership totals and trends,
together with information on the political and social
composition of the membership is included to aid in
assessing the real capabilities of the international
organization.
B. Relations between the international or-
ganization and its affiliates
This Subsection investigates how coordination of
policy and activities is achieved between the inter-
national organization and its affiliates. Control devices
mentioned in SECTION 2 are developed more fully.
Instances of lack of coordination or friction between
the central organization and the leadership of affiliates
are examined.
C. Role of affiliates by area
This Subsection analyzes and compares the func-
tions, role, and accomplishments of the affiliates within
the Communist orbit, in the advanced countries of
the West, and in the underdeveloped areas of the world.
Variations in propaganda content and intensity be-
tween different areas are given. Consideration is given
to those factors affecting the capabilities of the affiliates
as instruments of the international organization such
as changes in political conditions, identification as a
front, hostility of other groups, etc.
Section 6. Relations with other International Organizations
A. Other front organizations
This Subsection examines the means of coordination
that exist between the various international front
organizations, such as participation in joint campaigns,
cosponsorship of meetings, personnel shared, exchange
of information and financial assistance. Formal ar-
rangements for cooperation as contained in charters
and the like are examined with respect to date of
agreement, objectives to be pursued, limits of coopera-
tion, etc.
B. Non-Communist organizations
This Subsection presents a concise account of the
organization's attempts to deal with non-Communist
organizations which share its professed objectives.
The purpose and methods of approach, the degree of
success, and the reactions of the non-Communist organ-
izations thus approached are scrutinized. To aid in
evaluating the effectiveness of the international organi-
zation in working for its professed objectives, as outlined
in its charter or constitution, its operations are com-
pared with those of rival organizations working in the
same field.
C. United Nations and specialized agencies
This Subsection discusses what status, if any, the
international organization has before the United
Nations or any of its specialized agencies, when such
status was acquired, and whether this status has been
challenged. A brief statement of the types of activity
carried on by the front in the framework of the United
Nations is presented.
PAGE 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NIS STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS JULY 1957
Section 7. Personalities
A. Directory
This Subsection lists the names of the officers and
members of the central components of the group tinder
study. A star (*) appears before the name ot each
person whose biography is contained in Subsection B
of this Section. It is anticipated that only in rare cases
will a biography or biographies appear here as well as
in a Country Supplement on Communism. However, if
a member of a front organization is of sufficient signifi-
cance in the Communist movement in the national
scene to be covered in a Supplement, his biography, for
ease of reference, will also appear in the appropriate
International Study.
B. Biographies
This Subsection contains biographies, arranged in
alphabetical order, of the leaders or otherwise influential
individuals in the organization being treated. Biog-
raphies are concise presentations of career data, atti-
tudes, and personality traits. Repetition of identical
background information in several biographies may be
avoided by cross referencing. Sketches open with a
brief statement of the subject's position in the organiza-
tion and in any other group or groups with which he
may be affiliated. Sketches then cover the following
points (not necessarily in the order given) : 1) evaluation
of subject's official or professional status and his
influence and capabilities both within the international
organization and in his home country; 2) important
steps in occupational history or career, travels abroad,
and attendance at international conferences, with
dates; 3) important family, professional, or social con-
nections; 4) actual or potential threats to career.
Biographic information also briefly refers to the
following: 1) place and date of birth; 2) family back-
ground, nationality, and present family; 3) group
affiliation (class, ethnic, or other) ; 4) education, both
formal and at CP schools; 5) publications, languages,
honors, or other accomplishments; and 6) character,
personality, and relations with other key figures of the
international organization.
Section 8. comments on Principal Sources
This Section evaluates for both adequacy and
credibility the sources used in preparing the preceding
Sections, indicating significant gaps in detailed basic
intelligence on the international organization.
A. Evaluation
This Subsection indicates the general adequacy and
credibility of source materials available to meet the
specified requirements as a whole for the particular in-
ternational front organization. The contribution of
major sources selected for inclusion in the List of Prin-
cipal Sources is evaluated, with emphasis on reliability
PAGE 8
as a source of factual data and/or interpretive guid-
ance. Significant gaps in the type of information re-
quired are indicated.
B. List of principal sources
This Subsection lists in the order of the standard
NIS Outline Guide requirements those titles consid-
ered to represent a significant contribution to the de-
tailed basic intelligence requirements of the NIS on
International Communism. Reports and despatches
of the United States field agencies are not listed indi-
vidually unless regarded as major con tri b utions.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030004-416-5/57
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE SURVEY
STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS
NIS MEMOS
NIS Memos are issued by the NIS Committee in connection with
operational matters relating to departmental preparation of NIS
contributions. For this reason, NIS Memos normally are dis-
seminated only to those holders of the Standard Instructions
directly concerned with NIS production.
NIS Memos are numbered consecutively as issued and are to
be filed under this tab in the NIS Standard Instructions. All
previous NIS Memos (NIS Memo No. 1 dated 10 December
1948 through NIS Memo No. 20 dated 20 August 1954) are
hereby canceled and are to be destroyed.
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D.C.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Jj
Pr..1 T
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D.C.
NIS Memo 1
21 January 1958
(Formerly NIS Memo No. 18
dated 12 January 1954)
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: Classification of NIS
The following is a general guide for security classification to be accorded
conversations, correspondence, and production matters pertaining to the aspects
of the NIS program listed below. This guide does not apply to the intelligence
contained in the NIS nor to the classification of the published NIS, which are
accorded the security classification warranted by their substance.
ASPECT CLASSIFICATION
a. The words "NIS program" UNCLASSIFIED
b. NIS Areas, Chapters, Sections, Subsections, UNCLASSIFIED
and Supplements by numerical and/or letter
designation only
c. NIS Areas by name without numerical desig- UNCLASSIFIED
nation
ci NIS Areas, Chapters, Sections, Subsections, CONFIDENTIAL
and Supplements by name accompanied by
numerical and/or letter designations
e. NIS allocations CONFIDENTIAL
f. NIS production schedules
CONFIDENTIAL
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
ameii?sv
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D.C.
NIS Memo No. 2
21 January 1958
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: Scheduling of NIS
1. DEFINITIONS
a. NIS Production Schedule. A list by month of the NIS units scheduled for
production in the current fiscal year, establishing a firm monthly production
commitment for each producing agency.
b. NIS Production Forecast. A list by year of planned NIS unit production
for the three fiscal years following the current fiscal year.
c. NIS Production Requirements. Scheduling of NIS is developed in con-
formity with worldwide priorities and annual production rates of eight equivalent
NIS established by the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and in accordance with agency
capabilities.
2. PROCEDURES
The NIS Committee is responsible for preparing the NIS Production Schedule
and the NIS Production Forecast. A new NIS Production Schedule is prepared
at the close of each fiscal year on the basis of the forecast production. This is
followed by the preparation of a new three-year NIS Production Forecast to pro-
vide a coordinated planning base for NIS collection, production, and maintenance.
3. NIS PRODUCTION SCHEDULE
a. Approximately two months before the close of a fiscal year, each agency
NIS coordinator, in collaboration with the Chapter coordinators in his area of
responsibility, will review the forecast production to establish his agency's pro-
duction proposals for the new fiscal year.
b. It is the responsibility of the Chapter coordinator to effect coordina-
tion with the other producing agencies who are responsible for sections or sub-
sections within the Chapter.
c. On or about the first of June, each agency NIS coordinator will submit
his agency's proposed schedule to the Office of Basic Intelligence (OBI), CIA,
incorporating any current fiscal year defections in the list of sections planned
for the coming fiscal year. This list of sections is to be arranged by Chapter
and by month of submission to facilitate consolidation with similar lists from
the other agencies.
d. OBI/CIA will review these lists to insure that scheduling conforms with
over-all NIS production plans and propose necessary adjustments. After deter-
mination by each agency NIS coordinator of their feasibility, OBI/CIA will con-
solidate the lists into the new schedule.
armiplakuloalaidowmr 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
mmvisoommeimaioadvia.
e. Following approval by the NIS Committee, OBI/CIA will disseminate the
new NIS Production Schedule. Any suggested changes in the NIS Production
Schedule after it has been approved must be placed before the NIS Committee
for consideration and decision. Changes approved will be listed in "Change
Sheets to the NIS Production Schedule" and disseminated to all recipients of the
Schedule.
4. NIS PRODUCTION FORECAST
a. Immediately following NIS Committee approval of the NIS Production
Schedule, OBI/CIA will prepare a list of those NIS units needed to complete
fundamental research and production on high priority areas and to provide a
base for Chapter I production in the new forecast period. This list will be con-
sidered by each producing agency in preparing its forecast proposals.
b. Each agency NIS coordinator, in collaboration with the Chapter coordi-
nators in his area of responsibility, will prepare a proposed list or NIS units
planned for the new forecast period on the basis of previous forecast production
and OBI/CIA recommendations. This list is to be arranged by NIS area for each
of the three forecast years and, in addition, by month for the first forecast year.
c. It is the responsibility of the Chapter coordinator to effect coordination
with other producing agencies who are responsible for sections or subsections
within the Chapter.
d. Agency lists of proposed forecast production are to be submitted to OBI/
CIA on or about 1 September. OBI/CIA will review these lists in the light of
over-all NIS production goals, and propose necessary adjustments. After deter-
mination by each agency NIS coordinator of their feasibility, OBI/CIA will con-
solidate the lists into the new forecast schedule.
e. Following approval by the NIS Committee, OBI/CIA will disseminate
the new NIS Production Forecast, the first year of which is issued separately
as the new tentative NIS Production Schedule. Any suggested changes in the
NIS Production Forecast after it has been approved must be placed before the
NIS Committee for consideration and decision. Changes approved by the NIS
Committee will be listed in "Change Sheets to the NIS Production Forecast"
and disseminated to all recipients of the Forecast.
5. NIS SUBMISSIONS
a. NIS units received in OBI/CIA by the first working day following the
end of the month are credited against an agency's scheduled monthly commit-
ment, provided they are in complete form with all required textual and graphic
material.
b. An NIS unit so credited that requires major revision before publication
because of fundamental change in the area situation may be formally rescheduled
by the NIS Committee and assigned new credit when resubmitted to OBI/CIA.
c. A credited NIS unit in review process on which work is stopped for
reasons directly attributable to the contributing agency is placed in "Suspense"
status. This action nullifies unit credit, which is reinstated upon completion
of necessary action by the contributor.
d. It is essential that NIS contributing agencies meet scheduled commit-
ments on time. Failure to do so creates serious problems, both in the producing
agencies and in OBI/CIA, which tend to adversely affect the quality of NIS
submissions and result in unacceptable time lag between submission and final
publication.
2
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
4emeilmtadomikbialimaii
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D.C.
NIS Memo No. 3
21 January 1958
(Formerly NIS Memo No. 6
dated II August 1949)
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: Progress Reports on the Preparation
and Submission of NIS Material
1. The NIS Committee has prescribed the procedures outlined herein for
reporting the status of NIS production to the Office of Basic Intelligence (OBI),
CIA.
2. The Chapter coordinators submit monthly progress reports to OBI/CIA
on the first working day following the end of each month indicating the status
of production of each section within their respective areas of coordination
responsibility.
3. The status of each NIS section in progress is reported by means of a phase
number covering both text and graphics. The phase number indicates that the
state of preparation of the section is in one of five phases, as follows:
Phase 1?Draft approximately 1/3 complete
Phase 2?Draft approximately 2/3 complete
Phase 3?Draft complete and in process of substantive review by the
producing component
Phase 4?In process of review and coordination by Chapter coordinator
Phase 5?Contribution being prepared for submission to OBI/CIA.
Sections on which work has been suspended or canceled during the month are
indicated by notation on the progress reports.
4. Planning schedules in OBI depend heavily on the anticipated workloads
as reflected in timely and sound progress reports. It is essential, therefore, that
each Chapter coordinator submit accurate progress reports by the specified time
each month.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
mmivoymPedibildiailidim
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D.C.
NIS Memo No. 4
21 January 1958
(Formerly NIS Memo No. 16
dated 5 April 1951)
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: Photographs for the NIS
PREPARATION OF PHOTOGRAPHS
1. Photographs are submitted to the Office of Basic Intelligence (OBI) , CIA,
in 3 complete sets, made up of an original (first generation print, or as near there-
to as possible) and 2 copies. Where such an original is not available, 3 glossy
prints are submitted. The library from which the photographs were acquired
and the negative file numbers for the photographs are submitted in the form of
a list.
2. Excessive enlargement of photographs is to be avoided.
3. High altitude aerial photographs carry a north arrow and in addition,
if vertical photography, a bar scale.
4. When photographs originally have foreign annotations, the annotations
are retained and translated or explained in the caption.
5. It has been necessary to spend many man-hours repairing photographs
damaged as a result of carelessness in initial processing. In several instances
photographs were damaged beyond repair, and replacements had to be ordered.
To relieve this situation the following items should be carefully watched:
a. Captions. Captions are not attached to the face of the print. This
often obscures important foreground detail, and the removal of such captions
mars the surface of the print.
b. Defacement. Photoprints which have been defaced by ink smears, or
in any other manner, may not be usable. Forwarding such prints to OBI/CIA
may constitute transmittal of an incomplete item.
c. Impressions. Notes made on a worksheet laid over a print result in
impressions on the face of the print. This is to be avoided since such impres-
sions are often picked up in the process of reproduction.
d. Annotations. Frequently all annotations on a print will be done with
white ink, or with black ink, regardless of the tone of background areas. While
sufficiently legible on the original print, contrast tends to lessen in the process
of reproduction, and white lettering on light areas and black lettering on dark
areas become extremely difficult to read on the finished product. To eliminate
this problem annotations are prepared on an overlay which is keyed to the
photograph.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
e. Margins of Prints. Photographs are submitted untrimmed with white
margins where a margin is normal to photo printing procedure; aerial photo-
graphs are an exception.
f. Bar Scales. Appropriately scaled bar scales are used on vertical aerial
photographs and placed on the print so as to avoid overprinting important
detail.
SELECTION OF PHOTOGRAPHS
6. The following factors are considered in selecting NIS photographs:
a. Photographs inevitably lose much in clarity and sharpness in reproduc-
tion. Details which are fairly clear in the original may either become indistinct
or completely lost in the final publiaation. For this reason it is desirable that
photographs submitted as originals for NIS be first generation prints or as
near thereto as possible and that they be clear, sharp, and definite in detail.
A line drawing derived from a source photograph will be submitted when the
original photograph is of inadequate reproduction quality.
b. When a photograph is "lifted" from a publication, the source is to be
noted on the back in case it is necessary to go back to the original for satis-
factory reproduction copy.
SOURCES OF PHOTOGRAPHS
7. Contributors are urged to use the following sources in procuring photo-
graphs for NIS. A brief description of the type of coverage available is listed
under each source.
2
A. Central Intelligence Agency
Graphics Register (Code 143 Ext 2657)
This source consists of a large collection of ground and personality photo-
graphs, worldwide in coverage. The files are organized by country, political
division within the country, and city name within the political division. A
visual index file system permits selection of pertinent subjects by reference
to color tabs. New photographs are constantly being added to these files.
B. Department of the Army
(1) U.S. Army Photographic Agency
Still Picture Library
Room 5A486, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 56990)
These files consist almost entirely of official Signal Corps photography
which is indexed by subject matter and source. They include photographs
of Army installations, foreign inStallations, military government activities,
and foreign personalities, and are largely filed in looseleaf binders by subject.
(2) ACSI, Director of Foreign Intelligence
Intelligence Document Branch, Photo Section
Room 2D533, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 55439)
This section has an index of the photographic enclosures received in Army
attache reports. The photos are filed by subject and by geographic co-
ordinates.
(3) Army Map Service
Photo Coverage Branch
Room 324, 6500 Brooks Lane, N.W. (Code 1249 Ext 416 or 337)
This file contains photographic material on a worldwide basis and is
arranged by degree squares. Photographs are received from the various
Engineer Detachments, and frorn attaches in response to specific requests
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
(N rs, TT TT% WT n, T A
made at briefings. This file does not duplicate other IAC photographic
holdings.
C. Department of the Navy
(1) ONI, Photo and Graphic Unit (0p-992 H1)
Room 5E683, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 54252)
This source consists of a voluminous collection of photographs of Navy
interest and a vast quantity of aerial mapping photography. The ground
photography is mounted on cards which indicate source and subject.
(2) Naval Photographic Center
Still Picture Library
Naval Air Station, Anacostia, D.C. (Code 134 Ext 245)
Aerial and ground photographs of naval and marine stations and air
facilities throughout the world. Annual aerial coverage of these establish-
ments and adjacent areas is made by the Navy and sent to this library for
retention. Foreign personalities and ships are also included.
(3) Bureau of Yards and Docks
Yards and Docks Annex, Room 1C-29 (Code 11 Ext 77373)
Ground and aerial photography of construction at naval establishments.
Aerial photographic reports of naval establishments throughout the world.
D. Department of the Air Force
(1) Directorate for Targets, AFCIN 3
Target Analysis Division
Graphics Research Section
Tempo U, Room 2301 (Code 11 Ext 65818)
The staff of this section visits, surveys, and evaluates all photographic
collections within the Washington area and occasionally makes similar in-
vestigations in the field. It does not maintain files of the procured photo-
graphs since these are turned over to the requesting office. However, NIS
contributors may avail themselves of the information accumulated by this
staff.
(2) Directorate for Collection and Dissemination
Reconnaissance Branch, AFCIN-1A2
Room 143, The Pentagon, Annex 3 (Code 11 Ext 74172)
This branch issues requirements for aerial photography to be flown by the
Air Force.
(3) Photograph Records and Services Division
Aeronautical Chart and Information Center
Room 1E394, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 72143)
The Division is charged with the responsibility for maintaining indices and
negative files for all USAF photography. It has established the Central Film
Library for purposes of maintaining the negative files and for servicing re-
quests from authorized agencies. It also has a print library where selected
prints may be obtained.
(4) Military Capability Division (West)
Air Facilities Branch (West)
Room 210, The Pentagon, Annex 3 (Code 11 Ext 72143)
This branch is organized by area with the air facilities of each area the
primary concern of the officer in charge. The files contain complete air
facilities information, including photographs, which are assembled in folders,
with a folder for each facility. The photographic files contain excellent
t.J IJ IN 1 I1L 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
melePsPomoaaai,
low-level coverage of recent date on seaplane bases, airfields and landing
strips. This coverage is not confined to air facilities alone but includes good
approach photography, together with fairly large-scale local maps which
facilitate the location of any specific area.
E. Department of Commerce ,
Coast and Geodetic Survey
Room 3109, Commerce Bldg. (Code 112 Ext 3481)
Vertical photography of the coastal areas of the territories of the United
States.
F. Department of Agriculture
(1) Foreign Agricultural Service
South Agriculture Building
14th & Independence Ave., S.W. (Code 111 Ext 5026)
Photographs of the coordination aspects of American production with
other countries. Also includes foreign trade in agricultural commodities,
trade commissioners' activities and efforts at land utilization, and training
centers in farm management in Latin America.
(2) Forest Service
South Agriculture Building
14th & Independence Ave., S.W. (Code 111 Ext 4579)
Photographic coverage includes forest conservation, such as timber man-
agement, forest fire control, erosion, and flood damage in the territories of
the United States, and in Asia, Africa, and Europe.
G. Other Sources
The photographic libraries of the U.S. Information Agency and the Inter-
national Cooperation Administration are also available through the CIA
Graphics Register. In the main these libraries contain photographs that
highlight the various assistance programs carried on by the U.S. Government.
4 mlill?tiPPPMEMPWWITIF
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
APPENDIX A TO NIS MEMO NO. 4
SOURCES OF PHOTOGRAPHS
JANUARY 1962
Analysts have access through existing exchange arrangements to the following
sources in procuring photographs for NIS. A brief description of the type of
coverage available is listed under each source.
A. Central Intelligence Agency
Graphics Register (Code 143 Ext 7230)
This library consists of a large collection of ground and personality photo-
graphs, worldwide in coverage. Sources utilized by the Graphics Register
include domestic commercial producers and distributors, illustrated maga-
zine publishing houses, official and private travelers, foreign publications, as
well as Graphics Coordinators in over 150 Foreign Service posts throughout
the world.
The files are organized by country, political division within the country,
and city name within the political division. A visual index file system per-
mits selection of pertinent subjects by reference to color tabs. New photo-
graphs are constantly being added to these files.
Special forms for indicating photographic requirements to Graphics Reg-
ister may be obtained from OBI/CIA.
B. Department of the Army
(1) U.S. Army Photographic Agency
Still Picture Library
Room 5A486, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 56990)
These files consist almost entirely of official Signal Corps photography
which is indexed by subject matter and source. They include photographs
of Army installations, foreign installations, military government activities,
and foreign personalities, and are largely filed in looseleaf binders by subject.
(2) ACSI, Administrative Division
Intelligence Document Branch, Photo Section
Room 2D533, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 55439)
This section has an index of the photographic enclosures received in Army
attache reports. The photos are filed by subject and by geographic coordi-
nates.
(3) Army Map Service
Photo Services Division
Room 101, Ruth Building, 6500 Brooks Lane, N. W.
(Code 140 Ext 416 or 337)
This file contains photographic material on a worldwide basis and is ar-
ranged by degree squares. Photographs are received from the various Engi-
neer Detachments, and from attaches in response to specific requests made
at briefings. This file does not duplicate other Intelligence Agencies photo-
graphic holdings.
C. Department of the Navy
Commanding Officer
U.S. Navy Photographic Interpretation Center
Technical Services Department
Washington 25, D. C.
(Code 199, Extension 308)
This source consists of a voluminous collection of photographs of Navy in-
terest and a vast quantity of aerial mapping photography. The ground
rir"T"'ITIAL 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
gmeiggivaiNipagswadmpaim
photography is mounted on cards which indicate source and subject. Photog-
raphy of foreign ships and naval personalities may be procured through
this source. Exploitation of Navy photography for intelligence purposes
should be conducted through this source.
D. Department of the Air Force
(1) Air Force Intelligence Center
Electronics Data Processing Division
Research Support Unit (Cartographic)
Bldg.-B Arlington Hall Station
Arlington, Va. (Code 189 Ext 2353)
The staff of this section visitS, surveys, and evaluates all photographic col-
lections within the Washington area and occasionally makes similar investi-
gations in the field. It does not maintain files of the procured photographs
since these are turned over to the requesting office. However, NIS contribu-
tors may avail themselves of the'information accumulated by this staff.
(2) Directorate for Collection
Requirements Division
Room 209, Annex 3, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 74172)
This branch issues requirements for aerial photography to be flown by
the Air Force.
(3) Photograph Records and Services Division
Aeronautical Chart and Information Center
Midway Building, 24th & Okla., N. E. (Code 11 Ext 66456)
This Division is charged with the responsibility for maintaining indices
of all Department of Defense aerial photography and the negative files
for all U.S. Army and U.S. Air Force aerial photography. It has established
the Central Film Library for purposes of maintaining the negative files and
for servicing requests for authiorized agencies. It also has a print library
where selected prints may be obtained.
(4) Air Force Intelligence Center
Electronics Data Processing Division
Data and Production Control Branch
Bldg.-B Arlington Hall Station
Arlington, Va. (Code 189 Ext 638)
This branch is organized by area with the air facilities of each area the
primary concern of the officer in charge. The files contain complete air
facilities information, including photographs, which are assembled in folders,
with a folder for each facility, The photographic files contain excellent
low-level coverage, of recent date, on seaplane bases, airfields and landing
strips. This coverage is not confined to air facilities alone but includes
good approach photography, together with fairly large-scale local maps
which facilitate the location of any specific area.
E. Department of Commerce
Coast and Geodetic Survey
Room 3109, Commerce Bldg. (Code 112 Ext 3481)
Vertical photography of the coastal areas of the territories of the United
States.
F. Other Sources
The photographic libraries of the U.S. Information Agency and the Agency
for International Development are also available through the CIA Graphics
Register. In the main these libraries contain photographs that highlight
the various assistance programs carried on by the U.S. Government.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
eke It J.1 J.1 J. .L
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
NIS Memo No. 4
24 November 1959
(Supersedes NIS Memo No. 4
dated 21 January 1958)
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: Photography for the NIS
1. Increased exploitation of photography is an important objective in Main-
tenance of the NIS.
2. A key factor in the accomplishment of this objective is timely action by an-
alysts in determining and initiating photographic requirements both for research
purposes and for illustration of the printed NIS. These requirements provide
the basis for action by photographic procurement components in exploiting ex-
isting holdings and undertaking appropriate field collection. Appendix A to
NIS Memo No. 4 is a comprehensive listing of sources of photographs for use in
the NIS.
PROCUREMENT OF PHOTOGRAPHS
3. General procedures to be followed by analysts, subject to differences in the
photographic requirements of each NIS unit and to established departmental
channels, are:
a. Determining requirements ? A survey of photographic requirements is
an essential phase of the initial planning by the analyst for the production of
each NIS unit. This is particularly applicable to Maintenance production where
identifying photographic deficiencies in the previously published unit is part of
the Maintenance effort to achieve substantial qualitative improvement. The
survey establishes both the subject areas requiring photography as a basic re-
search tool and those topical aspects requiring illustrative photography for ef-
fective presentation of the subject in the printed NIS unit. The survey enables
the analyst to prepare a list of specific photographic requirements, which may
be amended as preparation of the unit progresses, and to provide for the lead
time essential for effective exploitation of existing holdings and of facilities for
additional collection.
b. Examining available holdings ? The main photographic requirements as
determined by the analyst are the basis for search of available photography,
both within the contributing agency and at appropriate sources listed in Ap-
pendix A. Factors considered in the examination of available photography are
the intelligence value for the NIS unit being produced, the reproduction quality
of the prints, and the recency of coverage. Other considerations being equal, the
most recent photography available is selected. This search enables the analyst
to determine the adequacy of the available photography, and to identify specific
photographic requirements for collection action.
mirwaikllloggarrin
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
c. Initiating additional collection ?Effective exploitation of photographic
collection capabilities available to NIS contributors is facilitated by stated re-
quirements that are timely and meaningful. Collection action should be ini-
tiated by the analyst as early in the production process as feasible. In general,
the results of photographic collection are in proportion to the lead time allowed
by the collection deadline. Collection requests should be as specific as possible
regarding the subject to be covered, the type of photography preferred (e.g.,
ground, low oblique aerial), and other pertinent details. This assists photo-
graphic intelligence specialists in searching such sources as commercial hold-
ings, and in initiating field collection where feasible. The components identified
in Appendix A have personnel experienced in photography procurement who
will assist the analyst with his initial survey and on request throughout the col-
lection period.
d. Selecting and integrating photography ? As requested photography is
received, it is reviewed by the analyst in terms of final selection for use in the
NIS unit being produced. The objective of the analyst is to judiciously evaluate
and select photography for effective integration with the text and other graphic
items.
PREPARATION OF PHOTOGRAPHS
4. Photographs are submitted to the Office of Basic Intelligence (OBI/CIA) in
3 complete sets, made up of an original (first generation glossy print, or as near
thereto as possible) and 2 copies. Where such an original is not available, 3
glossy prints are submitted. The library from which the photographs were
acquired and the negative file nuinbers for the photographs are submitted in
the form of a list.
5. Excessive enlargement of photographs is to be avoided.
6. High altitude aerial photographs carry a north arrow and in addition, if
vertical photography, a bar scale.
7. When foreign annotations are retained on photographs, the annotations are
translated or explained in the caption.
8. It has been necessary for OBI/CIA to spend many man-hours repairing
photographs damaged as a result of carelessness in initial processing. In sev-
eral instances photographs were damaged beyond repair, and replacements had
to be ordered. To relieve this situation the following items should be carefully
watched:
a. Captions ? Captions are not attached to the face of the print. This
often obscures important foreground detail, and the removal of such captions
mars the surface of the print.
b. Defacement ? Photoprints which have been defaced by ink smears, or in
any other manner, may not be usable. Forwarding such prints to OBI/CIA may
constitute transmittal of an incomplete item.
c. Impressions ? Notes inadej on a worksheet laid over a print result in im-
pressions on the face of the print. This is to be avoided since such impressions
are often picked up in the process of reproduction.
d. Annotations ?Frequently all annotations on a print will be done with
white ink, or with black ink, regardless of the tone of background areas. While
sufficiently legible on the original print, contrast tends to lessen in the process
of reproduction, and white lettering on light areas and black lettering on dark
areas become extremely difficult to read on the finished product. To eliminate
this problem, annotations are prepared on an overlay which is keyed to the
photograph.
2 4?10114111111441VI
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
? ? ?
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
4?1111110101111014100111
APPENDIX A TO NIS MEMO NO. 4
24 November 1959
SOURCES OF PHOTOGRAPHS
Analysts have access through existing exchange arrangements to the following
sources in procuring photographs for NIS. A brief description of the type of
coverage available is listed under each source.
A. Central Intelligence Agency
Graphics Register (Code 163 Ext 2657)
This library consists of a large collection of ground and personality photo-
graphs, worldwide in coverage. Sources utilized by the Graphics Register
include domestic commercial producers and distributors, illustrated maga-
zine publishing houses, official and private travelers, foreign publications, as
well as Graphics Coordinators in over 150 Foreign Service posts throughout
the world.
The files are organized by country, political division within the country,
and city name within the political division. A visual index file system per-
mits selection of pertinent subjects by reference to color tabs. New photo-
graphs are constantly being added to these files.
Special forms for indicating photographic requirements to Graphics Reg-
ister may be obtained from OBI/CIA.
B. Department of the Army
(1) U.S. Army Photographic Agency
Still Picture Library
Room 5A486, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 56990)
These files consist almost entirely of official Signal Corps photography
which is indexed by subject matter and source. They include photographs
of Army installations, foreign installations, military government activities,
and foreign personalities, and are largely filed in looseleaf binders by subject.
(2) ACSI, Administrative Division
Intelligence Document Branch, Photo Se6tion
Room 2D533, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 55439)
This section has an index of the photographic enclosures received in Army
attache reports. The photos are filed by subject and by geographic coordi-
nates.
(3) Army Map Service
Photo Services Division
Room 101, Ruth Building, 6500 Brooks Lane, N. W.
(Code 140 Ext 416 or 337)
This file contains photographic material on a worldwide basis and is ar-
ranged by degree squares. Photographs are received from the various Engi-
neer Detachments, and from attaches in response to specific requests made
at briefings. This file does not duplicate other Intelligence Agencies photo-
graphic holdings.
C. Department of the Navy
ONI, Photo and Graphic Section (0p-922H1)
Navy Department Service Center
8th and S. Court House Road, Arlington, Va.
(Code 11 Ext 43125)
This source consists of a voluminous collection of photographs of Navy in-
terest and a vast quantity of aerial mapping photography. The ground
0 O IVY
SI A. .1.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1.0 1-1 11 J. J. U 1.1 11 1 J. 11.Li
photography is mounted on cards which indicate source and subject. Photog-
raphy of foreign ships and naval personalities may be procured through
this source. Exploitation of Navy photography for intelligence purposes
should be conducted through this source.
D. Department of the Air Force
(1) Air Force Intelligence Center
Electronics Data Processing Division
Research Support Unit (Cartographic)
Bldg.-B Arlington Hall Station
Arlington, Va. (Code 189 Ext 2353)
The staff of this section visits, surveys, and evaluates all photographic col-
lections within the Washington area and occasionally makes similar investi-
gations in the field. It does not maintain files of the procured photographs
since these are turned over to the requesting office. However, NIS contribu-
tors may avail themselves of the information accumulated by this staff.
(2) Directorate for Collection
Requirements Division
Room 209, Annex 3, The Pentagon (Code 11 Ext 74172)
This branch issues requirements for aerial photography to be flown by
the Air Force.
(3) Photograph Records and Services Division
Aeronautical Chart and Information Center
Midway Building, 24th & Okla., N. E. (Code 11 Ext 66456)
This Division is charged with the responsibility for maintaining indices
and negative files for all USAF photography. It has established the Cen-
tral Film Library for purposes of maintaining the negative files and for
servicing requests for authorized agencies. It also has a print library where
selected prints may be obtained.
(4) Air Force Intelligence Center
Electronics Data Processing Division
Data and Production Control Branch
Bldg.-B Arlington Hall Station
Arlington, Va. (Code 189 Ext 638)
This branch is organized by area with the air facilities of each area the
primary concern of the officer in charge. The files contain complete air
facilities information, including photographs, which are assembled in folders,
with a folder for each facility.. The photographic files contain excellent
low-level coverage, of recent date, on seaplane bases, airfields and landing
strips. This coverage is not confined to air facilities alone but includes
good approach photography, together with fairly large-scale local maps
which facilitate the location of any specific area.
E. Department of Commerce
Coast and Geodetic Survey
Room 3109, Commerce Bldg. (Code 112 Ext 3481)
Vertical photography of the coastal areas of the territories of the United
States.
F. Other Sources
The photographic libraries of the U.S. Information Agency and the In-
ternational Cooperation Admipistration are also available through the CIA
Graphics Register. In the main these libraries contain photographs that
highlight the various assistance programs carried on by the U.S. Govern-
ment.
2
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
111 J.J
e. Margins of prints?Photographs are submitted untrimmed with white
margins where a margin is normal to photo printing procedure; aerial photo-
graphs are an exception.
f. Bar scales Appropriately scaled bar scales are used on vertical aerial
photographs and placed on the print so as to avoid overprinting important
detail.
9. In selecting NIS photographs, the following factors are considered:
a. Photographs inevitably lose much in clarity and sharpness in reproduc-
tion. Details which are fairly clear in the original may either become indis-
tinct or completely lost in the final publication. For this reason photographs
submitted as originals for NIS should be first generation prints (or as near
thereto as possible) and should be clear, sharp, and definite in detail. A line
drawing derived from a source photograph is submitted when the original photo-
graph is of inadequate reproduction quality.
b. When a photograph is reproduced from a publication, the source is noted
on the back in case it is necessary to go back to the original for satisfactory
reproduction copy.
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
10. When an NIS unit involving photography is completed and forwarded to
the Office of Basic Intelligence (OBI/CIA) , the accompanying letter of trans-
mittal indicates any special problems encountered or deficiencies still existing
which are incident to procurement from sources listed in Appendix A and
which are not appropriate for inclusion in the Comments on Principal Sources
subsection of the contribution.
moligildOPPEOLPIPTIrrrm 3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D.C.
NIS Memo No. 5
21 January 1958
(Formerly NIS Memo No. 2
dated 21 March 1949)
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: BGN Name Recommendations for
NIS Material
NIS contributors are responsible for insuring that all geographic names used
in the NIS are those approved by the United States Board on Geographic Names
(BGN). Gazetteers are issued for each NIS Area for use by contributors in
preparing NIS contributions. Where contributing agencies use geographic
names not included in published NIS Gazetteers the following procedure applies:
(1) Name requests are prepared in triplicate in the form of lists similar to
the sample and forwarded to the Publication Division, OBI/CIA.
(2) A separate list is prepared for each NIS Area.
(3) Entries are triple spaced with only one column of names per page; variant
spellings and designations may be indicated in this column. Alpha-
betical arrangement of names is desirable. If a list includes names
obtained from maps or other sources not generally available, these sources
are listed and keyed to the name.
(4) Approximate coordinates are provided in the second column.
(5) The third column is reserved for BGN recommendations. It is important
that adequate space be left on the page for this purpose.
(6) Where possible, a map with required names underscored and additional
names plotted accompanies name lists.
Desired completion date of name editing is indicated on all lists. The
Publication Division, OBI/CIA, will assign priorities in accordance with
the NIS Production Schedule and consultation with the U.S. Board on
Geographic Names and will notify the requester when desired completion
dates cannot be met.
(7)
(8) Maps, corrected to show errors of name application, and original copies
of edited lists are returned by Publication Division, OBI/CIA, to the
requesting office.
mormaaiodommwriPM1 1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Names in French West Indies
Name: Designation
Baie Mahaut: bay
Guthavia: town
Le Palun: reservoir
La Selle (Laselle) : plantation
La Verge: island
Le Ravonot: stream
Laugmont (Longmont) : town
Little Bay: cove
2
.L. .L 1 1-1 LI J. 1
Sample List
Approximate
Coordinates
16?17' 61?36'
17?54' 62 ? 52'
14?32' 60?58'
14?47' 61?00'
15?50' 61?36'
16?15' 61018'
16?01' 61036'
15?52' 61?35'
BGN Recommendation
Baie Mahault
Gustavia
La Palun
La Salle (Lasalle)
La Vierge
Le Ravinot
Longmont (Laugmont)
Petite Anse (Little Bay)
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
NIS Memo No. 6
27 May 1958
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: NIS Commendations
1. The NIS Committee considers the 10th Anniversary of the NIS program
an appropriate occasion to institute the annual award of NIS commendations
to those who have made outstanding contributions to the program.
2. Each NIS Committee member may nominate by 30 June of each year
five persons from his agency for this commendation. The NIS Committee will
consider these nominations at its first meeting after 1 July each year and select
those who, in the opinion of the Committee, fully merit this distinction.
3. The annual list of awards will be published in the official proceedings of
the Committee and individual letters of commendation, together with engraved
certificates, will be presented to the recipients in appropriate ceremony.
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
.1.1J.ELLN
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D. C.
NIS Memo No. 7
10 March 1959
(Formerly NIS Memo No. 20
dated 20 August 1954)
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: Maintenance of NIS
1. Each NIS unit, as soon as completed for publication, is placed on an ac-
tive Maintenance basis by the agency or agencies with responsibility for the unit.
2. The agency concerned is responsible for an adequate supporting collection
effort, for a continuing appraisal to determine when there is sufficient basis for
Maintenance replacement of the published unit, and for scheduling the produc-
tion of a Maintenance unit considered to be required.
3. Production of a Maintenance replacement for a published NIS unit is un-
dertaken on the basis of any one or combination of the following criteria:
a. Fundamental changes within or affecting the NIS area, or in the in-
telligence appraisal of the area;
b. Availability of data to fill important intelligence gaps in the published
unit;
c. More recent detailed data of a significant nature;
d. New NIS requirements in response to policy, planning, or high level op-
erational needs.
4. Major changes within an NIS area, developments significantly affecting
relationships with other countries, or significantly revised intelligence evalua-
tions of the area situation are a primary occasion for production of a Mainte-
nance unit. Maintenance on this basis is undertaken, however, only after suffi-
cient opportunity to permit identification and evaluation of the changes as being
fundamental rather than of relatively transient or secondary significance.
5. In addition to the standing requirement for systematic and continuous
collection of basic information for NIS purposes, each successive Maintenance
unit is expected to fill important intelligence gaps.
6. Statistical and other detailed data more recent than those in the published
unit normally are incorporated in a Maintenance production, but Maintenance
primarily based on more recent data requires that such data be of significant in-
telligence value.
1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
c_Iww-t-t-t-r7,1-11?TrrtT A T
7. Maintenance provides opportunity to develop and incorporate material to
meet new policy, planning, dr high level operational intelligence requirements
which are considered by the NIS Committee to be within NIS scope and produc-
tion capabilities.
8. Production of successive Maintenance units presents both opportunity
and requirement for thorough re-examination of all aspects of the content and
intelligence adequacy of previously published units. Successive Maintenance
units are expected to reflect progressive improvement in methodologies and effec-
tiveness of basic intelligence collection, research, coordination, and NIS presen-
tation.
9. For all phases of Maintenance planning and production, the facilities of
the Office of Basic Intelligence (OBI/CIA) are available to NIS contributors.
OBI maintains a special file on each published NIS unit which contains sugges-
tions relative to Maintenance revision of the unit. Early in the process of plan-
ning for a Maintenance unit contributors are expected to consult these files and
confer with OBI specialists on experience with previous units, analysis of require-
ments, and presentation and scheduling considerations, to facilitate both con-
tributor preparation and OBI processing of NIS Maintenance.
10. As in other aspects of the NIS program, cooperative experience with
Maintenance production is expected to develop principles and procedures for
progressively advancing the accomplishment of the NIS mission.
2
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
1-1 TIk
VAS
CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY
Office of Basic Intelligence
Washington, D.C.
NIS Memo No. 8
25 August 1959
MEMORANDUM FOR: NIS Contributors
SUBJECT: Writing for the NIS
The following was prepared by Mr. W. Stewart Lester, Jr., NIS Coordinator
in the Office of Research and Analysis for American Republics, Bureau of Intel-
ligence and Research, Department of State, for analysts of that Office producing
NIS contributions. These observations, based on extensive experience in pro-
duction for the NIS, are disseminated to recipients of other NIS Memos as having
general applicability to the preparation of NIS contributions.
WRITING FOR THE NIS
A. GENERAL
In the work that we do writing is by far the most important means of
communication. It is most frequently the means by which we discharge our
responsibilities and it is one of the principal bases upon which our effectiveness
and usefulness are judged. Our knowledge and understanding of a country
may be excellent, we may know well the objectives and operations of its political
parties, we may know its banking system and appreciate its balance of payments
problems, but if we cannot convey to our readers in an effective manner the
knowledge and wisdom that we have, these assets are of little value. In the
final analysis we must write well in order to fulfill the obligations that our
jobs place upon us.
NIS writing requires basically the qualities that are needed for most report
writing. In addition, like most other specialized types of writing, it has a few
requirements that are peculiar to itself. Some of these requirements have to
do with the organization and style, others are concerned with structural details
and format. The good writer?the one who contributes most effectively to NIS
production?must be well-acquainted with both the fundamental requirements
of good writing and the specialized requirements of NIS, both those of a general
nature and those of specific detail.
The good writer?like the good staff worker?will (to the best of his ability)
prepare a finished draft. He will not use his branch chief, nor the various
reviewers and editors beyond the branch, as crutches to lean upon. His fin-
ished draft will require a minimum of alteration. The best written papers are
susceptible to improvement thraggh the reading by another well-informed per-
son and by the exchange of ideas and sharpening of one's focus. The editors
should be able in such cases to make helpful suggestions for more effective
presentation, point out an occasional inconsistency, and correct errors in style
'Li IL V 1. .1
1
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
-. !AL UN'
and format. If extensive editing is required, however, frustration, heartache,
time lost, and a record of poor performance are the inevitable consequences.
Many manhours are lost because reports have to be edited in great detail,
revised, added to, retyped. Granted that some of this editing is unnecessary
or ill-advised, under existing circumstances most of it is necessary. But much
of it could be avoided through greater forethought, careful preparation, consul-
tation, checking and rechecking, looking at one's own paper after it is drafted,
with a new perspective and an objective eye. The quality of NIS drafts received
by reviewing officers varies enormously, far more than can be accounted for
by differences in ability. It seerns certain, therefore, that an analyst, by con-
centrating upon the standards of good writing, the basic requirements of NIS,
and the special rules that apply to NIS writing, can save himself and others
much time and at the same time do a more effective job.
What are the qualities of a well-written report? The more important are
few in number, but they are essential. A research report should be:
1) accurate in its facts and sound in its interpretations;
2) clear and concise in its presentation;
3) complete in terms of the stated and known requirements;
4) objective.
In addition, an NIS report must conform without much deviation to the
organizational requirements laid down in the National Intelligence Survey Stand-
ard Instructions and established through the precedents of published sections.
In style, it must be straight-fOrward, matter-of-fact, devoid of flourishes. It
must avoid extraneous discussion, speculation, and recommendation. It must
be a report whose main feature'S can be quickly grasped by a reader unfamiliar
with the subject and one which, at the same time, can be used for reference as
to detail needed in policy making or operations. (How this two-fold purpose may
be accomplished will be indicated below.) The writer must constantly strive
to do as much as possible for his potential reader. For example, valid general
conclusions, relevant to the subject under discussion, should be stated, not
left to the reader to infer or guess.
B. BASIC REQUIREMENTS OF GOOD WRITING
1. Accuracy
It seems almost superfluotts to discuss this requirement, yet hasty work
and insufficient diligence in digging out the facts, failure to check information
from one source against that of another, and failure sometimes to use the
most reliable sources frequently do result in error. Accuracy can best be ob-
tained by checking the original source wherever possible. A copy of a consti-
tution, for example, is for most purposes to be preferred to what somebody has
written about it, though the latter may be highly useful. Inaccuracies are
frequently found in the spelling of names and places (especially in the failure to
include accents), but most often occur in statistical data. Frequently, the latter
result from careless copying at one stage or another. Checking, rechecking,
and proofing are essential to avoid this type of error.
2. Clarity and conciseness
a. Clarity?After accuracy the first aim in any report writing is to
state facts, describe situations, or convey ideas so that the reader will under-
stand?or to look at it another way?so that the reader cannot misunderstand.
Because readers of NIS are presumably busy people, a related aim is to write
so that the reader will understand as quickly and easily as possible.
2 Ilmtnitm.1111?101.111.1?0401111dimiitiiiiim
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
What can be done to insure clarity?
1) Avoid long and complicated sentences.
2) Use the simplest language that will adequately convey the
thought.
3) Be as precise as possible. (This involves not only the choice
of the right words and the proper arrangement of them, but
implies a clear understanding by the writer himself.)
4) Paragraph properly.
a) Does each paragraph contain only one main thought?
b) Is the thought developed adequately?
C) Is the paragraph not too long, not too short?
d) Does the paragraph begin with a topic sentence that is a
key to the whole paragraph?
5) Present facts and ideas in the most effective order. (The
organization of a piece of writing as a whole and in its various
parts is important to its clarity. Giving the reader at the outset
an understanding of what is to follow, constructing paragraphs?
see No. 4 above?so that each is a complete thought unit, arrang-
ing these paragraphs in logical order, placing important ideas in
important positions?all help the reader to get the message
clearly and quickly.)
6) Organize carefully, meticulously; in broad outline and in great
detail. Nothing promotes clarity so much as good organization.
b. Conciseness?An NIS section may be too long, not so much because
it covers too much ground but because it includes unnecessary detail, or because
it does not state thoughts in the simplest, most succinct possible way. Con-
ciseness must not sacrifice clarity; actually in many cases it will enhance it.
Conciseness may take a little more of the writer's time but it will save
time in review, in typing, and in reproduction. Most important, it will save
the reader time. Moreover, it may make the difference between a report being
read and its not being read.
3. Completeness
Obviously, this cannot mean absolutely all that can be written on the
subject. What then is meant by completeness? It means that all the known
informational requirements are fulfilled with appropriate generalizations and
with the right amount of detail. If needed information is not available, and
cannot be obtained within a reasonable time, these gaps are noted in the evalua-
tion of sources (and occasionally in the main body of the text). What is the
"right" amount of detail? There is no infallible guide. Recently published
sections must serve to some degree, but they are not necessarily good models.
In the last analysis good judgment based upon experience is the best guide.
Completeness has another aspect. An NIS report is complete when all of
its parts have been prepared. Most of these parts are specifically required;
others are optional to a degree. A section consists of all its textual parts, its
"front matter" (cover page, control page, table of contents, figure list, and
caption list) , its list of principal sources, its documentation, and any necessary
or desirable tables, graphics, maps, and photographs. A report is complete when
the right numbers and captions have been put on all these supplemental items
and they have been caretted into the text. A complete report in first draft
is a rare and wonderful thing to behold!
1..
3
Approved For Release 1999/09/21: CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
rI#T arl T1' 1-1 T el T A T TT rr
4. Objectivity
In order to serve its purpose an NIS section, like any other research report,
must be devoid of prejudice. The purpose of NIS is to provide policy makers
and operational officers with basic information of the greatest possible relia-
bility. The NIS is no place to develop a theory, advocate a policy, or indulge
one's emotions. Of course, every writer must constantly exercise judgment as
to the reliability of information at hand, its pertinency, and its meaning in a
broader perspective. The human mind being what it is, his judgment will be
influenced to some degree by his feelings. But it is the job of the analyst to
cultivate constantly an objective attitude, and in his writing to question con-
tinually whether or not he has permitted his own bias to creep into his selec-
tion of material and the generalizations he has made. In addition, he must
avoid words which might cause the reader to question his objectivity, and,
therefore, discount the value Of the report.
To insure objectivity one must ordinarily avoid judgments as to the wisdom
of any government action, any party's platform, or any leader's views or conduct.
He may analyze an economic policy, but it is not his function (in NIS) to say,
even by implication, that it is good or bad. He may suggest, for example, that
some policy will or will not tend to perpetuate an unbalanced budget, but
whether such an eventuality is good or bad may be a very debatable matter.
Similarly, in the sociological field, customs that seem peculiar or lacking in merit
may have great value to people in a culture different from ours. Objectivity
demands that one refrain from evaluating such a custom, except as he may
be able to do so in terms of the traditions, knowledge, opportunities, fears,
hopes, and aspirations of the people being discussed.
C. SPECIAL NIS REQUIREMENTS
1. General
It would be impossible to list here, much less discuss, all the many and
varied NIS requirements. Most of these have been stated in the Standard
Instructions, and in various editorial instructions on special problems, most of
which, because of their specialized nature, may not have general distribution.
NIS requirements may also be ascertained by the study of completed sec-
tions, preferably those that have been published in printed form. One may infer
from these sections what is regarded as appropriate interpretation of the re-
quirements set forth in the Standard Instructions. Any analyst beginning a
new section should profit by the study of one or more of these completed
documents, including usually the appropriate section on some country in his
own general area, and one on some similar country in another, area. This
is not to suggest that slavish adherence to previous writings is the road to
success, but a study of these documents should suggest the bounds within
which one must keep in following the relatively rigid NIS instructions. They
may be a stimulus to the imagination, too, in developing more definite ideas
as to what the statement of substantive requirements implies, or may reason-
ably be inferred to mean.
In the interpretation of NIS requirements a number of misconceptions
and problems seem to recur with much frequency. The following discussion
may be of some value in avoiding the more common pitfalls.
2. Special problems
a. The "dual purpose" problem?How can the NIS serve both to give
the reader a quick overall view of a situation and at the same time to provide
a reference for detailed information? It does this by organization. The com-
pleted NIS has a Chapter I (Brief) which summarizes the material of the
4
CI ry nritirrir A T TT Li r
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
remaining chapters. Each section of this chapter corresponds to one chapter
in the series. This is one of the principal ways that the broad perspective is
presented along with the detail, but it is available only when any particular
NIS approaches completion.
In a somewhat different way the general understanding is provided by the
introductory sections (such as 40, 50, and 60) in each chapter. These sections
are not so much summaries as introductions, presenting the basic factors and
situations needed to give the reader a brief overview of the society, its politics,
or its economy and thus enable him to grasp the significance of the details
presented in subsequent sections of the chapter.
Then in most chapters each section begins with an "A. General" which
does much the same thing for the section that the introductory section does
for the chapter. Thus, in the arrangement of the various component parts
one continues to move from the general to the particular. So it is in each
subsection and within each paragraph.
b. The problem of the "A. General"?The introductory first subsection
of an NIS section is probably the most difficult subsection to write. It is diffi-
cult because there is no clear-cut outline for it and there cannot be for the
simple reason that each "A. General" must be tailored to fit the factors, trends,
and developments peculiar to the country and to the subject of the section.
It should represent the author's own understanding of the country in relation
to the aspect of its life under discussion. The "A. General" is also difficult
because it calls for a high level of generalization, and because it must provide
the broad perspective needed to introduce diverse section subjects, such as man-
power, political dynamics, and trade and finance.
Although it does not seem advisable for the NIS instructions to provide
an outline for this subsection, it is recommended that in all cases the analyst
prepare an outline before he begins to write. Probably a discussion of this
outline with his branch chief or someone else experienced in NIS production
(such as the branch supervisor or the NIS Coordinator) would be profitable.
The outline might be compared with the structure and emphasis of several
completed "A. Generals" on the same subject.
Experience has shown that ordinarily it is better to draft the "A. General"
after the remainder of the section is completed. And incidentally, this is the
type of writing which few can do well in one draft. In most cases it should
represent two or three attempts based on the author's own critical appraisal
and reappraisal. It has been said that most first drafts should be consigned
to the wastebasket! It probably could be added that many second and third
drafts should have a similar fate. (Except for the most talented writers, re-
writing and revising should be considered normal procedure, not only for
"A. Generals," but also for other parts of the text.)
c. Comments on principal sources?This last subsection of an NIS re-
port is divided into two parts: 1) evaluation of sources and 2) list of principal
sources. The first includes statements on the adequacy and reliability of the
principal source material. It should also point out?and this is most often
forgotten or done in a casual way?the principal gaps in the available infor-
mation. Reviewers will be much less concerned about lack of information if
the "Comments" show that the analyst recognized the gaps, presumably did what
he could about them, and finally defined the shortcomings.
Lists of principal sources have frequently been too long. Emphasis should
be on the word principal. Official U.S. reports, such as telegrams, despatches,
and reports of various kinds are not ordinarily included in the list of principal
sources. They may be mentioned, if especially important, in the textual evalu-
ation of sources, and they may be referred to in the supplemental footnote
references which are prepared for our own files and not for publication.
mmaNiamaarm"""Timmilialliai14.11"....m 5
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
run .r 11 AIM
d. Incomplete sections?Completeness is discussed above, yet under "spe-
cial problems" it seems necessary to refer to this again. An accurate table of
contents should always accompany a manuscript. The proficient analyst will
endeavor also to submit with his manuscript appropriate graphics, maps, photo-
graphs, and tables, with a figure list and a caption list, and all material sup-
plementary to the text should be keyed in according to instructions. If a
draft section is complete, the review can be handled much more expeditiously.
e. Headings?NIS has a special system of headings which is rigidly
enforced. In the grade of headings and subheadings and in format no devia-
tion is permitted. For the rules and examples, see the Standard Instructions,
under the tab, Editorial Instructions, page 2 and insert on opposite page. Every
analyst should by all means study the sample pages given. He may also consult
printed sections. Since basically the NIS system is very simple, analysts can as
easily follow it as any other, and to do so will save time for the editor, the
analyst, and the typist.
3. Miscellaneous problems
a. Names
(1) Personal?Names of persons, when first mentioned, should be
given in full, with title, if any. Thereafter a shorter form, usually (in Spanish)
the primary surname, may be used. Spelling, if there is any doubt, should
be checked against Section 59, if there is one. Care should be exercised to
use accents as needed.
(2) Company?Names of companies should ordinarily be given in the
language of the country and all foreign company names should be underscored.
A translation should be given after the first mention of the name only if the
name has special significance that would not be readily apparent to the reader.
(3) Organizational?Names of labor unions and federations, business
and professional organizations, units of government, and similar associations
or entities are customarily given in the English translation, followed in paren-
theses at the first mention by the native name and initials, if the latter are
customarily used. Thereafter the initials of the foreign name may be used,
especially if well known.
(4) Geographic?The Board on Geographic Names (BGN) requires in
most cases the use of the foreign language form, such as Departamento de
Tolima, though the form "in the department of Tolima" apparently is acceptable
(note the small d in "department" which in this form is not a part of the
proper name). A well-established English spelling can be used in a few in-
stances (and is even required!) e.g., Havana. NIS gazetteers on each country
list and give the correct spelling of all foreign geographic names.
b. Capitalization?As simple as the rules sounded in grammar school,
this is a hard one! Correct capitalization like punctuation varies within fairly
large limits. In NIS the use of capitals in optional cases is discouraged. For
example, preferred usage seems to be about as follows: The President (of a coun-
try) , the Supreme Court, the Congress, the Senate, but the senators, and deputies
of the two houses of Congress, the district courts. Preferred also would be the
Cabinet, but cabinet ministers; the Minister of Agriculture, but the ministers
of Government and of Agriculture. In translating from Spanish, one should
remember that Latin Americans use capitals much more freely than do U.S.
writers. English usage should prevail, except in cases where the Spanish word
itself is used.
c. Consistency, repetition, and cross-referencing?NIS places a high value
on consistency. The analyst should not only make sure that his section is in-
ternally consistent, but he should also see that it is consistent with other sec-
6
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
V 11 I E. 1.1131:1 0 ITLI
tions on the same country. The latter rule is qualified to the extent that later,
or clearly more reliable, information may justify a factual change and/or a
different emphasis. A note to this effect should be included.
NIS frowns upon repetition, especially those things which appear repeti-
tious. Repetition, therefore, should be kept to a minimum consistent with the
required development of the given topics and parts of an NIS. If some fact
must be repeated, it should be put somewhat differently or introduced in such
a way as to indicate that the writer appreciates the fact that the reader has
seen this on some previous page. No section should repeat, verbatim, material
in another section, and repetition of such information in any form is generally
to be discouraged. Where the scope of one section seems to overlap with that
of another, it is usually best to make a general suggestive summary statement
and then cross-reference to the other section.
D. ADVANCE PLANNING AND POST-AUDIT
A complex research project requires careful planning in advance. This
preparation should involve first of all a study of the requirements for the sec-
tion being undertaken?not only a study of the Standard Instructions but also
a study of several sections already completed on the same subject. This should
be followed by 1) a brief study of the requirements of related other sections,
and 2) a review of sections already completed on the country under study. Ex-
cept possibly for the most experienced NIS writers, a few days spent in such
study should pay handsome dividends. It should greatly assist the analyst in
avoiding some of the pitfalls that now waste so much time.
Time could also be saved and a better section produced if an analyst, before
he begins to write, would prepare an outline of his project and with that in hand
consult with all appropriate office personnel. Meetings on the basis of such
an outline have in the past proved useful. (An analyst may find it necessary
to revise his outline as the job of writing progresses, but the writing should
always proceed with reference to some outline, and when finished should be
checked against an outline.)
An analyst should begin planning at an early date to request the appropriate
embassy for information which cannot be procured in Washington. Much em-
barrassment and delay may result from failure to anticipate such needs. (If a
trip to the country for on-the-spot research is in the budget the best time to go
in most instances is when a draft is nearing completion.)
The production of supplementary materials, such as maps and graphics,
should be planned so their completion coincides with the completion of the
manuscript. It is primarily the responsibility of the analyst to see that this is
done?it is an important part of producing a good NIS.
Finally, an analyst who is determined to produce a good NIS should never
send forward a manuscript to any reviewing officer until he has read it with the
greatest care. He should check it and recheck it, having in mind all the criteria
that have been suggested above. An analyst should be his own severest critic!
He cannot then be beholden (more than necessary) to any reviewing officer!
E. MAINTAINING A SCHEDULE
Recurrent production congestions at the end of each fiscal year, with a
variety of repercussions, have shown the need for careful planning and persistent
and determined efforts to maintain NIS schedules. Analysts should attempt to
appraise realistically the job they have to do-1) when the schedule is being
made (if they are available for consultation); 2) when the work is undertaken;
and 3) from time to time as the work progresses. For one reason or another,
almost all analysts underestimate the time that will be required to complete an
?-?? V N./ V 11 a. 7
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4
J. V lb L J. 1 .1. 6., .L U .7 1.1
NIS section. The job looks easy! It is not. A period of several months seems
like a long time! It is not?especially when there may be many interruptions.
Intensity of effort and the continual rejection of non-essential jobs and distrac-
tions are essential to the completion of the task on time. When major, unantici-
pated work intervenes a postponement of the deadline may become inevitable. If
such a change is necessary the record will look better if positive steps are taken
to fix a new target date.
Obviously there is some conflict between writing an excellent NIS section
and getting it done in accordance with the schedule. The suggestions made
throughout this paper are designed to resolve this conflict. To finish off a quick
draft and submit it for review only compounds the problem. It will take more
time in the long run. It is only through careful planning, efficient execution,
self-criticism, and a consistendy disciplined approach, that both excellence in
quality and conformity to schedules can be achieved.
In summary, there are three essentials to proper performance of NIS work:
(1) thorough research, (2) finished presentation, and (3) maintenance of sched-
ules. No two of these points are sufficient for excellence of performance. With-
out compliance with the first of these requirements, an adequate NIS cannot be
completed; without compliance with the second, the analyst is passing on to
others part of his responsibility; and without compliance with the third, the
analyst is not performing in the long run his expected load of NIS production
and is doing injury to the good name of the organization of which he is a member.
8
Approved For Release 1999/09/21 : CIA-RDP79-01055A000300030001-4